Planning Fundamentals For Industrial Piping Systems PDF

www.piping.georgfischer.
com
Our sales companies and representatives ensure local customer
support in over 100 countries.
The technical data are not binding and not expressly warranted characteristics
of the goods. They are subject to change. Our General Conditions of Sale apply.
Australia
George Fischer Pty Ltd
Riverwood NSW 2210 Australia
Phone +61(0)2/9502 8000
australia.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgefischer.com.au
France
Georg Fischer SAS
95932 Roissy Charles de Gaulle Cedex
Phone +33(0)1 41 84 68 84
fr.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgefischer.fr
Austria
Georg Fischer
Rohrleitungssysteme GmbH
3130 Herzogenburg
Phone +43(0)2782/856 43-0
austria.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.at
Germany
Georg Fischer GmbH
73095 Albershausen
Phone +49(0)7161/302-0
info.de.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.de
Belgium/Luxembourg
Georg Fischer NV/SA
1070 Bruxelles/Brssel
Phone +32(0)2/556 40 20
be.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.be
Brazil
George Fischer Ltda
04795-100 So Paulo
Phone +55(0)11/5687 1311
br.ps@georgfischer.com
China
Georg Fischer
Piping Systems Ltd Shanghai
Pudong, Shanghai 201319
Phone +86(0)21/58 13 33 33
china.ps@georgfischer.com
www.cn.piping.georgfischer.com
Denmark/Iceland
Georg Fischer A/S
2630 Taastrup
Phone +45 (0)70 22 19 75
info.dk.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.dk
India
Georg Fischer Piping Systems Ltd
400 076 Mumbai
Phone +91 224007 2001
in.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.in
Italy
Georg Fischer S.p.A.
20063 Cernusco S/N (MI)
Phone +3902/921 861
it.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.it
Japan
Georg Fischer Ltd
556-0011 Osaka,
Phone +81(0)6/6635 2691
jp.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.jp
Korea
Georg Fischer Piping Systems
Guro-3 dong, Guro-gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone +82(0)2 2081 1450
Fax +82(0)2 2081 1453
kor.ps@georgfischer.com
GMST 5989/4 (9.06) 50.00

Made with MediaCockpit
CH-8201 Schaffhausen/Switzerland, 2006
Printed in Germany
The FSC seal of approval is an independent confirmation that our wood
products originale from forests that are managed in a sustainable way, and
in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Forest Stewardship Council.
Malaysia
Georg Fischer (M) Sdn. Bhd.
40460 Shah Alam, Selangor
Phone +60 (0)3-5122 5585
conne.kong@georgfischer.com
Romania
Georg Fischer
Piping Systems Ltd
020257 Bucharest - Sector 2
Phone +40(0)21/230 53 80
ro.ps@georgfischer.com
Mexico
Georg Fischer S.A. de C.V.
Apodaca, Nuevo Leon
CP66636 Mexico
Phone +52 (81)1340 8586
Fax +52 (81)1522 8906
Russia
Moscow 125047
Tel. +7 495 258 60 80
ru.ps@georgfischer.com
Middle East
George Fischer Piping Systems
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Phone +971 4 289 41 20
gfdubai@emirates.net.ae
www.piping.georgfischer.com
Singapore
George Fischer Pte Ltd
528 872 Singapore
Phone +65(0)67 47 06 11
sgp.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgefischer.com.sg
Netherlands
Georg Fischer N.V.
8161 PA Epe
Phone +31(0)578/678 222
nl.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.nl
Spain/Portugal
Georg Fischer S.A.
28046 Madrid
Phone +34(0)91/781 98 90
es.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.es
Norway
Georg Fischer AS
1351 Rud
Phone +47(0)67 18 29 00
no.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.no
Sweden/Finland
Georg Fischer AB
12523 lvsj-Stockholm
Phone +46(0)8/506 775 00
info.se.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.se
Poland
Georg Fischer Sp. z o.o.
02-226 Warszawa
Phone +48(0)22/313 10 50
poland.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.pl
Switzerland
Georg Fischer
Rohrleitungssysteme (Schweiz) AG
8201 Schaffhausen
Phone +41(0)52 631 30 26
ch.ps@georgfischer.com
www.piping.georgfischer.ch
Taiwan
San Chung City, Taipei Hsien
Phone +886 2 8512 2822 Ext. 15
Fax +886 2 8512 2823
United Kingdom/Ireland
George Fischer Sales Limited
Coventry, CV2 2ST
Phone +44(0)2476 535 535
uk.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgefischer.co.uk
USA/Canada/Latin America/Caribbean
Georg Fischer LLC
Tustin, CA 92780-7258
Phone +1(714) 731 88 00
Toll Free 800/854 40 90
us.ps@georgfischer.com
www.us.piping.georgefischer.com
Export
Georg Fischer
Piping Systems (Switzerland) Ltd.
8201 Schaffhausen
Phone +41(0)52-631 30 26
Fax +41(0)52-631 28 93
export.ps@georgfischer.com
Planning Fundamentals Industry
GF Piping Systems
worldwide at home
Planning
Fundamentals
For Industrial
Piping Systems
Safe systems
adapted to your industry
Chemical Process Industry
Water Treatment
Chemical processes that modify or

change the properties of chemicals
and materials in order to make
or enhance required functions or
properties, including neutralisation
and cleaning.
A chemical and/or physical

process that modifies the
properties of water in order
to reduce their impact on
processes and the environment.
Ship Building
The total plastic solution for all noncritical systems on board a ship is
approved and supplied to shipyards all
over the world.
A cruise liner today is a floating city.
Life Science
The development, testing and
production of products in defined and
controlled conditions (laboratories).
Micro Electronics
Realisation of completely controlled
processes for conveyance, control,
measurement and equipment
for installation of piping systems
supporting critical and non-critical
process fluids in high tech factories,
which manufacture computer chips,
flat screen monitors and solar cells.
Cooling
The production, distribution and
storage of products related to food,
soft drinks and general beverages,
with a main focus on temperature
control for preservation.
Water & Gas Utilities

Solutions for water & gas
conducted, through new and
refurbished infrastructural pipe
systems, installed primarily
below ground.
Building Services
GF Piping Systems provides a
comprehensive solution for all
major piping systems in nonresidential buildings like hotels,
hospitals, industrial buildings and
leisure centres. The combination
of different material properties
secures optimised systems from
one supplier.
Table of Contents
We have what you need
Introduction
wherever you are

A global network of distributors your partners are our partners
GF Piping Systems
Our values
We put customers first
We act fast
We do what we say
Our Mission
We are dedicated to designing, manufacturing and
marketing piping systems for the safe and secure
conveyance of liquids and gases.
Pipes
Fittings
Jointing Technologies
Valves
Automation
Measurement and Control
Introduction to plastics
11
Materials used for industrial pipe work
27
Basics, terms, explanations
45
Market segments in industrial systems
91
Approvals and standards for industrial applications
101
Specification of GF Piping Systems products
120
Selecting your pipe material - Chemical resistance
121
Design of industrial piping systems
155
Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses
195
Processing and installations
201
Jointing technology
239
Introduction to fundamentals for valves
325
Fundamentals for ball valves, hand operated
331
Fundamentals for ball valves, electric actuated
413
Fundamentals for ball valves, pneumatic actuated
445
Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, hand operated
471
Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, pneumatic actuated
495
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, hand operated
523
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, electric actuated
579
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, pneumatic actuated
599
Fundamentals for angle seat valve, hand operated
617
Fundamentals for angle seat valves, pneumatic actuated
622
Fundamentals for solenoid valves
625
Fundamentals for check valves
629
One-stop shopping at GF Piping
Tailor-made solutions for any ap
Competent customer support
Fast delivery with our electronic
Fundamentals for special valves
647
Systems with over 40 000 prod
plication in which fluids or gases
worldwide with our own sales
inventory management system
ucts for diverse applications and
are conveyed, whether in building
and flexible production facilities.
Fundamentals for actuators
743
specialised markets: from pipes
technology, for water and gas
companies and representatives. We
Our logistics services are con
Fundamentals for measurement and control
845
and fittings to valves and measure
utilities or for industrial sectors.
tors in every country. They are our
sistently improved to satisfy our
Double containment
879
key partners when it comes to the
customers high demands.
System COOL-FIT TM
941
Training
952
General information
953
Index
961
ment instruments and the respec

tive jointing technologies.
always work with the best distribu
fast availability of our products.
Table of Contents
We have what you need
Introduction
wherever you are

A global network of distributors your partners are our partners
GF Piping Systems
Our values
We put customers first
We act fast
We do what we say
Our Mission
marketing piping systems for the safe and secure
conveyance of liquids and gases.
Pipes
Fittings
Jointing Technologies
Valves
Automation
Measurement and Control
11
Materials used for industrial pipe work
27
45
91
101
120
121
155
Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses
195
201
Jointing technology
239
Introduction to fundamentals for valves
325
331
Fundamentals for ball valves, electric actuated
413
Fundamentals for ball valves, pneumatic actuated
445
471
Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, pneumatic actuated
495
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, hand operated
523
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, electric actuated
579
Fundamentals for butterfly valves, pneumatic actuated
599
Fundamentals for angle seat valve, hand operated
617
Fundamentals for angle seat valves, pneumatic actuated
622
Fundamentals for solenoid valves
625
629
One-stop shopping at GF Piping
Tailor-made solutions for any ap
Competent customer support
Fast delivery with our electronic
647
Systems with over 40 000 prod
plication in which fluids or gases
worldwide with our own sales
inventory management system
ucts for diverse applications and
are conveyed, whether in building
and flexible production facilities.
Fundamentals for actuators
743
specialised markets: from pipes
technology, for water and gas
companies and representatives. We
Our logistics services are con
Fundamentals for measurement and control
845
and fittings to valves and measure
utilities or for industrial sectors.
tors in every country. They are our
sistently improved to satisfy our
Double containment
879
key partners when it comes to the
customers high demands.
System COOL-FIT TM
941
Training
952
General information
953
Index
961
ment instruments and the respec

tive jointing technologies.
always work with the best distribu
fast availability of our products.
Content
Planning Fundamentals Industry
Introduction
Page
9
21
Materials used for pipe work
31
45
81
91
109
Selecting your pipe material - chemical resistance
110
Design of metric industrial piping systems
147
Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses of metric industrial piping systems
179
Installation of metric industrial piping systems
189
Jointing technology
233
Planning fundamentals for valves
301
317
Fundamentals for ball valves electric actuated
377
Fundamentals for ball valves pneumatically actuated
391
409
Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, pneumatically actuated
423
Fundamentals for butterfly valve, hand operated
447
Fundamentals for butterfly valves electric actuated
471
Fundamentals for butterfly valves pneumatically actuated
489
Fundamentals for angle seat valve
509
Solenoid valves
513
523
543
Special fittings
599
Fundamentals for actuators of hand valves
613
Fundamentals for Measurement and Control
703
Double containment system - CONTAIN-IT Plus
777
System COOL-FIT
833
System iJOINT
857
Introduction
Disclaimer
Page
10
Foreword
11
Overview
12
Georg Fischer
13
GF Piping Systems
14
Quality, environmental and social policies
-- Introduction
-- Quality assurance at all levels
-- Environment
-- Social policies
15
15
15
16
Training
17
Accredited test centre for components used in plastic piping systems
18
Introduction
Disclaimer
The technical data is not binding.They neither constitute expressly warranted characteristics nor guaranteed
properties nor guarateed durability. They are subject to
modification.
Our General Terms of Sale apply.
10
Foreword
This technical handbook reflects more than50 years of

expertise in the design and manufacture of plastic piping systems. In 1956, GF Piping Systems started with
the first production of PVC-U fittings. Since then, our
product range of pipes, fittings and valves has been
greatly expanded and many new materials have been
introduced.
With this handbook, we are proud to pass on our extensive knowledge to you as our valued customer, thus assuring optimal safety and reliability through the correct
installation and use of GF Piping Systems products.
In general we can offer suitable products for all required
applications. This comprehensive handbook will aid you
to choose the solution best suited to your requirements.
This document of planning fundamentals has been designed to be a comprehensive aid for selecting the correct product from our wide range.
The document was put together by many of our experienced colleagues with utmost attention to detail, quality
and understanding.
Best regards
Michael Weyer
Schaffhausen, Switzerland
11
Overview
This technical manualwill provide you with all the important data for the planning, product selection, processing,
installation and commissioning of pressure pipelines in
industrial applications.
This data is based on the relevant international ISO
and EN standards, on various national standards, DVS
guidelines and additional data from piping manufacturers.
Furthermore, the results of comprehensive inhouse testshave been included.
It is our intention to assistsystem planners, engineers
and installers in designing and installing the complex
system "pipeline" correctly.
This technical document comprises the following:
Materials used in industrial piping work
Basics, terms and explanations
Approvals and standards
Hydraulic calculations and pressure loss
Jointing technology
Planning fundamentals for hand-operated and actuated valves
Planning fundamentals for measurement and control
systems
Double containment
Training
General information
Data on products for plastic sanitary installations and for

gas and water supply are contained in separate technical handbooks. Information on metal piping systems
12
is given in the catalogues for malleable iron fittings,

Primofit and WAGA joints for non-threaded metal and
plastic pipes. For further information please contact your
local or national representative.
Georg Fischer
Adding Quality to Peoples

Lives
People all over the world
rely on the commitment of
Georg Fischer to satisfy
their needs today and tomorrow.
Comfort
A reliable supply of clean water is becoming a crucial
challenge. GF Piping Systems makes the worldwide
supply of drinking water easier and enables the transport of liquids for industrial purposes.
Mobility
People are increasingly mobile, and they have ever
greater demands for comfort and safety in their vehicles. With its highly stress-resistant cast parts made of
light metal and iron, GF Automotive productsmakes it
possible to build passenger and commercial vehicles
that are both lightweight and safe.
Precision
Series production of consumer goods and quality components requires extreme precision and demanding
manufacturing technologies. The necessary moulds,
tools and parts are produced with machines and system solutions from GF AgieCharmilles.
13
GF Piping Systems
GF Piping Systems is one of the three businesses unitsof the Georg Fischer Corporation and a leading supplier of piping systems in plastic and metal with a global
market presence.
marketing piping systems for the safe and secure conveyance of liquids and gases.
One-stop shopping at GF Piping Systems with over
50000 products for diverse applications and specialised
markets: from pipes and fittings to valves and measurement instruments and their respective jointing technologies. Tailor-made solutions for any application in which
fluids or gases are conveyed, whether for industrial systems, in building technology or for water and gas utilities.
Sales companies in 20 countries and representatives in
another 80 countries ensure customer support roundthe-clock.
Manufacturing sites in Europe, Asia and the US are
near the customers and meet local requirements. All
components and systems comply with the applicable
standards in each market area and are tested in accredited test laboratories.
Our own distribution centre together with e-commerce
and information technology ensure rapid delivery.
We are your partner for the safe and secure conveyance of liquids and gases
The requirements placed on piping systems are as diverse and demanding as the applications in which they
are implemented. Here you can find a selection of market segments where we offer solutions. Our wide range
of systems can also be used in many other applications.
Please contact us for more information.
14
Quality, environmental and social

policies
Introduction
Quality,environment and social policiesare a major concern of the Georg Fischer Corporation. Approximately 90 % of the13600 persons employed at the end of
2011 worked in corporate subsidiaries with quality management systems certified to internationally recognised
standards such as ISO 9001. We create competitive advantages for ourselves and our customers with consistent quality tailored to their needs and continuous improvements to business processes.
Our products achieve increasingly higher ecological efficiency. This means that products are becoming more
efficient while the impact on the environment in the production and utilisation phase remains the same or is reduced. Plastic piping systems from GF are lightweight
totransport, corrosion-resistant and durable. They protect drinking water, a valuable resource, all the way
from its source to individual homes.
Quality assurance at all levels

Improvement process
Your experiences with our products and services help
us to continuously improve our scope of performance
and to react quickly to your needs. Our employees are
fully behind this concept with their know-how and expertise.
Customer satisfaction
This and more we offer for your benefit:
Complete systems for a wide spectrum of applications
Reliable, high-quality products
Comprehensive service: customer support and training, fusion machine rentals, planning tools
We fulfil the various technical requirements: international standards, approvals required for specific countries and applications
Effective logistics
Quality planned, manufactured and tested
You can expect consistent quality from us at all levels.
Dynamic research and development
The most modern production technology with integrated quality control in our plants
Accredited test laboratory according to ISO/IEC
17025
A certified management system according to ISO 9001
is essential in reaching our uppermost goal: customer
satisfaction.
Environment
Application know-how for a clean environment
Our wealth of expertise in plastic piping systems applications has always been exercised with regard to a
clean environment.
ABS for the conveyance of environmentally friendly
cooling agents in refrigeration
Secondary containment systems for increased safety
of persons and the environment when conveying aggressive media
Better energy efficiency with plastics as compared to
other pipe materials
Value added for the customer
We aim to understand and meet customer requirements
regarding environmentally friendly products and services, and in doing so are a competent partner for environmentally conscientious customers.
We achieve this by designing products and production
processes which are compatible with environmental requirements and also by communicating intensively with
our customers to understand whattheir needs are and
adjusting our performance accordingly.
Environmental management
Our environmental management systemenables us to:
handle environment-related questions professionally
control risks
continuously evaluate and improve processes, products and services
15
ISO 14001 certification is only just the beginning. We

are committed to evaluating and improving our environmental performance on a regular basis.
Social policies
Responsibility in all areas
Reporting
At the end of 2005, the Corporation for the first time systematically collected and evaluated detailed information on the workforce, terms of employment, health and
safety in the workplace, training and continuing development. This project is being managed by the Corporate
Sustainability Officer, who reports directly to the Head
of Corporate Planning and therefore to a member of the
Executive Committee. The results will be used as the
basis for setting targets and defining any necessary improvements.
Employees
Well-qualified, highly trained and dedicated employees
are a key factor for Georg Fischers success. Interesting
tasks, in-depth training, attractive pay and social benefits are just as important as a responsible attitude to employees, even in an intensely competitive and difficult
business environment.
Employee development
Georg Fischers continuing personal and professional
development programmes range from apprenticeships
to further training courses for employees and managers
and seminars for senior management. By providing focused development opportunities, we keep our employees fit for the job, which in turn improves both their career prospects and our competitiveness.
16
Employee satisfaction surveys

Georg Fischer carries out regular employee satisfaction surveys. In one year, some 4000 employees were
asked to provide feedback. The responses of employees, employee representatives and management, were
then used as the basis for plans of action with clearly
defined responsibilities. These are now inimplementation ideas management has also played an important
role for the improvement of work processes for many
years. Furthermore, working conditions at almost every
location have been improved by installing lifting equipment, reducing noise and particle emissions, replacing
and/orreducing hazardous substances and other measures.
Training
Invest in the training of your employees
Qualified personnel is one of the key factors for the success of a company.
Only skilled employees with the appropriate know-how
and customer focus are reliable partners.
We offer you an interesting training experience
GF Piping Systems, as a professional system and solution provider, offers you training courses with afocus
on products, applications, sales arguments and different
customer requirements.
The jointing technologies, as well as measurement and
control technologyare increasingly innovative. To stay
up-to-date, you needcontinuing education.
GF Piping Systems contributes essentially to your
know-how. No matter what your expert field may be
utilities, building technology or industrial applications
you can benefit from the training courses, which are
adapted to the different market segments and applications.
We offer a customised programme for salespersonnel
and occupational groups like installers, planners and
constructors. Besides the theory, we attach great importance to hands-onpractice. Our rooms are especially equipped for practical training. They are suitable for
simultaneous training of up to 100 persons under ideal
conditions.
For the choice of trainers, we work closely with our
sales staff. There are Basic, Advanced and Master
Courses covering the full spectrum of issues. More information about our current training program:
http://www.piping.georgfischer.com
17
Accredited test centre for components used in plastic piping systems

General
approvals and quality certificates etc.. Therefore, potential expenditure and time consumption is considerably
reduced.
A testing laboratory which is an officially accredited

test centre for components used in piping systems
accredited to ISO/IEC 17025.
The Georg Fischer testing laboratory is fully equipped
to perform the most diverse tests on products used in
piping systems such as pipes, fittings, manual and automatic valves, flow meters and other pipeline components in accordance with relevant standards as well as
own and external test specifications.
Contracts for test laboratory programmes are executed
on behalf of research and development departments,
manufacturing plants, end-users of GF Piping Systems
components as well as for authoritative organisations.
Development and product release tests are completed
for R & D departments (TT type testing, ITT initial type
testing), batch release tests (BRT) and process verification tests (PVT) for our own production units as well as
other test programmes for outside companies.
The experience and competence of our personnel, the
high standard of continuous education, the technical
level of our test facilities and equipment as well as the
well-documented recording of laboratory procedures
answer all fundamental prerequisites for an ISO/IEC
17025 accreditation. The accreditation through the SAS
(Schweizerische Akkreditierungsstelle) is verified by a
certificate. A reassessment for the accreditation is made
on an annual basis whilst a re-accreditation inspection
is implemented every 5 years.
The accredited test programme also includes:

Long-term internal pressure testing (EN ISO 10931,
EN ISO 15493, EN ISO 15494, ISO 9393)
Burst tests on fittings and pipes
Flattening tests (ISO 9853)
Impact resistance tests (ISO 8085, ISO 13957)
Decohesion test
Peeling test (ISO 13954)
Tensile strength and failure mode on butt-fused test
specimens (ISO 13953)
Pressure drop test (EN 12117)
Determination of density (EN ISO 1183)
Melt flow rate (EN ISO 1133)
Oxidation induction time OIT (EN 728)
A complete listing of accredited tests can be seen in
a table. This table, which is constantly updated, can
be referred to by consulting the following internet site:
www.sas.ch =>Accredited bodies =>Search =>STS
094.
The SAS, which is responsible for and has issued our

accreditation, is a member of the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC). All laboratories
accredited by the ILAC are obliged to formally recognise any test report issued by a fellow member. This
permits us, and our customers, to use all accredited test
reports originating from our laboratory to obtain product
18
Test laboratory certificate
19
20
-- History
-- Structure of plastics
-- The raw material
-- The production of plastics
-- Classification of plastics
-- Comparison of thermoplastics, thermosets and elastomers
-- Relevant properties of thermoplastics
-- Processing of plastics
-- Plastics and the environment
Page
22
22
22
22
23
25
26
27
28
21
The raw material
History
As early as 1838 Viktor Regnault succeeded in producing polyvinylchloride in a laboratory by exposing
vinylchloride to the sun.
In 1912 Fritz Klatte discovered the fundamentals for the
practical production of PVC.
During theWorld WarI,plastics, which were still new,
had to replace other materials falling into short supply.
They were then sometimes overspecified with respect
to their application. Therefore, plastics needed to be improved. It was necessary to scrutinise the internal structure of these new materials closely.
Only in 1938 did the production of plastics in any, significantvolume begin, when the numerous application
possibilities had been recognised.
Raw materials for the manufacture of plastics are natural compounds, such as cellulose, coal, petroleum and
natural gas. In a refinery, petroleum is separated into
several components by means of distillation. Grouped
into evaporisation ranges, gas, benzene, petroleum,
gaseous oil, and as a residue bitumen are obtained during distillation.
All components consist of hydrocarbons which only differ in size and form of the molecules. The most important component for plastics production is crude benzene.
In a heat cracking process this crude benzene is broken
down into ethylene, propylene, butylene and other hydrocarbons and is then modified.
The production of plastics
Structure of plastics
Ethylene-Monomer
Butylene-Monomer
Heating 32 %
Traffic 41%
Other 7 %
Industry 10 %
Chemicals 10 %
incl. 6 % Plastics
Plastics are manufactured bycompounding together

large number of similar basic components (monomers)
through chemical bonding.
Plastics are materials which are created by chemical

conversion of natural products or in a synthetic manner
from organic compounds. The main components are
the elements carbon (C) and hydrogen (H). The basis
of most plastics are carbon-hydrogen compounds,
from which the single components of plastics, the socalled monomers , are produced.
1)
2)
3)
1) Synthesis: production of a chemical compound from

different elements or simple molecules. Synthesis is the
opposite of analysis.
2) Organic media are pure non-metals of natural occurrence, e. g. petroleum, coal, wood, natural gas. Inorganic media are compounds of metal and non-metals, e .g.
minerals, ores etc.
3) Monomers are the basic molecules, i. e. the smallest
components of which plastics are built.
22
The plastic industry only consumes approximately 6 %

of the petroleum products originating from refineries.
In Germany the chemical industry uses approximately 10 % of the entire crude oil consumption and this includes 6 % for plastics.
To produce plastics three different processes are used:
Polymerisation
Polycondensation
Polyaddition
Polymerisation
Polycondensation is applied, for example, to produce

phenolic resins and polyamids.
Polyaddition
During polyaddition macromolecules are created from

chemically different molecules, however without separating a by-product.
The procedure is used for the production of
polyurethanes and exposed resins (e. g. Araldit).
Classification of plastics
Monomer: Ethylene
Macromolecule chain: Polyethylene
Polymerisation process -->Energy, Catalist, Additives
Polymerisation is the most frequently used procedure

for the synthesis of plastics. Polymerisation means the
lining up of macromolecule chains without separation
of foreign matter.
For example polyethylene, polybutene, polypropylene,
polyvinylchloride and other plastics are all produced by
means of polymerisation.
Examples:
Plastics
are subdivided into three
main groups:
Thermoplastics
Thermosets
Elastomers
Thermoplastics
are again divided into:
amorphous
semi-crystalline
Thermosets
are divided into:
Thermoelastics
Resins
Elastomers
are divided into:
Synthetic caoutchouc
(rubber)
Distinction of plastics
In the production process, the procedure and the addition of additives (stabilisers, catalists, fibres, slip additives, etc.) create macromolecules with different basic
structures.
Thermoplastics
Thermoplastics consist of long filamentary molecules

with or without branches.
Ethylene C2H4
Polyethylene
Filamentary molecules without branches
Filamentary molecules with branches
Polycondensation
During polycondensation similar and dissimilar

monomers are lined up to become macromolecule
chains, at the same time separating a by product, e. g.
water, hydrochloric acid, etc.
23
These filamentary molecules can be arranged as follows:

amorphous, i. e. in
an inordinate structure
or
semi-crystalline
, i. e. in a partially
ordinate structure
Crystallisation is
increased by slow
cooling.
hardness, melting temperature and a lower E modulus.

However they exhibit higher impact resistance, elongation at rupture and thermal expansion.
Semi-crystalline thermoplastics are more suited for fusion jointing than amorphous thermoplastics which are
ideal for solvent cement jointing.
- - - - amorphous -------- semi-crystalline
crystalline
amorphous
Semi-crystalline
thermoplastics are
polyolefines, for
example:
Tensile strength
Strain %
Amorphous thermoplastics are

styrenes and vinyl
chlorides, for example:
PE Polyethylene
PVC Polyvinylchloride
PB Polybutene
PS Polystyrene
PP Polypropylene
PC Polycarbonate
Strain
Temperature
Thermoplastics are plastics with simple or branched filamentary molecules (macromolecules) which have an inordinate or partially ordinate structure. They distort during heating, melt and solidify again on cooling. This process can be repeated at all times. They can be plastically deformed, distended and recovered. Due to these
properties, thermoplastics are suited for injection-moulding, extrusion and fusion.
Plastic deformation is the processing of a material by
means of e. g. injection moulding, extrusion etc.
Distension is the longitudinal or longitudinal and
transversal stretching of amorphous molecule chains to
improve the material properties.
The recovery ability is the memory behaviour of a material where the material is melted by heating and recover again in the original order during the cooling phrase.
Polyolefines belong to the semi-crystalline thermoplastics group. Compared with amorphous thermoplastics
(e. g. PVC-U, PVC-C) they show less tensile strength,
24
Thermal expansion
Temperature
Thermosets
By means of a hardener the polymer chains of the fluid

and solid thermoset resins are cross-linked. Thermosets
which have been hardened in this way cannot be melted, fused or deformed.
Thermosets are normally reinforced with glass, textile or

carbon fibres and other filling materials.
PF Phenolic resin
EP Epoxy resin
UP Polyester resin
GFK Glass fibre plastic
CFK Carbon-fibre plastic
GF-EP Glass-fibre epoxy resin
Wide meshed, low cross-linked elastomer net
CF-PF Carbon-fibre phenolic resin
Comparison of thermoplastics, thermosets

and elastomers
Elastomers
Elastomers are rubber-elastic plastics, also called "synthetic caoutchouc. In contrast to thermosets, the network has a large mesh width. By means of vulcanisation
aids the polymer chains are cross-linked. The amount of
the cross-links, determines the hardness (the hardness
is indicated in Shore degrees of hardness) of the rubber.
The elastomer is very elastic, can not be melted, is not
fusible, can be deformed, but not reshaped.
Elastomers are for example
NR Natural rubber
EPDM Ethylene propylene rubber
CR Chloroprene rubber
SI Silicone rubber
FPM Fluorocarbon rubber
Filamentary molecules
Amorphous
Semi-crystalline
Space-net molecules, close-meshed
Space-net molecules, wide-meshed
Thermoplastic
Thermoset
Elastomer
Thermoplastics
repeated melting
fusible
the amount of crystallites determines the density and
mechanical properties
under strong mechanical stress they tend to creep
and show lasting deformation
the strength value decreases with increased heating
can be transformed and deformed several times
25
Thermosets
do not melt
cannot be fused
number of links is decisive for mechanical properties
can be deformed under mechanical load, but regain
their original form after load is removed
only behave elastically in a relatively narrow upper
temperature range, therefore more heat stable
can only be deformed once
Elastomers
do not melt
cannot be fused
number of links is decisive for the rubber hardness
can be strongly deformed under mechanical stress
remain elastic down to low temperatures
Relevant properties of thermoplastics

Compared to conventional materials, plastics offer the
following general advantages:
low weight
high elasticity
chemical resistance
low heat conduction
smooth surfaces
low density = low weight
chemical resistance = no corrosion like known from met-

als
low heat conductivity = small thermal loss
Plastic 0.9- 1.5 g/cm

Metals link with oxygen and rust, except for stainless and
acids-resistant steel.
Plastics are poor heat conductors, but good insulators

Thermal conductivity:
PB
0.22
W/m K
PE
0.38
W/m K
PVC
0.15
W/m K
Due to the poor thermal conductivity of plastic, less condensation occurs than with metal pipes.
high elasticity
Resistant against impact and bending stresses.
abrasion resistance
Approximately four times more abrasion resistant than steel

pipelines.
leakproof connections
Plastics can be fused, solvent-cemented and compression

jointed.
Fusion connections and solvent-cemented joints can be
made which are absolutely leakproof without any additional
components.
smooth surface
Smooth surfaces ensure low pressure losses and no encrustation.
expansion
Plastics react more to temperature changes than metals. The

longitudinal expansion of plastics is approx. 10 to 20 times
greater than that of steel.
behaviour in fire
Most thermoplastics are combustible. Classification is made

according to the standard material fire test.
electrically nonconducting
No electrolytic corrosion
sun rays
Some plastics are sensitive to UV rays and have to be protected - however, resistance to weathering is good.
little condensation
26
Processing of plastics
Plastics are processed differently depending on the material and application. Some common methods are:
Extrusion
Compression moulding
Injection moulding
Foaming
Extrusion
In this process thermoplastic material is melted and is

continuously forced through a tool via a worm screw.
The extruded bar is then calibrated, cools down and is
withdrawn via a take-off unit.
Driving motor
Material supply
Extruder
Plasticizing worm
Electric heat strips
Die
Calibration device
Cooling tank
Take-off unit
Injection moulding
Ejection of the finished part
Compression moulding
Thermosetting material is poured into the open compression mould in powder form. Under the impact of the
mould pressure and heat, it then chemically reacts and
solidifies to the desired finished part.
Pressure cylinder
Mounting plates for both halves of the pressure mould
Fill in
Press
Ejection
Thermoplastic material in granular or powder form is

gradually melted in the cylinder and the mass is injected by means of the worm screw into a mould under high
pressure. The plastic then solidifies and is ejected from
the mould as a finished part.
Hydraulic mould closing cylinder
Mounting plates for both halves of the injection mould
Cylinder with injection nozzle
Electric cylinder heating
Material conveyor
Driving motor for worm screw
Steam foaming
Foam machine
Injection
27
material requires an amount of energy which is given in

kilograms oil equivalent per litre material in the chart below.
Mould closing cylinder
Mounting plates for both mould halves
Injector to blow in the pre-foamed material
Granular plastic containing a blowing agent is injected into the mould, expanded by means of hot steam,
cooled with water and ejected from the foam mould as
an extremely light weight part. Water absorption is impossible as all pores are closed.
Foaming mould
Plastics, e. g. PE/PP/PB/PVC
Steel
Copper
Aluminium
Recycling
Although plastics make up only 6 % ofoil consumption,

the conclusion is that the energy value of plastic must
be used. There are two possibilities of recycling:
reutilisation, production of new products
combustion, production of thermal energy.
In the case of reutilisation the plastic waste is brought
back to its original form in different procedures (hydrolysis, pyrolysis, regranulation).
At GF, production waste is regranulated and integrated
into the production process of products with lower quality and hygienic requirements than that of pipes and fittings.
Mould cavity
Injector
Compressed air
Pre-foamed granulates
Steam
Cooling water
Steam nozzles
Cooling water outlet
All thermoplastics are recyclable, e. g. PE, PP, PB,

PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS or PVDF. This is, however, not
the case for thermosetting plastics and thermoelastomers such as PE-X.
Plastics and the environment

Using plastics means saving energy
Plastics constitute only a small percentage of the entire crude oil usage. But crude oil resources are limited.
Already today we have to fall back upon raw materials
which can be recycled and extend alternative energy
sources. In this context we talk about re-usable raw materials.
All working processes need energy (heat, pressure, motor power). In comparison with metals, manufacturing
plastics requires less energy. The production of 1 dm
3
28
Incineration together with domestic waste (no PVDF)

does not pose any problems. In this case we talk about
energy recycling, as almost all incineration plants recover waste heat. For example in Germany the annual
plastic waste incinerated in this way supplies as much
energy as 500 000 t of heating oil.
Thermal value of different materials

PE/PP/PB
44000 kJ/kg
Heating oil
44000 kJ/kg
Coal
29000 kJ/kg
PVC/PVC-C
19000 kJ/kg
Paper
16800 kJ/kg
Wood
16000 kJ/kg
Domestic waste
8000 kJ/kg
The production of corrosive combustion products is

not possible in the case of polyolefines (PE, PP, PB)
and ABS as halogens (e. g. chlorine) are missing in the
molecular structure. In the case of PVC-U, PVC-C and
PVDF special scrubbing towers are installed.
Plastics as well as other materials cannot be transformed into nothing,so disposal in waste dumps is
not the solution. This is why the use of recyclable and
energy recyclable plastics should be promoted.
Reflections on pipeline work
Planning and installation of piping systems is a true engineering task, necessitating the organisation of a multitude of requirements and goals. For piping installations,
simple, critical and aggressive media in each case require suitable materials. The idea is to especially cover
the requirements of functionality, operating safety, optimal service life, environmental conditions and adequate
profitability. Included in this are overall ecological, technical and economic assessments. High-performance
plastics for piping installations, such as those, which
you can obtain from our company, are proven and implementable where special endurance problems in connection with the media need solving.
Environmental protection is an important responsibility
affecting us all. Each one of us, businesses and industrial concerns alike have to meet this great challenge.
We at Georg Fischer actively pursue these responsibilities in the development of our products as well as for investments in our production facilities. In 1992 our company was distinguished within the scope of a competition for ecologically sound technology by the Environmental Protection Minister.
Our manufacturing plant is systematically analysed in
accordance with strict criteria for improving environmental protection and updated accordingly. In this sector we
have had outstanding success, which our customers
can themselves appraise on-site.
Political approaches or one-sided evaluations of individual aspects of materials, products and processes for
piping installations do not lead to intelligent solutions.
Only comprehensive and objective as well as comparative balancing of accounts can bring us forward at any
one time. In this respect, ecological balance is especially useful.
In the following we present an ecological balance for
plastic piping installations:
Ecological balance for plastic piping systems

Passive
Raw material requirements
Energy requirements
Impact on:
- hygienically safe
- air
- water
- disposal
Profit:
- economic
- technical
- ecological
Active
Applications
Product use
- long service life
- proven in practice
- good recycling characteristics
- high chemical resistance
properties
- simple handling
- negligible piping losses
- cost-effective
If one analyses the individual positions of such an ecological balance, it can be demonstrably established that
plastic piping systems are not only economical, but also
technically and especially ecologically profitable when
compared with other material systems.
Following many years of research, Prof. Georg Menges
has concluded that: Consistent environmental protection would intrinsically require that crude oil be first processed to plastic for use as commodity goods wherever
possible and only then be allowed to be burned.
We have inhouse a PVC-U sample pipe that was installed in Hamburg in 1937.The PVC pipes were joined
using bonding agents. The system was operated at 4 to
6 bar. The material was used to supply drinking water to
the public and was, without exception, successful. Even
after this long operational period, there was no evidence
of incrustation or deposits.
Currently PVC, besides polyethylene, is the most important material of consideration which, because of its versatility, is not achieved by any other raw material. Piping components of PVC have attained such great significance that not using them in many applications is no
longer imaginable. Even in the case of public criticism
from various sources, assertions and facts have been
known to deviate greatly from one another.
During PVC manufacture, pool concentrations of all
dangerous intermediate products are abided by or only handled in closed systems, allowing the exclusion of
risks to employees. During PVC processing, all effective industrial safety regulations are clearly improved
upon and, with lowered energy requirements, the impact on the environment is additionally reduced. Owing
to their chemical stability, PVC products are completely
non-toxic in normal use, are suitable for use with food,
and are used in applications involving blood conservation and dialysis. Tin is used as a stabiliser for our PVC
materials so that risks associated with heavy metals are
not a consideration.
It is frequently claimed that during fires additional hazards from PVC exist for those in the immediate area.
Intensive fire testing has been carried out with PVC.
Building fires can also set fire to the difficult-to-ignite
and self-extinguishing PVC. PVC, however, does not
contribute to the spread of the fire. In cases of fire, the
fumes are always toxic, regardless of the type of material burning. The greatest danger in a fire arises from the
production of highly poisonous carbon monoxide gas.
From an insurance viewpoint, PVC is handled in the
29
same manner as other customary construction materials. Dioxins/furans have been shown to be produced in
all combustion processes. PVC components have even
been shown to play a subordinate role.
If all the positions of the above ecological balance are
taken into account, then the conclusion is that currently there are no acceptable substitutions for PVC piping
installations. PVC and the other high-performance plastics have many positive and few critical characteristics
from an ecological viewpoint. If you would like more information about these considerations, our specialists
would be happy to be of service to you.
Recycling possibilities
30
The material acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS)
Page
32
The material polyethylene (PE)
34
The material polypropylene (PP)
36
The material polyvinyl chloride unplasticized (PVC-U)
38
The material polyvinyl chloride chlorinated (PVC-C)
40
The material polyvinylidenefluoride (PVDF)
42
31

The material acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS)
ABS properties (reference values)
Characteristics
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
1.035
g/cm
ISO 1183-1
Yield stress at 23 C
40
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
Tensile e-modulus at 23 C
1600
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
Charpy notched impact strength at 23 C
42
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
Charpy notchedimpact strength at -40 C
10
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
Ball indentation hardness(358N/30s)
87
MPa
EN ISO 2039-1
Heat distortion temperature HDT A 1.82 MPa
74
EN ISO 75-2
Vicat-heat distortion temperature B/50N
94
ISO 306
Heat conductivity at 23 C
0.17
W/m K
EN 12664
Water absorption at 23 C
0.45
EN ISO 62
Colour
similar 7001
RAL
Limiting oxygen index (LOI)
19
ISO 4589-1
*) Typical values measured on the material. These values should not be used for design purposes.
General
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) is a versatile

standard polymer. In addition to its application in piping
systems, ABS is mainly common in automotive applications and in high-quality household devices.
The wide area of application relates to the versatile
characteristic profile of ABS. It can be adapted to the
application by varying the composition of its three components: acrylonitrile, styrene and polybutadiene.
While acrylonitrile provides strength to the material
and gives ABS an improved chemical resistance relative to polystyrene, the styrenic component provides
both strength and a quality surface finish. The chemically bound polybutadiene-rubber particles, on the other hand, give the material its toughness and impact
strength, even at very low temperatures.
The ABS used by GF shows a good balance between
toughness and strength, making it especially suitable for
low temperature applications. Accordingly the areas of
application are mainly refrigeration and air-conditioning
systems as well as water treatment.
The advantages of ABS include:
high impact strength even at low temperatures
corrosion resistance
simple installation via solvent cement joints
low heat conductivity
halogen free
32
non-toxic
biologically inert; no support of microbial growth
low weight
low pressure losses due to smooth surfaces
good abrasion resistance
problem-free recycling
Chemical resistance
ABS shows a good resistance against a broad range of

media. For more details please refer to the chemical resistance table. Specific questions can be addressed to
the responsible sales company.
Application limits
The application limits of the ABS material on the one

hand depend on embrittlement and softening temperatures on the other hand on the nature and the expected
service life of the application. The p-T- diagrams gives
details on application temperatures and pressures.
Combustion behaviour
ABS self-ignites at temperatures exceeding 450 C/

842F. ABS burns when exposed to an open flame. After removing the flame, the material continues burning.
The oxygen index amounts to 19 %. (Materials that burn

with less than 21 % of oxygen in the air are considered
to be flammable).
According to UL-94, ABS has a HB (Horizontal Burning) flammability coefficient and falls into building material class B2 (conventional inflammable, non-dripping)
according to DIN 4102-1. Basically, toxic substances
are released by all burning processes. Carbon monoxide is generally the combustion product most dangerous to humans. When ABS burns, primarily carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and water are formed. Tests have
shown that the relative toxicity of the products of combustion are similar or even lower than those of natural
products such as wood, wool and cotton. ABS combustion gases are not corrosive. Nevertheless, the burning forms soot. Because of this, smoke develops during
combustion. Water, foam and carbon dioxide are suitable fire-fighting agents.
Electrical properties
ABS has good electrical insulation capacity. The specific volume resistance is 3.5 x 10 cm and the specific
surface resistance is 10 . These figures have to be
taken into account wherever there is a danger of fires or
explosion.
16
13
Physiological properties
Formulations used by GF are in general non toxic and

biologically inert. For details regarding existing approvals for applications with drinking water or food stuff
please contact your sales representative.
33
The material polyethylene (PE)

PE properties (reference values)
PE 80
PE 100
Characteristics
Value *)
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
0.93
0.95
g/cm
EN ISO 1183-1
18
25
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
700
900
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
Charpy notchedimpact strength at 23 C
110
83
kJ/ m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
Charpy notched impact strength at -40 C
13
kJ/ m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
MPa
EN ISO 2039-1
Ball indentation hardness (132N)
37
Crystallite melting point
131
130
DIN 51007
0.43
0.38
W/m K
EN 12664
0.01- 0.04
EN ISO 62
Colour
9005
RAL
17.4
ISO 4589-1
General
Polymers which consist only of carbon and hydrogen

(hydrocarbons) are called polyolefins.
Polyethylene (PE) belongs to this group. It is a semi-crystalline thermoplastic. Polyethylene is the best
known standard polymer.
The chemical formula is: (CH2-CH2)n. It is an environmentally friendly hydrocarbon product.
PE and PP belong to the non-polar materials. Because
of this, the material does not dissolve in common solvents and, in addition, hardly swells. As a result, PE
pipes cannot be solvent cemented. The appropriate
jointing method for this material is welding. For piping
installations we offer three welding techniques in our
product range: butt fusion, socket welding and electrofusion.
The latter jointing technique is preferred for piping systems transporting gas, water, compressed air or other less aggressive media. Butt and socket welding are
preferably used on a diameter-specific basis.
High molecular PE grades of medium to high density
have become state of the art for industrial piping installations. The grades are classified in accordance with
their internal pressure resistance in PE80 (MRS 8 MPa)
and PE100 (MRS 10 MPa).
In this context, we also talk about PE grades of the 3
generation. PE80 grades belong, in most cases, to the 2
generation. PE grades of the 1 generation PE63 according to current classifications have practically no
application anymore.
rd
nd
34
st
In piping construction, PE is mostly used for buried gas

and water lines. For this range of applications, polyethylene has become the dominant material in numerous
countries. But also building technology and industrial
piping installations make use of the advantages of this
material.
The advantages include:
low weight
outstanding flexibility
good abrasion resistance
corrosion resistance
high impact resistance even at very low temperatures
good chemical resistance
safe and easy jointing by welding
excellent cost-performance ratio
Chemical resistance
Polyethylen shows a good resistance against a broadrange of media. For more details please refer to the
chemical resistance table. Specific questions can be addressed to the responsible sales company
Application limits
The application limits of the material on the one hand

depend on embrittlement and softeningtemperatures on
the other hand on the nature and the expected service
life of the application. Thep-T- diagrams gives details
on application temperatures and pressures.
Polyethylene belongs to the flammable plastics. The

oxygen index amounts to 17 %. (Materials that burn with
less than 21 % of oxygen in the air are considered to be
flammable).
PE drips and continues to burn without soot after removing the flame. Basically, toxic substances are released by all burning processes. Carbon monoxide is
generally the combustion product most dangerous to
humans. When PE burns, primarily carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and water are formed.
The following classifications in accordance with different
combustion standards are used: According to UL94, PE
is classified as HB (Horizontal Burning) and according
to DIN 53438-1 as K2. According to DIN 4102-1 and EN
13501-1, PE is listed as B2 (normally flammable). In the
French classification of building materials, polyethylene
corresponds to M3 (of average flammability rating). According to ASTM D1929 the self-ignition temperature is
350 C.
Suitable fire-fighting agents are water, foam, carbon
dioxide or powder.
Abrasion resistance
Polyethylene has excellent resistance against abrasion.

As a result, PE piping systems are used in numerous
applications for transporting solids and slurries. Experience has shown that PE offers considerable advantages over metal for many such applications
The black polyethylene material types from GF are authorised for use in food applications. The fittings are
odourless and tasteless as well as physiologically inert.
Usage in all related areas is thus possible. For details
regarding existing approvals for applications with drinking water or food stuff please contact your sales representative
35
The material polypropylene (PP)

PP properties (reference values)
Characteristics
PP-R
Value *)
PP-H
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
0.90-0.91
0.90-0.91
g/cm
EN ISO 1183-1
25
31
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
Tensilee-modulus at 23 C
900
1300
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
30.9
85
kJ/ m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
3.4
4.8
kJ/ m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
49
58
MPa
EN ISO 2039-1
Heat distortion temperature HDT B 0.45 MPa
75
95
EN ISO 75-2
145-150
150-167
DIN 51007
W/m K
EN 12664
0.23
0.1
0.1
EN ISO 62
Colour
neutral
7032
RAL
ISO 4589-1
General
Polypropylene is a thermoplastic belonging to the polyolefin group.It is a semi-crystalline material. Its density is lower than that of other well-known thermoplastics.
Its mechanical characteristics, its chemical resistance
and especially its relatively high heat deflection temperature have made polypropylene one of the most important materials usedin piping installations today.
PP is formed by the polymerisation of propylene (C3H6)
using Ziegler-Natta catalysts.
There are three different types which are conventionally
supplied for piping installations:
Isotactic PP Homopolymeride (PP-H)
PP block co-polymeride (PP-B)
PP random co-polymeride (PP-R).
Because of its higher stiffness PP-H is preferred for industrial applications. The more flexible PP-R is used
predominantly in sanitary applications but also in numerous industrial applications. PP-B is mainly used
for sewage piping systems because of its high impact
strength especially at low temperatures and its lower resistance to creep at elevated temperatures.
Most of the grades are offered with nucleating agents
(crystallization seeds), because PP crystallizes at least
10 times slower than PE. This way, we achieve lower internal stress and a finer structure. We differentiate between and nucleation. Nucleation is realized
by merely adding ppm (parts per million) of nucleating
agents.
36
19
PP is one of the non-polar materials whose surface

hardly swells or dissolves. Cementing is not possible
without special surface treatment. On the other hand,
PP welds very well.
For industrial applications GF uses beta nucleated PP-H
(PROGEF Standard, PROGEF Plus) and PP-R (PROGEF natural, PROGEF Standard).
The internal pressure resistance is tested according to
ISO 1167 and calculated in compliance with ISO 9080.
Under the terms of ISO 12162 our industrial grades are
classified as MRS 10.
Chemical resistance
The material shows a good resistance against a broadrange of media. For details please refer to the chemical
resistance table by GF. Specific questions can be addressed to the responsible sales company.
Application limits
The application limits of the material on the one hand

depend on embrittlement and softening temperatures on
the other hand on the nature and the expected service
life of the application. Please refer to the respective pT- diagrams for details on applicationtemperatures and
pressures
Polypropylene is a flammable plastic. The oxygen index amounts to 19%. (Materials that burn with less
than 21% of oxygen in the air are considered to be
flammable).
PP drips and continues to burn without soot after removing the flame. Basically, toxic substances are released by all burning processes. Carbon monoxide is
generally the combustion product most dangerous to
humans. When PP burns, primarily carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and water are formed.
The following classifications in accordance with differing
combustion standards are used:
According to UL94, PP is classified as HB (Horizontal Burning) and according to DIN 53438-1 as K2. According to DIN 4102-1 and EN 13501-1, PP is listed as
B2 (normally flammable). In the French classification of
building materials, polypropylene corresponds to M3 (of
average flammable rating).
According to ASTM D 1929, the self-ignition temperature is 360 C.
Suitable fire-fighting agents are water, foam or carbon
dioxide.
Since PP is a non-polar hydrocarbon polymer, it is an

outstanding insulator. These properties, however, can
be worsened considerably as a result of pollution, effects of oxidising media or weathering.
The dielectric characteristics are essentially independent of temperature and frequency.
The specific volume resistance is >10 cm; the dielectric strength is 75 kV/mm.
16
Because of the possible development of electrostatic

charges, caution is recommended when using PP in applications where the danger of fires or explosion is given.
Formulations used by GF are in general non toxic and

biologically inert. For details regarding existing approvals for applications with drinking water or food stuff
please contact your sales representative.
37
The material polyvinyl chloride unplasticized (PVC-U)

PVC-U properties (reference values)
Characteristics
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
1.38
g/cm
EN ISO 1183-1
52
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
2500
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
Vicat heat distortion temperature B/50N
76
ISO 306
0.15
W/m K
EN 12664
0.1
EN ISO 62
Colour
7011
RAL
42
ISO 4589-1
General
Polyvinylchloride, widely known by its abbreviation PVC,

is one of the most important and oldest mass-produced
polymers. World-wide consumption of PVC is only exceeded by PE and PP, PVC was first produced in the
middle of the nineteenth century. An industrial production process was, however, first patented in 1913.
Nowadays, many industrial applications couldnt be realised without PVC. But also in the use of daily products, PVC has become irreplaceable.
PVC is a polymer having approximately 56 % by weight
of chlorine. The PVC resin becomes a processable and
usable material by the use of additives only. The choice
of the additives allows a wide variation of its characteristics and an adjustment to the planned application.
There are two classes of PVC materials. Soft PVC
(PVC-P), produced by adding plasticizers (such as, e. g.
phthalate), is not used by GF. Hard PVC, the so-called
unplasticized PVC (PVC-U) is used for pipeline engineering.
PVC-U is an amorphous thermoplastic. The characteristics of PVC-U moulded parts are strongly dependent
on the composition of the formula, but also on the processing. Because of our 50-year experience in PVC
processing and the continuous advancement of our own
formulation, GF has become a benchmark in the field of
PVC-U piping. The internal pressure resistance is tested according to ISO 1167 and calculated in compliance
with ISO 9080. Under the terms of ISO 12162 our industrial grades are classified as MRS 25.

GF's PVC-U has the following characteristics:
versatility of use
very good chemical and corrosion resistance
proven physiological harmlessness and therefore suitablefor contact with food
no influence on drinking water quality
biologically inert; no support of microbial growth
high mechanical tensile strength with good impact
strength
self-extinguishing
secure solvent cementing using Tangit cement
adhesive development designed for GF PVC-U
use of tin stabilisers for fittings and valves, lead free
system
low friction loss owing to smooth surfaces
UV and weathering resistance
PVC-U is very resistant to weathering. Long-term influence of direct sunlight as well as the effect of wind and
rain damage the material only superficially. Despite its
very good weathering resistance regarding ultraviolet
radiation, PVC-U loses some of its impact strength. In
extreme applications it can be advantageous to protect
the material from direct sunlight exposure. For suitable
protection methods please consult your GF subsidiary.
Application limits
38
The application limits of the material depend on the embrittlement and softeningtemperatures and on the nature and the expected service life of the application.
Please refer to the respective p-T- diagrams for details
The high chlorine content of PVC-U causes an advantageous combustion behaviour. Self-ignition resulting from
temperature influences occurs only at 450 C. PVC-U
burns when exposed to an open flame, but extinguishes
immediately after removing the flame.
toodour, taste or microbiological effects is regularly

checked and monitored by neutral institutions in various
countries.
GF offers PVC-U systems free from lead andcadmium for your applications in the fields of drinking water
or food. The residual monomer content of vinyl chloride
lies below the detection limit of modern analytical methods.
For details regarding existing approvals for applicationswith drinking water or food stuff please contact your
sales representative.

to be flammable).
PVC-U thus falls in the best flammability class V0 according to UL94, and in the B1 (difficult to ignite) building material class with wall thicknesses 3.2 mm respective B2 (normally flammable) with wall thicknesses >3.2 mm according to DIN 4102-1. According to the
French test method NF P 92-501, GF PVC-U is tested
as M2.
Because the combustion of PVC produces hydrogen
chloride, which forms a corrosive acid in connection with
water,immediate cleaning ofareas susceptible to corrosionis necessary after a fire. Danger to personnel from
HCl is minimal because its pungent odour allows early
escape from toxic combustion gases, mainly from the
odourless carbon monoxide.
There are no restrictions concerning the choice of firefighting agents.
PVC-U is, as all unmodified thermoplastics, non-conductive. This means that no electrochemical corrosion
takes place in PVC-U systems. On the other hand,
these non-conductive characteristics have to be taken
into account because an electrostatic charge can develop in the piping. It is especially important to take this
condition into account in areas where explosive gases can appear. There are various methods available to
avoid the occurrence of electrostatic charges on polymer piping systems. Please contact your GF representative for more informationregarding these methods.
The specific volume resistance is >10 cm.
15
The PVC-U formulaswere developed by GF for use

with drinking water and food. PVC-U's physiological
harmlessness regarding neutral, acidic and alcoholic
foods and the non-influence on drinking water in respect
39
The material polyvinyl chloride chlorinated (PVC-C)

PVC-C properties (reference values)
Characteristics
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
1.5
g/cm
EN ISO 1183-1
53
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
2550
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
110
MPa
EN ISO 2039-1
102
EN ISO 75-2
Vicat-heat distortion temperature B/50N
103
ISO 306
0.15
W/m K
EN 12664
0.1
EN ISO 62
Colour
7038
RAL
Limiting oxygen index(LOI)
60
ISO 4589-1
General
The abbreviation PVC-C stands for chlorinated polyvinyl

chloride, a material in use since 1958. PVC-C is an
amorphous thermoplastic. It is made by post-chlorination of PVC whereby chlorine is attached to the PVC
chain. Thus PVC-C is a transformed PVC-U material which, because of its chemical structure, is characterised by a higher temperature resistance than PVC-U,
with simultaneously higher tensile strength, good toughness and an exceptional chemical resistance. Its flame
resistance is even better than that of PVC-U. These
characteristics have made PVC-C an interesting material for piping and fabrication of devices in the chemical
industry as well as for several other industrial applications with high requirements (e. g. theaeroplane industry).
In pressure piping systems, PVC-C is suitable for
strongly corrosive environments, where materials such
as stainless steel or even GFK demonstrateonly a short
service life.
PVC-C is used for semi-finished products, pumps,
valves as well as for the entire range of accessories associated with transport of liquids.
40
Some of the advantages of PVC-C for piping systems

are:
very good mechanical characteristics, also at increased temperatures
outstanding chemical resistance
long service life, even under intensely corrosive conditions
no support of microbial growth
simple installation using solvent cementing, e.g. with
Tangit PVC-C
smooth inner surface
very low heat conductivity
exceptional fire resistance
UV and weathering resistance
PVC-C is weathering resistant over the long term, so it

can be exposed to direct sunlight as well as wind and
rain. Resistance to ultraviolet radiation is very good in
comparison to other materials, but nevertheless, PVCC loses some of its impact strength. In extreme applications it can be advantageous to protect the material
from direct sunlight exposure. For suitable protection
methods please consult your GF subsidiary.
Application limits
The application limits of the material depend on the embrittlement and softeningtemperatures and on the nature and the expected service life of the application.
Due to its high chlorine content, PVC-C shows an exceptionally good combustion behaviour without the addition of flame retardants.
Under the influence of temperature, PVC-C self-ignites
only above 400C. PVC-C burns when exposed to an
open flame, but immediately extinguishes when the
flame is removed.
to be flammable).
PVC-C thus also falls in the best flammability class
V0 according to UL94, and in the B1 (difficult to ignite)
building material class with wall thicknesses 3.2 mm
respective B2 (normally flammable) with wall thicknesses >3.2 mm according to DIN 4102-1. Smoke development is also low.
Since the combustion of PVC-C produces hydrogen
chloride, which forms a corrosive acid in connection with
water, immediate cleaning of areas susceptible to corrosion with water containing detergent is necessary after
a fire. Danger to personnel from HCl is minimal because
of its pungent odour even in very low concentrations (15 ppm), allowing an early escape from toxic combustion gases, mainly from the odourless carbon monoxide. Concerning the choice of fire-fighting agents, water,
powder-type extinguishing agents or foam are recommended.
PVC-C is, like all unmodified thermoplastics, non-conductive. This means that no electrochemical corrosion
takes place in PVC-C systems. On the other hand,
these non-conductive characteristics have to be taken
into account because an electrostatic charge can develop in the piping. It is especially important to take this
condition into account in areas where explosive gases can appear. There are various methods available to
avoid the occurrence of an electrostatic charge on polymer piping systems. Please contact your GF representative if you should have applications where this needs
to be considered.
The specific volume resistance is >10 cm.
15
PVC-C is an inert and toxically harmless material. Tests

have shown that there is no support of microbiological
growth in water systems from PVC-C. For details regarding existing approvals for applications with drinking
water or food stuff please contact your sales representative.
41
The material polyvinylidenefluoride

(PVDF)
PVDF properties (reference values)
Characteristics
Value *)
Units
Test Standard
Density
1.78
g/cm
EN ISO 1183-1
50
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
1700
N/mm
EN ISO 527-1
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
kJ/m
EN ISO 179-1/1eA
104
EN ISO 75-2
169
DIN 51007
0.19
W/m K
EN 12664
Water absorption at 23 C/24h
0.04
EN ISO 62
Colour
opaque
43
ISO 4589-1
General
Polyvinylidenfluoride (PVDF) is a semi-crystalline thermoplastic having outstanding mechanical, physical and

chemical properties. These result from the chemical
structure of PVDF. Polyvinylidenfluoride belongs to the
class of fluorinated polymers, whose best-known representative is polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). PTFE is
characterised by a superb heat resistance and the best
chemical resistance of all polymers;a great disadvantage is that it is not melt processable - e. g. into fittings.
PVDF, on the other hand, combines various advantages
of PTFE withgood workability into structural parts. The
fluorine content in PVDF amounts to 59 % by weight.
PVDF from GF is characterised by a very good mechanical behaviour and high temperature resistance. Because of the exceptionally wide pressure / temperature
range in which PVDF can be used, it has opened, in
connection with the specific characteristics of this material, completely new areas of application in plastic piping
fabrication. These include applications in the semi-conductor, chemical and pharmaceutical industry, electroplating, paper and cellulose processing, the automotive
industry and water treatment.
Pipes, fittings and valves of PVDF are uncoloured and
opaque (milky, translucent).
By avoiding the addition of any additives, the outstanding characteristics of the material remain to the fullest
extent, especially concerning the chemical resistance
and physiological harmlessness.
42

Some of the advantages of PVDF:
outstanding mechanical properties, even at high temperatures
excellent chemical resistance
no electrochemical corrosion
long service life, even under intensely corrosive conditions
outstanding resistance against UV and -radiation
very pure material by implementing without additives
no support of microbial growth
physiologically harmless
secure jointing by high-quality welding technology
smooth inner surface
very low heat conductivity
excellentflame retardant properties
Chemical resistance
The material shows a good resistance against a broad

range of media. With a few exceptions this is also valid
for the welds using the suitable welding technology. For
details please refer to the chemical resistance table by
GF. Specific questions can be addressed to the responsible sales company.
Application limits
The application limits of the material depend on the embrittlement and softening temperatures and on the nature and the expected service life of the application.
PVDF displays an exceptionally good combustion behaviour without the addition of fire protection additives.
Material decomposition begins at 380C.
to be flammable).
PVDF thus also falls in the best flammability class V0
according to UL94, and in the building materials class
B1 (difficult to ignite) according to DIN 4102-1. Smoke
development is also moderate.
This makes it the material of choice for applications

that demand a very high purity of the medium and have
stringent requirements stipulating that the materials
which come in contact with the medium do not leach
contaminants.
The PVDF raw materials used by GF fulfil the most rigid
requirements of the semiconductor and pharmaceutical industry regarding high purity. In addition, products
made of PVDF exhibit a very smooth surface.
Leach out tests according to SEMI57 are done regularly
for quality control.
For details regarding the properties relevant for the market segments, Semicon and Life Science, please see
our SYGEF Plus specification:
www.gfps.com
=> Support and Services/ Planning Assistance/
System Specifications
GF PVDF products show suchexcellent fire safety behaviourthat they are accepted and listed by Factory
Mutual foruse in clean rooms (FM 4910).
Since the combustion of PVDF produces hydrogen fluoride, which forms a corrosive acid in connection with
water,immediate cleaning of areas susceptible to corrosion with water containing detergent is necessary after a fire. Additional combustion products are carbon
monoxide and carbon dioxide. Concerning the choice of
fire-fighting agents, sand or powder-type extinguishing
agents are recommended.
PVDF is a good electrical insulator. Because of the possible electrostatic charges, caution is recommended
when using PVDF in applications where combustion or
explosion dangers exist.
The specific volume resistance is >10 cm; the specific
surface resistance is 10 .
14
14
The PVDF grades used by GF are non-toxic and biologically inert. For details regarding existing approvals for
applications with drinking water or food stuff please contact your sales representative..
High purity properties
Due to the excellent stability of the PVDF molecule, it

is one of the very few materials that can be processed,
welded and used under severe conditions without the
use of additives (no pigments, thermostabilisers, processing aids or fillers are used in the GF piping grades).
43
44
Basics in the physics of plastics and testing
Page
46
Basics in general and polymer chemistry
57
Metric and inch system
73
Abbreviations
74
SI units
-- SI basic units
-- Internationally defined prefixes
-- Units
Conversion tables
-- Viscosities
-- Delivery volumes
-- Pressure and pressure heads
-- Conversion inch/mm
75
75
76
78
78
79
80
45

Basics in the physics of plastics and
testing
Abrasion
Abrasion ismechanical erosion, e. g. of the inside of a

plastic pipe by solids, in the medium flowing through it.
The abrasion can be reduced by using pipe materials
with softer particles, e. g. Blends of Elastomers.
Barrier properties
Barrier properties are a variety of properties concerning

a plastic's ability to resist Permeation and Diffusion against gases and liquids. They are determined by
the plastic's molecular structure and its processing.
Bursting pressure
Bursting pressure is the absolute pressure at the moment in which a test object breaks. Stress-rupture
test (creep strength).
Service life
A pipe's service life depends on the pipe material, dimensions, flow medium, temperature, etc. For the determination of the anticipated service life of a given pipe, or
the use of the intended service life in the determination
of other parameters, see Stress-rupture test.
BgVV/BGA
BgVV: The German "Federal Institute for

Health Protection of Consumers and Veterinary
Medicine" (Bundesinstitut fr gesundheitlichen Verbraucherschutz und Veterinrmedizin).
BGA: The German "Federal Health
Office" (Bundesgesundheitsamt)
The BgVV is one of three independent national authorities which in 1994 replaced the Federal Health Office
(BGA). It is subdivided into eight departments and two
special units (ZEBS and ZEBET).
The BGA haspublished in about 40 recommendationsdetailed regulations for plastics and other materials employed in the manufacture of articles used with foodstuffs. The recommendations complement the conditions giventhe German law (Sect. 31, Par., 1 LMBG
Lebensmittel- und Bedarfsgegenstndegesetz) concerning the use of articles made of high polymers, with foodstuffs. The law has been made more specific in the German BGV (Bedarfsgegenstnde Verordnung).
The substances used in such articles may not impair the
foodstuffs in smell or taste. The recommendations consist largely of lists of Monomers, substances used in
manufacturing processes, and of Additives, i. e. substances from which the articles may be made ("positive
lists"). Although the recommendations are legally nothing more than the name says, in practice they are adhered to as if they were legally binding.
Fire characteristics
The way a substance behaves in a fire is complicated.

When assessing fire hazards, many isolated insights
complement each other. Besides the flammability of the
substance or of the component, the following factors are
of importance:
position in a room
combination with other substances
intensity of the igniting source
46
heat radiation
ventilation conditions
degree of dispersal (fine-coarse)
thickness
colour
surface area
shape
These factors affect the fire characteristics by influencing the production of smoke (its composition and density) and the flame temperature. The fire characteristics of
a substance can therefore only be assessed in the context of a given application. Indications like "fire-resistant"
etc. should no longer be used. Instead, statements such
as conforms to DIN 4102 or UL-94 class are more
convenient.
Flammability
A plastic's flammability depends strongly on its chemical

structure, fillers, additives (e.g. softening agents) and
shape. Some plastics burn very easily; others are flame
retardant (as defined in DIN 4102, B1) or stop burning after removal of the heat source. Fire resistance in
equipment is often achieved by incorporating hydrated
alumina, antimony oxide or compounds containing halogens, phosphorus, boron or nitrogen ( Flame retardants). Numerous testing procedures using heat radiators, incandescent filaments or naked flames are determined by the applicationsand produce correspondingly restricted results. Investigations are carried out, as
needed, on
how long combustion lasts
how quickly flames spread
ignition temperature (ignition point)
temperature of fumes produced
concentration and composition of fumes produced
(smoke density, toxicity) and
drops produced by burning substances.
The results are only valid if the testing procedure and,
if necessary, the thickness of the test sample are specified. ( DIN 4102, UL 94)
Chromic acid test
If needed, our company performs chromic acid tests on

PP pipes ( Polypropylene) to ascertain whether the
pipes are subject to internal strain.
If PP pipes with an unacceptable level of internal stress
are immersed in 60 % chromic acid for 24 hours, clearly
visible hairlines and cracks are produced.
Our polypropylene pipes are manufactured with only
slight internal stress, and pass the test without difficulty.
DIBT
German Institute for Structural Engineering (Deutsches

Institut fr Bautechnik)
The DIBT is a public institution with its administrative
centre in Berlin. The institute is legally charged with ensuring the uniform implementation of construction techniques in public building projects. In particular, its responsibilities include:
the technical authorisation of building commodities

in Europe, and the formulation of European guidelines for such authorisation on the basis of the building commodity standards (89/106/EWG, 21.12.1988)
the authorisation of general supervisory powers concerning building commodities and types of buildings
on the basis of the building regulations of the federal
states within Germany
the co-ordination of national, European and international co-operation in the formulation of technical (particularly standardised) regulations
the preparation of laws concerning technical matters
for the federal states within Germany, and the publication of the so-called lists A, B and C of building rules
("Bauregellisten") in conformity with the building regulations of those states
the approval of bodies involved in testing, supervision
and certification
encouraging building surveys and awarding research
contracts, as well as advising, controlling and judging
these activities
commissioning experts' reports on constructional matters for the parties (the German federal state and its
constituent parts) involved in settlements
Density, measurement of
The density of a substance is defined as the quotient

of the mass m and its volume V.
For example the density of a substance is its mass per

unit volume. Commonly used units are g/cmand kg/m
. One differentiates, as needed, between bulk density (taking for example, pores and enclosed air into account) and the density of the pure substance.
The density of a substance is measured
to characterise materials
in quality controls
to monitor the substance's production and processing,
and
to calculate the weight (mass) of given quantities of
the substances
Densities of some materials used for pipes
Material
Density (g/cm)
PVC-U
1.38
PVC-C
1.50
PE
0.95
PP
0.91
ABS
1.03
PVDF
1.78
Diffusion
The molecules of a gas or liquid are in motion. This

makes them fill the space available to them and is the
underlying cause of diffusion. The amount of a substance which diffuses in a given time through an area,
can be determined by Fick's First Law. Gases and liquids can diffuse through pits and cavities in molecular
structures as well as through porous films. A semi-permeable membrane (i.e. one which lets molecules up
to a certain maximum size pass through) which separates two solutions of different concentrations, will let
molecules of the solvent diffuse through, but not outof
the solute( Osmosis).
DIN 4102
In the German standard DIN 4102, building materials

are divided into combustible and incombustible categories. The combustible materials are subdivided into
those with low, normal and high combustibility. According to the standard, PVC-U is categorised as "B1" and
PP as "B2". The classifications are, however, also dependent on the shape and the thickness of the materials used. The exact requirements for categorisation are
specified in the standard.
Category of building material
Sub-category (with official German designation)
A incombustible
A1
A2
B combustible B1 flame retardant (schwerentflammbar)
B2 normal combustibility (normalentflammbare)
B3 high combustibility (leichtentflammbare)
Pressure rating (PN, Nominal Pressure)
In order to choose pipes and fittings which are compatible in their Pressure stability, they are assigned to
various standardised pressure categories. The pressure
rating (PN) of these has been widely accepted. Unlike
the SDR or Pipe series S, this categorisation does
not depend primarily on size or shape, but on the pipe
material's behaviour in the Stress-rupture test, and
on the applicable Safety factor. The pressure rating can be regarded as a value of the pressure (in bar)
which the pipe can certainly withstand, at 20 C for the
duration of 50 years, with water as theflow medium.
PN P max (50a / 20 C / water)
Pipes of a given pressure rate (like those of a given
Pipe series S) can withstand the same pressure - regardless of their dimensions. There is, however, only an
approximate relationship between the pressure rating
PN and the Pipe series number S, which is given by the
following formula:
S per(50a, 20 C, water) / PN 0.5(d/e - 1)
per = permissible hoop stress
d = outer diameter of pipe
e = wall thickness of pipe
Pressure impulses (water hammer; surge pressure)

Pressure impulses often occur in piping when valves
or taps are suddenly closed. If large enough, the resulting pressure peaks produce extra strains which can be
detrimental after a time. Piping should therefore be installed in sucha way that, wherever possible, pressure
impulses are avoided. For example, fast-closing valves
in compressed-air pipelines can cause peak pressures
which are 2 times higher than the normal operating
pressure. PVC-U pipes do not withstand such pressure
impulses over a long period and are therefore not recommended in compressed-air systems. They can splinter and be hazardous.
47
Dielectric strength
Break-down strength; rupture strength; disruptive discharge voltage

The dielectric strength is the minimum potential difference which has to be applied to an electrical insulator
(most plastics are normally insulators) for it to become
conductive ( Conductivity).
DVGW
German Technical and Scientific Association on Gas

and Water (Deutscher Verein des Gas- und Wasserfaches e.V.)
The association (administrative centre in Bonn) has the
purpose of promoting technically and scientifically aspects involving gas and water in particular with reference to safety, environmental concerns and hygiene.
The aims of the association are
setting of authorised standards
testing and certification
research and development
vocational training
provision of information
advisory services.
Plastic pipes, piping components and adhesives are
controlled and tested in the DVGW's Water Technology Centre (TZW: Technologiezentrum Wasser) in Karlsruhe.
DVS
The German Association for Welding Technology (DVS

= Deutscher Verein fr Schweisstechnik), has published
guidelines on various aspects of welding.
Dynamic loading
The dynamic loading of pipes (in this case by oscillation

in a certain range of frequencies) is a complex subject.
Special care has to be taken that pipes connected to
pumps are not under dynamic load. On occasion it may
be necessary to use axial compensators in order to remove oscillations caused by pumps. Neglecting this can
quickly lead to breakage of the piping.
Internal stress; Frozen stress
This stress arises by reciprocal action between parts of

a workpiece or test sample, e.g. in chains of molecules.
Essentially, it is the result of small differences in density or of sterically adverse conformations. ( Glass).
If they were cut up in an appropriate way, they would
cause deformations in the workpiece. (cf. Janson test
with pipes made of polypropylene). Internal stress can
arise because of
uneven contraction of a melted charge in cooling,
uneven pressure during injection moulding or diecasting, and/or
uneven cooling within the workpiece.
Internal stress can be detrimental to the mechanical
properties of the substance. ( Formation of / corrosion by stress-induced hairlines and cracks)
Elasticity
Elasticity is the property of a substance to return itself

to its original shape or volume after deformation by external forces or torques. If the forces exceed the yield
point, and the material does not snap, it begins to be
deformed irreversibly, i. e. in a plastic way. Plasticity is
the opposite of elasticity.
48
Elastic modulus, tensile modulus and flexural

modulus
The e-modulus is the constant ratio of the mechanical

tension in a body to the corresponding deformation.
One differentiates between tensile and flexural moduli.
The moduli define a plastic's degree of stiffness. They
can be derived from the initial parts (corresponding
to the ideally elastic state) of the graphs showing extension as a function of stress. They are given in N/
mm(=MPa). The higher the numerical values, the stiffer
the material is.
Explosion areas
So-called "explosion areas" are rooms and premises (e.

g. factory areas) in which electrostatic discharges can
damage sensitive electronic systems or even lead to explosions.
Free-fall experiment/Falling ball test
There are two different ways of performing the free-fall

experiment:
In type A) the test specimen is dropped (either by hand
or with the help of a frame) from a predetermined height
onto the floor.
In type B) a standardized body (such as a ball, a falling
block or dart) is dropped from a predetermined height
onto the specimen.
FAR
Federal Aviation Regulations

These are globally valid regulations (from the USA)
concerning the protection against fire in aircraft. FAR
25.851 defines fire protection generally. 25.853,
25.855, 25.855F contain specifications for (and ways of
grading) the materials, fittings and items of equipment in
cockpit and fuselage, as well as in the compartments for
supply, luggage and freight.
FDA
Food and Drug Administration

The FDA can be regarded as the USA equivalent of the
BGA in Germany. FDA authorisation is needed for many
export arrangements involving pharmaceutical goods
and food.
Absorption of water and moisture
The absorption of water by polymers is a form of diffusion. The amount of water taken up depends on the surface area.
The amount also depends on the sorts and quantities of
additives, fillers and strengthening agents contained in
the polymer.
In addition, the absorption of moisture by a polymer
is determined by its chemical composition, i. e. by the
presence of certain Functional groups.
Water (chemically a highly polar compound) can have a
considerable influence on a plastic's mechanical properties, its dimensions, electrical insulation, dielectricloss factor and appearance. Polyamides, for instance,
can take up large quantities of water (up to 10 % of
their weight), and the impact resistance can be 20 times
higher in the saturated than in the unsaturated state.
The precise determination of the absorption of water
and moisture has to be performed on a sample of a given shape. The graph of the sample's weight is traced as
a function of time, until there is no longer any increase
in weight. It is advisable to use a logarithmic scale for
the time axis.
If necessary, the weight reduction experienced by the

sample in yielding some of its material to the water (
Migration) should be examined. The absorption of water is assessed in conformity with the standard EN ISO
62.
Flame retardants
Flame retardants are additives which reduce the combustibility and the inflammability of plastics. They have
their effect physically (by cooling, covering or diluting) or
chemically (in the gaseous state by removing those energetic radicals which promote combustion; in the solid
state by providing a protective layer of carbon or ashes).
The most important flame retardants are named under
the heading Flammability
Flame retardants are not able to prevent burning. They
only reduce the combustibility. Without flame contact,
they cause the fire to die out.
Volatiles
A volatile or "volatile component" is the "dampness" or

"water content" of plastics, and is released when the
plastics are dried or worked on. In most cases, other
volatile substances (e. g. water) are also released.
FRP pipes (fibre-reinforced plastic pipes; fibreglass pipes)

FRP pipes are made by wrapping glass fibres around
and into a sleeve made of unsaturated polyester (UP)
and epoxy (EP) resins. (DIN 16965, Part 1, Type A).
The pipes are characterised by high mechanical
strength and good heat resistance.
Harmonisation of tolerances; Calibrated connectors
On account of our experience (gathered over decades)

on pipes made of PVC-U and PVC-C, we know that
such pipes have to be jointed together with particular
care. The points of contact are especially at risk when
using aggressive media ( Cementing/jointing technology)
The parts being jointed together are affected chemically - most strongly on both sides of the gap between
them. We have therefore decided to extrude (the sizes
in question) using stricter tolerances than those prescribed by DIN. The reduced tolerances in a pipe's outer diameter lead to gaps which are smaller, and thus
minimal chemical attack.
The same effect is achieved by using normal, but subsequently calibrated connecting parts. As this method is
complex, it is no longer used. Naturally, the stricter tolerances also have to be applied to all the fittings used,
i.e. there has to be a harmonisation of the tolerances.
Vessel formula
A pipe's Hoop stress depends on the operating

pressure p, on the wall thickness e and on the diameter
d. The so-called vessel formula gives the relationship
between these quantities.
= (p/10)(d0 - e)/2e
= hoop stress in N/mm
p= inside pressure in bar
d0 = outer diameter
e = wall thickness
Creep
As plastics are viscoelastic, they show both an immediate (elastic) and a delayed (viscous) reaction to mechanical loads. (The latter is due to flow processes involving individual molecules).
In this way, thermoplastic components can change their
shape. They "creep", i. e. they slowly give way to the
load. Creep in plastics is strongly influenced by temperature.
Creep modulus
In a substance under Creep ( Stress-rupture test),

the ratio of a constant stress to its time-dependant elongation is called "creep modulus"
Ec= creep modulus; = stress; (t) = elongation (temperature dependent)
KTW
German Plastic and Drinking Water Recommendations

(Kunststoff-Trinkwasser-Empfehlungen)
The recommendations were published by the BGA in
Berlin. Every ready-made utensil made of plastic or
other non-metallic materials for use in connection with
drinking water, has to satisfy fundamental requirements
concerning its effects on the water. These requirements
are tested by placing the utensil in contact with water for
72 hours. The test is repeated twice.
The aims of the tests are (i) to gain information about
the amounts of the materials from the utensil (e. g. from
a PVC-U pipe for drinking water) which migrate into the
drinking water, (ii) to ascertain that they are physiologically harmless, and inoffensive in smell and taste,
(iii) to find out which quantities of these materials can
be tolerated. The DVGW's Water Technology Centre in
Karlsruhe, Germany, performs such tests on pipes used
for drinking water. ( TOC)
K-value
The K-value, a dimensionless parameter derived from

measurements of solution viscosity, is used for the approximate determination of the Molecular weight of
a polymer. It is extrapolated from aseries of measurements of the time needed for polymer solutions, of varying concentration, to flow through the capillary tube of
a so-called viscometer. The conditions under which the
measurements are made (the temperature, the solvent
used and the structure of the polymer) are always the
same.
The K-value obtained is close to the weight average
MW ( Distribution of molecular mass) of the distribution of molecular weights. The molecular weight of
PVC-U is usually found by determining its K-value. Normal values for the material qualities used in the extrusion of PVC-U pipes are between 60 and 70.
There are conversion tables for the coefficient of viscosity and the K-value in EN ISO 1628-2.
Paint-impairment-free; Silicone-free
Plastic pipes and moulded parts which are paint-impairment-free are employed in surface-coating installations
(here specifically the paint shops in the automobile industry). It is important that these parts do not contain
49
certain substances or come into contact with them when

being processed. The substances include silicone, fats,
waxes and PTFE.
Details are obtainable from automobile manufacturers.
In this context silicone is particularly noteworthy. Components which contain silicone, or components using silicone-based mould-release agents during production,
can cause unevenness in the wetting characteristics
of the paint, leading to severe difficulties and financial
losses.
Long-term characteristics
The long-term characteristics of plastic pipes are determined by many factors. There are the operating conditions such as flow medium, temperature, operating
pressure, and external factors, as well as the pressure
for which the pipes have been designed.
Of course, it is very important that the right piping material is chosen for the given operating conditions. In the
applicable lists of standards - e. g. under the heading
"permitted pressure" - one can find details of the longterm characteristics of pipes.
Linear expansion, coefficient of
Plastics and metals differ fundamentally in their atomic and molecular composition and in the nature of their
chemical bonds. This is illustrated, for example, by observing that thermal expansion in plastics is about ten
times greater than in metals. The coefficient of linear
expansionrepresents a material's degree of thermal
expansion and is measured in compliance with DIN
53752. It denotes the extension per unit length of a
plastic component for 1 K (= 1 C) rise in temperature.
The thermal expansion (or contraction) of piping can be
calculated using the formula:
l =L T
l = thermal expansion (or contraction) in mm
L = length of piping in m
T= difference in K (= C ) between reference temperature of piping (e. g. at installation) and temperature in
use
= coefficient of linear expansion in mm/m K
(= mm m K )
-1
-1
Coefficient of expansion of selected polymers
Because the FRP withstands a large pressure, the load

on the inliner is small. This leads to longer life and higher standards of safety. The production of liner pipes
has to conform (inter alia) to special KRV criteria (of the
Plastic Pipe Federation - ''Kunststoff-Rohr-Verband'' - in
Bonn, Germany) as well as to ISO and DIN standards.
Long-term regression curves
Stress-rupture test (Creep strength)
MC Test
In our company the dichloromethane test (MC test) is

used in the production of PVC pipes as a quick check
on if the material used is homogeneous and has been
treated with due care.
In this test, sections of pipes are left in dichloromethane
(a solvent) at 23 C for 30 minutes. One can then assess the quality of the plasticization (gelation) in the extrusion process by observing the degree and shape of
the swelling.
The plasticization was good if the surface is not attacked. Any indication to the contrary means that the
plasticization was (in various degrees) unsatisfactory,
i. e. the extrusion process was performed at a too low
temperature.
Microscopy
Microscopy is performed to observe the condition or

structure of a plastic's surface. By using polarization
techniques, the crystalline structure or states of orientation can also be examined in more detail.
( Microtome sections, Scanning electron micrograph) Depending on its thickness, a sample can be
viewed using transmitted or reflected light.
Microtome section
Microtome sections are thin cuts (only a few m thick)

used in microscopic examinations. They are particularly
suitable for viewing by transmitted light.
In our company, this form of examination is used as a
matter of routine. Microtome sections allow assessing if
a polymer has been processed in a homogeneous way.
It is also possible to detect foreign parts (contaminants),
voids, cracks, etc. In addition, microtome sections facilitate the appraisal of the crystalline structure of a polymer.
Example: Observation of Spherulites in PP pipes.
Polymer
in mm/m K
ABS
0.1
PA
0.1
PB
0.13
PE
0.15 - 0.20
PP
0.16 - 0.18
PPS
0.15
PVC-U
0.07 - 0.08
PVC-C
0.06 - 0.07
The MRS is used as a measure of a pipe material's

Pressure stability. The material's Hoop stress (in
N/mm= MPa) for the temperature 20 C (water) and for
the time 50 years is read from its long-term regression
curves ( Stress-rupture test). One obtains the MRS
by rounding down to the highest Renard number which
is smaller than, or equal to the hoop stress.
Example: (50a, 20C, water) = 10.58 N/mm, i. e. MRS10
Examples:PP-H and PE100 pipes are graded MRS10.
Some sorts of PE (PE80) and PP-copolymers (PP-R,
PP-B) are graded MRS8.
PVDF
0.12 - 0.18
Surface treatment
Liner pipes
Liner pipes are composite pipes made of a thermoplastic (PE, PP, PVC-U, PVC-C, PVDF and PPS) inside
and FRP outside. The so-called inliner (the thermoplastic inner part) makes the pipe chemically resistant,
the outer FRP composite provides mechanical strength.
50
MRS (Minimum Required Strength)
The surfaces of certain components are treated not only

to protect and improve them, but also for decorative purposes. Fine films with good physical and chemical stability can easily be formed on plastics. Metallization by
electrolytic deposition or by other means givesplastic
the metallic appearance occasionally required. Thicker
coatings are made by electroplating. For the most part,
the plastics PS, ABS, PMMA cellulose, polyvinyl deriva-
tives and thermosetting materials are metallised. Inprocesses using electrolytic deposition, it is necessary (after cleaning and roughening) to provide the plastic with
a conductive coating. Components made of ABS are
particularly good for metallization using electrolytic deposition.
Surface properties
When plastics are used, not only their volume-related,

mechanical properties (such as firmness and stiffness)
are important, but also the properties relating to the surface topography. Included in the latter are surface hardness, frictional and abrasive properties, certain reactions of polymer materials to aggressive substances
and in particular, their tendency to develop hairlines and
cracks.
Our company aims to produce pipes with inner surfaces
so smooth that a Ra value of less than 1 m is achieved.
Ra (the average value of surface roughness) is the arithmetic mean of the distances between protrusions and
a line through the middle of the surface profile. Rt (the
maximum roughness) is the vertical distance between
the highest and lowest points of the surface profile in
the section measured.
Surface resistance
The resistance of the surfaces of raw materials and finished products is an important parameter for plastic
pipes installed in so-called Explosion areas. The surface resistance of such pipes has to be 10 . As plastics have very good innate electrical insulation characteristics, the pipes have to incorporate conductive fillers
such as carbon black, carbon fibres or conductive polymers.
9
The surface resistance of pipes depends (among other

things) on the surrounding conditions. High humidity, for
example, reduces the surface resistance slightly.
Categories of conductivity:
Surface resistance (R)
Category
R >10
insulating
12
109 < R 1012
antistatic
10 < R 10
statically conductive
R 10
conductive
Optical properties of polymers
The optical properties of a material depend on its interaction with light. "Normal", i. e. visible light consists of
electromagnetic waves with wavelengths between 400
nm and 800 nm. A frequency can be assigned to each
wavelength.
In substances which are neither magnetic nor electrically conductive, i. e. in nearly all polymers, the interaction between the material and visible light is reduced approximately to an interaction between an electromagnetic field and the electrons in the material. As a result, we
obtain a number of fundamental, physical phenomena
which characterise the optical properties of the material.
Refraction of light
Light incident on a transparent substance is bent, according to certain laws, when it enters or leaves the
substance. Examples of this phenomenon are the use
of a prism to break up white light into its component
colours, or a rainbow. A so-called refractive index n
of the substance has been defined (which depends to
some extent on the wavelength). Complex electrodynamical considerations show the refractive index of
most polymers to be n = 1.5 0.2, a value which, on
account of the similar structures of all polymers (long
chains of carbon atoms), does not vary much. Large lateral units and in particular Functional groups do,
however, lead to deviations from the value. The refractive index also becomes larger with higher degrees of
crystallization.
Reflection of light
At the boundaries of a polymer (e. g. at its surfaces),
light is reflected. An example of this phenomenon is the
total internal reflection of light in fibre-optic cables. Otherwise, more light is reflected and less refracted when
the angle of incidence of the light becomes greater, and
when the substance has a higher refractive index.
A material's gloss (sheen) arises as a consequence
of a substance's ability to reflect light. It is the ratio of
the reflection by a sample of the material to that (under identical conditions of light incidence) by a standardised material.
A material's glitter originates in its gloss and arises
from the presence of stronger light reflections for particular incident angles and/or particular contrasts in
colour and intensity.
Dependent on the refractive index, up to 95 % of perpendicularly incident light (minimum reflection) can
enter a polymer sample. Such a degree of transparencis, however, seldom reached because of additional
scattering and Absorption, both of which weaken
the intensity of the light on its way through the polymer. For a given sample, the so-called transmission is
the ratio of the intensity of the transmitted light to that
of the incident light. One differentiates between transparent bodies (transmission > 90 %) and translucent
bodies (transmission< 90 %). In the latter case, thin
bodies appear transparent.
Scattering of light
The above is valid for optically homogeneous systems.
Inhomogeneities (such as impurities - and in emulsions)
lead to further effects in the interaction with light.
Among these are light-scattering phenomena in which
a part of the light is dispersed in all directions. An example of this phenomenon is the weakening of the
light from automobile headlights in fog. In this case,
light is scattered by tiny drops of water. The scattering of light in crystal lattices make crystalline and partly crystalline polymers appear to be not transparent as in polyethylene, polypropylene and polyphenyl sulphide. Amorphous polymers, on the other hand, are
transparent (provided they contain no colouring), for
example polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, polymethyl
methacrylate (Plexiglas) and polysulfone. The phenomena can be illustrated very nicely by stretching an
amorphous sample (e. g. of polystyrene) to reorientate its molecules ( Stress-whitening ).
A body which scatters light appears to be opaque if
there are localised variations of the refractive index
and/or variations in the molecular orientation (in nonisotropic structures) - and if the inhomogeneous parts
are larger than the wavelength of the light used.
51
OSU (Ohio State University)
The heat release (HR) and the heat-release rate (HRR)

of plastics are measured in the OSU's combustion
chamber. The respective quantities may not exceed values of 65kW/m and 65 kW/m per minute when applied
to the interiors of those aircraft taken into service after
July 1990. (The upper limits OSU 65/65 replaced OSU
100/100 which had been valid up to that time).
Permeation/Permeability
The permeability of a substance is a measure of its

"leakiness", i.e. its ability to let a specific medium pass
through. Example: A piping system's permeability to
oxygen is often of critical importance. A substance's
permeability depends on the sizes of its microscopic
gaps and spaces.
The permeation of plastics by water vapour and gases is of interest for packaging, coverings, barrier films,
gaskets and seals, pipes, containers, etc. Diffusion and
Absorptionor Desorption of substances of low
molecular weight, e. g. of the water in or from polymersoftening agents are also of importance. If a substance
of low molecular weight, the permeator, penetrates into
a polymer, its coefficient of permeation P is defined as
the product of the coefficient of diffusion D and the coefficient of solubility S ("solubility"), i. e.
P = D S
For the given system and at a given temperature, the
coefficient of permeation P is an important parameter. It
is defined by the equation:
Q = P At p/d
Q is the quantity of gas or vapour, which in the time t
(and on account of the permeator's pressure difference
p between the front and the back of the layer), permeates through a polymer layer of area A and thickness d.
Coefficients of permeation of different polymer materials
Material
O2
(Oxygen)
N2 (Nitro- H2 (Hygen)
drogen)
CO2
(Carbon
Dioxide)
H2O
(Water
Vapour)
PE
8 - 19
2-6
25 - 55
32 - 75
0.5 1.5
PP
65
25
1.1
PVC
0.4
0.04
10
0.9
6.5
PVDF
0.7
0.2
<1.0
5.2
Positive list
BGA, FDA
RAL colours
Colour standards which conform to the register of

colours (colour charts) issued by the German Association for Quality and Labelling (RAL).
Scanning electron micrographs
In a scanning electron microscope, electromagnetic

lenses focus the electrons reflected from the surface of
the specimen being viewed to produce an image of the
surface on a screen or on a photographic plate.
Scanning electron micrographs are used by our company in the assessment of the inside surfaces of pipes and
of fracture surfaces.
52
Rupture stress
Tensile test
Chemical resistance factor fCR/Reciprocal

chemical resistance factor
The chemical resistance factor can be regarded as

a measure of the resistance to damage sustained by
piping used to transmit aggressive substances. In the
course of time, the damage (always compared to that
produced by water) leads to changes in the physical
properties of the piping, such as reduced compressive
strength. The factors are strongly temperature dependent. Relevant information can be found in the DVS
guidelines 2205, Part 1 and in the DIN standards of the
raw materials used for the piping
Pipe series S
The number S of a pipe series is a parameter which can

be used to calculate (ISO 4065) the wall thicknesse of
a pipe of given outer diameter d.
S 0.5 (d/e - 1) i. e.e d/(2 S + 1)
Pipes from a given series S and of a given material
quality all withstand the same pressure. However, the
number S is defined purely geometrically and it is often
used as a measure of pressure resistance. [ Nominal
Pressure (PN), SDR = Standard Dimension Ratio]
Oxygen index (LOI, limiting oxygen index)
A substance's oxygen index is the minimum concentration of O2 in a mixture of oxygen and nitrogen which just
sustains its combustion. The higher the need of oxygen
is, the lower shouldthe combustibility be. Use of the index in judging fire hazards is a matter of controvers.
Shear strength
Shear strength is the ability of a substance to withstand the stress as a result of two parts of a body being
pushed or pulled in sucha way that they slide relative to
one another. The shear strength is of particular interest
in parts which have been cemented together. It is determined by increasing the shear force applied to a simple overlapping joint until it breaks. According toEN ISO
9311-2, the shearing strength is a quantity applicable to
the entire joint.
Impact resistance (impact strength)/Notched

impact resistance
In the impact test, the energy needed to break or deform a sample is measured by letting a pendulum with
known kinetic energy (calculated from the corresponding potential energy = weight x distance fallen) collide
against the sample. The impact resistance is the work
(energy) per unit area of the critical cross-section (kJ/
m) needed to break the sample. It is determined, for
example, in the flexural impact test, which can be performed in two different ways:
1.Charpy's method: The impact occurs at the centre of
the sample, which stands on two supports.
2.Izod's method: The sample is held at one end while
the impact occurs at the other end.
The notch impact resistance is measured using a sample with notches.
Melt Flow Index (MFI)/Melt Flow Rate (MFR)
A thermoplastic material is melted in a cylinder and then

pressed through a die using the pressure exerted by
a piston. The MFI / MFR is the amount of material (in
grams) pressed through a standardized die by a given
force in 10 minutes.
This single-point measurement characterises the flow

of melted thermoplastics under certain conditions of
pressure and temperature. It gives an approximate indication of the material's processing (i. e. flow) properties and thus provides information on the influence that
working the material - or its thermal decomposition - can
have. In this respect, it is particularly significant for polyolefins.
Apparent density
The apparent density is the quotient obtained by dividing the mass of a powder or granulated substance used
in moulding, by its volume. It is given in g/ml (=g/cm)
and is measured by letting the substance trickle freely
through a standardised funnel into a beaker of a given
diameter. It is used to control the structure of powder or
granulated moulding compounds.
Shrinkage
Melted thermoplastics which are cooled contract on

solidification. The contraction can be explained by the
plastic's crystallization. Further shrinkage may arise after reheating polymer pipes which have been manufactured to have anisotropically orientated molecules. (
Internal stress)
One distinguishes between:
contraction in length
contraction in volume
contraction due to processing
delayed contraction
All these types of contraction are dependent on the substance used in the moulding, the processes carried out,
the shape of the tooling (e. g. of the dies), and on the
molecular orientation (anisotropy). Delayed contraction
also depends on outside influences.
SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio)
The SDR is the ratio d/e of a pipe's outer diameter d to

its wall thickness e. Besides this, other classifications
are the Pressure rating (PN) and the Pipe series
S. The definitions of the SDR and the pipes series number S depend exclusively on pipe dimensions. This is
not the case with the pressure rating (PN):
SDR = 2S + 1 = d/e
S = (d/e- 1)/2
Shore hardness
The Shore hardness is a way of quantifying hardness.

Two methods (Shore A and Shore D) are used in measurements - mainly on rubber-like, but also on soft and
elastic-loamed plastics. The measurements are of little practical importance for the plastics used in piping.
Measurements of the Shore hardness are performed
according to DIN 53505.
A spring presses a needle (a truncated cone for "Shore
A", a cone for "Shore D") with constant force onto
the sample. The depth to which the needle sinks into
the sample is a measure of the hardness. (The scale
ranges from 0 to 100 - without units.) Methods A and D
are used in different ranges of hardness.
Safety factor (SF)
Safety factors are important, for example, in determining a pipe's required dimensions, its pressure rating or
its anticipated service life.
The Hoop stress read from a long-term regression

curve ( Stress-rupture test) is taken to be a measure
of a pipe material's maximum pressure stability under
the given conditions. To ensure absolute safety in practice, this stress is divided by a safety factor SF to give
the value of the permissible stress per.
per (T, t, medium) = (T, t, water)/ SF
A high value safety factor, valuetherefore inevitably
leads to a low classification of a pipe's Pressure stability. Safety factors depend on a variety of circumstances (according to the pipe's application), for example:
variations in strength, possibly dependent on the raw
material or manufacturing process
impact stress caused by pressure impulses or external influences
safety margins for the uncertainties of practical use
thermal stresses due to temperature changes
flexural stresses produced by expansion or by ground
settling
flow medium
More details on the relationship between chemical resistance and safety factors can be found in the DVS
guidelines 2205, Part 1. The Chemical resistance
factor fCR for each of thevarious substances is given in
the DIBT list of media (German: Medienliste).
Of course, very important safety factors (some of them
temperature dependent) are those for the various pipe
materials with water as the flow medium.
Because of the ongoing development of pipe materials,
safety factors are subject to variations, which are partly
due to the establishment of new and different standards.
The standards evolve under the influence of considerations which are not only scientific and technical, but also
commercial and strategic. This is well illustrated by the
fact that for a given material, different safety factors are
used in different countries.
Please consult us if you have any questions concerning
safety factors!
Sieve analysis
Sieve analysis is used to determine the distribution of

grain or particle sizes, and to determine the proportions
by weight of different particle size ranges. Each category is determined by two consecutive sieve-mesh sizes.
Granulated substances used in moulding are analysed
with the help of machines which contain sieves positioned above each other.
These oscillate horizontally in a circle movement. According to DIN standards, sieve-mesh sizes are classified by standardised numbers. The classification is
the same as that recommended by the ISO. In processing PVC-U, sieve analysis of the pure PVC powder is a
powerful tool in maintaining the constant quality of the
required PVC-U formula.
Stress crack-inducing media
These are substances which cause an inhomogeneous

softening or a swelling of a plastic product. Hairlines
and cracks in pipes have a variety of causes. They are
the physical and/or chemical effects due to the flow
medium ( Swelling, Solution) in combination with
internal stress. The effects are accompanied by a partial
extension, a crazing, of the hairlines and cracks. When
53
plastic articles are immersed in the substances in question, hairlines and cracks are produced which depend
on internal strains and on external forces.
The following table shows some of the substances
which are particularly likely to produce hairlines and
cracks. The combinations of raw material and medium
are frequently used for testing purposes, i. e. for determining the level of internal stress in products made of
the given plastics. It is important that the suitability ofa
planned plastic piping system for use with various substances is discussed with the manufacturers - particularly if the piping is to transport surfactants
Plastic
Substance
PP
chromic acid
PVC-U
methanol
PSU
acetone
PS
petroleum/crude oil
PC
carbon tetrachloride
ABS
toluol, n-propanol
The presence in pressurised pipes (e. g. those made of

PVC-U, PE or PP) of substances which are surface active (surfactants) can reduce their durability quite considerably and lead to premature failure.
Formation of corrosion by stress-induced hairlines and cracks; Crazing
In a way these phenomena, which are observed in metals and in plastics, represent physico-chemical action.
In many cases, the inducing chemical reagent is simply
moisture.
For the phenomena to occur, stress ( Internal stress)
has to be present. It is of no consequence whether they
are caused by the manufacturing process, or by external influences (which are somewhat under the usual
limits of tensile strength). Hairlines and cracks appear
perpendicular to the direction of tensile stress. In many
plastics the effects are worsened by the substances
with which they are used, particularly by surface-active substances. The effect of these substances may be
due to impurities, or to constituents with low molecular
weight being dissolved out of the plastic. They could be
due to gradual swelling processes which enable the relaxation of locally frozen (internal) stress, resulting in the
formation of the observed hairlines/crazes.
It is certain, however, that the formation of stress-induced hairlines and cracks is accelerated considerably
by raising the temperature. If damaging (surface-active) substances act for longer periods of time (and possibly with internal or external stresses), hairlines can
penetrate through the walls - becoming cracks which
lead to the complete destruction of the pipe. Example:
This effect can be seen very nicely if a piece of unannealed PSU piping is put into acetone. Even after a
short time, hairlines followed by strong cracking can be
observed. Note: The expressions 'stress-induced corrosion', 'stress-induced cracking' and 'crazes' are sometimes used interchangeably. 'Stress-induced corrosion'
is, however, usually the designation for the formation
of hairlines on account of the chemical attack of a flow
medium on a pipe (i. e. it is a process involving both
the production of new and the breaking of old chemical
bonds).
54
Rigidity
The rigidity of a pipe is determined mainly by its elastic

modulus and its flexural strength. Both provide information on the deformations produced by certain loads.
The suitability of apart for an application in which rigidity is important is generally determined using a bending
test in which the influence of its material and shape are
examined.
The high value of ca. 3000 N/mm for the elastic modulus of PVC-U leads to high rigidity in pipes, even if
the walls are thin. The pipes have excellent properties
even under the long-term effect of stresses produced
by extension, compression, bending and shearing. The
modulus of elasticity should be taken into consideration
when assessing the rigidity of pipes made of other materials.
Radiation, resistance to
The depth to which radiation penetrates depends on

its type, its energy and on the resulting excitation
Absorption. In certain cases, ultraviolet radiation can
break chemical bonds, thereby splitting molecules. Generally, the changes which radiation causes in a polymer depend on various external factors. They depend,
in particular, on the radiation's energy dose. Many plastics are hardly influenced by radiation and are finding
increasing use in equipment which has to withstand
strong and energy-intensive radiation. UV radiation is
applied commercially in the photochemical cross-linking
of PE to PE-X. Pipes made of PE-X are frequently used
in sanitary installations for hot and cold water.
Annealing
In the manufacture of amorphous and semi-crystalline

plastic products, the cooling process ( Shrinkage) involved in shapingthe components leads to Internal
stress (i. e. molecular stress). Annealing is a subsequent heat treatment which produces the following improvements:
a) Removal of internal stress in amorphous thermoplastics when annealing near the Glass transition temperature. In the case of semi-crystalline thermoplastics,
a reduction of stress can often be achieved if the annealing is performed at temperatures below the melting
range. By doing this, the susceptibility to Formation
of stress-induced hairlines can be reduced considerably. Examples: PSU.
b) Increase of the crystalline proportion in semi-crystalline thermoplastics (post-crystallisation). This is associated with increased rigidity, hardness, abrasion resistance, a better dimensional stability under heat, etc. Examples: PPS
SeePhysical ageing.
Thermal stability
Thermal stability is a moulding compound's durability in

processing to thermal degradation, e.g. thermal oxidation. ( Pyrolysis; Chemical ageing)
One possibility of assessing the thermal stability is to
perform a time-trial by exposing the compound to a constant, predetermined test temperature in order to age it
thermally.
In polymers a depolymerisation or dissociation (e. g. of
HCI from PVC-U) can occur. According to EN 728 the
so-called Oxidation Induction Time (OIT), the time which
passes before oxidation begins, is used to characterise
the thermal stability of polymer compounds.
Thermoanalytical measurements using DSC

and DTA
The following thermoanalytical methods are used in investigations of the structures of polymers:
differential thermoanalysis (DTA)
differential scanning calorimetry (DSC)
thermogravimetric analysis (TGA)
dynamic mechanical analysis (DMA)
dilatometry
Differential thermoanalysis (DTA) and differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) are based on the same principle.
In both methods the test sample and a reference sample are heated (or cooled) simultaneously. By doing this,
the temperature difference between the samples (DTA)
and the difference between the specific temperatures
(DSC) are measured.
Because the DTA graphs are, ultimately, used to calculate the specific heats, and because all normally obtainable, modern equipment is of the DSC type, we will only discuss the DSC method. Thermograms are obtained
which show at which temperatures the processes are
endothermic (energy absorbing) or exothermic (energy
releasing). The processes can, for example, be the formation or the melting of crystals respectively. They can
also be Glass transitions in which overheating or undercooling is observed. Further examples of the application of DSC to polymers are the analysis of impurities,
the determination of the degree of cross-linkage, and
the examination of thermal stability. If a semi-crystalline
sample with unknown structure is melted in a DSC apparatus, the resulting thermogram gives information on
its crystalline structure and its degree of crystallinity before treatment.
DSC examinations of amorphous polymers enable
an analysis of their behaviour at Glass transition
. They also reveal equilibrium disturbances such as
the quenching of amorphous thermoplastic material.
Both DSC and DTA are very important polymer material tests, which give the user a good general view of
the polymer's structure and condition. Hence, DSC is a
valuable tool for quality assurance and for polymer research and development.
In TGA a polymer sample's change in mass is determined resulting from the application of a given temperature programme in a given gas atmosphere (N2, O2, air).
The graph of the experimental results reveals the reduction in weight when the temperature is raised.
Using DMA, it is possible to determine both storage and
loss moduli (E', E") of a polymer sample for a given temperature and at a given frequency of an applied sinusoidal vibration. The Relaxation modes(e. g. Glass
transition point) of various polymers can be analysed
using this technique.
UL94 inflammability
Standard 94 of the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL 94)

has established itself as the globally accepted norm for
the classification of a plastic's fire resistance. UL 94 prescribes how a material's ability to stop burning is to be
tested.
In the classification, the rate of burning, the time after
which burning stops, any drops produced, and the time
in which smouldering continues are all taken into ac-
count. For each material, many categories are possible (depending on wall thickness). The correct categorisation of a material corresponds to the component's
thinnest wall cross-section. UL 94 categories are only
comparable and meaningful if the applicable wall thicknesses are given.
UL 94 prescribes the following groups - in which the
best category is the last:
UL 94 HB
UL 94 V-2
UL 94 V-1
UL 94 V-0
UL 94 5V
UL 94 5VB
UL 94 5VA
Hoop stress (circumferential stress)
If every point of an elastic hoop (e. g. of an O-ring) is

pressed uniformly in an outward direction, the hoop
becomes larger and its material is put under stress. In
analogy, a plastic pipe expands (at least very slightly)
when subjected to inside pressure. Its circumference
becomes enlarged, causing a so-called hoop (or circumferential) stress in the pipe material. This stress is
an important means of quantifying a pipe's state of tension.
The relationship between the inside pressure and the
pipe material's hoop stress is given by the Vessel formula.
Vicat softening point
In the Vicat test, measurements of a plastic's softening temperature are made. The flattened end of a round
needle of area 1 mm is pressed (with predetermined
force and at steadily increasing ambient temperature)
onto the surface of a sample of the material. The softening point (VST = Vicat Softening Temperature) is
reached when the needle penetrates 1mm into the sample. Practicable alternatives are:
Method A with an applied force of 10N .
Method B with an applied force of 50N (ISO 306)
In each case the temperature can be raised by 50 C or
by 120 C per hour. The test conditions are called A50,
A120, B50 or B120
Thermal conductivity
There is a time-dependent transfer of heat (Q) between

two points of a body which have different temperatures.
Considering a wall of cross-sectional area A and thickness e, the heat conducted from one side to the other is
directly proportional to the (maintained) temperature difference between the sides, to the area A and to the time
t. It is inversely proportional to the thickness e:
Q = A t T/e
The constant of proportionality k depends on the wall's
material and is called its coefficient of thermal conductivity.
[] = W / (m K) = Wm K
-1
-1
W = watt, m = metre, K = Kelvin (= C).

In general plastics have very low values of thermal conductivity compared with other materials such as metals.
For this reason they are often used for thermal insulation.
55
Substance
Coefficient of thermal conductivity

(Wm-1K-1)
Foam Plastics
0.02 - 0.05
PVC-U
0.16
PVC-C
0.17
PP-H
0.22
PE-HD
0.41
Copper
400
Water
0.61
Air
0.023
Stress-whitening
Stress-whitening is a light-scattering phenomenon

which can be seen in parts of a stretched plastic sample (transparent or coloured). It is often accompanied
by the formation of crazes ( Formation of / corrosion
by stress-induced hairlines and cracks; crazing), i.
e. by the formation of microscopic, usually lenticular areas, the boundaries of which are bridged by individual,
extremely strong strands of the material. Stress-whitening is a sign of overloading.
( Optical properties of polymers)
Weathering; UV stability; Atmospheric exposure
These headings cover the resistance of a material to atmospheric exposure, e. g. to temperature and temperature fluctuations, atmospheric oxygen, ozone, humidity,
UV radiation, environmental pollution (sulphur dioxide,
nitrogen oxides) and impact by hailstones.
These factors can lead to a radical change in a
polymer's basic properties, including its colour stability.
Only some polymers are sufficiently resistant to degradation by light and by weathering. Many products (e. g.
PE-HD black) have to be mixed with active carbon black
- which still has the best stabilising effect against light
and weathering. Quantities of 2 % to 4 % are usual. Atmospheric exposure can cause changes in a plastic's
appearance (sheen, colour, hairlines), chemical composition and handling properties. Chemical ageing,
Radiation, resistance to
Permeability to water vapour
This a special case of general permeability and is important for the application of plastics as packaging material and as a basic material for cable sleeving. The
permeability to water vapour depends on the material's
thickness. The unit used isgrams per m and day.
Stress-rupture test
Stress-rupture tests are used to examine a polymer's

Creep behaviour and are the basis on which the
Pressure rating, required dimensions or anticipated
Service life of pipes (made of the polymer) can be determined.
In the tests, pipe samples filled with a test fluid (usually
water) and held at constant temperature in a water bath
or a hot-air oven, are subjected to constant inside pressure causing a three-axial stress. The pipes are tested
until they fail (i. e. break, rupture, burst). The Vessel
formula is used to calculate the Hoop stress resulting from the internally applied pressure in a pipe of given dimensions.
There are different types of stress-rupture tests:
56
a) Short-time burst-pressure tests

These tests are performed by applying the highest pressure possible. Failure results even after a few seconds.
Such tests give important information about the pressure resistance of new products under the respective
conditions.
b) Long-term stress-rupture tests
Long-term tests on pipe samples are performed (in
compliance with DIN 53759) to obtain the data presented in long-term regression curves. Each curve is a
double logarithmic plot of the time after which the pipe
samples (of given material at a given temperature) fail,
against the corresponding, applied Hoop stress. Using standardised statistical algorithms, the curves can
be extrapolated to predict a material's creep behaviour
even for very long periods of time. (The tests on the
commonly used pipe materials PE, PP and PVC-U have
been running for well over 30 years!) The use of hoop
stress instead of pressure makes the curves independent of pipe dimensions, i. e. it makes them a representation of a property of the given pipe material. This accounts for the extraordinary importance of the long-term
regression curves.
c) Spot tests:
Long experience has shown that stress-rupture tests
can be carried out in a comparatively short time if performed at higher temperatures than those found in practical working use (principle of time-temperature superposition). Such tests are used, for example, in the quality control of batches of manufactured goods (as demanded in the applicable DIN specifications and
DVGW guidelines). Examples of the hoop stress0 prescribed (in DIN) for such tests are given in the following
table.
Temperature in
C
Material
0 in N/mm
60
PVC-U
10
80
PE
95
PP-H
3.5
Shortened tests should only be applied if the long-term

creep behaviour of the given material is already known.
Tensile test
In the tensile test, a sample (or component) is forcefully extended, in the direction of its longitudinal axis until it
reaks.
The following values can be obtained from the curve of
tensile stress plotted against elongation:
tensile strength at maximum load = greatest stress
sustained (N/mm)
tensile strength at break = stress at breaking point (N/
mm)
tensile strength at yield = first relative maximum (N/
mm) of the curve
percentage extensions correspond to the named
stresses.
Basics in general and polymer chemistry

Absorption
Broadly speaking, absorption is a "sucking-up" or "taking-in" process. Examples: Plastics can absorb solvents
which cause Swelling. Electromagnetic energy (e.
g. visible light) can be absorbed by a material and be
changed to heat, or give rise to effects such as fluorescence, splitting of molecules, and potential differences
due to the separation of electric charges (solar cells).
Additives
In the context of polymer technology, 'additive' is the

collective term for auxiliary materials which are mixed
with a polymer to effect a change in its behaviour or
properties. There are two categories of additives, i. e.
those which:
1.enable a proper processing.
Examples: stabilisers, lubricants.
2.change the properties of the polymer to achieve longterm use. Examples: UV stabilisers, softening agents,
fillers, pigments, flame retardants and, sometimes,
other polymers ( Blends).
Adhesion (= adsorption)
This is the sticking-together of two different phases (i.

e. media) at their common boundary. It is due to the attraction (the so-called adhesive forces) which existbetween the molecules of one medium and those of the
other. Examples: adhesion is what causes a drop of liquid to weta surface (as opposed to the surface tension
of the liquid, which tends to hold the drop together). Adhesion is what causes chalk to stick to a blackboard.
The opposite of adsorption is called desorption.
dered in a large volume. The spatial arrangement of

the chains in amorphous polymers (the arrangement of
the elements of the chains and of their bonding angles)
leads these polymers to set in a disorderly fashion. In
the solid state, the chains ofamorphous polymers are
disorientated or, at best, only locally ordered. In a semicrystalline polymer's solid state, the amorphous parts
are surrounded by crystalline parts. Examples: PPS,
PP, PE.
For thermodynamic reasons, a purely crystalline polymer, i. e. a "polymer monocrystal", is strictly speaking
not possible.
Inorganic/ Inorganic chemistry
Inorganic chemistry deals with all the elements and their

compounds, except for carbon, of which only the oxides,
cyanides and carbides are covered.
AOX (adsorbable organic halogen compound)
This is the sum parameter of the halogenated hydrocarbons in water.
Aromatic compounds
Aromatic compounds are a large category of organic

substances. They have flat, ring-shaped structures with
a characteristic distribution of electrons, behave in a
particular way in reactions, and are chemically very stable. Benzene (benzol) is an important member of this
category. The name "aromatic" stems from those substances which were once largely extracted from plants
and which had an "aromatic" smell. Examples: aromatic
polymers include almost all plastics, e. g. PPS and PEI.
Aerosol
An aerosol is a homogeneous distribution of fine liquid

droplets in a gas.
Benzene
Active carbon (activated charcoal)
Atom
Aliphatic compounds
The nucleus contains protons, each of which is nearly 2000 times as heavy as an electron, and carries as
much positive electricity as an electron's negative elementary charge. As all atoms contain the same number of electrons as protons, they are electrically neutral. This number is characteristic of what is called an
element. Example: the element oxygen has 8 protons
and therefore also 8 electrons. The elements are listed
systematically in the so-called periodic table of the elements.
Active carbon is a collective term for various forms of

microcrystalline carbon. These forms differ in the size
of their pores. By using the active carbon's Adsorption, substantial quantities of organic substances can
be removed from a liquid or gas phase. Examples:
Active carbon is used in kitchen ventilator units to remove odours and vapours (as in cooker hoods or stove
vents), in the filters of gas masks, and in filters used to
purify water.
In the polymer industry, carbon black is used to stabilise
polyolefins against UV radiation. Special grades of carbon black are used to make polymers electrically conductive.
The molecules of this class of substances contain linear
and branched chains of carbon atoms. Aliphatic compounds contain only C-C or C-H bonds and are therefore relatively unpolar ( Polarity), chemically rather inactive or even inert. Examples: polyolefins like PP or PE
are good examples of this class, as well as countless
compounds of low molecular weight, such as benzine,
butane and paraffin.
Amorphous/semi-crystalline
When thermoplastic polymers solidify, their molecular chains are more or less of an even structure. The
molecules of a crystalline substance are spatially or-
The continued division of a material leads to the smallest particles which can exist alone and independent
from each other. These are the material's atoms. Nowadays about 300 different variants (so-called nuclides)
are known. Each atom contains a characteristic number of electrons (carriers of negative electrical charge)
and a nucleus. The electrons surround the nucleus like
a shell or cloud and arefound at different distances
from the nucleus. They are, therefore, not all equally
easy to remove. In most chemical reactions, only the
atom's electrons are involved - usually the outer ones, i.
e. those electrons at the greatest distance from the nucleus.
Besides the protons, the nucleus of an atom contains

other elementary particles, i. e. neutrons. These have
no electrical charge, are about as heavy as protons and
57
function like a "glue", which holds the protons together.

The atoms of a given element can differ in the number
of neutrons, in this case we say that the element has
different isotopes.
Atomic weight/Relative atomic mass
All substances consist of atoms. Each element has a

characteristic mean "weight". Because the weights of
the atoms are so minute, a scale using grams gives values which are far too small for practical use. Instead, a
scale based on the unified atomic mass constant u, i. e.
1/12th of the mass of a (particular sort of) carbon atom
is used. The relationship 1 u = 1.6605 x 10 kg gives an
idea of the difference between the scales. An atom's socalled atomic weight is its relative atomic mass, i.e. the
ratio of the atom's mass to the unified atomic mass constant.
An atom's gram-atomic weight (or gram-atom) is the
mass (in grams) of one Mole of the atoms.
-27
Example: for neon gas (Ne):

atomic weight = relative atomic mass
= 20
gram-atomic weight = gram-atom
= 20 g
molar mass (i.e. mass per mole)
= 20 g/mole
mass of neon atom
= 20 u
(u = unified atomic mass constant. Atomic weight)
Blend
In the context of this book, a blend is a homogeneous

mixture of polymers (analogous to alloys of metals). Alloys are mixed to produce a given combination of properties. Blends of polymers, however, are often highly complicated and unstable systems. This is due to a
lack of "compatibility" of certain polymers. In polymer
technology, blends are of immense importance when
achieving the required balance of material properties.
BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand; Biochemical

Oxygen Demand)
The BOD (German: BSB = Biologischer Sauerstoff-Bedarf) is the mass of oxygen used by micro-organisms
to oxidise an organic substance in a unit volume of water at 20 C. Measurements usually take 5 days to complete (BOD5).
Chemical active substances
In this context, chemically active substances are those

which attack or change the material of which a pipe is
made.
Example: PP can be chemically degraded by having its
molecules (its carbon chains) broken by strongly oxidizing agents.
Chemical ageing
Chemical ageing is the collective name for all those

processes which cause a chemical degradation of or a
change in a polymer's molecules. The most important of
these causes are:
(i) Photochemical reactions:
Radiation incident on the polymer causes chemical
bonds to break. (-->UV-stability, --> Radiation, resistance to)
(ii) Thermally induced chemical ageing:
Higher temperatures make it possible for certain degradation processes to occur.
(iii) Contact with flow media:
58
A polymer's limited -->Chemical resistance to certain

categories of media can lead to degradation and to noticeable damage. Examples: sensitivity of PP to oxidizing agents, such as chromic acid. PVDF is sensitive to
caustic solutions.
Chemical resistance
The chemical resistance of a substance is a complex

property which depends (inter alia) on its chemical composition and on the way it has been processed / manufactured. The chemical resistance of a polymer pipe depends predominantly on its chemical structure, on additives, on its crystalline structure and on the condition
of its surfaces. As chemical resistance depends, ultimately, on the possibility of chemical reactions occurring (reaction kinetics), the conditions under which they
take place (pressure, temperature, radiation, mechanical loads, concentration of chemicals and the duration
of contact with them, etc.) are alsodecisive. According
to the existing standards (DIN 16888, Parts 1 and 2),
there are three categories for a thermoplastic pipe's behaviour under chemical attack: "resistant" (+), "conditionally resistant" (0) and "not resistant" (-). The following table lists synonyms and logograms:
DIN
16888
-1, -2
DIN Supplements to
8061/8078
Lists of
chemical resistance
ISO 4433
resistant
satisfactory (S)
BW
conditionally resistant
limited (L)
NW
nicht resistant
not satisfactory (NS)
Chemical stability; Corrosion; Swelling;

Physically active substances; Chemically active
substances.
Chlorine, chemistry of:
Because of the large number of customers' questions

concerning the Chemical resistance of GF plastic
pipes to substances containing chlorine, a summary of
the most important facts is given here.
Chlorine (chemical formula CI2) is one of the most important primary products of modern chemistry. In spite
of heated discussion in the last few years, it still has to
be regarded as a necessary and ecologically viable basic chemical for use in many large-scale industrial processes (e. g. in the production of sodium hydroxide).
On a large scale it is usually manufactured by the electrolysis of alkali-metal chlorides. Chlorine and sodium
hydroxide (caustic soda) are produced in an electrochemical redox reaction from a concentrated common
salt solution. One distinguishes between the diaphragm,
the amalgam (mercury) and, more recently, the membrane processes.
Note: Reinforced PVC-C has been used on the "chlorine side", i.e. on the side of the anode, and proved itself to be an excellent material. In this application, our
customers (world-wide) rely on the extraordinarily good
quality of components made of PVC-C.
On the cathode side and for brine feed ducts,
polypropylene pipes have proved to be the best in their
resistance to highly concentrated caustic soda. This is
an important application of PP components summary of
the most important aspects of chlorine chemistry: Chlo-
rine is a very versatile Element. Via Reduction, its

atoms each take up an electron, and a so-called "chloride" (= CI ) is produced - such as gaseous hydrogen
chloride (HCI - its solution in water is called hydrochloric
acid) and common salt (NaCI). Chlorine can also be oxidized, in which case each chlorine atom can lose up to
seven electrons from its outer shell. This unusually large
number of electrons has the effect that several different
chlorine compounds can result, the most important of
which are given in the following table.
-
Number of
electrons
lost (+) or
gained (-)
(Oxidation
state)
Formu- Name of
la of
acid
acid
Formula after removal

of water
(anhydride)
Name
of corresponding
salt
-1
HCI
Hydrogen
chloride
(solution
in water is
known as
hydrochloric acid)
chloride
+1
HCIO
hypochlorous acid
CI2O
hypoclorite
+3
HCIO2 chlorous
acid
chlorite
+5
HCIO3 chloric acid -
chlorate
+7
HCIO4 perchloric
acid
perchlorate
CI2O7
Important notes:
All chlorine compounds with positive oxidation states
(oxidation numbers) are, to a greater or lesser degree, strongly oxidizing agents (e. g. hypochlorites,
chlorites). The use, for example, of the polyolefins
(PP and PE) as piping for these substances must always be discussed carefully with our customers. At
our company, we have considerable expertise in dealing with these and similar matters. Our long, unusually
comprehensive experience in the planning and installation of chemical plants makes us confident that we
can solve your problems in such matters - in consultation with you.
When chlorine is passed through water, it is partly
changed into chlorides and hypochlorites. The latter
decompose slowly, releasing oxygen. This, in part, is
how swimming pools are disinfected. At higher temperatures, hypochlorites decompose into chlorides
and chlorates.
COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand)
The COD (German: CSB = Chemischer Sauerstoffbedarf) this value quantifies the oxidizable substances
contained in water. It indicates a volume-related measure of oxygen whichisequivalent to this oxidant potassium dichromate for the oxidative breakdown of organic
substances.
Compounding
This is the concept of putting Additives into polymers. It includes making the component parts of the
necessary mixtures homogeneous. Example: some
polymer mixtures are compounded at our company using our own, well-established formulas for the manufacture of pipes.
Copolymer
A copolymer results from a Polymer synthesis using

many monomers, without regard to the method used.
The individual monomers are combined on the basis of
chemical criteria which can be described using so-called
copolymerization parameters. Copolymers are subdivided into:
(i) statistical copolymers (random copolymers): the different monomers are united unsystematically, but in
proportion to their relative amounts. Examples: PPR, Type 3, has up to 6 % of ethylene (by weight) as
comonomer. SAN is a copolymer made of styrene and
acrylonitrile.
(ii) block copolymers: these can be imagined as having
normal polymer chains (of monomer A) in which complete sections ("blocks") consist of chains of a second
polymer (monomer B). Example: PP-B (Type 2) is a
block copoIymer made of propylene and 8 % to 10 %
(by weight) of ethylene (PE blocks).
(iii) graft copolymers: in a chemical reaction, chains of a
polymer B are "grafted" as side chains onto chains of a
main polymer A.
CSB
COD
DAB
Abbreviation for "Deutsches Arzneibuch" ( = German

Pharmaceutical Codex)
Disinfection
Disinfection is the elimination of pathogenic (i. e. disease-causing) micro-organisms in certain situations (e.
g. the removal of one particular type of germ). Disinfection, in contrast to Sterilisation, is a partial, not an
absolute process.
Disinfectant
Disinfectants are a category of substances which, on

account of their chemical composition, harm germs.
Their effect can, for example, be due to damage done
to the micro-organism's protein structure. (Protein is
found, for example in a cell's DNS and DNA). Disinfection can be achieved by retarding or stopping the
microoganism's growth, or by radically killing it off. Important factors are the concentration of the disinfectant,
the length of time it is used, and its temperature. It is often possible to disinfect using heat alone (pasteurization).
Examples of disinfectants are: acids, caustic solutions,
- Oxidizing agents, halogens (e. g. iodine, chlorine),
certain compounds of heavy metals, alcohols, aldehydes (e. g. formaldehyde), and ethylene oxide (for sterilization at room temperature).
In piping systems disinfectants need to be given particular attention. They are often used with surface active solutions ( Surfactants), which are known to frequently
trigger off stress-induced cracks in polymers.( Formation of / corrosion by stress-induced hairlines and
cracks; crazing)
Dissociation
The breaking up of substances, in melts or in solutions,

into more or less freely moving Ions is called (electrolytic) dissociation.
59
Dry-blend powder mixture
This concept arises in connection with Compounding and is the name of a particular quality of mixtures of
plastics and additives. Dry blends are so well mixed (homogenized) that the mixture can be used directly in an
extruder or in an injection-moulding machine.
Thermosetting plastics (thermosets)
The polymer chains of thermosetting plastics are so

strongly cross-linked, that thermal deformation (below
the decomposition temperature) is often impossible.
Moulded parts and semi-finished products can only be
manufactured using the "precursor" plastic, i. e. before
cross-linking takes place. The parts and products are
then hardened thermally or photochemically (possibly
by adding cross-linking agents or hardeners).
Examples: bakelite, many dual-component adhesives,
PAI, curing of PPS, manufacture of polyimides, thermal
cyclization of polyacrylonitrile (PAN) to graphite and to
carbon fibres. (Cf. Thermoplastics, Elastomers)
Elastomers
Elastomers consist of molecules with a relatively small

degree of cross-linking. The segments of the mesh are
assembled spatially in a relatively simple way, making
these parts able to move relative to each other even at
lower temperatures. This means that the glass transition
temperature TG is usually observed at negative temperatures (e. g. for polyisobutane at TG= -70 C). Above TG
these polymers are rubber-elastic. They are only moderately deformable because of counteracting forces which
arise within the mesh.
Examples: all sorts of rubber. Thermoplastics, -
Thermosetting plastics (Thermosets).
Electrolytes
Electrolyte is the collective term for chemical compounds which, in solution or in the melted state, conduct
electricity. One distinguishes between strong and weak
electrolytes.
Enzymes
Enzymes are proteins which function as Catalysts, i.

e. they facilitate chemical reactions without undergoing
any permanent chemical change themselves. Each enzyme catalyses specific biochemical reactions.
Flame retardants
Protection from flames can be improved by using shielding layers or by the admixture of flame retardants (as
Additives or in the monomer). The way in which the latter work is only known in a few cases. The choice of retardant is, therefore, usually empirically based.
Underlying effects:
(i) oxygen is excluded by the production of nonflammable gases, and
(ii) the flames are "poisoned" by Radicals.
Examples: when a polycarbonate, PEEK or PEI decomposes, it gives off carbon dioxide and water, which
smother flames. Flame retardants containing halogens
(bromine or chlorine) decompose in heat, producing
halogen radicals. These combine with the radicals produced by the combustion (of the polymer) poisoning the
flames (halon fire extinguishers). In a similar way, antimony (III) oxide (Sb4O6) functions as a "radical grabber" by reacting with halogen compounds. (This antimony oxide is the flame retardant in PP-s and in PSU
"UDEL 1725".) Note the difference between combustion
inhibitors [effect (i)] and flame-retardants [effect (ii)].
60
Fluorinated hydrocarbons
If fluorine is introduced into a compound, it is said to

be fluorinated. Important fluorinated hydrocarbons are
the chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). Of these, the so-called
Freons have properties (Iow boiling points and high
chemical stability) which have made them useful as refrigerants in air-conditioning systems and in refrigerators. They are also used as propellant gases in aerosol
dispensers and in the manufacture of foamed (or expanded) plastics. Each FreonXYZ is classified with the
help of a three-digit number:
X
number of carbon atoms per molecule minus

one (For molecules with only one carbon atom,
i. e. for methane derivatives, X = 0. In this case
the first digit is omitted.)
number of hydrogen atoms per molecule plus

one
number of fluorine atoms per molecule (All other

atoms are chlorine).
Examples:
Fluorotrichloromethane CCI3F = Freon 11
Chlorodifluoromethane CHCIF2 = Freon 22
When Freons are used in fire extinguishers, they are
called halonsABCD (A, B, C and D being the number of
carbon, fluorine, chlorine and bromine atoms respectively.)
Because of their volatility and high chemical stability,
Freons of low molecular weight reach the upper atmosphere, where they cause decomposition of the ozone
layer. For this reason the use of Freons has been progressively reduced world-wide, or even forbidden.
Fluoropolymers
Fluoropolymers are the whole range of plastics in which

the monomers, in some way or other, contain the element fluorine. Depending on the polymer structure
and the types of monomers or comonomers, one distinguishes between:
(i) completely fluorinated polymers: polymers which only contain carbon and fluorine (PTFE, FEP or PFA/TFA)
and
(ii) partly fluorinated polymers: polymers which contain
fluorine, carbon and hydrogen (PVDF, PVF, ETFE).
Fluoropolymers have very good chemical stability.
Physically, they have relatively good temperature stability as well as good mechanical and electrical properties.
They have particularly good sliding characteristics and
withstand adhesives. (This is because a fluoropolymer's
secondary structure causes a negatively charged surface layer of fluorine, leading to repulsive forces between molecules.)
Fillers
Fillers are special Additives. They are additional materials which increase the mass or volume of a polymer
(making it cheaper), or produce a desired change of
properties.
Examples: added glass fibres (GF) or synthetic and carbon fibres (CF) improve a plastic's mechanical properties. Added chalk, quartz and mica are used, for example, to increase a polymer's density and to improve its
handling properties in an extruder. Note the difference
between glass fibres (GF) and glass-reinforced plastics
( FRP), between carbon fibres (CF) and carbon fibrereinforced plastics (CFP)!
Functional groups
Almost all reactions in organic chemistry ( Organic /

organic chemistry) depend on the presence of parts
of molecules with an electron density that is either relatively low (electrophilic parts) or relatively high (nucleophilic parts). These "reactive centres" arise through
the insertion of functional groups, the most important of
which are to be found in the following short survey. The
particular significance of the groups is that they each
have their own characteristic combination of properties.
If these properties are known, most of the properties of
a molecule (even of a macromolecule) in which a functional group is present can be approximately predicted.
This is very useful e. g. in assessing the Chemical
resistance of plastic piping systems to certain media.
(R = univalent group or Radical in an organic
molecule)
1) Halides (organohalogen compounds):
Structure: R-X, where X = halogen atom (F, CI, Br or
I ).
Properties: the halogen atom is easily replaced (by other atoms or groups of atoms). It causes an electron
deficit in the atom to which it is bonded (usually carbon).
In many cases its presence in a molecule makes the entire molecule polar.
Examples: all halogenated hydrocarbons such as chloroform (CHCI3), vinyl chloride, chlorofluorocarbons
(CFC), Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Fluoropolymers.
2) Alcohols:
Structure: R-OH
Properties: the properties are similar to those of the
structure element R-X. Under certain conditions the OH group can be replaced by a halogen. The group often functions like an acid. Acid / alkali (= base) Alcohols often react with carboxylic acids to produce esters and water. Being polar, they have particular properties in relation to solvents. All alcohols of low molecular
weight (e. g. methanol, ethanol) are more soluble in water than in their respective hydrocarbons. Depending on
their structure, alcohols can be oxidised to aldehydes,
ketones or carboxylic acids.
Examples:
Isopropanol
Ethanol
Properties: aldehydes are relatively reactive. Important

reactions are those with alcohols and those which take
place due to the ease with which aldehydes can be oxidised. The aldehyde group gives the molecule polar
properties.
Example:
Formaldehyde
4) Ketones
Structure:
Properties: the polarity is similar to that of the aldehydes

for equal lengths of the Radical R. Ketones are, however, much less easily oxidised. Some ketones of low
molecular weight are widely used solvents.
Examples:
Acetone
Cyclohexanone
5) Carboxylic acids:
Structure:
Properties: the combination of the -OH and -C = O

groups in one functional group, the carboxyl group, lowers the electron density ( Polarity) of its carbon atom,
thereby increasing its reactivity. Carboxylic acids have
acidic properties (e. g. they form salts when added to
alkali solutions or to certain metals). In condensation
reactions with alcohols, they form esters; with amines,
they form amides. These reactions are utilized in polymerisation [polyesters, polyamides (e. g. nylon)]. Modifications of the carboxyl group with higher reactivity are
to be found in the corresponding carboxylic acid anhydrides and carboxylic acid chlorides.
Examples:
Phenol
3) Aldehydes
Structure:
Oxalic acid
Benzoic acid
R=H
(formic acid)
R = CH3
(acetic acid)
With long-chained, unpolar, univalent groups R, socalled fatty acids are formed. Example: R = CH3-(CH
2)16- yields stearic acid. The metallic salts of this acid
61
(stearates) are used widely and in different ways as

Additives in polymers. Fatty acids have surface-active
properties. Soaps are the salts of such acids.
6) Esters
Structure:
(ii) External lubricants should not have much Affinity with the plastic. In processing they have to leave the
body of the polymer, moving towards the boundary surfaces, where they build a slippery film between the machine and the polymer melt. However, a certain affinity is indeed required so that the lubricants are not deposited permanently on the tools used. Examples: waxes and long-chained fatty acids.
Homogeneous
Properties: in the simplest case, esters are formed by
the reaction of acids with alcohols. The ester group is
somewhat sensitive to acids, to alkali solutions and to
water. Esters find diverse chemical applications - as basic, intermediate and final products.
Examples: depending on the length of their molecules,
esters are called fats or oils. Waxes are the esters of alcohols and carboxylic acids with longer chains. Esters
of low molecular weight are known as fruit flavouring.
Glass
Glass is the name given to a large class of substances

which retain their disordered molecular arrangement on
being cooled out of the liquid phase. There is no crystallisation and no constant temperature at which solidification occurs. These so-called "amorphous" substances
can be viewed as supercooled liquids. They have a
high viscosity and there is no symmetry in the way the
molecules are arranged or aligned. They do not, therefore, conform to the familiar "gas-liquid-solid" scheme.
Examples: polystyrol, PMMA and PC (polymers); amorphous silicone (semiconductors); many proteins and alcohols.
Glass transition
The transformation of a glass-forming substance from

its liquid to its glass (amorphous) state does not take
place (as with a crystal) at a definite melting point, but in
a temperature range of some (degrees) Kelvin. It proves
to be the case that the so-called glass transition temperature (TG) depends on the speed with which the substance is heated or cooled. If an amorphous plastic is
heated to its glass transition temperature, the chain segments of its molecules are "animated".
Above TG its mechanical properties worsen drastically on account of the molecular motion ( Relaxation)
which is then possible. The glass transition temperature
signifies an upper limit at which an amorphous material can be worked or used. It is determined experimentally and routinely, e. g. by calorimetric measurements
( Thermoanalytical measurements using DSC and
DTA) or by mechanical and dielectric relaxation spectroscopy.
Examples: PMMA, TG 90 C; PC, TG 145 C; rubber,
TG 70 C.
Lubricants
Lubricants are a processing aid. They are Additives

used to reduce a plastic melt's internal and external friction.
(i) Internal lubricants allow a polymer's chains to slide
past one another. As with softening agents, they reduce
the melt's viscosity. They are partially soluble in polymers. Usually compounds are used which have a low
molecular weight and Surfactant properties, e. g.
modified esters from long chained fatty acids.
62
"Homogeneous" is synonymous with "uniform" - the opposite of "heterogeneous".
Homopolymer
In contrast to a copolymer, a homopolymer is a "pure"

polymer, i. e. one made of a single Monomer.
Example: PP-H, Type 1, has only propylene as a
monomer.
Hydrolysis
There are salts which, dissolved in water, react not in

a neutral but in an acidic or alkaline way ( pH Value). The cause of this effect is hydrolysis, i. e. nothing
more than the effect of water splitting salts into acids
and bases. Hydrolysis, the opposite of neutralisation, is
only observed with salts which are made from so-called
"weak" acids and/or "weak" bases.
Hydrophobic
"Hydrophobic" is the opposite of "hydrophilic". ( Surfactants) A substance, usually organic, is said to be hydrophobic if it is water repellent, if it does not dissolve in
polar solvents (such as water) or if it does not mix with
polar materials. The substance's hydrophobic property is usually associated with the presence of unpolar
aliphatic chains ( -[CH2]-) in its molecules. Example: one
end of a Surfactant molecule is hydrophobic. The
other end is hydrophilic.
Hygroscopicity
Hygroscopicity is a substance's ability to take up water,

either chemically (e. g. as with concentrated sulphuric
acid) or physically. ( Solvation)
Ion
A positively charged ion (cation) is obtained if one

or several electrons are removed from an atom or
molecule. ( Oxidation) Similarly, a negatively charged
ion (anion) is obtained when (additional) electrons are
incorporated into the atom or molecule. ( Reduction)
Cations and anions are the two possible sorts of ions.
Example: common salt (sodium chloride, NaCI) consists of the cations Na (sodium atoms, each with one
electron removed) and of the anions CI (chlorine atoms,
each with one extra electron). The salt's electrical neutrality shows that both types of ions are numerically
present in the ratio 1: 1.
+
Ion exchanger
An ion exchanger is an important device used in chemical processes such as various chromatography procedures and in demineralizing water. It consists of a
specially prepared synthetic resin, e. g. one based on
polystyrol. The resin contains Functional groups
which (depending on their type) exchange either their
positive or negative ions with those of a medium flowing
past.
Catalyst
A catalyst is a substance which apparently takes no part

in chemical reactions, but does accelerate them. A more
accurate analysis of such reactions shows that the catalyst is indeed chemically changed, but is re-formed in
the end. Its participation in the reaction is therefore not
evident.
Rubber (Caoutchouc)
Rubber is the generic term for largely Amorphous

polymers, with a glass transition temperature below the
temperature of use. Depending on the way they are produced, one distinguishes between natural and synthetic
rubbers. A rubber which has been loosely cross-linked
(chemically) is called soft rubber (or simply "rubber")
and is an elastomer. A rubber which has been highly
cross-linked (chemically) is called hard rubber. Crude
rubbers (caoutchouc) are important raw materials for
elastomers. Note the difference between elastomers
and thermoplastic elastomers.
KBE (Colony-Building Unit)
The KBE (German: Koloniebildende Einheit) is a quantity used in counting bacteria, particularly in certain methods of producing cultures.
Silicic Acid
Silicic acid is the collective name of a large number of

silicon compounds which are obtained from the condensation of so-called orthosilicic acid H2SiO4. Molecular
networks are produced which can adsorb a large quantity of water. Further condensation leads to their becoming ever more viscous. Finally, they coagulate (gelatinous silica). If the resulting gel yields more water, it becomes silica gel which, like Active carbon, is a good
adsorbing agent. Heating silica gel to incandescence
produces quartz.
Example: these substances are used to give the required degree of viscosity in many plastic adhesives.
Cohesion
Cohesive forces are forces which attractbetween the

molecules of a Phase. In the solid state, they determine the strength and mechanical stability of a material.
Cf. Adhesion.
Carbon
The element carbon, chemical symbol C, has the allotropes, diamond, graphite, and so-called "amorphous"
forms (like soot and active carbon). Each variety of
these forms consists of finely crystalline graphite. Carbon atoms, unlike other atoms, are able to combine with
each other in practically limitless ways to form chains
and rings. The resulting multitude of compounds is the
subject matter of -->Organic chemistry.
Carbon atoms each have four valency electrons, i. e.
electrons which participate in chemical bonding. Examples: a carbon atom can have four single bonds (as
in chloroform CCI4). It can have a double bond and
two single bonds (as in ethylene CH2 = CH2). It can
have a triple bond and one single bond (as in acetylene
HC=HC).
Hydrocarbons
Collective term for those organic compounds which only

contain carbon and hydrogen.
Concentration
The concentration of a component substance (in a mixture, solution, etc.) is its quantity per unit volume or
mass ("weight") of the total. Common units of concentration are percent by volume, percent by mass (by
"weight"), g/l and mol/l.
Corrosion
Corrosion can be described, quite generally, as the

chemical change on the surface of a solid body.
Example: damage done by certain substances to the
surfaces of plastic pipes.
More colloquially, corrosion is taken to be the electrochemical degradation caused by the presence of an
electrolyte (e. g. drinking water or salt solutions) at a
point where two different metals come into contact.
Crystal
Crystals are the stable structures which arise when

atoms, ions or molecules come together in a spatially ordered way (i. e. in regularly repeated units). The
crystals are held together by electrostatic or other intermolecular forces. The smallest part of a crystal which
is repeated regularly by parallel translation is called the
crystal's unit cell. The various classes of external crystal
symmetry are determined by the symmetry of their unit
cells. A crystal's lattice is the geometrical arrangement
of its unit cells. The crystalline structure of a substance
can be determined by X-ray crystallography. ( Glass,
Amorphous/semi-crystalline)
Crystalline melting range
When a crystalline or semi-crystalline polymer is heated, there might be additional phase changes other than
the Glass transition. Between the (semi-)crystalline
phase and the liquid (melted) phase, there can be intermediate phases - depending on the rate of heating
- such as a liquid crystal phase or other crystalline allotropes. The phase transitions can be examined by using X-ray crystallography, differential calorimetry (DSC)
or differential thermal analysis (DTA). ( Thermoanalytical measurements using DSC and DTA)
Legionnaire's disease
This disease is caused by a new type of very large,

rod-shaped bacteria, the most important of which is Legionella pneumophilia - known only for some twenty
years. The bacteria are 0.3 m to 0.9 m in diameter
and between 2 m and 20 m long. The optimum temperature for their proliferation is between 30 C and 45
C.
In many cases to date, infections have been traced
back to piping systems used for water and for ventilation
(inhalation of contaminated aerosols). Nowadays, with
pipes of quality, certain minimum requirements have
been specified to reduce surface roughness and therefore also the risk of bacterial infestation.
Conductivity (electrical)
Conductivity is a measure of a substance's ability to

conduct electricity (It is the reciprocal of the substance's
resistivity. Resistance, electrical). The conductivity
of solutions in water (these are of interest here) is determined by the Dissociation of the dissolved compounds. Salts in water, for example, divide into Ions
. Similarly, acids and bases dissociate into their component parts. Conductivity is strongly temperature dependent (25 C is the usual reference temperature).
63
A commonly used unit of conductivity is S/cm, S being

the symbol for the unit "siemens" (i. e. the reciprocal 1/
of the unit "ohm" ).
In practice, the conductivity is measured in order to assess the amount of material dissolved in water. E. g. 30
S/cm corresponds to approximately1 total salt content. At 25 C the intrinsic conductivity of purest water (at its dissociation equilibrium) sets a lower limit of
0.055 S/cm to the conductivity of water (i. e. an upper
limit of 18.2 Mcm to its resistivity).
Solution
Solutions are homogeneous mixtures. Colloquially, the

expression is usually only used for liquid solutions, although alloys and gaseous mixtures also fall into the
category. A solution's major component, quantitatively,
is the Solvent. The minor component is the solute.
Important: there are degrees of solubility in all such systems, i.e. one can make solutions dilute, concentrated
or saturated. Solvation (Hydration): Solvent.
Voids
Voids are unwanted cavities which arise during the extrusion / mouldingof polymer products. Air bubbles, a
granulate which is too damp, or impurities are possible
causes.
Solvent
Matter is held together by forces which have different

causes. Here, one distinguishes among other things between (simple) electrostatic forces and interactions between dipoles. Such forces have to be overcome by the
solution in order for it to be able to solvate part of the
substance being dissolved. Solvation can be envisaged as placing a solvent covering over each particle of
the solute. Here too, there are attracting interactions between the solvent and solute. A substance's solubility in
a given solvent depends finally on the relative energies
of the components of the system. For this reason the
temperature always has to be taken into consideration.
According to their possible interactions, solvents can
be divided, very roughly, into polar and unpolar groups.
The polar solvents can be subdivided into so-called protical and aprotical solvents.
The theory of what dissolves in what has been popularized in the slogan "same in same, like in like".
Examples: polar substances such as common salt, dissolve well in apolar (protical) solvents such as water.
Unpolar substances such as fats, dissolve in unpolar
solvents such as dry-cleaning spirit.
The slogan is generally valid for polymers and their
solubility. The polymer molecules' great size and their
entanglement are, however, additional factors which
should be taken into account. Here, theories of very
much greater complexity are needed, e. g. to explain
other but similar phenomena, like that of Swelling.
Macromolecules
Macromolecules are Molecules consisting of a great

number of Atoms. They are produced naturally (e.g.
cellulose, enzymes and natural rubber) and synthetically
(e. g. all plastics and silicon resins).
MAK
MAK is an abbreviation for the German term "Maximale

Arbeitsplatzkonzentration", i. e. for the maximum permissible concentration of a substance in the occupational environment. It signifies a concept devised to quantify occupational hazards, safety at work and matters of
64
Toxicology. It is defined in the TRG 900 (German:

Technische Regeln fr Gefahrstoffe = Technical Regulations for Dangerous Materials) and legally authenticated in the GefStoffV (German: Gefahrstoffverordnung =
Ordinance on Dangerous Materials).
The MAK is the highest concentration of a processed
substance allowed (in the form of gases, vapours or
suspended particles) in the air at a place of work - according to the current state of knowledge. It takes repeated and long-term exposure to the substance (normally 8-hour periods) into account, so that the health of
those concerned is neither impaired nor endangered.
There are also other important parameters concerning safety at the workplace, for example the "Biological Tolerances for Safety at Work" (German: BAT =
Biologische-Arbeitsplatz-Toleranz) and, for particularly dangerous materials, the "Technical Concentration
Standards" (German: TRK = Technische Richtkonzentrationen).
Master batch
A master batch consists of Additives mixed with a

small quantity of the polymer material to be treated,
making it a concentrated form of the additives. In practice, the additives are mixed into a polymer by insertion of a calculated quantity of the master batch. The
method also makes the application of small quantities of
additives easier.
Medium
The expression "medium" is synonymous with "chemical", i. e. a substance which takes part in physical and
chemical processes. The flow medium in a pipe is the
substance flowing through the pipe.
Membrane processes
These are methods used on a microscopic scale in separation processes, refining and purification. Membranes
with different pore sizes are utilised to achieve various
degrees of selectivity.
Important methods:
Microfiltration: this method is used to isolate microscopic particles with sizes between (0.06 m (active-carbon dust) and 100 m (human hair)). Microfiltration can be regarded as the intermediate between
conventional filtering and the following.
Ultrafiltration: This method is used to isolate particles
with sizes between (0.001 m (the smallest viruses)
and 0.05 m (wavelength of high-energy UV radiation)). Ultrafiltration, as opposed to reverse osmosis
(see below), cannot isolate salts. It works on the socalled cross-flow principle in which the substances to
be separated flow tangentially over the membrane.
Nanofiltration: this method uses membranes to filter
out particles at the lower limits of ultrafiltration and at
the upper limits of reverse osmosis.
Reverse osmosis (RO): this method is used to isolate salts and particles with sizes between 0.0003
m and 0.001 m (approximate size of small organic
molecules like ethylene).
Electrodialysis: this method covers the same particle
sizes as the last two methods mentioned above.
Migration
In the context of polymers, migration is the diffusion of

additives of low molecular weight, i. e. their ability to
move around inside the polymer.
Weight average of molecular weight:
Micro-organisms (pathogenic)
Micro-organism is the collective term for a multitude of

tiny living entities and of structures like fungi, bacteria
and viruses. They differ greatly in size, structure and in
their effect on the human organism.
In practice, the inside surfaces of plastic pipes used in
sanitary applications and in ventilation systems are of
particular importance when considering the possibilities of infestation by micro-organisms. Here, it is also of
significance that additives of low molecular weight can
serve as a micro-organism's source of nourishment.
Important example: because of the presence of softening agents, soft PVC (= PVC-P) is much more susceptible to certain microbiological infestations than hard PVC
(= PVC-U - contains no softening agents).
Mole
Mole (mol) is the globally used base unit of the amount

of a pure substance. It is defined as a constant number
(6.022 x 10 ) of atoms, ions or molecules. One mole of
a substance has a mass (in g) numerically equal to its
Molecular weight.
23
Molecular weight/ Relative molecular mass
The so-called molecular weight, MW (or formula weight,

FW) of a molecule is its relative molecular mass, i. e.
the sum of its atoms' Atomic weights (relative atomic
masses).
A compound's gram-molecular weight (or grammolecule) is the mass (in grams) of one mole of the
compound. A gram-formula is the mass of one mole of
formula unit.
A compound's molar mass is its mass per mole.
All these quantities are important characteristics of a
given compound. Example: for oxygen in its molecular
form (O2):
molecular weight = formula weight = relative molecular
mass = 32
gram-molecular weight = gram-molecule = gram-formula = 32 g
molar mass = 32 g/mole
mass of oxygen molecule = 32 u
(u= unified atomic mass constant. Atomic weight)
Distribution of molecular mass
Because of the way in which a polymer is manufactured, it never has molecular chains of the same length
and therefore of constant Molecular weight. Instead,
it has a statistical distribution of molecular weights
(mass) which is typical of the reaction conditions under
which the polymer is made ( Polymer synthesis). Every polymer can be characterised by the following statistical formulae:
Number average of molecular weight:
Mi = mass of each molecule of fraction (i)

ni= number of molecules in the fraction (i)
The distribution of molecular mass has an enormous influence on the mechanical properties of a polymer. The
graph of the molecular weight distribution function, i.e.
of Mi plotted against ni has a shape which can be described numerically by using statistical methods. For example, the so-called "nonuniformity", i. e. the value of M
w/Mn- 1, characterises the width of the distribution.
Example: Polymers used for pipes usually have higher
molecular weights than those used in injection moulding. The distribution of mass can be determined by using gel-permeation chromatography (GPC). In practice,
however, worthwhile information about a polymer can
be obtained by measurements of its viscosity, or by determination of its Melt flow index MFI.
Molecule
Two or more Atoms joined together are called a

molecule. The strength of the bonds between the atoms
of a molecule is always greater than the attracting
forces, the Cohesion, between individual molecules.
Examples: two atoms of hydrogen and one atom of
oxygen combine to form a molecule (H2O) of water.
Two atoms of chlorine combine to create a chlorine
molecule (CI2), the stable form of the element. Many often several thousand - carbon atoms combine with
more than double the number of hydrogen atoms to
make a polyethylene Macromolecule.
Molecular chains
Macromolecules
Monomers
Monomers are the units of which Oligomers and

Polymers are made.
Post-chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
PVC-C is photochemically post-chlorinated PVC-U.

In the post-chlorination reaction, there is a further exchange of chlorine for hydrogen in the PVC chain
molecules. The exchange is more likely to occur at already chlorinated carbon atoms of the PVC-U (-CCIH). In this way, the chlorine content of a polymer can be
raised from 57 up to 65 % by weight. The interactions
between the polymer's molecules are increased. The
polymer's molecular chains then interact more strongly
with each other. This leads to an increased heat resistance, some 30 K higher than in PVC-U (the glass transition temperature TG being raised to about 130 C), and
to a distinctly higher chemical resistance. The main application of the moderately priced material is for chemical equipment used with very aggressive substances
and at higher temperatures (up toT = 90 C, e. g. in the
electrolytic production of chlorine and caustic soda).
Post-chlorination makes a material's extrusion more difficult. This is because the temperature "gap" between
plastic behaviour and the point of thermal decomposi-
65
tion is narrowed. Welding is also made more difficult. Up

to OD 160 mm adhesion therefore produces the most
durable joints in PVC-C pipes.
This results in the solution rising in the U-tube. The process ends when the hydrostatic pressure caused by the
transferred solvent is equal to the osmotic pressure.
Post-crystallization
If one applies external pressure to the side with the concentrated solution, the equilibrium is disturbed, and the
reverse process starts. Solvent from the solution then
flows back into the side which only contains solvent. Examples: this effect, reverse osmosis, is often utilised
in facilities built to desalinate sea water (which can be
viewed as a concentrated solution of salts in water). The
same effect is used medically in dialysis equipment, i.
e. to purify blood. The production of ultrapure water (
Water quality) can also be based on the effect.
Many semi-crystalline polymers have a larger proportion

of amorphous material if they are cooled from their melt
in quick successive steps - even though a larger proportion of crystalline material could be expected on the basis of the actual energy equilibrium. Because the molecular motion is "frozen", a change in crystalline order is
hardly attainable at ambient temperatures and in a finite
time span. Moderate heating (T <Tmelt) of a given polymer considerably accelerates the formation of crystals.
Example: PPS.
Post-crystallization in polymers can also be achieved locally by mechanical stretching. This can be the cause,
for example, of white "kinks" in small polystyrene
plates.
Nucleation/ Nucleating agents
Nucleating agents are Additives which are mixed into certain Semi-crystalline polymers to act as nuclei
around which crystals (possibly with modified symmetry) can form. They can also influence the kinetics of the
production of crystals. The agents foster the growth of
small-grained crystallites and prevent that of large
Spherulites. They accelerate solidification and can improve the properties of semi-crystalline polymers considerably. Nucleation can have different causes. Important factors are how easily the polymer melt wets the
nucleation agent or dissolves it.
Under certain circumstances, particular properties of the
agents (e. g. their sterical structure) can be used to encourage the development of particular crystal modifications.
Example: the PP-H components are made of a specially
nucleated PP-H raw material (DAPLEN BE60). This (together with special processing techniques) gives them a
particularly good combination of properties.
Oligomers
Oligomers have short polymer chains consisting of only a few (n<10) monomer units. A high proportion of
oligomers in a polymer material worsens its mechanical
properties.
Organic chemistry
Organic chemistry is the chemistry of carbon compounds (apart from a few of the very simplest compounds which are covered in inorganic chemistry
). The division of chemistry into organic and inorganic
parts has historical roots. Organic compounds always
contain carbon, nearly always contain hydrogen and often contain oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus or sulphur.
Osmosis
Osmosis, a process observed in solutions, is a physical and chemical phenomenon of a so-called colligative
sort, i.e. one which depends on the number of dissolved
particles and not on their exact nature.
Imagine the following: an U-tube is divided in the middle
by a membrane. On one side the tube is filled with a solvent, and on the other side (up to the same height) with
a concentrated solution based on the same solvent. If
the membrane is only permeable to the solvent, then a
so-called "osmotic pressure" causes the solvent to pass
through the membrane into the concentrated solution.
66
Oxidation
In very many chemical reactions, electrons are transferred between the reactants. Oxidation is the process
in which electrons are removed from an Atom, an
Ion, or a Molecule. Reduction is the opposite process, i.e. one in which electrons are taken up. Because
the electrons (and their electric charges) do not just
appear or disappear, both processes are inseparably
linked - in so-called redox reactions.
The concept of oxidation (as defined above) is widely applicable. This means that it is not necessarily dependent on the presence of oxygen. Oxidizing agents
oxidize (another substance) and are thereby reduced.
Reducing agents reduce (another substance) and are
thereby oxidized. Example: chromic acid (aqueous CrO
3 solution) is a strong oxidizing agent which also oxidizes PP. The chrome ions of the acid are themselves
reduced by taking up electrons which the PP (the reducing agent) gives up.
pH
The pH of a substance is one of its important properties, i. e. a measure of its acidity or alkalinity ( Acid /
Alkali). Its name is derived from the Latin expression
pondus hydrogenii (= weight of hydrogen). The pH is
the negative common logarithm of the concentration [H
] of hydrogen ions ( pH = -log[H ] ). Note: Acid solutions
have pH < 7. Alkaline solutions have pH > 7. The pH of
a neutral solution is 7.
Phase
A phase is a homogeneous, physically distinct portion of

matter present in a non-homogeneous system.
Examples: undissolved common salt (solid phase)
in contact with its saturated aqueous solution (liquid
phase) .
Physical ageing
When an amorphous polymer is cooled rapidly from a

viscoelastic state to a temperature under its Glass
transition temperature (and maintained at that temperature), one can imagine that the molecules "freeze" into a non-ideal conformation. The process is always associated with strains in the material. There is a tendency
for the resulting Glass to fall into its so-called thermodynamic equilibrium by various, slow movements of its
chain segments.
This kind of ageing should not be confused with
Chemical ageing which is defined as a splitting of
molecules, or as some kind of chemical change of the
molecules themselves. In the course of time, both sorts
of ageing lead to changes in the properties of the materials involved.
Physically active substances
Polyethylene (PE)
Physiologically harmless
Important basic properties of PE are its high impact resistance (the amorphous state of PE has a glass transition temperature TG between -120 C and 110 C) and,
due to its simple molecular structure, a chemical resistance better than other polyolefins. Crystalline PE has a
melting point between 115 C and 135 C.
In this context, substances are called physically active

if they interact physically (i. e. without any new compounds arising) with the materials of which pipes are
made.
Example: the Swelling of the inside surfaces of pipes
in contact with certain liquids.
In Germany, the expression "physiologically harmless"
is assigned to materials which pass certain tests. It is
the most stringent of the criteria to be fulfilled when using the materials with foodstuffs. The materials compIy
with EU requirements and with the BgVV recommendations. With a high degree of certainty, any deterioration of foodstuffs due to contact with the materials can
be excluded.
DEKAPROP PP-H-L-HP and DEKADUR-L-HP pipes
have been tested by the German Federal Institute for
Material Research and Testing (BAM), Berlin, and declared to be physiologically harmless.
(Physiology is the science which deals with the fundamentals of life and of living matter, in particular with the
functions and activities of the human organism.) Cf.
MAK Toxicology.
Pigment
Pigments are indissoluble dyes which, like soluble dyes,

are particular Additives. They are used, for example, to colour plastics. Pigments usually have a particle
size between 0.01 m and 1 m. There are Organic
and Inorganic pigments. On account of their molecular structure, inorganic pigments do not usually colour
very intensely. However, they do have good covering
properties, are usually very temperature-insensitive and
colour-fast. Examples: carbon black, titanium white (=
TiO2).
Organic pigments usually have an intense colour, but
their covering properties are not so good. They consist
of complicated organic molecules which, understandably enough, are not very stable at higher temperatures.
Polarity
Polarity is a concept used in physical chemistry. Ultimately, the polarity of a compound depends on the spatial distribution of electrons (relative to the nuclei of the
atoms) in the compound's molecules. Whenever two
Atoms combine, the distribution of electrons between
their nuclei ceases to be symmetrical, leading to a polarization of the bond. The distribution of the polarized
bonds within a molecule determines whether or not the
whole molecule appears to be polarized.
The polarity of a compound is one of its most important
characteristics, determining almost all of its properties,
both physical and chemical. Example: the well-known
solvent carbon tetrachloride (CCI4) has four polar, carbon-chlorine bonds which are symmetrically so positioned (tetrahedrally) that the molecule displays no external polarity.
Carbon tetrachloride CCl4
Polyethylene is a widely used plastic. It is a pure hydrocarbon and is used for technical piping systems in
many areas, e. g. in sanitary installations (for drinking
water and drainage) and in industrial applications (for
gas pipes, for the protective sleeving of cables, and for
various ducts).
Nowadays, all sorts of PE materials can be produced

(depending on the choice of catalysts and on the processing conditions):
PE-HD: this abbreviation is used for a PE which is obtained by the controlled polymerization of ethylene under very moderate processing conditions ("low-pressure PE"). It is a linear polymer and has, therefore, a
comparatively high density. It has a crystalline content
of up to 85 %.
PE-MD: this medium density PE is formed at temperatures of about 160 C and at pressures of about 50
bar. It has a crystalline content of up to 70 %.
PE-LD: this PE is produced at temperatures of about
300 C and at high pressure ("high-pressure PE").
Highly reactive, intermediate reactants cause a
branching of the molecular chains. The material has
a lower density than the grades mentioned above. Its
long-term stability is not as good. It has a crystalline
content of about 50 %.
PE-X: this material is a PE which has been crosslinked in subsequent reactions.
The properties of PE can be influenced in a controlled
way, by incorporating comonomers ( Monomers) with
butene as a C4 unit. This changes the PE's crystallinity and density. It also improves its resistance to stressinduced hairlines and cracks. ( Formation of / corrosion by stress-induced hairlines and cracks; crazing
)
PE80: this is a polyethylene which, according to an
extrapolation of the results of the long-term Stressrupture test (DIN 8075, at 20 C), has a MRS
(minimum required strength) of 8 MPa. There are diverse sorts of PE in this group, depending on the pipe
manufacturer. The name PE80 says nothing about
the material's Distribution of molecular mass or
about the branching of its molecular chains.
PE100: this is a new PE quality, in which a MRS
10 MPa (20 C; 50 years) is achieved. PE100
contains both short linear and longer, branched PE
molecular chains (achieved by employing butene
comonomers). It therefore has two peaks (so-called
bimodality) in its Distribution of molecular mass.
In spite of a branching of its long chains, a high density is achieved as well as a favourable resistance to
cracks and a high degree of stiffness.
67
Polymer structure
This concept is used for the systematic description of

the spatial structure of the molecules of a polymer. The
following categories are used:
Primary structure: Which chemical configuration does
the polymer have? In which sequence are the atoms
to be found?
Secondary structure: Which shape do the individual
polymer chains have? Are they, for example, parts of
disordered bundles or are they spirally formed (as in
PTFE)?
Tertiary structure: Which spatial distribution do the
molecular chains in the bulk of the polymer have?
What interactions are there between the chains?
Polymer synthesis
Polymer synthesis is the name given to those reactions

in which Polymers are produced. Reactions to start
the synthesis, to affect the growth of polymer chains,
and to terminate the chains are involved. There are the
following categories of polymer synthesis:
1.Polymerization
Many identical or similar small molecules (or chain
segments = monomers) react together to form longer
molecular chains. One distinguishes between Radical and ionic (anionic or cationic) polymerization according to the type of the ends of the growing molecular chains, or the active species. Polyolefins like PP
and PE, for example, are normally polymerized by using highly efficient organo-metallic catalytic systems
(so-called Ziegler-Natta catalysts or, more recently,
metalocen catalysts).
2.Condensation polymerization (polycondensation)
The monomers are usually made of two different
classes of substances which have reactive groups at
their ends. Reactive groups at the ends of one of the
monomers react with groups at the ends of the other. A "condensate" is produced, i. e. small molecules
- mostly water molecules - which have tobe removed
continuously. Examples: manufacture of all polyesters
(PET, PC, PMMA), of phenolformaldelhyde resins, of
polyamides (all of which are sorts of nylon), or of PEI
and PAI.
3.Addition polymerization
As with condensation polymerization, molecules from
two monomer systems, each with a reactive group
at its end, combine to form macromolecules. Unlike condensation polymerization, there are no reaction products of low molecular weight. Groups at the
ends of one monomer are "added" to groups at the
ends of the other monomer. Examples: production of
polyurethane from di-isocyanates and alcohols. Epoxy
resins.
Polymers
Polymers are substances consisting of Macromolecules.
Polypropylene (PP)
Polypropylene is a thermoplastic material with a comparatively low density. The combination of its excellent mechanical properties, its enormous chemical resistance and its heat resistance for temperatures up to
about 90 C, make it a widely used material in industrial piping systems. Nowadays, PP industrial pipes are
an integral part of countless installations, of the most di68
verse sorts all over the world. The pipes are routinely
butt welded instead of being cemented together. PP is
being increasingly favoured for applications with materials of the highest purity and at temperatures up to 90
C.
Special catalytic systems have turned the production of
isotactic PP ( Tacticity) into a standardised process.
There are two categories of PP used in piping systems
Homopolymer(PP-H) and Copolymer. The latter,
which contains ethylene as comonomer (typically up to
12 % by weight), can be obtained as a block copoIymer
(PP-C) and as a statistical (= random) copolymer (PPR).
For this reason, PP copolymers
have slightly different mechanical properties such as a higher

impact resistance at low temperPolypropylene
atures. (Note: The glass transition temperature of amorphous
PP is about -5 C.) Note that the
various PP materials also differ in
their so-called Nucleation.
The crystallization characteristics of a given PP type

can be influenced by using additives to change the nucleation. The melting point of crystalline PP lies between 155 C (-form) and 165 C (-form) depending
on the nature of the nucleation ( or ).
Polypropylenes are one of our main fields of research
and development. If needed, we can send you more detailed information in the form of pamphlets and specialist papers.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
PVC is the one of the oldest polymer materials available. World-wide, it is the second most commonly used
of all plastics. Because it consists of up to 57 % chlorine, its production demands relatively little crude oil. It
is manufactured on an industrial scale in one of three
processes:
Emulsion polymerization (PVC-E)
Suspension polymerization (PVC-S)
Bulk polymerization (PVC-M)
PVC
In the polymer structure, the chlorine atoms are distributed statistically, i. e. in a tactic way. PVC is an
amorphous material of 5 % crystallinity. Its glass transition temperature lies between 75 C and 85 C, and it
has a density of 1.4 g/cm. It can be processed without
difficulty by extrusion, calendering, blow forming, spread
coating, dip coating and injection moulding.
PVCs differ not only in the way they are manufactured,
but also in the many modified forms which arise from
the use of different additives. For example:
PVC-U (unplasticized = hard PVC)
PVC-P (plasticized = soft PVC)
PVC-U has the following characteristic properties:

high mechanical stability, stiffness and hardness
high resistance to attack by chemicals
intrinsic flame resistance (because of the high halogen content) Flame retardants
easily cemented and welded together
PVC-U pipes are usually extrudedusing the type S-PVC
which has a K-value between 65 and 68. An extrudable mixture is made by blending the initial S-PVC material with additives and other Processing aids. A
high K-value is needed in the manufacture of pressure
pipes. In contrast to extrusion, injection moulding needs
a K-value below 60.
Pipes made of PVC-U have been used for decades with
great success in the following areas: piping and equipment in the chemical industry; pipes for drinking water,
for drainage and sewage.
ppm (parts per million), ppb (parts per billion)
ppm (=10 ) and ppb (=10 ) are very common expressions used for values of concentration.
Note the confusing difference in usage!
A US (and French) billion is 10 (German: Milliarde). A
German Billion is 10 . In the UK there is often the ambiguity of whether the term billion means 10 (older usage) or 10 .
-6
-9
12
12
Pyrolysis
Pyrolysis is defined as the irreversible chemical decomposition of a substance (without Oxidization taking
place) brought about by the action of heat.
Example: the unwanted pyrolysis of a polymer granulate
in an extruder.
Swelling
Swelling is the name given to the penetration of certain

liquids (usually Solvents) or gases into a polymer.
The molecules of the polymer are, however, not dissolved out, but remain as part of the polymer structure.
The liquid taken up makes the polymer expand and become heavier.
The marked swelling of a cross-linked polymer is called
gelling. For a given polymer material, swelling phenomena are dependent in particular on the molecular size
and chemical structure of the solvent or gellant, on the
time in which these substances act, and on the temperature. Swelling causes a softening of the polymer material, the structure of which can be permanently damaged.
For example, new cavities can be formed, i. e. the socalled "free volume" increases. It is possible, too, that
additives are more easily leached out after swelling.
Swelling in plastic pipes is of immense importance, particularly with regard to their Chemical resistance, or
when using adhesives to connect piping elements.
Radical
A radical is a highly reactive, intermediate product in

a chemical reaction - particularly in organic chemistry.
Radicals arise in the uniform break-up (= homolytic fission) of simple chemical bonds as schematized in A - B
A* + B* (in which "*" signifies an unpaired electron).
The break-up can be caused by heat, by radiation or by
chemical means. Every organic oxidation depends on
the existence of radicals. They are of great importance
in many polymerization processes, and are the central

factor in the discussion of colour retention by plastics
and dyes.
Reduction
Oxidation
Relaxation
Various molecular motions are possible in a polymer

material. Their analysis in so-called relaxation spectroscopy, makes it possible to classify the motions,
which are often highly complex, into certain classes the , , classes etc. The aim is to correlate the relaxation observed in a given polymer with certain molecular
motions.
Example: a relaxation is always a motion which, in
amorphous and semi-crystalline polymers, leads to the
Glass transition. At a given temperature, a relaxation is always associated with a fixed frequency.
Acid/alkali solution (alkali = base)
In chemistry there are different interpretations of the

concepts 'acid' and 'alkaline'. We restrict ourselves to
simple but narrow definitions - those based on the Arrhenius model. In anaqueous solution, an acid produces so-called hydroniums (= H3O ), a base produces
hydroxyl (= OH ) ions.
Examples:
(i) Acids: sulphuric acid, carboxylic acid (e. g. acetic
acid), all halogen hydracids (e. g. HCI), oxalic acid, hydrocyanic acid.
(ii) Bases: caustic soda (sodium hydroxide), caustic potash (potassium hydroxide), ammonia solution,
amines.
Plastics consist of molecules which are organic chains.
In the case of some polymers, acids and caustic solutions can assist reactions which lead to the destruction of the chains, or in which certain Additives are
attacked. This is of particular significance when acids
and caustic solutions flow through plastic pipes. In these
cases, the pipe material has to be chosen carefully, taking the conditions of use into consideration. See also
pH; Chemical resistance.
+
High-impact polymers
Mixing Rubbers and Elastomers to polymers (usually brittle) increases their impact resistance. The energy released at impact is taken up by the elastomer component, sustaining its molecular motion ( Relaxation
). Basically, there are two ways of improving the impact
resistance of polymers:
(i) by copolymerization of the base polymer with an
elastomer component. Example: the block copolymerization of styrene and butadiene to produce polystyrene
(SB).
(ii) by blending the base polymer with an elastomer
component ( Blend). In order to fix such a blend permanently as a stable, homogeneous mixture, the
Compatibility of the two components has to be ascertained.
Example: the well-known material ABS is usually a
blend of the copolymer polyacrylonitrile polystyrene (=
SAN) with polybutadiene (PB) as its elastomer component. The compatibility between SAN and PB is
achieved chemically by placing a covering of SAN over
the SB molecules.
69
The maintenance of a fine, homogeneous distribution of

impact modifier is of decisive importance when processing the polymer. Phase separation and coagulation of
the impact modifier have to be avoided.
Solvation (Hydration)
Solvent
Spherulite
A spherulite is one possible form of a polycrystalline

macrostructure to be found in semi-crystalline polymers
such as PP. The spherulites in a polymer strongly affect its morphology (i. e. the shape to which small crystalline parts of the polymer join together). As a result
of three-dimensional, uniform growth, the spherulites
are spherically symmetrical. They have particular optical properties, which areeasily recognised in Microtome sections (illuminated by linearly polarized light)
by a characteristic Maltese cross-like interference effect. The sizes and types of the spherulites in a polymer
can be strongly influenced by the addition of special
Nucleating agents, by the way in which the polymer
is processed, and by heat treatment. In PP, the sizes
and types of spherulites have a critical influence on almost all the material's properties (e. g. on its impact resistance and chemical stability).
Stabilizers
Stabilizers are additives which, by causing certain

chemical reactions, give a polymer additional resistance
to heat, to radiation (e. g. UV light), to atmospheric oxygen and to humidity. They help the polymer to retain
its properties when being processed, handled or used.
Usually, combinations of stabilizers are used which protect simultaneously against heat, light and oxidation.
Important groups of stabilizers are, for example, compounds of lead, and of calcium with zinc (in Polyvinyl
chloride, PVC), organo-zinc compounds, epoxides, UV
absorbers, substances which impede oxidation (Antioxidants, e. g. in PP) and co-stabilizers (cf. Radicals). Example: at high temperatures, HCI is easily released from unstabilized PVC. Double (C=C) bonds
arise at those points of the PVC chains involved, making them susceptible (by breakage) to oxidation by atmospheric oxygen. In this case, stabilizers stop the reaction producing HCI, or take up the HCI immediately
after it has been produced.
Sterilisation
Sterilisation is the complete extermination of micro-organisms (e. g. fungi, bacteria, spores, viruses). The
word "sterile" is synonymous with "free of all living material". Sterility is therefore an absolute condition. It can
be produced by heat, sophisticated filtration, oxidation
and UV radiation. A medium which is sterilised is always disinfected at the same time. A disinfected medium does not have to be sterile. ( Disinfection).
Tacticity
Tacticity is the spatial distribution of side groups on

polymer chains (e. g. the CH3 groups in PP).
syndiotactic: The side groups are arranged alternately
on one and then on the other side of the chains.
isotactic: All the side groups are on one side of the
polymer chains.
atactic: There is no regular arrangement of the side
groups.
70
The tacticity of a material influences the ease with which

discrete crystalline domains can be produced. It has an
enormous influence on the material's Glass transition temperature and on the melting points of its crystallites.
Annealing processes
The molecular strains which inevitably arise when an

amorphous polymer is cooled below its glass transition temperature TG can be greatly reduced by storing
the material (for a "reasonable" time) at temperatures
around TG or, depending on the polymer, slightly below
TG. (The glass state should be regarded as a non-equilibrium state.) Example: Annealing of pipes made, for
example, of PSU or PE.
Surfactants (detergents, surface-active agents,

tensides)
Surfactants are a whole class of organic compounds

used as washing agents, wetting agents or emulsifiers.
On account of its molecular structure, a surfactant accumulates on surfaces and at the boundaries of two phases making them easier to wet; i. e. it reduces the surface and interfacial tension. This is the principle behind
washing, wetting, cleaning, emulsifying, and the effect
of dispersants.
A surfactant's particular properties are determined by
the presence of two molecular groups:
a Hydrophobic group (usually an Aliphatic
residue)
a Hydrophilic group which gives rise to the
surfactant's solubility in water and which can contain
a negative electric charge (anionic surfactant), a positive charge (cationic surfactant) or only certain dipolar
groups (nonionic surfactant)
The wetting properties of surfactants ( Stress crackinducing media) are of enormous importance when
considering the Chemical resistance of polymer piping.
Thermal decomposition
Pyrolysis
Thermoplastics
This name has its origin in the classification of plastics

according to their behaviour when heated or processed,
and in their capability to be reused. Thermoplastics consist of macromolecules which are not (or only slightly)
cross-linked. It is easier for these molecules to slip past
each other when the thermoplastic is heated. Above the
glass transition and/or the melting temperature, a thermoplastic material can be re-formed - reversibly and as
often as needed. Elastomers and Thermosetting
plastics are polymers with similar characteristics.
Thermoplastic elastomers
This is the name given to polymers which (due to forces

of Cohesion) are physically cross-linked at ambient
temperatures. At higher temperatures, the cross-linking
is undermined by thermal motion, making the material
easily processable - as with a thermoplastic.
TOC (Total Organic Carbon)
The TOC is a measure of the organic contamination of

water. When applied to ultrapure water, its value is often identical with the DOC (Dissolved Organic Carbon).
The TOC is almost always found either by oxidizing the
organic materials and by determining the total amount
of CO2 formed, or by measuring the increase in conductivity which is caused by the carbonic acid produced by
dissolved CO2.
Example: a plastic pipe's suitability for use with ultrapure water depends (among other things) strongly on
the proportion of organic substances of low molecular
weight (e. g. Additives, Oligomers) which, under
working conditions, are leached, or migrate, out of the
pipe.
The TOC is an important part of the so-called "Ieach-out
values". PP-H Daplen BE60 components have extremely low TOC values compared with other PP pipes. They
open new possibilities for the application of the material
PP-H in the transport of ultrapure substances.
Water quality
Water can contain very many substances and has to

be processed or purified according to its proposed use.
The results are a variety of degrees of purity which can
be characterised according to diverse criteria. [e. g.
measurements of Conductivity (electrical); determination of the amount of specific types of ion.]
Process wa- Water with different qualitative features (its
ter
suitability as Drinking water could be included) for business, industrial and agricultural purposes
Brackish
water
Toxicology
Toxicology is defined as the scientific study of the harmful effects of chemicals on living organisms.
Note: Because pharmacology is the study of the interaction between any chemicals and living organisms, it follows that toxicology is only one part of pharmacology.
Processing aids
Processing aids are particular Additives.
Cross-linking
Cross-linking is the process in which linear macromolecules are joined together to make elastomers or
thermosetting plastics. It can be achieved by mixing in
appropriate monomers during polymerization, or (subsequently, in chemically suited polymers) by the addition of hardeners (e. g. in dual-component adhesives),
by heating (e. g. in curing processes with PPS), or by irradiation (e. g. photoresist).
Drinking wa- Water of a quality which conforms to the

ter
TVO (Trinkwasserverordnung = German
Drinking Water Ordinance) regarding, for example, the maximum amount of pollutants.
Drinking water has to be maintained at a
temperature below 25 C. Its specific conductivity at 25 C lies between 50 S/cm and
5000 S/cm.
Pure water
Water which has been produced using Ion

exchangers, reverse osmosis or distillation,
but which still contains a residue of certain
ions. Purified water ("aqua purificata") prepared according to the DAB (and used in
many pharmaceutical products) belongs to
this category. Its specific conductivity at 25
C lies between 1 S/cm and 50 S/cm. Water for injection ("aqua ad injectabilia") used
in hypodermic syringes is categorised in the
DBA as a "cleaner" pure water. It is used
as a solvent and as a fluid for diluting those
medicines which can be applied by injection
or by infusion. Sterility is a prerequisite.
Deionized
water
Water which is fully salt-free (deionized). It

is produced by the use of ion exchangers
or by distillation. The quality of the resulting
product is codified by various standards (e.
g. DIN, ISO 3696). No ionogenic contents
(= anions and cations) may be present. The
specific conductivity at 25 C lies between
0.1 S/cm and 1 S/cm
Ultrapure
water
Water of the very highest purity. It is made

from distilled water using supplementary ionexchange techniques, Active carbon and
other absorbing materials. It contains only
the slightest traces of organic compounds,
micro-organisms and electrolytes. The specific conductivity at 25 C is less than 0.1 S/
cm.
Compatibility
In polymer technology this concept describes how well

polymers blend. "Compatible" polymer mixtures are
those which permanently retain their homogeneous
structure. "Non-compatible" mixtures separate out in the
course of time. Cf. High-impact polymers.
Hardness of water
Water's hardness is its total amount of hardening

agents (alkaline-earth metals, e. g. Ca , Mg , Sr ), i. e.
of those substances which in the presence of carbonate and sulphate ions produce sparingly soluble precipitates. The total hardness has two components: the temporary hardness due to hydrogen carbonates and the
permanent (noncarbonate) hardness due to chlorides,
sulphates etc. The temporary hardness can be removed
by boiling, which leads to the precipitation of carbonates. The amount of hardness is given in "dH (Deutsche
Hrtegrade = "German degrees of hardness") or in
mmol/l. Soft and hard water can have a hardness of 3
dH and 22 dH respectively.
+
Examples:
a) Limescale ("fur") in water pipes arising from temporary hardness.
b) Precipitation of surfactants due to hardening agents.
With surfactants, Mg or Ca form a sparingly soluble
precipitate (of a calcium or magnesium "soap"). This increases the amount of detergents which are used.
Ion exchangers or special compounds can remove the
hardening agents from the water - leaving "soft" water.
+
Water with medium salt content, e. g. the

mixture of fresh and salt water which is
found at the mouths of rivers. The specific
conductivity at 25 C lies between 0.05 S/cm
and 1 S/cm.
Softening agents
Softening agents are an important group of additives

which increase a polymer's plasticity. The effect can be
understood by imagining the softening agent to penetrate into the polymer structure like a multitude of tiny
"wedges". These place themselves between the polymer chains creating extra so-called "free volume". The
increased mean distance between the polymer chains
reduces their forces of Cohesion and facilitates the
microscopic motion of the chains, enabling them to slide
past each other more easily. Macroscopically (i. e. on
71
a much larger scale) one observes a reduction of the

glass transition temperature. The material is more easily
formed - it is "softer".
One distinguishes between softening agents with
molecules of low molecular weight and those highly viscous agents which have much larger molecules. One also differentiates between primary and secondary softening agents. The latter function effectively as solvents
of the primary agents. The choice of a softening agent
is dictated by a number of factors, for example the ease
with which the agent can diffuse out of the polymer (
Migration, Toxicity), and its solvation.
Example: the most important use of softening agents,
particularly in piping systems, is in PVC-P. (Between 80
% and 85 % of all softening agents are used in PVC.)
Phthalate is an agent often used here. Hard PVC pipes
(PVC-U) differ from PVC-P products by containing no
softening agents at all. Note: PVC-P pipes and moulded
components are never to be used together with PVC-U
There could be a damaging Migration of the softening agent from the PVC-P into the PVC-U.
72
Metric and inch system
For those unfamiliar with the difference between metric and inch sizes the following note may be helpful. In
imperial systems, the sizes of pipes, fittings and other
components such as valves are identified by reference
to the nominal size of the bore of the pipe expressed in
inches and fractions of an inch.
In metric systems, however, sizes are identified by references to the outside diameter of the pipe expressed in
millimetres.
The table below shows the metric sizes which are regarded for practical purposes as being generally equivalent to imperial sizes. It should, however, be understood
that metric sizes are not simply inch sizes which have
been converted into millimetres and called metric; their
actual dimensions are slightly different and they are with
the exception of 2 " (75 mm) and 5" (140 mm) not interchangeable.
Imperial Sizes
Metric Sizes
Imperial Sizes
Metric Sizes
Nominal
bore DN
(inch)
Pipe outside Pipe outside Nominal

diameterd
diameterd
bore DN
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
219.1
200
200
219.1
225
200
244.5
250
250
10
273.0
280
250
12
323.9
315
300
14
355.6
355
350
16
406.4
400
400
18
457.2
450
450
20
508.0
450
500
20
508.0
500
500
22
558.2
560
600
24
609.6
630
600
Nominal
bore DN
(inch)
Pipe outside Pipe outside Nominal

diameterd
diameterd
bore DN
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
26
660.4
28
711.2
710
700
1/8
10.2
10
30
762.0
1/4
13.5
12
32
812.8
800
800
3/8
17.2
16
10
34
863.6
1/2
21.3
20
15
36
914.4
900
900
3/4
26.9
25
20
40
1016.0
1000
1000
33.7
32
25
1 1/4
42.4
40
32
1 1/2
48.3
50
40
60.3
63
50
2 1/2
75.3
75
65
88.9
90
80
3 1/2
101.6
114.3
110
100
125
100
125
125
140.3
140
125
168.3
160
180
1)
150
2)
150
1) only cementing socket systems

2) only butt fusion systems
73
Abbreviations
Materials
ABS
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
CR
Chloroprene rubber, e. g. Neoprene
EPDM
Ethylene propylene rubber
FPM
Fluorocaoutchouc, e. g. Viton
Ms
Brass
NBR
Nitrile rubber
NR
Natural rubber
PB
Polybutene
PE
Polyethylene
PE-X
Cross-linked polyethylene
PP
Polypropylene
PTFE
Polytetrafluorethylene, e. g. Teflon
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
PVC-C
Polyvinyl chloride, postchlorinated (increased

chlorine content)
PVC-U
Polyvinyl chloride, unplasticized
PVDF
Polyvinylidene fluoride
TG
Malleable iron
UP-GF
Unsaturated polyester resin, glassfibre reinforced
Dimensions and units

Dimensions are given in mm and/or inches and are to
be taken as nominal or standard dimensions.
The right to make modifications in design is reserved.
d, d1, d2, d3,
d4
Diameter
DN
Nominal diameter
SC
Size for hex screws
AL
Number of holes
Width across flats
Weight in gram
SP
Number per standard pack
GP
Number per large pack
Wall thickness of pipe
PN
Nominal pressure at 20 C, water
Rp
Cylindrical pipe - internal thread to ISO 7/1
Conical pipe external thread to ISO 7/1
ppm
Parts per million
1 bar
= 0.1 N/mm
= 0.1 Mpa (Megapascal)
= 14.504 psi
Design factor
Pipe series
SDR
Standard Dimension Ratio
MFR
Melt Flow Rate
74
SI units
SI basic units
SI units are the seven basic units and the units derivedthereof coherently, i. e. with numerical factor 1.
Basic quantity
SI basic unit
Name
Symbol
Name
Symbol
Length
Metre
Mass
Kilogram
kg
Time
Second
Electric current
Ampere
Thermodynamic
temperature
Kelvin
Amount of substance
Mole
mol
Luminous intensity
ln
Candela
cd
Internationally defined prefixes
Prefix
Meaning
Name
Symbol
power of ten
decimal
Trillion
exa
10
= 1 000 000 000 000 000 000
Thousand billion
peta
10
= 1 000 000 000 000 000
Billion
tera
10
= 1 000 000 000 000
Thousand million
giga
10
= 1 000 000 000
Million
mega
10
= 1 000 000
Thousand
kilo
10
= 1 000
Hundred
hecto
10
= 100
Ten
deca
da
10
= 10
Tenth
deci
10
= 0.1
Hundredth
centi
10
= 0.01
Thousandth
milli
10
= 0.001
Millionth
micro
10
= 0.000 001
Thousand millionth
nano
10
= 0.000 000 001
Billionth
pico
10
= 0.000 000 000 001
Thousand billionth
femto
10
= 0.000 000 000 000 001
Trillionth
atto
10
= 0.000 000 000 000 000 001
Factor as
18
15
12
-1
-2
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
75
Units
Size
Symbol SI units
Permissible units
other than
SI
Conversion into associated SI unit and ratios
No longer permissible units and conversions
Length
m (metre)
1 (inch = 0.0254 m)
1 nm = (nautical mile)
= 1852 m
Surface
(square metre)
1 b (barn) = 10-28 m
1 a (are) = 10 m
1 ha (hectare) = 104 m
sq.m., sq.dm., sq.cm., etc.
(Names allowed, symbol not allowed)
Volume
l (litre)
1 l = 10 m
Solid angle
sr (steradian)
1 sr = 1 m/m
1 (square degree) = 3.046 10-4 sr

1 g (square grade) = 2.467 10-4 sr
Time
s (second)
min (minute) 1 min = 60 s

h (hour)
1 h = 3600 s
d (day)
1 d = 86400 s
Frequency
Hz (Hertz)
1 Hz = 1/s
Rotation
speed
rpm
rpm
1 rpm ( 1/60) s
1 rpm = 1 (1/min)
Velocity
m/s
km/h
1 km/h = (1/3.6) m/s
Acceleration
m/s
normal fall acceleration

gn= 9.80665 m/s
1 gal (gal) = 10-2 m/s
Mass
kg (kilogram)
t (tonne)
1 t = 10 kg
1 q (metric hundred weight) = 100 kg
Density
kg/m
t/m
kg/l
1t/m = 1000 kg/m

1kg/l = 1000 kg/m
Moment of
inertia
kg m
1 kp m s = 9.81 kg m
Force
N (Newton)
1 N = 1 kg m/s
1 dyn (dyn) = 10-5 N

1 p (pond) = 9.80665 10-3 N
1 kp (kilopond) = 9.80665 N
Torque
Nm
1 kpm = 9.80665 Nm
1 Nm = 0.7375 lb-ft
Pressure
Pa (Pascal)
bar
1 Pa = 1 N/m
1 bar = 105 Pa
1 atm = 1.01325 bar

1 at = 0.980665 bar
1 Torr = 1.333224 10-3 bar
1 m CE = 98.0665 10-3 bar
1 mm Hg = 1.333224 10-3 bar
Mechanical
stress
N/m
Pa
1 N/m = 1 Pa
1 kp/m = 9.80665 N/m

1 kp/cm = 98.0665 10-3 N/m
1 kp/mm = 9.80665 10-6 N/m
Dynamic
viscosity
Pa s
1 Pa s = 1 N s/m
1 P (Poise) = 10-1 Pa s
Kinematic
viscosity
m/s
1 m/s = 1 Pa s m/kg
1 St (stokes) = 10-4 m/s
Work energy
W
E
J (Joule)
eV (electronvolt) W
h
1 J = 1 Nm = 1 H2O
1 W h = 3.6 KJ
1 cal = 4.1868 J
1 kpm = 9.80665 J
1 erg = 10-7 J
Electric
charge
C
(Coulomb)
1C=1As
Electric potential
V (Volt)
1 V = 1 W/A
Electric current
A (Ampere)
76
(cubic metre)
-1
-3
-1
-1
Electric resistance
(Ohm)
1 = 1 V/A
1 abs = 1
Power
W (Watt)
1 W = 1 J/s = 1 Nm/s
1W=1VA
1 PS = 735.498 W
1 kcal/h = 1.163 W
1 kpm/s = 10 W
Electric capacitance
F (Farad)
1 F = 1 C/V
Magnetic field
strength
A/m
1 Oe (Oersted) = 79.5775 A/m
Magnetic
flux
Wb (Weber)
1 Wb = 1 V s
1 Mx (Maxwell) = 10-8 Wb
Magnetic
flux density
T (Tesla)
1 T = 1 Wb/m
1 G (Gauss) = 10 T
Inductance
H (Henry)
1 H = 1 Wb/A
Electric con- G
ductance
S
(Siemens)
1 S = 1/
Thermodynamic temperature
K (Kelvin)
1 C = 1 K
O C = 273.15 K
Temperature (C)
t,
C (degree
Celsius)
1 C = 1 K
O K = -273.15 C
Thermal capacity
J/K
1 Kcl/degree = 4.1868 10-3 J/K

1 Cl (clausius) = 4.1868 J/K
-4
77
Conversion tables
Viscosities
Kinematic
viscosity
Centistokes
Density
1.0
Absolute viscosity
Centipoise
Engler
Degrees
Saybolt
Universal
Seconds
Redwood 1
Seconds
(standard)
Saybolt
Seconds
Furol
Ford
Cup No.
4 Seconds
Barbey
Degrees
Cup No.
15 Seconds
Absolute
Viscosity
Poise Density 1,0
Kinematic viscosity
m/s
1.0
1.0
1.0
31
29
--
--
--
--
0.01
1.0x10-6
2.0
2.0
1.1
34
30
--
--
3640
--
0.02
2.0x10-6
3.0
3.0
1.2
35
33
--
--
2426
--
0.03
3.0x10-6
4.0
4.0
1.3
37
35
--
--
1820
--
0.04
4.0x10-6
5.0
5.0
1.39
42
38
--
--
1300
--
0.05
5.0x10-6
6.0
6.0
1.48
45.5
40.5
--
--
1085
--
0.06
6.0x10-6
7.0
7.0
1.57
48.5
43
--
--
930
--
0.07
7.0x10-6
8.0
8.0
1.65
53
46
--
--
814
--
0.08
8.0x10-6
9.0
9.0
1.74
55
48.5
--
--
723
--
0.09
9.0x10-6
10
10
1.84
59
52
--
--
650
--
0.10
1.0x10-5
20
20
2.9
97
85
15
--
320
--
0.2
2.0x10-5
40
40
5.3
185
163
21
--
159
--
0.4
4.0x10-5
60
60
7.9
280
245
30
18.7
106
5.6
0.6
6.0x10-5
80
80
10.5
370
322
38
25.9
79
6.7
0.8
8.0x10-5
100
100
13.2
472
408
47
32
65
7.4
1.0
1.0x10-4
200
200
26.4
944
816
92
60
32.5
11.2
2.0
2.0x10-4
400
400
52.8
1888
1632
184
111
15.9
18.4
4.0
4.0x10-4
600
600
79.2
2832
2448
276
162
10.6
26.9
6.0
6.0x10-4
800
800
106
3776
3264
368
217
8.1
35
8.0
8.0x10-4
1000
1000
132
7080
4080
460
415
6.6
68
10
1.0x10-3
5000
5000
660
23,600
20400
2300
1356
1.23
240
50
5.0x10-3
10,000
10,000
1,320
47,200
40,800
4,600
2713
--
481
100
1.0x10-2
50,000
50,000
6,600
236,000
204,000
23,000
13,560
--
2403
500
5.0x10-2
Absolute viscosity (centipoise) = kinematic viscosity

(centistokes) x density. Over 50 centistokes - conversion to SSU SSU = centistokes x 4.62
Delivery volumes
m/h
l/min
l/s
m/s
Imp. gal/min
US gal/min
cu. ft./h
cu. ft./s
1.0
16.67
0.278
2.78 x 10
3.667
4.404
35.311
9.81 x 10-3
0.06
1.0
0.017
1.67 x 10-5
0.220
0.264
2.119
5.89 x 10-4
3.6
60
1.0
1.00 x 10-3
13.20
15.853
127.12
3.53 x 10-2
3600
60000
1000
1.0
13200
15838
127118
35.311
0.2727
4.55
0.076
7.58 x 10
1.0
1.201
9.629
2.67 x 10-3
0.2272
3.79
0.063
6.31 x 10-5
0.833
1.0
8.0238
2.23 x 10-3
0.0283
0.47
0.008
7.86 x 10-6
0.104
0.125
1.0
2.78 x 10-4
101.94
1699
28.32
2.83 x 10-2
373.77
448.8
3600
1.0
78
-4
-5
Pressure and pressure heads

bar
kg/cm
lbf/sq. in.
atm
ft H2O
m H2O
mm Hg
in. Hg
kPa
1.0
1.0197
14.504
0.9869
33.455
10.197
750.06
29.530
100
0.9807
1.0
14.223
0.9878
32.808
10
735.56
28.959
98.07
0.0689
0.0703
1.0
0.0609
2.3067
0.7031
51.715
2.036
6.89
1.0133
1.0332
14.696
1.0
33.889
10.332
760.0
29.921
101.3
0.0299
0.0305
0.4335
0.0295
1.0
0.3048
22.420
0.8827
2.99
0.10
1.422
0.0968
3.2808
1.0
73.356
2.896
9.81
13.3 x 10
0.0014
0.0193
13.2 x 10-4
0.0446
0.0136
1.0
0.0394
0.133
0,0339
0.0345
0.0334
1.1329
0.0981
-4
1.0 x 10
-5
0.4912
10.2 x 10
-6
14.5 x 10
-5
9.87 x 10
-6
3.34 x 10
0.3453
-4
10.2 x 10
25.40
-5
75.0 x 10
1.0
-4
29.5 x 10
3.39
-5
1.0
atm = international standard atmosphere

kg/cm = metric atmosphere
79
Conversion inch/mm
80
Cooling
Page
82
83
Water Treatment
84
Micro Electronics
85
Life Science
86
Ship Building
87
Water and Gas Utilities
88
Building Services
89
81
Market segments in industrial

systems
Cooling
82
83
Water Treatment
84
Micro Electronics
85
Life Science
86
Ship Building
87
Water and Gas Utilities
88
Building Services
89
90
Approvals for products

Approvals for materials
-- ABS
-- PE
-- Beta-PP-H and PROGEF Natural
-- PVC-U
-- PVC-C
-- PVDF
Standards
-- Relevant standards for valves

-- Relevant standards for flanges
-- Relevant standards for threads
-- Relevant standards for ABS pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for PE pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for PP pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for PVC-C pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for PVC-U pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for PVDF pipes and fittings
-- Relevant standards for GRP pipe lines
Page
92
93
93
94
95
95
95
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
106
106
91

Our products have obtained the following approvals and

testimonials:
ABS: American Bureau of Shipping
ABS, PE100, PVC-Uand PVC-C pipes, fittings and
valves
BAM: Bundesanstalt fr Materialforschung und Prfung
PVC-U pipes
BSI: British Standards Institution
PVC-U fittings, pipes, ABS fittings, PB pipes
BV: Bureau Veritas
ABS , PVC-U, PVC-C, PE100 and PP-H pipes, fittings
and valves
CCS: China Classification Society
PE100, PVC-C and PVC-U pipes, fittings and valves
CSTB: Centre Scientifique et Technique du Btiment
PVC-U fittings
DIBt: Deutsches Institut fr Bautechnik
PVC-U, PP-H and PVDF pipes, fittings and valves,
PE fittings
DNV: Det Norske Veritas
and valves
FDA: Food and Drug Administration
EPDM, FPM, PTFEseals
PVDF-HP pipes and fittings
GL: Germanischer Lloyd
and valves
IIP: Instituto Italiano dei Plastici
PE, PVC-U fittings
KIWA: Keuringsinstituut voor Waterleidingsartikelen
PE, PVC-U fittings
KTW: Kunststoff-Trinkwasser-Empfehlungen (plastics,
drinking water-recommendations)
PE and PVC-U fittings
EPDM seals
LR: Lloyd's Register of Shipping
ABS, PE100, PVC-U, PVC-Cand PP-H pipes, fittings
and valves
MAIRIE DE PARIS:
EPDM seals
NAMSA: North American Science Associates
EPDM, FPM, PTFE seals
PZH: Panstwowy Zaklad Higieny
ABS, PP-H, PVC-U fittings and valves
RINA: Registro Italiano Navale
and valves
RMROS: Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
ABS , PVC-U, PVC-C, PE100 pipes, fittings and valves
UDT:Urzad Dozoru Technicznego
92
ABS , PVC-U, PVC-C, PE100, PVDFand PP-H pipes,

fittings and valves
WRAS: Water Regulations Advisory Scheme
EPDM seals
ABS, PE, PVC-U and PVC-Cpipes and fittings
Please note that this list is continually subject to
changes. Please ask your nearest GF agency for the
most up-to-date list.

ABS
The material is suitable for use with drinking water. The
relevant approvals are currently in preparation. Please
ask your nearest GF agency for further information.
PE
The following information is provided by the raw materials
manufacturers with regard to approvals/testimonials:
Austria
VGW
LHG 1975
Water supply
Foodstuffs
Germany
DVGW
Water and gas supply
GKR
Gas supply
Belgium
Eandis
Gas supply
Universit de
Liege
Water supply
Czech Republic
ITC
France
LNE
GdF
ACS
Water and gas supply, industry

Gas supply
Italy
IIP
Hungary
EMI
Gas supply
Netherlands
KIWA
GIVEG
Water supply
Gas supply
Poland
IGNIG
INSTAL
Gas supply
Water supply
Slovenia
Analog DVGW
Croatia
Analog DVGW
Sweden
KP
Water supply
Denmark
Miljostyrelsen
Water supply
Switzerland
SVGW
Spain
Aenor
Gas supply
UK
DOE
British Gas
Water supply
Gas supply
93
Beta-PP-H and PROGEF Natural

RA130E-PP-Natural
STATEMENT ON COMPLIANCE TO REGULATIONS
FOR DRINKING WATERPIPES
We confirm that this product fulfils the requirements on
materials used for pipes or pipe components intended to
come into contact with drinking water, as described in:
Austria
Kunststoffverordnung Nr. 476/2003 und

nderung Nr. 242/2005
Czech Republic
Vyhlaska Ministerstva zdravotnictvi c. 37/2001

Sb.
Denmark
Fdevaredirektoratets Bekentgrelse nr. 802

(19.08.2005)
EU
Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004 and Commission Directives 2002/72/EC, 2004/1/EC, 2004/

19/EC and 2005/79/EC
Finland
KTM Asetukset 953/2002 ja 181/2005
France
Repression des Fraudes (2002), No 1227, et

Arrt du 2 janvier 2003, Arrt du 29 mars
2005 et Arrt du 9 aout 2005
Germany
Bedarfgegenstndeverordnung in der Version vom 23.12.1997 und nderungen vom

21. Dezember 2000, 7. April 2003 und 13. Juli
2005 sowie Leitlinie des Umweltbundesamtes
zur vernderten Durchfhrung der KTW
Prfungen bis zur Gltigkeit des Europischen
Akzeptanzsystems fr Bauprodukte im Kontakt mit Trinkwasser (EAS), Tabelle 1 "Kunststoffe", BGBl 48, 12/2005)
Italy
Decreto Ministeriale 06.04.2004 N. 174
Netherlands
Staatstoezicht op de Volksgezondheit, Publikatie 94-01, Deel B, 1.3. Polypropeen
Norway
Sosial- og helsedepartementets forskrift 199312-21-1381
Sweden
Statens Livsmedelsverks kungrelse LIVSFS

2003:2, ndr. LIVSFS 2004:31 och ndr. LIVSFS 2005:14
Switzerland Verordnung der EDI ber Bedarfsgegenstnde
23.11.2005, 3. Abschnitt Bedarfsgegenstnde

aus Kunststoff
USA
FDA, CFR, Title 21 (2005), 177.1520 (a)(3)(i)

(c)(1), (b) and (c)3.1a Olefin polymers
USP VI conformity
Migration
limits
Monomers and additives used are not regulated with specific migration limits in the above
mentioned regulations.
Prepared
by
Borealis Group Product Liability / Jrgen Emig
94
BE60-7032 Beta-PP
STATEMENT ON COMPLIANCE TO FOOD CONTACT
REGULATIONS
We confirm that this product fulfils the requirements on
materials used for pipes or pipe components intended to
come into contact with food as described in:
Physiologically harmless in conjunction with neutral,

acid and alcoholic foods as per consumer goods order
and BgW recommendations for PVC-U.
From a microbiological view, suitable for use with
drinking water as per DVGW W 270 test.
Conformance with KTW (plastic materials and drinking water) recommendations issued by the BGA (Federal Health Bulletin 1977)
Conformit Sanitaire (circulaires DGS/VS4/N94/9,
-155 and Arret Interministriel of 1997)
KIWA requirements for organoleptic and microbial
growth
NSF approval in preparation
Austria
Kunststoffverordnung Nr. 476/2003 und

nderung Nr. 242/2005
Belgium
Koninlijk Besluit - Arrt Royal, du 11 mai

1992 et 10 dcembre 2002 (M.B. 20/2/2003)
Czech Republic
Vyhlaska Ministerstva zdravotnictvi c. 38/2001

Sb. a.c. 186/2003 Sb.
Denmark
Fdevaredirektoratets Bekentgrelse nr. 80

(27.01.2005)
EU
Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004 and Commission Directives 2002/72/EC, 2004/1/EC and

2004/19/EC
Finland
KTM Asetukset 953/2002 ja 181/2005
France
Repression des Fraudes (2002), No 1227, et

Arrt du 2 janvier 2003 etArrt du 29 mars
2005
EEC Directive 90/128 EEC (as at 1990), 78/142 (1978)

80/432 (1981), 80/766 (1980), 2002/72 EC (Contact
with foodstuff)
Germany
Bedarfgegenstndeverordnung in der Version vom 10. April 1992, nderungen 11. April
1994, 17. April 1997, 21. Dezember 2000 und
7. April 2003, und BfR-Empfehlungen (2005)
Great
Britain
Statutory Instruments, 1998 No. 1376, 2000

No. 3162, 2002 No. 2364 and Polymer Specification 5, Polypropylene
Italy: Dichiarazione di conformit alla C.M. n. 102 del

02.12.1978: Disciplina igienica concernente le materie
plastiche e gomme per tubazioni ed accessori destinati
a venire in contatto con acqua potabile e da potabilizzare.
Italy
Decreto Ministeriale 06.4.1993 N. 220, 28.10.

1994 N. 735, 24.9.1996 N.572, 6.2.1997 N.91,
22.7.1998 N.338, 15.6.2000 N.210, 28.3.2003
N.123 e
Netherlands
Warenwet (2003), Hoofdstuk 1,Kunststoffen
Norway
Sosial- og helsedepartementets forskrift 199312-21-1381
Portugal
Decreto-Lei n. 4/2003 de 10 de Janeiro de

2003
Spain
Real Decretos 2207/1994, 442/2001, 118/

2003, Orden ministerial SCO/983/2003 y
ANAIP (1982), Anexo 1, Anexo 4
Sweden
Statens Livsmedelsverks kungrelse LIVSFS

2003:2 ochndr. LIVSFS 2004:31
Migration
limits
The product contains 3,3'-thiobis (propanoic

acid octadecylester), (CAS No. 693-36-7),
which is regulated with specific migration limits
in EU
Prepared
by
Borealis Group Product Liability / Tuuli Kunnas
PVC-U
Existing drinking water and food approvals:
The following information is provided by the raw

materials manufacturers with regard to approvals/
testimonials:
USA FDA 21 CFR, paragraphs 177/178
PVC-C
The following information is provided by the raw
materials manufacturers with regard to approvals/
testimonials:
USA complies with National Sanitary Foundation requirements
The material is suitable for use with drinking water.
Please ask your nearest GF agency for further information.
EC: Directive 2002/95/EC
PVDF
The following information is provided by the raw materials manufacturers with regard to approvals/testimonials:
Food product contact, physiological harmlessness,
toxicology
Thames Water Services (UK): approval for use of
pipes in SOLEF PVDF 1010 and 3410 to transport hot
and cold water for domestic consumption (report No.
2141A of 27 July 1988)
TNO Report MRP V 160/83: insensitivity of SOLEF
PVDF to conventional sterilization methods
Centre dEnseignement et de Recherches des Industries Alimentaires et Chimiques (CERIA-B): test report
No. 284.321 of 14 April 1974 demonstrating the absence of proliferation of mildews and bacteria on the
surface of SOLEF PVDF (comparable to glass)
Safepharm Labs Ltd (UK): approval of SOLEF PVDF
1008 according to the tests conforming to the United
States Pharmacopoeia (USP) XXI "Biological tests
July 1986
95
Hygiene-Institut des Ruhrgebietes Gelsenkirchen

(D): test reports No. C208/92/St and C209/92/St concerning the SOLEF grades 1008 and 8908/0505 for
use in transporting hot and cold water for domestic
consumption. The grades tested conform to the "Kunststoff Trinkwasser Empfehlungen KTW
USP Class VI, Biological reactivity test, invivo
Compliance with FDA volume 21, section 177.2510
Compliance with European Directive 2002/72/EC
(Contact with foodstuff)
NSF-61 Potable water, Kynar 720/740
NSF-51 Food equipment material, Kynar 720/740
NSF-14 Plastic piping system components, Kynar
720/740
3A Sanitary Standards
Kosher Certified by the Chicago Rabbinical Council,
Kynar 720/740
96
Standards
Relevant standards for valves
ASME B 16.10 (2009-00)
Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of valves
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
Symbolic representation of pipework components on engineering drawings; functional representation
DIN 3202-4 (1982-04)
Face-to-face and centre-to-face dimensions of valves; Valves with female thread connection
DIN 3202-5 (1984-09)
Face-to-face and centre-to-face dimensions of valves; valves for connection with compression couplings
DIN 3230-4 (1977-03)
Technical conditions of delivery for valves; valves for potable water service, requirements
and testing
DIN 3230-5 (1984-08)
Technical delivery conditions; valves for gas installations and gas pipelines; requirements
and testing
DIN 3230-6 (1987-09)
Technical delivery conditions for valves; requirements and methods of test for valves for
use with flammable liquids
DIN 3266 (2009-05)
Valves for drinking water installations on private premises - Anti-vacuum valve Types D
and E - Requirements and tests
DIN 3292-1 (1984-06)
Fittings for domestic installation; nonferrous metal union nuts
DIN 3500 (1990-02)
PN 10 piston type gate valves for use in drinking water supply systems
DIN 3512 (2002-10)
Stop valves for domestic water supply - Two-way valves - Vertical bonnet type PN 10;
Straight pattern globe valve; Technical rule of the DVGW / Note: applies in conjunction with
DIN EN 1213
DIN 3537-1 (1990-06)
Gas stop valves rated for pressures up to 4 bar; requirements and acceptance testing
DIN 3543-1 (1984-08)
Metal tapping valves; requirements, testing
DIN 3543-2 (1984-05)
Metallic tapping stop valves; dimensions
DIN 3543-3 (1978-07)
PVC tapping valves for plastic pipes; dimensions
DIN 3543-4 (1984-08)
High density polyethylene (HDPE) tapping valves for HDPE pipes; dimensions
DIN 3544-1(1985-09)
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) valves; tapping valves; requirements and test
DIN 32676 (2009-05)
Fittings for the food, chemical and pharmaceutical industries - Clamp connections for stainless steel tubes - Weld-on type
EN 593+A1 (2011-03)
Industrial valves - Metallic butterfly valves
DIN EN 12266-1 (2003-06)
Industrial valves - Testing of valves - Part 1: Pressure tests, test procedures and acceptance criteria - Mandatory requirements
DIN EN 12266-2 (2003-05)
Industrial valves - Testing of valves - Part 1: Pressure tests, test procedures and acceptance criteria - Mandatory requirements
DIN EN 12516-2 (2004-10)
Industrial valves - Shell design strength - Part 2: Calculation method for steel valve shells
DIN EN 13774 (2003-07)
Valves for gas distribution systems with maximum operating pressure smaller or equal 16
bar - Performance requirements
DIN EN 14141 (2004-03)
Valves for natural gas transportation in pipelines - Performance requirements and tests
EN 15389 (2008-05)
Industrial valves - performance characteristics of thermoplastic valves when used as construction products
DIN EN ISO 5211(2001-06)
Industrial valves - Part-turn actuator attachments
EN ISO 16135 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Ball valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16136 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Butterfly valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16137 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Check valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16138 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Diaphragm valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16139 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Gate valves for thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 21787 (2006-03)
Industrial valves-Globe valves of thermoplastic materials
ISO 9393-1 (2004-07)
Thermoplastics valves - Pressure test methods and requirements - Part 1: General
ISO 9393-2 (2005-10)
Thermoplastics valves - Pressure test methods and requirements - Part 2: Test conditions
and basic requirements
97
ISO 14617-8 (2002-09)
Graphical symbols for diagrams - Part 8: Valves and dampers
JIS B 2002 (1987-02)
Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of valves
JIS B 2003 (1994-11)
General rules for inspection of valves
Relevant standards for flanges

ANSI B16.1 (2010-00)
Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250
ANSI/ASME B 16.5 (2009-00)
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASTM D 4024 (2005-00)
Standard Specification for Machine Made "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
ASTM D 5421 (2005-00)
Standard Specification for Contact Molded "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
BS 10:2009 (2009-04)
Specification for flanges and bolting for pipes, valves, and fittings
BS 1560-3.1:1989 (1989-06)
Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (class-designated). Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges. Specification for steel flanges
BS 1560-3.2:1989 (1990-03)
Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (class-designated). Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges. Specification for cast iron flanges
BS EN 1515-1:2000 (2000-02)
Flanges and their joints. Bolting. Selection of bolting
BS EN 1759-1:2004 (2004-11)
Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, classdesignated. Steel flanges, NPS 1/2 to 24
BS EN 1759-3:2003 (2004-03)
Flanges and their joint. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, class
designated. Copper alloy flanges
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 16831-7 (2004-02)
Pipe joints and components of polybutene (PB) for pipes under pressure; PB 125 - Part 7:
Flange adapters, flanges, sealing rings for socket welding; dimensions
DIN 16872 (1993-10)
Pipe joints assemblies for pipelines of thermoplastics; glass fibre reinforced polyester resin
(UP-GF) flanges; dimensions
DIN 16966-6 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joint assemblies; collars,
flanges, joint rings, dimensions
DIN 16966-7 (1995-04)
Pipe joints and their elements of glass fibre reinforced polyester resins - Part 7: Bushings,
flanges, flanged and butt joints; general quality requirements and test methods
DIN 28403 (1986-09)
Vacuum technology; quick release couplings; clamped type couplings
DIN 28404 (1986-10)
Vacuum technology; flanges; dimensions
DIN 8063-12 (1987-01)
Pipe joint assemblies and fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (U-PVC) pressure
pipelines; dimensions of flanged and socket fittings
DIN 8063-4 (1983-09)
Pipe joint assemblies and fittings for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure
pipes; bushings, flanges, seals; dimensions
DIN EN 1092-1 (2008-09)
Flanges and their joints - Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN
designated - Part 1: Steel flanges
DIN EN 1092-2 (1997-06)
Flanges and their joints - Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and accessories, PN
designated - Part 2: Cast iron flanges
DIN EN 1514-8 (2005-02)
Flanges and their joints - Dimensions of gaskets for PN-designated flanges - Part 8: Polymeric O-Ring gaskets for grooved flanges
DVS 2205-4 (1988-11) suppl.
Calculation of thermoplastic tanks and apparatuses - Flanged joints
DVS 2205-4 Beiblatt (1996-11)

suppl.
Calculation of thermoplastic tanks and apparatuses - Welded flanges, welded collars Constructive details
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-5)
EN558 (2008-01)
Industrial valves - Face-to-face and centre-to-face dimensions of metal valves for use in
flanged pipe systems - PN and Class designated valves
ISO 5752 (1982-06)
Metal valves for use in flanged pipe systems; Face-to-face and centre-to-face dimensions
ISO 7005-1 (1992-04)
Metallic flanges; part 1: steel flanges
ISO 7005-2 (1988-12)
Metallic flanges; part 2: cast iron flanges
ISO 7005-3 (1988-02)
Metallic flanges; part 3: copper alloy and composite flanges
98
ISO 7483 (1991-10)
Dimensions of gaskets for use with flanges to ISO 7005
ISO 8483 (2003-12)
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings - Test methods to prove
the design of bolted flange joints
ISO 9624 (1997-02)
Thermoplastics pipes for fluids under pressure - Mating dimensions of flange adapters and
loose backing flanges
JIS B 2220 (2004-01)
Steel pipe flanges
JIS B 2239 (2004-03)
Cast iron pipe flanges
EN ISO 15493 (2003-04)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS),

unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) Specifications for components and the system; Metric series (ISO 15493:2003)
EN ISO 15494 (2003-04)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - Polybutene (PB), polyethylene (PE) and
polypropylene (PP) - Specifications for components and the system; Metric series (ISO
15494:2003)
EN ISO 10931 (2005-12)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - Poly(vinylidene fluoride) (PVDF) - Specifications for components and the system (ISO 10931:2005)
Relevant standards for threads

ANSI B 1.20.1 (1983-00)
Pipe threads, general purpose (inch)
ASTM F 1498 (2008-00)
Standard Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60 for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
BS 21:1985 (1985-09)
Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on
the threads (metric dimensions)
DIN 103-1 (1977-04)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; profiles
DIN 103-2 (1977-04)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; general plan
DIN 103-3 (1977-04)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; allowances and tolerances for trapezoidal screw
threads of general purpose
DIN 103-4 (1977-04)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; nominal dimensions
DIN 103-5 (1972-10)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; limiting sizes for nut threads from 8 to 100 mm Nominal Diameter
DIN 103-6 (1972-10)
ISO Metric Trapezoidal Screw Threads; Limiting Sizes for Nut Threads from 105 to 300
mm nominal diameter
DIN 103-7 (1972-10)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; limiting sizes for bolt threads from 8 to 100 mm nominal diameter
DIN 103-8 (1972-10)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw thread; limiting sizes for bolt threads from 105 to 300 mm
nominal diameter
DIN 103-9 (1985-02)
ISO metric trapezoidal screw threads; gauging of external and internal threads; gauge dimensions and design features
DIN 16903-1 (1974-12)
Open insert nuts for plastics mouldings
DIN 16903-2 (1974-12)
Closed insert nuts with disc for plastics mouldings
DIN 16903-3 (1974-12)
Closed insert nuts with dead hole for plastics mouldings
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 3852-2 (2000-11)
Stud ends, ports, for fittings, valves - Plug screw with Whitworth pipe thread - General outlay of types
DIN 40430 (1971-02)
Steel conduit thread; dimensions
DIN 405-1 (1997-11)
General purpose knuckle threads - Part 1: Profiles, nominal sizes
DIN 405-2 (1997-11)
General purpose knuckle threads - Part 2: Deviations and tolerances
DIN 513-1 (1985-04)
Metric buttress threads; thread profiles
DIN 513-2 (1985-04)
Metric buttress threads; general plan
DIN 513-3 (1985-04)
Metric buttress threads; deviations and tolerances
DIN EN 10226-1(2004-10)
Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads - Part 1: Taper external
threads and parallel internal threads - Dimensions, tolerances and designation
DIN EN 10226-3 (2005-05)
Pipes threads where pressure tight joint are made on the threads - Part 3: Verification by
means of limit gauges
99
DIN ISO 1502 (1996-12)
ISO general purpose metric screw threads - Gauges and gauging (ISO 1502:1996)
DIN EN ISO 228-1 (2003-05)
Pipe threads where pressuretight joints are not made on the threads - Part 1: Dimensions,
tolerances and designation (ISO 228-1:2000); German version EN ISO 228-1:2003
DIN EN ISO 228-1 suppl. 1

(2003-05)
Pipe threads where pressuretight joints are not made on the threads - Part 1: Dimensions,
tolerances and designation; limits of size
DIN EN ISO 228-2 (2003-05)
Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are not made on the threads - Part 2: Verification
by means of limit gauges (ISO 228-2:1987); German version EN ISO 228-2:2003
ISO 7-1 (1994-05)
Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - Part 1: Dimensions, tolerances and designation
ISO 7-2 (2000-09)
Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - Part 2: Verification by
means of limit gauges
ISO 68-1(1998-12)
ISO general purpose screw threads - Basic profile - Part 1: Metric screw threads
JIS K 6743 (2007-03)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipe fittings for water supply
Relevant standards for ABS pipes and fittings

ASTM D 1527(1999-00)
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe, Schedules

40 and 80 / Note: 1. editorial change
ASTM D 3965(2005-00)
Standard Specification for Rigid Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Materials for Pipe

and Fittings
BS 5391-1:2006 (2006-12)
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pressure pipe. Specification
BS 5392-1:2006 (2006-12)
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) fittings for use with ABS pressure pipe. Specification
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines - Double Containment Systems
ISO 727-1 (2002-05)
Fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C)

or acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) with plain sockets for pipes under pressure - Part
1: Metric series
ISO 727-2 (2005-06)

or acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) with plain sockets for pipes under pressure - Part
2: Inch-based series
ISO 8283-4 (1992-12
Plastics pipes and fittings; dimensions of sockets and spigots for discharge systems inside
buildings; Part 4: acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS)
EN ISO 15493 (2003-04)

unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) Specifications for components and the system; Metric series (ISO 15493:2003)
100
Relevant standards for PE pipes and fittings

ASTM D 2657 (2007-00)
Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2737 (2003-00)
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on
Outside Diameter
ASTM D 3261a (2010-00)
Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 3543-4 (1984-08)
High density polyethylene (HDPE) tapping valves for HDPE pipes; dimensions
DIN 3544-1 (1985-09)
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) valves; tapping valves; requirements and test
DIN 8074 (1999-08)
Polyethylene (PE) - Pipes PE 63, PE 80, PE 100, PE-HD - Dimensions
DIN 8075 (1999-08)
Polyethylene (PE) pipes - PE 63, PE 80, PE 100, PE-HD - General quality requirements,
testing
DIN 8076 (2008-11)
Pressure pipelines made from thermoplastics materials - Metal and plastics compression
fittings for polyethylene (PE) pipes - General quality requirements and testing
DIN 19537-3 (1990-11)
Prefabricated high density polyethylene (PE-HD) manholes for use in sewerage systems;
dimensions and technical delivery conditions
DIN EN 12007-2 (2000-08)
Gas supply systems - Pipelines for maximum operating pressure up to and including 16
bar - Part 2: Specific functional recommendations for polyethylene (MOP up to and including 10 bar); German version EN 12007-2:2000
DVGW VP 302 (2006-06)
Shut-off valves made of polyethylene (PE 80 und PE 100) - Requirements and tests
DVS 2205-1 Beiblatt 6 (2011-04)
Design calculations for containers and apparatus made from thermoplastics - Characteristic values of Polyethylene
DVS 2207-1 (2005-09)
Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes, pipeline, components and sheets
made from PE-HD
DVS 2210-1 (1997-04)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 1 (2003-04)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines- Example for calculation
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 2 (2004-07)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines- Internal pressure test and leak thightness test
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-05)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines- Flanges: Requirements, Assembling
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
EN 1555-1 (2010-09)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 1: General
EN 1555-2 (2010-09)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 2: Pipes
EN 1555-3 (2010-09)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 3: Fittings
EN 1555-4 (2011-05)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 4:
Valves
EN 1555-5 (2010-09)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 5: Fitness for purpose of the system
CEN/TS 1555-7 (2003-04)
Plastics piping systems for the supply of gaseous fuels - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 7: Guidance for the assessment of conformity
EN 12201-1 (2003-03)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 1: General
EN 12201-2 (2003-03)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 2: Pipes
EN 12201-3 (2003-03)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 3: Fittings
EN 12201-4 (2001-12)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 4: Valves
EN 12201-5 (2003-03)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 5: Fitness for purpose
of the system
CEN/TS 12201-7 (2003-08)
Plastics piping systems for water supply - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 7: Guidance for the assessment of conformity
101
EN 13244-5 (2002-12)
Plastics piping systems for buried and aboveground pressure systems for water of general purposes, drainage and sewerage - Polyethylene (PE) - Part 5: Fitness for purpose of
the system
EN ISO 15494 (2003-04)
polypropylene (PP) - Specifications for components and the system; metric series (ISO
15494:2003)
ISO 12176-3 (2011-02)
Plastics pipes and fittings - Equipment for fusion jointing polyethylene systems - Part 3:
Operator's badge
ISO 14236 (2000-03)
Plastics pipes and fittings - Mechanical-joint compression fittings for use with polyethylene
pressure pipes in water supply systems
ISO 3458 (1976-06)
Assembled joints between fittings and polyethylene (PE) pressure pipes; test of leak proofness under internal pressure
ISO 3459 (1976-10)
Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipes; Joints assembled with mechanical fittings; internal under-pressure test method and requirement
ISO 3501 (1976-06)
Assembled joints between fittings and polyethylene (PE) pressure pipes; test of resistance
to pull out
ISO 3503 (1976-06)
Assembled joints between fittings and polyethylene (PE) pressure pipes; test of leakproofness under internal pressure when subjected to bending
ISO 4437 (2007-06)
Buried polyethylene (PE) pipes for the supply of gaseous fuels - Metric series - Specifications
ISO 9623 (1997-02)
PE/metal and PP/metal adaptor fittings for pipes for fluids under pressure - Design lengths
and size of threads - Metric series
ISO/TS 10839 (2000-03)
Polyethylene pipes and fittings for the supply of gaseous fuels - Code of practice for design, handling and installation
JIS K 6774 (2005-03)
Polyethylene pipes for the supply of gaseous fuels
Relevant standards for PP pipes and fittings

DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 8077 (2008-09)
Polypropylene (PP) pipes - PP-H, PP-B, PP-R, PP-RCT - Dimensions
DIN 8078 (2008-08)
Polypropylene (PP) pipes - PP-H, PP-B, PP-R, PP-RCT - General quality requirements
and testing
DIN 8078 Suppl. 1 (1982-02)
Pipes of polypropylene (PP); chemical resistance of pipes and fittings
DVS 2207-6 (2003-12)
Welding of thermoplastics - Non-contact heated tool butt welding of pipes, pipeline components and sheets - Methods, equipment, parameters
DVS 2207-11 (2008-08)
Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes,components and sheets out of

PP
DVS 2210-1 (1997-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 1 (2003-04)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines - Example for calculation
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 2 (2004-07)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines - Internal pressure test and leak thightness test
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-05)
Industrial pipework systems of thermoplastic polymers; planning and construction; aboveground pipelines - Flanges: Requirements, Assembling
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
ISO 3213 (2009-09)
Polypropylene (PP) pipes - Effect of time and temperature on the expected strength
ISO 9623 (1997-02)
PE/metal and PP/metal adaptor fittings for pipes for fluids under pressure - Design lengths
and size of threads - metric series
EN ISO 15494 (2003-04)
polypropylene (PP) - Specifications for components and the system; metric series (ISO
15494:2003)
102
Relevant standards for PVC-C pipes and fittings

ASTM F 437 (2009-00)
Standard specification for threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80
ASTM F 441/F 441M (2009-00)
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F 1970 (2005-00)
Standard specification for special engineered fittings, appurtenances or valves for use in
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or hlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) systems
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 8079 (2009-10)
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) pipes -Dimensions
DIN 8080 (2009-10)
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) pipes - General quality requirements, testing
DIN 8080 Beiblatt 1 (2000-08)
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) pipes, PVC-C 250 - general quality requirements
and testing; chemical resistance
DIN 16832-1 (2002-10)
Pipe joints and components of chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) for pipes under pressure - PVC-C 200 - Part 1: Dimensions
DIN 16832-2 (2002-10)
Pipe joints and components of chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) for pipes under pressure - PVC-C 200 - Part 2: General quality requirements and testing
DVS 2204-5 (2003-11)
DVS 2204-5 Beiblatt 1 (2003-12)
DVS 2204-5 Beiblatt 2 (2003-12)
DVS 2210-1 (1997-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 1 (2003-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 2 (2004-07)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-05)
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
ISO 727-1 (2002-05)

or acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) with plain sockets for pipes under pressure - part
1: Metric series
ISO 727-2 (2005-06)

EN ISO 15493 (2003-04)

unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) - specifications for components and the system; metric series (ISO 15493:2003)
103
Relevant standards for PVC-U pipes and fittings

ASTM D 1784 (2011-00)
Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D 1785 (2006-00)
Standard specification for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2464 (2006-00)
Standard specification for threaded polyvinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule
80
ASTM D 2466 (2006-00)
Standard specification for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe fittings, schedule 40
ASTM F 1970 (2005-00)
Standard specification for special engineered fittings, appurtenances or valves for use in
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) systems
BS 3506:1969 (1969-09)
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe for industrial uses
BS 4346-1 (1969-02)
Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes. Injection moulded unplasticized PVC fittings for solvent welding for use with pressure pipes, including potable
water supply
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
DIN 8061 (2009-10)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipes - general quality requirements and testing
DIN 8061 suppl. 1 (1984-02)
Unplasticized polyvinylchloride pipes; chemical resistance of pipes and fittings of (PVC-U)
DIN 8062 (2009-10)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U, PVC-HI) pipes; dimensions
DIN 8063-1 (1986-12)
pipelines; dimensions of socket bends
DIN 8063-10 (2002-06)
Pipe joints and their elements for pipes of unplasticized polyvinylchloride (unplasticized
PVC) under pressure; wall disk, dimensions
DIN 8063-11 (1980-07)
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pipes under pressure made of unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (rigid PVC); sockets with primary element of copper-zinc-alloy (brass) for bonding; dimensions
DIN 8063-12 (1987-01)
Pipe joint assemblies and fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pressure
pipelines; dimensions of flanged and socket fittings
DIN 8063-2 (1980-07)
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pipes under pressure made of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (rigid PVC); bends made by injection moulding for bonding; dimensions
DIN 8063-3 (2002-06)
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pipes under pressure made of uplasticized polyvinyl chloride (rigid PVC); screwed pipe joints; dimensions
DIN 8063-4 (1983-09)
pipes; bushings, flanges, seals; dimensions
DIN 8063-5 (1999-10)
Pipe joints components of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) for pipes under pressure - part 5: General quality requirements, testing
DIN 8063-6 (2002-06)
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pipes under pressure made of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (rigid PVC); injection moulded elbows for bonding; dimensions
DIN 8063-7 (1980-07)
Pipe joints and their elements of unplasticized polyvinylchloride (unplasticized PVC) under
pressure; tees and branches of injection moulded for cold welding, dimensions
DIN 8063-8 (2002-06)
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pipes under pressure made of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (rigid PVC); injection moulded sockets, caps and nipples for bonding; dimensions
DIN 8063-9 (1980-08)
Pipe joints and their elements for pipes of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (unplasticized
PVC) under pressure; sockets reducing of injection moulded for cold welding, dimensions
DVS 2204-4 (2011-12)
Adhesive bonding of pipes and fittings made of thermoplastics -Polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U)
DVS 2210-1 (1997-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 1 (2003-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 2 (2004-07)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-05)
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
DIN 16450 (1994-06)
Socketfittings for pressure piping of unplasticized polyvinylchloride (PVC-U); symbols
104
DIN EN ISO 13783 (1998-07)
Plastics piping systems - unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) end-load-bearing double-socket joints - test method for leaktightness and strength while subjected to bending
and internal pressure (ISO 13783:1997); German version EN ISO 13783:1997
EN ISO 1452-1 (2009-12)
Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and above-ground drainage and
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 1: General
EN ISO 1452-2 (2009-12)
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 2: Pipes
EN ISO 1452-3 (2011-05)
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 3: Fittings
EN ISO 1452-4 (2009-12)
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 4: Valves
EN ISO 1452-5 (2011-04)
sewerage under pressure - Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) - Part 5: Fitness for
purpose of the system
EN ISO 15493 (2003-04)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS),

unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) - specifications for components and the system; metric series (ISO 15493:2003)
ISO 15493 Technical Corrigendum

1 (2004-05)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS),

unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C) - specifications for components and the system; metric series (ISO 15493:2003) Technical Corrigendum 1
ISO 265-1 (1988-12)
Pipes and fittings of plastics materials; fittings for domestic and industrial waste pipes; basic dimensions: Metric series; part 1: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U)
ISO 727-1 (2002-05)

1: Metric series (revision of ISO 727:1985)
ISO 727-2 (2005-06)

ISO 4132 (1979-07)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and metal adaptor fittings for pipes under pressure;
laying lengths and size of threads; metric series
JIS K 6741 (2007-03)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes
JIS K 6742 (2007-03)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes for water supply
JIS K 6743 (2007-03)
Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipe fittings for water supply
105
Relevant standards for PVDF pipes and fittings

DVS 2205 Suppl. 4 (1996-08)
Design calculations for containers and apparatus made from thermoplastics; creep rupture
curves for pipes made from PVDF
DVS 2207-6 (2003-09)
Welding of thermoplastics - Non-contact heated tool butt welding of pipes, pipeline components and sheets - Methods, equipment, parameters
DVS 2207-15 (2005-12)
Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes, pipeline, components and sheets
out of PVDF
DVS 2210-1 (1997-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 1 (2003-04)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 2 (2004-07)
DVS 2210-1 Beiblatt 3 (2006-05)
DVS 2210-2 (2007-10)
DIN 2429-2 (1988-01)
EN ISO 10931 (2005-12)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) - Specifications for components and the system (ISO 10931:2005)
ISO 10931 (2005-12)
Plastics piping systems for industrial applications - Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) - Specifications for components and the system
ASTM D 3222 (2005-00)
Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion

and Coating Materials
ASTM F 1673 (2010-00)
Standard Specification for Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems
Relevant standards for GRP pipe lines

AD 2000-Merkblatt HP 110
R(2001-06)
Construction regulations - Piping made of glass reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP)

with and without liner - Manufacture and testing of pressure vessels
BS 7159:1989 (1989-10)
Code of practice for design and construction of glass-reinforced plastics (GRP) piping systems for individual plants or sites
BS 7159 (1989-10)
Code of practice for design and construction of glass-reinforced plastics (GRP) piping systems for individual plants or sites
BS 8010-2.5 (1989-08)
Code of practice for pipelines. Pipelines on land: design, construction and installation.
Glass reinforced thermosetting plastics
DIN 16867 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipes, fittings and joints for use in chemical
pipelines; Technical delivery conditions
DIN 16871 (1982-02)
Centrifugally cast glass fibre reinforced epoxy resin (EP-GF) pipes; Dimensions
DIN 16872 (1993-10)
Pipe joints assemblies for pipelines of thermoplastics; glass fibre reinforced polyester resin
(UP-GF) flanges; dimensions
DIN 16964 (1988-11)
Wound glass fibre reinforced polyester resins (UP-GF) pipes; general quality requirements
and testing
DIN 16965-1 (1982-07)
Wound glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF); pipes, Type A pipes, dimensions
DIN 16965-2 (1982-07)
Wound glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF); pipes, Type B pipes, dimensions
DIN 16965-4 (1982-07)
Wound glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF); pipes, Type D pipes, dimensions
DIN 16965-5 (1982-07)
Wound glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF); pipes, Type E pipes, dimensions
DIN 16966-1 (1988-11)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joint assemblies; fittings;
general quality requirements and testing
DIN 16966-2 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joints; Elbows, Dimensions
DIN 16966-4 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings an joints; Tees, Nozzles, Dimensions
DIN 16966-5 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joints; Reducers, Dimensions
106
DIN 16966-6 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joint assemblies; collars,
flanges, joint rings, dimensions
DIN 16966-7 (1995-04)
Pipe joints and their elements of glass fibre reinforced polyester resins - Part 7: Bushings,
flanges, flanged and butt joints; general quality requirements and test methods
DIN 16966-8 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (UP-GF) pipe fittings and joints; Laminated joints; Dimensions
DIN 16967-2 (1982-07)
Glass fibre reinforced epoxy resin (EP-GF) pipe fittings and joints; Elbows, Tees, Dimensions
DIN 53769-1 (1988-11)
Testing of glass fibre reinforced plastics pipes; determination of the longitudinal shear
strength of type B pipe fittings
DIN 53769-2 (1986-12)
Testing of glass fibre reinforced plastics pipes; long-term hydrostatic pressure test
EN 1394 (1996-09)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the apparent initial circumferential tensile strength
EN 1447+A1 (2010-10)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of long-term resistance to internal pressure
EN 1862 (1997-08)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the relative flexural creep factor following exposure to a chemical environment
EN 637 (1994-04)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced plastics components - Determination of the

amounts of constituents using the gravimetric method
EN 705 (1994-04)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings Methods for regression analysis and their use
EN 761 (1994-04)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the creep factor under dry conditions
ISO 10466 (1997-11)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Test

method to prove the resistance to initial ring deflection
ISO 10471 (2003-12)
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the long-term ultimate bending strain and the long-term ultimate relative ring deflection under wet conditions
ISO 10928 (1997-08)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings
- Methods for regression analysis and their use / Note: To be replaced by ISO/DIS 10928
(2006-03).
ISO 1172 (1996-12)
Textile-glass-reinforced plastics, prepregs, moulding compounds and laminates - Determination of the textile-glass and mineral-filler content - Calcination methods
ISO 14828 (2003-12)
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the long-term specific ring relaxation stiffness under wet conditions and calculation of the wet relaxation factor
ISO 15306 (2003-12)
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the resistance to

cyclic internal pressure
ISO 7432 (2002-07)
the design of locked socket-and-spigot joints, including double-socket joints, with elastomeric seals
ISO 7509 (2000-06)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of time to failure under sustained internal pressure
ISO 7511 (1999-03)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings Test methods to prove the leaktightness of the wall under short-term internal pressure
ISO 7685 (1998-07)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of initial specific ring stiffness
ISO 8483 (2003-12)
the design of bolted flange joints
ISO 8513 (2000-11)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of longitudinal tensile propertiesISO 8521
ISO 8521 (2009-08)
Plastics piping systems - Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes - Determination of the apparent initial circumferential tensile strength
ISO 8533 (2003-12)
the design of cemented or wrapped joints
ISO 8639 (2000-03)
Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings - Test methods for leaktightness of flexible joints
ISO/TS 10465-1 (2007-04)
Underground installation of flexible glass-reinforced pipes based on unsaturated polyester

resin (GRP-UP) - Part 1: Installation procedures
107
108

Tender invitation
Text for invitation of tenders is needed for pricing construction work. The text has to be well-defined and clear
to every prospective supplier.
The consultant represents the end user and with the invitation to tender takes over the interest of the end user.
Therefore the consultant will define the text for the invitation of tenders.
The tender invitation contains specification of the products to be used (supply) and work to be done (manufacture). With the information a prospective supplier can offer appropriate products and service.
The individual products from different manufacturers are
not always interchangeable regarding quality, condition
of supply and service.
The products have to meet certain specific characteristics and functions which have been specified during design.
Specifications for products and jointing technologies
from Georg Fischer can be found on our web page at:
http://www.piping.georgfischer.com.
109
Selecting your pipe material chemical resistance

General information regarding chemical resistance
Introduction
Plastic materials are now widely used in pipeline construction. Pipes made from plastics are used not only for
drinking water, water for general use and waste water,
but also for the conveyance of aggressive liquids and
gases. Expensive pipe materials such as lined metal,
ceramic or glass, have largely been replaced by plastic pipes. It is, however, important that the most suitable
plastic material is selected for each application.
The Chemical Resistance List in this section serves as
a useful guide in this respect. The list is periodically revised to include the latest findings. It contains all the
plastics and elastomers in the GF product range which
can come into direct contact with the media. The information is based on experiments, immersion and, when
available, on data from tests which include temperature
and pressure as stress factors. The results achieved in
immersion experiments cannot be applied without reservation to pipes under stress, i.e. internal pressure, as
the factor "stress corrosion cracking" is often not taken into consideration. In certain cases it can be of advantage to test the suitability under the planned working
conditions. The tests referred to have been carried out
partly by GF and partly by the Internal Standardisation
Organisation (ISO) or national standards organisations.
Pure chemicals were used for the tests. If a mixture of
chemicals is to be conveyed in practice, this may affect the chemical resistance of the plastic. It is possible
in special cases to carry out appropriate tests with the
specific mixture. Suitable test equipment is available at
GF for this purpose, which we regard as part of our service to the customer. We are always willing to give individual advice at any time. In this connection it is worth
mentioning that GF already possesses information concerning the behaviour towards plastics of a number of
chemicals or mixtures of chemicals which are not yet included in this list.
Instructions for the use of the chemical resistance list

General
Following the assertions outlined in the introduction the
attached list should be regarded as a valuable tool for
finding the most suitable material for a given application.
Note: The list has been compiled based on ideal and
mostly simplified conditions of laboratory testing; real
life and field applications are subjected to working conditions that might be defined by more complex factors.
Consequently any statement quoted in our chemical resistance list should be regarded as a guiding value.
In particular, we would like to emphasize that such a list

- by nature -cannot supply the following information:
All relevant details of the respective experiment that
has been the source for a given set of data
Possible influence of dynamic effects
Long-term effects
Possible influence due to the method of processing,
the thermal history as well as the exact formulation of
the respective samples
Behaviour of mixtures of different media or effects
based on discontinuous service
(Detailed) characterisation of the corrosion phenomenon / deterioration observed
Derivation of the max. applicable service pressure
Consideration of all chemicals
Contacting your GF representative
Thus, if it comes to material decisions and there is a
need for selecting the proper polymer (grade), please
do not hesitate to contact GF; based on decades of
practical experience with polymer piping systems applied in industry and chemical engineering, GF has acquired an outstanding knowledge in:
Practical field testing, case studies
Theoretical background (corrosion science, polymer
formulations, possible influences of processing, etc.)
Relevant literature
Apart from that, GF is a very active memberin a global
network for all aspects of corrosion regarding polymers;
all thisenables us tosupport the individual enquiries of
our customers efficiently.
However, we cannot exclude situations where the
stock of available data will not completely answer a
customers enquiry. In such cases, a simple laboratory test installation under field test conditions is strongly
recommended.
Classification
The customary classifications:
resistant
conditionally resistant and
not recommended
are depicted by the signs: +, 0 and -, which allow simple
presentation and application. These classifications are
defined as:
Resistant: +
Within the acceptable limits of pressure and temperature the material is unaffected or only insignificantly affected.
Conditionally resistant: 0
The medium can attack the material or cause swelling.
Restrictions must be made as regards pressure and/
or temperature, taking the expected service life into account. The service life of the installation can be noticeably shortened. Further consultations with GF are recommended in any case.
Not recommended: The material cannot be used with the medium at all, or
only under special conditions.
110
Solvent cement joints with Tangit/Dytex

Solvent cement joints on ABS, PVC-U or PVC-C made
with Tangit cement are generally as resistant as the material of the piping system itself.
The use of Dytex solvent cement is recommended for
cement jointing of PVC-U or PVC-C in connection with
the following acids:
Medium
Up to % concentration
Sulphuric acid
70 % H2SO4
Chromic-sulphuric acid
mixture
70 % H2SO4 +
5 % K2Cr2O7 / Na2Cr2O1
Chromic acid
10 % CrO3
Hydrochloric acid
25 % HCl
Nitric acid
20 % HNO3
Sodium hypochlorite
(potassium hypochlorite)
6 % NaOCl
Hydrogen peroxide
5 % H2O2
Hydrofluoric acid
0% HF
For all the media mentioned above in lower concentrations, Tangit solvent cement should be used.
Due to the effects of these acids on the pipe material,
we recommend using pipes with a pressure rating PN
16. For the expected life time and compressive strength,
please contact your GF representative.
Attention! Usually the allowable pressure must be decreased by one pressure rating (thus PN16 to PN10).
When using Dytex in PVC-C piping construction with the
above mentioned acids, the pressure and temperature
requirements for PVC-U must be adhered to.
Because Dytex is not gap-filling, a special cement jointing procedure is required and is described in the chapter onjointing technology.
Fusion joints
In the case of PE, PP and PVDF (SYGEF) heat fusion
joints have practically the same chemical resistance
as the respective material. In conjunction with media
which could cause stress cracking, the fused joints can
be subjected to an increased risk due to residual stress
from the jointing process. In such cases a professionally executedwelding is absolutely necessary. The sensitivity against tension fracture formationcan be reduced
substantially by a thermal retreatment (tempering).
operating media (gases) or solutions of gases in fluids

which have low boiling points (high vapour pressures)
through plastic piping systems.
Suitable materials for compressible media are those
that under standard conditions and at low temperatures
do not tend toward brittle fractures owing to their ductility. Such materials include polyethylene (PE) and acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS). All other raw materials
such as polypropylene (PP-H), polyvinyl chloride (PVCU/-C) or polyvinyliden fluoride (PVDF) are to be limited to 0.1 bar with respect to the operating pressure of
gases. Higher pressures are possible if secondary containment piping systems are used (for environmental
protection, brittle effects, gas shocks, intoxication)
For low boiling point fluids, such as liquid gas or solutions of gases in liquids, for example, hydrochloric acid,
the associated vapour pressure of the media has to be
taken into account. Furthermore, outgassing (due to
changes in the media composition) or vaporisation (due
to an inadmissible, high pressure increase) are to be
prevented by relevant limitation of the operating temperature or by preventing the vapour pressure from exceeding the operational pressure. It is important to point
out that, in such cases of leakage, the sudden escape
of large gas or vapour volumes is to be considered a
dangerous condition.
Relatively high flow velocities must be assumed when
transporting humid gases (aerosols) or following pressure drops in plastic piping systems carrying fluids having high vapour pressures. These can cause the development of high levels of electrostatic charge. Such
a condition exhibits an additional source of danger if
flammable media or mixtures which can explode when
mixed with air are involved.
General summary and limits of applications
The following table includes all the materials contained
in the GF product range, and their abbreviations. The
summary gives preliminary information regarding the
general behaviour of the materials and the temperature
limits.
Sealing materials
Depending upon the working conditions and the stress
involved, the life span of the sealing materials can differ
from that of the pipeline material. Seals in PTFE, which
is not included in this list, are resistant to all the chemicals listed. The greater permeability of PTFE should,
however, be considered. Under certain working conditions, for example when conveying highly aggressive
media such as hydrochloric acid, this material characteristic must be taken into account.
Compressible media
When defining allowable operating conditions, special
care is required in choosing chemically resistant piping
and sealing materials when transporting compressible
111
Abbreviation
Material
Remarks
Maximum permissible
temperature
Constant
Short
term
PTFE
Polytetrafluoro-ethylene
(e.g. Teflon)
Resistant to all chemicals in this list
250 C
NBR
Nitrile Rubber
Good resistance to oil and petrol. Unsuitable for 90 C

oxidising media
120 C
EPDM
Ehtylene Propylene Rubber
Good resistance to ozone and weather. Especially suitable for aggressive chemicals. Unsuitable for oils and fats
120 C
CR
Chloroprene Rubber (e.g.

Neoprene)
Chemical resistance very similar to that of PVC- 80 C

U and between that of Nitrile and Butyl Rubber
110 C
FPM
FFKM
Fluorine Rubber (e.g. Viton, Kalrez)
Has best chemical resistance to solvents of all

elastomers
150 C
200 C
CSM
Chlorine sulphonyl
Polyethylene (e.g. Hypalon)
Chemical resistance similar to that of EPDM
100 C
140 C
Note
The data are provided as is and there is no warranty or
representation, neither express nor implied, that they
are free from errors. We shall not be liable for any damages of any kind that may result from the use of this data.
The successful operation of valves does not only depend on the chemical resistance of their materials and
the seals, but a multiplicity of further factors are to be
considered. Therefore it is not possible to transfer these
data without restrictions also to the operation of valves
made of same materials and/or material combinations.
This document serves only to provide technical information. We refer to our General Sales Terms. Subject to
change without notice.
112
90 C
300 C
Chemical resistance
Acetaldehyde,
CH3-CHO
0-40% aqueous solution
Acetaldehyde,
technically pure
Acetic acid anhydride
CH3-CHO
(CH3-CO)2O
Acetic acid, 0-10 % CH3COOH
Acetic acid, > 80 % CH3COOH
Acetone, technical- CH3-CO-CH3

ly pure
0-40 %, aqueous
solution
21 technically pure
139 technically pure
0-10 %, aqueous
> 80 %, aqueous
56 technically pure
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
1.2
1.2
1.2
-
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
++
-
O
O
-
++
1.4
O
-
++ ++
O O
- O
-
++ O
O -
++ ++
O O
-
- 1.2
1.2
O
-
O
-
++
++
O
-
1.4
1.4
O
-
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ O ++
1.2 - O
O
-
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
O
++ O
O -
O
O
-
++
++
++
++
-
++ ++
++ O
++ O
-
O ++
O O
O -
++ O
O -
NBR
PP-H
PE
++
1.1
O
-
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
FPM
EPDM
ClCH2-CH2OH
PVDF
2-Chloroethanol
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
113
Acetonitrile
Acetophenone
Acrylic acid
ethylester
Acrylic acid
methylester
Acrylonitrile
Adipic acid
114
CH3CN
CH3-CO-C6H5
CH2
CH2
CH2
HOOC-(CH2)4-COOH
82 100 %
202 100 %
80 technically pure
77 technically pure
saturated, aqueous
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
O
-
O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
O
-
NBR
FPM
EPDM
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O ++
- O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
20 ++ ++
40 ++ ++
60 - ++
80
++
100
120
140
O ++ ++
- ++ ++
++ ++
- O
-
PVDF
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
up to 10 %, aqueous
PP-H
PE
CH3-CO-CH3
ABS
Acetone, up to 10
% aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++ O ++ O
++ O - ++ ++ O
O
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
Aluminium salts,
AlCl3, Al(NO3)3,
aqueous, inorganic AlF3, Al(SO4)3
Ammonia,
gaseous, dry / wet
Ammonium salts,
various, aqueous,
inorganic
Amyl acetate
Amyl alcohol
Aniline
NH3
CH3(CH2)4-COOCH3
CH3(CH2)3-CH2-OH
C6H5NH2
saturated
-33 gaseous, technically pure, dry / wet
saturated
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
O
- ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
-
++ O ++
++ - ++
++
++
O
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
O
O
-
++ O ++ ++
O - O O
-
++
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ O
O ++ O ++ O
O O O ++ - O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
O
-
++ ++
O ++
O O
O -
++
++
++
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
O O
-
O ++ O ++
O ++ O ++
- O - ++
++
O
-
++ O
++ O
O -
NBR
FPM
O
O
-
++ O
++ O
O O
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
ABS
PVC-C
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
97 96 %
PP-H
H2C=CH-CH2-OH
PE
Allyl alcohol
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
-
115
Aqua regia
Arsenic acid
Barium salts, aqueous, inorganic
Beer
Benzaldehyde
Benzene
116
HNO3+3HCl
H3AsO4
C6H5-CHO
C6H6
typical mixing ratio

(1:3)
80 %, aqueous
saturated
Commercial qualities
180 saturated, aqueous
80 technically pure
20 O ++
40 - O
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
PE
ABS
PVC-C
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
-
++ 1.1 ++ ++ ++ 1.1 O O O
++ O O O -
O
O
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++
O O O ++
- O
-
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ - ++ 1.1 ++
- O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
O
-
O
-
++
++
O
-
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0-80 %, aqueous
NBR
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
SbCl3
PP-H
Antimony trichloride, 0-80 %
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
O
-
Benzoic acid
Benzyl alcohol
Beryllium salts,
aqueous, inorganic
Boric acid
Bromine water
Butadiene,
gaseous
C6H5-COOH
C6H5-CH2-OH
H3BO3
Br-H2O
H2C=CH-CH=CH2
aqueous, all
all, aqueous
aqueous
-4 technically pure
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
O
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
++ - + 1.1 ++
- 1.1 O
O
O
-
++ ++ 1.1 ++ ++
++ ++ 1.1 O ++
O O O O O
-
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
O ++
- O
O
-
++
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
++ O
++
++
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ O ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ O - ++ ++
++
- O
O
-
20 ++ O
40 O 60 80
100
120
140
NBR
FPM
++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 - ++ ++ O
++ ++ 1.1
++
O O O 1.1
++
- 1.1
O
1.1
O
-
EPDM
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
PVDF
cold saturated
aqueous solution
PP-H
PE
ABS
C6H5SO3H
PVC-C
Benzene sulfonic
acid
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
-
117
Butanediol-1,4
Butanediol-1,4,
technically pure
Butanol
Butyl acetate
Butyl phenol,
p-tertiary
Butyric acid
118
HO-(CH2)4-OH
HO-CH2-CH 2-CH2-CH2OH
C4H9OH
CH3COOCH2CH2CH2CH3
(CH3)3C-C6H4-OH
CH3-CH2-CH2-COOH
230 aqueous, up to 10
%
163 aqueous and technically pure
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
O
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
-
20 ++ ++ O ++ ++
40 ++ ++
++ ++
60 O O
O O
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
++ O
++ O
-
O
-
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++
O - O O
-
++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++
++ O O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ O ++
O O ++ O - ++
- ++ O
O
O +
O
-
NBR
FPM
EPDM
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O O ++ ++ ++
O - O O O
-
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
PVDF
0 technically pure
PP-H
PE
ABS
C4H10
PVC-C
Butane, gaseous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
O ++
- ++
++
++
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
Caesium salts,
aqueous, inorganic
Calcium hydroxide, Ca(OH)2

aqueous
Calcium salts, various, aqueous, inorganic
Carbon dioxide
Carbon tetrachloride
CO2
CCl4
Carbonic acid, CO2 H2CO3

in H2O
aqueous
aqueous
various ,aqueous,
inorganic
technically pure,
anhydrous
77 technically pure
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ O
++ ++
O
-
O ++ ++ O ++ ++
- ++ ++ - ++ ++
++ ++
++ O
- ++
++ O
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
O -
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++ O O O
++ - ++ ++ - O - O
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
- 1.3 1.3
1.3
-
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ O
++ ++
++
O
EPDM
++ O
++ ++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- O O
-
++
++
++
-
NBR
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
FPM
aqueous, various
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
Cadmium salts,
aqueous, inorganic
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
119
Chloric acid,
>10-20% aqueous
HClO3
Chlorine water, sat- Cl2 in H2O

urated
Chlorine, gaseous, Cl2

dry, pure
Chlorine, gaseous, Cl2

wet
Chloroacetic acid,
100 %
Chloroacetic acid,
50 % aqueous
120
ClCH2COOH
ClCH2COOH
>10-20 %, aqueous
saturated
technically pure
feucht, 97 %, Gas
50 %, aqueous
20 ++ ++
40 O ++
60 - O
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
++
O
O
-
20 ++ ++
40 O ++
60 - ++
80
++
100
O
120
140
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
O
-
++ O
O O
-
O
-
O 1.1 ++ ++
- 1.1 ++ O
1.1 O O
O -
O 1.1 ++ ++
- 1.1 ++ O
1.1 O O
O O -
O
-
NBR
PE
ABS
20 ++ ++
40 O ++
60 - O
80
100
120
140
FPM
0-10 %, aqueous
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
HClO3
PVC-C
Chloric acid, 0-10

% aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
- 1.1 1.1
1.1
1.1
O
++ ++ ++ O
++ ++ ++ O
O O O - O
-
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
++ O
++
O
-
++
O
-
Chlorosulfonic acid ClSO3H
Chromic acid / sul- CrO3

furic acid / water
H2SO4
H2O
Chromic acid,
Chromium (II) salts, aqueous, inorganic
Compressed air,
containing oil
Copper I/II salts,

aqueous, various
inorganic
CrO3 H2O
50% / 15% / 35%
<10 %, aqueous
saturated solution
aqueous, various
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
O
-
20 1.6 1.6 40 1.6 1.6

60 80
100
120
140
20 1.6 O
40 1.6 60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
O
-
++
O
-
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O ++
O O
O O
- O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ O ++ ++
++ - O O
-
++
++
O
-
NBR
- 1.2 1.2
O
-
FPM
EPDM
O ++
- ++
O
-
++ O ++ ++ ++ O O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
O O ++
- ++
O
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
PE
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
PVDF
C6H5Cl
PP-H
Chlorobenzene
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++
O O
O O
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
O -
O
O
O
-
121
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexanol
Cyclohexanone
Dextrine
Dibrombenzene
Dibutyl ether
122
C6H12
C6H12O
C6H10O
(C6H10O5)n
C6H5Br2
C4H9OC4H9
81 technically pure
common commercial aqueous concentrations
technically pure
20 ++
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++ O
++ O
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++ ++ ++
O O ++
- ++
O
-
++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++
O O ++
- O
-
++ O ++ O
O O O O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - O ++
- O
-
O
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
O
O
O
-
O ++ O
O ++ - ++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ O
++ ++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
NBR
++ ++ ++ ++ O
O O ++ ++ O - O
O
-
FPM
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
CH3-CH=CH-CHO
PE
Crotonaldehyde
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
-
++
O
O
O
-
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
Dichloroacetic acid, Cl2CHCOOH

<= 50 %
Dichloroacetic acid, Cl2CHCOOH

pure
Dichloroacetic acid Cl2CHCOOCH3

methyl ester
Dichlorobenzene
Dichlorodifluoromethane,
gaseous
Dichloroethylene
C6H4Cl2
CCl2F2
ClCH=CHCl
<= 50 %
-30 technically pure
60 technically pure
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
20 ++
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++ ++ ++ O
++ ++ O O
O O -
O
-
++
++
O
-
O
-
O
-
O ++
- O
-
O ++ O
- ++ ++
O
-
++
++
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
++ O ++
++ - O
++
O
-
O ++
- ++
++
O
-
O
O
-
NBR
FPM
++ ++ ++ O
+ O O O
O - O O
-
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
C6H4(COOC4H9)2
PE
Dibutyl phthalate
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
-
O
-
O
-
++
++
O
-
123
Diethyl ether
Diethylamine
Diisobutyl ketone
Diisopropyl ether
Dimethyl formamide
Dimethylamine
124
H5C2-O-C2H5
(C2H5)2NH
[(CH3)2CHCH2]2CO
(CH3)2CH-O-CH(CH3)2
(CH3)2CHNO
(CH3)2NH
35
56 technically pure
68 technically pure
7 technically pure
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
O
-
O
-
++ ++
++ O
O -
- 1.1 O ++
O - ++
++
O
-
NBR
EPDM
20 ++ ++
40 O O
60 80
100
120
140
FPM
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
Concentration
PVC-U
Diesel oil
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++
O O
-
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++
O O O ++
- O O
-
O
-
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++
O O
-
O ++
- ++
O
-
O
-
++
O
O
-
++
O
-
O
-
Ethanolamine
Ethyl alcohol
Ethyl benzene
Ethylacetate
Ethylchloride,
gaseous
Ethylene diamine
C2H7NO
CH3-CH2-OH
C6H5-CH2CH3
CH3COOC2H5
C2H5Cl
H2N-CH2-CH2-NH2
78 all concentrations
77 technical, pure
12 technically pure
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++ O
++ O
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++ ++ O ++
O O - O
-
++
++
++
-
O
-
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
O
O
O ++
- O
O
O
++
++
++
-
O ++
- O
O
-
++ O ++
++ - O
++
O
O
-
O
-
++ O
++ ++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++
O O O ++
O
O
-
O ++
- O
-
NBR
FPM
++ O
O -
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
C4H8O2
PE
Concentration
PVC-U
Dioxane
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
O
-
O
-
++
O
O
-
++
O
-
125
Ethylene glycol,
technically pure
Ethylenediamine
tetraacetic acid
Fluorosilicic acid
Formaldehyde
Formamide
HO-CH2-CH2-OH
C10H16N2O8
H2SiF6
HCHO
HCONH2
Formic acid, 0-10% HCOOH

aqueous
126
aqueous solution
< / = 32 %, aqueous
</= 40 %, aqueous
0-10 %, aqueous
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
- 1.1
1.1
O
-
O 1.4 1.4
1.4
O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
1.1 1.1 O
-
1.3
1.4
O
-
1.1
1.1
O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
-
++
++
++
++
-
O ++ O
1.4 - O
O
O
-
++
O
O
-
++ 1.6 1.6 ++ ++
O 1.6 1.6 ++ ++
- O O ++ O
- O -
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
O
++
++
++
O
-
O
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++ O
++ ++
O
-
++
++
O
-
++ O ++ O ++
++ - O - O
++
O
O
-
++ O 1.1 1.4 1.2 ++ O

++ - 1.1 1.4 1.2 ++ O
++
O O 1.2 O O
- 1.2 O
1.2 O
NBR
FPM
EPDM
++
++
++
++
-
1.1
1.1
O
-
PVDF
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++
++ ++ ++
++ O
++ ++ 1.1
- O 1.2
- O
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
- 1.7
1.7
O
-
PP-H
PE
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
198 < 50 %
ABS
PVC-C
Ethylene glycol, <= HO-CH2-CH2-OH

50% aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
Formic acid,
>10-25 %
Fuel oil, heavy fuel

oil
Furfuryl alcohol
Gasoline
Gelatine
Glucose
HCOOH
C5H6O2
C5H12 to C12H26
Mixture of peptides and

proteins
C6H12O6
>10-25 %, aqueous
80- free of lead and

130 aromatic compounds
all, aqueous
all, aqueous
1.4
1.4
O
-
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
O
++ O
++ O
O
-
20 1.3 ++ O 1.1 1.4 1.3 ++ O

40 1.4 ++
1.1 1.4 1.3 ++
60 O ++
O O 1.3 ++
80
O
1.3 ++
100
O 120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
++
++
O
-
O
-
O
-
O ++
- ++
O
-
++ ++ O
++ ++ O O
-
O
-
O ++
- ++
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - O O
-
++ O ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
O
O
-
++
++
O
O
-
++
++
++
++
-
++ O
++ O
O -
O
-
NBR
- 1.1
1.1
O
-
PVDF
PP-H
1.3 O
1.4 O
-
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
>25-50 %, aqueous
FPM
EPDM
PE
ABS
HCOOH
PVC-C
Formic acid, >

25-50 %
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++
++ ++
O O
O -
++ ++
++ ++
O O
O -
++
++
++
++
O
O
++
++
++
++
-
127
Glycin
Glycolic acid
Heptane
Hexane
Hydrazine hydrate
Hydrochloric acid,
<= 25 %
128
NH2-CH2-COOH
HO-CH2-COOH
C7H16
C6H14
H2N-NH2xH2O
HCl
10 %, aqueous
37 %, aqueous
98 technically pure
69 technically pure
113 aqueous
<= 25 %, aqueous
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++ O
++ O
-
20 ++ O
40 O 60 80
100
120
140
20 ++ O
40 O 60 80
100
120
140
20 ++ O
40 O 60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
O O O O O ++ O
- ++ O
O -
++
++
++
-
O 1.1 1.1
- 1.1 1.1
O O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
O ++ O ++
- O - ++
++
++
O
O ++ O ++
- O - ++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
O
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ O 1.2 1.75 1.1 ++ ++

++ O 1.2 1.75 1.1 O ++
++ - 1.2 1.75 1.1 - ++
++
- 1.75 1.1
++
- O
O
++ ++ ++
++ O ++
++ O ++
O - O
-
++ ++ O ++
++ O - O
O O
-
++ ++
++ O
O O
-
NBR
FPM
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++ O ++ ++
++
- ++ ++ - O O
- O
O -
EPDM
++
++
++
-
PVDF
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
PP-H
PE
ABS
HOCH2-CH(OH)-CH2OH
PVC-C
Glycerol, Glycerin
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
Hydrocyanic acid
Hydrofluoric acid,
Hydrogen chloride
Hydrogen peroxide, < 5 %
Hydrogen peroxide, >= 5 %
Hydrogen sulfide,
aqueous
HCN
HF
HCl
H2O2
H2O2
H2S
26 aqueous, all concentrations
< / = 70 %
-85 technically pure,

gaseous
139 < 5 %, aqueous
105 >= 5 %, aqueous
saturated, aqueous
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
O
-
O
O
-
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++
++ ++
O O
-
20 1.6 O
40 1.6 60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
-
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ O ++
++ ++ ++ O ++
O O ++ - ++
- ++
++
O
O
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
O ++
- O
O
-
++ O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++ - ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
O
- O ++
O
- O
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++
++ O O O
++ - O O
-
O ++
- ++
++
++
O
-
- 1.5 O
O -
FPM
20 1.6 1.6 - 1.2 O 1.1 O ++

40 1.6 1.6
1.2 O 1.1 - ++
60 O O 1.1
O
80
- O 1.1
100
- O
120
140
NBR
EPDM
> 30 - 37 %, aqueous
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
HCl
PVC-C
Hydrochloric acid,
> 30 - 37 %
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
129
Hydrogen, gas
Hydroquinone
Iron salts, aqueous, inorganic
Isobutylacetate
Isooctane
Isopropyl alcohol
130
H2
C6H4(OH)2
(CH2)2-CH-(CH2)2-CO2H
(CH3)3C-CH2-CH(CH3)2
(CH3)2-CH-OH
cold, saturated
Saturated solution
99 technically pure
82 technically pure
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 ++ ++
40 O O
60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
O
-
++ ++ ++ O
O O ++ O
- O -
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
-
O
O
-
++ ++ ++
O O ++
- ++
O
O
O ++ ++
- ++ ++
O O
-
++ ++ O
O O -
O
O
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
O O
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ O
++ O ++ O - O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ O
++ - ++ ++ ++ O ++ O
- ++ ++ - ++
- O
O
-
20 ++ ++
40 O O
60 80
100
120
140
20 ++
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - O ++
- O
-
++ O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++ ++ O ++ O
++
O ++ ++ - O O
- O ++
O
- O
-
NBR
++
++
++
-
FPM
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
technically pure
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
H2S
PVC-C
Hydrogen sulfide,
technically pure
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
Lead acetate
Linseed oil
Lithium salts, aqueous, inorganic
Pb(CH3COO)2
Ester derived from glycerol and three fatty acids
Lugol's solution: Io- I-KI

dine-potassium iodide solution
Magnesium salts,
aqueous, inorganic
Maleic acid
HOOC-CH=CH-COOH
aqueous, saturated
technically pure
saturated solution
saturated solution
cold saturated,
aqueous
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ O
++ O
-
++
++
++
-
20 ++
40 O
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - O ++
- O
-
O ++ ++
- ++ ++
O ++
- O
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++ ++ 1.1 ++ ++
O O 1.1 O O
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
1.1 1.1
1.1
1.1
O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
20 ++ + ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ 40 O O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
60
O O ++ O ++
80
++
O
100
O
120
140
++
++
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
NBR
FPM
20 ++ O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
40 O O O ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ O
60 ++ ++ O O ++ 80
- O - O
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
aqueous
PP-H
PE
ABS
CH3CHOHCOOH
PVC-C
Lactic acid, aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
O
131
Methane, gaseous CH4
Methanol
Methyl acetate
Methyl amine
Methyl bromide,
gaseous
CH3OH
132
CH3COOCH3
CH3NH2
CH3Br
Methyl ethyl ketone CH3COC2H5
65 all
56 technically pure
32 %, aqueous
4 technically pure
80 technically pure
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
40 O O O O O ++
60
++
80
++
100
O
120
140
20 ++ O
40 ++
60 O
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ O O
O O
++ ++
O O
++ ++
O O
++
O
++ ++
O O
++ ++ ++
++ O ++
++
O
O
FPM
20 ++ ++ O ++ ++ ++ ++ O
40 ++ ++
++ ++ ++ O
60 O O
++ ++ ++
80
- ++ ++
100
- ++
120
O
140
NBR
EPDM
saturated solution
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
Mercury salts
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
O
++ O
++
++
++
O
Methyl methacrylate
Milk
Mineral oil
Mineral water
Mixed acids
- nitric
- hydrofluoric
- sulphuric
Mixed acids
- sulphuric
- nitric
- water
C5H8O2
Mixture of saturated
aliphatic hydrocarbons
15 % HNO3
15 % HF
18 % H2SO4
H2SO4
HNO3
H2O
3 parts
1 part
2 parts
Various
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
O
++
++
++
-
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
++ ++ O
++ ++
O O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++
- O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++
- ++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
O ++ O ++
++
++
++
O
O
20 ++ ++ O ++ ++ 1.1 40 ++ ++
++ ++ 1.1
60 O O
O O 1.1
80
1.1
100
1.1
120
O
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
++ ++
O O
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
technisch rein
300500
116
PP-H
PE
Methyl isobutyl ke- C6H12O

tone
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
133
N,N-Dimethylaniline
Nitrating acid
Nitric acid, > 30 %
Nitric acid, > 6 - <

20 %
134
H2SO4
HNO3
HNO3
HNO3
204
Saturated solution
variable, typically
1:2 or 2:1
> 30 %, aqueous
> 6 - < 20 %
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++ O
O
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ O
O
++ ++ O
O O
O ++ O
O
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
40 ++ ++
++ ++ ++
60 O O
++ ++ ++
80
- ++ ++
100
- ++
120
O
140
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
++
++
++
O
++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++
O ++ ++ ++
O ++ O
O
NBR
FPM
ABS
20 ++ ++
40 ++ ++
60 O ++
80
O
100
120
140
EPDM
PVDF
30 %
60 %
10 %
PP-H
PE
C6H5N(CH3)2
N-Methylpyrrolidon C5H9NO
Nickel salts, aqueous, inorganic
30% H2SO4
60% H3PO4
10% H2O
PVC-C
Mixed acids
- sulphuric
- phosphoric,
aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
O
O
-
O
O
-
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
-
O
O
O
-
- 1.1 1.1
1.1
O
-
- 1.1 1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
++
++
++
++
O
O
O
-
++
O
-
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
Nitric acid, 6 %
Nitrobenzene
Nitrotoluene (o-,
m-, p-)
Nitrous acid
Nitrous gases
(Nitric oxide)
Oleic acid
HNO3
C6H5-NO2
C7H7NO2
HNO2
NOx
C17H33COOH
6%
222- technically pure

238
diluted, moist, anhydrous
technically pure
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
++
-
20 ++ ++
40 ++ ++
60 O O
80
100
120
140
20 ++ ++
40 O O
60
80
100
120
140
20 ++ ++
40 ++ O
60 O
80
100
120
140
- 1,1 1,1
1,1
1,1
1,1
++ O ++
O
++
O
O 1,1 ++ ++
1,1 O ++
1,1
++
1,1
++
1,1
O
O
++ ++ ++
O O ++
O
++
O
-
++
++
++
O
++ ++ 1.1 ++ ++
O O 1.1 O ++
1.1
O
O
NBR
FPM
PE
20 1.6 1.6 40 1.6 1.6

60 1.6 1.6
80
100
120
140
>= 20 - 30 %,
aqueous
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
ABS
HNO3
PVC-C
Nitric acid, >= 20 30 %
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
O ++ O
O
++ ++ ++
O O ++
++
++
++
++
O
++ ++
++ O
O
135
Olive oil
Oxygen, gaseous
Ozone, <= 2 ppm

gaseous
Ozone, aqueous
Palm oil, palm nut

oil
Paraffin emulsions
136
O2
O3
O3
<= 10 %
SO<sub>3</sub>
technically pure
up to 2 ppm, in air
aqueous
usual commercial,
aqueous
20 ++
40 ++
60 O
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
PE
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ O
++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++
O O ++ O O
++
++
++
O
- 1.1 1.1 ++ O ++ ++
1.1 1.1 ++
++ ++
O O ++
++ ++
++
++ O
++
O
O
O ++ ++
O O
++ O ++ ++ + ++
++
++ ++ O ++
++
O ++
++
++
O
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
H2SO4+SO3
Concentration
PVC-U
Oleum
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
O ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++
O O ++ ++
O ++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
Peroxo monosulfu- H2SO5

ric acid
Phenol, wssrig
Phosgene,
gaseous
Phosgene, liquid
Phosphoric acid,
0-60 %
Phosphoric acid,
>60-85 %
C6H5-OH
COCl2
COCl2
H3PO4
H3PO4
0-10 % aqueous
<= 90 %, wssrig
gaseous, technically pure
8 liquid, technically
pure
0-60 %, aqueous
>60-85 %, aqueous
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 ++
40 O
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
O ++ ++ ++
++ O ++
++
++
++
++
++
O
O
- 1.1 - ++ O
O
NBR
PE
++ ++ 1.1 ++ ++ 1.1
O O 1.1
O
++
++
++
O
O ++ ++ ++
++ O ++
O
O
O ++
O
++ ++ 1,2 1,2 ++ ++ ++
++ O 1,2 1,2 ++ ++ ++
++
O 1.4 ++ O ++
++
O ++
++
++
O
O
20 1,2 ++
40 1,2 ++
60 O ++
80
++
100
120
140
ABS
PVC-C
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
<= 70 %, aqueous
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
HClO4
PP-H
Perchloric acid,
aqueous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
- 1,2 1,2 ++ ++
1,2 1,2 ++ ++
O O ++ O
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
137
Photographic fixer
Phthalic acid
C6H5(COOH)2
Potassium alumini- KAl(SO4)2

um salts(alum),
aqueous, inorganic
Potassium hydrox- KOH

ide <= 50 %, aqueous
Potassium
hypochlorite,
<=16% active
Chlorine
Potassium persulphate
138
KOCl
K2S2O8
usual commercial
saturated, aqueous
Saturated solutions
<= 50 %, aqueous
<=16% active
Chlorine
all, aqueous
O ++
O
NBR
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 ++ O
40 O
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
O
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
40 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ 1.1 ++
60 O O O ++ ++ 1.1 ++
80
- O 1.1 O
100
120
140
++ ++ O
++ O
++
O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
O
20 1.6 40 1.6
60 O
80
100
120
140
++ O ++ ++ 2
++
O ++ 2
1.2
++ 2
- 2
-
20 ++ ++ ++ 1.1 1.1 ++ ++ ++ ++
40 ++ ++ ++ 1.1 1.1 ++ ++ ++ ++
60 O ++ O O O ++ O O O
80
O
O
100
120
140
aqueous solutions
and technically
pure
FPM
EPDM
Phosphorous chlo- PCl3, PCl5, POCl3

rides:
-trichloride
-pentachloride
-oxichloride
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
Propionic acid,
aqueous
Propionic acid,
pure
Propylene glycol
<= 50%
Propylene glycol,
technically pure
Pyridine
Salicylaldehyde
CH3CH2COOH
H3C-CH2-COOH
C3H8O2
C3H8O2
C5H5N
C6H4(OH)COH
141 50 %, aqueous
<= 50%
196- Technically pure

197
20 ++ O
40 ++
60 O
80
100
120
140
20 ++ O
40 O
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 O
60 80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40 60
80
100
120
140
- 1.7
1.7
O
-
++
++
++
O
1.1
1.1
O
-
++
++
++
O
-
1.1
1.1
1.1
O
-
++ O
O
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
O
++ ++ ++
O O ++
++
O
- 1.1
1.1
O
-
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
NBR
FPM
O ++ ++ ++
O ++ O ++
O
++
O
EPDM
PVC-C
20 ++
40 O
60
80
100
120
140
technically pure,
gaseous
PVDF
PP-H
PE
H3C-CH2-CH3
ABS
Propane, gaseous
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
-
O ++
++
O
++
++
O
139
Silicic acids, various
Silicone oils
Silver salts, aqueous, inorganic
Sodium borate
Sodium chloride
Sodium chlorite,
aqueous
140
H2SiO3, H2SiO4, H6Si2O7,
Na2B4O7 x H2O
NaCl
NaClO2
aqueous, all concentrations
Saturated solution
aqueous, all
<=saturated
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
O
- ++ ++
- ++
O
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
40 O O O ++ ++ ++
60
++ ++ ++
80
- ++ ++
100
- O
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- ++
O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
40 ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
60 O ++ O ++ ++ ++ ++
80
++
- ++ ++ O
100
- O
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ O 1.4 1.4 1.1

++
1.4 1.4
++
O O
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
-
++ ++
++ ++
++ O
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++ O
++
++
++
++
O
++ ++ 1.1 O ++
1.1
O
O
NBR
FPM
EPDM
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++
- ++
O
++
++
++
-
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
Sea water
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
Sodium hypochlorite, > 6 % active

chlorine
Sodium persulphate
Sodium salts,
aqueous, inorganic
Starch solution
Styrene
Succinic acid
NaOCl
Na2S2O8
(C6H10O5)n
H5C6-CH=CH2
HOOC-CH2-CH2-COOH
<= 50 %, aqueous
> 6 % active chlorine, aqueous
cold saturated,
aqueous
Saturated solution
all, aqueous
145 technisch, rein
aqueous, all
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 1.6 40 1.6
60 80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
2
2
2
O
++
++
++
O
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
O
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
O ++
O
O ++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ 1,1 ++ ++ 40 ++ ++
++ ++ 1,1 ++ ++
60 O ++
++ ++ 1,1 O ++
80
- O 1,1
++
100
O
O
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
++ ++
1.2
-
PVC-C
Sodium hydroxide, NaOH

<= 50 %
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++
++ O
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
O
- O ++
O
++
++
++
O
++ ++
++ O
++
++
O
141
Sulfuryl chloride
Sulphur dioxide,
gaseous
Tannic acid
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Tetrachloromethane
142
SO2Cl2
SO2
C76H52O46
Cl2CH-CHCl2
Cl2C=CCl2
CCl4
69 technically pure
all, dry and moist
all, aqueous
121 technisch, rein
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 ++ ++
40 O O
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
20 ++ ++ ++ ++ 1,1 O O
40 ++ ++
++ ++ 1,1
60 O O
O O 1,1
80
1,1
100
O
120
140
FPM
EPDM
aqueous
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
H2SO3
PVC-C
Sulfurous acid
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++ ++
O O ++
++
O
O ++
O ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++
++ O ++
++
O
O
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
O
- ++ O
++
++
O
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
- 1.3 1.3
1.3
1.3
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
++
O
Tin chloride
Toluene
SnCl2;
C6H5-CH3
Trichloroacetic acid Cl3C-COOH
Trichloroethane
Trichloroethylene
Trichloromethane
Cl3C-CH3
Cl2C=CHCl
CHCl3
66 technically pure
saturated solution
aqueous, all
74 technically pure
87 technically pure
61 100 %
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
C4H8O
Tetrahydrofurane
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- O ++
O
O ++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++ ++ 1,2 O
++ ++ 1,2
O O O
O 1.4 1.4
O
++
++
O
O ++
++
O
++ +
++ O
++
++
O
++
++
O
++
O
++
O
++
O
143
Trifluoroacetic acid F3C-COOH
Turpentine oil
Urea
Urine
Vinyl acetate
Vinyl chloride
144
H2N-CO-NH2
CH2
CH2
all concentrations
technically pure
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 O
40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
NBR
++ ++ 1,2 ++
O O 1,2 O
O
++
O
20 ++ ++ O ++ ++ 1,3 ++
40 ++ ++ O ++ ++ 1,3 ++
60 O O O ++ ++ 1,3 ++
80
O
- O O O
100
120
140
FPM
EPDM
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
An aqueous so20 ++ ++ O ++ ++ ++
lution of greater
40 ++ ++
++ ++ ++
than 95% water,
60 O ++
++ ++ ++
urea 0.93%, chlo80
++
- O O
ride 0.19%, sodium 100
0.12 %, potassium 120
0.07%, creatinine
140
0.07% and other
dissolved ions, inorganic and organic compounds.
73 technically pure
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
89 technically pure
N(CH2-CH3)3
Triethylamine
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++ ++ O
++ O
O
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++ O
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
++
++
O
Water
- distilled
- deionised
Xylene
Zinc salts, aqueous, inorganic
H2O
C6H4(CH3)2
100
technically pure
Saturated solution
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
20 40
60
80
100
120
140
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
++
++
++
-
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ - ++ ++
- ++
O
O
++
++
O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ O ++ ++ ++
++
++ ++ ++
++
- ++ ++
- O
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
++
++
++
O
++
O
++
++
++
++
++
O
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ ++
++ ++ ++ ++ ++ O ++ O
O - ++ ++
++
- ++
O
O
NBR
++
++
++
-
FPM
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
EPDM
0.1 ppm
Cl<sub>2</sub>
PVDF
PP-H
PE
ABS
PVC-C
Water, drinking,
chlorinated
Concentration
PVC-U
Formula
TemperatureC
Medium
Chemical resistance
BoilingpointC
Aggressive media
++
++
++
++
-
++
++
++
O
++
++
++
O
O
145
146
Planning criteria for plastic piping systems

Long-term behaviour of thermoplastics materials
-- MRS values
-- Long-term behaviour of ABS
-- Long-term behaviour of PE
-- Long-term behaviour of PP
-- Long-term behaviour of PVC-U
-- Long-term behaviour of PVC-C
-- Long-term behaviour of PVDF
Application area of pipes and fittings

-- General
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for ABS
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for PE
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for PP
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-U
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-C
-- Pressure/temperature diagram for PVDF
Calculation of allowable pressure/required wall thickness
Page
148
149
149
151
154
158
160
163
165
165
165
167
167
168
168
-- Selecting plastic piping systems

-- Calculating effective design factors and permissible operating pressures
170
171
Water hammer
172
Plastic pipelines in highly combustible locations/transport of explosive media
174
Plastic pipelines for compressed air
175
Plastic pipelines under vacuum
176
Plastic pipelines for surface finishing and varnishing technology
177
147

Planning criteria for plastic piping
systems
Criteria for the Choice of Material
Criteria for the Choice of Dimensions
Criteria for the Choice of Products
148
Long-term behaviour of thermoplastics materials

MRS values
The following table shows the MRS values(see also the
definition in the chapter Basics) for thermoplastic materials used in industrial applications. These values are
taken from the standards:
EN ISO 15493 (ABS, PVC-U, PVC-C)
EN ISO 15494 (PB, PE, PP)
EN ISO 10931 (PVDF)
Material
MRS value
ABS
14 MPa
PE 80
8 MPa
PE 100
10 MPa
PP-H
10 MPa
PP-B
8 MPa
PP-R
8 MPa
PVC-U
25 MPa
PVC-C (pipe material)
25 MPa
PVC-C (fitting material)
20 MPa
PVDF
25 MPa
Long-term behaviour of ABS

Calculation (based on EN ISO 15493:2003)
The following diagram shows the long-term behaviour

of ABS. For the temperature range from 10 Cto 60 C,
fracture lines are displayed. They are designated as
LPL curves (Lower Predictable Limit), that means, according to the definition, 97.5 % of all fracture points are
on or above the curves.
Typically for amorphous thermoplastics like ABS the hydrostatic strength diagram shows no knee.
The curves are plotted in a double logarithmic scale (not
linear), please take this into account when reading out
values for stress or time.
The pressure/temperature diagram, which we indicate
for pipes and fittings made of ABS, is derived from the
hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor incorporated and a lifetime of 25 years.
The hydrostatic strength diagram was determined with
the extrapolation method according to EN ISO 9080.
With the following equation (4-parameter model) stress,
temperature or time can be calculated in the temperature range of 10 C to 60 C.
with
t: Time to failure in hours (h)
T: Medium temperature in Kelvin
: Hoop stress in MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm)
149
Hydrostatic strength curve ABS (based on EN ISO 15493:2003)
Hoop stress in megapascals (Mpa) / 1 Mpa = 1N/mm
Time to failure in hours (h)
Years
150
Long-term behaviour of PE
The following diagrams show the long-term behaviour

of PE80 and PE100. For the temperature range from 10
C to 80 C fracture lines are displayed. They are designated as LPL curves (Lower Predictable Limit), that
means, according to the definition, 97.5 % of all fracture
points are on or above the curves.
Typically for semi-crystallinethermoplastics like PE, the
hydrostatic strength diagram shows a knee.
for pipes and fittings made of PE80 and PE100, is derived from the hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor incorporated and a lifetime of 25 years.
First branch (i. e. the left-hand portion of the curves as
shown in the following figures).
PE100:
PE80:
PE63:
with
151
Hydrostatic strength curve PE100 (EN ISO 15494:2003)
Hoop stress in megapascals (MPa) / 1MPa = 1N/mm
Years
152
Hydrostatic strength curve PE80 (EN ISO 15494:2003)
Hoop stress in megapascals (MPa) / 1Mpa = 1N/mm
Years
153
Long-term behaviour of PP
The following diagrams show the long-term behaviour

of PP-H, PP-Band PP-R. For the temperature range
from 10 C to 110 C fracture lines are displayed. They
are designated as LPL curves (Lower Predictable Limit), that means, according to the definition, 97.5 % of all
fracture points are on or above the curves.
Typically for semi-crystalline thermoplastics like PP, the
hydrostatic strength diagram shows a knee.
The pressure/temperaturediagram, which we indicate
for pipes and fittings made of PP-H and PP-R, is derived from the hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor incorporated and a lifetime of 25 years.
temperature or time can be calculated in the temperature range of 10 C to95 C.
The dotted lines of the curves apply if tests with longer
testing times are carried out at 90 , 95 and 110 C.
Attention: The 110 C curve has been determined separately using water inside and air outside and has not
been derived from the values of the following equations.
PP-H:
PP-B:
PP-R:
Second branch (i. e. the right-hand portion of the curves

as shown in the following figures).
PP-H:
PP-B:
PP-R:
154
mit
t: Zeit bis zum Versagen in Stunden (h)
T: Medium Temperatur in Kelvin
: Vergleichsspannung in MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm)
Hydrostatic strength curve PP-H (according EN ISO 15494:2003)
Hoop stress in megapascals (Mpa) / 1Mpa = 1N/mm
Years
155
Hydrostatic strength curve PP-B (according EN ISO 15494:2003)
Years
156
Hydrostatic strength curve PP-R (according EN ISO 15494:2003)
Years
157
Long-term behaviour of PVC-U


of PVC-U. For the temperature range from 20 Cto 60
C fracture lines are displayed. They are designated as
Typically for amorphous thermoplastics likePVC-U, the
hydrostatic strength diagram shows no knee.
for pipes and fittings made of PVC-U, is derived from
the hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor
incorporated and a life time of 25 years.
with
158
Hydrostatic strength curve PVC-U
Years
159
Long-term behaviour of PVC-C


of PVC-C. For the temperature range from 10 Cto 95
Typically for amorphous thermoplastics like PVC-C, the
hydrostatic strength diagram shows no knee.
for pipes and fittings made of PVC-C, is derived from
the hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor
incorporated and a lifetime of 25 years.
temperature or time can be calculated in the temperature range of 10 C to95 C.
Pipe material in the temperature range of 10 C to 95
C
Fitting material in the temperature range of 10 C to 90

C
with
160
Hydrostatic strength curve PVC-C Pipe Material
Years
161
Hydrostatic strength curve PVC-C Fittings Material
Years
162
Long-term behaviour of PVDF

Calculation (EN ISO 10931)

of PVDF. For the temperature range from 10 Cto 140
linear), please take this into account whenreading out
for pipes and fittings made of PVDF, is derived from the
hydrostatic strength diagram with the design factor incorporated and a lifetime of 25 years.
Second branch (i. e. the right-hand portion of the curves

as shown in the following figures).
with
t: Time to failurein hours (h)
T:Medium temperatureinKelvin
: Hoop stressin MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm)
163
Hydrostatic strength curve PVDF
Years
164
Application area of pipes and fittings
Inch-based systems
General
The choice of material and the pressure rating of the
pipe components are important for both operating safety
and for attaining the specified minimum operational life
of the system.
The decisive factors are:
operating pressure
operating temperature
medium transported
duration of service.
Separatecalculations are necessary if safety factors are
different or the operational lifetime is modified.
The chemical resistance of the material used can be
determined from of our special list for "Chemical resistance of thermoplastics and elastomers for piping systems".
Permissible pressure in bar, psi
Temperature in C, F
Metric-based systems
Pressure/temperature diagram for ABS

The following pressure/temperature diagram for ABS
pipes and fittings is valid for a lifetime of 25 years.
The design factor of 2.1 for inch-based systems and 1.8
for metric systems recommended by GF is incorporated.
It can be used for water or media resembling water, in
other words, media which have no derating factor regarding the chemical resistance.
Remark: Please take into account the pressure/temperature diagrams forvalves and special fittings. Because
of the construction and/or sealing material used, differences are possible when compared with pipes and fittings. This information can be found in the planning fundamentals of the relevant types of valves, respectively
special fittings.
The influence of the anti-freeze compound has to be
taken into account when calculating the allowable operating pressure. Please contact your GF representative
for further information.
Attention: According to the 10 C curve in the long-term
diagram for ABS, the permissible pressure in the temperature range -50 to +10 C can be
7.5 bar for the PN6 system.
11.8 bar for the PN10 system.
The maximum pressure for the PN16 system has been
limited to 16 bar.
Temperature in C, F
Pressure/temperature diagram for PE

PE 100
The following pressure/temperature diagram for PE100

The design factor of 1.6 (respective 1.25) recommended
by GF is incorporated.
special fittings.
In case of long-term applications at continuous pressure
with temperatures above 40 C, please contact your GF
representative.
165
Besides the geometric sizes such as SDR, the creep

strength/dimensioning tension and the minimum design
factor are also taken into consideration.
For plastic piping systems intended to carry water, the
nominal pressure value indicates the maximum permitted operating pressure in bar, at a temperature of 20C,
and 50 years in water, referenced to the minimum value
of the total (calculation) coefficients. It is calculated using the following equation:
[PN] = 10 S / [S] = 20 S / (SDR 1) (s in MPa, PN
in bar)
1
Design Factor C = 1.25, S5, SDR11 for 20 C water, 50

years
Design Factor C=1.25, S8.3, SDR17.6 and S8, SDR17 for 20

C water, 50 years
Temperature in C, F
PE 80
The following pressure/temperature diagram for PE80

The design factor of 1.6 recommended by GF is incorporated.
special fittings.
with temperatures above 40 C please contact your GF
representative.
Minimum required strength (MRS):

The value of LCL at 20C and 50 years in water, rounded down to the next value in the R10 standard series of
numbers.
LCL is understood to mean the equivalent stress ascertained for a given period and a given temperature from
the time-dependent creep diagram. LCL stands for Lower Confidence Limit. The R10 standard series of numbers is a Renard standard series of numbers as per ISO
3 and ISO 497.
Design stress (S):
The permitted stress for a particular application or operating conditions stated in megapascal. It is derived by
dividing the MRS by coefficient C and is calculated as
shown in the equation below:
S = MRS / C
The calculated value is rounded down to the next value
in the R10 standard series of numbers.
Total operating (calculation) coefficient (C):
A total coefficient having a value greater than one,
which takes into account both the operating conditions
and also the characteristics of the pipeline component
that have not yet been entered into the lower confidence
limit LCL.
If we use the above definition to calculate the relevant
nominal pressure for both SDR classes, the result for a
PE 100 pipe is as follows:
SDR17
MRS = 10 MPa
C = 1.25 (minimum factor)
s = 8.0 MPa
PN = 10 bar
SDR17.6
MRS = 10 MPa
C = 1.25 (minimum factor)
s = 8.0 MPa
PN = 9.6 bar
The above definitions thus produce a difference of 0.4

bar in PN, but in actual practice this does not matter, as
shown below:
Temperature in C, F
Comparison of nominal pressure for SDR17

and SDR17.6
Ascertaining the nominal pressure (PN)
According to the standard, the nominal pressure is a
numeric measure of the size of a pipeline part, which
refers to the mechanical properties of that pipeline part.
166
1.) Industrial pipelines are normally designed for a service life of 25 years. If from the time-dependent creep
diagrams we ascertain for ELTEX TUB 121 or CRP
100 an equivalent stress of LCL for the operating point
of 25 years and 20C, we obtain a tension of 10.6
MPa (minimum value of both PE100 materials as per
manufacturer's data).
2.) If we use this tension to ascertain the dimensioning
tension S, and do not round it down, we obtain the value of 8.48 MPa.
3.) Thus the actual nominal pressure in practice is:
for SDR 17 =>PN = 10.6 bar and for
SDR 17.6 =>PN = 10.2 bar.
To summarise: Both SDR classes comply with requirements for industrial applications mentioning a
PN10 system.
Comparison of geometric dimensions
The two SDR classes differ only slightly in wall thickness, as can be seen from the diagram below. This
shows that there is an area where the wall thickness
complies with both requirements of both SDR classes.
Pressure/temperature diagram for PP segment-welded fittings

Segment-welded fittings have a reduction factor of
0.8on the allowableoperating pressure:
Temperature in C, F
PROGEF Natural
d
Outside pipe diameter
Wall thickness
The following pressure/temperature diagram for PROGEF Natural pipes and fittings is valid for a lifetime of 25
years.
For butt fusion the wall thicknessgap may not exceed10 %. Looking at the differences of the wall thicknesses of SDR17 and SDR17.6 the resulting gap is
muchlower, that means butt fusion of both SDR's is no
problem.
The design factor of 2 recommended by GF is incorporated.
Pressure/temperature diagram for PP
special fittings.
PROGEF Standard and Plus
The following pressure/temperature diagrams for PP

pipes and fittingsare valid for a lifetime of 25 years.
The design factor of 2 recommended by GF is incorporated.
They can be used for water or media resembling water,
in other words, media which have no derating factor regarding the chemical resistance.

Remark: Using PROGEF Natural at higher temperatures can lead to a discoloration of the material.
special fittings.
Pressure/temperature diagram for PP pipes and injection-moulded fittings
P
Temperature in C, F
1)
Not longer in product range
Pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-U

The following pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-U
The design factor of 2.5 recommended by GF is incorporated.
P
Temperature in C, F
In case of applications with temperatures in the range of

the dotted lines please contact your GF representative.

167
Remark:Please take into account the pressure/temperature diagrams forvalves and special fittings. Because
special fittings.
Remark: Please take into account the pressure/temperature diagrams for valves and special fittings. Because
special fittings.
Metric-based systems
Under certain conditions working temperatures up to 90

C are possible for limited times. Please contact your local GF representative for advice on any applications lying outside of our standard guidelines.
Temperature in C, F
Inch-based systems
Temperature in C, F
Pressure/temperature diagram for PVDF

The following pressure/temperature diagram for PVDF
The design factor of 2.0 (respectively 1.6) recommended by GF is incorporated.
P
Temperature in C, F
Attention: PVC-U solvent cement jointing fittings

d200to280from Georg Fischer are designed and testet
to a nominal pressure of PN10. Sizes d315to d400 are
designed and testet to a nominal pressure of PN6.
Our experience and tests show that pipesequal or
greater than d315 can be slightly oval, which could produce a heightened cementing gap.
Georg Fischer therefore recommends, thatpipes equal
or greater than d315 should be operated at a maximum
working pressure of 6 bar. Please observe also the special information for these dimensionsin the solvent cementing instruction for PVC-U.
special fittings.
Attention: This diagram can only be used for applications with liquids!
with temperatures above 100 C, please contact your
GF representative.
Pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-C

The following pressure/temperature diagram for PVC-C
The design factor recommended by GF isincorporated.
168
Temperature in C, F
Application example for the material PVDF
For continuously changing conditions of temperature or

pressure the Miner's rule can be applied. The following
example, an application in the pharmaceutical industry,
shows the calculation steps necessary:
Calculation basis:
Pipe SDR21
Design factor: C = 2.0
Required operating lifetime 15 years
Main application:
Purified water (PW) at 25 C and 5 bar pressure.
Steam Sterilisation:
Saturated steam at 135 C and 2.2 bar pressure for 30
minutes daily.
The Miner's rule (calculation method for cumulative
damage) is used for applications with varying conditions
during their expected lifetime.
This takes into account the amount of time spent at
each of the operating conditions:
a1 a2
% of time spent at each condition
T1 T2
lifetime at the several operating conditions (pressure and

temperature constant)
Tx
calculated lifetime at intermittent load
for the above example the lifetimes are given as :

T1 50 years for the water
T2= 4471 hrs for the steam
The % of time spent at each condition is :
a1 = 97.9 %
a2 = 2.1 %
from the equation :
Tx = 214608 hrs = 24.5 years
It can be seen that this is higher than the specified operating lifetime and is therefore acceptable.
169
Calculation of allowable pressure/required wall thickness

Selecting plastic piping systems
The dimensioning of thermoplastic pipes subjected to
internal pressure is strictly according to strength requirements and is calculated according to the vessel formula. All pipe dimensions listed in the standards are based
on this formula. Deviations only occur in the lower range
of diameters, since practical and manufacturing considerations make it necessary to maintain certain minimum
thicknesses.
where
e
wall thickness in mm
outside pipe diameter in mm
allowable operating pressure in bar
zul
allowable hoop stress in N/mm
The designation "Nominal pressure" PN (also

known as pressure level) is alone not enough!
The PN classification generally used all over the world
is confusing where butt fusion is concerned.
In the case of thermoplastic pipes the established practice is to use pressure-neutral descriptions for pipes of
the same pressure capacity. This makes it easy to use
pipes in different applications or under different conditions.
ISO 4065 classifies pipes into series according to pressure rating, so that pipes with the same series number
have the same pressure rating as is also the case in
designation according to nominal pressure. The series
are denoted by the letter S.
The serial numbering is based on the following formula:
S is thus a dimensionless quantity.
As an example, for 110 x 10 mm PP pipe

S = 5 = (110 - 10) / (2 10)
SDR is also used; SDR stands for Standard Dimension
Ratio. It is the ratio of the diameter to the thickness of
the wall.
The series and the SDR are related by the formula

SDR = 2S + 1
In the case of the example above,
SDR = 110 / 10 = 11 = 2 5 + 1
All three standards, PN, S and SDR, are currently available commercially.
170
We always recommend giving the dimension and

the wall thickness, as well as the pipe series S or
SDR.
Calculating effective design factors and

permissible operating pressures
To calculate the design factor and allowable operating
pressure, it is necessary to know the long-term stress
behaviour of the material. Such a diagram allows the
long-term stress to be read depending on the desired
service life and working temperature. Since the wall
thickness of fittings and valves is generally greater than
that of the pipe of the equivalent pressure rating, all calculations can be based on the outside diameter and wall
thickness of the pipe. The effective design factor is given by the formula:
where
C
design factor
hoop stress in N/mm
wall thickness of a pipe in mm
outside diameter of pipe in mm
operating pressure in bar
Similarly, the permissible operating pressure is given by

rewriting the formula above as:
Example:
Intended operating life: 25 years
Max. operating temperature: 40 C
Max. operating pressure: 3 bar
Material: PVC-U
Pressure rating: PN 16
Pipe dimensions:110 x 8.1 mm
from hydrostatic strength curves: 15.5 N/mm
C = (15.5 20 8.1) / (3 (110 - 8.1)) =8.2 >2.5
For the sake of clarity, the calculations are carried out
using the example above, but using the usual minimum
design factor for PP-H instead of the one calculated
p = (20 8.1 15.5/2.5) / (110 - 8.1) = 9.9 bar
Attention: The calculation indicated above applies only to freely moving pipelines. Pipes which are fixed in
the axial direction (fixed installation) must be checked
for buckling. In most cases, this leads to a reduction of
maximum inner pressure as well as shorter distances
between the support brackets. Furthermore, the forces
which act on the fixed points must be taken into consideration. For assistance, please contact your nearest GF
representative.
171
Water hammer
Water hammer, or surge pressure, is a term used to describe dynamic surges caused by pressure changes in a
piping system. They occur whenever there is a deviation
from the steady state, i.e. when the velocity of the fluid
is increased or decreased, and may be transient or oscillating. Waves of positive or negative pressure may be
generated by any of the following:
opening or closing of a valve

pump startup or shutdown
change in pump or turbine speed
wave action in a feed tank
entrapped air
The pressure waves travel along at speeds limited by

the speed of sound in the medium, causing the pipe to
expand and contract. The energy carried by the wave
is dissipated and the waves are progressively damped
(see Figure).
The pressure excess to water hammer must be considered in addition to the hydrostatic load, and this total
pressure must be sustainable by the piping system. In
the case of oscillatory surge pressures extreme caution
is needed as surging at the harmonic frequency of the
system could lead to catastrophic damage.
vw
velocity of pressure wave (m/s)
bulk modulus of elasticity of fluid (Pa)
fluid density (kg/m)
modulus of elasticity of pipe wall (Pa)
di
pipe inner diameter (mm)
pipe wall thickness (mm)
Step 2
Calculate maximum pressure change due to surging.
p = vw v 10
All pressure rises inducted by a flow reduction will

have a corresponding pressure drop on the other
side(vacuum). If this exceeds the expected static minimum operation pressure, it must be compared with the
pipe collapsing pressure to evaluate the safety factor in
step 4.
p
maximum pressure change (bar)
vw
velocity of pressure wave (m/s) (see step 1)
change in fluid velocity (m/s) (=v1 - v2)
v1
velocity of fluid before change (m/s)
v2
velocity of fluid after change (m/s)
density of fluid (kg/m)
Step 3
Calculate the maximum and minimum total pressures.
pmax =p + p
pmin =p - p
Damped pressure wave

l
Wave length
Pressure change
pmax
maximum total pressure (bar)
pmin
minimum total pressure (bar)
expected operating pressure (bar)
change due to surge pressure (calculated in step 2)
Step 4
Calculate the effective safety factor for the maximum total pressure found in step 3.
The maximum positive or negative addition of pressure

due to surging is a function of fluid velocity, bulk modulus of elasticity of the fluid, pipe dimensions and the
modulus of elasticity of the pipe material. It can be calculated using the following steps.
Cmax safety factor (dimensionless)
Step 1
Determine the velocity of the pressure wave
circumferential stress (N/mm)
pipe wall thickness (mm)
outside diameter of pipe (mm)
pmax
maximum total pressure (bar) (as calculated in step 3)
In thermoplastic pipes the modulus of elasticity varies

with age and temperature so service life and temperature must be known for an accurate calculation of water
hammer.
172
The value for the circumferential stress can be found

from the long-term regression curves. As most surges
last for a matter of seconds, the value for the circumferential stress can be read from the graphs as the value
for a load duration of 0.1 h. The exception to this rule
is when the pressure surges are oscillatory (e. g. from
a positive displacement pump). In this case the system
must be treated as if a load equal to the maximum total
pressure, pmax, exists throughout the lifetime of the pipe.
Step 5
For infrequent surges the common minimum values can
be used for safety factors. For frequent surges it should
be at least 3.
If the safety factor found in step 4 does not meet these
criteria for safe operation, an increase in pipe diameter
size should be considered, or measures should be taken to reduce surge occurrance (i. e. actuated valves,
surge tanks, slow start-up pumps).
When using actuated valves it is common to design
valves with closure times greater than the critical period Tc to reduce water hammer. The critical period is the
time taken by the pressure wave to complete one circuit
of the pipeline.
Tc
Assume water velocity goes to zero after the valve is

closed, i. e. v = 1.53 m/s.
Find pressure change
p = 292 (1.53) 10 10 = 4.47 bar
-5
Step 3
Find maximum pressure
pmax= 10 + 4.47 = 14.47 bar
p smaller than P so no need to consider minimum
pressure.
Step 4
Find the circumferential stress from PP-H long-term regression curve. Take the value for load duration of 0.1
h as, for non-oscillatory surges, the pipe needs to withstand this extra pressure for only a matter of seconds.
So
critical period (s)
pipe length (m)
vw
pressure wave velocity (m/s) (see step 1)
The following example should explain the calculations:

A water pipeline from a storage tank is connected to a
master valve, which is hydraulically actuated with an
electrical remote control. The valve closing time is 1.5 s
and the water flow rate is Q= 35 m/h.
material
PP-H
outer diameter
110 mm
Step 5
The minimum safety factor for PP-H can be set to 2.0.
Here C = 2.42 >2.0 so this piping is suitable for infrequent surges. However it would not be suitable if frequent surging occurred as we need C> 3 in this case.
Adjustments would need to be made to pipe dimensions, or valve closing time, to reduce water hammer.
wall thickness
10 mm
pipeline length
500 m
What is the critical period?
operating temperature
40 C
modulus of elastictity
E= 800 N/mm = 800 x 106

Pa
The pipe details are:
Other information:
water density
10 kg/m
bulk modulus of water K
2.05 GPa
In this example the valve closing time is less than this

value. By increasing the closing time above this critical period, water hammer would be reduced. The piping would then be suitable for all situations involving frequent water surges.
Step 1
Find velocity of pressure wave
Step 2
Find velocity of fluid before change
173
Plastic pipelines in highly combustible locations/transport of explosive media
In their normal form the thermoplastics usually used for

piping systems, namely ABS, PVC-U, PVC-C, PP, PE
and PVDF, are non-conductive materials. Their specific
resistance exceeds 10 cm. Thus the possibility of an
electrical charge accumulating cannot be excluded. This
must be borne in mind when designing and operating a
pipe system. But by taking certain precautions detailed
below, the accumulation of electrical charge can be prevented.
6
Introduction
The non-conductivity of most plastics has led to their
widespread application in electrical engineering and
electronics. But this property can be a disadvantage under certain circumstances in other applications. In the
case of plastic piping systems, the question of electrostatic charge becomes significant when electrically nonconductive media are to be transported and when the
pipes are installed in potentially explosive premises. In
both of these cases the non-conductivity of the plastics
is not only a disadvantage but could constitute a definite danger. ABS, PVC-U, PVC-C, PE, PP and PVDF
belong to the class of electrically non-conductive materials. Electrically non-conductive materials are those
whose specific resistance exceeds 10 cm. The values
for the materials listed lie in the order of 10 cm.
6
15
The danger of accumulating electrostatic charge arises

whenever specific resistance exceeds 10 . This must
be taken account of in certain operating environments.
9
For example, in the mining industry in general, and especially in areas exposed to the danger of firedamp,
safety dictates that plastics be used only if their specific resistance does not exceed 10 cm (measured at 20
C and 35 % humidity).
8
Similar restrictions apply to the installation of plastic

pipes wherever ignitable mixtures could occur. There is
no danger arising from the use of plastic pipes to transport ignitable fluids as long as the system is a closed
one. Slower flow rates also reduce the accumulation of
electrostatic charge.
It is possible in principle to make non-conductive plastics conductive by means of special measures, e. g.
adding carbon. But such additives could detrimentally
affect other desirable properties. It is therefore imperative to judge each case individually on its merits to decide which material offers the best solution.
Whenever plastic piping is to be installed in premises where explosive gas-air mixtures could arise, and
whenever plastic pipes are used for the transportation
of electrically non-conductive media, the following points
must be observed during planning.
174
Installation in premises where explosive gas-air

mixtures can occur
Avoid the accumulation of explosive mixtures by providing fore. g. good ventilation or air extraction.
Avoid the accumulation of electrical charge by ionising
the atmosphere.
Discharge static electricity, e. g. by coating the pipe
surface with a solvent-free paint containing metallic
powder or by wrapping the pipe in a conducting foil. It
is essential to earth the pipe.
Avoid the accumulation of electrical charge by increasing the relative humidity of the air. A conductive
film of water on the surface of the pipe improves the
conductivity. There is hardly any accumulation of electrostatic charge when the relative atmospheric humidity exceeds 65 %. Since ABS, PVC-U, PVC-C, PE, PP
and PVDF are hydrophobic, the formation of an intact
film of moisture should be facilitated by treating the
surface of the pipeline with a hygroscopic soap.
We advise strongly against relying solely on treating
the pipeline with an antistatic and hygroscopic soap
to improve its conductivity because its effectiveness is
of limited duration and accidental damage to the film
cannot be ruled out.
The transport of electrically non-conductive media
As a rule plastic pipes are not to be recommended for
the transport of dry substances which are electrically
non-conductive due to the effects of build-up of electrostatic charge and the extensive wear on the material. A preliminary test is recommended should plastic
pipes be used for such applications.
Electrically non-conductive combustible gases or fluids should only be transported in closed pipeline systems.
Plastic pipelines for compressed air
Synthetic oils (with Polyalkylene glyO as an

cols
recommended
Plastic pipelines have been used to transport compressed air for many years. Georg Fischer have carried
out extensive tests to ensure the optimum choice of materials and jointing methods.
additional element
of
Poly--olefins
recommended
molecular structure)
Polyesters
do not use !
Experience has shown that oil originating from compressors can be found to a greater or lesser extent in the
compressed air pipelines. This can only be avoided by
careful and regular servicing of the filters installed after
the compressors. These mineral oils vary considerably
in their composition and they can also contain aromatic
substances.
Diesters
do not use !
Introduction
In addition to the effect that the compressor oils may

have on the plastic material, we must also take into account the failure characteristics of the material.
Recommended material for compressed air

pipelines
Synthetic oils (with Silicon oils

Si, P, N
recommended
or F as an additional element
do not use !
of molecular struc- Aromatic amines

ture)
do not use !
Fluorine esters
do not use !
Poly--olefins /
polyol esters
do not use !
For compressed air pipelines we recommend
Please take into account the recommendations

concerning the commissioning of compressed air
pipelines given in the chapter "Final Testing".
PE (Polyethylene) or PB (Polybutylene).
Both materials are lightweight, easy to install and corrosion-proof; they also have the advantage of high tensile
strength. Therefore we recommend polyethylene up to
a minimum temperature of -40 C (e. g. outdoor applications), polybutylene up to a minimum temperature of 0
C (e. g. indoor installations). Danger of explosion is excluded if you follow the operating instructions.
PE and PB are generally chemically resistant to compressor oils. Only for a few oils, which contain esters or
aromates, chemical resistance cannot be guaranteed.
Sealing materials, such as NBR or FPM, which are regularly used for compressed air networks, are also endangered in such cases.
In order to make it easier for the operator of a compressed air system to choose a compressor oil, we have
summarised many of the oils offered on the market
and have divided them into sections according to their
chemical structure. After consulting the oil supplier, it
is also possible to choose an oil which is not on the list
since we do not claim its entirety. The type of oil used
must be included in one of the categories deemed by us
as suitable. We also recommend that the oil selected is
approved by the compressor manufacturer as well.
Phosphoric esters
Maximum allowable operating pressure for PE

for compressed air
Please consider the following pressure temperature diagram (PE80 and PE100) for compressed air pipelines
made of polyethylene. This diagram isbased on a lifetime of 25 years and a design factor of 1.6.The environment temperature has to be taken into account, for
example for an installation under a sunny roof or in a
room with compressors running. For safety reasons
we recommend for compressed air pipelinesSDR11 or
SDR7.4.
In case of long term applications at continuous pressure
with temperatures above 40 C, please contact your GF
representative.
You will find more information on polybutylene in the

planning fundamentals of Piping Systems for Building
Technology.
Suitability of air compressor oils for compressed air
lines made of polyethylene (PE)
Refined products
of petroleum (mineral oils)
Paraffinic oils of
recommended
aliphatic hydrocarbons
Naphthenic oils of
alicyclic hydrocarbons
recommended
Aromatic oils
do not use !
Permissible pressure in bar / psi
Environment temperature in C / F
175
Plastic pipelines under vacuum
The mechanical load with absolute vacuum corresponds

to a differential partial vacuum of 1 bar, i. e. the effective
pressure on the pipe inner wall is 1 bar less than the
pressure on the outer wall under standard atmospheric
pressure.
With differential partial vacuum special attention must
be paid to the dimensional stability of the pipe. It can be
calculated with the classical buckling formula for cylindrical pipes [1]:
with
Pk: critical buckling pressure in N/mm
(1 N/mm = 10 bar)
Ec: long term creep modulus in N/mm
: Poisson's ratio
e: wall thickness in mm
r: mean pipe radius in mm
A pipe under absolute vacuum (differential partial vacuum 1 bar) is adequately dimensioned against buckling when the critical buckling pressure Pk 2 bar, i.e.
when a minimum safety factor of 2 is calculated [2]. Any
influence caused by out-of-roundness and eccentricity must be specially taken into account. With these assumptions, the following maximum application temperatures are obtained for the various pipe materials (taking
account of the general application temperature limits for
the specific material). Thinner walled pipe seriesare unsuitable under the given conditions.
(25 year values: Poisson's ratio = 0.4; safety factor =
2)
Pipes: Maximum application temperatures under
vacuum (1 bar differential partial vacuum)
ABS
PVC-U
PVC-C
PN10,SDR17
up to 60 C
PN10, SDR21
up to 40 C
PN10, SDR21
up to 70 C
PN16, SDR11
up to 60 C
PN16, SDR13.6
up to 60 C
PN16, SDR13.6
up to 80 C
PE80
PE100
PP
PN10, SDR11
up to 50 C
PN16, SDR11
up to 60 C
PN10, SDR11
up to 80 C
Pipes: Maximum application temperatures under

vacuum (1 bar differential partial vacuum) or under
0.4 bar differential partial vacuum for PVDF PN 10
system
PVDF for p = 0.4 PVDF for p = 1.0
bar
bar
PN10, SDR33
up to 20 C
PN16, SDR21
up to 40 C
Fittings
Our fittings are less critical in vacuum applications than
pipes because of their increased wall thickness.
176
Valves
Ball valves are the preferred valve types in vacuum systems. The permissible vacuum for valves is listed in the
following table:
Valve type
DN
Permissible differential partial vacuum up to a maximum

temperature of 50 C
Ball valve type

546
10 - 100
1 bar
Diaphragm
valve types
514-519, 314319
15 - 50
0.5 bar
Butterfly valve
type 567, 367
65 - 200
1 bar
250, 300
0.65 bar
Ball valve type

375
10 - 100
0.8 bar
[1] Menges G. and E. Gaube: Bending and buckling of

thermoplastics from the example of hard polyethylene,
Plastics Band 58 (1968), Book 9, p. 642-648
[2] DVS 2205-1
Plastic pipelines for surface finishing

and varnishing technology
Silicone-free / cleaned
Growing environmental awareness, continuously increasing requirements and regulations in the field of toxic substances emission(TA air) have led to the development of water-soluble paints and varnishes.
With new varnishing technologies, up to 90 % of the
emission values can be reduced. For the production,
transport and processing of water-soluble paints and
varnishes only pipeline components may be used which
are free from substances interfering with the varnishing process, such as silicones, certain greases, oils and
waxes.
GF - an experienced partner
GF has worked closely from the very beginning with
manufacturers, plant constructors and operators in this
special sector of surface finishing and varnishing technology. We have successfully supplied plant constructors and users of varnishing processes for years, e.
g. the automobile industry. The highest demands are
made of our products:
silicone-free separating agents for spraying

absolute care in cleaning, installation and packing
uncompromising quality control
quality assurance system certified to ISO 9001.
Fittings
The composition of the raw material (granulate) is silicone-free. All moulds for standard fittings are sprayed
with silicone-free separating agents. Following injection
moulding the fittings are directly packed.
GF recommends the choice of a completepacking
unit (that means SP = Standard pack or GP as Gross
pack)when ordering fittings to exclude contamination
en route to the final consumer.
Valves and unions
The individual components of the valves and unions are
cleaned with distilled water (14 M) in a special cleaning process. They are assembled in a special working
area with silicone-free protective gloves.
Sliding components are lubricated slightly and comply
with requirements for special lubricants for varnishing,
e. g. Syntheses PRO AA4. Each valve and union is designated with the following sticker:
Valves and unions are individually packed in a welded

bag.
Connecting seals
Connecting seals undergo the same production, cleaning and packing processes as hand-operated valves
and unions.
Maintenance
For safety reasons we recommend exchanging the entire body when dismantling the valves.
177
178
Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses of metric industrial piping systems
Hydraulic calculation
-- What size should the pipe be?
Pressure losses
-- Pressure loss in straight pipes

-- Pressure loss in fittings
-- Pressure loss in valves
-- Pressure difference caused by static pressure
-- Sum of pressure losses
-- Example for pressure loss calculation
Page
180
185
185
185
186
186
186
179
Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses of metric industrial

piping systems
or
What size should the pipe be?
Formulas
The following formula can be used for a first approximation of the pipe size required for a given flow rate:
or
where:
flow velocity in m/s
di
inside pipe diameter in mm
Q1
flow rate in m/h
Q2
flow rate in l/s
354
conversion factor for units
1275
Relation ship: Outside diameter to inside diameter
di
inside pipe diameter in mm
Q1
flow rate in m/h
Q2
flow rate in l/s
18.8
35.7
The flow velocity must first be approximated according

to the intended use of the pipeline. Standard values for
the flow velocity are:
Liquids
v = 0.5-1.0 m/s for suction
v = 1.0-3.0 m/s for delivery
Gases
v = 10-30 m/s
The calculations of pipe diameter have not taken into
account hydraulic losses. These require special calculations for which we offer the following information and
recommendations.
Conversion table
m/h
l/min
l/s
m/s
1.0
16.67
0.278
2.78 x 10-4
0.06
1.0
0.017
1.67 x 10-5
3.6
60
1.0
1.00 x 10-3
3600
60000
1000
1.0
The following example shows how to utilise the formulas:

PP pipe SDR 11
Flow rate Q2 = 8 l/sec
Flow velocity v = 1.5 m/sec
Inside pipe diameter ? mm
In this case a DN 80 or 3" pipe can be used.

After defining the inner diameter, the real flow velocity
can be calculated with the following formula:
180
To find the outside diameter using the inside diameter

and the applicable SDR, use the following formula:
Correlation outside diameter to inside diameter

for SDR13.6, SDR21 and SDR33
di
(mm)
SDR33
(PVDF)
85
d90
103
d110
117
d125
132
d140
150
d160
169
d180
188
d200
211
d225
235
d250
263
d280
296
d315
333
d355
375
d400
422
d450
di
(mm)
di
SDR13.6
(PVC-U, PVC-C)
(mm)
SDR21
(PVC-U, PVDF)
17
d20
16
d20
21
d25
21
d25
27
d32
28
d32
34
d40
36
d40
43
d50
45
d50
54
d63
57
d63
64
d75
68
d75
77
d90
81
d90
94
d110
100
d110
107
d125
113
d125
119
d140
127
d140
136
d160
145
d160
163
d180
181
d200
204
d225
226
d250
253
d280
285
d315
362
d400
Correlation outside diameter to inside diameter

for SDR11 and SDR17
di
(mm)
SDR11
(PE, PP)
di
(mm)
SDR17
SDR17.6
(ABS, PE, PP)
16
d20
16
d20
d25
21
d25
d32
28
d32
d40
35
d40
d50
44
d50
d63
56
d63
d75
66
d75
d90
79
d90
d110
97
d110
d125
110
d125
d140
124
d140
d160
141
d160
d180
159
d180
d200
176
d200
d225
199
d225
d250
221
d250
d280
247
d280
20
26
33
41
52
61
74
90
102
115
131
147
164
184
205
229
258
290
327
368
409
458
515
581
655
d315
278
d315
d355
313
d355
d400
353
d400
d450
397
d450
d500
441
d500
d560
494
d560
d630
556
d630
d710
626
d710
d800
705
d800
Nomogram for easy determination of diameter

and pressure loss
The following nomogram simplifies the determination of

the required diameter. In addition the pressure loss of
the pipes per meter pipe length can be read off.
Remark: The determined pressure loss from the nomogram applies only to a density of the flow medium of
1000 kg/m, e. g. for water. Further pressure losses of
fittings, valves, etc. have to be considered as shown in
the following.
Example how to use the nomogram:
Starting with a flow velocity of 1.5 m/sec draw a line
through the required quantity of flow (e. g. 30 m/h)
until you cut the axis of the inside diameter di ( 84
mm).Then select a diameter nearby (74 mm at SDR11)
and draw a second line back through the same quantity
of flow to the axis of the pressure losses p (5 mbar per
meter pipe).
181
Nomogram for metric pipes (SDR13.6, SDR21, SDR33)
182
Nomogram for metric pipes (SDR11, SDR17)
183
Nomogram for inch pipes
184
Pressure losses
Fitting type
Coefficient of resistance
90 bend
bending radius R
-value
1.0 * d
0.51
1.5 * d
0.41
2.0 * d
0.34
4.0 * d
0.23
45 bend
bending radius R
-value
Laminar flow occurs, in practice, particularly in the

transport of viscous media, i. e. lubricating oil. In the
majority of applications, including media similar to water, a turbulent flow, having an essentially steady velocity in a cross-section of pipe, occurs.
1.0 * d
0.34
1.5 * d
0.27
2.0 * d
0.20
4.0 * d
0.15
The pressure loss in a straight length of pipe is inversely proportional to the pipe diameter and is calculated by
the following formula:
90 elbow
1.2
45 elbow
0.3
Tee 90
1.3
Reduction (Contraction)
0.5
Reduction (Extension)
1.0
Connection (Flange, union,

welding between two pipes)
d >90 mm: 0.1

20 d 90 mm:
1.0 to 0.1:
Pressure loss in straight pipes

When calculating the pressure loss in straight pipe
lengths there is a distinction between laminar and turbulent flow. The important unit of measurement is the
Reynold's number (Re). The changeover from laminar
to turbulent flow occurs at the critical value, Reynolds
number (Re) = 2320.
Note: In practice, when making a rough calculation (i.

e. smooth plastic pipe and turbulent flow) it is enough to
use the value = 0.02 to represent the hydraulic pressure loss.
*)
d20: 1.0
d25: 0.9
d32: 0.8
d40: 0.7
where:
pR
pressure loss in a straight length of pipe in bar
pipe friction factor
length of the straight length of pipe in m
di
inside diameter of pipe in mm
density of transported media in kg/m

(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
Pressure loss in fittings

Coefficient of resistance
The pressure losses depend upon the type of fitting as
well as on the flow in the fitting. The so-called -value is
used for calculations.
d50: 0.6
d63: 0.4
d75: 0.3
d90: 0.1
*) For a more detailed view differentiate between coalescence and separation. Values for up to a maximum
of 1.3 can be found in the respective literature. Usually the part of a tee in the overall pressure loss is very
small, therefore in most cases = 1.3 can be used.
Calculation of the pressure loss
To calculate the total pressure loss in all fittings in a
pipeline take the sum of the individual losses, i. e. the
sum of all the -values. The pressure loss can then be
calculated according to the following formula:
where
pFi
pressure loss in all fittings in bar
sum of the individual losses
density of the transported medium in kg/

m
(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
Pressure loss in valves

The kv factor is a convenient means of calculating the
hydraulicflow rates for valves. It allows for all internal
resistances and for practical purposes is regarded as
reliable.
The kv factor is defined as the flow rate of water in litres
per minute with a pressure drop of 1 bar across the
valve.
185
The technical datasheets for valves supplied by GF contain the so-called kv values as well as pressure loss diagram. The latter make it possible to read off the pressure loss directly. But the pressure loss can also be calculated from the kv value according to the following formula:
where:
pAr
pressure loss of the valve in bar
flow rate in m/h
density of the medium transported in kg/

m
(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
kv
valve flow characteristic in m/h.
Pressure difference caused by static pressure

Compensation for a geodetic pressure difference may
be necessary when a pipeline is vertically installed. The
pressure difference can be calculated with the following
formula:
where:
pgeod
geodetic pressure difference in bar
Hgeod
difference in elevation of the pipeline in m
density of media kg/m

(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
Sum of pressure losses
12
elbows
90
elbows
45
tees
unions
flange
adapters
diaphragm
valve,
30
%
opened
Height difference 2.0 m

The wall thickness of this pipeline can be calculated
with the SDR:
The inside diameter of the pipeline is as follows:
With the required quantity of flow of 1.5 l/sec the flow

velocity is as follows:
Calculation of pressure losses

Pressure loss of strait pipes:
The sum of all the pressure losses in the pipeline is then

given by
Pressure loss of fittings and connections:
Example for pressure loss calculation

The following example shows the calculation to determine the pressure loss of a pipeline:
PVDF-pipeline d40, SDR 21 with a quantity of flow of
1.5 l/sec, medium stannous chloride, density 1.9 g/cm
Length of strait pipes: 15 m
Amount of fittings:
Pressure loss of the valve, 30 % opened. With the flow

characteristics diagram, type 314, and 30% lift a percentile kv-value of 50 % can be read out, that means 50
% of kv100 values: 0.5 * 21.2 m/h (quantity of flow 1.5
l/sec = 5.4 m/h):
Pressure loss of height difference:
Total pressure loss of the pipeline:
186
p = 0.17 bar +0.47 bar + 0.49 bar + 0.38 bar

p = 1.51 bar
187
188
Installation of metric industrial piping systems
z-dimension method
Page
190
Handling plastic pipeline systems
194
3D, 2D CAD-Engineering
195
Change in length and flexible sections
-- Introduction
-- Flexible sections of ABS pipelines
-- Flexible sections of PE (PE80, PE100) pipelines
-- Flexible sections of PP pipelines
-- Flexible sections of PVC pipelines
-- Flexible sections of PVDF pipelines
196
199
201
203
207
211
Installation
213
Pipe bracket spacing and support of pipelines

-- General
-- Pipe bracket spacing for COOL-FIT ABS pipes
-- Pipe bracket spacing for PE pipes
-- Pipe bracket spacing for PP pipes
-- Pipe bracket spacing for PVC pipes
-- Pipe bracket spacing for PVDF pipes
-- Pipe bracket spacing plastics pipes in carriers
Internal pressure test and leak test
-- Introduction to pressure testing

-- Internal pressure test with water or a similar incompressible test fluid
-- Internal pressure test and leak tightness test of ABS pipelines with gas/air as test fluid (compressible medium)
-- Internal pressure test of compressed air pipelines
-- Leak test with gas as test fluid (compressible medium). Maximum test pressure 0.5 bar
Modifications, repairs, commissioning

-- Modifications and repairs
-- Commissioning
215
218
219
220
222
224
225
226
226
230
231
231
232
232
189
Installation of metric industrial

piping systems
z-dimension method
The length of pipe to be cut is given as in the following

diagram by the distance between the centre of adjoining
fittings less the sum of the z-dimension of the fittings.
Procedure for socket fusion or socket cement

fittings
General
The pressure of competition and high wages makes it

essential to install pipeline systems efficiently.
The GF method of assembly is highly suited to this task.
It replaces the tedious and time-consuming cutting to
size of one pipe at a time by a fast and precise way of
preparing whole groups of pipes according to plans or
jigs.
We recommend using the
chart to enter the groups of
pipes with the corresponding dimensions and the cut
lengths.
The following formula is used to determine the required

pipe length:
L0 = M - z1 - z2
Please adhere to the following guidelines for drawing:

Pipes which run perpendicular to one another are drawn
like this:
Horizontal: from left to right
Vertical
Horizontal: from front to

back
Inclined pipelines
are drawn like this:
Lo
Length of pipe to be cut
Distance between the centre of each fitting
z-dimension of the fitting
The following example shows how the use the z-dimension method:
Material PVC-U, d63, PN16
Centre-Centre distance M = 1000 mm
z1 (Tee 90 equal) = 33 mm
z2 (Elbow 90) = 33 mm
=>L0 = 1000 mm - 33 mm - 33 mm = 934 mm
Procedure for butt fusion fittings
Study the schedule of pipe sizes and lengths of the pipe

runs. The z-dimensions of the fittings are needed for determining the actual cutting lengths of the pipes. The tables in ourproduct rangesor in the online catalogues
contain all the relevant data for the fittings.
190
The following formula is used to determine the required

pipe length:
L0 = M - LFitt1 - LFitt2+ 2Bz + 2Xv
Lo
Cut length of pipe
LFitt
Length of the fitting ( z-dimension)
Centre-to-centre distance of fitting
Bz
Facing IR: 2 x 2 mm, BCF: 2 x 0.8 mm
Xv
Overlap distance (only for IR)
material losses per fusion process
The following example shows how the use the z-dimension method:
Material PP-H, d63, SDR11, IR welded
Centre-Centre distance M = 1000 mm
LFitt1 (Tee 90 equal) =66 mm
LFitt2 (Elbow 90) =66 mm
Bz = 2 x 2 mm.For each welding facing is carried out
onpipe and fitting. Because of two weldings in summery
8 mm
Xv = 1 mm for each welding. Because of two weldings in
summery 2 mm
=>L0 = 1000 mm -66 mm -66 mm + 8 mm + 2
mm=878 mm
Advantage for IR and BCF: Defined facing!
The following table shows the approximate welding losses for the IR fusion process, including 1x facing:
Welding machine IR63-Plus
d
PP-natural
PE100
PE100
PP-H
PP-H
PVDF
ECTFE
PFA
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
25
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
32
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
40
5.0
6.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
50
5.0
6.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
63
5.5
6.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
191
Welding machine IR110-Plus

d
PP-natural
PE100
PE100
PP-H
PP-H
PVDF
ECTFE
PFA
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
25
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
32
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
40
5.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.5
50
5.0
5.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
63
5.0
5.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
75
5.0
5.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
90
5.0
5.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
110
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
Welding machine IR225-Plus + IR315-Plus

d
PP-natural
PE100
PE100
PP-H
PP-H
PVDF
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
5.0
6.5
6.5
5.0
5.0
4.5
75
5.0
6.5
6.5
5.0
5.0
4.5
90
5.0
6.5
6.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
110
5.5
6.5
6.5
5.5
5.0
5.0
125
6.5
6.5
5.5
5.0
140
6.5
6.5
5.5
5.5
5.0
160
7.0
6.5
5.5
5.5
5.0
180
7.0
6.5
5.5
5.5
200
7.0
6.5
5.5
5.5
5.0
225
7.0
6.5
2.0
5.5
5.0
250
TBA
TBA
5.5
280
TBA
TBA
5.5
315
TBA
TBA
5.5
Welding machine IR-450

d
PE100
PE100
PP-H
PP-H
PVDF
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
(SDR11)
(SDR17)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
315
TBA
TBA
7.0-13.0
can be selected by operator
355
TBA
TBA
7.0-13.0
400
TBA
TBA
7.0-13.0
450
TBA
TBA
7.0-13.0
192
Isometric paper
193
Handling plastic pipeline systems

Transportation
Vehicles used to transport pipes must be capable of accommodating the full pipe length. The pipes must be
supported to prevent them bending or deforming. The
area where pipes rest (including side supports) should
be lined with padded sheeting or corrugated cardboard
to avoid damage by protruding rivets or nails. To prevent damage, pipes and fittings must not be slid over
the transport vehicles loading area, nor should they be
dragged along the ground to their place of storage.
Due care must be taken with loading and unloading. If
lifting gear is used, this must be fitted with special pipe
grips. Throwing pipes and parts down from the cargo
surface is unacceptable.
Impacts must be avoided at all cost, especially at ambient temperatures below 0C where many plastics (e.g.
PVC) have significantly lower impact resistance.
Pipes and fittings must be transported and stored so
that they cannot be soiled by earth, mud, dirty water,
etc. We recommend sealing pipes with protective endcaps to prevent the ingress of dirt.
We recommend that GF fittings and equipment are only
unpacked immediately prior to use.
Storage
The pipe storage surface must be level and free of
stones. Pipes must be layered and stacked in a way
that avoids the risk of damage or permanent deformation. Larger-diameter, thin-walled pipes must be fitted
with stiffening rings. Avoid single-point or narrow longitudinal supports.
The following table gives recommended maximum
stacking heights for non-palette pipe storage. Provided pipes are stacked on palettes and protected against
sideways movement, the nominal stacking heights
specified in the table may be increased by 50%.
Pipe storage areas should be as well-protected as possible. Absorption of oil, solvents and other chemicals
must be avoided at all costs during storage.
194
Stored pipes must not be exposed to the elements more

than absolutely necessary, i.e. they should be kept in a
covered warehouse. If stored outdoors (e.g. on a construction site), they should be covered with sheeting for
protection against the weather (e.g. UV radiation).
It should also be noted that one-sided warming by sunshine could cause deformations.
Pipes and parts should be used in the order of manufacture / delivery, to ensure proper warehouse turnover of
the plastic material.
Material
Permissible stacking
height
ABS
PE
PP
PVC-U
PVC-C
PVDF
1.0 m
1.0 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
3D, 2D CAD-Engineering
Product library of Georg Fischer
With this 3D-Product library Georg Fischer supports

planner and engineers at the creation of piping systems
more efficiently.
Three dimensional drawings of all the componetsof the
+GF+ industrial piping systems are supplied. The user
creates two dimensional drawings on his own.
The library does work independently from the users
CAD system. A lot of systems and interfaces are supported.
Moreinformation are availablein the internet with
www.piping.georgfischer.com =>Support or from your
next GF company.
195
Change in length and flexible sections

Introduction
General
Flexible sections arise naturally at any branching or

change in direction of the pipeline. The movement LB
of the flexible section as a result of a change L in the
length must not be restrained by fixed pipe brackets,
protrusions wall, girders or the like.
Thermoplastics are subject to greater thermal expansion and contraction than metals. Pipes installed above
ground, against walls or in ducts, especially those exposed to temperature variations, require changes in
length to be taken up in order to prevent extra strain on
the pipes. Length changes can be taken up by:
a) flexible sections
b) compensators
Flexible sections are the most common solution, being
the simplest and the most economical. The calculations
for and the positioning of flexible sections are therefore
described in detail.
Calculation of change in length
The change in length caused by temperature can be

calculated using the following formula:
with:
L = temperature-related change in length (mm)
L = lengthof the pipe section (m)
T = difference of temperature (K)
= coefficient of linear expansion (mm / m K)
Fundamentals
The low modulus of elasticity of thermoplastics allows
changes in length to be taken up by special pipe sections, where pipe supports are positioned so that they
can take advantage of the natural flexibility of the material. The length of such sections is determined by the diameter of the pipeline and the extent of the thermal expansion to be compensated.
196
Coefficients of linear expansion of polymers:

in mm/m K
Material
ABS
0.10
COOL-FIT ABS Plus

PA
0.04- 0.09*
0.10
PB
0.13
PE
0.15 - 0.20
PP
0.16 - 0.18
PPS
0.15
PVC-U
0.07 - 0.08
PVC-C
0.06 - 0.07
PVDF
0.12 - 0.18
* Exact values can be calculated using GF's online tool

(www.cool-fit.georgfischer.com) or ask your local GF
representative.
Tip: If the operating temperature is higher than the
installation temperature, then the pipe expands.
If, on the other hand, the operating temperature is
lower than the installation temperature, then the
pipe contracts in length.
The installation temperature must therefore be incorporated into the calculations as well as the maximum and
minimum operating temperatures.
It is preferable to use "+" to indicate expansion of the
pipe and "-" to indicate contraction.
The larger change in length is the one to be used for determining the required length of the flexible section.
Calculating of length of the flexible section
The required length of the flexible section can be calculated using the following formula:
Remark: Because Ecm and b are depending on time,

temperature and stress, the calculation of LB is very difficult. Therefore the following diagrams should be used
instead of the formula.
Boundary conditions for using the diagram
For easy determination of the required length of flexible

section please use the following diagrams. Please take
into account the given boundary conditions.
Assembly temperature TM = 20 C
TB Operating temperature
T = TB - TM
allowable bending stress 15 % of v
PN 6 .. 16
Coefficient of friction of the pipe in the loose brackets
0.5
Information:
The following diagrams show the required flexible sections for strait pipe lengths of10 mor 70 m. Exceeding
the maximally permissible straight pipe distance would
lead to buckling of the pipe due to the too large friction
in the pipe clamps. Therefore the maximally possible
pipe length is to consider depending on the pipe diameter =>above the hatched range.
Example: Determining the required flexible section

Calculating the relevant change in length
The example of an ABS process pipe serves to illustrate
the procedure:
Length of piping from the fixed point to the branch point
where the change in length is to be taken up:
L = 8 m.
Installation temperature: TM = 20 C
Max. working temperature: T1 = 35 C
Min. working temperature: T2 = -20 C
Expansion of the section during heating

+L1 = L T1 = 8 15 0.10 = 12 mm
Contraction during cooling
-L2 = L T2 = 8 40 0.10 = 32 mm
with:
da = pipe outside diameter (mm)
L = change in length (mm)
Ecm= average bending creep modulus for t = 25 a (N/
mm)
b= permitted bending stress for t = 25a (N/mm)
Temperature differences
T1 = T1 - TM = 15K
T2 = T2 - TM = - 40K
Maximum change in temperature chosen
T = 40 K
197
Determining the length of the flexible section for

ABS
The values needed to determine the necessary length
are:
The maximum change in temperature from the 0-position (i. e. from the position in which the pipe was installed). But remember that the pipe could just as well
contract as expand.
The pipe diameter d.
The length of the pipe section L.
With these values the required length of the flexible section can be read off from the diagram for ABS.
Continuing with the example introduced before and supposing that an ABS pipe with d = 50 mm is installed, the
maximum change in temperature being T=40 K, the
required length of the flexible section is seen directly
from the diagram to beLB = 1300 mm.
The diagram can be used also the other way around, if

a maximum flexible section caused by the building construction is given. Then the maximum straight length of
the pipe can be determined.
198
Flexible sections of ABS pipelines
Length of thepipe section in mm
LB
Required length of flexible section in mm
199
Length of the pipe section in mm
LB

Remark: Please observe the explanations to the hatched area in the clause boundary conditions
200
Flexible sections of PE (PE80, PE100) pipelines
LB
201
LB

202
Flexible sections of PP pipelines
LB
203
LB

204
LB
205
LB

206
Flexible sections of PVC pipelines
LB
207
LB

208
LB
209
LB

210
Flexible sections of PVDF pipelines
LB
211
LB

212
Installation
Installation data:
L = 10m
d = 50mm
Length changes in pipe sections should always be accommodated through the arrangement of fixed brackets. The following examples show how the changes can
be distributed in pipe sections by suitable positioning of
fixed brackets.
Installation temperature:
15 C
Recommendations for installation
Max. operating temperature:
40 C
Material:
ABS
a) Change in length
+L = L * T * ABS = 10 * 25 * 0.10 = 25 mm
b) A flexible section to take up a change in length of L
= 25 mm needs to beLB = approx. 1150 mm long according to the diagram.
c) If the flexible section is pre-stressed to L/2 then
the required length of the flexible section is reduced to
about 800 mm. The variation length from the 0 position
is then L/2 = 25/2 = 12.5 mm.
not recommended
recommended
Pre-stressing the flexible section makes it possible to

reduce its required length in installations where space is
restricted. Pre-stressing also reduces the bending of the
flexible section in service, improving the appearance of
the pipeline.
Expansion loops can be installed to take up changes

in length when flexible sections cannot be included at
a change in direction or branch in the pipeline or if substantial changes in the length of a straight section need
to be taken up. In such a case the compensation for
changes in length is distributed over two flexible sections.
Installing compensators
Lu 2 *L
NOTICE
Bending load at flexible sections
Caused by the bending load leakages can
occur at mechanical joints.
Within the range of flexible sections and/or
expansion loops no screw connections or
flange connections shall be used.
Pre-stress
In particularly difficult situations with large changes in
one direction only, it is possible to pre-stress the flexible section during installation and thereby shorten its
length, as illustrated in the next example.
The low modulus of elasticity means that the reaction

force of plastic pipes to thermal changes is low compared to metal pipes. This makes normal compensators
designed for use with metal pipes unsuitable because
of their high inherent resistance. Only freely moving
compensators may be used in plastic pipe systems, i.
e. those with a low resistance. The following compensators may be considered: rubber compensators, PTFEcorrugated compensators or suitably selected metal
multi-disc compensators.
Carefully placed fixed points should be used when fitting
compensators for the regulation of the pipe in order to
ensure their unhindered operation. The installation temperature provides the basis for the calculations to ensure this.
213
Tip: When using compensators, additional longitudinal forces are implemented into the pipeline.
These forces have to be carried by guiding the
pipeline. For example, threaded rods are not suitable. To estimate the lateral forces it can be assumed that they can reach about 15 % of the axial forces. Please contact the manufactures of
compensators for further support designing such
pipelines.
pipelines can support limited additional axial stress without becoming overloaded. In such cases the level of
stress expected must be calculated. The same is true
of any section of pipe between two fixed points where
no allowance has been made for changes in length. The
load at the fixed points must be calculated and considered when planning the fixed points. The distance between pipe brackets in such cases may have to be reduced from the normal values in order to prevent bowing in the pipeline.
Care must be taken to avoid creating cavities when
plastering or concreting in the pipeline, because under
unfavourable conditions these can become areas of
stress concentration. A rich plaster mixture (1 : 3 to 1 :
4) should be used to allow the forces arising from temperature variations to be transmitted away without causing the plaster to crack.
Installing valves
Valves should be secured as directly as possible, so

that the actuation forces are transmitted directly and not
via the pipeline. Valve brackets or valves from GF with
an integrated fastening device are used to securely fasten plastic valves. These valve brackets are also used
to bear the loads of the valve and filling weight of the
pipeline. Any changes in length which arise can be prevented with the appropriate fixed points before or after
the valve.
You will find more information under the respective
valve types.
Installing pipework under plaster or embedding

it in concrete
Padded pipework
Where pipework is installed under plaster or embedded

into concrete, the flexible sections at bends and branches must be padded for the calculated distance H, as also must any branches and elbows included in the affected section.
Use only flexible materials as padding, such as glass

wool, mineral wool, foam or similar.
Unpadded pipework
Unpadded pipes can also be plastered or concreted
in directly. Since the axial stress arising from internal
pressure is half as great as the circumferential stress,
214
Pipe bracket spacing and support of

pipelines
General
Pipe support for plastics pipes
Plastic pipe systems should be installed using supports

designed for use with plastics and should then be installed taking care not to damage or over stress the
pipe.
Arranging Loose Brackets

What is a loose pipe bracket?
A loose pipe bracket is a bracket which allows axial
movement of the pipe, to allow stress free compensation of temperature changes and compensation of any
other operating condition changes.
The inner diameter of the bracket should be larger than

the outside diameter of the pipe to allow free movement
of the pipe. The inner edges of the brackets should be
free from any sharp contours which could damage the
plastic. If the brackets inside diameter is not larger than
the pipe then the bracket should not be fully tightened,
thus allowing the pipe to move.
Another method is to use brackets with spacers which
also avoids clamping the bracket on the pipe.
Arranging fixed points

What is a fixed point?
A fixed pipe bracket is a bracket which prevents the
pipe from moving in any direction. The aim of which
is to control system stresses caused by temperature
changes.
NOTICE
Construction of fixpoint
This should not be done by simply clamping
the bracket onto the outside of the pipe! This
can cause deformation and physical damage
to the pipe, damage that sometimes only later becomes visible.
It should be done either by using pipe
brackets located between two fittings or a
double bracket must be used.(double-sided
fixed point).
Placing a pipe bracket immediately adjacent to a fitting restricts movement due to
changes in length to one direction (one-sided fixed point).
one-sided fixed point
double-sided fixed point
Information:
Pipe brackets must be robust and mounted firmly to be
able to take up the forces arising from changes in length
in the pipeline. Hanging brackets or KLIP-IT pipe brackets are unsuitable for use as fixed points.
KLIP-IT pipe brackets
These robust plastic pipe brackets can be used not only

under rigorous operating conditions, but also where the
pipework is subject to aggressive media or atmospheric
conditions. They may be used for all materials of pipes.
Don't use KLIP-IT pipe brackets as fixed points!
Spacer to avoid clamping
Axial movement of the pipeline must not be prevented

by fittings placed next to pipe brackets or by any other
component affecting the diameter of the pipe.
Sliding brackets and hanging brackets permit the pipe
to move in different directions. Attaching a sliding block
to the base of the pipe bracket permits free movement
of the pipe along a flat supporting surface. Sliding and
hanging brackets are needed in situations where the
pipeline changes direction and free movement of the
pipe must be allowed.
215
Pipe brackets for cold insulation (MIP)
d 16 to d32
d 40 to d 160
Open handle
Insert pipe
Close handle with quick-action clamp
d 90 to d 400
Starting from the dimension d90 the KLIP-IT brackets

must be installed standing, like shown in the assembly
examples. The support distances given in the following,
specified for the KLIP-IT tubing clamps, apply only to
this mounting method.
Assemble insulation
1. Take off foil
2. Press area of contact
Move insulation into the bracket. Attention! Make sure the insulator is positioned correctly.
Tighten the screw
216
Coat areas of contact with adhesive and bond them
Using the tables for pipe bracket spacing
Plastic pipelines need to be supported at certain intervals depending on several factors: the material, the average pipe wall temperature, the density of the medium transported and the size and wall thickness of the
pipe. Determining the spacing between pipe brackets is
based on the permissible deflection of the pipe between
consecutive brackets.
Information:
The values given in the tables apply only to pipelines
which are freely movable in the axial direction.
Pipelines which are fastened tightly in the axial direction (fixed installations) must be checked for buckling.
In most cases, this leads to a reduction of the maximum
inner pressure and shorter distances between the support brackets. Furthermore, the forces that act on the
fixed points must also be taken into consideration. For
assistance, please contact your nearest GF representative.
217
Pipe bracket spacing for COOL-FIT ABS

pipes
Liquids with a density of 1 g/cm
d
DN Pipe bracket intervals L for pipes
mm inch PN10 / SDR17 / S8 or class C
in mm at pipe wall temperature:
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe

Pipe diameter
mm
Pipe bracket intervals L forCOOL-FIT ABS Plus

mm (ft)
25
1550(5.09)
32
1550 (5.09)
20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
40
1650 (5.41)
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
140
160
200
225
250
280
315
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
700
800
850
1000
1100
1150
1300
1500
1600
1800
2050
2200
2300
2400
2500
2650
2800
650
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1350
1450
1650
1800
1850
2050
2200
2300
2400
2500
600
650
750
850
950
1000
1100
1200
1350
1550
1700
1750
1850
1900
2000
2100
2200
550
600
650
750
850
900
1000
1100
1200
1350
1400
1450
1550
1600
1650
1700
1800
450
500
600
650
750
800
850
950
1050
1200
1250
1300
1350
1450
1500
1600
1650
50
1650 (5.41)
63
1750 (6.23)
75
1900 (6.23)
90
2050 (6.73)
110
2200 (7.22)
140
2550 (8.37)
160
2750 (9.02)
200
3050 (10.01)
225
3300 (10.83)
250
3300 (10.83)
280
3600 (11.80)
315
3800 (12.46)
For other SDR / PN values or classes multiply the values given in the table with the following factor.
SDR11 / PN16 1.08
Class B 0.90
Class D 1.05
Class E 1.09
The pipe bracket spacing given in the table may be increased by 30 % in the case of vertical pipe runs, i. e.
multiply the values given by 1.3.
Fluids of a density other than 1 g/cm
If the liquid to be transported has a density not equal

1 g/cm, then the bracket spacings in the table above
should be multiplied by the factor given in the following
table.
Density of the fluid in g/cm
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.30
218
Pipe bracket spacing for PE pipes

d
mm
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
Pipe bracket intervals L for pipes SDR 11

20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
500
575
650
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1750
1900
2050
2150
2300
2450
2600
2750
2900
3100
3300
3550
3900
450
550
600
750
850
1000
1150
1300
1450
1600
1700
1850
1950
2050
2200
2350
2500
2650
2800
3000
3150
3400
3650
450
500
550
650
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1600
1750
1850
1950
2100
2250
2400
2550
2700
2900
3050
3300
3500
400
450
550
650
750
850
1000
1100
1250
1450
1550
1650
1750
1850
2000
2150
2300
2400
2550
2750
2900
3100
3350
350
400
500
550
650
750
900
1000
1150
1300
1400
1500
1600
1750
1900
2050
2100
2200
2350
2550
2700
2900
3100
For other SDR multiply the values given in the table with
the following factor:
SDR 17 and SDR 17.6 with 0.91
SDR 7.4 with 1.07

1 g/cm, then the bracket spacing in the table above
should be multiplied by the factor of the following table.
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.30 for SDR11

1.21 for SDR7.4
219
Pipe bracket spacing for PP pipes

PP-H pipes with liquids with a density of 1 g/cm
d
mm
Pipe bracket intervals L for SDR 11 pipes

20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
70 C
80 C
16
650
625
600
575
550
525
500
20
700
675
650
625
600
575
550
25
800
775
750
725
700
675
650
32
950
925
900
875
850
800
750
40
1100
1075
1050
1000
950
925
875
50
1250
1225
1200
1150
1100
1050
1000
63
1450
1425
1400
1350
1300
1250
1200
75
1550
1500
1450
1400
1350
1300
1250
90
1650
1600
1550
1500
1450
1400
1350
110
1850
1800
1750
1700
1600
1500
1400
125
2000
1950
1900
1800
1700
1600
1500
140
2100
2050
2000
1900
1800
1700
1600
160
2250
2200
2100
2000
1900
1800
1700
180
2350
2300
2200
2100
2000
1900
1800
200
2500
2400
2300
2200
2100
2000
1900
225
2650
2550
2450
2350
2250
2150
2000
250
2800
2700
2600
2500
2400
2300
2150
315
3150
3050
2950
2850
2700
2600
2450
355
3350
3250
3150
3000
2850
2750
2600
400
3550
3450
3350
3200
3050
2900
2750
450
3800
3700
3600
3450
3300
3100
2950
500
4100
4000
3850
3700
3500
3350
3150
SDR17 and SDR17.6 with 0.91
PP-H pipes with fluids of a density other than 1

g/cm
should be multiplied by the factor given inthe following
table.
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.30 for SDR11

1.47 for SDR17.6 and
SDR17
220
PP-R pipes with liquids with a density of 1 g/cm

d
mm
Pipe bracket intervals L for SDR 11 pipes

20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
70 C
80 C
16
500
475
450
425
425
400
375
20
525
500
500
475
450
425
425
25
600
575
575
550
525
500
500
32
725
700
675
650
650
600
575
40
825
800
800
750
725
700
650
50
950
925
900
875
825
775
750
63
1100
1075
1050
1025
975
925
900
75
1150
1150
1100
1050
1000
975
950
90
1250
1200
1150
1150
1100
1050
1000
110
1400
1350
1300
1300
1200
1125
1050
125
1500
1450
1450
1350
1300
1200
1150
140
1600
1550
1500
1450
1350
1275
1200
160
1700
1650
1600
1500
1450
1350
1300
180
1750
1750
1650
1600
1500
1425
1350
200
1900
1800
1750
1650
1600
1500
1450
225
2000
1900
1850
1750
1700
1600
1500
250
2100
2050
1950
1900
1800
1700
1600
315
2350
2300
2200
2150
2050
1950
1850
355
2500
2425
2350
2250
2125
2050
1950
400
2650
2575
2500
2400
2275
2175
2050
450
2850
2775
2700
2575
2475
2325
2200
500
3075
3000
2875
2775
2625
2500
2350
SDR17 and SDR17.6 with 0.91
PP-R pipes with fluids of a density other than 1

g/cm
table.
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.30 for SDR11

1.47 for SDR17.6 and
SDR17
221
Pipe bracket spacing for PVC pipes

PVC-U pipes with liquids with a density of 1 g/
cm
d
DN
Pipe bracket intervals L for SDR21 / S 10 /

PN10 pipes
mm
inch 20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
3/8
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
900
1050
1150
1300
1400
1550
1750
1900
2100
2300
2450
2600
2800
2950
3150
3300
3500
3700
3900
4200
4450
850
1000
1050
1250
1350
1500
1700
1850
2000
2250
2400
2500
2700
2850
3000
3200
3350
3550
3750
4000
4250
750
900
950
1100
1250
1400
1550
1700
1850
2050
2200
2300
2500
2650
2800
2950
3100
3300
3500
3700
3950
600
700
750
900
1000
1150
1300
1450
1550
1750
1850
1950
2100
2200
2350
2500
2600
2750
2950
3100
3300
950
1100
1200
1350
1450
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2550
2700
2900
3100
3250
3450
3650
3750
4100
4300
4600
For other SDR / PN multiply the values given in the table with the following factor:
SDR51 / S25 / PN4 with 0.83
SDR34.3 / S16.7 / PN6 with 0.90
SDR13.6 / S 6.3 / PN16 with 1.08
SDR11 / S 5 / PN20 with 1.15
PVC-U pipes with fluids of a density other than

1 g/cm
table.
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.42 for SDR21 / S8 /

PN10
1.30 for SDR13.6 /
S6.3 / PN16
1.20 for SDR11 / S5 /
PN20
222
PVC-C pipes with liquids with a density of 1 g/cm

dmm
Pipe bracket intervals L for SDR21 / S10 / PN10 pipesin mm at pipe

wall temperature:
20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
70 C
80 C
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
350
400
1000
1150
1200
1350
1500
1650
1850
2050
2250
2500
2650
2800
3000
3150
3350
3550
3750
3950
4200
4450
4750
950
1100
1150
1250
1400
1600
1750
1950
2100
2350
2500
2650
2850
3000
3150
3350
3550
3750
4000
4250
4500
900
1025
1100
1200
1300
1500
1650
1850
2000
2200
2350
2500
2700
2850
3000
3200
3350
3550
3750
4000
4250
850
950
1000
1100
1250
1400
1600
1750
1900
2100
2250
2350
2550
2700
2850
3000
3150
3350
3550
3800
4000
750
875
900
1000
1150
1300
1500
1650
1800
1950
2100
2200
2400
2500
2650
2800
3000
3150
3350
3550
3750
675
775
800
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
1650
1800
1950
2050
2200
2300
2450
2600
2750
2900
3050
3250
3450
600
700
700
800
900
1100
1250
1350
1500
1650
1750
1850
2000
2100
2200
2350
2500
2650
2800
2950
3150
SDR13.6 / S6.3 / PN16 with 1.08
SDR11 / S5 / PN20 with 1.12
PVC-C pipes with fluids of a density other than

1 g/cm
should be multiplied by the factor given in the following
table.
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe

bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.42 for SDR21 / S8 /

PN10
1.30 for SDR13.6 /
S6.3 / PN16
1.20 for SDR11 / S5 /
PN20
223
Pipe bracket spacing for PVDF pipes

d
mm
Pipe bracket spacing L for pipes

PN16 / SDR21
20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
70 C
80 C
100 C
120 C
140 C
16
20
25
32
40
50
725
850
950
1100
1200
1400
700
800
900
1050
1150
1350
650
750
850
1000
1100
1300
600
750
800
950
1050
1200
575
700
750
900
1000
1150
550
650
700
850
950
1100
500
600
675
800
900
1000
450
500
600
700
750
900
400
450
500
600
650
750
300
400
450
500
550
600
d
mm
Pipe bracket spacing L for pipes

PN10 / SDR33
20 C
30 C
40 C
50 C
60 C
70 C
80 C
100 C
120 C
140 C
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
1400
1500
1600
1800
1900
2000
2150
2300
2400
2550
2650
2850
3000
3200
3400
3650
1350
1450
1550
1750
1850
1950
2100
2200
2350
2500
2600
2750
2950
3100
3300
3550
1300
1400
1500
1700
1800
1900
2050
2150
2250
2400
2500
2650
2850
3000
3200
3450
1250
1350
1450
1650
1700
1800
1950
2050
2150
2300
2400
2550
2750
2850
3050
3300
1200
1300
1400
1550
1650
1750
1850
1950
2100
2200
2300
2450
2600
2750
2950
3200
1150
1250
1350
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2350
2500
2650
2800
3000
1100
1200
1300
1450
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2250
2400
2500
2650
2850
950
1050
1100
1250
1350
1450
1550
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2150
2250
2400
2600
800
850
950
1100
1200
1250
1350
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2250
650
700
850
950
1000
1050
1150
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1650
1750
1800
1900
For other PN / SDR multiply the values given in the table (diameter d63)with the following factor:
PN16 / SDR33 with1.08
Pipe bracket spacing for lines running vertically can be
increased by 30 % with respect to the values in the table, i. e. table values multiplied by 1.3.

table.
Density of the
fluid in g/cm
Type of fluid
Factor for pipe bracket spacing
1.00
Water
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
Other
0.96
0.92
0.88
0.84
0.01
Gaseous
1.48 for SDR33 / PN10

1.36 for SDR21 / PN16
224
Pipe bracket spacing plastics pipes in carriers
Continuous support may be more economical and

practicable than pipe brackets for horizontal or vertical
pipework, especially for small diameter pipes and in areas with high temperatures.
In order to avoid inadmissible loadings on the pipelinesensure during assemblingan overlapping of the carriers in the pipe brackets.
The following tableindicates the spacing distances
when using carriers. These values apply regardless of
the type of piping material or the temperature.
d
mm
Spacing of supports when using carriers

mm
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
1600
1750
1900
2000
2150
2300
2500
2600
2750
2900
225
Internal pressure test and leak test

Introduction to pressure testing
Overview of the different testing methods
Testing method
Internal pressure test
Medium
Water
Gas *
Compressed air *
Gas/air (oil free)
Gas/air (oil free)
Art
incompressible
compressible
compressible
compressible
compressible
Test pressure
(overpressure)
pp(perm)
resp.
0.85 x pp(perm)
Operating pressure Operating pressure 0.5 bar (7 psi)

+ 2 bar (29 psi)
+ 2 bar (29 psi)
1.5 bar (20 psi)
Endangerment
during pressure
test
small
high
high
small
middle
Material
all plastics
ABS
PB, PE
all plastics
ABS
Informative value
High:
Proof of resistance
to pressure including tightness
against test medium
High:
Proof of resistance
against test medium
High:
Proof of resistance
against test medium
small
middle
* Please consider the applicable safety precautions

More information is available in DVS 2210-1 Suppl. 2.
A lot of international and national standards and guidelines are available for leak and pressure tests. Therefore often it is not easy to find the applicable test procedure or for example the test pressure.
The purpose of a pressure test is,
first to ensure the resistance to pressure of the
pipeline and
in addition to show the leaktightness against the test
media.
Usually the pressure test is done as a water pressure
test and only in exceptional cases (with consideration to
special safety precautions) as a gas pressure test with
air or nitrogen.
The following comparison should point outthe difference between water and air as a test medium:
Water is an incompressible medium, which means,
setting for example a 1mPVDF pipe d160 under
apressure of3 bar (44 psi) results in an energy of ca.
1 Joule.
In contrast air is a compressible medium; the same
pipe has with3 bar (44 psi) pressure an energy of already 5000 Joule.
If there were a failure during the pressure test, the waterfilled pipe would fly0.02 m (")"high",the airfilled
pipe110 m (361ft)! And this with a test pressure of
only3 bar (44 psi).
Fracture behaviour of thermoplastics
In case of failures thermoplasticmaterials show different
behaviours.PE and PB (to a lesser degree ABS) have a
ductile behaviour, that means brittle fracture cannot occur.
Nevertheless, the followingsafety precautionsmust be
taken into consideration during the internal pressure
test. As mentioned beforethe pressure test is the first
loading placed on the pipelineanduncover any existing
processing faults (e.g. insufficient welding).
226
Leak test
Remark: Gas leak tightnesscannot be demonstrated by

a water pressure test, also not with increased test pressure!
Internal pressure test with water or a similar incompressible test fluid

General
The internal pressure test is done when installation work

has been completed and necessitates an operational
pipeline or operational test sections. The test pressure
load should furnish experimental proof of operational
safety. The test pressure is not based on the working
pressure, but rather on the internal pressure load capacity, derived from the pipe wall thickness.
Supplement 2 of DVS 2210-1 forms the basis for the following information. This replaces the data in DVS 22101 entirely. The modifications became necessary because
the reference value nominal pressure (PN) is being
used less and less to determine the test pressure (1.5
x PN, or 1.3 x PN) and is being replaced by SDR,
a short-term overload or even a reduction in the service life can occur if in the course of the internal pressure test based on the nominal pressure the pipe wall
temperature TR = 20 C (68F)is exceeded by more
than 5 C.
Test pressures are therefore determined in relation to
SDR and the pipe wall temperature. The 100-h value
from the long-term behaviour diagram is used for the
test clamping.
Test Parameters
The following table indicates recommended methods of

testing the internal pressure.
Object
Pre-test
Main test
Test pressure pp
(depends on the pipe
wall temperature or
the permissible test
pressure of the builtin components, see
clause "Determining
the test pressure")
pp(perm)
0.85 pp(perm)
Test duration (deL 100 m: 3 h

pends on the length of 100 m<L 500
the pipeline, respecm: 6 h
tively the sections)
L 100 m: 3 h
100 m<L 500
m: 6 h
Checks during the

testing (test pressure
and temperature progression should be
recorded)
At least 2
checks, distributed over the test
duration without
restoring the test
pressure
At least 3
duration with
restoring the test
pressure
Pre-test
The pre-test serves to prepare the piping system for the
actual test (main test). In the course of pre-testing, a
tension-expansion equilibrium in relation to an increase
in volume will develop in the piping system. A material-related drop in pressure will occur which will require
repeated pumping to restore the test pressure and also frequently a re-tightening of the flange connection
screws.
The guidelines for an expansion-related pressure decrease in pipes are:
Filling the pipeline
Before starting with the internal pressure test, the following points must be checked:
Was installation done according to the available
plans?
All pressure relief devices and flap traps mounted in
the flow direction?
All end valves shut?
Valves in front of other devices are shut to protect
against pressure.
Visual inspection of all joints, pumps, measurement
devices and tanks.
Has the waiting period after the last fusion / cementing been observed?
Now the pipeline can be filled from the geodetic lowest
point. Special attention should be given to the air vent. If
possible, vents should be provided at all the high points
of the pipeline and these should be open when filling the
system. Flushing velocity should be at least 1 m/sec.
Reference values for the filling volume are given in the
table below.
DN
V (l/sec)
DN
V (l/sec)
80
0.15
250
2.0
100
0.3
300
3.0
150
0.7
400
6.0
200
1.5
500
>9.0
Material
Pressure drop
PVC-U
0.5 bar/h (7 psi/h)
PVC-C
0.5 bar/h (7 psi/h)
Adequate time should be allowed between filling and

testing the pipeline, so that the air contained in the piping system can escape via the vents: ca. 6 - 12 h, depending on the nominal diameter.
ABS
0.6 bar/h (9 psi/h)
PP
0.8 bar/h (12 psi/h)
Applying the test pressure
PE
PB
PVDF
The test pressure is applied according to the diagram.

Here it is important that the pressure increase rate does
not cause any water hammer !
Main test
In the context of the main test, a much smaller drop in
pressure can be expected at constant pipe wall temperatures so that it is not necessary to pump again.
The checks can focus primarily on leak detection at the
flange joints and any position changes of the pipe.
Observe if using compensators
If the pipeline to be tested contains compensators, this
has an influence on the expected axial forces of the
pipeline. Because the test pressure is higher than the
working pressure, the axial forces on the fixed points
become higher. This has to be taken into account when
designing the fixed points.
Observe if using valves
When using a valve at the end of a pipeline (end or final valve), the valve andthe pipe end should be closed
by a dummy flange or cap.This preventsinadvertent
opening of the valve or any pollution of the inside of the
valve.
test pressure in %
time for pressure increase in min
1)
pressure increase rate up to DN100
2)
range of pressure increase rates between DN100 - 400
3)
values for pressure increase rate DN500 and greater is: 500 /
DN [bar/10 min]
Determining the test pressure
The allowable test pressure is calculated according to

227
with
v(T, 100h) Long-term creep strength for the pipe wall temperature TR (at t = 100 h)
Sp Minimum safety factor for long-term creep strength
AG Processing or geometrical specific factor that reduces the allowable test pressure
TR Pipe wall temperature: average value of test medium
temperature and pipe surface temperature
NOTICE
Diaphragm valves, types 314-319
Don't overloaddiaphragm valves!
If the piping system contains diaphragm
valves the maximum allowable test pressure is limited to the nominal pressure.
Material
SpMinimum safety factor
ABS
1.6
PE80, PE100
1.25
PP-H
1.8
PP-R
1.4
PVC-U, PVC-C
2.5
PVDF
1.4
To make things easier, the permissible test pressures

can be taken directly from the following diagrams.
Definitions:
P = permissible test pressure in bar
T = pipe wall temperature in C
228
Checks during testing
The following measurement values must be recorded

consistently during testing:
Internal pressure at the absolute low point of the
pipeline
Medium and ambient temperature
Water volume input
Water volume output
Pressure drop rates
229
Internal pressure test and leak tightness

test of ABS pipelines with gas/air as test
fluid (compressible medium)
components with a lower PN than the rest of the piping

systems shall be considered. The test temperature shall
be between 10 to 30 C (50 to 86F).
Introduction
Usually the pressure test is done as a water pressure
test and only in exceptional cases (with consideration of
special safety precautions) as a gas pressure test with
air or nitrogen (please consider also the general chapter
"Introduction into pressure testing").
Only oil free air or inert gases such as nitrogen should

be used as the test medium. No refrigerant gases, such
as R22, may be used.
Safety precautions
WARNING
Compressible media like gas, air or nitrogen under internal pressure.
In case of failure danger to life during the
internal pressure testing by explosively exhaust of medium.
The area around the pipeline under test
pressure is to be clearly restricted for access only by persons assigned with the
testing.
Necessary control equipement is to be
placed at a safe distance.
The testing should be timed so that there
are as few persons as possible in the immediate area.
In particular at the entrances to the endangered area additional signs are to be set up
(Entry prohibited, Attention! Gas pressure
tests!). If necessary persons in neighbouring buildings are to be informed.
become higher. This has to be taken into account whendesigning the fixed points.
When using a valve at the end of a pipeline (end or final valve), the valve and the pipe end should be closed
valve.
Minimum waiting times for the internal pressure test
Before carrying out the pressure test, observe the minimum waiting times after the last cementing given in the
following table:
Ambient Temperature
Waiting time
10 to 30 C (50 to 86F)
min. 48 hours
Testing procedure of the internal pressure test

The test pressure shall be least 2 bar higher than the
operating pressure but with a maximum pressure of
nominal pressure PNof the installed piping system. Any
230
The pipelines must be free from any grease or paint.
Once the pressure in the system has stabilised hold the

pipeline under the test pressure for at least 15 minutes.
If a drop in pressure is observed and inspection of the
joints is necessary this can be done using a foam-building agent. Using a soap solution which can be removed
simply with water after the test is recommended.
NOTICE
Leak detection sprays
Commercial leak detection sprays can cause
stress cracks in plastics.
Using these sprays remove any residues
after testing.
Information:
For valves leak tightness using a gas is not representative of the valves leak tightness with a fluid. Therefore
if a GF valve shows a leakage under internal pressure
test with a gas it is recommended to reduce the pressure to 1.5 bar (22 psi) and re-inspect the valves.
Leak tightness test with gas/air
For checking the leak tightness shortly after installation
a test pressure of up to 1.5 bar (22 psi) with a minimum
waiting time of 3 hours applies.
Internal pressure test of compressed air

pipelines
Introduction
For practical reasons this testing is done with compressed air. The pressure test follows the DVGW G
469, up to length of pipelines with 500 m with the visible
procedure with air A3. More details are available in the
DVGW guideline.
Safety precautions
WARNING
Compressible media like compressed
air under internal pressure.
In case of failure danger to life during the
internal pressure testing by explosively exhaust of medium.
The area around the pipeline under test
pressure is to be clearly restricted for access only by persons assigned with the
testing.
Necessary control equipement is to be
placed at a safe distance.
The testing should be timed so that there
are as few persons as possible in the immediate area.
In particular at the entrances to the endangered area additional signs are to be set up
(Entry prohibited, Attention! Gas pressure
tests!). If necessary persons in neighbouring buildings are to be informed.
Leak test with gas as test fluid (compressible medium). Maximum test pressure 0.5
bar
If it is not possible to do an internal pressure test with
water (e.g. pipeline must be kept dry), a leak test can be
carried out with slight overpressure. For safety reasons
the test pressure must then be limited to maximum 0.5
bar overpressure.
For the leak test all the joints should be sprayed with
a foam-forming medium and subsequently checked. A
soap solution, which can be removed simply with water
after the test, is best.
NOTICE
after testing.
Since the efficiency of this leak test is very restricted
due to the low load, it should be used preferably for systems with working pressures under 0.5 bar.
Testing procedure
The test pressure shall be least 2 bar higher than the
operating pressure . Ifthis is not possible because of insufficient power of the compressor, then the maximum
compressor pressure shall be used.
The pipelines must be free from any grease or paint.
The test pressure is applied to the installed pipeline with
an increasing of pressure of maximum 3 bar/min (Risk
of water hammer!). Holding the pipeline under the test
pressure all connection parts of the pipeline like flanges,
unions, valves, etc. are inspected on tightness using a
foam building agent. A soap solution, which can be removed simply with water after the test, is best.
NOTICE
after testing.
It is recommended to reduce the test pressure to 2 bar,
and to repeat the test using a foam building agent.
231
Modifications, repairs, commissioning

Modifications and repairs
The following safety measures are to be observed when
modifying or repairing piping systems:
wear protective clothing

drain the respective pipeline section completely
rinse the pipe section
protect against dripping
clean and dry the joints
An important factor for the competent repair of piping

systems is to have the work carried out by trained professionals.
Modifications and repair work may not weaken the piping system mechanically.
To ensure the operational safety of the piping system
following a modification or a repair, an internal pressure
test should be done.
Commissioning
When putting a pipeline into operation for the first time,
besides the internal pressure test, temperature effects
are also generally examined. Thermal stress, i.e. expansion, was not simulated during testing.
We recommend an initial inspection at the earliest 3
days, at the latest 7 days, after commissioning and
recording the results.
The inspection checks should include:
critical points in the system (visual inspection)
flange joints, unions, valves (leak-proof)
safety and leak detection equipment (condition, function)
Continuous inspection of the piping system should be
done by operating personnel during their usual rounds
according to the operating instructions.
232
Jointing technology
Mechanical joints
-- Introduction
-- Flange joints
-- Adaptor unions joining plastic piping components
-- Adaptor unions between plastic and metal pipes (malleable iron union end)
-- Adaptor unions stainless steel / plastic
-- Adaptor unions between plastic and non-ferrous metal pipes (brass union end)
-- Adaptor and threaded fittings
-- Adaptor fittings for connecting plastic piping systems and metal threading
-- Hose connections on plastic piping systems
-- SYGEF Plus and PROGEF Natural sanitary adapter for standard TriClamp connections
Solvent cement jointing
-- Instructions for Tangit solvent cement jointing of PVC-U dimension d6 to d400

-- Instructions for Tangit solvent cement jointing of PVC-C dimension d16 to d225
-- Instructions for Dytex solvent cement jointing of PVC-U and PVC-C dimension d12 to d140
-- Instructions for Tangit solvent cement jointing of ABS dimension d20 to d315
-- Instructions for Tangit solvent cement jointing of COOL-FIT ABS Plus dimension d25 to d225
-- Retrofit of adapter fittings into an existing ABS, PVC-U or PVC-C pipeline
-- Cementing different pipe materials
-- Instructions for solvent cement jointing on video
Fusion jointing of PE
-- IR Plus fusion jointing of PE100 piping systems

-- Butt fusion jointing of PE piping systems
-- Socket fusion jointing of PE piping systems
-- Electrofusion
Fusion jointing of PP
-- IR Plus fusion jointing of PROGEF piping systems

-- BCF Plus fusion jointing of PROGEF Natural piping systems
-- Butt fusion jointing of PP piping systems
-- Socket fusion jointing of PP piping systems
Fusion jointing of PVDF
-- IR Plus fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems

-- BCF Plus fusion jointing of SYGEF PVDF piping systems
-- Butt fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems
-- Socket fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems
Page
234
235
242
243
243
244
244
245
245
246
247
252
256
259
264
269
270
270
271
272
275
279
281
282
284
287
291
292
294
297
233
Jointing technology
Adaptor fittings
Mechanical joints
Introduction
Of the many diverse solutions offered by GF in the way
of removable joints, the following is dedicated to the
conventional methods used in industrial piping systems
construction:
Flange connections
Plastic fittings with Adaptor fittings

Plastic fittings with
with internal or exrustproof re-inforce- external thread
ternal thread
(nipple)
ment ring A2 and
parallel or conical internal thread
Seal: PTFE tape, thread sealing cord , -paste, O-ring
Connection of:
Plastic - plastic (same or different materials)

Plastic - metal
Threaded fittings
Flange adapters
Flanges: PP-V,
PP-steel and PVC- for cementing and
socket fusion
U
Plastic fittings without reinforcement ring

and parallel respective conical internal
thread for connections
Flange adapters
for butt fusion
Seals: flat gasket, O-ring, profile ring, HP-gasket

Connection of:

Plastic - metal
Unions
Seal: PTFE tape, thread sealing cord , -paste

Connection of:

Hose connections
Seal: O-ring
Connection of (pressure) hoses to plastic piping systems
Connection of:
Connection of:
Plastic - Hose connection
Adaptor unions
Sanitary Adapter
TriClamp connection in ultrapure water
applications, e. g. in the life science sector
Seal: O-ring
Connection of:
Plastic - metal (Union end made of malleable iron)

Plastic - stainless steel (Union end made of stainless
steel)
Plastic - non-ferrous metal (Union end made of
brass)
234
Seal: PTFE
Connection of:
Plastic - plastic
Plastic stainless stell
Type of threads
The following different types of threads are used:
Designation of the According to
thread
standard
Typical use
Description
Rp
ISO 7-1
Adaptor and threaded fittings
Parallel internal pipe thread, where pressuretight joints are made on the threads
Rc
ISO 7-1
Not used at GF
Taper internal pipe thread, where pressuretight joints are made on the threads
ISO 7-1
Taper external pipe thread, where pressuretight joints are made on the threads
ISO 228-1
Unions
Parallel internal or external pipe thread,

where pressure-tight joints are not made on the
threads
NPT = National
(American Standard) Pipe Taper
ASTM F 1498
Taper internal or external pipe thread for plastic pipes and fittings, where pressure-tight joints
are made on the threads
Acme thread
Unions
Fastening thread for ABS, PVC-U and PVC-C

unions d75, d90, d110
Buttress thread
Unions
Fastening thread for PE, PP and PVDF unions

d75, d90, d110
Combination G and R thread

The combinationof an external parallel thread G, tolerance class A or B in accordance withEN ISO 228-1,
with an internal parallel thread Rp in accordance with
ISO 7-1 needs special consideration. When it is necessary to have this combination, the positive and negative
tolerance of the internal thread to ISO 7-1 must be considered in the relevant product standard, where external parallel threads G are used. Such a combination of
threads may not necessarily achieve a leak-tight joint.
NPT
A combination of thread R or Gwith NPT is not possible
because of the different pitch.
Flange joints
Creating flange joints
When making a flange connection, the following points

have to be taken into consideration:
There is a general difference between the connection of
plastic pipes and so-called adapter joints, which represent the transition from a plastic pipe to a metal pipe or
a metal valve. Seals and flanges should be selected accordingly.
Flanges with sufficient thermal and mechanical stability should be used. GF flange types fulfil these requirements.
Orientation of bolts outside
main axis.
Horizontal pipelines should have
the shown orientation of the
bolts in order to avoid in case
of leakage medium drop on the
bolts.
Information: Within the range of flexible sections and/

or expansion loops no flange connections shall be used,
because the bending load can lead to leakages.
Ensure centrically alignment of flange adaptor, flange
and the seal with pipe axis.
When inserting a seal between the flange connections,
the dimensions of the seal should be checked to make
sure they correspond to the outer and inner diameter
of the flange adapters. If the deviation between the inner diameter of the seal and the adapter is more than
10 mm, problems may arise with the flange connection.
Before pre-tightening the bolts, the jointing faces must
be flush and must sit closely on the seal. Pulling the
pipes together within the flange connection is to be
strictly avoided because of the tensile stress which results thereof.
The length of the bolts should be selected so that the
thread at the nut does not protrude more than 2 to 3
turns. A washer must be placed under the bolt head and
also under the nut.
To make sure that the connecting bolts can be easily removed after a lengthy period of use, the thread should
be coated with e. g. molybdenum sulphide.
Tighten the bolts diagonally and evenly first assemble the bolts and hand-tighten nut, so that the gasket
is perfectly in place and the flange adaptershave a
minimumoffset.Thentighten all the bolts diagonally up
to 50 % of the recommended torque, and afterwards to
100 % of the torque.
We recommendcheckingat a later timeand, if necessary, retightening24 hours after assembling.
After thepressure test, check andcinch if necessary.
For more informationon flange connections, seeDVS
2210-1 Suppl. 3.
235
Bolt tightening torque

The torque of the bolts in flange connections is of particular importance. We observe several different methods
in practice:
DVS 2210-1 Supplement 3, which are to be understood

as upper limit values. Of course our components of the
flange connection (adapters, flanges) are designed to
withstand these upper limit values.
As tight as possible: In time this will definitely overstrain a flange connection in plastic piping systems.
Dimensions of metric (ISO) flange connections.
By feel: This requires a good deal of experience and

material know-how.
Use of a torque wrench: This is the best method. We
have listed the recommended values below; however,
deviations can occur in practice. These can be caused
by the use of, for example, self-locking nuts or pipe axes which are not flush. The Shore hardness of the seal
can also influence the necessary torque force (see also
the following information concerning sealing materials).
Bolt tightening torque guidelines for metric
(ISO) flange connections with PP-V, PP- steel and
PVC flanges.
Pipe diameter d
Nominal
diameter
DN
Bolt tightening torque [Nm]
Flat gasket up
to max.
pressure
of 10 bar /
40 C
Profile
gasket
up to
max.
pressure
of 16 bar
O-ring up
to max.
pressure
of 16 bar
Pipe diameter d
Nominal
diameter
DN
Min. bolt
length
(calculated)
Max. bolt
length
(calculated)
Number
of screws
x thread
diameter
16
10
51
51
4 x M12
20
15
52
69
4 x M12
25
20
56
73
4 x M12
32
25
60
75
4 x M12
40
32
70
91
4 x M16
50
40
72
95
4 x M16
63
50
78
102
4 x M16
75
65
82
110
4 x M16
90
80
86
114
8 x M16
110, 125
100
89
119
8 x M16
140
125
101
137
8 x M16
160, 180
150
108
145
8 x M20
200, 225
200
130
167
8 x M20
250, 280
250
134
177
12 x M20
16
10
10
10
10
315
300
150
185
12 x M20
20
15
10
10
10
355
350
168
192
16 x M20
25
20
10
10
10
400
400
179
207
16 x M24
32
25
15
10
10
450, 500
500
249
253
20 x M24
40
32
20
15
15
560, 630
600
291
295
20 x M27
50
40
25
15
15
63
50
35
20
20
75
65
50
25
25
90
80
30
15
15
110, 125
100
35
20
20
140
125
45
25
25
160, 180
150
60
35
30
200, 225
200
70
45
35
250, 280
250
65
35
30
315
300
90
50
40
355
350
90
50
400
400
100
60
450, 500
500
190
70
560, 630
600
220
90
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1) Up to a maximum working pressure of 6 bar

Information: Please observe the special bolt tightening
torques given for DN250 and DN300 recommended for
butterfly valves, see clause "Fundamentals for butterfly
valves, hand operated".
The indicated torques are recommended by GF; with
these torques a sufficient tightness of the flange connection is ensured. They deviate from the data in the
236
The minimum and maximum bolt lengths are given only for orientation. They are depending from the type of
flanges and flange adaptors.
Exact values can be calculated from the information
shown in the following clause "Length of bolts".
Bolt tightening torque guidelines for ANSI flange

connections with PP-V, PP- steel and PVC flanges.
Nominal
diameterInch
Nominal
diameter DN
Bolt tightening torque [lb-ft]
Flat gasket up
to max. pressure of 10 bar /
40 C
Profile gasket up to max.

pressure of 16
bar
15
15
10
20
15
10
25
15
10
32
15
10
40
15
10
50
30
20
65
30
20
80
40
30
100
30
20
150
50
33
200
50
10
250
60
40
12
300
75
53
Instructions for usewith pictogram:
Socket systems
Butt fusion systems
V-groove (patented)
To distribute the forces evenly over the flange adapter
Supports a longer lasting torque for a safe joint
Gives the name to the flange
33
1)
1)
1) Up to a maximum working pressure of 6 bar
PP-V flanges
The PP-V flange shows the following properties:

Corrosion-free backing flange made of polypropylene
PP (30 % glass-fibre reinforced)
High chemical resistance (hydrolysis resistant)
Maximum break resistance (deforms if it gets tightened too strongly)
Suitable up to 80 C ambient temperature. Remark:
The temperature of the medium is restricted by the
material of the plastic piping system, i. e. ABS, PVCU, PVC-C, PP, PE.
For PVDF up to 140 C media temperature, the ambient temperature is limited to 40 C
UV-stabilised
PP-steel flanges
The PP-steel flange is a stiff and robust flange universally applicable. Its characteristics are as following:
Corrosion-free plastic flange made out of polypropylene PP-GF30 (glass-fibre reinforced) with steel inlay
High chemical resistance (esp. against hydrolysis)
The ambient temperature is max 80C
UV-stabilized
PVC flanges
PVC-Uflanges may also be used as long as the medium or the ambient temperature does not exceed the
temperature of 45 C.
At higher temperatures the flanges could distort with
time.
Flanges used at higher temperatures must therefore
have adequate thermal and mechanical stability. GF
PP-V-flanges and PP/steel-flanges satisfy these requirements.
Blanking flanges
The new blanking flange set is a combination of a backing flange and an end blank. The end blanks are available in PP-H and PE materials.
Integrated fixation aids for the bolts

Self-centering of the flanges on the flange adapters
Symmetric design allows double-sidedinstallation:
"wrong-side installation is not possible, all important
information is visible
237
The end blanks in the dimensions d63 to d315 are combined with the proven PP-V backing flange. The dimensions d355 to d630 are combined with a backing flange
made of PP-H with steel reinforcement.
3a. Thickness of the flat gasket
With the blanking flange set, the piping system is

closed off in the same material.
If the piping system is extended, the backing flange
can be used again, cutting down on additional costs.
Combined Jointing face flat and serrated, metric.
Suitable for pressure piping.
Easy mounting: The end blank is centered on the inner diameter of the backing flange.
3b. Thickness of the profile gasket
DN10 to DN80
ca. 2 mm
DN100 to DN600
ca. 3 mm
DN10 to DN40
ca.3 mm
DN50 to DN80
ca.4 mm
DN100 to DN125
ca. 5 mm
DN150 to DN300
ca. 6 mm
DN350 to DN600
ca. 7 mm
4. Flange thickness (Pitch circle PN10)
PP-V
PP-Steel
PVC-U
PVC-C
Blank
Flange
(PVC-U)
DN10
--
--
10 mm
--
DN15
16 mm
12 mm
11 mm
12 mm
DN20
17 mm
12 mm
12 mm
13 mm
DN25
18 mm
16 mm
14 mm
15 mm
DN32
20 mm
20 mm
15 mm
16 mm
DN40
22 mm
20 mm
16 mm
17 mm
In practice it is often difficult to specify the correct bolt

length for flange connections. It can be derived from the
following parameter:
Thickness of the washer (2x)
Thickness of the nut (1x)
Thickness of the seal (1x)
Flange thickness (2x)
Thickness of the flange adapter (2x)
Thickness of the valve, if applicable (1x)
DN50
24 mm
20 mm
18 mm
20 mm
DN65
26 mm
20 mm
19 mm
21 mm
DN80
27 mm
20 mm
20 mm
22 mm
DN100
28 mm
20 mm
22 mm
24 mm
DN125
30 mm
24 mm
26 mm
28 mm
DN150
32 mm
24 mm
28 mm
30 mm
DN200
34 mm
27 mm
32 mm
36 mm
DN250
38 mm
30 mm
36 mm
36 mm
The following tablesare useful in determining the necessary bolt length. Due to the various combinations of
the individual components, only thicknesses of the single parts of flange connections can be given. However
you simply add them together to determine the necessary bolt length.
DN300
42 mm
34 mm
36 mm
36 mm
DN350
46 mm
40 mm
38 mm
38 mm
DN400
50 mm
40 mm
42 mm
42 mm
DN500
--
54 mm
--
--
DN600
--
64 mm
--
--
Length of bolts
Remark: According toDVS 2210-1 you should determine the necessary bolt length in order to ensure 2-3
screw turns.
1. Thickness of the washer
DN10to DN25
3 mm
DN32 to DN600
4 mm
2. Thickness of the nut (= nut height)

DN10to
DN25
M 12
SW 19
(18)
1.7 mm
pitch
10.4 mm nut
height
DN32to
DN125
M 16
SW 24
2.0 mm
pitch
14.1 mm nut
height
DN150 to
DN350
M 20
SW 30
2.5 mm
pitch
16.9 mm nut
height
DN400 to
DN500
M 24
SW 36
3.0 mm
pitch
20.2 mm nut
height
DN600
M 27
SW 41
3.0 mm
pitch
23.8 mm nut
height
238
5a. Thickness of the metric flange adapter for socket systems, flat or profile gasket
ABS
PVC-C
PVC-U
PP
PE
PVDF
d16/DN10
6 mm
--
--
d20/DN15
6 mm
7 mm
6 mm
d25/DN20
7 mm
9 mm
7 mm
d32/DN25
7 mm
10 mm
7 mm
d40/DN32
8 mm
11 mm
8 mm
d50/DN40
8 mm
12 mm
8 mm
d63/DN50
9 mm
14 mm
9 mm
d75/DN65
10 mm
16 mm
--
d90/DN80
11 mm
17 mm
--
d110/DN100
12 mm
18 mm
--
d125/DN100
13 mm
--
--
d140/DN125
14 mm
--
--
d160/DN150
16 mm
--
--
d200/DN200
24 mm
--
--
d225/DN200
25 mm
--
--
d250/DN250
23 mm
--
--
d280/DN250
23 mm
--
--
d315/DN300
27 mm
--
--
d355/DN350
32 mm
--
--
d400/DN400
34 mm
--
--
5b. Thickness of the metric flange adapter for socket systems, O-ring
PVC-C
PVC-U
PP
PE
PVDF
d16/DN10
9 mm
--
--
d20/DN15
9 mm
9 mm
9 mm
d25/DN20
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
d32/DN25
10 mm
10 mm
10 mm
d40/DN32
13 mm
13 mm
13 mm
d50/DN40
13 mm
13 mm
13 mm
d63/DN50
14 mm
14 mm
14 mm
d75/DN65
15 mm
15 mm
--
d90/DN80
16 mm
16 mm
--
d110/DN100
18 mm
18 mm
--
d125/DN100
19 mm
--
--
d140/DN125
20 mm
--
--
d160/DN150
22 mm
--
--
d200/DN200
30 mm
--
--
d225/DN200
31 mm
--
--
d250/DN250
23 mm
--
--
d280/DN250
30 mm
--
--
d315/DN300
35 mm
--
--
d355/DN350
--
--
--
d400/DN400
--
--
--
5c. Thickness of the metric flange adapter for butt

fusion systems, flat or profile gasket
PP
PE
SDR11
PP
PE
SDR17
PVDF
SDR33
SDR21
d16/DN10
--
--
--
d20/DN15
7 mm
--
6 mm
d25/DN20
9 mm
--
7 mm
d32/DN25
10 mm
--
7 mm
d40/DN32
11 mm
--
8 mm
d50/DN40
12 mm
12 mm
8 mm
d63/DN50
14 mm
14 mm
9 mm
d75/DN65
16 mm
16 mm
10 mm
d90/DN80
17 mm
17 mm
12 mm
d110/DN100
18 mm
18 mm
13 mm
d125/DN100
25 mm
25 mm
14 mm
d140/DN125
25 mm
25mm
16 mm
d160/DN150
25 mm
25 mm
17 mm
d180/DN150
30 mm
30mm
--
d200/DN200
32 mm
32 mm
22 mm
d225/DN200
32 mm
32 mm
22 mm
d250/DN250
35 mm
25 mm
22 mm
d280/DN250
35 mm
25 mm
22 mm
d315/DN300
35 mm
35 mm
24 mm
d355/DN350
40 mm
30 mm
30 mm
d400/DN400
46 mm
33 mm
32 mm
d450/DN500
60 mm
60 mm
--
d500/DN500
60 mm
60mm
--
d560/DN600
60 mm
60 mm
--
d630/DN600
60 mm
60 mm
--
239
6. Thickness of valves installed between flange

adapters
Butterfly valve,
type 567/
568
Butterfly valve,
type 367
Butterfly valve,
type 037/
038
Wafer
check
valve,
type 369
DN32
--
--
--
15 mm
DN40
--
--
--
16 mm
DN50
45 mm
--
43 mm
18 mm
DN65
46 mm
46 mm
46 mm
20 mm
DN80
49 mm
49 mm
46 mm
20 mm
DN100
56 mm
56 mm
52 mm
23 mm
DN125
64 mm
64 mm
56 mm
23 mm
DN150
72 mm
70 mm
56 mm
26 mm
DN200
73 mm
71 mm
60 mm
35 mm
DN250
113 mm
76 mm
68 mm
40 mm
DN300
113 mm
83 mm
78 mm
DN350
129 mm
--
DN400
169 mm
DN450
The stabilised profile flangegasket as well as O-ring

gaskets have the following advantages:
Reliable seal with little screw torque
Can be used with higher internal pressure and internal
vacuum
Easy to install
Influenced less by the flange surface
Safe when connecting pipes of different materials.
Selection of suitable seals, related to the form, can be
done with the table below.
Seal form
Recommended limits
Flange version
Flat gasket
P = 1 to 10 bar,
above DN200 only to
6 bar
T to 40 C
With sealing grooves
45 mm
Profile flange- P =0 *)to 16 bar

gasket
T= whole application
range
With or without sealing grooves
--
--
O-ring
With groove
--
--
--
179 mm
--
--
--
DN500
190 mm
--
--
--
DN600
209 mm
--
--
--
Selection of the seals for flange connections
With consideration to the operating conditions and the

sealing forces, the selection of suitable flange seals in
thermoplastic piping systems depends on the following
factors:
Form
Dimension
Material
Form of the seal
Flat gasket
Gasket with profile
O-ring
In applications with low working pressures the customary flat gasket, which is made of 2 to 5 mm thick sheet
material (depending on the nominal diameter), is used.
For flange connections with flat gaskets, flanges which
are sturdy enough to withstand the higher torque required for fastening the bolts in such connections are
necessary. Allflanges from GF meet these requirements.
For increased working and testing pressures, the profile flange gasketsand O-rings have proved useful.
Compared to the flat gasket, the profile flangegasket is
made of two components. One is the crowned flat gasket part which is reinforced with steel, and the other is
the profiled part (O-ring, lip seal) on the seal inner side.
240
P =0 *) to 16 bar
T= whole application
range
*) 0 bar absolute vacuum
Seal material
The choice of a seal material is based on the flow media. Details on the suitability of the seal material, or
specifically the chemical resistance, can be found in our
resistance tables.
The use of seal materials with a high degree of hardness, e. g. as in steel pipes, is restricted in thermoplastic piping systems because the flange or the adapter
could become deformed under the great sealing forces.
Elastomer materials, such as EPDM, CSM or FPM, with
a Shore-A-hardness up to 75 are preferable.
Dimensions of the seal
The dimensions of the seal are determined in the general standards for pipe jointing components. Too big divergences in the inner or outer diameter of the seal as
compared to the flange adapter can lead to increased
mechanical stress of the flange connection, to accelerated wear of the inner side of the seal as well as deposits inside the pipe.
One gasket for everything
GF Piping Systems makes it easy for you to find the
right gasket. Our new standardized gasket is ideal for
both butt fusion and socket fusion systems alike. It no
longer makes any difference what SDR your piping system has. Save time in selecting the right gasket. Avoid
mistakes and stock less variations. Everything has become much easier. The new standardized gasket, available as profile flange gasket or flat gasket, always puts
you on the safe side.
All it takes are three simple steps

Select the gasket type
Select the dimension
Select the material
241
Adaptor unions joining plastic piping components

Wherever available, unions are the preferred choice
over flange adapters for the connection of plastic pipes.
With no metal parts, there is no corrosion and the
weight is also reduced. In addition, the smaller outer diameter means the distance from pipe axis to pipe axis is
smaller compared to a flange connection.
Socket fusion union PVDF Standard
Unions are available in several materials:

Solvent cement connections PVC-U PRO-FIT with
solvent cement socket/spigot
Solvent cement connections ABS, PVC-U, PVC-C

with solvent cement sockets
General remarks for installation

To prevent unwanted stress during installation, unions
with round seal rings should be used wherever possible.
The union nut should be tightened by hand. The pipe
wrenches customarily used in steel pipe construction
are not permissible. For bigger sizes, a pipe wrench
with belt can be used.
Using unions take care of a low stress installation.
Socket fusion union PP
Within the range of flexible sections and/or expansion

loops no screw connections shall be used, because the
bending load can lead to leakages.
Tip: To make installation of the union easier, wet
the union nut.
Butt fusion union PP
Butt fusion union PP Natural
Butt fusion union PE 100
Socket fusion union on request

Butt fusion union PVDF Standard
242
Installation tips for PP, PE, PVDF unions, d75, d90

and d110
The newest generation of plastic unions in the above
mentioned materials and dimensions has been
equipped with a modern, plastics-oriented buttress
thread, which means you now have a product with considerably increased nominal pressure and safety reserves. The butt fusion versions are also new. Several
points must be observed in this respect.
The thread on coupling nut and union bush in PP,
PVDF and PE have been reworked!
When using single parts, please check prior to mounting
whether the thread of the union bush and coupling nut
can be screwed together.
Union bush with trapezoidal thread on coupling nut
with trapezoidal thread, or
Union bush with buttress thread on coupling nut with
buttress thread
Fusion bead at unions for butt fusion
For the dimensions d90 and d110 we advise fusing the
complete union, if possible (or slide the union nut to the
collar of the union end) because after fusion the union
nut cannot be slid over the fusion bead.
Only use union bushes and union ends with the
same nominal diameter.
A butt fusion union bush d75 may not be combined with
a butt fusion union end d90 to form a reducer because
this can cause leakage, as illustrated.
Adapter union with tapered external

pipe thread R
Galvanized malleable iron PVCU, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement
socket
1
Union nut
Pipe
Union end
Union bush
Union nut d75
Insufficient seal
Butt fusion union end d90
Butt fusion union bush d75
Adapter union with parallel internal

pipe thread Rp
Galvanized malleable iron PVCU, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement
socket
pipe thread R
Galvanized malleable iron PP with
fusion socket
Unions for adapter connections with different plastics

The component parts of the butt fusion union in PE, PP,
PVDF (d20 - d63) can be combined with each other as
well as with the PVC or ABS union.
Adapter union with parallel internal

pipe thread Rp
Galvanized malleable iron PP with
fusion socket
For larger dimensions (d75-d110) this is not possible.

The union bush and union nut must be made of the
same material, the valve end can be taken in another
material.
Other combinations of materials available on request.

Note: To prevent electrochemical corrosion, malleable
iron connecting elements should preferably be used for
steel transitions and brass connecting elements for transitions to non-ferrous metals.
Adaptor unions stainless steel / plastic
ABS/ Stainless Steel PVC-U/ Stainless

R
Steel Rp
Adaptor unions between plastic and metal

pipes (malleable iron union end)
The GF line of fittings contains various adapter and
threaded fittings. For the connection of plastic piping components to metal pipes, fittings or valves with
threaded connections, adapter unions with metal connections are preferred.
The seal in the metal thread can either be made with
hemp or a PTFE tape.
These adapter unions with EPDMor FPM O-rings are
available for the following plastics:
PVC-U/ Stainless
Steel Welding end
PVC-C/ Stainless
Steel R
The adapter unions from stainless steel to the plastics

ABS, PVC-C and PVC-U (additional plastics can be
combined from the standard single parts) can be used
in the following markets:
Chemical industry
Food industry
Automobile industry
Swimming pool construction
Metal surface finishing technology
Refrigeration and air-conditioning
Product features
Plastics-specific sealing of the transition is ensured by
an O-ring gasket in the materials EPDM or FPM. The
stainless steel from which the union ends are made (also the cap nuts in the fusion version) is an austenitic
steel with molybdenum admixture (V4A), which provides
high resistance to pitting. This alloy is also resistant to
rust and acid and is therefore highly suitable for industri243
al applications and for use in aggressive environments.

The low carbon content and resulting good fusibility are
further advantages of this material. The plastic/stainless
steel union adapter is available in the three alternative
connections internal thread, external thread and fusion
end, in each case in the dimensions d16-3/8" to d63-2".
Adaptor unions between plastic and nonferrous metal pipes (brass union end)
To connect plastic piping components to pipes, fittings
or valves made of non-ferrous metals with threaded
connections, adapter unions with brass connectors
should preferably be used.
The seal in the brass thread can be made either with
hemp or PTFE tape.
These adapter unions with EPDM and FPM O-rings are
available for the following plastics:
pipe thread R
Brass PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement socket
Adapter union with parallel internal pipe
thread Rp
Brass PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement socket
Attention: Metal pipes may only be screwed into

transition fittings with a reinforcement ring!
Adaptor fittings with tapered external pipe thread R

(nipple)
Adaptor fittings with tapered external pipe thread R (nipple) with exception of double nipple make it possible to
connect both plastic and metal pipes as well as plastic
pipes with one another.
Adapter union with union end made of

red bronze for soldering ABS with
solvent cement socket
pipe thread R
Brass PP with fusion socket
Adapter union with parallel internal pipe
thread Rp
Brass PP with fusion socket
Always mind the detailed information given for the individual products in the respective product range.
Threaded fittings (without reinforcement ring) with
parallel internal thread Rp
Threaded fittings (without reinforcement ring) in the
materials ABS, PVC-U and PVDF with parallel internal
thread Rp make it possible to connect plastic pipes with
one another. Some examples of such threaded fittings
can be found in the following:
Other plastics on request.

Note: To prevent electrochemical corrosion, brass connecting elements should be used for transitions to nonferrous metals and malleable iron connecting elements
for steel transitions.

Adaptor fittings with rustproof reinforcement ring
A2 and parallel internal pipe thread Rp
Adaptor fittings with rustproof reinforcement ring A2
and parallel internal pipe thread Rp make it possible to
connect both plastic and metal pipes as well as plastic
pipes with one another. A few examples of such adaptor
fittings can be found in the following:
244
Installation tips for adaptor and threaded fittings

It is especially important that the pipe installation is lowstress. Adaptor or threadedfittings should be avoided at
points in the piping system which are subjected to bending stress.
In case of large cyclic temperature changes adaptor

unions are the preferable choice.
Attention: To avoid damages at plastics fittings
remove any flash (if present) in the area of the
metal thread.
Primarily adaptor and threaded fittings are tightening

by hand. Never use force when installing plastic fittings.
Using a suitable tool the fittings are tightening further
until 1 - 2 thread pitches are visible.
For plastic adaptor and threaded fittings, we recommend using PTFE tape (e. g. Teflon) for sealing. Alternatively also thread sealing cord Henkel Tangit UniLock or Loctite 55 and/or thread sealing paste Loctite
5331 can be used. Please consider the appropriate installation guidelines of the manufacturer.
If other sealing materials are used, compatibility with the
plastics to be used must be checked first.
Attention: Do not use hemp! In using hemp there
is a risk of overloading the plastic fittings or damaging the thread. Also, depending on themedium
used, hemp is not resistance against chemicals.
Adaptor fittings for connecting plastic piping systems and metal threading
PVC-U/ Stainless Steel R
ABS/ Brass R
ABS/ Brass Rp
PVC-U/ Stainless SteelRp
The adaptor fittings for connecting plastic piping systems and metal threading offer greatest possible flexibility for installation with the combined socket/spigot on
the plastic end. The metal thread can be sealed either
with hemp or PTFE-tape.
The adaptor fitting is sealed with an EPDM O-ring. It
serves also as protection against distrotion to avoid
damaging the plastic during installation. Compared to
the usual adaptor unions the special connecting technology with snap ring guarantees increased leaktightness also while temperature change and during vibration.
In addition to the classic transition to metal pipes this fittings can also be used for connecting pressure gauges.
Note: To avoid electrochemical corrosion in transitions to non-ferrous metals, brass connections must be
used.
Hose connections on plastic piping systems
PVC-U pipes
Hose nozzle with solvent cement spigot and tapered
hose spigot
GF has a wide range of products for hose connections

to plastic piping systems
Information: For fixing the hose on the spigot, please
use suitable hose clips.
245
Pressure-hose nozzle with solvent cement spigot and

parallel hose spigot
Pressure-hose nozzle with tapered external pipe thread

R and parallel hose spigot
ABS and PVC-C pipes

Pressure-hose nozzle with solvent cement spigot and
parallel hose spigot.
PE and PP pipes
Pressure-hose nozzle with socket or butt fusion spigot
and parallel hose spigot
PVDF pipes
Pressure-hose nozzle with
BCF, IR, socket or butt fusion spigot and parallel
hose spigot
Flare transition fitting with

BCF, IR or butt fusion spigot to connect PFA (inch)
hoses
SYGEF Plus and PROGEF Natural sanitary adapter for standard TriClamp connections
Clamp connections form part of the group of longitudinal
interference fit, detachable adapter connections and are
primarily used for pure water and production piping systems in pharmaceutical, biotechnology, food and cosmetic industries. A special characteristic of the TriClamp
connection is the simple, rapid and low-cost installation.
This characteristic makes a connection of this kind particularly suitable for the following fields of application:
Connection of pipelines to assemblies, machines,
equipment
Connection of sensors
Connection of tapping points
Fitting of subassemblies subject to faults
246
Use of the SYGEF Plus and PROGEF Natural Sanitary Adapter provides an aseptic plastic/stainless steel
connection.
Solvent cement jointing

Instructions for Tangit solvent cement
jointing of PVC-U dimension d6 to d400
General
Solvent cement jointing calls for adequate technical

know-how, which can be acquired in the appropriate
training courses. Your GF representative will gladly
provide you with information about training possibilities.
NOTICE
Chemical resistance
Selecting applicable solvent cement
Please consider the appropriate recommendations in the chapter "Chemical Resistance" to the use of Tangit and/or Dytex.
Dimensions and tolerances
The dimensions of GF pipes, fittings and valves conform generally to the various national standards as well
as to ISO 727-1 concerning dimensions of sockets. Our
fittings and valves can be used with any PVC-U pipes
whose outside diameter tolerance conforms to ISO
11922-1.
According to ISO 727-1 the minimal cement lengths are
as shown in the table:
Pipe outside diameter / Socket inside diameter
d (mm)
Minimal cement
length
L (mm)
6
8
10
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
200
225
250
280
315
350
400
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.5
22.0
26.0
31.0
37.5
43.5
51.0
61.0
68.5
76.0
86.0
106.0
118.5
131.0
146.0
163.5
183.5
206.0
Recommendation for solvent cement jointing of

PVC-U fittings of dimensions 250 - 400 mm
PVC-U solvent cement fittings d250to d280 from GF
are designed and tested for a nominal pressure of PN10
(10 bar). The dimensions d315 to d400 are designed
and tested for a nominal pressure of PN6 (6 bar).
Our experience and tests reveal that pipes above d315

can be slightly oval, which can produce a heightened
cementing gap. GF therefore recommends that pipes
from dimensions d315 should be operated at max. 6 bar
working pressure.
Please also note the special remarks for dimensions
250 - 400 in the following jointing instructions.
Tools and equipment

Pipe cutter
Type KRA
d10 - 63
d50 - 110
d110 - 160
790 109 001

790 109 002
790 109 003
790 202 001
790 109 600
Pipe cutter type

KS 355
Pipe cutter type
KS 1600
230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Chamfering tool
d16-75
799 495 145
d32-200
799 495 146
Cleaner
1 litre tin
799 298 010
Tangit PVC-U solvent cement
0.125 kg tin
0.25 kg tin
0.50 kg tin
1.0 kg tin
799 298 000

799 298 001
799 298 002
799 298 003
Brush sizes
Pipe outside diameter in mm
Brush
6-10
Round brush 4 mm
799 299 001
12-32
Round brush 8 mm
799 299 002
40-63
Flat brush 1"

25 x 3 mm
799 299 003
75-225
Flat brush 2"

50 x 5 mm
799 299 004
250-400
Flat brush 3"

75 x 6 mm
799 299 005
Tin lid
799 298 028
White absorbent
paper
commercially available
Solvent resistant commercially available

protecting gloves,
Safety glasses
Solvent cementing equipment
247
PVC-U Tangit and cleaner: Amounts required
Note: The quantities specified above are to be understood as practice-orientated maximum values. In principle the quantities depend on gap dimensions, temperatures, working technique.
Pipe diameter
d (mm)
PVC-U Tangit
amount per 100
joints
(kg)
PVC-U Tangit
number of joints
per tin 1 kg
16
0.4
250
20
0.5
200
25
0.6
166
32
0.8
125
40
1.1
91
50
1.5
72
63
1.7
59
75
2.2
45
90
4.0
25
110
8.0
12
140
13.0
160
19.0
200
24.0
225
26.0
3.5
250
31.0
280
38.0
2.5
315
52.0
355
62.0
1.6
400
75.0
1.2
Pipe diameter
d (mm)
Tangit cleaner
amount per 100
joints
(litre)
Tangit cleaner
number of joints
per tin 1 litre
16
0.2
500
20
0.3
333
Marking the jointing length
25
0.4
250
32
0.5
200
40
0.7
143
50
0.9
111
Wipe the outside of the pipe and the inside of the socket with a clean cloth to remove obvious dirt. Marking
the jointing length on the pipe end makes it possible to
check afterwards whether the pipe has been inserted to
the full extent of the socket.
63
1.1
91
75
1.3
77
90
1.4
71
110
1.7
59
140
2.1
48
160
2.5
40
200
3.5
29
225
4.5
22
250
5.5
18
280
6.5
15
315
10.2
10
355
14.0
400
18.0
248
Preparations
Cutting the pipe to length
Chamfering the pipe
The pipe must be cut off at right angles. Remove the inside edges and chamfer the outside ones as illustrated
in the sketch. Only then is an optimal solvent cemented
joint possible.
Important: Well-chamfered pipe ends prevent the layer of cement from being removed as the pipe is inserted
into the fitting.
Pipe outside di- b
ameter mm
6 - 16 mm
20 - 50 mm
63 - 225 mm
250 - 400 mm
1 - 2 mm
2 - 3 mm
3 - 6 mm
6 - 8 mm
Note: If the outside diameter of the pipe and the inside

diameter of the socket are at opposite extremes of their
tolerances, then the pipe cannot be inserted dry into the
fitting socket. This will only become possible once the
cement has been applied.
Checking the cement
The Tangit PVC-U cement is supplied ready for use. Stir

thoroughly before using! Cement of the correct consistency will run evenly from a wooden spatula held at a
slant. Cement which no longer runs smoothly is unusable. The cement must not be thinned.
For more information please consult the safety
datasheets under the following link:
www.sdb.henkel.de/index.cfm
Cement and cleaner should be stored in a cool, dry
place (535 C)! Under these conditions the cement and
cleaner are durable for 24 months starting from the date
of filling (imprinted on the tin).
Cementing
Clean the outside of the pipe end and the inside of the
socket thoroughly with Tangit cleaner and absorbent
paper. Use a fresh piece of paper for each component.
Remove any condensation which may have formed on
the parts.
Important: Pipe end and fitting socket must be dry and
free from grease and dirt and must not be touched after
cleaning.
Cleaning the pipe and socket
PVC-U pipes may have a waxy surface. To ensure

proper jointing in such a case the cleaning process must
be repeated until the pipe surface becomes matt to the
eye.
For the range of dimensions d250 - 400, mechanical
machining of the pipe surface can be necessary in individual cases. An indication of inadequate jointing quality, which could be expected, is absence of or insufficient adhesion of the jointing parts following fine cleaning ("finger-nail check"). The jointing surfaces should
then be roughened evenly with emery cloth of grain 80
or finer, observing the max. permitted gap.
PVC-U pipes should be cemented at temperatures between 5 C and 40 C. Take the following protective
measures if the temperatures deviate from the above:
At lower temperatures, condensation or frost which may
have formed must be removed, e. g. with warm air. Cement and cleaner should be stored at room temperature.
Avoid uneven overheating ( shorten the opening time)
when cementing at higher temperatures by protecting
the jointing area from direct sunlight.
Temperature in C, F
Opening time [sec]
Remark: When usingTangit Express the opening time

isshortened at 20 Cto 1 minute and at 40 Cto 30
seconds. Therefore the maximum dimension is limited
to 110 mm.
Applying the cement
Begin by applying a normal layer of cement to the fitting

socket and then a thicker one to the pipe end with firm
brush pressure. Work in well. The brush strokes should
always be in an axial direction.
To ensure that both jointing surfaces are completely
covered with a smooth, even layer of cement, the brush
should be generously loaded with cement.
Range of dimensions up to d75
Apply cement
The cement joints can be produced by one person.
Jointing
After the cement has been applied, insert the pipe to
the full depth of the socket immediately without twisting
and bring them into the correct alignment. Ensure that
the outlet of the fitting is in the correct position. Hold
them briefly in this position to allow the cement to set.
Waiting time between cementing
Wait at least 5 minutes before the next joint, extend
the waiting time at temperatures under 10 C to 15
minutes.
The quick curing time of the cement necessitates that

the joint is made within the opening time after application of the cement has started. The opening time of the
PVC-U cement varies with the ambient temperature and
the thicknessof the cement applied:
249
Range of dimensions d90 to d225

Apply cement
The fitting socket and end of pipe should be coated
with cement simultaneously by two persons, otherwise
the opening time of the cement cannot be observed.
Jointing
the waiting time at temperatures under 10 C to 15
minutes.
Range of dimensions d250 to d400
Apply cement
Deviating from the usual method of application, pour
the cement directly from the tin onto the middle of the
cementing surface and distribute first radially and then
axially all over with a flat brush. Make sure that the cement layer is consistent and covers the entire surface
as appropriate for the larger tolerances.
Apply a thinner layer of Tangit in the fitting than on the
pipe ends. The cementing of pipe work in this range
of dimensions should be carried out by at least 2 persons. The minimum thickness of the cement layer for
fittings is 1 mm, apply more generously on the pipe
ends.
Jointing
After applying the cement, the pipe and fitting should
be slowly pushed together to the stop or the mark without twisting by 3-4 persons and aligned. Ensure that
the outlet end of the fitting is in the correct position.
Hold the joint in this position for 1 minute.
A waiting time of 15 minutes should be observed before further jointing; this time should be increased to 30
minutes at temperatures below 10 C.
Replace the lid of the cement tin during work breaks
Remove any surplus cement immediately, using absorbent paper.

A bead of excess solvent cement around the complete
external circumference of the joint and a slightly smaller
bead again around the complete internal circumference
show that the joint has been performed correctly.
250
After use, clean the brush of excess cement with dry absorbent paper and then clean thoroughly using TANGIT
cleaner. Brushes must be dry before being re-used
(shake out).
Replace the lid of the cement tin after use to prevent the
solvent evaporating. Using the conical lid allowsleaving
the brush in the cement tin during breaks.
Both solvent cement and cleaner dissolve PVC-U. Pipes
and fittings must thereforenotbe laid on or allowed to
come into contact with spilled cement or paper containing cement residues.
Do not close off cement pipelines during the drying process. This is particularly important at temperatures below + 5 C, when there is otherwise a danger of damaging the material.
After the drying process (see waiting times in the following table) the pipelines can be filled. To remove extant
solvent vapour, it is recommended to flush the pipeline
before use.
For pipes that are not put into immediate use, it is recommended, after careful cleaning, to fill them with water
and flush regularly.
Do not use compressed air for flushing.
Drying period and pressure testing
The dryingperiod of the cement before application of

the test or working pressure depends on the drying temperature, the dimension and the fit conditions.
Thewaiting timesrequired between completing the last
joint and the pressure test are specified in the following
table.
If the pipe is only subjected to the operating pressure,
e. g. after adaptation or repair work, the following rule of
thumb for the dryingwaiting timeapplies:
1 hour waiting time per bar operating pressure.
For temperatures above 20 C the test pressure must
be reduced according to the requirements given in the
chapter "Final testing and commissioning".
Remark: When usingTangit Express (only up to d110)
the waiting time is shortened to 12 hours,or 1/4-hour
waiting time per bar operating pressure.
Dimension
Nominal pressure
(PN) of fitting 20 C,
water
Max. working pressure 20 C, water
up to d225
PN10 or PN16
10 or 16 bar
d250
PN10
10 bar
d280
PN10
10 bar
d315
PN6
6 bar
d350
PN6
6 bar
d400
PN6
6 bar
Dimension
Max. test pressure

20 C, water
Waiting time after

last cementing until
test
up to d225
15 or 21 bar
15 or 24 h
d250
15 bar
d280
15 bar
d315
9 bar
24 h
d350
9 bar
d400
9 bar
Safety precautions
Tangit cement and Tangit cleaner contain highly volatile

solvents. This makes good ventilation or adequate fume
extraction essential in closed spaces. Since the solvent
fumes are heavier than air, extraction must occur at
floor level, or at least below the working level. Place paper which has been used for cleaning or for the removal
of surplus cement into closed containers to minimise the
amount of solvent fumes in the air.
Cement and cleaner are inflammable. Extinguish open
fires before commencing work. Switch off unprotected
electrical apparatus, electric heaters, etc. Avoid static
charge. Do not smoke! Discontinue any welding operations. Furthermore, observe all instructions issued by
the solvent cement manufacturer (e. g. label of the tin
and any supplementary documentation).
Protect pipes and fittings from spilled solvent cement,
cleaner and absorbent paper which has been used to
wipe off cement. Do not dispose of surplus solvent cement or cleaner in drainage systems.
The use of protective gloves is recommended to avoid
contact with skin. If the cement or the cleaner get in
contact with eyes, rinse immediately with water. Consult
a doctor! Immediately change clothes that have solvent
cement on them.
Always obey the safety regulations issued by the authorities responsible.
Adequate ventilation of the

workplace
No open flames when cementing. No smoking.
251

jointing of PVC-C dimension d16 to d225
General

NOTICE
Chemicale resistance
Selecting applicable solvent cement
Please consider the appropriate recomenations in the chapter "Chemicale Resistance" to the use of Tangit and/or Dytex.
Dimensions and tolerances
The dimensions of GF pipes, fittings and valves conform generally to the various national standards as well
as to ISO 727-1 concerning dimensions of sockets. Our
fittings and valves can be used with any PVC-C pipes
whose outside diameter tolerance conforms to ISO
11922-1.
According to ISO 727-1 the following minimal cement
lengths are as shown in the table:
Pipe outside diameter Socket inside diameter
d (mm)
Minimal cement length

L (mm)
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
200
225
13.0
15.0
17.5
21.0
25.0
30.0
36.5
42.5
50.0
60.0
67.5
75.0
85.0
105.0
117.5
The following instructions for cementing of piping components made from PVC-C is based on the guideline
DVS 2204-5.
252
Tools and equipment

Pipe cutter
Type KRA
d10 - 63
d50 - 110
d110 - 160
790 109 001

790 109 002
790 109 003
Pipe cutter type

KS 355
230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
790 202 001
Chamfering tool
d16-75
799 495 145
d32-200
799 495 146
Cleaner
1 litre tin
799 298 010
Tangit PVC-C solvent cement
0.70 kg tin
799 298 027
Brush sizes
Brush
16-32
Round brush 8 mm
799 299 002
40-63
Flat brush 1"

25 x 3 mm
799 299 003
75-225
Flat brush 2"

50 x 5 mm
799 299 004
Tin lid
799 298 028
White absorbent
paper

protecting gloves,
Safety glasses
PVC-C Tangit and cleaner: Amounts required

Pipe diameter
d (mm)
PVC-C Tangit
amount per 100
joints
(kg)
PVC-C Tangit
number of joints
per tin 1 kg
16
0.4
250
20
0.5
200
25
0.6
166
32
0.8
125
40
1.1
91
50
1.5
72
63
1.7
59
75
2.2
45
90
4.0
25
110
8.0
12
140
13.0
160
19.0
200
24.0
225
26.0
3.5
Pipe diameter
d (mm)
Tangit cleaner
amount per 100
joints
(litre)
Tangit cleaner
number of joints
per tin 1 litre
16
0.2
500
20
0.3
333
25
0.4
250
32
0.5
200
40
0.7
143
50
0.9
111
63
1.1
91
75
1.3
77
90
1.4
71
110
1.7
59
140
2.1
48
160
2.5
40
200
3.5
29
225
4.5
22
Preparations
joint possible.
into the fitting.
Pipe outside
diameter mm
16 mm
20 - 50 mm
63 mm
1 - 2 mm
2 - 3 mm
3 - 6 mm
Checking the cement
The Tangit PVC-C cement is supplied ready for use. Stir

Chamfering the pipe

place (5 35 C)! Under these conditions the cement
and cleaner are durable for24 months starting from the
date of filling (imprinted on the tin).
253
Cementing
socket thoroughly with Tangit cleaner and absorbent
paper. Use a fresh piece of paper for each component.
Remove any condensation which may have formed on
the parts.
cleaning.

The joints can be made singlehanded for pipes with diameters up to d63 mm.
For d75 mm and larger pipes, two people are needed
to apply the cement to the pipe end and fitting socket simultaneously in order to avoid exceeding the maximum
opening time of the cement.
The PVC-C cleaner should soften the outside of the

pipe. Special attention should be paid that the PVC-C
has softened ("finger-nail check"). If this is not the case,
to aid the softening, emery cloth or medium glasspaper,
grade K80, can be used to roughen the joint surface,
repeat the cleaning process after roughening.
PVC-C pipes should be cemented at temperatures between +5 C and +40 C. Take the following protective
At lower temperatures, condensation or ice water which
may have formed must be removed, e. g. with warm air.
Cement and cleaner should be stored at room temperature.
PVC-C cement varies with the ambient temperature and
Temperature in C, F
Opening time [sec]

socket and then a thicker one to the pipe end with firm
brush pressure. Work in well.The brush strokes should
always be in an axial direction.
254
Applying the cement
After the cement has been applied, insert the pipe to the
full depth of the socket immediately without twisting and
bring them into the correct alignment. Ensure that the
outlet of the fitting is in the correct position. Hold them
briefly in this position to allow the cement to set. Wait at
least 10 minutes before the next joint, extend the waiting time at temperatures under 10 C to 30 minutes.
(shake out).
solvent evaporating. Using the conical lid, allowsleaving
Both solvent cement and cleaner dissolve PVC-C. Pipes

and fittings must therefore notbe laid on or allowed to
come into contact with spilled cement or paper containing cement residues.
Do not close off cement pipelines during the drying process. This is particularly important at temperatures below +5 C, when there is otherwise a danger of damaging the material.
before use.
and flush regularly.
Do not use compressed air for flushing.

workplace
The length of drying period before the joint may be subjected to testing or operating pressure depends on the
ambient temperature and the tolerances.
Generally the waiting time after the last joint until the
pressure test at a testing pressure of 15 bar (PN10)
must be at least 15 hours, a testing pressure of 21 bar
(PN16) must be at least 24 hours. If the pipe is only
subjected to the operating pressure, e. g. after adaptation or repair work, the following rule of thumb for thewaiting timeapplies:
1 hour waiting time per bar operating pressure.
chapter "Final testing and commissioning".
Safety precautions
Tangit cement and Tangit cleaner contain highly volatile

solvents. This makes good ventilation or adequate fume
cement on them.
255
Instructions for Dytex solvent cement jointing of PVC-U and PVC-C dimension d12 to
d140
General
Dytex solvent cement combined with Dytex solvent /

cleaner is a special cementing system for PVC-U / PVCC piping systems which are exposed to the effects of
highly aggressive chemicals, such as concentrated, inorganic acids. For all media not mentioned below or
media in lower concentrations, Tangit solvent cement
should be used. Because Dytex is not gap-filling, a special cement jointing procedure is required and is described in the following.
Dytex solvent cement jointing calls for adequate
technical know-how, which can be acquired in the
appropriate training courses. Your GF representative will gladly provide you with information about
training possibilities.
The dimensions of GF pipes, fittings and valves conform
generally to the various national standards as well as
to ISO 727-1 concerning dimensions of sockets. Our fittings and valves can be used with any PVC-U or PVCC pipes whose outside diameter tolerance conforms to
ISO 11922-1.
lengths apply:
Pipe outside diameter Socket inside diameter d
(mm)
Minimal cement length L

(mm)
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
11.0
13.0
15.0
17.5
21.0
25.0
30.0
36.5
42.5
50.0
60.0
67.5
75.0
The use of Dytex solvent cement is recommended for

cement jointing PVC-U or PVC-C in connection with the
acids shown in the table.
Due to the effects of these acids on the pipe material, we recommend using pipes with a pressure rating PN16. For the expected lifetime and compressive
strength, please contact your GF representative.
Medium
% concentrations equal and above
Sulphuric acid
70 % H2SO4 concentration
Chromic sulphuric
acid mixture
70 % H2SO4 concentration
plus 5 % K2Cr2O7 / Na2Cr2O1
Chromic acid
10 % CrO3 concentration
Hydrochloric acid
25 % HCl concentration
Nitric acid
20 % HNO3 concentration
Sodium hypochlorite (calcium

hypochlorite)
6 % NaOCl concentration
of active chlorine
Hydrogen peroxide
5 % H2O2 concentration
Hydrofluoric acid
In every HF concentration
Tools and equipment

Pipe cutter
Type KRA
d10 - 63
d50 - 110
d110 - 160
790 109 001

790 109 002
790 109 003
Pipe cutter type

KS 355
230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
790 202 001
Chamfering tool
d16-75
799 495 145
d32-200
799 495 146
Dytex solvent and

cleaner
0.5 litre tin

0.5 litre tin
Dytex solvent cement
799 271 423
Brush sizes
Brush
6-10
Round brush 4 mm
799 299 001
12-32
Round brush 8 mm
799 299 002
40-63
Flat brush 1"

25 x 3 mm
799 299 003
75-140
Flat brush 2"

50 x 5 mm
799 299 004
Tin lid
799 298 028
White absorbent
paper

protecting gloves,
Safety glasses
Attention! Usually the allowable pressure must be decreased by one pressure rating (thus PN16 to PN10).
When using Dytex in PVC-C piping construction with the
above mentioned acids, the pressure and temperature
requirements for PVC-U must be adhered to.
Please refer to the information on the above mentioned
acids in our list of chemical resistance.

256
799 271 383
Dytex solvent and cleaner: Amounts required

Pipe di- Dytex cement amount Dytex cleaner amount
ameter per 100 joints
per 100 joints
d (mm) (kg)
(litre)
Dytex solvent cement is supplied ready to use. Stir well

before using. Diluting the solvent cement is prohibited.
Cement and solvent should be stored in a dry and cool
place (5 - 35 C)! Under these conditions the cement
and cleaner are durable for 24 months starting from the
date of filling (imprinted on the tin).
16
0.25
0.55
20
0.3
0.65
25
0.4
0.8

32
0.5
1.0
Cementing
40
0.7
1.2
50
0.9
1.4
63
1.1
1.8
75
1.5
2.3
90
2.1
3.1
110
2.9
4.7
140
4.5
7.9
Fine cleaning is done with the Dytex solvent (do not use
Tangit cleaner!). Soak a white, absorbent, lint-free paper with Dytex solvent and thoroughly clean the dry surfaces which are to be cemented. Use a new sheet of
absorbent paper for each cleaning. Then brush Dytex
solvent onto the surfaces to be cemented (pipe ends on
the outside, fitting on the inside) until the surface clearly
begins to dissolve (becomes sticky).
Preparations
in the sketch. This is the only way to achieve an optimal
solvent cemented joint.
into the fitting.
Apply Dytex cement to the dissolved surfaces with a

brush in the axial direction and let dry for at least 30
seconds. Repeat this process as indicated in the following table.
Cement gap (diameter difference) of more than0.4 mm
are not permitted! Pipes / fittings from the dimension
110 must be measured to determine the permissible
gap.
d up to 16 mm
gap
= 0.0 mm
max. 2 x both
sides
d 16 - 25 mm
gap
= + 0.0 mm
max. 3 x both
sides
d 32 - 40 mm
gap
= + 0.1 mm
max. 4 x both
sides
Pipe outside
diameter mm
d 50 - 63 mm
gap
= + 0.2 mm
max. 6 x
both sides
6 - 16 mm
20 - 50 mm
63 -140 mm
1 - 2 mm
2 - 3 mm
3 - 6 mm
d 75 - 90 mm
gap
= + 0.3 mm
max. 8 x both
sides
d 110 - 140 mm
gap
= + 0.4 mm
max. 10 x both
sides
Cement applications in relation to gap (diameter difference)

Remark: If there aresmaller gaps than shown in
the table, the amount of cement applications can
be reduced.
Because Dytex cement is not gap-filling, the fit of the
pipe and fitting must be checked in the dry state. If the
pipe end can be inserted easily and without resistance
to the stop, several applications of cement are necessary.
After the final application of cement, coat both surfaces

again with the Dytex solvent until they are once again
sticky, then insert the parts immediately to the full depth
of the fitting, without twisting/tilting and hold for a few
seconds. Make sure that the fitting outlet is in the right
position. When inserting, you must feel some resistance. The solvent cement bead that forms must be
complete and consistent. Excess cement is wiped off
immediately.
Because the solvent cement bonds quickly, the parts
must be joined within max. 1 minute of applying the final
coat of Dytex solvent. At temperatures above 25 C this
time frame is reduced to under 1 minute.
Due to the short open assembly time of 1 minute, the
use of Dytex is limited to a pipe diameter of 140 mm.
257
The waiting time between the individual work steps

(=next cement joint) depends on the size of the gap.
Cement gap less than 0.2
mm
Cement gap greater than

0.2 to 0.4 mm
Waiting time 10 - 15 minutes
Waiting time 30 minutes

At temperatures under 10 C
the waiting time extends to
45 minutes
The cementing should be done at temperatures between 5 C and 40 C. If there are deviations, please
observe the following safety measures:
At temperatures near the freezing point, any condensation or thaw must be removed, e.g. with warm air. The
cement and the solvent should be kept beforehand at
room temperature. The finished joint must be kept at approx. 25 C for another 15-30 minutes.
At higher temperatures, protect the jointing area from
direct sunlight as the components could heat up too
much.
Up to about d63 mm, the cement joints can be manufactured by one person alone. From d75 mm one person
should apply the cement to the fitting socket while another coats the pipe end, otherwise it is not possible to
maintain the open assembly time of max. 1 minute.
Remove any thick cement residue on the brush with a
dry absorbent paper and then rinse the brush with the
solvent. Before using the cleaned brushes again, they
must be dry to touch (shake out).
To prevent the solvent from evaporating (cement dries
up), the cement tin should be kept closed during work
breaks. A lid that allows keeping the brush in the tin can
be used.
Since Dytex cement and solvent are etching, pipes or
fittings may not be placed on spilled cement or cement
residue left on the paper or come into contact with them
in any way.
After a drying period of approx. 48 hours at room temperature, the final strength of the joint is achieved. At
lower ambient temperatures, the bonding takes longer.
The pipeline may only be filled and the pressure test
may only be done at the earliest 48 hours after the last
cementing.
chapter "final testing and commissioning".
Safety precautions
Dytex cement and Dytex solvent contain highly volatile

solvents. Make sure there is adequate ventilation or exhaust fans in closed rooms. Solvent vapours are heavier than air. The off-take must therefore be on the floor
or under the workbench for example. The paper used
to clean the parts and to remove the cement must be
deposited in closed containers to reduce the amount of
solvent vapours in the air.
258
The cement and the solvent are flammable. Make sure

there are no open flames before starting to work. Shut
off any electrical equipment that is not designed to be
explosion-proof, electric ovens, etc.Avoid static charge.
Do not smoke! Stop all fusion work. Also heed the instructions of the cement manufacturer (e. g. on the tin
and in the leaflets supplied).
Protect pipes and fittings from spilled cement, solvent
and paper that has been used to wipe the cement from
the parts. Do not pour cement or solvent no longer required into the sewer pipes.
We recommend using protective gloves to avoid contact
with the cement and the solvent. In case of contact with
eyes, rinse thoroughly with water. Seek medical advice!
Replace clothing contaminated with the cement immediately.
Observe the respective accident prevention guidelines.

workplace

jointing of ABS dimension d20 to d315
General

The dimensions of GF pipes, fittings and valves conform generally to the various national standards as
well as to ISO 727-1 concerning dimensions of sockets. Our fittings and valves can be used with any ABS
pipes whose outside diameter tolerance conforms to
ISO 11922-1.
lengths are as shown in the table:
Pipe outside diameter /
socket inside diameter
d (mm)
Minimal cement length
L (mm)
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
200
225
250
280
315
15.0
17.5
21.0
25.0
30.0
36.5
42.5
50.0
60.0
67.5
75.0
85.0
105.0
117.5
130.0
145.0
162.5
Tools and equipment

Pipe cutter
Type KRA
d10 - 63
d50 - 110
d110 - 160
790 109 001

790 109 002
790 109 003
790 202 001
Pipe cutter type

KS 355
230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Chamfering tool
d16-75
799 495 145
d32-200
799 495 146
Cleaner
1 litre tin
799 298 010
Tangit ABS solvent cement
0.65 kg tin
Brush sizes
Brush
799 298 022
20-32
Round brush 8 mm
799 299 002
40-63
Flat brush 1"

25 x 3 mm
799 299 003
75-225
Flat brush 2"

50 x 5 mm
799 299 004
250-315
Flat brush 3" 75x 799 298 005

6 mm
Tin lid
White absorbent
paper
799 298 028

protecting gloves,
Safety glasses
Recommendation for solvent cement jointing of ABS fittings of dimensions 250 - 315 mm
ABS solvent cement fittings d250 to d315 from GF are
designed and tested for a nominal pressure of PN6(6
bar).
Our experience and tests reveal that pipes above d250
can be slightly oval, which can produce a heightened
cementing gap. GF therefore recommends that pipes
from dimensions d250 should be operated at max. 6 bar
working pressure.
Please note the special remarks for dimensions 250 315 in the following jointing instructions.
259
ABS Tangit and cleaner: Amounts required
Preparations
Pipe diameter
d (mm)
ABS Tangit
amount per 100
joints
(kg)
ABS Tangit number of joints per

tin 0.650 kg
20
0.35
186
25
0.40
163
32
0.45
144
40
0.60
108
50
0.90
72
63
1.10
59
75
1.25
52
90
1.70
38
110
2.50
26
140
5.00
13
160
6.50
10
200
10.0
225
12.5
250
16.0
280
19.0
315
26.5
Pipe diameter
d (mm)
Tangit cleaner
amount per 100
joints
(litre)
Tangit cleaner
number of joints
per tin 1 litre
20
0.3
333
25
0.4
250
32
0.5
200
40
0.7
143
50
0.9
111
63
1.1
91
75
1.3
77
90
1.4
71
110
1.7
59
140
2.1
48
160
2.5
40
200
3.5
29
225
4.5
22
250
5.5
18
280
6.5
15
315
10.2
10
260
Chamfering the pipe
joint possible.
into the fitting.
Pipe outside diameter
20 - 50 mm
63 - 225 mm
250 - 315 mm
2 -3 mm
3 -6 mm
6 -8 mm

Checking the cement
The Tangit ABS cement is supplied ready for use. Stir

For more information please consult the safetydatasheets under the following link:
place (535 C)! Under these conditions the cement and
cleaner are durable for 24 months starting from the date
of filling (imprinted on the tin).
Cementing
socket thoroughly with ABS cleaner and absorbent paper.
cleaning.
Temperature in C / F
Opening time [sec]

and then a thicker one to the pipe end with firm brush
pressure. Work in well. The brush strokes should always be in an axial direction.
ABS pipes should be cemented at temperatures between+5 C and +40 C. Take the following protective
Installation at low temperatures requires utmost care.
Since Tangit ABS cures physically by evaporation, hardening may be slowed down considerably. Special installation techniques are therefore required at temperatures
below +5C.
Cement and cleaner should be stored at room temperature. To remove condensation or ice water which may
have formed, pipe ends and sockets to be bonded are
warmed to +25 to +30C by means of a suitable hotair blower (explosion proof) and then bonding is done
as described. The finished joint must be kept at +25 to
+30C according to the waiting times mentioned in the
following beforethe next cementing.
ABS cement varies with the ambient temperature and
Applying the cement
Range of dimension up to d63

Apply cement
The cement joints can be produced by one person.
Jointing
Wait at least 10 minutes before the next joint, extendthe waiting time at temperatures under 10 C or
above 30 C to 15minutes.
261
Range of dimension d75 to d140

Apply cement
The fitting socket and end of pipe should be coatedwith cement simultaneously by two persons, otherwise
Jointing
Wait at least 10 minutes before the next joint, extendthe waiting time at temperatures under 10 C or
above 30 C to 15minutes.
Apply cement
The fitting socket and end of pipe should be coated
with cement simultaneously by two persons, otherwise
Jointing
the waiting time at temperatures under 10 C or above
30 C to 60 minutes.
Apply cement
Deviating from the usual method of application, pour
the cement directly from the tin onto the middle of the
cementing surface and distribute first radially and then
axially all over with a flat brush. Make sure that the cement layer is consistent and covers the entire surface
as appropriate for the larger tolerances. Apply a thinner layer of Tangit in the fitting than on the pipe ends.
The cementing of pipe work in this range of dimensions should be carried out by at least 2 persons. The
minimum thickness of the cement layer for fittings is 1
mm, apply more generously on the pipe ends.
Jointing
After applying the cement, the pipe and fitting should
be slowly pushed together to the stop or the mark without twisting by 3-4 persons and aligned. Ensure that
the outlet end of the fitting is in the correct position.
Hold the joint in this position for 1 minute.
A waiting time of 1 hours should be observed before
further jointing; this time should be increased to 2
hours at temperatures below 10 C or above 30 C.
262

(shake out).
solvent evaporating. Using the conical lid allows leaving
Solvent cement dissolves ABS. Pipes and fittings must
therefore not be laid on or allowed to come into contact with spilled cement or paper containing cement
residues.
before use.
and flush regularly. Do not use compressed air for flushing.
To ensure the traceability (if necessary) of the used
Tangit ABS batch, place the batch marking on the test
report. This batch marking is attached to each dispatch
unit. If several batches are used in one project, place
one marking from each batch on the test report.
The length of the drying period before the joint may be

subjected to testing or operating pressure depends on
the ambient temperature, the dimension and the tolerances. The following tables shows the different waiting
times.
Remark: For temperatures above 20 C the test pressure must be reduced according to the requirements
given in the chapter "Final testing and commissioning".
Internal pressure test or leak tightness test with
gas/air
Due to the risk of a pressure test with a compressible
test medium this pressure test shall be carried out only
in exceptional cases! Please consult also the safety precautions given in the chapter "Internal pressure test of
ABS pipelines". The following diagram shows the waiting time depending on the test pressure for a ambient
temperature between 10 to 30 C:
Range of dimension d20 to and including d225
Ambient Temperature
Waiting time
10 to 30 C (50-86F)
at least 24 hours
-below 10 C (50F)
-above 30 C (86F)
at least48 hours
Range of dimension d250 to and including d315

Ambient Temperature
Waiting time
10 to 30 C (50-86F)
at least 48 hours
- below 10 C (50F) above 30 C (86F)
at least 72 hours
Dimension d160 up to d225

Ambient Temperature
Waiting time for testing

with fluids (non compressible)
10 to 30 C (50-86F)
2-hour waiting time per 1 bar

operating pressure.
- below 10 C (50F)
- above 30 C (86F)

operating pressure.

Ambient Temperature

10 to 30 C (50-86F)

operating pressure.
- below 10 C (50F)
- above 30 C (86F)

operating pressure.
Safety precautions
Tangit cement andcleaner contain highly volatile solvents. This makes good ventilation or adequate fume
Ambient temperature between 10 to 30 C (50F-86F)

P
Test pressure in bar, psi
Waiting time after last joint in hour

cement on them.
Repair works
If the pipeline is only subjected to the operating pressure with fluids, e. g. after adaptation or repair works,
the following rule of thumb for the waiting time applies,
which is depending on the diameter:
Ambient Temperature

10 to 30 C (50-86F)

operating pressure.
- below 10 C (50F)
- above 30 C (86F)

operating pressure.

workplace
263

jointing of COOL-FIT ABS Plus dimension
d25 to d225
Instruction for pipe preparation - Calibration
only required for d200 and above
Please read the operating instructions prior to using the

Calibration Tool
Cut pipe at right angles, 90.
For COOL-FIT ABS Plus dimensions below d200 calibration of the pipe is not required, please follow cementing
instructions.
264
For dimensions d200 + d225 the internal diameter of the

pipe needs to be calibrated using the COOLFIT ABS
Pluscalibration tool.
Assemble the COOLFIT ABS Pluscalibration tool using

the relevant parts for the required dimension.
Detailed instructions are delivered with the tool.
Always ensure that the pipe has been chamfered before inserting the calibration tool.
Insert the tool into the pipe to the depth indicated on

the spindle. For short lengths of pipe see instructions
packed with the tool.
Windout the jaws of the tool until the tool is firmly located.
10
The cutting knife can be rotated to cut with a fresh

edge if the knife becomes blunt or if it is damaged.
Wind-in the cutting head until it butts up to the end of

the pipe.
Windin cutting head checking that the cutting knife and

the other 2 locating heads are assembled in the correct
location.
Please note that the tool calibrates the pipe and therefore may not always remove material and may remove
different amounts of material as it cuts.
11 Wind-in the locating jaws until the tool is loose then

carefully retract the tool taking care not to damage the
pipe.
265
12 It is recommended that the installer checks the diameter of the calibrated pipe using the enclosed gauge.
The internal diameters required are also listed in the
COOL-FIT catalogue and in the tooling instructions.
Chamfer to 45 with a width according to the following

table the internal diameter of the COOL-FIT ABS pipe.
Pipe
diameter
mm
25-50 ("-1")
63-90(2"-3")
110 (4")
13 After the calibration process the pipe must be chamfered again!
Instruction solvent cementing COOL-FIT ABS

Plus
The jointing technique for COOL-FIT ABS Plusinternal jointing follows the same tried and tested technique
as that for standard COOL-FIT ABS using exactly the
same tooling and Tangit cement.
Following is a summary of COOL-FIT ABS solvent cement jointing for COOL-FIT ABS Plus. Please refer to
the standard COOL-FIT ABS solvent cementing jointing
instructions for exact curing times, handling instructions,
health and safety advice and commissioning procedure.
266
Chamfered
width
mm
1(0.04")
2(0.08")
3 (0.12")
Check the consistency of the ABS Tangit cement. The

cement should run smoothly and before jointing check
that all tools required are readily to hand.
Apply a normal layer ofABS Solvent cement to the inside surface of the COOL-FIT ABS Pluspipe. Apply
the cement to the depth marked, axially, smoothly in
one action, in an even layer. Use a firm pressure on the
brush when applying the cement to work the cement into the pipe.
The outside surface of the COOL-FIT ABS Plusnipple

and the inner surfaces of the COOL-FIT ABS Pluspipe,
must always be cleaned using Tangit cleaner with clean
absorbent paper.
Apply a thicker layer, approximately 1 mm (0.04"), of

ABS cement to the outside of the COOL-FIT ABS Plusnipple, using the same technique as with the pipes.
Insert the COOL-FIT ABS Plusnipple axially into the
pipe being careful not to rotate the parts. Remove all excess cement using absorbent paper.
The installer should take note of the Tangit ABS opening time and safety precautions written on the Tangit tin
and in standard ABS jointing instructions.
Instruction for insulating the gap
Please take care that the shrink sleeve, short has

been placed over the pipe before jointing.
Mark the inside diameter of the pipe to the minimum
socket depth required. Socket depth is always d/2 +5
(mm), for example socket length for d90 = 50 mm (90/2
+5).
267
If it is not possible to use the shrink sleeve or the sleeve

is damaged GF Piping Systems has a sealing wrap,
effectively a highduty tape available on demand. It is also possible to use other heavyduty insulating tapes instead of the shrink sleeve. For the lifespan and sealing
properties of these tapes please consult the individual
manufacturers.
Wrap the gap insulator into the gap between the

COOL-FIT ABS Pluscomponents taking care to ensure
that the gap is completely filled.
Apply the double sided sealing tape around the complete circumference of the outer pipe.
268
Place the shrink sleeve over the middle of the gap. Fittings of the latest generation do have indicators that
help to position the shrink sleeve correctly. Locate the
sleeve by pressing it onto the double sided sticky tape.
Using an open flame apply heat to the sleeve, taking

care to keep the flame moving to avoid the sleeve melting. To avoid the sleeve distorting apply the heat to the
middle of the sleeve, not from the side. The sleeve will
now shrink to the outside diameter of the jacket pipe.
Note: hot air can be used to shrink the sleeve but is
not recommended due to the high amount of energy required to activate shrinking.
Retrofit of adapter fittings into an existing

ABS, PVC-U or PVC-C pipeline
Existing situation:
Occasionally there is the need to install measuring devices, venting devices or similar into an existing piping
system without using additional installation fittings.
Solution:
At the section of the piping system with greatest wall
thickness (in the middle of the joint) a hole is drilled for
the spigot of the adapter fitting. Then a suitable adapter
fitting is solvent cemented into the hole which acts as
socket.
Installation steps in detail:
1.The hole is drilled into a drained pipe section.
2.The hole is drilled at a right angle to the pipe axis.
3.The hole diameters and tolerances given in the attached table correspond to socket dimensions according to ISO 727-1 and are to be observed.
4.The dimension X in the attached table indicates the
distance from the entrance of the socket to the middle
of thehole to be drilled in order to place it in the middle of the joint.
5.Use a suitable deburring tool to deburr the edges of
hole.
6.Shavings should be removed from the pipe.
7.Allowed combinations of pipe and adapter fitting are
indicated in theattached table with yes .
The selection is such that the spigot of the adapter
fitting does not reach into the medium-filled pipe for
more than 1 mm as well as fully covering the hole
drilled into the joint.
8.The spigot is solvent cemented into the drilled hole
according to the instructions for solvent cement jointing given in our Planning Fundamentals.
9.Attend to waiting times before refilling and applying
pressure to the system.
ABS PN6
Wall thickness, e
Adapter dimensions
pipe diameter
S12.5,
SDR26
20
25
32
40
250
9.6
No
Yes
Yes
No
280
10.7
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
315
12.1
No
No
Yes
Yes
PVC-U PN10
Wall thickness, e
Adapter dimensions
pipe diameter
S10, SDR21 20
25
32
40
125
6.0
No
No
No
No
140
6.7
Yes
No
No
No
160
7.7
Yes
Yes
No
No
180
8.6
Yes
Yes
No
No
200
9.6
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
225
10.8
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
250
11.9
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
280
13.4
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
315
15.0
No
No
Yes
Yes
400
19.1
No
No
Yes
Yes
PVC-U PN16
Wall thickness, e
Adapter dimensions
pipe diameter
S6.3,
SDR13.6
20
25
32
40
125
9.2
Yes
No
No
No
140
10.3
Yes
Yes
No
No
160
11.8
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dimensions of hole to be drilled
When correctly installed the above joint is good for

PN10 at 20 C with water as the medium.
Allowed combinations of pipe and adapter dimensions
ABS PN10
Wall thickness, e
Adapter dimensions
pipe diameter
S8, SDR17
20
25
32
40
75
4.5
Yes
Yes
No
No
90
5.4
Yes
Yes
No
No
110
6.6
Yes
Yes
No
No
125
7.4
Yes
Yes
No
No
140
8.3
Yes
Yes
No
No
160
9.5
Yes
Yes
No
No
180
10.7
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
200
11.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
225
13.4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
269
Adapter dimension
Hole diameter, db in
mm
20
20.2
25
25.2
32
32.2
40
40.2
Tolerance
0.1 mm
Pipe dimension
Drill position X in mm
75
22
90
26
110
31
125
34
140
38
160
43
180
48
200
53
225
59
250
66
280
73
315
82
400
103
Tolerance
1 mm
Cementing different pipe materials

It is possible to cement the pipe materials ABS, PVC-U
and PVC-C with one another; certain conditions must,
however, be observed.
Please contact your nearest GF representative for assistance.
Instructions for solvent cement jointing on

video
For the materialsPVC-U,PVC-C, ABS and COOL-FIT
ABSthe instructions for solvent cementing are available
also on video. Please contact your nearest GF representative.
Medium
Languages
DVD
German, English
Internet:
Products => Jointing Technology =>
Solvent Cementing
German, English
270
Fusion jointing of PE
IR Plus fusion jointing of PE100 piping systems
Fusion jointing method
In infrared (IR) fusion jointing the fusion areas of the

components being joined (pipes, fittings, valves) are
heated to fusion temperature without contact to the
heating elementand jointed by means of mechanical
pressure without using additional materials.
The principle of fusion jointing
IR fusion jointing must only be performed by personnel

trained in the use of this method. Training is provided
world-wide by qualified GF IR Plus welding instructors.
Tools required
Infrared fusion jointing requires a special jointing machine in addition to the tools normally used for plastic
pipework construction (pipe cutters, etc.).
GF supplies several types of IR Plus fusion jointing machines:
IR 63 Plus: for fusion joints in the size range d20 63 mm
1
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting
The resulting fusion joints are homogeneous and display the following characteristics:
non-contact heating of the jointing components eliminates the risk of contamination and inhomogenities;
smaller jointing beads due to adjustment of jointing
pressure path prior to the fusion process itself, i. e.
elimination of the equalisation process;
adjustment of the jointing pressure path also ensures
excellent reproducibility of the fusion joints;
low-stress fusion joints due to very uniform heating by
means of IR radiator.
General requirements
The fusion procedure detailed below including the

preparation is based on DVS 2207-6 "Welding of thermoplastics - Non-contact heated tool butt welding of
pipes, pipeline components and sheets - Methods,
equipment, parameters".
Only same wall thicknesses in the fusion area

The basic rule is that only similar materials can be fusion jointed. The components to be joined must have
the same wall thicknesses in the fusion area. Maximum
permissible wall displacement: 10 %.
General conditions
A
incorrect
correct
Protect the area of the fusion joint from adverse weather conditions, such as rain, snow or wind. The permitted
temperature range for IR Plus fusion jointing between
271
+5 C and +40 C. Outside this range, suitable action

must be taken to ensure that these conditions are maintained. It must also be ensured that the components being joined are in this temperature range.
Preparing the fusion joint and operating the IR

fusion jointing machine
In principle, IR fusion jointing machines do not require
any special preparation, but it should be ensured that
the components being joined are clean.
Operation of the IR machines is defined exactly in the

operating instructions, but we strongly recommend attending a 1-day training course to become a qualified IR
welder.
Butt fusion jointing of PE piping systems

Butt fusion jointing method
The fusion areas of the pipes and fittings are heated to

fusion temperature and joined by means of mechanical
pressure, without using additional materials. A homogeneous joint results. Butt fusion must only be carried
out with fusion jointing machines which allow the jointing
pressure to be regulated.
Properties and characteristics of IR fusion

joints
Non-contact heating
The components being joined are heated uniformly and
without contact to the ideal fusion temperature by infrared radiation.
A defined gap between the heating element and the end
faces minimises the risk of contamination of the jointing
surface. Contamination of the heating element by plastic
particles is thus also eliminated.
Reduced bead formation
The fusion bead produced during jointing is considerably reduced without any loss of quality. Bead forming
equalisation is eliminated by non-contact softening of
the end faces. The minimal, defined bead is only formed
during the jointing process. The fusion area thus has
improved flow dynamics, low clearance volume, and
greater throughput area.
Reproducible jointing processes
The jointing path controls the jointing pressure and thus
the fusion process. The high reproducibility of the joints
is assured by the clearly defined and controlled process
sequence.
Clear, simple operator guidance
Clear, unambiguous operator guidance via the liquid
crystal display leads the user interactively through the
fusion process in logical operating steps.
Welding report/traceability
The welding parameters for the relevant welding operations can be read out directly via various interfaces on
the machine. It is possible to print these out on paper
(commercially available printers), on labels or to employ
electronic data output (PCMCIA card or USB).
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting

preparation is based on DVS 2207-1 "Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes, pipeline,
components and sheets made from PE".
Details of the requirements for machines and equipment
used for fusion jointing thermoplastics are contained in
DVS 2208 Part 1.
Join only components with similar wall thicknesses
The basic rule is that only similar materials can be fusion jointed, i. e. PE with PE. This applies also for the
jointing of PE80 with PE100. For best results, only components which have a melt flow index in the range from
MFR 190/5 0.3 to 1.7 g/10 min should be fusion jointed.
This requirement is met by PE butt fusion fittings from
GF. The components to be jointed must have the same
wall thicknesses in the fusion area.
This automatically provides an accurate record with all

essential fusion parameters for each individual fusion
joint, as required.
A
incorrect
correct
Heated tool butt fusion jointing may only be performed

by adequately trained personnel.
272
Tools required
Butt fusion jointing requires a special jointing machine in

addition to the tools normally used for plastic piping construction (pipe cutters, saw with cutting guide). The fusion jointing machine must meet the following minimum
requirements:
The clamping equipment must hold the various parts securely without damaging the surfaces. Possible ovality can be largely compensated by centred clamping of
the components to be joined. It must also be possible to
hold all parts firmly in alignment.
The machine must also be capable of face planing the
fusion surfaces of pipes and fittings.
The fusion jointing machine must be sufficiently solid to
be able to absorb the pressures arising during the fusion procedure without detrimentally deforming the joint.
The heating surfaces of the heating element must
be flat and parallel. The temperature variation over
the working area must not exceed 10 C. The machine should be set up and operated according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Check the temperature

To test the thermostat, check temperature before commencing the fusion jointing. This is best carried out with
the help of a digital thermometer. But only thermometers with a sensor for measuring surface temperature
are suitable.
To ensure it is being maintained at the correct level the
fusion temperature should be checked from time to time
during the jointing work. The temperature of the heating
element is particularly sensitive to wind.
General conditions
Protect the area of the fusion joint from adverse weather conditions, such as rain, snow and wind. At temperatures below +5 C or above +45 C, measures must be
taken to ensure that the temperature in the working area
is in the range required for satisfactory jointing and does
not hinder the necessary manual tasks.
Clean the heating element
Clean the heating element with dry, clean paper before
each fusion joint!
Protect the working surface of the heating element
from becoming soiled. Clean both faces of the heating element with dry, lint-free paper before each fusion
joint. Protect the heating element from wind, damage
and soiling during the intervals between making fusion
joints.
Protect the fusion area

Screening the fusion area can ensure a more even temperature distribution on the entire circumference of a
pipe subject to direct sunlight. The pipe ends at the opposite end of the fusion areas should be sealed whenever possible to reduce to a minimum the cooling of the
fusion surfaces which can be caused by wind.
Preparation of the fusion joint
The quality of the fusion process is governed by the

care with which the preparatory work is carried out. This
part of the procedure therefore deserves special attention.
Heating tool
Set the temperature of the heating element to 220 C.
Check the temperature. The fusion temperature should
be between 210 C and 230 C.
Planing and subsequent checking

Before machining the joining surfaces, make sure that
the tools and the work pieces are clean and grease-free
beyond the actual fusion zone; if necessary, clean with
a cleaning fluid.
All the components clamped into the fusion jointing machine are planed simultaneously with the planer provided. The shavings should not be thicker than 0.2 mm.
This step is completed when there is no unmachined
area left on either of the parts to be joined. This is normally the case when no more shavings come off the
machined surface.
Remove any shavings which may have fallen into the
pipe or fitting with e. g. a brush. The fusion surfaces
should not be touched by hand under any circumstances. Otherwise they must be cleaned with cleaning
fluid.
Once they have been machined, the parts are moved
together until they touch. The gap between the two
parts must not exceed the values in the following table.
273
Pipe diameter
(mm)
Max. gap
(mm)
355
0.5
400 ... <630
1.0
machine and the resistance of the axially mobile pipe

or fitting clamped in it. The resistance of longer pipes
should be reduced as far as possible by placing rollers
beneath them. The kinetic force (FB) should not exceed
the jointing force (FA).
630 ... <800
1.3
Equalise and heat
800 ... <1000
1.5
1000
2.0
max. gap
max. displacement: 10 % of wall thickness
Contact force
Height of bead (see tabulated values)
Approximate values for butt fusion of PE 1)

Wall thickness
(mm)
Equalisation at
p= 0.15 N/mm
Height of bead
(mm)
Heating time )
p= 0.01 N/mm
(sec)
up to 4.5
0.5
up to 45
4.5 ... 7
1.0
45 ... 70
7 ... 12
1.5
70 ... 120
Important: The fusion surfaces must be planed immediately prior to the jointing.
12 ... 19
2.0
120 ... 190
19 ... 26
2.5
190 ... 260
Setting the fusion pressure

Fusion jointing requires different pressures to be applied
during equalisation and jointing on the one hand and
during the heat soak period on the other. Please see the
following diagram.
26 ... 37
3.0
260 ...370
37 ...50
3.5
370 ...500
50 ... 70
4.0
500 ... 700
Wall thickness
(mm)
Changeover
time
max.
(sec)
Time to reach Cooling time

full jointing
)
(sec)
under jointing
p= 0.15 N/
mm
(min)
up to 4.5
4.5 ... 7
5 ... 6
5 .. 6
6 ... 10
7 ... 12
6 ... 8
6 ... 8
10 ... 16
12 ... 19
8 ... 10
8 ... 11
16 ... 24
19 ... 26
10 ... 12
11 ... 14
24 ... 32
26 ... 37
12 ... 16
14 ...19
32 ... 45
37 ...50
16 ...20
19 ...25
45 ...60
50 ... 70
20 ... 25
25 ... 35
60 ... 80
Check the wall alignment and gap

The alignment of the two parts should be checked at
the same time. A possible misalignment on the outside
must not exceed 10 % of the thickness of the wall. If
this limit is exceeded, a better clamping position is to be
sought, e. g. by rotating the pipe. In such a case, however, the surface must be re-planed.
The specific jointing pressure required for equalisation

and fusion can be found in the following table with the
heating and cooling periods. The table lists the times
for various wall thicknesses. Interpolate for intermediate
values.
The force needed for equalisation and jointing (FA) is
given by the product of the fusion area and the specific jointing pressure (FA = A * p). The force (FB) required
to move the pipe must be added to this. (Ftot = FA + FB).
This latter force includes the intrinsic resistance of the
274
1) in accordance with DVS 2207-1

2) The times are affected by the pipe wall thickness, the
outside temperature and wind strength.
Determine the values to be set for equalisation and
jointing on the basis of the information above, bearing
in mind the instructions from the manufacturer of the
fusion jointing machine before commencing the fusion
process.
Fusion jointing procedure
Once it has attained the fusion temperature, position the

heating element in the fusion jointing machine. Press
the parts to be jointed against the heating element with
the force required for equalisation until the entire circumference of each of the jointing faces rests completely against it and a bead (see the table) has formed. Reduce the equalisation pressure almost to 0 (p ~ 0.01 N/
mm). The heating time listed in the table is measured
from this moment.
Socket fusion jointing of PE piping systems

Socket fusion jointing method
In this form of fusion jointing, which requires heating

tools, the pipe end is inserted into the socket of the fitting; no additional material is used. The pipe end and
fitting socket are heated to fusion temperature using a
heating bush and a heating spigot, respectively, and are
then pushed together.
The pipe end, fitting socket and heating tools correspond in such a way that the necessary jointing pressure is attained during jointing, resulting in a homogeneous joint.
Join and cool

Leave parts in the fusion jointing machine at fusion
pressure until the end of the cooling period!
Once the heating period has elapsed, remove the parts
from the heating element which should then be removed
without touching the jointing surfaces and push the
parts together immediately. The changeover time must
not exceed the value listed in the table. Pay particular
attention during jointing that the parts be moved together swiftly until the surfaces are about to touch.
Then they should be moved together so that they are in
contact along the entire circumference. Next the pressure should be increased rapidly to the present jointing pressure within the period of time specified in the table. This pressure must be maintained during the entire
cooling period. Adjustment may be necessary, especially shortly after the jointing pressure has been attained.
Fitting
Heating spigot
Heating element
Heating bush
Pipe
Heating
The jointed parts must stay in the fusion jointing machine under jointing pressure until the end of the cooling
period specified in the table.
Finished joint
Fusion check
A bead should form around the entire circumference of
the pipe. K in the diagram to the left should always be
positive.
Carrying out the pressure test
All fusion joints must be allowed to cool completely before pressure testing, i. e. as a rule wait about 1 hour after the last joint has been completed.

DVS 2208 Part 1.
275
The basic rule is that only similar materials can be fusion jointed, i. e. PE with PE. This applies also for the
jointing of PE80 with PE100.
The element is heated electrically. The heating bush

and spigot are removable. A separate pair is required
for each pipe size.
In socket fusion, attention must be paid to the minimum

wall thicknesses of the pipes. The melt flow index of the
pipes to be joined should lie within the following limits:
0.3 to 1.7 g/10 min. MFR 190/5 (Melt flow rate at 190
C/5 kg).
Important: The surfaces of the heating tool which come

into contact with the pipe or the fitting must have a nonstick coating.
Fusion jointing machine
This requirement is met by PE socket fusion fittings

from GF.
Tools required
Apart from the tools normally used in plastic piping construction, such as pipe cutters or a saw with a cutting
guide, the socket fusion jointing method requires certain
special tools.
Important: The tools described here may be used for
GF socket fusion fittings made of PP and PVDF as well
as PE.
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting
Pipe peeling and chamfering tool
A fusion jointing machine is recommended for fittings

with a diameter of d = 63 mm or more. It is also better to
use a machine for smaller joints if there is a large number to be made.
The machine should be set up and operated according to its manufacturer's instructions. The procedure
detailed below (including the preparation) is for fusion
jointing with the help of a manual jointing tool.

This tool serves to calibrate the pipe end and to mark
the length of the fusion joint. At the same time it removes the oxidised layer built up as a result of UV radiation, which would otherwise have a detrimental effect on the fusion joint. It is of paramount importance for
high quality joints that the oxidised layer be removed.
Note: Further information on the fusion jointing equipment hire service and training courses are available
from GF.
Heating element for manual fusion jointing
Set the temperature of the heating tool to 260 C. Check

the temperature. The fusion temperature must be between 250 C and 270 C. To test the thermostat, check
the fusion temperature from time to time on the outside
of the heating bush, using a fast acting thermoprobe or
tempil sticks (253 C or 274 C). This is particularly important when working in strong wind.
Use a clean cloth or dry paper to clean the heating bush

and the heating spigot. The tools must be cleaned after
making each fusion joint.
276
Cut the pipe square using a cutter for plastic pipes and
deburr the inside edges with a knife.
Outside
Peeled diameter Champfer
pipe diame- (mm)
b (mm)
ter
d (mm)
Peeling
length
l (mm)
16
15.85-15.95
13
20
19.85-19.95
14
25
24.85-24.95
16
32
31.85-31.95
18
40
39.75-39.95
20
50
49.75-49.95
23
63
62.65-62.95
27
75
74.65-74.95
31
90
89.65-89.95
35
110
109.55-109.95
41
Make sure that the tools and pipes are clean and
grease-free even beyond the fusion zone; if necessary,
clean with a cleaning fluid.
Pipe in size d16
For pipes of diameter d = 16 mm, chamfer about 2 mm
of the pipe end at an angle of 15. Prepare about 15
mm of the pipe end with a scraper. Mark off the jointing
length of 13 mm on the pipe.
Pipes in sizes d20 to d110
In the case of SDR 11 pipes with diameter
d = 20 or 25 mm, insert a support sleeve
manually in the pipe end as far as the stop
before starting to peel, or use pipes with
smaller SDR values.
Peel the pipe end until the blades are flush with the pipe
end.
Should ovality of the pipe prevent the peeling tool from
being properly applied, the pipe must first be rounded
(e. g. in a vice or with a screw clamp).
Use a scraper to complete the peeling of any area
where ovality impairs the effectiveness of the peeling
tool.
Thoroughly clean the fitting socket with absorbent paper

and cleaning fluid (e. g. Tangit cleaner). Use fresh paper each time.
If the peeling tool can be pushed onto the pipe without

removing any material, then the dimensional accuracy of the pipe's outside diameter and of the peeling tool
should be checked.
Contact GF for resharpening or replacing the blades.
Should this work be carried out independently, use a
mandrel gauge to adjust the blades to the following diameters.
277
Jointing (by hand)
Heating
Quickly push first the fitting onto the heating spigot to

the correct depth and then the pipe into the heating
bush axially, without twisting, and hold firmly.
16 mm pipes should be inserted into the heating bush
up to the mark previously made.
Pipes in size d = 20 mm to 110 mmshould be inserted until the end of the peeled surface is flush with the
edge of the heating bush. In fusion jointing machines,
fixed stops regulate this. The heating times in the table
below are measured from this point on. Fusion joints
should not be used for pipes whose walls are thinner
than those listed in the table.
Heating times and minimum wall thicknesses for
socket fusion joints
Outside
pipe diameter
mm
Heating
time
PN10
SDR11
Heating
time
PN6
SDR17
Changeover
(Max.time)
sec
Cooling
fixed
sec
Cooling
total
min
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
5
5
7
8
12
18
24
30
40
50
18
26
36
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
6
6
10
10
20
20
30
30
40
50
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
The temperature and heating time must be strictly observed.
278
Pull the fitting and pipe from the heating tools with a
"snap off" action as soon as the heating period has
elapsed. Paying attention to the alignment marks, immediately push them together axially without twisting.
Hold them together for the same duration as the heating
period
Pressure testing
All fusion joints must be allowed to cool completely before pressure testing, i. e. as a rule wait about an hour
after the last joint has been completed.
Electrofusion

DVS 2208 Part 1.
Using electrofusion to join PE pipes and valves enables
a secure, systematic, economical and efficient installation of PE piping systems.
ELGEF Plus electrofusion products are supplied with a
magnetic card, which contains all relevant product information (trace code) and fusion data.
Especially check that the electrofusion automatic machine and the fusion zone are placed under the same
climatic conditions.
Storage
ELGEF Plus electrofusion fittings are packed separately in a polythene bag. If the fittings are protected from
direct sunlight in the original packing and not stored
above 50 C, they can be stored for almost 10 years.
The storage duration commences on the date that the
fittings are produced.
Protection of fusion area
The pipe and fitting surfaces to be fused should be
carefully protected from dust, grease, oil and lubricants.
Use only cleaning agents that are suitable for PE.
Attention: There should be no grease (such as hand
cream, oily rags, silicone etc.) in the fusion zone!
Fusion preparation
The pipe should be wiped clean, scraped and finally

cleaned with PE cleaner. Rotating scraping tools can be
used for uniform and time-saving pipe preparation.
Please comply with the assembly and operating instructions.
Processing notes
The quality of the joint depends to a considerable extent on the care with which the preparatory work is performed. Electrofusion jointing should be carried out only
by trained personnel.
The melt flow range (MFR) of ELGEF Plus electrofusion
products is in the range 0.4 to 1.4 g/10 min. They can
be fused with PE pipes with a melt flow range between
0.2 and 1.4 g/10 min.
Adhere to the following scraping measurements:

d Pipe
Min. chip thickness
Max. chip thickness*
2025 mm
0.20 mm
0.20 mm
3263 mm
0.20 mm
0.25 mm
75225 mm
0.20 mm
0.30 mm
>225 mm
0.20 mm
0.35 mm
Tip: maximum permitted pipe ovality 1.5 %

Protect the fusion zone against bad weather, such as
rain, snow or wind. Admissible temperature range for
electrofusion is 10 C to +45 C.
The national guidelines are to be observed. A more uniform temperature profile around the entire pipe circumference can be achieved by shielding the fusion zone
against direct sunlight or inclement weather.
* The data refers to the pipe inner diameter without +

tolerance
Welding indicators
After welding, check the welding indicators. The following picture shows the change of the welding indicator. They only indicate that energy has reached the fusion zone: they are not a guarantee for the quality of the
welding. The height of the welding indicator depends
on the fitting used, the pipe material and the pipe tolerances.
279
Remark: For welding of ELGEF Plus fittings or for use

of the MSA electrofusion machines, please consult the
further information in the "Technical Handbook Distribution Piping Systems".
280
Fusion jointing of PP
IR Plus fusion jointing of PROGEF piping
systems

heating element and jointed by means of mechanical

Tools required
1
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting
pressure path prior to the fusion process itself, i. e
means of IR radiation.


General conditions
A
incorrect
correct
Protect the area of the fusion joint from adverse weather conditions, such as rain, snow or wind. The permitted temperature range for IR Plus fusion jointing is be281
tween +5 C and +40 C. Outside this range, suitable

action must be taken to ensure that these conditions are
maintainedand all components being joined are in this
temperature range.

any special preparation, other than to ensure thatall
components being joined are clean.
Holding the melted thermoplastic under controlled pressure ensures ideal, homogeneous fusion of the plastic
components.
Fully automatic process control of the fusion jointing
process with a fusion jointing machine developed inhouse by GF permits very simple handling and reproducible fusion quality.
Operation of the IR machines is defined in the operating

instructions, but we strongly recommend attending a 1day training course to become a qualified IR welder.

joints
Non-contact heating
Pipe clamping element
Fitting
Heating element with fitting - clamping device
Pressurised bladder
Pipe
Compressor for bladder
Cooling air blower
Control unit control panel
Compressed air supply
Pressurised bladder
Welding zone
Heating element
Clamping position
Pipe / Fitting

sequence.
joint, as required.
BCF Plus fusion jointing of PROGEF Natural piping systems

The fusion jointing process consists in transmitting precisely defined thermal energy to the pipe and fitting
ends being joined by means of half-shell heating elements.
At the same time an elastic, pressurised bladder supports the inside surface of the fusion zone in order to
prevent the formation of an internalfusion bead.
282
PROGEF Natural fittings andpipes are suitable for

working pressures up to 10 bar at 20 C (water). PROGEF Natural diaphragm valves are designed for a maximum working pressure of 10 bar at 20 C (water). Refer
to the chapter on pressure/temperature diagrams for details of permissible working pressures.
Tools required
BCF jointing requires the GF BCF Plus jointing machine in addition to the tools normally used for plastic
Preparing the fusion joint and operating the

BCF Plus fusion jointing machine
In principle, GF BCF Plus fusion jointing machines do

not require any special preparation, other than to ensured that all components being jointed are clean.
Operation of the BCF Plus machines is defined exactly in the operating instructions, but it is strongly recommended to attend a 1-day training course to become a
qualified BCF Plus welder.
Properties and characteristics of BCF Plus fusion joints

Welding free from beads and crevices
The result of the jointing process is a surface similar
to the actual pipeline components, free from beads or
crevices. There are therefore no dead legs, the surface
roughness is in the range of the pipe components.
The high reproducibility of the joints is assured by the
clearly defined and controlled process sequence.
Welding report / traceability
electronic data output (PCMCIA card).
theessential fusion parameters for each individual fusion joint.
283
Butt fusion jointing of PP piping systems


out with fusion jointing machines which allow the jointing pressure to be regulated. The drawing illustrates the
principle of fusion jointing.
General conditions
1
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting

components and sheets made from PP".
DVS 2208 Part 1.
The basic rule is that only similar materials can be fusion jointed. For best results, only components which
have a melt flow index in the range from MFR 190/5 0.4
to 1.0 g/10 min should be fusion jointed. This requirement is met by PP butt fusion fittings from GF.

fusion surfaces which can be caused by wind.

A
incorrect
correct

Tools required

requirements:
284
Heating tool
be between 200 C and 220 C.

Temperature of heating element 200 C to 220 C.
are suitable.
To ensure it is being maintained at the correct level, the
max. gap

each fusion joint!
joints.
Before machining the fusion surfaces, make sure that
even beyond the fusion zone; if necessary, clean with a
cleaning fluid.
Pipe diameter
(mm)
Max. gap
(mm)
355
0.5
400 ... 630
1.0

following diagram.
machined surface.
fluid.
parts must not exceed the value in the following table.

values.
285

Equalise and heat
Contact force
Join and cool
Approximate values for butt fusion of PP 1)

Wall thickness
(mm)
Equalisation at
p=0.10 N/mm
Height of bead
(mm)
Heating time )
p=0.01 N/mm
(sec)
up to 4.5
0.5
up to 135
4.5 ... 7
0.5
135 ... 175
7 ... 12
1.0
175 ... 245
12 ... 19
1.0
245 ... 330
19 ... 26
1.5
330 ... 400
26 ... 37
2.0
400 ... 485
37 ... 50
2.5
485 ... 560
Wall thickness
(mm)
Changeover
time max.
(sec)
Time to reach Cooling time

full jointing
)
(sec)
under jointing
p=0.10 N/
mm
(min)
up to 4.5
4.5 ... 7
5 ... 6
6 .. 7
6 ... 12
7 ... 12
6 ... 7
7 ... 11
12 ... 20
12 ... 19
7 ... 9
11 ... 17
20 ... 30
19 ... 26
9 ... 11
17 ... 22
30 ... 40
26 ... 37
11 ... 14
22 ... 32
40 ... 55
37 ... 50
14 ... 17
32 ... 43
55 ... 70

process.

the parts to be joined against the heating element with
the force required for equalisation until the entire circumference of each of the jointing faces rests complete286
ly against it and a bead (see the table) has formed. Reduce the equalisation pressure almost to 0 (p ~ 0.01 N/
from this moment.

Fusion check
the pipe. K in the diagram to the left should always be
positive.
All fusion joints must be allowed to cool completely before pressure testing, i.e. as a rule wait about 1 hour after the last joint has been completed.
Socket fusion jointing of PP piping systems
The basic rule is that only similar materials can be fusion jointed, i. e. PP with PP.
In socket fusion, attention must be paid to the minimum

wall thicknesses of the pipes. The melt flow index of the
pipes to be joined should lie within the following limits:
0.4 to 0.8 g/10 min. MFR 190/5 (Melt flow rate at 190
C/5 kg).

This requirement is met by PP socket fusion fittings

from GF.
Tools required
special tools.
as PE.
Fitting
Heating spigot
Heating element
Heating bush
Pipe
Heating

from GF.
Finished joint

components and sheets made from PP".
DVS 2208 Part 1.

for each pipe size.
287

Pipe
Heating element
Fitting

Pipe in size d16
Set the temperature of the heating tool to 260 C. Check

the temperature. The fusion temperature must be between 250 C and 270 C. To test the thermostat, check
the fusion temperature from time to time on the outside
of the heating bush, using a fast acting thermoprobe or
tempil" sticks (253 C or 274 C). This is particularly important when working in strong wind.
end.
tool.

288

should be checked.
Outside
pipe diame- (mm)
b (mm)
ter
d (mm)
Peeling
length
l (mm)
16
15.85-15.95
13
20
19.85-19.95
14
25
24.85-24.95
16
32
31.85-31.95
18
40
39.75-39.95
20
50
49.75-49.95
23
63
62.65-62.95
27
75
74.65-74.95
31
90
89.65-89.95
35
110
109.55-109.95
41

Heating

In the case of SDR 11 pipes with diameter
d = 20 or 25 mm, insert a support sleeve
manually in the pipe end as far as the stop
before starting to peel, or use pipes with
smaller SDR values.
Pipes in size 20 mm should be inserted until the end of

the peeled surface is flush with the edge of the heating
bush. In fusion jointing machines fixed stops regulate
this. The heating times in the table below are measured
from this point on. Fusion joints should not be used for
pipes whose walls are thinner than those listed in the table.
Heating times and minimum wall thicknesses for socket
fusion joints

Outside
pipe
dia-meter
mm
Heating
time
PN10
SDR11
Heating
time
PN6
SDR17
Change Cooling Cooling
fixed
total
min
(Max.- sec
time)
sec
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
5
5
7
8
12
18
24
30
40
50
15
22
30
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
6
6
10
10
20
20
30
30
40
50
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
289
Jointing (by hand)
period.
Pressure testing
290
Fusion jointing of PVDF

IR Plus fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems

heating element and jointed by means of mechanical

Tools required
1
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting
pressure path prior to the fusion process itself, i. e.
means of IR radiation.


incorrect
correct
291
IR 315 Plus: for fusion joints in the size range

d225-315 mm

sequence.
IR 450: for fusion joints in the size range d315-450

mm
joint, as required.
BCF Plus fusion jointing of SYGEF PVDF

piping systems
General conditions
Protect the area of the fusion joint from adverse weather conditions, such as rain, snow or wind. The permitted
temperature range for IR Plus fusion jointing is between
+5 C and +40 C. Outside this range, suitable action
must be taken to ensure that these conditions are maintained. It must also be ensured that the components being joined are in this temperature range.

any special preparation, other than to ensured that all
components being joined are clean.
The fusion jointing process consists in transmitting precisely defined thermal energy to the pipe and fitting
ends being joined by means of half-shell heating elements.
At the same time an elastic, pressurised bladder supports the inside surface of the fusion zone in order to
prevent the formation of an internalfusion bead.
Holding the melted thermoplastic under controlled pressure ensures ideal, homogeneous fusion of the plastic
components.
Fully automatic process control of the fusion jointing
process with a fusion jointing machine developed inhouse by GF permits very simple handling and reproducible fusion quality.
Operation of the IR machines is defined exactly in the

operating instructions, but we strongly recommend to attending a 1-day training course to become a qualified IR
welder.

joints
Non-contact heating
Pipe clamping element

Fitting
Heating element with fitting - clamping device
Pressurised bladder
Pipe

Compressor for bladder
Cooling air blower
Control unit control panel
Compressed air supply
292

Welding report / traceability
electronic data output (PCMCIA card).
1
Pressurised bladder
Welding zone
Heating element
Clamping position
Pipe / Fitting

the essential fusion parameters for each individual fusion joint.
SYGEF fittings and SYGEF pipes are suitable for working pressures up to 16 bar at 20 C (water). SYGEF diaphragm valves are designed for a maximum working
pressure of 10 bar at 20 C (water). Refer to the chapter
onpressure/temperature diagrams for details of permissible working pressures.
Tools required
BCF jointing requires the SYGEF HP BCF jointing machine in addition to the tools normally used for plastic
Preparing the fusion joint and operating the

BCF Plus fusion jointing machine
In principle, BCF Plus fusion jointing machines do not

require any special preparation, other than to ensure
that all components being joined are clean.
Operation of the BCF Plus machines is defined exactly in the operating instructions, but we strongly recommend attending a 1-day training course to become a
qualified BCF welder.
Properties and characteristics of BCF Plus fusion joints

Welding free from beads and crevices
The result of the jointing process is a surface similar
to the actual pipeline components, free from beads or
crevices. There are therefore no dead legs, the surface
roughness is in the range of the pipe components.
The high reproducibility of the joints is assured by the
clearly defined and controlled process sequence.
293
Butt fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems


out with fusion jointing machines which allow the jointing
pressure to be regulated.
General conditions
1
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting

preparation is based on DVS 2207-15 "Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes, piping part
and panels made of PVDF".
DVS 2208 Part 1.
have a density between 1.70 and 1.80 g/cm and a melt
flow index in the range from MFR 230/5 1.0 to 25 g/10
min should be fusion jointed. This requirement is met by
PVDF butt fusion fittings from GF.

fusion surfaces whichcan becaused by wind.

A
incorrect
correct

Tools required

requirements:
294
Heating tool
be between 232 Cand 248 C.
Pipe diameter
(mm)
Max. gap
(mm)
355
0.5
400 ... 630
1.0

Temperature of heating element 232 C to 248 C
are suitable.
To ensure it is being maintained at the correct level the
max. gap


each fusion joint!

following diagram.

joints.
Before machining the fusion surfaces, make sure that
even beyond the fusion zone; if necessary, clean with a
cleaning fluid.
machined surface.
fluid.
parts must not exceed the value in the following table.

values.
295

duce the equalisation pressure almost to 0 (p ~ 0.01 N/

from this moment.
Equalise and heat
Join and cool
Contact force
Approximate values for butt fusion of PVDF)

Wall thickness
(mm)
Equalisation at
p=0.10 N/mm
Height of bead
(mm)
Heating time )
p=0.01 N/mm
(sec)
1.9 .. 3.5
0.5
59 .. 75
3.5 .. 5.5
0.5
75 .. 95
5.5 .. 10.0
0.5 .. 1.0
95 .. 140
10.0 .. 15.0
1.0 .. 1.3
140 .. 190
15.0 .. 20.0
1.3 .. 1.7
190 .. 240
20.0 .. 25.0
1.7 .. 2.0
240 .. 290
Wall thickness
(mm)
Change-over Time to reach Cooling time

time max.
full jointing
) under joint(sec)
(sec)
ing
p=0.10 N/
mm
(min)
1.9 .. 3.5
3 .. 4
5 .. 6
3.5 .. 5.5
4 .. 5
6 .. 8.5
5.5 .. 10.0
5 .. 7
8.5 .. 14
10.0 .. 15.0
7 .. 9
14 .. 19
15.0 .. 20.0
9 .. 11
19 .. 25
20.0 .. 25.0
11 .. 13
25 .. 32

process.
the parts to be joined against the heating element with
the force required for equalisation until the entire circumference of each of the jointing faces rests completely against it and a bead (see the table) has formed. Re-
296


Fusion check
the pipe. K in the diagram to the leftshould always be
positive.
All fusion joints must be allowed to cool completely before pressure testing, i. e. as a rule wait about 1 hour after the last joint has been completed.
Socket fusion jointing of PVDF piping systems


fulfill the following requirements should be fusion jointed.
Characteristics
Range from
to
Density
1.70 g/cm
(= 0.0614 lb/in)
1.80 g/cm
(= 0.065 lb/in)
MFR 230/5
1.0 g/10 min

(= 0.0022 lb/10min)
25 g/10 min
(= 0.055 lb/10min)
This requirement is met by PVDF socket fusion fittings

from GF.
Tools required
special tools.
as PE.
Fitting
Heating spigot
Heating element
Heating bush
Pipe
Heating
Finished joint
from GF.

preparation is based on DVS 2207-15 "Welding of thermoplastics - Heated tool welding of pipes, piping part
and panels made of PVDF".
DVS 2208 Part 1.
297

for each pipe size.
Pipe
Heating element
Fitting

Pipe in size d16
Set the temperature of the heating tool to 260 C / 500

F. Check the temperature. The fusion temperature
must be between 250 C / 482 Fand 270 C / 518 F.
To test the thermostat, check the fusion temperature
from time to time on the outside of the heating bush, using a fast acting thermoprobe or tempil sticks (253 C /
253 For 274 C / 525 F). This is particularly important
when working in strong wind.
end.
tool.
should be checked.

298

Outside
pipe diame- (mm)
b (mm)
ter
d (mm)
Peeling
length
l (mm)
16
15.85-15.95
13
20
19.85-19.95
14
25
24.85-24.95
16
32
31.85-31.95
18
40
39.75-39.95
20
50
49.75-49.95
23
63
62.65-62.95
27
75
74.65-74.95
31
90
89.65-89.95
35
110
109.55-109.95
41

Heating

The peeling length l corresponds to the length of the

peeling blades.
Pipes in size d = 20 mm to 110 mm should be inserted until the end of the peeled surface is flush with the
edge of the heating bush. In fusion jointing machines,
fixed stops regulate this. The heating times in the table
below are measured from this point on. Fusion joints
should not be used for pipes whose walls are thinner
than those listed in the table.
Heating times and minimum wall thicknesses for socket
fusion joints

Pipe
outside
diameter
mm
Minimum
pipe
wall
thickness
mm
Heating Change Cooling Cooling

time
(Max.fixed
total
sec
time)
sec
min
sec
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
1.5
1.9
1.9
2.4
2.4
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4
6
8
10
12
18
20
22
25
30
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
18
18
18
24
2
2
2
4
4
4
6
6
6
8
299
Jointing (by hand)
period.
Pressure testing
300
Planning fundamentals for valves
General/Overview
Page
-- Benefits of GF Piping Systems valves

-- Products and applications
-- General safety information
302
303
303
Application area of valves
306
Material selection
-- Pressure-temperature diagram
-- Chemical resistance
-- Other criteria for the selection of materials
Product selection criteria
307
307
307
-- Common types of valves

-- Nature of the medium
-- Functional properties
-- Types of connections
308
309
310
310
Overview actuators
313
Conceptual understanding of technical data

-- Pressure-temperature diagram for valves
-- Technical data
-- Tightening torques
-- Conversion factors
315
315
315
315
301
Planning fundamentals for

valves
General/Overview
I.) General/Overview
Products and applications
Benefits GF valves
General safety information
II.) Application area of valves
Standards
III.) Material selection
In order to make the right selection for the valve, several factors are important. The following table helps you to select the right material and valve type.
Pressure-temperature diagram
Chapter "Material selection"
Chemical resistance
Other criteria for the selection of

materials
Determining the material
IV.) Product selection criteria

Design of valves Chapter
"Product selection criteria"
Nature of the medium

Chapter "Product selection
criteria"
Functional properties
criteria"
Types of connections
criteria"
Selectionof valve types
V.) Overview actuators

Electric actuator
Chapter "Overview actuators"
Pneumatic Actuator
Electromagnetic actuators
Selection of actuator types
VI.) Conceptual understanding of technical data
Benefits of GF Piping Systems valves
Manual valves to actuated valves available

Interfaces for pneumatic or electrical actuators
Economical
Cost-effective
Large variety of materials for optimal chemical resistance
302
Good controllability
Long life time
Wide dimensions range
Usable in media containing solids
Wide selection of materials and sealing materials
Products and applications

The following table lists the different products and their
market segments.
Ship Build- Chemical

ing
Process Industry
Life Science MicroelectronIndustry

ics
Water Treatment
Food and
Beverage
Energy
Ball valve
Diaphragm valve
Butterfly valve
Check valve
Wafer check valve
Angle seat valveand

strainer
Process control valve
Ventilating and bleed

valve
Solenoid valve
Variable area flow

meter
+ = suitable
0 = conditionally suitable
- = not suitable
General safety information

The following general safety notesare an overview.
They should show compact the important instructions
and warnings of serious injuries and further damage in
specific areas such as "Intended use", "request to the
user, "transport and storage", "Installation of the valves
" and "Technical data" and information. In the following
chapters on the "general safety"are listed only specific
reference forproduct safety information.
Intended use
Valves are intended exclusively for shutting off and conveying media in the allowable pressure and temperature range or for controlling flow in piping systems which
they have been installed.
DANGER
Ignore the chemical resistance
Serious injury or death caused by disregard
Read the instructions on chemical resistance
Choose the best material with help from
the chemical resistance list
Use valves only in intended environment
Contact in borderline cases the responsible
people from Georg Fischer Piping Systems
Ltd.
DANGER
Valve failure due to wrong choice of material
Death or serious injury can occur due to contact with medium. Valve body, gaskets, diaphragms, backing diaphragm, housing and
mechanical parts can be damaged or impaired in their function due to diffusion effects, lack of chemical resistance, external influences and worn out diaphragm.
Ensure Chemical resistance of all components: refer to the Georg Fischer Planning
Fundamentals for chemical resistance. In
case of doubt contact your Georg Fischer
representative.
Requirements for user and operator responsibility
The valves must only be used according to the specifications for which they have been intended, as indicated in the previous paragraph
Piping system must be installed by professionals and
its functionality is checked regularly
Installation, operation, service and repairs must only
be carried out by qualified personnel
Users and operators must be instructed on a regular basis in all aspects of work safety and environmental protection especially those pertaining to pressurebearing piping systems
The users and operators must be familiar with the perating instructions and must adhere to the information.
303
Instruction Manual
Installation of valves
DANGER
NOTICE
Disregard instruction manual

Serious injuries or death by disregarding
Read and follow the instruction manual
Keep instruction manual is always available at the product
Pass instruction manual to future users of
the product
Fixation of the valve

Due to temperature changes, longitudinal or
lateral forces may occur if thermal expansion
is constrained
Absorb forces via respective fixed points
before or after the valve
Operation of a valve causes reactive forces
which could damage the valve:Mount the
valve as a fixed point with the designated
fastener if availableor reinforce the piping
directly before and after the valve with suitable supports
Superimposed loadings could damage the
valve: Valve and piping must be aligned
The instruction manuals for all valves you can receive

from your responsible representative at Georg Fischer
Piping Systems Ltd. or www.piping.georgfischer.com.
Transport and storage
Valves should be transported and stored in its original
packaging
The valve must be protected from harmful influences
such as dirt, dust, humidity and especially heat and
UV radiation
The connection ends should not be damaged mechanically or in any other way
The valves should be stored in opened position
DANGER
Defective valves
Serious injuries or death by defective valves
Use valves only in a technical perfect condition
DANGER
Exceeded operating pressure
The maximum operating pressure of the entire valve is determined by the maximum allowable operating pressure of the connecting part. Exceeding the maximum operating
pressure can result in serious injury or death.
Do not exceed maximum operating pressure
avoid pressure surges
NOTICE
Tightening the union nuts
Coupling nuts are hand-tightened withoutthe useof auxiliary tools. Through the use of
pliers or similar tools, the materials of screw
caps are damaged. There is also the damage
to damage the thread when exceeding the
thightening torque.
Only hand-tighten
DANGER
Elastomers
Serious injuries or death by damage to the
pipe and fittings with non-compatible use of
elastomers.
Select therightelastomer material and
valve material
Reed information
For questions, please contact your national
distributor of GF Piping Systems.
DANGER
Medium speed
Serious injury or death due to failure to provide acceptable medium speed
Reed information
For questions, please contact your national
distributor of GF Piping Systems.
304
Information about normal operations

and maintenanceare available at
www.piping.georgfischer.com
Spare parts
In exchange use only the original

valves and spare parts from Georg
Fischer Piping Systems Ltd.
Technical facts
Logarithmic axis scale
Please note the diagrams in the division axis

kv -values
The flow volume for any intermediate

position of the valve is determined
from the kv 100 value, multiplied by
the percentage of the kv value from
the flow characteristics diagram.
305
The engineering design of valves supplied by GF is

based on the following design standards:
EN ISO 16135: Industrial valves - Ball valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16136: Industrial valves - Butterfly valves of
thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16137: Industrial valves - Check valves of
thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16138: Industrial valves - Diaphragm valves
of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 16139: Industrial valves - Gate valves of thermoplastic materials
EN ISO 21787: Industrial valves - Valves of thermoplastic materials
The valves fully comply with the requirements set out in
the above standards. In many cases, they exceed the
requirements for pressure/temperature load capacity. It
should be noted that depending on the engineering design, at high temperatures, there may be a reduction in
the application limits of pipes and fittings, whether this
be in the amount of the permitted pressure or the maximum temperature.
306
Material selection
In order to make the right material selection, the pressure-temperature diagram might help you. The pressure-temperature diagram is based on a curve showing
the pressure course at a certain temperature. With the
diagram, the material can be determined, because not
every material can withstand the same pressure rating.
Depending on the design of the valve their pressuretemperature diagrams may differ from those for pipes
and fittings, e.g. limited temperature range due to a seal
or lower pressure loading at higher temperatures. This
has to be considered when dimensioning the piping system.
Water
Ambient temperature
Medium temperature
Furthermore, the proper handling plays an important
role to the max. life time. Regular maintenance is also
an important factor that must be considered.
Pressure-Temperature-Diagram
Detailed information is available in

the different valve chapters.
Chemical resistance
Pipes made from plastics are used not only for drinking
water, water for general use and waste water, but also
for the conveyance of aggressive liquids and gases. It
is, however, important that the most suitable plastic material is selected for each application. The Chemical Resistance List in this section serves as a useful guide in
this respect. It contains the essential thermoplasts and
elastomers of the GF product range which can, either
through environments or through external influences,
come into direct contact with the media.
Chemical resistance
More detailed information are available in the chapter Material selection- Chemical resistance.
Other criteria for the selection of materials

The following criteria must be taken into consideration
when selecting the material.
Internal pressure
Soil and traffic loads
Cold
Heat
UV
Chemical environment
Fragmentation
Gas blow
Steam pressure
Diffusion
Static electricity
Flammable substances
Explosive environment
Corrosion
Air
Humidity
307
Product selection criteria

Common types of valves
Butterfly valve
The butterfly valve controls
the flow by using a circular
disk or vane with its pivot axis
at right angles to the direction
of flow in the pipe. The butterfly valve requires a minimum
of space and is used both for
open/close and throttling services.
the cone also prevents jamming. Malfunctions are thus

excluded.
Ball valve
The ball valve is similar in
concept to the plug valve but
uses arotating ball with a
hole through it that allows
straight-through flow in the
open position and shuts off
flow when the ball is rotated90 to block the flow passage. This valve is used for
open/close functions and also
for throttling services.
Cone check valve

The unique check cone to
prevent the backflow of media forms the core of the new
generation of valves. The
optimized flow geometry reduces the flow resistance and
the pressure loss to a minimum. Thanks to new sealing
zone and specially designed
profile seal, the valve is completely sealed, even during
very fast closing movements.
The check cone has the contour of a sphere in the sealing
zone. The double bearing of
308
Wafer check valve

If a medium flows in the flow
direction, so it opens up the
plate of the wafercheck valve
and thus the flow is possible.
If the medium pressure falls
below a certain limit, the flap
closes again.

If the inlet pressure rises
above the set value, the pressurised valve piston is lifted
against the spring force. Consequently, the valve opens
and there is a reduction of
pressure in the outlet pipe.
The valve closes as soon as
the inlet pressure sinks below
the preset spring tension.
Diaphragm valve
The diaphragm valve has
a flexible membrane that is
moved by means of a pressure pin. When the pressure pin is located in the lower position, the diaphragm
is pushed onto a stage and
the flow is interrupted. Diaphragm valves are well suited for corrosive, abrasive and
dirty media.
Ventilating valve and Ventilating and Bleed valve

When ventilation and bleed
valve, a novel float provides a
complete and reliable venting
of piping systems and tanks.
At the same time, the valve
prevents a media overflow.
The ventilating valve is used
everywhere where a safe and
controlled air supply must
be ensured. The float has
the contours of a spherical
surface in the sealing zone
and is completely flush with
the sealing ring. The double
bearing of the float additionally prevent it from jamming,
even in very rapid closing
movements.
Angle seat check valve

The angle seat
check valve has a plunger,
which is arranged in the middle of the valve and presses on a flat stamp or seat.
By turning up the stamp, the
valve opens. This valve is
suitable for open/close functions or for controlling media

free of foreign particles.
Variable area flow meter

A variable area flow meter
consists of a conical tube
that is passed by the medium from bottom to top. In
this cone, there is a vertically moving float. If a medium
flows at a sufficient flow rate
upwards through the vertically mounted taper tube,
the float is raised to the point
at which a state of equilibrium sets in between the lifting force of the medium and
the weight of the float. Since
the mean flow rate is proportional to the quantity flowing through per unit of time,
this state of equilibrium corresponds to the measurement
of the current flow rate.

Type
Free of foreign particles
Containing particles,
crystallising
Viscous
Gaseous
Ball valve
Diaphragm valve
Butterfly valve
Check valve
Wafer check valve
Angle seat check valve
Ventilating valve and Ventilating and Bleed valve
Solenoid valve
Strainer
+ = recommended
- = not recommended
x = not possible / not existing
309
Type
Adjustable
Position indicator
Piggable
Leakproof under
vacuum
Triggering pressure surge
Ball valve
- 1)
Diaphragm valve
Butterfly valve
- 1)
Check valve
Wafer check valve
Angle seat check valveand Angle seat valve
Ventilating valve and

Ventilating and Bleed
valve
Solenoid valve
Strainer
+ = recommended
- = not recommended
* = available for accessories
x = not possible / not existing
1) = make sure the actuation is slow (manual valve / pneumatic valve with throttle)
There are different types of connections for the valves.
Each of these connections has several characteristics
that should be considered when selecting the connection.
More information is available in the Chapter Jointing technology.
Union
Flexible
Large variety of unions according to standards
Non-permanent connection
Uniform surface pressure on jointing face
Variable in sealing materials
Spigot connection
Permanent connection
Purity of the connection
Reasonable price
Low component costs
Flange
Non-permanent connection
Many standard parts from different suppliers available
Dismountable with standard tools
Variable in sealing materials
Common jointing method in CPI and Energy
310
The following tables list the different types of connection

with the corresponding materials. The tables are intended as an overview.
More information is available in the product
catalogues.
Sockets
Picture
Designation
Standard
Material
Solvent cement socket
ASTM, BS, ISO,JIS
ABS, PVC-C, PVC-U
Threaded socket
ASTM, ISO, JIS/RC, Messing,

NPT, RP
ABS, PVC-C, PVC-U, PVDF,

PP-H, Messing
Fusion socket
ISO
PE-100, PP-H, PVDF
Designation
Standard
Material
Cement spigot
ISO
PVC-C, PVC-U
Threaded spigotR
Brass
Socket fusion spigot
ISO
PP-H, PVDF
Butt fusion spigot
ISO, IR-Plus, SDR11,

SDR17.6
PE-100, PP-H, PP-R, PVDF
Spigot
Picture
311
Flange
Picture
Designation
Standard
Material
Fixed flange
ISO, JIS
PP-H, PVC-U, PVDF
Backing flange
ANSI, ISO, JIS
PP-St, PVC-U, PP-H, PVDF
Designation
Material
Union nut
ABS, PROGEF Standard,

PVC-C, PVC-U, SYGEF Standard
Designation
Material
Blind connection part
PVC-U
Coupling nuts
Picture
Others
Picture
312
Overview actuators
An actuator supports the opening and closing of valves

with the help of an electric motor or with pneumatics.
There are a number of actuators that are distinguished
in electric actuators and pneumatic actuators. Furthermore, rotary actuators and linear actuators can be distinguished.
An electric motor actuator for pipe valves is a special
type of actuator. They are used everywhere where compressed air as an auxiliary energy for operation is not
available. They are preferably used in pipeline and plant
construction.
A pneumatic actuator is an actuator which is operated
by compressed air and requires no electrical energy.
Part-turn actuators are a special type of rotary actuators
and are used for the automation of quarter turn valves,
such as butterfly alves or ball valves. They have an output movement of less than 360. In general, the internal
drive gear segment is designed for a 90 movement.
The following table provides an overview of each actuator and shows the special features of the different actuator types. It should also help you with your decision.
Electric actuator
Advantages
Ease of installation
Well defined performance
No energy consumption in switching pauses
Intermediate position possible
Easy to maintain
Subsequent additional elements mountable
Robust PP-GF case with very good chemical resistance
Flexible composition thanks to modular design, easy handling
Additional safety due to unit and battery pack (optional)
Long life time due to robust design and best electronics
Suitable for universal use due to wide range power supply and standard interfaces
Numerous monitoring and control capabilities with intelligent, self-learning accessories
Characteristics
Relatively high cost

Low maintenance costs
Long cycle time
Additional equipment necessary for defined end positions
Versions
Heating element and return unit for increased safety

Additional mechanical limit switches for feedback
Optional adapter according to EN ISO 5211 for F04 and F05 interface
Operating status monitoring
Drive monitoring on an additional board: Response time monitoring, cycle counter, motor current monitoring, cycle time extension
Position detection and 4-20mA position feedback
Positioner
313
Pneumatic Actuator
Advantages
Short switching time

Low cost
Performance on variable pressure control
Defined end position
Easy to maintain
Stroke limiter (to change manually)
Flow control is possible with additional elements
Robust PP-GF housing
Full plastic actuator
Position indicator with integrated NAMUR interface
Fast cycle times
Very good price-performance ratio for all versions
Multi functional module available with different limit switch versions
Wide torque range, from 8 Nm up to 3840 Nm
Construction of various limit switch versions without any problems
Low installation height
Characteristics
Control valve necessary

Compressed air required
Position feedback for additional elements necessary
Intermediate positions require more effort
Versions
Position feedback
Digital positioner
Opportunities for bus connection asAS-i
Adapters for F04 and F05 interface
Electromagnetic Actuators
Advantages

High switching frequency
Easy to maintain
Characteristics
Maximum operating pressure 6 bar

Maximum operating pressure depending on DN
Differential pressure necessary for servo-controlled solenoid valves
Permanent demand for electricity in the open position
Sensitive against solids when servo-controlled
Flow control requires high effort
Versions
Direct-acting solenoid valves

Servo-controlled solenoid valves
Pilot valves
314
Conceptual understanding of technical data

Pressure-temperature diagram for valves
The following conditions must be fulfilled for applications
of the pressure-temperature diagrams (p-T diagrams),
which are given for the respective valve types:
Low stress valve installation

The valve must be mounted in the piping system installation so that the piping does not cause any restraints on the valve, which could have a negative effect on valve operation.
Appropriate fixed points before and after the valve
When a pipe heats up/cools off, it will expand/contract. Such thermal expansion should be kept, if at
all possible, from the valve because it could have a
negative effect on valve operation. We recommend
mounting fixed points beforeand after the valve.
Technical data
Operating torque
This diagram indicates the torque required for the opening and closing movement.
These are always reference values.
For some valve types, data are also given regarding

how much tighter the initial breakaway torque can be
compared to the operating torque. This occurs when a
valve sits in the same position for a long period of time.
This initial breakaway torque must be considered when
selecting actuators from other suppliers. These initial
breakaway torques have been taken into consideration
for the electric and pneumatic actuators from GF.
Pressure loss
The pressure loss, which occurs when a medium flows
through a valve, is required for the hydraulic dimensioning of a piping system. The respective pressure loss for
the individual valve types in the completely opened position is given in the pressure loss diagrams in relation
to the desired flow volume.
tive nominal diameter of the valves. These apply to a

completely opened valve. They are given in the following units:
kv 100 value in l/min at 1 bar pressure loss
kv 100 value in m /h at 1 bar pressure loss
Cv 100 value in US gal/min at 1 psi pressure loss
3
The flow volume for any intermediate position of the

valve is determined from the kv 100 value, multiplied by
the percentage of the kv value from the flow characteristics diagram.
Tightening torques
For valves with flange connections, the recommended
values for tightening the screws, and the required number and length ofscrews are given. These values differ
according to the type of seal. Profile gaskets and O-ring
seals require less tightening torque than the flat gaskets.
Conversion factors
kv - Cv
In Europe, the kv value is related to a flow rate of 1 m/h
at 16 C and a pressure loss of 1 bar. In US, it is called
Cv and relates to a flow rate of 1 US gal/min at a temperature of 60 F and a pressure loss of 1 psi. That
means:
with:
Cv
Cv Value in US gal/min
kv
kv Value in Europe in m/h
1 m
264.1722 US gal
1bar
14.50377psi
kv
kv
Cv
kv
1 m/h
16.67 l/min
1.1561 US gal/min
1 l/min
0.069 US gal7min
kv 0.06 m/h
Cv
0.865 m/h 14.42 l/min
1 US gal/min
Please note the logarithmic axis scale of

the flow rate and pressure loss.
Flow characteristics
The percentage flow characteristics of the individual
valve types is also given in diagram form. Based on an
aperture angle in percent (0 % = valve closed; 100 % =
valve completely open), the percentage of the kv value
can be determined from the diagram.
kv 100 values
The kv value is a characteristic value for the flow volume of a valve at a specific pressure loss in the valve.
The kv 100 values are indicated in tables for the respec-
315
316
Ball valves type 546 DN10 - DN100

-- Overview
-- Safety information
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Instructions for use
-- Accessories
Ball valve type 543

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
Ball valve type 523

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Ball valve type 375

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Ball valve type 322

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Ball valve Coloro

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Page
318
319
320
323
326
326
337
338
339
348
353
354
356
357
358
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
368
369
369
370
371
371
373
374
375
317
Fundamentals for ball valves,

hand operated
Ball valves type 546 DN10 - DN100
Overview
Product description
Manual ball valves are used for shutting off or diverting

gaseous or liquid media. They are used in various application areas. Their numerous specific product features
offer quality, flexibility, safety and, first of all, modularity.
With ball valve type 546 you obtain a well-engineered
product, which incorporates over 40 years experience of
GF Piping Systems' know how with plastic pipes. With
ball valve type 546 you get a product that is part of a
modular system. A ball valve as part of a system, which
considers your requirements for operational safety as
well as your ecological and economic requirements.
Ball valve type 546 with fixed flange serrated metric
Versions
Ball valve type 546 is characterised by its versatility.

This is reflected in the different connection types and
the choice of materials. From the simple standard version up to the actuated version, we off er you all variations with a broad range of accessories. Even the manual version has interesting additional functions, such as
the integrated fixing system and a lockable lever with
catch function. With the function module, the valve positions Open/Closed of the control can be fed back in various signal types.
Ball valve type 546 with backing flange metric
Ball valve type 546 with solvent cement sockets
Product features
Ball valve type 546 with solvent cement spigots
Ball valve type 546 with threaded sockets Rp
318
From the manual valve to the automated valve with

many options - from electrical position feedback, the
lockable hand lever up to the pipe clip
The greatest range of products (via the configurator,
all executions can be generated)
Ergonomic hand lever (optionally lockable) with integrated tool for dismounting the union bushing
Integrated fixation system with mounted threaded inserts
Overview
General
Type
546
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
ABS / PP-H: 10
PVC / PVDF: 16
Materials used
Hand lever
PPGF30
Ball seal
PTFE
Materials for valve body
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
FFPM
FPM
Accessories
Additional limit switches (multifunction module)
Standard hand lever red or black
Multifunctional hand lever
Hand lever extension
Mounting plate
Klip-IT Pipe Clips
Klip-IT Spacer
Safety information
CAUTION
Media containing solids
These could lead to damages/leakage due to
abrasion.
During control operation, cavitation has to
be avoided.
WARNING
Removing the pipeline
Uncontrolled escape of the medium can
cause injury.
Before dismounting, release all pressure
from the piping system.
With hazardous, flammable or explosive
media, the piping system must be completely emptied and rinsed before the valve
may be dismounted.
Make sure that the medium is caught safely with the appropriate measures.
Open the dismounted ball valve of type 546
halfway (45 position) and let the 546 drain
in a vertical position catch the medium in
an appropriate vessel.
319
NOTICE
Installation of the ball valve
The ball valve must always be built into the
system in the opened position.
Graph
Exploded view
DN10 - DN50
DANGER
Selection of lubricants
Using the wrong lubricants can damage the
material of the ball valve or seals. Consequences can be death or serious injuries.
Never use petroleum-based greases or
Vaseline (Petrolatum).
For silicon-free ball valves, please consult
the special manufacturers instructions.
All seals should be lubricated with a silicon-based grease.
CAUTION
Handling of the seals
All the seals (made of e.g. EPDM, FPM) are
organic materials which react to environmental influences. They must therefore be kept in
their original packaging, and stored cool, dry
and dark. The seals should be checked for
damages from aging, such as fissures and
hardening, before mounting.
Do not use defective spare parts.
CAUTION
Overstraining by exceeding the maximum
pressure
The test pressure on a valve must not exceed the value 1.5 x PN, (maximum PN + 5
bar). The component with the lowest PN determines the maximum allowable test pressure in the piping section.
Check the valves and connections on tightness during the pressure test. Document
your results.
320
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Housing
Union bush
Valve end
Union nut
Ball
Stem
Ball seal
Backing seal
Body seal
Union seal
Stem seal
Standard hand lever
Hand lever clip
DN65 - DN100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Housing
Union bush
Connecting part
Union nut
Ball
Stem
Ball seal
Backing seal
Body seal
Union seal
Stem seal
Standard hand lever
Hand lever clip
Dimensions
More dimensions of valves in different materials and with various connection types
are availablein the ball valves product
ranges.
Ball valve type 546 with solvent cement socketsmetric
H1
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
50
57
27
92
77
56
25
32
45
64
20
50
57
27
95
77
56
25
32
45
64
25
58
67
30
110
97
65
25
39
58
72
32
68
73
36
123
97
71
25
39
58
79
40
84
90
44
146
128
85
45
54
74
94
50
97
97
51
157
128
89
45
54
74
95
63
124
116
64
183
152
101
45
66
87
107
75
166
149
85
233
270
136
70
64
206
144
90
200
161
105
254
270
141
70
64
206
151
100
238
178
123
301
320
164
120
64
256
174
Ball valve type 546 with solvent cement spigotsmetric
321
H1
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
50
57
27
114
77
56
25
32
45
20
50
57
27
124
77
56
130
25
32
45
25
58
67
30
144
97
65
150
25
39
58
32
68
73
36
154
97
71
160
25
39
58
40
84
90
44
174
128
85
180
45
54
74
50
97
97
51
194
128
89
200
45
54
74
63
124
116
64
224
152
101
230
45
66
87
75
166
149
85
284
270
136
290
70
64
206
90
200
161
105
300
270
141
310
70
64
206
100
238
178
123
340
320
164
350
120
64
256
Ball valve type 546 with threaded socket Rp
Rp
H1
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
57
27
92
77
56
25
32
45
64
50
57
27
95
77
56
25
32
45
64
58
67
30
110
97
65
25
39
58
72
68
73
36
123
97
71
25
39
58
79
84
90
44
146
128
85
45
54
74
94
97
97
51
157
128
89
45
54
74
95
124
116
64
183
152
101
45
66
87
107
166
149
85
233
270
136
70
64
206
144
200
161
105
254
270
141
70
64
206
151
238
178
123
301
320
164
120
64
256
174
322
Ball valve type 546 with fixed flange serrated metric
D1
D3
H1
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
95
65
14
57
27
124
77
56
130
25
32
45
25
105
75
14
67
30
144
97
65
150
25
39
58
32
115
85
14
73
36
154
97
71
160
25
39
58
40
140
100
18
90
44
174
128
85
180
45
54
74
50
150
110
18
97
51
194
128
89
200
45
54
74
63
165
125
18
116
64
224
152
101
230
45
66
87
Ball valve type 546 with backing flange metric
H1
H2
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
166
149
85
15
284
270
136
70
64
206
M8
90
200
161
105
15
300
270
141
70
64
206
M8
110
238
178
123
22
340
320
164
120
64
256
M12
Technical data
The following pressure-temperature diagrams are based

on a lifetime of 25 years and the medium water or similar media.
323
ABS
PVC-C
Permissible pressurein bar, psi
1)
Temperature in C, F
The central part of the ball valve is designed for the nominal
pressure PN 16
2)
Depending on the valve end, the nominal pressure is reduced

to PN 10
Temperature in C, F
PP
PVDF
1)
E. g. ball valve with PP or PE100 spigot end, SDR 17
Temperature in C, F

the dotted lines, please contact your GF representative.
PVC-U
1)
E. g. ball valve with threaded sockets

EPDM-sealingto max. 100 C
Temperature in C, F
Pressure loss
DN 10 - DN 50
1)
The central part of the ball valve is designed for the nominal
pressure PN 16
2)

to PN 10
3)

to PN 6
Temperature in C, F
324
X
Y
Medium: water 20 C
Flow rate (l/min), (US gal./min)
Pressure lossp (bar), (psi)
DN 65 - DN 100
X
Y
Medium: water 20 C
kv 100 values
DN
[mm]
DN
[inch]
d [mm] kv 100
l/min
(p = 1
bar))
Cv 100
US gal/
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar
10
16
70
4.9
4.2
15
20
185
12.9
11.1
20
25
350
24.5
21
25
32
700
49.0
42
32
40
1000
70.0
60
40
50
1600
112.0
96
50
63
3100
217.1
186
65
75
5000
350
300
80
90
7000
490
420
100
110
11000
770
660
The kv values for each intermediate valve position can

be determined by using the flow value characteristics
and the kv 100 values.
Operating torque
X
Y
Open angle (%)

kv, cv value (%)
DN 10 - DN 50
Flow characteristics for linear ball valve type

546
For dimensions d20 DN15, d32 DN25and d63 DN50,a

special ball with linear flow characteristics is available.
X
Y
Size DN (mm, inch)

Torque (Nm, Ib-ft)
DN 65 - DN 100
Open angle (%)
kv, cv value (%)
X
Y
Size DN (mm, inch)

Torque (Nm, Ib-ft)
Reference values for screw tightening torque

of type 546
Flanged joints with flange gaskets or flat gaskets
325
d
mm
DN
[mm
DN
[inch
Total number of screws (for 2

flanged joints) standard nut
(height 0.8 x d)1)
Torque
(reference values)
Profile flange gasket2)
Torque
(reference values)
Flat gasket
in Nm
in lb-ft
in Nm
in lb-ft
20
15
8 x M12 x 50
10
7.4
10
7.4
25
20
8x M12 x 55
10
7.4
10
7.4
32
25
8x M12 x 60
10
7.4
15
11
40
32
8x M16 x 70
15
11
20
15
50
40
8x M16 x 70
15
11
25
18
63
50
8x M16 x 80
20
15
35
26
75
65
8x M16 x 90
25
18
50
37
90
80
16x M16 x 100
15
11
30
22
110
100
16x M20 x 130
20
15
35
26
For valve ends type 546 made of PP in combination with backing flanges, use half of the standard nut
height.
1)
2)
Preferred gasket type (suited for plastics)

For more information on the use of the different gasket types, see Chapter: Jointing
Technology Mechanical Joints
Instructions for use

Maintenance
Ball valves require no maintenance under normal operating conditions. However, the following measures must
be considered:
Periodic check that no media escapes to the outside.
We recommend a function test for ball valves which
are kept permanently in the same position 12 x a
year to check serviceability.
For frequent control operations valve automation, or
due to chemical attack on the sealing material it may
become necessary to replace parts inside the valve. For
this purpose, the valve must be removed from the piping
system.
Accessories
Multifunctional module
1
2
3
4
326
Housing
Housing cover
Stainless steel Torx screws
Caps
DN10 - DN50
More information about accessories are
available in the product ranges or in the
online catalogue.
Functions:
Interface for mounting actuators
Feedback unit in combination with actuators, also for
manual valve with multifunctional hand lever
Mechanical interface back wall assembly
Assembly of multifunctional module incl. switches
Housing
Cover
Switching disk
Switch holder
Microswitch "OPEN"
Microswitch "CLOSE"
Connector plug 3P + E per DIN EN 175301-803 (formerly DIN

43650)
Seal
General technical data of multifunctional module

Protection class with DIN unit plug (7): IP 65
Protection class with cable gland: IP 67
Ambient temperature: -10 C to +50 C
Type of switch
Contact rating
Microswitch silver
Nickel (Ag Ni)
250 V~ 6 A *)
Circuit diagram
Microswitch with gold con- 4 - 30 V=

tact (Au)
1 100mA
*) for ohm resistive load. For inductive loads, provide a protective circuit!
closed
open
black
blue (short cable)
blue (long cable)
327
Type of switch
Contact rating
Inductive switch NPN
5 -30 V=
0.1 A
Inductive switch PNP
5 -30 V=
0.1 A
Type of switch
Nominal ratings
Inductive switch Namur approvals: ATEX

2032x, CSA
EMC according to
EN 60947-5-2 conformance
EN 60947-5-6
8V=
328
Circuit diagram
closed
open
blue
black
black
brown
Circuit diagram
closed
open
blue
brown
DN65 - DN100
Coupling piece
Assembly of multifunctional module incl. switches
Multifunctional module with built-in limit

switches
Functions:
Interface for mounting actuators
Position feedback in combination with actuators
Also for manual valve- with multifunctional hand lever
Housing
Cover
Switching disk
Microswitch "OPEN"
Microswitch "CLOSE"
Connector plug 3P + E per DIN EN 175301-803 (formerly DIN

43650)
Seal
General technical data of multifunctional module

Protection class with DIN unit plug (7): IP65
Protection class with cable gland: IP67
Ambient temperature -10 C to +50 C
Type of switch
Contact rating
Microswitch silver
Nickel (Ag Ni)
250 V~ 6 A *)
Microswitch with gold contact (Au)
4 - 30 V=
1 100mA
*) for ohm resistive load. For inductive loads, provide a protective circuit!
329
Circuit diagram
closed
open
black
blue (short cable)
blue (long cable)
Circuit diagram
Type of switch
Contact rating
5 -30 V=
0.1 A
5 -30 V=
0.1 A
Circuit diagram
closed
open
blue
black
black
brown
Type of switch
Nominal ratings
Inductive switch Namur approvals:

ATEX 2032x, CSA
EMC according to
EN 60947-5-2 conformance
EN 60947-5-6
8 V=
330
closed
open
blue
brown
DN
L1
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16-20
10-15
77
32
45
31
26
25
20
97
39
58
37
34
32
25
97
39
58
37
34
40
32
128
54
74
46
40
50
40
128
54
74
46
40
63
50
152
66
87
54
44
75
65
270
64
206
58
106
90
80
270
64
206
58
106
100
100
320
64
256
60
106
Multifunctional hand lever with ratchet settings, lockable
DN65 - DN100
DN10 - DN50
1
2
3
4
5
6

Spacer
Fastening screw (Torx)
Spring
Hand lever clip
Unlocking latch
1
2
Hand lever clip

331
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Spring
Unlocking latch
Mounting screw
Index plate
End stop
Washer
Nut
Dimensions
If ball valve 546 is equipped with the multi-function lever, a multifunction module is necessary in the dimensions DN65-100.
d-d
DN-DN
D1
L1
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16 - 20
10 - 15
26
53
87
42
45
- 25
- 20
34
59
108
50
58
- 32
- 25
34
59
108
50
58
- 40
- 32
40
69
140
66
75
- 50
- 40
40
69
140
66
75
- 63
- 50
44
80
165
78
87
- 75
- 65
115
12
105
270
64
206
- 90
- 80
115
12
105
270
64
206
110 -140
100 - 125
115
12
107
320
64
256
332

Consisting of adapter pieces for lever connector and pin connector
Pipe adapter of the desired length has to be procured by the customer.
d-d
DN-DN
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16 - 20
10 - 15
41
52
29
36
26
25 - 32
20 - 25
50
62
32
39
36
40 - 50
32 - 40
65
76
34
44
40
- 63
- 50
84
87
37
48
44
333
Mounting plate
Designation
d 16 - 32
d 40 - 63
DN10 - 25
DN32 - 50
mm
mm
106
149
48
54
20
20
L1
92
134
L2
62
104
L3
31
52
L4
41
62
L5
25
45
H1
14
14
H2
6.5
8.5
Fastening screw
M6 x 14
M8 x 18
334
Klip-IT Pipe Clips
D1
L1
L2
H1
H2
H3
SC
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
11
14
17
27
10
16
M5
20
11
17
19
27
10
16
M5
25
11
19
22
30
10
16
M5
32
11
24
27
36
10
16
M5
40
14
34
34
44
10
22
M6
50
14
37
37
51
10
22
M6
63
17
45
45
64
10
10
25
M8
335
Klip-IT Spacer
inch
L1
L2
H1
H2
SC
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
14
17
20
10
16
M5
20
17
19
20
10
16
M5
25
19
22
20
10
16
M5
32
24
27
20
10
16
M5
40
34
34
20
10
22
M6
50
37
37
20
10
22
M6
63
45
45
20
10
25
M8
336
Ball valve type 543
Vertical/ L-port
Overview
Product description
With the new three-way ball valve type 543, GF Piping

Systems offers you a comprehensive model range with
a broad range of accessories for all versions - from the
manual valve up to the actuated version. Ball valve type
543 is the perfect valve for demanding mixing and distribution processes. It is used in various fields, such as
chemical process industry, water treatment, ship building and many more. The ball valve type 543 is available
as a horizontal and vertical version.
Versions
The new three-way ball valve type 543 appears in the

design of the ball valve type 546 and is available in
sizes DN10 to DN50. It offers quality, flexibility and security. This applies to both the horizontal and for the
vertical valve. The horizontal design with an L- or Tport in the ball is available in the materials PVC-U, PVCC, ABS, PP-H and PVDF. Thus, you have the rightvalve for all applications. The vertical variation of the
ball valve type 543 is available in the materials PVC-U
and ABS. In the vertical model, the third outlet consists
of a solvent socket according to the metric standard. As
an additional version of the L-port in the ball, a tripod
ball can be used in the ball valve.
Horizontal/ L-port
Product features
From the manual valve to the actuated ball valve with

several options
Indicator for the position of the ball on the hand lever
Integrated fixing system with theraded inserts (horizontal)
Hand lever with integrated tool for adjustment of the
union bushings
The horizontal version includes three ball seals
90 end stop included for all horizontal valves
Clear design guaranteed due to indexed ball, stem
and hand lever
Horizontal/ T-port
337
Overview
General
Type
543 horizontal
543 vertical
Dimension DN
10 - 50
10 - 50
Pressure range PN
10
10
Materials used
Hand lever
Ball seal
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
FFPM
FPM
Accessories
90 and 180 stop
Fixing hand lever
Safety information
CAUTION
abrasion.
be avoided.
WARNING
Uncontrolled escape of the medium can
cause injury.
may be dismounted.
Make sure that the medium is caught safely with the appropriate measures.
Open the dismounted valve type 543
halfway (45 position) and let the 543 drain
in a vertical position catch the medium in
an appropriate vessel.
338
NOTICE
DANGER
CAUTION
Graph
Exploded view type 543 horizontal

CAUTION
pressure
your results.
The kv values are shown in %, i.e. to determine the absolute values, these are to be
multiplied by the respective table values.
Housing
Union bush
Connecting part
Union nut
Ball L/T
Stem
Ball seal
Backing seal
Body seal
10
Union seal
11
Stem seal
12
Standard hand lever
13
Hand lever clip
339
Type 543 vertical
Housing
Union bush
Connecting part
Union nut
Ball
Stem
Ball seal
Backing seal
Body seal
10
Union seal
11
Steam seals
12
Standard hand lever
13
Hand lever clip
15
16
Spacer
Dimensions horizontal/ L-port

ranges.
340
Ball valve type 543 with solvent cement sockets metric
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
z1
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
109
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
81
40
20
50
112
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
81
40
25
58
131
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
94
47
32
68
151
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
107
54
40
84
181
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
130
65
50
97
205
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
143
72
63
124
261
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
185
92
341
Rp
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
z1
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
113
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
87
43
50
117
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
85
42
58
135
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
100
50
68
155
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
113
57
84
179
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
134
67
97
201
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
155
78
124
255
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
199
99
342
Ball valve type 543 with solvent cement spigots metric
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
H1
H2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
131
77
73
36
25
32
45
137
57
28
20
50
141
77
73
36
25
32
45
147
57
28
25
58
165
97
86
43
25
39
58
171
67
32
32
68
182
97
99
50
25
39
58
188
73
36
40
84
209
128
120
60
45
54
74
215
90
45
50
97
242
128
137
69
45
54
74
248
97
51
63
124
302
152
179
89
45
66
87
308
116
65
Ball valve type 543 with butt fusion spigots long
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
50
210
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
2.3
25
58
237
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
2.3
32
68
251
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
3.0
40
84
283
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
3.7
50
97
319
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
4.6
63
124
399
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
5.8
343
Dimensions Horizontal/T-port
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
z1
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
109
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
81
40
20
50
112
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
81
40
25
58
131
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
94
47
32
68
151
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
107
54
40
84
181
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
130
65
50
97
205
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
143
72
63
124
261
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
185
92
344
Rp
L1
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
z1
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
113
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
87
43
50
117
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
85
42
58
135
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
100
50
68
155
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
113
57
84
179
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
134
67
97
201
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
155
78
124
255
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
199
99
345
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
H1
H2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
131
77
73
36
25
32
45
137
57
28
20
50
141
77
73
36
25
32
45
147
57
28
25
58
165
97
86
43
25
39
58
171
67
32
32
68
182
97
99
50
25
39
58
188
73
36
40
84
209
128
120
60
45
54
74
215
90
45
50
97
242
128
137
69
45
54
74
248
97
51
63
124
302
152
179
89
45
66
87
308
116
65
Ball valve type 543 with butt fusion sockets long
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
H1
H2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
50
210
77
73
36
25
32
45
57
28
2.3
25
58
237
97
86
43
25
39
58
67
32
2.3
32
68
251
97
99
50
25
39
58
73
36
3.0
40
84
283
128
120
60
45
54
74
90
45
3.7
50
97
319
128
137
69
45
54
74
97
51
4.6
63
124
399
152
179
89
45
66
87
116
65
5.8
346
Dimensions Vertical/L-port
L1
L2
L3
L4
H1
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
92
77
56
32
45
57
62
64
20
50
95
77
56
32
45
57
62
64
25
58
111
97
66
39
58
67
72
74
32
68
123
97
71
39
58
73
77
79
40
84
146
128
85
54
74
90
87
95
50
97
157
128
89
54
74
97
97
95
63
124
183
152
101
66
87
116
112
107
Rp
L1
L2
L3
L4
H1
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
96
77
56
32
45
57
62
69
50
99
77
56
32
45
57
62
67
58
115
97
66
39
58
67
72
78
68
127
97
71
39
58
73
77
85
84
144
128
85
54
74
90
87
100
97
153
128
89
54
74
97
97
106
124
177
152
101
66
87
116
112
121
347
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
H1
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
50
114
77
56
32
45
120
57
62
20
50
124
77
56
32
45
130
57
62
25
58
144
97
66
39
58
150
67
72
32
68
154
97
71
39
58
160
73
77
40
84
174
128
85
54
74
180
90
87
50
97
194
128
89
54
74
200
97
97
63
124
224
152
101
66
87
230
116
112
Technical data

ABS
Temperature in C, F
PVC-U
Temperature in C, F
PP
348
Temperature in C, F
PVC-C
Pressure loss, Version with T-port ball
Flow direction B ->A

determined in the pictured valve position
P
Temperature in C, F
PVDF
Temperature in C, F
EPDM-sealingto max. 100 C
Pressure loss type 543 horizontal
Medium: water 20 C
X
Flow rate (l/min, US-gal/min)
Pressure loss p (bar, psi)
Pressure loss, Version with L-port ball
Flow direction B ->C

Flow direction C ->B
determined in the pictured position
Medium: water 20 C
Medium: water 20 C
X
Flow rate (l/min, US gal/min)
Flow rate (l/min, US-gal/min)
349
Flow characteristics type 543 horizontal

Ball with L-port
Flow direction C ->B and C ->A

Open angle
kv
Flow factor for kv, cv (%)
The flow characteristics is determined in the valve positions shown below:
Medium: water 20 C
X
Pressure loss type 543 vertical

Ball with T-port
Medium: water 20 C
X

a
kv
350
Open angle
a
kv
Open angle
kv value (%)
The flow characteristics were determined in the valve

positions shown below:
Flow characteristics type 543 vertical

Ball with L-port
DN DN
kv 100
Cv 100
kv 100
mm inch
mm
l/min
US gal./min
m/h
(p=1 bar)
(p=1 psi)
(p=1 bar)
10
16
50
3.5
3.0
15
20
75
5.3
4.5
20
25
150
10.5
9.0
25
32
280
19.6
16.8
32
40
480
33.6
28.8
40
50
620
43.4
37
50
63
1230
86.1
74
Ball with L-port

Flow direction B A
determined in the following valve position:
DN DN
kv 100
Cv 100
kv 100
mm inch
mm
l/min
US gal./min
m/h
(p=1 bar)
(p=1 psi)
(p=1 bar)
10
16
10
0.7
0.6
15
20
15
1.1
0.9
20
25
30
2.1
1.8
25
32
50
3.5
3.0
32
40
90
6.3
5.4
40
50
110
7.7
6.6
50
63
220
15.4
13.2
Ball with T-port

Flow direction B A
a
Open angle
kv
kv 100 values type 543 horizontal

Ball with L-port
Flow direction B C, C B, A C, C A
351
DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1 psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1 psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
10
16
140
9.8
8.4
10
16
35
2.5
2.1
15
20
200
14
12.0
15
20
50
3.5
3.0
20
25
470
32.9
28.2
20
25
130
9.1
7.8
25
32
793
55.5
47.8
25
32
200
14
12
32
40
1290
90.3
77.4
32
40
380
26.6
23
40
50
1910
133.7
115
40
50
470
32.9
28
50
63
3100
217
186
50
63
890
62.3
53
kv 100 values type 543 vertical
Ball with T-port

Flow direction B C
The kv values for each intermediate valve position can be

determined by using the flow value characteristics and the kv
100 values.
DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1 psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
10
16
40
2.8
2.4
15
20
70
4.9
4.2
20
25
150
10.5
9.0
25
32
250
17.5
15
32
40
470
32.9
28
40
50
600
42
36
50
63
1210
84.7
73
DN
mm
DN
inch
d
mm
kv 100
l/min
(p = 1 bar)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1 bar)
10
16
50
3.0
15
20
80
4.8
20
25
140
8.4
25
32
250
15
32
40
430
26
40
50
700
42
50
63
1300
78
Operating torque
Ball with T-port

Flow direction C B and C A
Size DN (mm, inch)
Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Depending on the application (e.g. operating speed, fluid, temperature, etc.), breakaway torques of approx. 2
times the operating torque should be taken for external
actuators.
Functions type 543 horizontal
The decision whether to use a 3-way ball valve with Lor T-port depends on the desired functions the valve
has to perform:
L-port: Diverting function, closing (two ports closed)
352
Functions type 543 vertical
The decision whether to use a 3-way ball valve with Lport or tripod-port depends on the desired functions the
valve has to perform:
L -port: Diverting function, closing (two ports closed)
T-port: Diverting function, mixing function, branch
closed/passage open
Tripod-port: Diverting function,switching B-C open to AC open with 90 turn. Attention: Mixing function in the intermediate position!
The following illustration shows the individual functions
and the corresponding position of the hand lever:
Ball with L-port
B-C open
A-C open
The following illustration shows the individual functions

and the corresponding position of the hand lever:
closed
Ball with L-port

A-C open
A-B-C open
Diverting function
(normal position)
normal position
Ball with tripod port

B-C open
Mixing function
normal position
A-C open
B-C open
Diverting function

Maintenance
closed
shutting off function
A-B open
Outlet closed/
Passage open
A-B-C open
Mixing function
(normal position)
Ball valves require no maintenance under normal operation conditions. However, the following measures must
be considered:
Ball with T-port
B-C open
Diverting function
A-B open
Outlet closed/
passage opened
A-C open
Diverting function
353
Accessories
Comfort and security guaranteed to you by the details of the multifunctional lever:
Indexing with 45 - pitch

Accurate, reliable positioning of the ball
Lockable and therefore safe from unauthorized access
Made of stable PPGF
d-d
DN-DN
D1
L1
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16 - 20
10 - 15
26
53
87
42
45
- 25
- 20
34
59
108
50
58
- 32
- 25
34
59
108
50
58
- 40
- 32
40
69
140
66
75
- 50
- 40
40
69
140
66
75
DN10 - DN50
Ball with L-bore:

A-C opened / B-C
opened
A-C opened /
closed
1
2
3
4
5
6
90 stop

Spacer
Fastening screw (Torx)
Spring
Hand lever clip
Unlocking latch
The stop position enables a defined hand lever operation of 90. Itcan be adjusted in two different orientations to the desired stop position. The stop is conveniently enclosed within the hand lever and is not visible
from the outside. Place the stop in the desired control
range, before attaching the lever.
354
B-C opened /
closed
Mounting plate
Ball with T-bore:

A-B-C opened /
B-C opened
A-B opened / A-C

opened
B-C opened / A-B

opened
A-C opened / AB-C opened
The basic installation steps are listed below (a-c).

Note: Observe the indexing indication marked on the
stem and hand lever!
Designation
d 16 - 32
d 40 - 63
DN10 - 25
DN32 - 50
mm
mm
106
149
48
54
20
20
L1
92
134
L2
62
104
L3
31
52
L4
41
62
L5
25
45
H1
14
14
H2
6.5
8.5
Fastening screw
M6 x 14
M8 x 18
355
Ball valve type 523

Overview
Product description
The metering ball valve type 523 (metering valve) is the

perfect valve for the precise dosing of media in your applications. The special bore profile of the ball as well as
the 180 fine scale enable an accurate adjustment of
the dosing process.
Versions
Ball valve type 523 with solvent cement spigots
Product features
180 scale for fine adjustment

Special bore profile
Radial installation and removal
Hand lever with integrated tool for removing / adjusting union bushing
356
Overview
General
Type
523
Dimension DN
10 - 15
Pressure range PN
10
Materials used
Hand lever
PPGF30
Ball seal
PTFE
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Safety information
The following safety instructions apply specifically to ball
valve type 523. They should identify the hazards and
advice that should be considered for the different use
and installation / commissioning.
WARNING
Confusing fixed and loose side
Non-observance may lead to severe injuries
or death.
Housings are distinguished into a fixed and
a loose side. The fixed side is the side into
which the ball cannot be inserted.
Carefully read the instruction manual during the assembly.
CAUTION
pressure
your results.
CAUTION
Central part as spare part
Exchanging single components from the central part can have serious consequences.
When exchanging the ball valve type 523,
always use only the central part as a replacement.
When mounting / dismounting the ball
valve, always follow the steps of the instruction manual.
Execute a functional test prior to commissioning.
NOTICE
Observe changes in dimensions
In comparison to type 323, type 523 has different installation dimensions, connectors,
and union nuts. Using different components
and installation dimensions (than required for
type 523) may damage the piping system.
Compare the installation dimensions and
installation descriptions in the technical
documentation with the components at
hand.
357
WARNING
Risk of injury due to uncontrolled evasion
of the medium
If the pressure was not relieved completely, the medium can evade uncontrolled. Depending on the type of medium, risk of injury
may exist.
Completely relieve pressure in the pipes
prior to dismounting.
Completely empty and rinse pipe prior to
dismounting in connection with harmful,
flammable, or explosive media. Pay attention to potential residues.
Provide for safe collection of the medium
by implementing appropriate measures
(e.g. connection of a collection container).
After dismounting, the ball valve should be
stored or disassembled.
Partially open the dismounted ball valve
(45 position) and let it drain in vertical position. Thereby, collect the medium.
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to false mounting of the
ball valve to the pipe
The ball valve must always be installed in
open position.
CAUTION
Pay attention to arrows on scale
Rotating the scale will impair the functionality. This can cause incorrect setting of the ball
position.
Pay attention to the arrows on the scale.
These must always point into the direction
of the fixed side.
The flow direction is also indicated by the
marker.
358
Graph
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Housing
Union bush
Valve end
Union nut
Ball
Stem
Ball seal
Backing seal
Body seal
Union seal
Stem seal
Standard hand lever
Hand lever clip
Threaded bush
Position indicator
Scale disc
Dimensions
ranges.
DN
H1
L1
L2
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
68
27
92
77
56
32
45
20
15
50
68
27
95
77
56
32
45
DN
H1
L1
L2
L4
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
68
27
114
77
56
25
32
20
15
50
68
27
124
77
56
25
32
Ball valve type 523 with solvent cement sockets JIS
inch
DN
H1
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
15
50
68
27
95
77
56
25
32
45
359
Ball valve type 523 with solvent cement sockets inch BS
DN
H1
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
68
27
92
77
56
25
32
45
15
50
68
27
95
77
56
25
32
45
Ball valve type 523 with solvent cement sockets inch ASTM
inch
DN
H1
H2
L1
L2
L4
L5
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
68
27
12
105
77
56
25
32
15
50
68
27
12
105
77
56
25
32
Ball valve type 523 with Threaded sockets Rp
Rp
DN
H1
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
68
27
95
77
56
25
32
45
15
50
68
27
100
77
56
25
32
45
360
Pressure loss
Technical data

PP
X
Y
Medium: water 20 C
P
Temperature in C, F

PVC-U
X
Y
Open angle (%)

Flow factor kv, cv (%)
kv 100 values
DN
[mm]
DN
[inch]
d [mm] kv 100
l/min
(p = 1
bar))
Cv 100
US gal/
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar
10
16
11
0.8
0.7
Temperature in C, F
15
20
20
1.4
1.2
PVDF

Operating torque
Temperature in C, F
Reference values for tightening torque of screws
X
Y
Size DN (mm, inch)

Torque (Nm, Ib-ft)
dmm
DNmm DN
[inch]
Total number of screws (for 2

flanged joints) standard nut
(height 0.8 x d)1)
Torque(reference values)
Profile flange gasket2)
Torque
(reference values)
Flat gasket
in Nm
in lb-ft
in Nm
in lb-ft
20
15
8x M12 x 50
10
7.4
10
7.4
361
For valve ends type 523 made of PP in combination with backing flanges, use half of the standard nut
height.
1)
2)
Preferred gasket type (suited for plastics)


Maintenance
Ball valves require no maintenance under normal operating conditions. However, the following measures must
be considered:
362
Ball valve type 375

Overview
Product description
With ball valve type 375, GF Piping Systems offers

you the ideal complement to the existing range of ball
valves. It can be used for basic applications of water
treatment as well as for simple water applications.
Versions
Ball valve type 375 with butt fusion spigots
Product features
Available from d16DN10 up to d110DN100

Hand lever with integrated tool for removing the union
bushing
363
Overview
General
Type
375
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
DN10 - 50: 16
DN65 - 100: 10
PVC-U
PVC-C
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Safety information
CAUTION
abrasion.
be avoided.
WARNING

Uncontrolled escape of fluid may cause injury.
may be dismounted.
Make certain that the medium is caught
safely with the appropriate measures
Open the dismounted 375 halfway (45 position) and let the 375 drain in a vertical position catch the medium in an appropriate
vessel.
CAUTION
NOTICE

pressure
your results.

364
DANGER

CAUTION
Graph
Exploded view
Union nut
Connecting part
Union brushing
Ball
Housing
Stem
Hand lever
Face seal
Body seal
Backing seal
Ball seal
Stem seal
DN
L1
L2
L3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
53
76
60
42
40
48
20
15
50
53
80
60
42
40
48
25
20
59
60
91
65
48
45
53
32
25
68
67
102
75
54
51
58
40
32
80
79
120
85
62
59
68
50
40
94
90
140
95
72
70
78
63
50
115
107
169
110
86
84
93
75
65
145
129
206
130
110
103
118
90
80
168
143
242
140
128
120
140
110
100
210
169
282
160
150
141
160
Dimensions
ranges.
Rp
DN
L1
L2
L3
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
53
76
60
42
40
48
15
50
53
80
60
42
40
48
20
59
60
91
65
48
45
53
25
68
67
102
75
54
51
58
32
80
79
116
85
62
59
68
40
94
90
126
95
72
70
78
50
115
107
149
110
86
84
93
65
145
129
184
130
110
103
118
80
168
143
212
140
128
120
140
100
210
169
244
160
150
141
160
365
Ball valve type 375 with butt fusion spigots long
Pressure loss
DN D
L1
L2
L3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
95
53
175
60
42
40
1.8
25
20
105
60
195
65
48
45
2.3
32
25
115
67
247
75
54
51
2.9
40
32
140
79
233
85
62
59
3.6
50
40
150
90
265
95
72
70
4.5
Medium Water, 20 C
63
50
165
107
278
110
86
84
5.7
Flow rate(l/min), (US gal./min)
75
65
185
129
348
130
110
103
6.8
90
80
200
143
350
140
128
120
8.2
110
100
220
169
412
160
150
141
10.0
Technical data

on a lifetime of 25 years and the medium water and similar media.
PVC-U
Open angle (%)
kv 100 values
DN
mm
DN
d
inch mm
kv 100 l/
min (p =
1 psi)
Cv 100 US
gal./min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100 m/
h (p=1
bar)
10
16
70
4.9
4.2
15
20
185
12.9
11.1
20
25
350
24.5
21
25
32
700
49.0
42
1)
For nominal dimensions of DN10 - DN50, thecentral

body of the ball valve is designed for nominal pressure PN16
2)
For nominal dimensions of DN65 - DN100, thecentral

body of the ball valve is designed for nominal pressure PN10
32
40
1000
70.
60
3)
Depending on the end connection, at nominaldimensions of DN10 - DN50, the nominal pressure reduces
to PN10
40
50
1600
112.0
96
50
63
3100
217.1
186
Permissible pressurein bar/psi
65
75
5000
350
300
Temperature in C/ F
80
90
7000
490
420
100
110
11000
770
660

determined by using the flow value characteristics and the
kv 100 values.
366
Operating torque
Size DN (mm, inch)
Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Reference values at nominal pressure

actuators.

d
mm
DN
mm
DN
inch
Total number of screws (for

2 flanged joints) standard
nut
(Height 0.8 x d)
Torque
(reference values)
Profile flange gasket
in Nm
in lb-ft
in Nm
in lb-ft
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
8x M12 x 50
8x M12 x 55
8x M12 x 60
8x M16 x 70
8x M16 x 70
8x M16 x 80
8x M16 x 90
16x M16 x 100
16x M20 x 130
10
10
10
15
15
20
25
15
20
7.4
7.4
7.4
11
11
15
18
11
15
10
10
15
20
25
35
50
30
35
7.4
7.4
11
15
18
26
37
22
26
1)
Torque
(reference values)
Flat gasket
1) preferred gasket type (suited for plastics)


Maintenance
be considered:
system.
367
Ball valve type 322

Overview
Product description
Ball valve type 322 is the perfect valve for the use in the
laboratory. It is characterized by its compact design and
thus space saving installation.
Versions
Product features
Compact design
Union nut enables a one sided removal and an easy
access to the internal components
Double hand lever indicates the position of the ball
Overview
General
Type
322
Dimension DN
6-8
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
MaterialsforBall seal
PTFE
Connection types
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Safety information
CAUTION
abrasion.
be avoided.
368
WARNING
may be dismounted.
Open the dismounted 322 halfway (45
position) and let the 322 drain in a vertical
position catch the medium in an appropriate vessel.
NOTICE
Graph
Exploded view

DANGER
CAUTION
CAUTION
pressure
your results.
Housing
Valve end
Union nut
Ball
Hand lever
Stem
Ball seal
Stem seal
Body seal
Dimensions
DN
L1
z1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
34
52
45
38
26
15
12
34
60
45
38
36
25
Technical data

369
PVC-U
Temperature in C/ F

Maintenance
be considered:
system.
Installation recommendations for type 322

The ball valve can be used as illustrated:
370
Ball valve Coloro

Overview
Product description
The ball valve type 353 - 355 is ideally suited for all applications with water. The Coloro is characterized by its
monoblock design.
Versions
Type 353 compact valve
Type 354 single union ball valve
Type 355 double union ball valve
Product features
Space saving installation due to compact design

Colored hand levers for a clear differentiation of processes in your piping system
Ideal sealing materials for water applications
Overview
General
Type
353, 354, 355
Dimension DN
10 - 50
Pressure range PN
16
PVC-U
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
HD-PE/ Lubricant Compound
Safety information
CAUTION
abrasion.
be avoided.
371
WARNING
CAUTION

may be dismounted.
Open the dismounted valve halfway (45
position) and let it drain in a vertical position catch the medium in an appropriate
vessel.

pressure
your results.
DANGER
CAUTION
372
DANGER
Ball valve as end valve
If the ball valve, which functions as an end
valve in a piping system under pressure, is
opened, the medium can exit uncontrollably.
Consequences can be death or serious injury
from contact with the medium.
The end valve in a pressure-bearing system may only be opened when the medium can be caught or carried off safely and
splashing is prevented by taking the appropriate measures.
NOTICE
Mounting of the ball valve
Operation and temperature changes can
cause reaction forces, which lead to longitudinal thermal expansion and bending forces
that can damage the valve.
Absorb these forces by fixed points in front
of or after the valve.
Graph
Exploded view
Half of Body
Backing seal
Ball seal
Stem ball
Stem seal
Socket weld
Hand lever
Rp
DN
L1
L2
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
15
66
49
92
78
54
51
20
74
54
104
92
60
58
25
79
64
113
92
63
63
32
94
78
132
116
74
77
40
109
90
147
116
79
83
50
127
112
175
140
91
102
Ball valve type 355 with butt fusion spigots PE100
Dimensions
ranges.
DN
L1
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
60
49
92
78
54
51
25
20
66
54
104
92
60
58
32
25
69
64
113
92
63
63
40
32
80
78
132
116
74
77
50
40
85
90
147
116
79
83
63
50
97
112
175
140
91
102
DN
L1
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
49
161
78
54
51
1.9
25
20
54
174
92
60
58
2.3
32
25
64
182
92
63
63
2.9
40
32
78
199
116
74
77
3.7
50
40
90
210
116
79
83
4.6
63
50
112
228
140
91
102
5.8
373
Ball valve type 355 with butt fusion spigots PE80
DN
L1
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
32
25
64
182
92
63
63
40
32
78
199
116
74
77
48
40
90
210
116
79
83
50
40
90
210
116
79
83
56
50
112
228
140
91
102
63
50
112
228
140
91
102
PVC-U
Temperature in C/ F
Pressure loss
Ball valve type 355 with fusion sockets PE80
DN
L1
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
64
49
92
78
54
51
25
20
70
54
103
92
60
58
32
25
73
64
111
92
63
63
40
32
84
78
128
116
74
77
50
40
89
90
141
116
79
83
63
50
101
112
164
140
91
102
Medium Water, 20 C
Flow rate(l/min), (US gal./min)
Technical data

374
Open angle (%)
kv 100 values
DN
mm
DN
d
inch mm
kv 100 l/
min (p =
1 psi)
Cv 100 US
gal./min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100 m/
h (p=1
bar)
10
16
70
4.9
4.2
15
20
185
12.9
11.1
20
25
350
24.5
21
25
32
700
49.0
42
32
40
1000
70.
60
40
50
1600
112.0
96
50
63
3100
217.1
186

determined by using the flow value characteristics and the
kv 100 values.
Operating torque
Size DN (mm, inch)
Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Reference values at nominal pressure

actuators.

d
mm
DN
mm
DN
inch
Total number of screws (for

2 flanged joints) standard
nut
(Height 0.8 x d)
Torque
(reference values)
Profile flange gasket
in Nm
in lb-ft
in Nm
in lb-ft
20
25
32
40
50
63
15
20
25
32
40
50
1
1
1
2
8x M12 x 50
8x M12 x 55
8x M12 x 60
8x M16 x 70
8x M16 x 70
8x M16 x 80
10
10
10
15
15
20
89
89
89
133
133
177
10
10
15
20
25
35
89
89
133
177
222
310
1) preferred gasket type (suited for plastics)

1)
Torque
(reference values)
Flat gasket

Maintenance
be considered:
375

Replace defective ball valve
376
Fundamentals for ball valves electric actuated
Ball valves type 107, 130-135

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical features
Ball valves type 185-188

-- Overview
-- Graph
Page
378
379
380
385
386
387
388
377
Fundamentals for ball valves

electric actuated
Type 130 - 135 with electrical actuator EA21, EA31

and EA42
Ball valves type 107, 130-135

Overview
Product description
The ball valve of type 107 is based on the Ball Valve

Type 546 (d16DN10 to d63DN50) with the electric actuator EA11. Type range 107 is designed for automated
standard applications with no special demands.
Ball valves Type 130, 131, 132, 133, 134 and 135
are based on the ball valve type 546 (d16DN10 to
d110DN100) and the electric actuator EA21 (DN10DN50) or EA31 (DN65-DN100). Type range 130-135 is
designed as modular adjustable ball valve for applications which demand special process requirements.
Theball valves type 107 and 130-135 consist of the ball
valve type 546's valve base body with the electric actuators EA11, EA21, EA31 and EA42.
The technical data concerning
Pressure loss
kv values
Reference values for screw fastenings
can be found under ball valve type 546, manual override. In the following, you will find all the details concerning mounting, installation and commissioning of the
elkectric actuators EA11, EA21, EA31 and EA42.
Versions
Type 107 with electrical actuator EA11
378
Product features
Type 107
More information about different product
featuresare available in Chapter Actuators
type EA11
Type 130 - 135

featuresare available in the Chapter Actuators type EA21-EA42
Differences Type 130 - 135
Type
130
Type
131
Type
132
Type
133
Type
134
Type
135
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
Overview
General
Type
107
130 - 135
Base type
546
546
Actuator type
EA 11
EA21/EA31/EA42
Dimension DN
10 - 50
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
10
10
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM
FFPM
NBR
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
More information about accessories are available in the

chapter actuators EA11-EA42
Safety information
The following safety instructions apply specifically to the
ball valve. They should identify the hazards and advice
that should be considered for the different uses and installation/commissioning.
DANGER
Disregarding the general safety instructions for electrical actuators
Non-observance can result in serious injury
or death.
Observe the general safety instructions for
electric actuators.
CAUTION
Intended use of the actuators
When not used as prescribed injuries can occur. When mounted on a valve and connected to a system control, the purpose of this
actuator is to:
actuate valves with 90 pivoting (ball valves
and butterfly valves),
indicate the previously calibrated end positions of the valve via electrical signal to the
system control (accessory), and
provided that the actuator data corresponds to the electrical control and the
valve and
in case of interruption in the supply voltage,
warrant that the actuator/valve remains in
the current position. Please use the emergency manual override or install the failsafe return unit.
379
Graph
Exploded view ball valve types 107, 130-135 (DN10 - 50)
Type 107
Actuator type EA11 (21)
Adapter plate
with clamps
Coupling
with screws
Ball valve type 546

DN10 - 50
380
Type 130 - 135
Ball valve types 130, 131, 133 - 135 (DN65 DN100)
Dimensions
Weight actuator
Information about the weight of the actuators are available in the Chapter "Actuators" in the planning fundamentals.
More dimensions
More dimensions are available in the product range of ball valve type 546.
Dimensions for type 107 solvent cement socket
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
200
27
64
64
137
20
15
50
200
27
64
64
137
25
20
58
209
30
73
64
137
32
25
68
209
36
73
64
137
40
32
84
220
44
84
64
137
50
40
97
220
51
84
64
137
63
50
124
243
64
106
64
137
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
92
161
56
25
77
83
122
33
64
95
161
56
25
77
83
122
33
64
110
161
65
25
77
83
122
33
72
123
161
71
25
77
83
122
33
79
146
161
85
45
77
83
122
33
94
157
161
89
45
77
83
122
33
95
183
161
101
45
77
83
122
33
107
381
Dimensions for type 107 solvent cement spigots
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
200
27
64
64
137
20
15
50
200
27
64
64
137
25
20
58
209
30
73
64
137
32
25
68
209
36
73
64
137
40
32
84
220
44
84
64
137
50
40
97
220
51
84
64
137
63
50
124
243
64
106
64
137
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
114
161
56
130
25
77
83
122
33
124
161
56
130
25
77
83
122
33
144
161
65
150
25
77
83
122
33
154
161
71
160
25
77
83
122
33
174
161
85
180
45
77
83
122
33
194
161
89
200
45
77
83
122
33
224
161
101
230
45
77
83
122
33
382
Dimensions for type 107 threaded sockets Rp
Rp
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
200
27
64
64
137
15
50
200
27
64
64
137
20
58
209
30
73
64
137
25
68
209
36
73
64
137
32
84
220
44
84
64
137
40
97
220
51
84
64
137
50
124
243
64
106
64
137
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
92
161
56
25
77
83
122
33
64
95
161
56
25
77
83
122
33
64
110
161
65
25
77
83
122
33
72
123
161
71
25
77
83
122
33
79
146
161
85
45
77
83
122
33
94
157
161
89
45
77
83
122
33
95
183
161
101
45
77
83
122
33
107
Dimensions for type 107 fixed flange serrated

metric
Dimensions for type 130-135 solvent cement

sockes metric
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
H6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
50
201
27
64
65
138
48
25
20
58
210
30
73
65
138
53
32
25
68
210
36
73
65
138
58
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
40
32
84
221
44
84
65
138
70
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
40
97
221
51
84
65
138
75
16
10
50
231
27
64
94
167
63
50
124
244
64
106
65
138
83
20
15
50
231
27
64
94
167
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
25
20
58
240
30
73
94
167
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
32
25
68
240
36
73
94
167
124
160
56
130
25
77
83
122
33
40
32
84
251
44
84
94
167
144
160
65
150
25
77
83
122
33
50
40
97
251
51
84
94
167
154
160
71
160
25
77
83
122
33
63
50
124
273
64
106
94
167
174
160
85
180
45
77
83
122
33
75
65
166
346
85
156
94
190
194
160
89
200
45
77
83
122
33
90
80
200
358
105
168
94
190
224
160
101
230
45
77
83
122
33
110
100
238
365
123
175
94
190
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
92
180
56
25
97
83
122
64
95
180
56
25
97
83
122
64
110
180
65
25
97
83
122
72
123
180
71
25
97
83
122
79
146
180
85
45
97
83
122
94
157
180
89
45
97
83
122
95
183
180
101
45
97
83
122
107
233
180
136
70
98
83
122
144
254
180
141
70
98
83
122
151
301
180
164
120
98
83
122
174
383
Dimensions for type 130-135 solvent cement

spigots metric
Dimensions for type 130-135 threaded sockets

Rp
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
Rp
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
231
27
64
94
167
10
50
231
27
64
94
167
20
15
50
231
27
64
94
167
15
50
231
27
64
94
167
25
20
58
240
30
73
94
167
20
58
240
30
73
94
167
32
25
68
240
36
73
94
167
25
68
240
36
73
94
167
40
32
84
251
44
84
94
167
32
84
251
44
84
94
167
50
40
97
251
51
84
94
167
40
97
251
51
84
94
167
63
50
124
273
64
106
94
167
50
124
273
64
106
94
167
75
65
166
346
85
156
94
190
65
166
346
85
156
94
190
90
80
200
358
105
168
94
190
80
200
358
105
168
94
190
110
100
238
365
123
175
94
190
100
238
365
123
175
94
190
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
114
180
56
130
25
97
83
122
92
180
56
25
97
83
122
64
124
180
56
130
25
97
83
122
95
180
56
25
97
83
122
64
144
180
65
150
25
97
83
122
110
180
65
25
97
83
122
72
154
180
71
160
25
97
83
122
123
180
71
25
97
83
122
79
174
180
85
180
45
97
83
122
146
180
85
45
97
83
122
94
194
180
89
200
45
97
83
122
157
180
89
45
97
83
122
95
224
180
101
230
45
97
83
122
183
180
101
45
97
83
122
107
284
180
136
290
70
98
83
122
233
180
136
70
98
83
122
144
300
180
141
310
70
98
83
122
254
180
141
70
98
83
122
151
340
180
164
350
120
98
83
122
301
180
164
120
98
83
122
174
384
Dimensions for type 130-135 fixed flanges serrated metric
Dimensions for type 130-135 backing flanges

PP ST metric
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
H6
DN
H1
H2
H3
H5
H6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
166
346
85
156
94
190
93
20
15
50
231
27
64
94
167
48
90
80
200
358
105
168
94
190
100
25
20
58
240
30
73
94
167
53
110
100
238
365
123
175
94
190
110
32
25
68
240
36
73
94
167
58
40
32
84
251
44
84
94
167
70
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
50
40
97
251
51
84
94
167
75
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
124
273
64
106
94
167
83
284
180
136
290
70
98
83
122
66
300
180
141
310
70
98
83
122
66
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
340
180
164
350
120
98
83
122
66
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
124
180
56
130
25
98
83
122
66
144
180
65
150
25
97
83
122
66
154
180
71
160
25
97
83
122
66
174
180
85
180
45
97
83
122
66
194
180
89
200
45
98
83
122
66
224
180
101
230
45
97
83
122
66
Technical features
More information
about the multifunctional module and
mounting plate are available in the Chapter
Ball valve type 546 hand operated in the
planning fundamentals.
385
Ball valves type 185-188

Overview
Product description
Ball valves Type 185 - 188 are based on ball valve Type
543 (d16DN10 to d63DN50) and electric actuator EA21.
Type range 185-188 is designed as modular upgradeable 3-way ball valve for mixing and diverting applications which demand special process requirements.
Pressure loss
kv values
can be found under ball valve type 543, manual override.
Versions
Type 185 - 188 with electrical actuator EA21
Product features
Type 185 - 188
features are available in the Chapter "Actuators type EA21".
Difference Type 185 - 188
Type 185 Type 186

horizontal horizon
tal
Type 187
horizontal
Type 188
vertical
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
386
Overview
General
Type
185 - 188
Base type
543
Actuator type
EA 21
Dimension DN
10 - 50
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM (O-ring)
FPM (O-ring)
PTFE (ball)
PVDF (ball)
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
More information about accessories

are available in the Chapter "Actuators
EA21".
Safety information
DANGER
or death.
electric actuators.
CAUTION
actuator is to:
valve and
387
Dimensions
Graph
Weight actuator
Exploded view ball valve type 185 - 188
Electrical actuator EA21

(1)
More dimensions
adapter plate (4)
Ball valve type 185
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement sockets
Coupling (5)
Spacer (8)
MF housing (6)
3-way ball valve type 543

horizontal (7)
d
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
231
28
64
20
15
50
231
28
64
Electrical actuator EA21

(1)
25
20
58
240
32
73
32
25
68
240
36
73
40
32
84
251
45
84
50
40
97
251
51
84
63
50
124
273
65
106
adapter plate (4)
DN
H3
H5
H6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
94
167
coupling (5)
20
15
50
94
167
Spacer (8)
25
20
58
94
167
32
25
68
94
167
40
32
84
94
167
50
40
97
94
167
63
50
124
94
167
Type 185-187
MF housing (6)

vertical (7)
Type 188
388
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
DN
H3
H5
H6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
109
180
73
36
25
97
16
10
50
94
167
20
112
180
73
36
25
97
20
15
50
94
167
25
131
180
86
43
25
97
25
20
58
94
167
32
151
180
99
50
25
97
32
25
68
94
167
40
181
180
120
60
45
97
40
32
84
94
167
50
205
180
137
69
45
97
50
40
97
94
167
63
261
180
179
89
45
97
63
50
124
94
167
L6
L7
L8
z1
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
83
122
33
81
40
16
110
180
72
36
25
97
20
83
122
33
81
40
20
112
180
72
36
25
97
25
83
122
33
94
47
25
129
180
85
43
25
97
32
83
122
33
107
54
32
146
180
98
49
25
97
40
83
122
33
130
65
40
170
180
118
59
45
97
50
83
122
33
143
72
50
193
180
135
68
45
97
63
83
122
33
185
92
63
244
180
176
88
45
97
Ball valve type 186, 187
L6
L7
L8
z1
PROGEF, SYGEF with fusion sockets
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
83
122
33
82
41
20
83
122
33
82
41
25
83
122
33
97
49
32
83
122
33
110
55
40
83
122
33
132
66
50
83
122
33
151
76
63
83
122
33
188
94
Ball valve type 188

PVC-U, ABS with solvent cement sockets
d
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
231
28
64
20
15
50
231
28
64
25
20
58
240
32
73
32
25
68
240
36
73
40
32
84
251
45
84
50
40
97
251
51
84
63
50
124
273
65
106
389
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
231
62
64
20
15
50
231
62
64
25
20
58
240
72
73
32
25
68
240
77
73
40
32
84
251
87
84
50
40
97
251
97
84
63
50
124
273
112
106
DN
H3
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
94
167
92
20
15
50
94
167
95
25
20
58
94
167
111
32
25
68
94
167
123
40
32
84
94
167
146
50
40
97
94
167
157
63
50
124
94
167
183
L1
L2
L5
L6
L7
L8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
180
56
97
83
122
33
20
180
56
97
83
122
33
25
180
66
97
83
122
33
32
180
71
97
83
122
33
40
180
85
97
83
122
33
50
180
89
97
83
122
33
63
180
101
97
83
122
33
mm
mm
16
64
20
64
25
74
32
79
40
95
50
95
63
107
390
Fundamentals for ball valves pneumatically actuated
Ball valve type 230 - 235

-- Overview
-- Graph
Universal actuator interface according to EN ISO 5211


-- Overview
-- Graph
Page
392
393
395
400
401
404
405
406
391
Fundamentals for ball valves

pneumatically actuated
Overview
Product description
Ball valves of type 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235 are
based on type 546 (d16DN10 to d63DN50) and electric actuator PA11 (DN10-DN25), PA21 (DN32-DN50),
PA30-PA45 (DN65-DN100). Type range 230-235 is designed as modular adjustable ball valve for applications
which demand special process requirements.
Pressure loss
kv values
In the following, you will find all the details concerning
mounting, installation and commissioning of the elkectric actuators PA11/PA21/30 - 45.
Versions
Type 230 - 235 with pneumatic actuator PA11 - PA 45
Product features
Type 230 - 235
features are available in the Chapter "Actuators type PA11-45".
Difference Type 230 - 235
Type
230
Type
231
Type
232
Type
233
Type
234
Type
235
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
392
Overview
General
Type
230 - 235
Base type
546
Actuator type
PA11 - PA45
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM (O- ring)
FPM (O- ring)
PTFE (ball)
PVDF (ball)
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
More information about accessories are available in the Chapter Actuators PA11-PA45.
Safety information
NOTICE
Pneumatic actuators
Single-acting pneumatic actuators with failsafe positions OPEN and CLOSED (type
additional letters in FO and FC) have pretensioned springs for actuation under lack
of pressure.
WARNING
Dismantling of actuators
Wrong dismantling can cause serious injury
or death.
The dismantling of these actuators may be
executed only under guidance of a safety
expert.
Dismounting may only be done in safety
position after disconnecting the air supply.
When working on electric auxiliary components of the pneumatic operation, the
electrical connections of the control voltage
must be disconnected before.
Any necessary live-line adjustments may
only be done with specially insulated tools.
Intended use
The descriptions and instructions in the following apply
to the pneumatic actuators:
393
Type PA11
Pneumatic part-turn valve actuator
DA/FC/FO
Type PA21
DA/FC/FO
TypePA30-45
DA/FC/FO
WARNING
Intended use
These actuators are intended for use after installation to GF valves and connection to a
control system of the facility. When not used
as prescribed, it can lead to serious injury or
death.
When built into GF valves and connected
to a system control, the purpose of these
actuators is to actuate ball valves with a
control pressure of 2.8 to 7 bar and up to
driving torque of 20 Nm, and
depending on the type of pneumatic actuator, double acting (type designation DA)
or single acting with spring for fail-safe to
CLOSED (type designation FC) or single
acting for fail-safe to FO),
control these valves to the OPEN and
CLOSED positions via a built-in solenoid
valve. The solenoid valve must be either
supplied ex GF works or already mounted
by the customer,
indicate these positions OPEN and
CLOSED via an electric signal to the system control, if the actuator is equipped for
this with the respective subassembly,
enable control of these positions through
manual operation in case of failure in the
compressed air supply, if the actuator is
equipped for this with the respective subassembly.
The actuator is not intended for uses other than those
stated here. Prohibited in particular are:
control pressures above 7.5bar,
manual operation with forces higher than permitted
according to prEN12570 (maximum retention forces
for operation of valves),
operating solenoid valves and position feedback units
under water.
394
NOTICE
Proper function of the actuator
The actuator can only function properly if it
has been connected professionally according to the wiring diagrams for double acting operation and for fail-safe OPEN or failsafe CLOSE operation, respectively. OPEN
or CLOSED fachgerecht angeschlossen
wurde.
Graph
Exploded view ball valve type 230-235 (DN10 - DN50)
With manual override
Without manual override
Actuator type PA11/21
Coupling lever with intermediate piece on top
Control lever
Intermediate piece below
Adapter plate with clamps
Coupling piece
Ball valve type 546
395
Ball valve type 230-235 (DN65 - DN100)

Dimensions
Weight actuator
More dimensions More dimensions are

available in the product range of ball valve
type 546.
Dimensions for types 230-235 (DN10 - DN50)

with manual override, solvent cement socket
Ball valve type 546, with solvent cement sockets, metric

with pneumatic actuator PA 11/21 with stroke limiter and
emergency manual override
396
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
229.5
26.5
61.5
20
15
50
229.5
26.5
61.5
25
20
58
238.5
30
70.5
32
25
68
238.5
35.5
70.5
40
32
84
270.6
44
83.6
50
40
97
270.6
50.5
83.6
63
50
124
293
64
106
DN
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
168
40
97
20
15
50
168
40
97
25
20
58
168
40
97
32
25
68
168
40
97
40
32
84
187
51
115
50
40
97
187
51
115
63
50
124
187
51
115
L*
L1
L2
L4
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
92
194
56
25
16
10
50
229.5
26.5
61.5
20
95
194
56
25
20
15
50
229.5
26.5
61.5
25
110
194
65
25
25
20
58
238.5
30
70.5
32
123
194
71
25
32
25
68
238.5
35.5
70.5
40
146
224
85
45
40
32
84
270.6
44
83.6
50
157
224
89
45
50
40
97
270.6
50.5
83.6
63
183
224
101
45
63
50
124
293
64
106
DN
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
168
40
97
20
15
50
168
40
97
25
20
58
168
40
97
32
25
68
168
40
97
40
32
84
187
51
115
50
40
97
187
51
115
63
50
124
187
51
115
* L applies to PVC-U, PVC-C and ABS; for PP and PVDF

see manual valves
d
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
261
76
48
64
20
261
76
48
64
25
261
76
48
72
32
261
76
48
79
40
305
95
59
94
50
305
95
59
94
L*
L1
L2
L3
63
305
95
59
107
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
114
194
56
20
124
194
56
130
25
144
194
65
150
32
154
194
71
160
40
174
194
85
180
50
194
194
89
200
63
224
194
101
230

with manual override, spigots/flanges
Ball valve type 546, with solvent cement spigot, metric

with pneumatic actuator PA 11/21 with stroke limiter and
emergency manual override

see manual valves
d
L4
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
25
261
76
48
20
25
261
76
48
25
25
261
76
48
32
25
261
76
48
40
45
305
95
59
50
45
305
95
59
63
45
305
95
59

without manual override, solvent cement socket

with pneumatic actuator PA 11/21 with stroke limiter
397
L*
L1
L2
L4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
92
194
56
25
20
95
194
56
25
25
110
194
65
25
32
123
194
71
25
40
146
224
85
45
50
157
224
89
45
63
183
224
101
45

see manual valves
d
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
261
76
48
64
20
261
76
48
64
25
261
76
48
72
32
261
76
48
79
DN
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
40
305
95
59
94
16
10
50
166.5
26.5
50
305
95
59
95
20
15
50
166.5
26.5
63
305
95
59
107
25
20
58
175.5
30
32
25
68
175.5
35.5
40
32
84
209.6
44
50
40
97
209.6
50.5
63
50
124
232
64
DN
H2
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
61.5
40
97
20
15
61.5
40
97
25
20
70.5
40
97
32
25
70.5
40
97
40
32
83.6
51
115
50
40
83.6
51
115
63
50
106
51
115
398

without manual override, spigots/flanges

with pneumatic actuator PA 11/21 with stroke limiter
DN
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
166.5
26.5
20
15
50
166.5
26.5
25
20
58
175.5
30
32
25
68
175.5
35.5
40
32
84
209.6
44
50
40
97
209.6
50.5
63
50
124
232
64
DN
H2
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
61.5
40
97
20
15
61.5
40
97
25
20
70.5
40
97
32
25
70.5
40
97
40
32
83.6
51
115
50
40
83.6
51
115
63
50
106
51
115
L*
L1
L2
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
L*
L1
L2
L3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
233
218
136
70
276
65
144
16
114
194
56
90
254
259
141
70
341
72
151
20
124
194
56
130
110
301
287
164
120
369
80
174
25
144
194
65
150
32
154
194
71
160
40
174
224
85
180
50
194
224
89
200
63
224
224
101
230
DN
H1
H2
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
166
262
85
156
70
90
80
200
281
105
168
78
110
100
238
292
123
175
86

see manual valves

without manual override, spigots/flanges

with pneumatic actuator PA 30/35/40 with stroke limiter

see manual valves
d
L4
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
25
261
76
48
20
25
261
76
48
25
25
261
76
48
32
25
261
76
48
40
45
305
95
59
50
45
305
95
59
63
45
305
95
59

without manual override, solvent cement socket

with pneumatic actuator PA30/35/40 with stroke limiter
DN
H1
H2
H5
H6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
166
262
85
156
70
93
90
80
200
281
105
268
78
100
110
100
238
292
123
175
86
110
399
L*
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
284
218
136
290
70
276
65
90
300
259
141
310
70
341
72
110
340
287
161
350
120
369
80

see manual valves
Technical features
More information
about the multifunctional module and
mounting plate are available in the Chapter
Ball valve type 546 hand operated in the
planning fundamentals.
400
Universal actuator interface according to EN ISO 5211

Simple adaption of actuator with universal interface

for the ball valve Type 546
Practical assembly set with different flange fittings
Functional and solid through the use of rugged materials - adapter plates, flanges and couplings all anodised Aluminium - screws and washers all stainless
steel V2A
Configuration
Base-set (required)
Consisting of mounting flange to ball valve Type 546,
adapter plate to actuator according to EN ISO 5211 and
screws: four screws for fixation of mounting flange to
ball valve; four screws for fixation of adapter plate to
the actuator; two screws for joining of adapter-plate and
mounting flange.
401

DN
Flange fitting
Screw to actuator
F03
M5x10
10/15
F04
M5x10
F05
M6x12
F03
M5x10
20/25
F04
M5x10
F05
M6x12
32/40
F04
M5x10
F05
M6x12
50
F04
M5x10
F05
M6x12
Flange fitting F03 / F05
Flange fitting F04
Coupling
DN
Wrench size
10/15
WS9
10/15
WS11*
20/25
WS9
20/25
WS11*
32/40
WS11*
50
WS11*
Coupling
Position of diagonal square is 45 distorted to

the final position.
Reducer bushing
Inner wrench size
Outer wrench size
Reducer bushing
WS11
WS14
402
Dimensions
WS - wrench size of coupling
TK - reference circle diameter
M - thread diameter
D - outer diameter adapter-plate and mounting-flange
Flange fitting F03
Flange fitting F04
Flange fitting F05
DN
TK
WS
H1
TK
WS
H1
TK
WS
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16/20
10/15
47
65
36
WS9
M5
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
25
20
56
65
36
WS9
M5
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
32
25
61
65
36
WS9
M5
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
40
32
73
75
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
50
40
79
75
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
63
50
96
75
42
WS11 11
M5
50
WS11 11
M6
Actuator details
Maximum weight of the actuator and breakaway torque

of the ball valve Type 546 with a media pressure of p =
10bar.
d
mm
DN
mm
Breakaway
torque Nm
16/20
10/15
25
20
32
25
40
32
12
50
40
16
63
50
25
The actuator has to be shored up at a weight >5 kg.
403

Overview
Product description
Ball valves Type 285 - 288 are based on ball valve

Type 543 (d16DN10 to d63DN50) and electric actuator
PA11 / PA21. Type range 285-288 is designed as modular upgradeable 3-way ball valve for mixing and diverting applications which demand special process requirements.
Pressure loss
kv values
Versions
Type 285 - 288 with pneumatic actuator PA11 / PA21
Product features
Type 285 - 288
Compact design and modular construction of the
valves
Preloaded spring packages, standard version FC, DA;
FO on request
For FC/FO stroke limitation possible
Pressure connector based on Namur standard
404
Type 285
horizontal
Type 286
horizontal
Type 287 Type 288

horizontal vertical*
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
* With special tripod ball. For further information, please contact a George Fischer Piping Systems representative.
Overview
General
Type
285 - 288
Base type
543
Actuator type
PA11 / PA21
Dimension DN
10 - 50
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded socket
Seal materials
EPDM (O- ring)
FPM (O- ring)
PTFE (ball)
PVDF (ball)
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
More information about accessories are available in the

chapter actuators PA11/21.
Safety information
WARNING

or death.
The dismantling of these actuators must
only be executed according to special repair instructions and under guidance of a
safety expert.
NOTICE
Pneumatic actuators
of pressure.
Intended use
Type PA11
DA/FC/FO
Type PA21
DA/FC/FO
405
WARNING
Graph
Exploded view
Intended use
These actuators are intended for use after installation to GF valves and connection to a
control system of the facility. When not used
as prescribed, it can lead to serious injury or
death.
When built into GF valves and connected
to a system control, the purpose of these
actuators is to actuate ball valves with a
control pressure of 2.8 to 7 bar and up to
driving torque of 20 Nm, and
depending on the type of pneumatic actuator, double acting (type designation DA)
or single acting with spring for fail-safe to
CLOSED (type designation FC) or single
acting for fail-safe to FO),
control these valves to the OPEN and
CLOSED positions via a built-in solenoid
valve. The solenoid valve must be either
supplied ex GF works or already mounted
by the customer,
indicate these positions OPEN and
CLOSED via an electric signal to the system control, if the actuator is equipped for
this with the respective subassembly,
enable control of these positions through
manual operation in case of failure in the
compressed air supply, if the actuator is
equipped for this with the respective subassembly.
Pneumatic actuator PA11/

21 (1)
Adapter plate (4)
Coupling (5)
Spacer (8)
MF housing (6)

horizontal (7)
Type 285-287
Pneumatic actuator PA11/

21 (1)
Adapter plate (4)

Coupling (5)
control pressures above 7.5bar,

according to prEN12570 (maximum retention forces
under water.
Spacer (8)
MF housing (6)

vertical (7)
NOTICE
Proper function of the actuator
The actuator can only function properly if it
has been connected professionally according to the wiring diagrams for double acting operation and for fail-safe OPEN or failsafe CLOSE operation, respectively. OPEN
or CLOSED fachgerecht angeschlossen
wurde.
406
Type
288
Dimensions
Weight actuator
More dimensions
Ball valve type 285
L5
L6
L7
z1
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS with solvent cement sockets
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
261
76
48
81
40
20
261
76
48
81
40
25
261
76
48
94
47
32
261
76
48
107
54
40
305
95
59
130
65
50
305
95
59
143
72
63
305
95
59
185
92

d
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
159
28
62
20
15
50
159
28
62
25
20
58
168
32
71
32
25
68
168
36
71
40
32
84
203
45
84
50
40
97
203
51
84
63
50
124
225
65
106
DN
H3
H4
H5
DN
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
97
40
77
16
10
50
159
28
62
20
15
50
97
40
77
20
15
50
159
28
62
25
20
58
97
40
77
25
20
58
168
32
71
32
25
68
97
40
77
32
25
68
168
36
71
40
32
84
119
51
99
40
32
84
203
45
84
50
40
97
119
51
99
50
40
97
203
51
84
63
50
124
119
51
99
63
50
124
225
65
106
H6
L1
L2
L3
L4
DN
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
109
194
73
36
25
16
10
50
97
40
77
20
112
194
73
36
25
20
15
50
97
40
77
25
131
194
86
43
25
25
20
58
97
40
77
32
151
194
99
50
25
32
25
68
97
40
77
40
181
224
120
60
45
40
32
84
119
51
99
50
205
224
137
69
45
50
40
97
119
51
99
63
261
224
179
89
45
63
50
124
119
51
99
PROGEF, SYGEF with fusion sockets
407
H6
L1
L2
L3
L4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
110
194
72
36
25
20
112
194
72
36
25
25
129
194
85
43
25
32
146
194
98
50
25
40
170
224
118
60
45
50
193
224
135
69
45
63
244
224
176
89
45
L5
L6
L7
z1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
261
76
48
82
41
20
261
76
48
82
41
25
261
76
48
97
49
32
261
76
48
110
55
40
305
95
59
132
66
50
305
95
59
151
76
63
305
95
59
188
94
408
Diaphragm valves type 514, 515, 517, 519

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
Page
410
411
413
416
418
420
409
Fundamentals for diaphragm

valves, hand operated
Diaphragm valves type 514, 515, 517,
519
Overview
Product description
Diaphragm valves are well suited for controlling, retaining and monitoring of volume flows. Their advantage
compared to other valve types is their simplicity of function and construction. They can be used for gases and
liquids and are especially well suited for soiled, aggressive and abrasive media.The diaphragm valves can
be installed in any position. There will be no pressure
surges by closing a diaphragm valve. This valve is available as manual valve as well as actuated valve.
Type 519
Branched type
Versions
All types of diaphragm valves in sizes DN15 to DN50.

Type 514
Indicator for diaphragm material
Type 515
Spigot ends
Friction lock on the valve body - colour shows type of diaphragm material:
black
EPDM diaphragm
white
PTFE/ EPDM diaphragm
green
PTFE/ FPM diaphragm
red
FPM diaphragm
blue
NBR diaphragm
Product features
Type 517
Flange version
410
No corrosion as there are no metal screws

Increased leak-tightness during temperature changes,
since the connection of upper part and valve body is
suited for platics
Double flow rate and linear characteristics due to the
innovative valve body, which significantly simplifies
the control
Optimized diaphragm geometry for a longer lifetime
Integrated hand wheel locking device
At the branched valve, the sealing bar is near the pipe
wall, which leads to a valve without dead space
Overview
General
Type
514
515
517
519
Union
Spigot
Flange
Branched type
Dimension DN
15 - 50
15 - 50
15 - 150
15 - 15 / 100 - 50
Pressure range PN up to16
up to16
up to16
up to16
Materials used
Housing nut
PP GF30 for PN10 (orange)
PPS GF40 for PN16 (black)
Handwheel
PP GF30
Inner body
PP GF30
Indicator pin
PP
Compressor
PPS GF 40 / PP GF30
Diaphragm holder
CuZn40Pb2
Spindle
X12CrMoS17
Spindle nut
PPS GF40
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PP-n
PVDF
PVDF-HP
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Diaphragm materials
EPDM
PFTE/EPDM
PFTE/FPM
FPM
FFPM
Accessories
Electrical feedback with switch design AgNi, Au
Safety information
diaphragm valve. They should identify the hazards and
advice that should be considered in the different use
and installation / commissioning.
On request
DANGER
Valve failure due to wrong choice of material
Death or serious injury from contact with the
medium. Valve body, gaskets, diaphragms,
diaphragm support, housing and mechanical components can be damaged or impaired
in their function due to lack of chemical resistance, external influences, wear of the diaphragm or diffusion effects.
Ensure chemical resistance: You can find
the chemical resistance tables in the planning fundamentals. If in doubt, please contact your GF Piping Systems representative.
411
DANGER
NOTICE
Use of grease on the threaded connection

between housing nut and valve body
The use of grease, especially on amorphous
plastics, can cause stress cracking on the
valve body. Consequences can be death or
serious injury from contact with the medium.
The functioning of the valve is not warranted
any longer.
Irrespective of the valve body material, do
not use grease for threaded connection between housing nut and valve body
Fastening the diaphragm valve

Superimposed loadings could damage the diaphragm valve.
Diaphragm valve and piping must be
aligned.
DANGER
Diaphragm valve used as end valve
The diaphragm valve as an end valve may
only be opened when the medium can be
caught or carried off safely and splashing is
prevented by taking appropriate measures.
Commissioning
Observe all technical information and
safety information before installing the diaphragm valve!
Diaphragm valve pressure testing is subject to the same

regulations as the piping system, however, the test
pressure must not exceed the PN of the diaphragm
valve.
NOTICE
Operating the diaphragm valve
Damage of diaphragm valve is possible if the
actuating torque is too high.
Operating the valve with normal hand power
Use no additional tools which increase actuating torque
NOTICE
Due to temperature changes, longitudinal or
lateral forces may occur through thermal expansion.
Absorb forces via respective fixed points in
front or after the valve.
412
NOTICE
Control operation
Due to cavitation, the diaphragm valve could
be damaged.
Use the valve only under optimal control
operation conditions.
NOTICE
Note
Slight hysteresis occurs in the steady state characteristics when the direction of actuation is changed.

Operation of a valve causes reactive forces
which could damage the valve.
Mount the diaphragm valve as a fixed point
with the designated fastener or reinforce
the piping directly before and after the diaphragm valve with suitable supports.
Commissioning procedure
Check that all valves are in the required open or
closed position
Fill the piping system and deaerate completely
The component with the lowest PN determines the
maximum allowable test pressure in the piping section
The valves and connections have to be checked on a
tight seal during the pressure test
DANGER
Graph
Exploded view
Dismounting the diaphragm valve or

opening the housing nut
The medium may exit uncontrollably or flow
out from the pipe or valve, whether under
pressure or not. The valve or pipe may contain residue or remnants of an aggressive,
hazardous, flammable or explosive medium.
Release all pressure from the piping system.
Empty the piping system completely.
Rinse the system, if aggressive, hazardous, flammable or explosive media are
involved
Empty the diaphragm valve completely
when is has been dismounted. In order to
do so, let the valve drain completely
DANGER
Dismounting the diaphragm
Position indicator will break, if spindle assembly is completely turned off. Position of the
diaphragm can no longer be shown by the
indicator. Position of the diaphragm can no
longer be shown by the indicator.
On opened valve: Only turn the hand wheel
two times to loosen the diaphragm from the
inner housing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Valve body
Valve end
Union nut
Diaphragm
Compressor
Spindle assembly incl. diaphragm holder
Inner body
Housing nut
Handwheel
Hand wheel locking device
413
Dimensions
Dimensions
Type 515
Type 514
Type 517
Key
Type 519
L(1) Union with cemented socket, metric (Type 514)
L(2) Union with threaded socket, metric(Type 514)
L(3) Union with fusion socket (Type 514)
L(4) Union with butt fusion spigot (Type 514)
L(5) Butt fusion spigot (Type 515, 519)
L(6) Cemented spigot, metric (Type 515)
L(7) Socket fusion spigot(Type 515)
L(8) Backing flange, metric (Type 517)
Type 514
d
DN D
D2
D3
D3
D3
L(1)
for
for
PP-H PVDF/
- HP
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L2
H1
H2
LE
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15 65
65
43
48
43
128
128
128
196
25
73
14
12
M6
96
90
100
25
20 80
65
51
58
53
152
152
150
221
25
81
18
12
M6
114
108
118
10
32
25 88
87
58
65
60
166
166
162
234
25
107
22
12
M6
122
116
126
13
40
32 101
87
72
79
74
192
192
184
260
45
115
26
15
M8
140
134
144
15
50
40 117
135
83
91
82
222
222
210
284
45
148
32
15
M8
160
154
164
19
63
50 144
135
100
111
100
266
266
248
321
45
166
39
15
M8
190
184
194
25
414
Type 515
d
DN D
D2
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
L2
H1
H2
Hx
mm
mm mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
65
65
124
124
124
25
73
14
12
M6
25
20
80
65
144
144
144
25
81
18
12
M6
10
32
25
88
87
155
154
154
25
107
22
12
M6
13
40
32
101
87
176
174
174
45
115
26
15
M8
15
50
40
117
135
193
194
194
45
148
32
15
M8
19
63
50
144
135
233
224
223
45
166
39
15
M8
25
Type 517
d
DN
D2
D3
D4
D5
L(8)
L2
H1
H2
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
65
65
95
65
14
130
25
73
14
12
M6
25
20
80
65
105
75
14
150
25
81
18
12
M6
10
32
25
88
87
115
85
14
160
25
107
22
12
M6
13
40
32
101
87
140
100
18
180
45
115
26
15
M8
15
50
40
117
135
150
110
18
200
45
148
32
15
M8
19
63
50
144
135
165
125
18
230
45
166
39
15
M8
25
Type 519
d
d1
DN
DN1 DN2
D2
L(5)
L1
L3
L4
H1
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
15
15
15
65
65
117
96
162
12
75
14
25
20
20
15
20
80
65
133
108
162
16
80
17.5
10
25
25
20
20
20
80
65
133
108
162
16
80
17.5
10
32
20
25
15
20
80
65
142
120
162
19
84
21.5
10
32
25
25
20
20
80
65
142
120
162
19
84
21.5
10
32
32
25
25
25
88
87
145
120
160
19
107
21.5
13
40
20
32
15
25
88
87
149
128
180
23
115
21.5
13
40
25
32
20
25
88
87
149
128
180
23
115
21.5
13
40
32
32
25
25
88
87
149
128
180
23
115
21.5
13
40
40
32
32
25
88
87
174
153
180
23
115
21.5
13
50
20
40
15
20
80
65
160
134
180
27
97
17.5
10
50
25
40
20
25
88
87
160
134
180
28
120
21.5
13
50
32
40
25
25
88
87
160
134
180
28
120
21.5
13
50
40
40
32
50
144
135
209
169
209
33
164
32
25
50
50
40
40
50
144
135
209
169
209
33
164
32
25
63
20
50
15
20
80
65
177
144
180
33
104
17.5
10
63
25
50
20
25
88
87
177
144
180
35
127
21.5
13
63
32
50
25
25
88
87
177
144
180
35
127
21.5
13
63
40
50
32
50
144
135
225
192
220
39
170
39
25
63
50
50
40
50
144
135
225
192
220
39
170
39
25
63
63
50
50
50
144
135
225
192
220
39
170
39
25
90
20
80
15
25
88
87
205
159
190
47
140
21.5
13
90
25
80
20
25
88
87
205
159
190
47
140
21.5
13
90
32
80
25
25
88
87
205
159
190
47
140
21.5
13
415
90
50
80
40
50
144
135
254
207
250
51
184
39
25
90
63
80
50
50
144
135
254
207
250
51
184
39
25
110
20
100
15
25
88
87
227
171
190
56
149
21.5
13
110
25
100
20
25
88
87
227
171
190
56
149
21.5
13
110
32
100
25
25
88
87
227
171
190
56
149
21.5
13
110
50
100
40
50
144
135
276
219
250
60
194
39
25
110
63
100
50
50
144
135
276
219
250
60
194
39
25
Technical data

P
T
1)
P
T
1)

Temperature in C, F
Depending on connection type and actuator, the nominal
pressure is reduced to PN6
P
T
1)

Temperature in C, F
PN16 only with black PPS housing nut. Depending on
connection type and actuator, the nominal pressure is reduced to PN10

Temperature in C, F
Pressure loss
P
T
1)

Temperature in C, F
P
T
1)
2)
3)

Temperature in C, F
Only with black PPS housing nut
Depending on connection type and actuator, the
nominal pressure is reduced
to PN10
nominal pressure is reduced
to PN6
416
Type 514...517
x
y
Flow ratein l/min

Pressure lossp=1bar
Type 519
Type 514...517
x
y
Stroke in %
kv, Cv value in %
Type 519
x
y
Stroke in %
kv, Cv value in %
kv 100 values

Type 514 - 517
d [mm] DN
[mm]
inch
kv 100
[l/min]
p =
1bar
Cv 100
[gal/
min]
p =
1psi
kv 100
[m/h]
p =
1bar
d
[mm]
d1
[mm]
DN
[mm]
DN1
[mm]
kv
100 [l/
min]
p =
1bar
Cv
100
[gal/
min]
p =
1psi
kv 100
[m/h]
p =
1bar
20
20
15
15
57
25
20
20
15
89
25
25
20
20
118
32
20
25
15
80
32
25
25
20
105
32
32
25
25
231
16
14
40
20
32
15
85
40
25
32
20
119
40
32
32
25
153
11
40
40
32
32
187
13
11
50
20
40
15
86
50
25
40
20
160
11
10
50
32
40
25
206
14
12
50
40
40
32
524
36
31
50
50
40
40
667
46
40
63
20
50
15
84
63
25
50
20
150
11
63
32
50
25
184
13
11
63
40
50
32
471
32
28
63
50
50
40
610
42
37
63
63
50
50
747
52
45
90
20
80
15
82
90
25
80
20
103
90
32
80
25
129
90
50
80
40
623
43
37
90
63
80
50
696
48
42
110
20
100
15
78
20
15
125
110
25
100
20
103
25
20
271
19
16
110
32
100
25
131
32
25
481
33
29
110
50
100
40
604
42
36
40
32
759
52
45
110
63
100
50
661
46
40
50
40
1263
87
76
63
50
1728
119
104
Operating torque
Operating torquein Nm
417
Application in vacuum
Angle b for types 514 .. 517
Use of the diaphragm valve with static pressure:

0.5 bar
Dimension

Installation angle for optimal draining of the
valve
In order to achieve optimal drainage of these diaphragm

valves, GF recommends installing them at the angles (a
and b), which correspond to the respective dimension
ranges. An installation inclination of about 1 - 2 is not
taken into consideration with the stated angles.
Angle a for types 514... 517
d20DN15
27
d25DN20
24
d32DN25
25
d40DN32
23
d50DN40
24
D63DN50
22
Emptying angle for type 519 is 90, independent of

the dimension

Dimension
d20DN15
d25DN20
d32DN25
d40DN32
d50DN40
D63DN50
Angle for type 519
Integrated fastening and PP-mounting plate

Integrated mounting
The diaphragm valve includes a built-in mounting. With
this, the forces that can occur when operating the valve
(e.g. breakaway torque) are absorbed. Due to the integrated mounting, operation forces are not transmitted to
the piping system.
PP- mounting plate for diaphragm valves
The mounting plates are designed to allow differently
sized GF diaphragm valves to be aligned on the same
pipe centre line by equalising the different heights from
the base to the centre line of the pipe. The plates can
also be used for the PVC diaphragm valve of type 514
for equalising the union nut with the mounting surface.
Material: PP GF 15, black
5 sizes, numbered from 1 to 5
Can be plugged together to achieve the desired
height
418
Dimensions
419
Mounting
plate No.
Diaphragm valve
Dimension [mm]
Dimension
inch
H1
L1
L2
L3
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
4.50
11.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
3.50
7.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
13.50
17.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN32 - 50
1 1/4'' - 2''
6.75
16.75
80.00
66.50
45.00
22.00
9.50
DN32 - 50
1 1/4'' - 2''
6.75
13.25
80.00
66.50
45.00
22.00
9.50
Dimensions
The length of the mounting screws is calculated by
adding the length of the thread in the valve base to the
height of the plate and the thickness of the mounting
bracket. Mounting brackets No. 1 and 4 are for plugging
directly into the valve base.
Equalising the mounting height
Quantity required x Mounting plate number
from DN... ...to DN
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
15
1x1
1x1+1x2
1x1+2x2
1x1+1x3
1x1+2x2+1x3
1x1+2x3
20
1x1
1x1+1x2
1x1+3x2
1x1+1x2+1x3
1x1+3x2+1x3
25
1x1
1x1+2x2
1x1+1x3
1x1+2x2+1x3
32
1x4
1x4+1x5
1x4+2x5
40
1x4
1x4+1x5
50
1x4
Equalising the union height for type 514
Dimension
[mm]
Quantity required x
plate number
H [mm]
H1 [mm]
15
1 x1 + 2 x 2
22.50
11.50
20
1x1+2x2
29.00
11.50
25
1x1+2x2
32.50
11.50
32
1x4+1x5
39.00
13.50
40
1x4+1x5
46.00
13.50
50
1x4+1x5
52.50
13.50
Accessories
Electrical feedback switches with Ag Ni or AU
420
Accessories for Diaphragm Valve Type 514-519

Unchanged height
Self-adjusting
Simple, fast and secure installation
Includes plug 3P + E / Protection class: IP65
421
422
Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, pneumatically actuated
Diaphragm valve DIASTAR

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Type of actuation
-- DIASTAR 025 DN65 - DN150
-- Accessories
Page
424
427
428
433
438
439
443
444
423
Fundamentals for diaphragm

valves, pneumatically actuated
Overview
DIASTAR TenPlus
This is our actuator for high performance applications that
require high closing forces. With the DIASTAR TenPlus,
line pressures up to 10 bar on both sides are possible. The
DIASTAR TenPlus is available in all piping and diaphragm
materials and therefore offers maximum flexibility for your
process. Of course it has an accessory interface for easy
system integration.
Product description
Diaphragm valves are well suited for controlling, retaining and monitoring of volume flows. Their advantage
compared to other valve types is their simplicity of function and construction. They can be used for gases and
liquids and are especially well suited for soiled, aggressive and abrasive media. The diaphragm valves can be
installed in any position. This valve is available as manual valve as well as actuated valve.
The new generation of the Georg Fischer DIASTAR
series is the perfect solution for a reliable flow control
at your facility. This series features a combination of
the pneumatic actuator with a valve body of diaphragm
valve types 514 to 519. Its new design combines increased safety and efficiency and easy handling.
Versions
DIASTAR Six
Are you looking for a cost-effective solution with a long life
time for elastomer diaphragms up to 6 bar? Then you are on
the right track with DIASTAR Six. It combines high quality
with the basic functions of a pneumatic actuator. Its compact
design is also an advantage.
DIASTAR Sixteen
This is our strongest one. The high closing force in combination with the special housing guarantees secure control
of line pressure up to 16 bar. Are you looking for maximum
reliability? And do you want an integrated accessory interface for simple system integration? Then DIASTAR Sixteen
is your right choice.
Suited valve bodies

DIASTAR Ten
Optimally suited for all standard applications up to 10 bar requiring an integration of accessories. Uncomplicated integration into the plant automation possible through the appropriate interface. DIASTAR Ten also offers the possibility of
using a PTFE diaphragm. The cost-performance ratio is unbeatable.
Type 514
Type 515
Spigot ends
424
Type 517
Flange version
Type 519
Branched type
Friction lock on the valve body - colour shows type of diaphragm material:
black
EPDM diaphragm
white
PTFE/ EPDM diaphragm
green
PTFE/ FPM diaphragm
red
FPM diaphragm
blue
NBR diaphragm
Product features
Actuators series Sixteen for 16 bar, TenPlus for 10

bar both sides, Ten for 10 bar and Six for 6 bar nominal pressure
No corrosion as there are no metal screws
Increased leak-tightness during temperature changes,
since the connection of upper part and valve body is
suited for platics
Double flow rate and linear characteristics due to the
innovative valve body, which significantly simplifies
the control
Optimized diaphragm geometry for a longer lifetime
90 turnable air connection for a flexible installation
At the branched valve, the sealing bar is near the pipe
wall, which leads to a valve without dead space
425
Overview
General
Title
Pneumatic diaphragm valvesDIASTAR
Type
Six
Ten
TenPlus
Sixteen
Dimension DN
15 - 50
15 - 50
15 - 50
15 - 50
Pressure range PN
10
up to10 both
sides
up to16
Materials used
Housing
PP-GF30 (orange) for PN10 or PPS-GF40 (black) for PN16
Piston
Metal and PP-GF30 white (Polypropylen, 30 % fiberglass-reinforced)
Position indicator/ Indicator cap
PP / SAN
Spindle
X14CrMoS17
Springs
Steel, zinc coated
Seals (piston and spindle)
NBR
Ambient temperature
- 10 C to 50 C
Metal insert valve body
X6CrMoS17
Metal insert air connection
9sMnPb28k
Metal insert for accessory

interface:
CuZn39Pb3
Functions
FC (Fail safe to close)
FO (Fail-safe-to-open)
DA (Double Acting)
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PROGEF Standard
PROGEF Natural
SYGEF Standard
SYGEF Plus
Diaphragm materials
EPDM
PFTE / EPDM
PFTE / FPM
FPM
On request
NBR
On request
FFPM
Valves types
514
515
517
On request
519
Connection types
Union
Sockets
Spigot
Flange
On request
IR spigots
BCF spigots
Accessories
Limit switches
Manual override
Stroke limiter
426
Positioner
Bus connection
+*
*With appropriate pilot valve or valve island
Safety information
diaphragm valve. They should identify the hazards and
advice that should be considered for the different uses
and installation/commissioning.
DANGER
Reducing spring sets
Reduced spring sets lead to a reduced closing force. At a rising line pressure, the valve
cannot close or not close properly due to
missing spring sets. Consequences can be
death or serious injury from contact with the
medium. The process can be influenced negatively.
Configure diaphragm valve and actuator
according to your line pressure.
Commissioning
NOTICE
Operating the diaphragm valve
Use of higher control pressures or mechanical aids can cause damage to the diaphragm
valve.
Use the mentioned control pressures to actuate the diaphragm valve. These as well
as the corresponding control pressure diagrams can be found in the Planning Fundamentals of GF Piping Systems.
Normal operation and maintenance
DANGER
Diaphragm valve used as end valve
The end valve may only be opened when
the medium can be caught or carried off
safely and splashing is prevented by taking
appropriate measures.
DANGER
Dismounting the diaphragm valve or
opening the housing nut
The medium may exit uncontrollably or flow
out from the pipe or valve, whether under
pressure or not. The valve or pipe may contain residue or remnants of an aggressive,
Release all pressure from the piping system.
Empty the piping system completely.
Rinse the system, if aggressive, hazardous, flammable or explosive media are
involved
Empty the diaphragm valve completely
when is has been dismounted. In order to
do so, let the valve drain completely
NOTICE
Control operation
Due to cavitation, the diaphragm valve could
be damaged.
Use valve only in optimal control operation
427
Graph
Exploded view
Optical position indicator with cap
Piston
Air connections
All-plastic housing
Diaphragm holder
Compressor
Diaphragm
Valve body
Pre-loaded spring sets for FC mode
10
Spring for FO mode
Dimensions
Type 514
Key
L(1) Union with cemented socket, metric
L(2) Union with threaded socket, metric
L(3) Union with fusion socket
L(4) Union with butt fusion spigot
L(5) Union with butt fusion spigot (PVDF)
L(6) Butt fusion spigot
L(7) Cemented spigot, metric
L(8) Socket fusion spigot
L(9) Backing flange, metric
428
Type 515
Type 517
Type 519
DIASTAR Six FC (Type 514 - 517)

d
DN
D1
D4
D5
L(1)
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
68
1/8"
65
14
128
128
128
224
196
124
124
25
20
96
1/8"
75
14
152
152
150
250
221
144
144
32
25
96
1/8"
85
14
166
166
162
262
234
154
154
40
32
120
1/8"
100
18
192
192
184
296
260
174
174
50
40
120
1/8"
110
18
222
222
210
328
284
194
194
63
50
120
1/8"
125
18
266
266
248
370
321
224
224
DN
L(8)
L (9)
L2
H1
H2
H3
H7
LE
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
124
130
25
101
14
12
60
43
M6
96
90
100
25
20
144
150
25
132
18
12
73
57
M6
114
108
118
10
32
25
154
160
25
143
22
12
84
57
M6
122
116
126
13
40
32
174
180
45
173
26
15
99
69
M8
140
134
144
14
50
40
194
200
45
193
32
15
119
69
M8
160
154
164
16
63
50
224
230
45
205
39
15
132
69
M8
190
184
194
16
DIASTAR Ten FC (Type 514 - 517)

d
DN
D1
D4
D5
L(1)
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
L(8)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
68
1/8"
65
14
128
128
128
224
196
124
124
124
25
20
96
1/8"
75
14
152
152
150
250
221
144
144
144
32
25
96
1/8"
85
14
166
166
162
262
234
154
154
154
40
32
120
1/8"
100
18
192
192
184
296
260
174
174
174
50
40
150
1/4"
110
18
222
222
210
328
284
194
194
194
63
50
150
1/4"
125
18
266
266
248
370
321
224
224
224
DN
L(9)
L2
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H7
LE
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
130
25
101
14
12
60
24
16
43
M6
96
90
100
25
20
150
25
132
18
12
73
25
16
57
M6
114
108
118
10
32
25
160
25
143
22
12
84
25
16
57
M6
122
116
126
13
40
32
180
45
173
26
15
99
26
26
69
M8
140
134
144
15
50
40
200
45
214
32
15
119
36
26
88
M8
160
154
164
19
63
50
230
45
226
39
15
132
36
26
88
M8
190
184
194
23
429
DIASTAR Sixteen FC (Type 514 - 517)

d
DN
D1
D4
D5
L(1)
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
L(8)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
96
1/8"
65
14
128
128
128
224
196
124
124
124
25
20
96
1/8"
75
14
152
152
150
250
221
144
144
144
32
25
120
1/8"
85
14
166
166
162
262
234
154
154
154
40
32
150
1/4"
100
18
192
192
184
296
260
174
174
174
50
40
180
1/4"
110
18
222
222
210
328
284
194
194
194
63
50
180
1/4"
125
18
266
266
248
370
321
224
224
224
DN
L(9)
L2
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H7
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
130
25
127
14
12
68
25
16
57
M6
96
100
25
20
150
25
132
18
12
73
25
16
57
M6
114
118
10
32
25
160
25
167
22
12
93
26
26
69
M6
122
126
13
40
32
180
45
196
26
15
101
36
26
88
M8
140
144
15
50
40
200
45
239
32
15
124
37
26
103
M8
160
164
19
63
50
230
45
251
39
15
137
37
26
103
M8
190
194
23
DIASTAR TenPlus FC (Type 514 - 517)

d
DN
D1
D4
D5
L(1)
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
L(8)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
96
1/8"
65
14
128
128
128
224
196
124
124
124
25
20
96
1/8"
75
14
152
152
150
250
221
144
144
144
32
25
120
1/8"
85
14
166
166
162
262
234
154
154
154
40
32
150
1/4"
100
18
192
192
184
296
260
174
174
174
50
40
180
1/4"
110
18
222
222
210
328
284
194
194
194
63
50
180
1/4"
125
18
266
266
248
370
321
224
224
224
DN
L(9)
L2
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H7
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
130
25
127
14
12
68
25
16
57
M6
96
100
25
20
150
25
132
18
12
73
25
16
57
M6
114
118
10
32
25
160
25
167
22
12
93
26
26
69
M6
122
126
13
40
32
180
45
196
26
15
101
36
26
88
M8
140
144
15
50
40
200
45
239
32
15
124
37
26
103
M8
160
164
19
63
50
230
45
251
39
15
137
37
26
103
M8
190
194
23
430
DIASTAR Ten FO / DA (Type 514 - 517)

d
DN
D1
D4
D5
L(1)
L(2)
L(3)
L(4)
L(5)
L(6)
L(7)
L(8)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
68
1/8"
65
14
128
128
128
224
196
124
124
124
25
20
96
1/8"
75
14
152
152
150
250
221
144
144
144
32
25
96
1/8"
85
14
166
166
162
262
234
154
154
154
40
32
120
1/8"
100
18
192
192
184
296
260
174
174
174
50
40
150
1/4"
110
18
222
222
210
328
284
194
194
194
63
50
150
1/4"
125
18
266
266
248
370
321
224
224
224
DN
L(9)
L2
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H7
LE
z for
L(3)
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
15
130
25
101
14
12
60
24
16
43
M6
96
90
100
25
20
150
25
132
18
12
73
25
16
57
M6
114
108
118
10
32
25
160
25
143
22
12
84
25
16
57
M6
122
116
126
13
40
32
180
45
173
26
15
99
26
26
69
M8
140
134
144
15
50
40
200
45
214
32
15
119
36
26
88
M8
160
154
164
19
63
50
230
45
226
39
15
132
36
26
88
M8
190
184
194
23
DIASTAR TenPlus FC (Type 519)

d
d1
DN
DN1
DN2
D1
L(6)
L1
L3
L4
H3
H4
H5
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
15
15
15
96
1/8"
117
96
162
12
130
71
25
16
25
20
20
15
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
72
25
16
10
25
25
20
20
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
72
25
16
10
32
20
25
15
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
25
25
20
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
32
25
25
25
120
1/8"
145
120
160
19
167
93
26
26
13
40
20
32
15
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
25
32
20
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
32
32
25
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
40
32
32
25
120
1/8"
174
153
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
50
20
40
15
20
96
1/8"
160
134
180
27
148
90
25
16
10
50
25
40
20
25
120
1/8"
160
134
180
28
180
106
26
26
13
50
32
40
25
25
120
1/8"
160
134
180
28
180
106
26
26
13
50
40
40
32
50
180
1/4"
209
169
209
33
249
135
37
26
23
50
50
40
40
50
180
1/4"
209
169
209
33
249
135
37
26
23
63
20
50
15
20
96
1/8"
177
144
180
33
155
96
25
16
10
63
25
50
20
25
120
1/8"
177
144
180
35
187
113
26
26
13
63
32
50
25
25
120
1/8"
177
144
180
35
187
113
26
26
13
63
40
50
32
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
63
50
50
40
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
63
63
50
50
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
90
20
80
15
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
25
80
20
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
32
80
25
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
50
80
40
50
180
1/4"
254
207
250
51
269
155
37
26
23
431
90
63
80
50
50
180
1/4"
254
207
250
51
269
155
37
26
23
110
20
100
15
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
25
100
20
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
32
100
25
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
50
100
40
50
180
1/4"
276
219
250
60
279
165
37
26
23
110
63
100
50
50
180
1/4"
276
219
250
60
279
165
37
26
23
DIASTAR Sixteen FC (Type 519)

d
d1
DN
DN1
DN2
D1
L(6)
L1
L3
L4
H3
H4
H5
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
15
15
15
96
1/8"
117
96
162
12
130
71
25
16
25
20
20
15
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
72
25
16
10
25
25
20
20
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
72
25
16
10
32
20
25
15
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
25
25
20
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
32
25
25
25
120
1/8"
145
120
160
19
167
93
26
26
13
40
20
32
15
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
25
32
20
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
32
32
25
25
120
1/8"
149
128
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
40
40
32
32
25
120
1/8"
174
153
180
23
175
101
26
26
13
50
20
40
15
20
96
1/8"
160
134
180
27
148
90
25
16
10
50
25
40
20
25
120
1/8"
160
134
180
28
180
106
26
26
13
50
32
40
25
25
120
1/8"
160
134
180
28
180
106
26
26
13
50
40
40
32
50
180
1/4"
209
169
209
33
249
135
37
26
23
50
50
40
40
50
180
1/4"
209
169
209
33
249
135
37
26
23
63
20
50
15
20
96
1/8"
177
144
180
33
155
96
25
16
10
63
25
50
20
25
120
1/8"
177
144
180
35
187
113
26
26
13
63
32
50
25
25
120
1/8"
177
144
180
35
187
113
26
26
13
63
40
50
32
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
63
50
50
40
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
63
63
50
50
50
180
1/4"
225
192
220
39
255
141
37
26
23
90
20
80
15
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
25
80
20
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
32
80
25
25
120
1/8"
205
159
190
47
200
126
26
26
13
90
50
80
40
50
180
1/4"
254
207
250
51
269
155
37
26
23
90
63
80
50
50
180
1/4"
254
207
250
51
269
155
37
26
23
110
20
100
15
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
25
100
20
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
32
100
25
25
120
1/8"
227
171
190
56
209
135
26
26
13
110
50
100
40
50
180
1/4"
276
219
250
60
279
165
37
26
23
110
63
100
50
50
180
1/4"
276
219
250
60
279
165
37
26
23
432
DIASTAR Ten FO / DA (Type 519)

d
d1
DN
DN1
DN2
D1
L(6)
L1
L3
L4
H3
H4
H5
Hx
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
20
20
15
15
15
68
1/8"
117
96
162
12
104
63
24
16
25
20
20
15
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
73
25
16
10
25
25
20
20
20
96
1/8"
133
108
162
16
131
73
25
16
10
32
20
25
15
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
25
25
20
20
96
1/8"
142
120
162
19
135
76
25
16
10
32
32
25
25
25
96
1/8"
145
120
160
19
143
84
25
16
13
40
20
32
15
25
96
1/8"
149
128
180
23
151
92
25
16
13
40
25
32
20
25
96
1/8"
149
128
180
23
151
92
25
16
13
40
32
32
25
25
96
1/8"
149
128
180
23
151
92
25
16
13
40
40
32
32
25
96
1/8"
174
153
180
23
151
92
25
16
13
50
20
40
15
20
96
1/8"
160
134
180
27
148
90
25
16
10
50
25
40
20
25
96
1/8"
160
134
180
28
156
97
25
16
13
50
32
40
25
25
96
1/8"
160
134
180
28
156
97
25
16
13
50
40
40
32
50
150
1/4"
209
169
209
33
224
129
36
26
23
50
50
40
40
50
150
1/4"
209
169
209
33
224
129
36
26
23
63
20
50
15
20
96
1/8"
177
144
180
33
155
96
25
16
10
63
25
50
20
25
96
1/8"
177
144
180
35
163
104
25
16
13
63
32
50
25
25
96
1/8"
177
144
180
35
163
104
25
16
13
63
40
50
32
50
150
1/4"
225
192
220
39
230
136
36
26
23
63
50
50
40
50
150
1/4"
225
192
220
39
230
136
36
26
23
63
63
50
50
50
150
1/4"
225
192
220
39
230
136
36
26
23
90
20
80
15
25
96
1/8"
205
159
190
47
176
117
25
16
13
90
25
80
20
25
96
1/8"
205
159
190
47
176
117
25
16
13
90
32
80
25
25
96
1/8"
205
159
190
47
176
117
25
16
13
90
50
80
40
50
150
1/4"
254
207
250
51
244
150
36
26
23
90
63
80
50
50
150
1/4"
254
207
250
51
244
150
36
26
23
110
20
100
15
25
96
1/8"
227
171
190
56
185
126
25
16
13
110
25
100
20
25
96
1/8"
227
171
190
56
185
126
25
16
13
110
32
100
25
25
96
1/8"
227
171
190
56
185
126
25
16
13
110
50
100
40
50
150
1/4"
276
219
250
60
254
160
36
26
23
110
63
100
50
50
150
1/4"
276
219
250
60
254
160
36
26
23
Technical data
ABS

At operating temperatures below 0C,
please retighten to the prescribed tightening torque of the diaphragm after commissioning, if necessary.
P
T
1)

Temperature in C, F
433
PP
P
T
1)
PVDF

Temperature in C, F
P
T
1)

Temperature in C, F
PN16 only with black PPS housing nut
Pressure loss
PVC-U
Type 514...517
P
T
1)
2)
3)

Temperature in C, F
Only with black PPS housing nut
nominal pressure is reduced to PN10
nominal pressure is reduced to PN6
PVC-C
P
T
1)
434

Temperature in C, F
x
y
Flow ratein l/min

Pressure lossp = 1bar
Type 514...517
x
y
Stroke in %
kv, Cv value in %
Type 519
x
y
Stroke in %
kv, Cv value in %
kv 100 values
63
50
50
40
610
63
63
50
50
747
90
20
80
15
82
90
25
80
20
103
90
32
80
25
129
90
50
80
40
623
90
63
80
50
696
110
20
100
15
78
110
25
100
20
103
110
32
100
25
131
110
50
100
40
604
110
63
100
50
661
Control pressure diagram

determined by using the flow value characteristics and the kv
100 values.
The following diagrams show the control pressuredepending on the nominal pressure PN.
Type 514 - 517
DIASTAR Six, FC with EPDM diaphragm
d [mm]
DN [mm]
kv [l/min] p =
1bar
20
15
125
25
20
271
32
25
481
40
32
759
50
40
1263 (960*)
63
50
1728 (1181*)
* DIASTAR SIX
Type 519
d [mm]
d1 [mm]
DN [mm]
DN1[mm]
kv [l/min]
p = 1bar
20
20
15
15
57
25
20
20
15
89
25
25
20
20
118
32
20
25
15
80
32
25
25
20
105
32
32
25
25
231
40
20
32
15
85
40
25
32
20
119
40
32
32
25
153
40
40
32
32
187
50
20
40
15
86
50
25
40
20
160
50
32
40
25
206
50
40
40
32
524
50
50
40
40
667
63
20
50
15
84
63
25
50
20
150
63
32
50
25
184
63
40
50
32
471
DIASTAR Ten, FC with EPDM diaphragm
DIASTAR Ten, FC with PTFE diaphragm
435
DIASTAR Ten, FO and DA with EPDM diaphragm
DIASTAR Sixteen, FC with EPDM diaphragm
DIASTAR Ten, FO and DA with PTFE diaphragm
DIASTAR Sixteen, FC with PTFE diaphragm
DIASTAR TenPlus, FC with EPDM diaphragm
DIASTAR TenPlus, FC with PTFE diaphragm
436
Use of the diaphragm valve with static pressure:

0.5 bar
Pressure levels
Six FC
Ten DA/FO
Ten FC
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS, PP-H
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS,

PP-H, PVDF, PVDF-HP
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS,

PP-H, PVDF, PVDF-HP
Type
Valve body material
Pressure level
EPDM
20DN15
6 bar
25DN20
Control pressure
EPDM
PTFE
Control pressure
EPDM
PTFE
Control pressure
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
6 bar
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
32DN25
6 bar
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
40DN32
6 bar
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
50DN40
6 bar
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
63DN50
6 bar
6 bar
10 bar
10 bar
5 bar
10 bar
6 bar
6 bar
->
Working pressure
->
->
TenPlus FC
Sixteen FC
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS,

PP-H, PVDF, PVDF-HP
PVC-U, PVDF, PVDF-HP
Type
Valve body material
PTFE
Pressure level
EPDM
PTFE
Control pressure
EPDM
PTFE
Control pressure
20DN15
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
6 bar
25DN20
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
6 bar
32DN25
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
6 bar
40DN32
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
6 bar
50DN40
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
6 bar
63DN50
10 bar
10 bar
6 bar
16 bar
10 bar
6 bar
-><-
-><-
Working pressure
->
->
->
->
437
Type of actuation
Function FC, FO, DA
Function FC
Function FO
Function DA
In the non-operative state, the valve is

closed by spring force. When the actuator is pressurised with the control
medium (bottom connection), the valve
opens. When the control medium escapes, the valve is closed by the spring
force.
In the non-operative state, the valve is

open by spring force. When the actuator
is pressurised with the control medium
(top connection), the valve closes. When
the control medium escapes, the valve is
opened by the spring force.
The valve has no defined basic position.

The valve is opened and closed by applying controlpressure to the corresponding connection (top connection for closing, bottom connection for opening).
Selection of solenoid valve and associated connecting thread

3/2-way solenoid valves are used to control single acting actuators (FC). They
are mounted either directly to the actuator via a banjo screw or via a battery
mounting plate or valve cluster, as required.
3/2-way solenoid valves are used to control single acting actuators (FO). They
are mounted either directly to the actuator via a banjo screw or via a battery
mounting plate or valve cluster, as required.
4/2-way or 5/2-way solenoid valves are

used to control double acting actuators
DA. They can be mounted either directly to the actuator via a Namur connector
plate or via valve clusters.
FC mode of operation with a 3/2-way

solenoid valve for bottom connection
FO mode with a 3/2-way solenoid valve

for top connection
The DA mode with a 4/2- or 5/2-way

solenoid valve. Both connections are
used.
Air connection
Six (FC)
Ten (FC/ FO / DA)
Ten Plus (FC)
Sixteen (FC)
20DN15
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
25DN20
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
32DN25
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
1/8"
40DN32
1/8"
1/8"
1/4"
1/4"
50DN40
1/8"
1/4"
1/4"
1/4"
63DN50
1/8"
1/4"
1/4"
1/4"
Relation between line pressure and spring sets

The closing force of the actuators were designed for the
specified PN pressure level. Operation with very low line
pressure can cause increase diaphragm wear. In order
to extend the diaphragm life span with low line pressure,
the number of spring packages can be reduced. For the
specific dimensioning, please contact your representative at Georg Fischer Piping Systems.
438
Control medium
Function FC
Function FO
Function DA
6 bar max. for FC mode; lower

control pressure possible due to
reduced spring sets
Compressed air classes (ISO
8573-1) 2 or 3 for -10 C and 3 or
4 for T 0 C
Temperature of control medium,
max. 40 C
When the medium pressure exceeds 10 bar, the control pressure
must be throttled by exhaust air
(adjust actuating time to approx.
3s).
The corresponding control pressure diagrams can be found in the
Chapter "Technical data"
5 bar max. for the FO mode. For

DN50 and from a line pressure of
10 bar, the max control pressure is
6 bar.
When the medium pressure exceeds 10bar, the control pressure
(adjust actuating time to approx.
3s).
8573-1) 2 or 3 at -10 C and 3 or 4
at T 0 C
max. 40 C
Depending on the working pressure PN, lower control pressures
may be selected
5 bar max. for the DA mode. For

DN50 and from a line pressure of
10 bar the max. control pressure is
6 bar.
When the medium pressure exceeds 10bar, the control pressure
(adjust actuating time to approx. 3
s).
8573-1) 2 or 3 at -10 C and 3 or 4
at T 0 C
max. 40 C
Depending on the working pressure PN, lower control pressures
may be selected
Control volume
Six (FC)
[dm]
Ten (FC)
[dm]
Ten (FO)
[dm]
Ten (DA)
[dm]
closed
20DN15
0.07
0.07
0.07
25DN20
0.20
0.20
32DN25
0.22
40DN32
TenPlus (FC)
[dm]
Sixteen (FC)
[dm]
open
0.07
0.07
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.22
0.23
0.23
0.22
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.44
0.44
0.40
0.78
0.78
50DN40
0.44
0.77
0.86
0.86
0.77
0.85
0.85
63DN50
0.44
1.20
1.52
1.52
1.20
1.33
1.33

Installation angle for optimal draining of the
valve
In order to achieve optimal drainage of these diaphragm

valves, GF recommends installing them at the angles (a
and b), which correspond to the respective dimension
ranges. An installation inclination of about 1 - 2 is not
taken into consideration with the stated angles.

Dimension
d20DN15
d25DN20
d32DN25
d40DN32
d50DN40
D63DN50
439
PP- mounting plate for diaphragm valves

The mounting plates are designed to allow differently
sized GF diaphragm valves to be aligned on the same
pipe centre line by equalising the different heights from
the base to the centre line of the pipe. The plates can
also be used for the PVC diaphragm valve of type 514
for equalising the union nut with the mounting surface.
Material: PP GF 15, black
5 sizes, numbered from 1 to 5
Can be plugged together to achieve the desired
height
Dimensions
Angle b for types 514 .. 517

Dimension
d20DN15
27
d25DN20
24
d32DN25
25
d40DN32
23
d50DN40
24
D63DN50
22
Emptying angle for type 519 is 90, independent of

the dimension
Angle for type 519
Integrated fastening and PP-mounting plate

Integrated mounting
The diaphragm valve includes a built-in mounting. With
this, the forces that can occur when operating the valve
(e.g. breakaway torque) are absorbed. Due to the integrated mounting, operation forces are not transmitted to
the piping system.
440
Mounting
plate No.
Diaphragm valve
Dimension [mm]
Dimension
inch
H1
L1
L2
L3
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
4.50
11.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
3.50
7.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN15 - 25
1/2'' - 1''
13.50
17.00
46.50
42.00
25.00
17.00
7.50
DN32 - 50
1 1/4'' - 2''
6.75
16.75
80.00
66.50
45.00
22.00
9.50
DN32 - 50
1 1/4'' - 2''
6.75
13.25
80.00
66.50
45.00
22.00
9.50
Dimensions
The length of the mounting screws is calculated by
adding the length of the thread in the valve base to the
height of the plate and the thickness of the mounting
bracket. Mounting brackets No. 1 and 4 are for plugging
directly into the valve base.
Equalising the mounting height
Quantity required x Mounting plate number
from DN... ...to DN
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
15
1x1
1x1+1x2
1x1+2x2
1x1+1x3
1x1+2x2+1x3
1x1+2x3
20
1x1
1x1+1x2
1x1+3x2
1x1+1x2+1x3
1x1+3x2+1x3
25
1x1
1x1+2x2
1x1+1x3
1x1+2x2+1x3
32
1x4
1x4+1x5
1x4+2x5
40
1x4
1x4+1x5
50
1x4
441
Equalising the union height for type 514
Dimension
[mm]
Quantity required x
plate number
H [mm]
H1 [mm]
15
1 x1 + 2 x 2
22.50
11.50
20
1x1+2x2
29.00
11.50
25
1x1+2x2
32.50
11.50
32
1x4+1x5
39.00
13.50
40
1x4+1x5
46.00
13.50
50
1x4+1x5
52.50
13.50
Flexible air connection
Due to the round geometry of the diaphragm valve, the

air terminals of the drive can be positioned as desired in
90 degree increments.
Maintenance intervall
We recommend regular inspection of the diaphragm

and the valve body, at the latest after:
100,000 operations at less than 10 bar nominal pressure at 20C and water
50,000 operations at more than 10 bar nominal pressure at 20C and water
If the flow medium should show increased temperatures, chemicals, or abrasion with particles, we recommend more frequent monitoring. The diaphragm can be
controlled by professionally dismounting the housing
nut.
442
DIASTAR 025 DN65 - DN150

Dimensions
DN
D1 (G)
D2
D3
D4
L2
L3
H1
H2
H3
H9
H10
Stroke
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
280
1/4
185
M8
145
290
70
298
148
24
46
46
15
30
90
80
280
1/4
200
M12
160
310
120
302
150
24
46
57
15
35
110
100
335
1/4
225
M12
180
350
120
409
176
24
46
69
20
40
160
150
335
1/4
285
M12
240
480
100
200
201
237
24
46
108
20
40
PVDF

PP-H
1)
Diastar 025 DN100 and DN150
Temperature in C, F
In case of applications with temperatures in the range of the
dotted lines, please contact your GF representative
1)
2)
Higher temperature after consultation
Temperature in C, F
Pressure loss
DIASTAR 025 DN65 - DN150 at Wasser 20 C
PVC-U
1)
Temperature in C, F
x
y
Flow ratein l/min

Pressure lossp = 1bar
443
Control volume DIASTAR 025 DN65 - DN150
x
y
Stroke in %
kv 100 value in %
kv 100 values
DIASTAR 025
Nominal diameter
FC
[dm]
FO
[dm]
DA
[dm]
closed
open
75DN65
2.20
4.40
4.40
2.20
90DN80
2.20
4.40
4.40
2.20
110DN100
3.80
7.60
7.60
3.80
160DN150
3.80
7.60
7.60
3.80
DIASTAR 025
d [mm]
DN [mm]
Kv [l/min]
p = 1 bar
75
65
992
90
80
1700
Nominal diameter
110
100
2700
75DN65
G1/4"
160
150
6033
90DN80
G1/4"
110DN100
G1/4"
160DN150
G1/4"
Control pressure diagram

Function FC with EPDM diaphragm
Connections for solenoid valves

FC
FO
DA
Control medium
6 bar maxfor the functionFC
5 bar max. for the functions FO and DA
Control medium: oil-free compressed air or neutral
non-aggressive gases
Temperature of control medium: max. 40C
Depending on the working pressure PN, lower control
pressure may be selected Please observe the control
pressure diagrams
Control volume
Function FC with PTFE diaphragm
Nominal diameter
FC
[dm]
FO
[dm]
DA
[dm]
closed
open
75DN65
2.20
4.40
4.40
2.20
90DN80
2.20
4.40
4.40
2.20
110DN100
3.80
7.60
7.60
3.80
160DN150
3.80
7.60
7.60
3.80
Accessories
Function FO or DA with EPDM / PTFE diaphragm
444
The DIASTAR can be made to fit your application even

better with the accessories we offer. The following
pages provide an overview of the accessories. More detailed information can be found in the chapter "Accessories for pneumatic actuators" in the Georg Fischer
Planning Fundamentals.
Stroke limiter / Emergency manual override

The stroke limiter can be used for limiting the minimum and
maximum stroke as well as for the emergency manual override. With the help of adapters, the stroke limiter can also be
used together with our electrical position indicator ER52/53
MNL 532
3/2 and 5/2-way solenoid valve for activating a double acting
pneumatic actuator. The mounting takes place via a NAMUR
connection. For the dimension range DIASTAR DN15-DN50,
a Namur mounting plate needs to be installed between the
actuator and the pilot valve:
230V, 50-60Hz
115V, 50-60Hz
48V, 50-60Hz
24V, 50-60Hz
24VDC
Solenoid pilot valve

Type PV94
3/2-way solenoid valve for controlling single acting pneumatic actuators in the dimensions DN15-DN50. Mounted with a
banjo screw directly on the actuator. For the air connection, a
G1/8", G14" and 6 mm hose coupling is available. The PV94
can be ordered for the following voltages:
230V, 50-60Hz
115V, 50-60Hz
24V, 50-60Hz
24VDC
Type PV95
3/2-way solenoid valve for controlling single acting pneumatic actuators in the dimensions DN65-DN150. Mounted with a
banjo screw directly on the actuator. For the air connection, a
G1/8" and G14" is available. The solenoid valve is available
in the dimensions DN1.5 and DN2 as well as with the following voltages:
230V, 50-60Hz
115V, 50-60Hz
24V, 50-60Hz
24VDC
PV2000
For simultaneous controlling of several actuators, we offer
the PV2000 valve cluster. The cluster consists of a connecting module, several pilot valves and an end module. Depending on the application you can choose a connecting
module for D-sub connection, AS interface or Profibus. The
modular system allows combining 3/2 and 5/2-way valves as
required by the application.
Feedback
ER55
The ER55 has a Reed contact, which is activated via a magnet in the position indicator. The Reed contact can be set so
that either the open or closed position is indicated. To show
both positions, the ER55 can be retrofitted with a second
Reed contact.
445
ER52 and ER53

The ER52/53 is an electrical position indicator device with
two limit switches and can therefore indicate both, the open
and the closed position. The limit switches are activated with
cams which are self-adjusting. The ER52/53 is available with
the following limit switches:
Silver-nickel (AG-Ni)
Gold contacts (AU)
Inductive switch NAMUR
Positioner
DSR 500
The digital positioners of type DSR500 is the ideal product for future control applications using our pneumatic
valves. The microprocessor controlled positioners feature a very compact and uncomplicated design that simplifies installation. The positioners are supplied with or
without optical indicator.
446
Bus communication
AS Interface
Modern plants with conventional valve control require more
and more installation and maintenance efforts. The GF ASi controller enables state-of-the-art bus communication with
minimum effort. The controller contains all the necessary
electric and pneumatic components. Only a serial cable and
the air connections is all that is to be installed, in order to be
able to independently control up to 62 valves.
Fundamentals for butterfly valve, hand operated
Butterfly valve type 567/568 DN50 - DN600

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
Butterfly valve type 037/038/039

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Page
448
449
450
454
458
459
459
461
463
464
468
470
470
447
Fundamentals for butterfly

valve, hand operated
Butterfly valve type 567/568 DN50 DN600
Overview
Product description
Industrial water treatment, drinking water treatment,

swimming pools, aquariums, oceanaria and wastewater
technology are typical applications of butterfly valvesfrom Georg Fischer Piping Systems. In most applications of the chemical industry, chemical trade, galvanizing and power plants, extremely aggressive media have
to be transported. Often, the combination of aggressive
chemicals and entrained solids lead to abrasion and
corrosion problems, especially with butterfly valves. Butterfly valves type 567/568 are compact, flexible and reliable shut-off valves for wafer and lugstyle applications.
Our system's modular design principle allows you to exchange individual system components fast, easily and
at very little expense and effort. The butterfly valves are
available in various materials and sizes, so you will always find the right material for your application or medium.
Versions
Georg Fischer presents the new 567/568 type series of

butterfly valves with a comprehensive range of products
and a multitude of interesting combination possibilities.
We can offer you, for example, manual valves with hand
lever or reduction gear. Our system's modular design
principle allows you to exchange individual system components fast, easily and at very little expense and effort. You also have a choice of materials: PVC-U, PVCC, ABS, or PP-H and PVDF. Our standard sealing materials are EPDM, FPMand PTFE/FPM. Other materials
are available on request.
Standard Wafer-type butterfly valve Type 567
448
Standard Lug-type butterfly

valve/ end installation Type
568
Butterfly valve with

fine adjustment
Product features
Butterfly valve with

reduction gear
50% lower actuation torque compared to a centric butterfly valve due to the double eccentric operating principle
Noticably reduced abrasion
Integrated electric position indicator in the mounting
flange
Optimized gaskets
All components which are in contact with the medium
are made of piping material, consequently the permeation can be minimized
Functional hand lever made of glass-fiber-reinforced
polypropylene (PP-GF 30) with 5 ratchet setting,
lockable
Dimensions up to DN 600
Flexibility thanks to modular design
Standard interface according to ISO 5211
For all common standards: DIN/EN/ISO, ANSI/BS, JIS
Overview
General
Type
567
568
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Dimension DN
50 - 600
50 - 200
Pressure range PN Until DN300 PN10
DN350 - 400 PN6
DN450 - 600 PN4
Materials used
Shaft
V2A / SS304
Outside housing
Type 567:PP-GF30
Type 568: GG40
Hand lever
PP-GF30
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Flanges
Diaphragm materials
EPDM
FPM
PTFE / FPM
Accessories
Integrated electric feedback in the mounting flange
Intermediate elements
Lever with fine adjustment
Safety information
butterfly valve. They should identify the hazards and advice that should be considered for the different uses and
installation/commissioning.
NOTICE
Intended use
Butterfly valves are not recommended for
media containing solids. In control operations, cavitation is to be avoided.
In case of degreasing or sticking media,
butterfly valves can only be used after consultation with a GF Piping Systems representative.
Type 568 to be used as intermediate installation valve or as end valve.
DANGER
Butterfly valve as end valve
When the butterfly valve is opened as end
valve with the piping system under pressure,
the medium may escape uncontrollably! Consequences can be death or serious injury.
The end valve of a piping system under
pressure shall only be opened, when the
medium can be safely collected or diverted,
and when splashing around can be avoided through corresponding measures.
DANGER
Opening or closing the valve
Death or serious injury by jerky opening or
closing the valve
Avoid pressure surges in the piping system, especially when use the hand lever.
For applications with high flow velocities for
manual actuation, use the manual gearbox
version.
449
DANGER
CAUTION
Correct installation
Due to incorrect installation, injuries or death
can occur.
Make sure that the butterfly valves to be installed correspond specifically to the pressure rating, type of connection, dimension
and materials of the particular application.
Carry out a function test: close the butterfly
valve and open it again.
Do not install a butterfly valve which does
not function properly.
Pressure test and commissioning

Butterfly valve pressure testing is subject to
the same regulations as the piping systems.
Check that all valves are in the required
open or closed position.
Fill the piping system and deaerate completely.
Pressure must not exceed the value of 1.5
x PN
The valves and connections should be
checked for a tight seal during the pressure
test.
NOTICE
Graph
Exploded view butterfly valve

All sealings (material e.g. EPDM, FPM ) are
of organic materials and react to environmental influences.
They must be stored in their original packaging if possible in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Before installing them, the sealings have to
be checked on possible ageing damages,
such as fissures and hardenings.
Damaged sealings and spare parts must
not come into operation.
DN50 - DN300
DANGER
Improper lubricants can corrode the material
of the butterfly valve or seal. Consequences
can be death or serious injuries.
Never use mineral oil-based greases or
Vaseline (Petrolatum)!
For clean silicone-free butterfly valves, observe the special manufacturers information.
450
Wafer housing
Inner body
Disc
End stop
Bush
Shaft
Large retaining ring
Washer
Small retaining ring
10
Cap
11
O-ring
12
Flange seal
13
Profile sealing
DN350 - DN600
Wafer housing
Snap ring
Disc
5.1
Bush
5.2
Bush
Shaft
Circlip
Exploded view hand lever
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hand lever clip

Hand lever
Spring
Hand lever catch
Screws
Index plate
Insert
Washer
Nuts
Washer
10
Cap
11.1
O-ring
11.2
O-ring
Dimensions of type 567 with bare shaft end
12
Flange seal
DN50 - DN300
13
Profile sealing
14
Feather key
15
Actuator interface
16
Mounting screw
451
DN
D1min
D1max
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
19
120.0
125.0
75
65
19
139.7
145.0
90
80
19
150.0
160.0
110
100
19
175.0
190.5
140
125
23
210.0
215.9
160
150
24
241.3
241.3
225
200
23
290.0
295.0
280
250
25
353.0
362.0
315
300
25
400.0
432.0
d2
D3
D4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
104
70
90
222
75
115
70
90
90
131
70
110
161
140
DN350- DN600
DN
235
inch PN
D1
min
D1
d2
max
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
90
247
d355
DN350
14"
445
477
535
70
90
287
d400
DN400
16"
510
540
595
187
70
90
313
d450
DN450
18"
565
578
635
160
215
70
90
335
d500
DN500
20"
620
635
700
225
267
70
90
387
d630
DN600
24"
725
750
813
280
329
102
125
509
315
379
102
125
553
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
H1
H2
H3
H4
d355
268
410
31
100
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
d400
300
435
31
100
63
77
134
27
23
d450
320
520
35
120
75
83
140
27
23
d500
350
550
35
120
90
89
146
27
23
d630
420
610
35
120
110
104
167
16
23
140
117
181
16
23
160
130
189
19
23
225
158
210
19
23
280
205
264
40
23
315
228
285
40
23
H5
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
11
45
40
75
11
46
54
35
90
11
49
67
50
110
14
56
88
74
140
14
64
113
97
160
17
72
139
123
225
17
73
178
169
280
22
113
210
207
315
22
113
256
253
452
Dimensions of type 567 with hand lever
L1
L2
Q1
Q2
DN50 - DN300
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
106
205
40
75
46
106
205
54
35
90
49
106
205
67
50
110
56
106
255
88
74
140
64
106
255
113
97
160
72
106
255
139
123
225
73
140
408
178
169
280
113
149
408
210
207
315
113
149
408
256
253
Dimensions of type 567 reduction gear with

handwheel
DN50 - DN300
DN
D1min
D1max
d2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
19
120.0
125.0
104
75
65
19
139.7
145.0
115
90
80
19
150.0
160.0
131
110
100
19
175.0
190.0
161
140
125
23
210.0
215.9
187
160
150
24
241.3
241.3
215
225
200
23
290.0
295.0
267
280
250
25
353.0
362.0
329
315
300
25
400.0
432.0
379
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
264
77
134
54
75
277
83
140
54
90
289
89
146
54
110
325
104
167
55
140
352
117
181
55
160
373
130
189
55
225
435
158
210
67
280
554
205
264
85
315
598
228
285
85
DN
D1min
D1max
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
19
120.0
125.0
75
65
19
139.7
145.0
90
80
19
150.0
160.0
110
100
19
175.0
190.5
140
125
23
210.0
215.9
160
150
24
241.3
241.3
225
200
23
290.0
295.0
280
250
25
353.0
362.0
315
300
25
400.0
432.0
453
d2
D3
H1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
104
160
278
77
75
115
160
291
83
90
131
160
303
89
110
161
160
339
104
140
187
160
365
117
160
215
160
387
130
225
267
160
436
158
280
329
160
529
205
315
379
160
573
228
H2
H3
L1
L2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
134
60
45
120
132
75
140
60
46
120
132
90
146
60
49
120
132
110
167
60
56
120
132
140
181
60
64
120
160
189
60
72
225
210
60
280
264
315
285
DN 350 - DN600
DN
inch PN
D1
min
D1
max
d2
132
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
120
132
d355
DN350
14"
445
477
535
73
120
132
d400
DN400
16"
510
540
595
60
113
134
151
d450
DN450
18"
565
578
635
60
113
134
151
d500
DN500
20"
620
635
700
d630
DN600
24"
725
750
813
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
D3
H1
H2
H3
63
236
40
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
236
54
35
d355
140
268
410
31
90
236
67
50
d400
140
300
435
31
110
236
88
74
d450
165
320
520
35
140
236
113
97
d500
165
350
550
35
160
236
139
123
d630
165
420
610
35
225
236
178
169
250
261
210
207
Technical data
315
261
256
253
454

ABS DN50 - DN300
PVC-U DN50 - DN400
1)
DN50 - DN300
Temperature in C, F
1)
2)
DN50 - DN300
DN350 - 400
Temperature in C, F
PP DN50 - DN300
1)
DN50 - DN200
2)
DN250 - DN 300
Temperature in C, F
PP DN350 - DN600
1)
DN350 - 400
2)
DN450
3)
DN500 - 600
Temperature in C, F
PVC-C DN50 - DN300
1)
DN50 - DN300
Temperature in C, F
PVDF and PVDF/PTFE DN50 - DN300
1)
DN50 - DN300
Temperature in C, F
Pressure loss
DN50 - DN300
X
Y

455
Operating torque
DN350 - DN600
DN50 - DN300 for opening / closing (standard valve,

as delivered)
X
Y

X
Y
DN50 - DN600
Size DN (mm, inch)

Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Depending on the operation conditions (e.g. operating speed, fluid, temperature, etc.) the stated operating
torque can increase up to 4 times.
DN350 - DN600
X
Y
Open angle (%)

kv, CV value (%)
kv 100 values
DN mm DN inch d mm
kv 100
l/min
(p = 1
psi)
Cv 100
US gal./
min (p
= 1 psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
50
63
1470
103
88
65
75
2200
154
132
80
90
3000
210
180
100
110
6500
455
390
125
140
11500
805
690
150
160
16600
1162
200
225
39600
250
10
280
300
12
350
X
Y
Size DN (mm, inch)

Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Reference values for tightening torque of

screws
DN50 - DN300
AK type 567 in ISO flange connections
d
DN
inch Total number of

screws
Max. closing
torque
1000
in Nm
in lb-ft
2772
2380
63
50
4 x M16 x 140mm
20
15
51000
3570
3060
75
65
4 x M16 x 140mm
25
18
315
73000
5110
4380
90
80
8 x M16 x 150mm
15
11
14
335
90000
6300
5400
110
100
8 x M16 x 180mm
20
15
400
16
400
115000
8050
6900
140
125
8 x M16 x 200mm
25
18
450
18
450
155000
10850
9300
160
150
8 x M20 x 220mm
35
26
500
20
500
204000
14280
12240
225
200
8 x M20 x 220mm
45
33
600
24
630
265000
18550
15900
280
250
10
8 x M20 x 300mm
80
59
315
300
12
12 x M20 x 300mm
80
59
456

AK type 567 in ANSI flange connections
inch d
DN
Total number of
screws
Max. closing
torque
in Nm
in lb-ft
63
50
4 x 5/8 x 3"
27
20
75
65
4 x 5/8 x 3"
27
20
90
80
4 x 5/8 x 3"
27
20
110
100
8 x 5/8 x 4"
27
20
140
125
8 x 3/4 x 4"
35
26
160
150
8 x 3/4 x 4"
45
33
225
200
8 x 7/8 x 5"
45
33
10
280
250
8 x 7/8 x 6"
72
53
12
315
300
12 x 7/8 x 6"
72
53
Reference values for tightening torque of screws AK type 568 in ISO flange connections
SFA - BFA with the various flanges
Max. closing torque
DN
Number
PP
Screws
PP-V
PP/ St
PVC-U
PP-V
PP/St
PP-V
PP/St
in Nm
in lb-ft
Total
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
50
8 x M16
55
55
50
55
50
55
50
20
15
65
8 x M16
60
60
50
60
50
60
50
25
18
80
16 x M16
60
65
55
60
55
65
55
15
11
100
16 x M16
65
70
60
70
60
70
60
20
15
125
16 x M16
70
80
70
70
70
80
70
25
18
150
16 x M20
80
80
80
80
70
80
80
35
26
200
16 x M20
90
90
90
90
90
90
80
45
33
PVC-U
Torque
PVDF
Reference values for tightening torque of screws AK type 568 in ANSI flange connections
SFA - BFA with the various flanges
Max. closing torque
DN
Number
PP
Screws
PP-V
PP/ St
PVC-U
PP-V
PP/St
PP-V
PP/St
in Nm
in lb-ft
Total
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
Lmin
8 x 5/8
55
55
50
55
50
55
50
27
20
8 x 5/8
55
60
50
60
50
60
50
27
20
8 x 5/8
60
65
55
60
55
65
55
27
20
16 x 5/8
65
70
60
60
60
70
60
27
20
16 x 3/4
70
80
70
70
70
80
70
35
26
16 x 3/4
80
80
80
80
70
80
70
45
33
16 x 3/4
90
90
90
90
90
90
80
45
33
PVC-U
Torque
PVDF
457
DN350 - DN600
AK type 567
inch d
DN
Max. closing
torque
in Nm
in lb-ft
14
355
350
80
59
16
400
400
100
74
18
450
450
100
74
20
500
500
100
74
24
630
600
100
74
Technical features
The name GF stands for reliability and longevity and
has done so for over 200 years. Our products guarantee quality, innovation and functionality. These qualities
have also been incorporated in the design of our new
butterfly valves type 567/568. You will find innovative
ideas in every detail. And every detail meets your specific needs and requirements from a safety, technical
and business point of view.
Double eccentric operating principle
Making a statement is important. Especially when you
do it with innovative details like our new butterfly valve
type 567/568.
Double eccentricity is the answer.
Most butterfly valves are built according to a concentric operating principle, ours have a double eccentric design. This means the disc doesnt touch the seal in the
open position. Thus ensuring low torqueand less wear
and tear. In addition, the double eccentric design protects our butterfly valves even better against pressure
surges. So they have a longer service life and require
less maintenance.
Integrated electrical position feedback
Now, you have a clear overview of your system at all
times. Thanks to our integrated electric position indicator, you always know which valves are open and which
are closed. This contributes greatly to your and your operators safety. The new position indicator integrated in
the mounting flange is a totally new feature for butterfly
valves.
This new integrated feedback concept includes a choice
of five different types of limit switches perfectly suited to
your needs.
Lower actuation torque
Our new butterfly valves have an actuation torque which
is up to 50 % lower than that of our previous model or
that of our competitors. They are therefore easier to operate and you can use smaller, more economical actuators. Since the actuation torque largely depends on the
458
internal pressure usually between 3 and 6 bar our

new butterfly valves are ideal for precisely this pressure
range. The maximum allowable nominal pressure at 20
C is 10 bar.
Optimised modular components
We practice quality. Thats why we look at each sealing
function separately, optimising each seal according to
its particular function.
We have used three separate sealing elements here:
Exterior seal: double, internal shaft seal on both sides
of disc to protect against external leakage
Connecting element seal: standard O-rings
Disc seal: specially engineered profile seal
Reduced permeation
All the butterfly valve components that come into contact with the medium, such as disc, inner bodies and
bushes, are manufactured of the corresponding pipe
material. Your benefit: excellent corrosion and chemical
resistance.
New design of functional hand lever
The type 567/568 butterfly valves have been designed
taking every detail into consideration, even the hand
lever. The following features guarantee even more safety:
On standard versions, the indexing is in increments
of 5 degrees. There are always six teeth engaged between the ratchet and the index plate. This ensures
accurate and safe positioning of the lever.
With the fine adjustment option, the disc can be
opened at any angle between 0 and 90
The opening angle is clearly indicated in degrees on
the index plate.
The hand lever is lockable to prevent it from being
moved.
The hand lever is made of high strength PP-GF
(polypropylene, fiberglass-reinforced)
or the stubs are already chamfered. If you want ti install

flanged adaptors/stubs of a different brand, then please
make sure that the inside diameter (int) of the flange
adaptor/stub is greater than the output measure (Q1) of
the disc. If necessary, the flange adaptor/stub has to be
chamfered according to the table.

Maintenance
The new butterfly valves in the dimensions DN50 to DN300

have a modular design, offering you a wide range of products to choose from.
Our attention to detail sets new standards in regard to economic efficiency, safety and long service life.
The profile seal has been specially engineered for the double eccentric operating principle. The use of standard O-rings
for sealing the pipeline makes installation easy. No displacement, falling out or folding over as is often the case with
other sealing systems.
In normal operation, butterfly valves do not require

maintenance. It is enough to control periodically, if there
is no leakage. If the medium escapes at the flange connections, refasten these acc. to the table. In case of
leakages or other defects, the safety instructions in the
instruction manual and in the planning fundamentals
must be observed.
We recommend operating the butterfly valves which
are kept permanently in the same position 1 2 x a
year to check their functionality.
Depending on the working conditions, the profile
sealings should be lubricated periodically with a (silicon-based) lubricant.
Accessories
Functions
Position feedback in combination with actuators
Also for hand valve and for hand gear versions
General technical data of the position feedback unit
Protection class with DIN plug (2): IP 65
Protection class with cable gland: IP 67
Ambient temperature: -10 C to +50 C
Assignment of the position feedback to butterfly
valve type 567/568
By integrating the position indicator in the mounting flange,

the valve design was kept small and compact.
The ergonomic and practical design, compactness, and robust material of the hand lever makes it very operator friendly.
Shaft
Dimension
11 mm
DN50 to DN80
14 mm
DN100 to DN125
17 mm
DN150 to DN200
The proven concept of double, bi-directional sealing against

leakage has been implemented which provides maximum
reliability and safety. Due to the use of O-rings in standard
dimensions, an economical solution with high-quality elastomers has been realised.
Chamfering of the flange adaptor/stub
When using the specified flange adaptors/stubs from

GF Piping Systems, a chamfering is not necessary, because the disc does not touch the flange adaptor/stub
459
Wiring diagram:
Type of switch
Contact rating
Code-No.
Microswitch
Silver nickel
(Ag Ni)
250 V ~
6A
161 486 859

DN50 - 80
Contact rating
Code-No.
Inductive switch
NPN
5 30 V =
100 mA
161 486 857

DN50 - 80
161 486 303
DN100 - 125
161 486 305

DN100 - 125
161 486 010
DN150 - 200
Microswitch
with gold contacts
(Au)
Type of switch
4 - 30 V =
1 100 mA
161 486 858

DN50 - 80
161 486 008

DN150 - 200
Inductive switch
PNP
5 30 V =
100 mA
161 486 302

DN100 - 125
161 486 304

DN100 - 125
161 486 009
DN150 - 200
161 486 856

DN50 - 80
161 486 007

DN150 - 200
Connection diagram:
Connection wiring diagram
A closed
B open
C blue
D black
E black
F brown
A closed
B open
C black
D blue
E blue
Type of switch
Nominal ratings
Code-No.
Inductive
switch
Namur
8 V=
161 486 855

DN50 - 80
Approvals:
ATEX 2032x,
CSA EMV according to
EN 60947-5-2
Standard conformity EN
60947-5-6
161 486 301

DN100 - 125
161 486 006
DN150 - 200
Connection diagram:
A closed
B open
C blue
D brown
460

Overview
Butterfly valve type 037 with hand lever with stepless fine adjustment
Product description
Metal butterfly valves are ideal for shutting off and controlling the flow of liquid media in pipelines. They offer
high temperature and pressure resistance as well as
outstanding resistance to corrosion. Simply a high-performance valve that is reliable and durable. Applications
- including the dimensions DN350 to DN1200 - can be
found in water treatment and the chemical process industry.
Versions
The metal butterfly valves type 037/038/039 can be universally used as open/close or control valve. The easy
installation of the valves between pipe flanges warrants
reliable operation and sealing. The lightweight aluminium valve body has special advantages in transport and
installation.
The Rilsan coating of the valve body and the ductile
iron valve disc provide high resistance against corrosion. The butterfly valves are also available in a standard version with stainless steel valve disc.
The butterfly valves are available as manually operated
valves with hand lever or manual reduction gear, but also with electric or pneumatic actuator. They can be easily retrofit anytime, even when the valve is mounted.
Butterfly valve type 037 with manual reduction gear
Butterfly valve type 037 with hand lever
461
Product features
Good flow characteristics

Rilsan/Epoxy coating: High chemical resistance
Easy installation
Space-saving installation
Large dimensions to DN1200
Compact design
Varied applications
Low maintenance and high cost efficiency
KTW / WRAS certification
Overview
General
Type
037
038
039
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Waferstyle
Dimension DN
DN50 - DN300
DN50 - DN300
DN50 - DN1200
Nominal pressure PN
10
16 /10
16
Temperature range
-10 C to +120 C depending on model
to +80 C with folding plate with Rilsan coating
Materials used
Valve housing
Up to DN 300: Aluminum ASTM S12A,

Rilsan -coated
Disc
Ductile cast iron ASTM A395 M:88, Rilsan-coated
From DN350 to DN1200: ductile cast iron ASTM A395 M:88, Epoxy coated
Optional: Stainless Steel 1.4408/ASTM A351 CF8M
Alu-Bronze on request
Collar
EPDM and FPM
CSM, NBR, EPDM <High Temp>on request
Shaft
Stainless Steel 1.4021/AISI 420
Stainless Steel 1.4401/AISI 316 on request
<Chevron>shaft seal
Buna-N
Bush with
Up to DN500 natural nylon
safety clip
From DN600 to DN1200 bronze
Screw
Out of stainless steel (DIN-7991), securing the bush
Actuator
Up to DN 300 hand lever, manual reduction gear, pneumatic and electric actuator
From DN 350 with manual reduction gear, pneumatic and electric actuator
Hand lever
Aluminium
Connection types
Flanges
Accessories
Lever with fine adjustment
Mechanical limit switch box
462
Ductile cast iron ASTM Ductile cast iron ASTM

A395 M:88, Epoxy coat- A395 M:88, Epoxy coated
ed
Safety information
butterfly valve. They should identify the hazards and advice that should be considered for the different uses and
installation/commissioning.
NOTICE
Intended use
Butterfly valves are not recommended for
media containing solids. In control operations, cavitation is to be avoided.
In case of degreasing or sticking media,
butterfly valves can only be used after consultation with a GF Piping Systems representative.
Type 038 to be used as intermediate installation valve or as end valve.
DANGER
Butterfly valve as end valve
When the butterfly valve is opened as end
valve type 038 with the piping system under
pressure, the medium may escape uncontrollably! Consequences can be death or serious
injury.
The end valve of a piping system under
pressure shall only be opened, when the
medium can be safely collected or diverted,
and when splashing around can be avoided through corresponding measures.
If the valve of type 038 is used as an end
valve, the allowable operating pressure is
reduced to a maximum of 5.6 bar.
DANGER
Opening or closing the valve
Death or serious injury by jerky opening or
closing the valve
Avoid pressure surges in the piping system, especially when use the hand lever.
For applications with high flow velocities for
manual actuation, use the manual gearbox
version.
DANGER
Correct installation
Due to incorrect installation, injuries or death
can occur.
Make sure that the butterfly valves to be installed correspond specifically to the pressure rating, type of connection, dimension
and materials of the particular application.
Carry out a function test: close the butterfly
valve and open it again.
Do not install a butterfly valve which does
not function properly.
NOTICE
All sealings (material e.g. EPDM, FPM ) are
of organic materials and react to environmental influences.
They must be stored in their original packaging if possible in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Before installing them, the sealings have to
be checked on possible ageing damages,
such as fissures and hardenings.
Damaged sealings and spare parts must
not come into operation.
DANGER
can be death or serious injuries.
For clean silicone-free butterfly valves, observe the special manufacturers information.
463
Dimensions
CAUTION
Pressure test and commissioning
Butterfly valve pressure testing is subject to
the same regulations as the piping systems.
Pressure must not exceed the value of 1.5
x PN
test.
Graph
Exploded view
Butterfly valve Type 037

1
d
DN
inch
kg
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
63
50
2"
1.1
24
32
75
65
2 "
1.5
30
51
90
80
3"
1.7
39
69
110
100
4"
2.6
59
89
140
125
5"
3.4
78
115
Valve housing
160
150
6"
4.9
98
143
Valve disc
Collar
225
200
8"
7.4
157
194
Shaft
280
250
10"
15.0
209
243
Shaft sealing
315
300
12"
19.0
301
293
Bush
Ten-position plate
Screw for bush
Hand lever
464
Butterfly valve type 038
DN
inch
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
DN
inch
kg
(Nm)
63
50
2"
43
232
53
140
mm
mm
mm
75
65
2 "
46
254
63
152
63
50
2"
3.2
24
32
90
80
3"
46
269
71
159
75
65
2 "
4.3
30
51
110
100
4"
52
311
87
178
90
80
3"
6.0
39
69
140
125
5"
56
339
102
191
110
100
4"
8.0
59
89
160
150
6"
56
375
122
203
140
125
5"
9.8
78
115
225
200
8"
60
424
149
241
160
150
6"
11.5
98
143
280
250
10"
68
513
201
273
225
200
8"
18.3
157
194
315
300
12"
78
592
231
311
280
250
10"
31.5
209
243
315
300
12"
48.3
301
293
DN
inch
Type
d1
d2
d3
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
DN
inch
H1
H2
63
50
2"
F-07
70
90
13
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
2 "
F-07
70
90
13
63
50
2"
43
215
63
140
90
80
3"
F-07
70
90
13
75
65
2 "
46
241
73
152
110
100
4"
F-07
70
90
16
90
80
3"
46
256
81
159
140
125
5"
F-07
70
90
16
110
100
4"
52
295
97
178
160
150
6"
F-07
70
90
17
140
125
5"
56
323
112
191
225
200
8"
F-07
70
90
17
160
150
6"
56
358
122
203
280
250
10"
F-10
11
102
125
17
225
200
8"
60
423
149
245
315
300
12"
F-10
11
102
125
17
280
250
10"
68
521
203
275
315
300
12"
78
559
241
315
DN
inch
H4
d4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
DN
inch
Type
d1
d2
d3
H3
63
50
2"
26
13.2
11
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
2 "
26
13.2
11
63
50
2"
F-07
70
90
12
90
80
3"
26
13.2
11
75
65
2 "
F-07
70
90
12
110
100
4"
30
16.8
14
90
80
3"
F-07
70
90
12
140
125
5"
30
16.8
14
110
100
4"
F-07
70
90
14
160
150
6"
33
20.4
17
140
125
5"
F-07
70
90
14
225
200
8"
33
20.4
17
160
150
6"
F-07
70
90
15
280
250
10"
47
28
22
225
200
8"
F-07
70
90
15
315
300
12"
47
28
22
280
250
10"
F-10
12
102
125
17
315
300
12"
F-10
12
102
125
17
1 Butterfly valve
kg = net weight
Nm = closing torque
Q = disc outlet diameter
L = mounting length
2 actuation flange
AL = number of drillings (4)
3 Shaft end
DN50 - 300: square end
DN350-1200: key way
465
DN
inch
H4
d4
DN
inch
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
2"
26
14
11
63
50
2"
43
219
53
140
75
65
2 "
26
14
11
75
65
2 "
46
241
63
152
90
80
3"
26
14
11
90
80
3"
46
256
71
159
110
100
4"
30
18
14
110
100
4"
52
295
87
178
140
125
5"
30
18
14
140
125
5"
56
323
102
191
160
150
6"
33
22
17
160
150
6"
56
358
122
203
225
200
8"
33
22
17
225
200
8"
60
423
149
241
280
250
10"
47
28
22
280
250
10"
68
521
201
273
315
300
12"
47
28
22
315
300
12"
78
559
231
311
355
350
14"
78
653
291
307
400
400
16"
102
732
325
342
450
450
18"
113
809
357
387
500
500
20"
126
871
381
425
2 actuation flange
AL = number of drilling(4)
630
600
24"
146
1130
488
532
700
700
28"
175
1189
506
573
3 Shaft end
DN350-1200: key way
800
800
32"
215
1338
578
650
900
900
36"
246
1460
643
707
1000
1000
40"
280
1594
729
755
1200
1200
48"
360
1885
855
900
1 Butterfly valve
kg = net weight
Nm = closing torque
L = mounting length
Butterfly valve Type 039

1
DN
inch
kg
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
DN
inch
Type
d1
d2
d3
H3
63
50
2"
3.3
24
32
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
75
65
2 "
4.0
30
51
63
50
2"
F-07
70
90
13
90
80
3"
4.3
39
69
75
65
2 "
F-07
70
90
13
110
100
4"
5.7
59
89
90
80
3"
F-07
70
90
13
140
125
5"
7.4
78
115
110
100
4"
F-07
70
90
16
160
150
6"
8.9
98
143
140
125
5"
F-07
70
90
16
225
200
8"
13.5
157
194
160
150
6"
F-07
70
90
17
280
250
10"
22.8
209
243
225
200
8"
F-07
70
90
17
315
300
12"
31.7
301
293
280
250
10"
F-10
12
102
125
17
355
350
14"
43.2
900
332
315
300
12"
F-10
12
102
125
17
400
400
16"
65.2
1200
382
355
350
14"
F-12
13
125
150
22
450
450
18"
84.5
1650
432
400
400
16"
F-14
17
140
175
24
500
500
20"
119
2300
478
450
450
18"
F-14
17
140
175
27
630
600
24"
281
4100
585
500
500
20"
F-14
17
140
175
27
700
700
28"
414
5500
683
630
600
24"
F-25
18
254
300
40
800
800
32"
572
8100
755
700
700
28"
F-25
18
254
300
40
900
900
36"
639
10000
852
800
800
32"
F-25
18
254
300
40
1000
1000
40"
918
13500
958
900
900
36"
F-25
18
254
300
40
1200
1200
48"
1760
16500
1098
1000
1000
40"
F-25
18
254
300
40
1200
1200
48"
F-30
22
298
350
50
466
DN
inch
H4
d4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
2"
26
14
11
75
65
2 "
26
14
11
90
80
3"
26
14
11
110
100
4"
30
18
14
140
125
5"
30
18
14
160
150
6"
33
22
17
225
200
8"
33
22
17
280
250
10"
47
28
22
315
300
12"
47
28
22
355
350
14"
55
36
400
400
16"
65
42
450
450
18"
65
48
500
500
20"
65
48
630
600
24"
110
72
700
700
28"
110
72
800
800
32"
110
72
900
900
36"
110
98
1000
1000
40"
110
98
1200
1200
48"
130
120
1 Butterfly valve
kg = net weight
Nm = closing torque
L = mounting length
2 actuation flange
AL = number of drilling(4)
3 Shaft end
DN350-1200: key way
467
Technical data
kv 100 values
Nominal diameter (DN)
Opening angle [m/h]
mm
inch
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
50
2"
16
26
43
69
110
170
190
65
2 "
22
38
60
95
155
250
280
80
3"
14
33
57
95
150
240
370
430
100
4"
24
54
95
155
240
400
620
710
125
5"
38
86
155
240
390
640
950
1100
150
6"
52
120
220
345
550
950
1400
1600
200
8"
95
220
345
600
950
1600
2400
2800
250
10"
155
345
610
950
1600
2600
4000
4700
300
12"
220
510
860
1500
2300
3800
5900
6900
350
14"
290
660
1200
1900
2900
4800
7800
8600
400
16"
380
860
1600
2400
3900
6400
9500
11200
450
18"
490
1100
2000
3100
5000
8300
12900
15500
500
20"
610
1400
2500
4000
6200
10300
15500
19000
600
24"
860
2000
3400
5500
8600
14700
22400
25900
650
26"
980
2300
4000
6100
10400
16650
25850
31500
700
28"
1100
2600
4600
6700
12200
18600
29300
37100
750
30"
1300
3100
5200
8500
13800
22400
34500
40500
800
32"
1800
3600
6600
9700
16600
28300
43200
52300
900
36"
2200
4500
7800
12900
19800
32800
51700
60300
1000
40"
3100
5300
8700
16000
24100
42200
62100
78400
1050
42"
3400
5900
9600
17700
26600
46600
68400
86200
1100
44"
3800
6500
10600
19500
29300
51300
75100
95100
1200
48"
4500
7800
12700
23300
35200
61500
90700
114400
Operating torque
Nominal diameter(DN)
Operating
pressure 10
bar
Operating
pressure 16
bar
mm
inches
(Nm)
(Nm)
50
2"
15
15
65
2 "
20
20
80
3"
25
25
100
4"
40
40
125
5"
50
50
150
6"
60
60
200
8"
160
160
250
10"
250
250
300
12"
300
300
350
14"
900
400
16"
1200
450
18"
1650
500
20"
2300
600
24"
4100
468

Use of PVC-U flange adaptors
DIN PN-16 / PN10 Standard
Required screws for type 039 Wafer Required screws for

butterfly valve
type 038 Lugstyle
butterfly valve
With PVC-U flange adaptors
With PVC-U flange
adapter
Butterfly
valve
Flange (DIN-2632)
PN
DN
mm
inch
Housing
width
A
Flange
thickness
B
Hole
spacing
C
Number of
holes
N
16
50
2"
43
18
125
16
65
2 "
46
18
16
80
3"
46
16
100
4"
16
125
16
Studs
Nuts
Screws
OutLength Thread Numside- L

M
ber
D
N
Thread NumM
ber
N
Length Thread NumL

M
ber
N
165
150
M16
M16
50
M16
145
185
155
M16
M16
55
M16
20
160
200
155
M16
M16
16
55
M16
52
20
180
220
165
M16
M16
16
60
M16
5"
56
22
210
250
180
M16
M16
16
65
M16
150
6"
56
22
240
285
190
M20
M20
16
70
M20
16
200
8"
60
24
295
12
340
220
M20
M20
16
80
M20
16
250
10"
68
26
355
12
405
230
M20
M20
16
90
M20
16
300
12"
78
28
410
12
460
255
M20
12
M20
16
100
M20
12
10
350
14"
78
30
470
16
520
275
M20
16
M20
32
10
400
16"
102
32
525
16
580
310
M24
16
M24
32
Use stubs PP- and PE100

DIN PN-16 / PN10 Standard
Required screws for type 039 Wafer Required screws

butterfly valve
for type 038 end installation of butterWith stubs PP- and PE100
fly valve. With stubs
PP- and PE100
Butterfly
valve
Flanges (DIN-2632)
PN
DN
mm
inch
Housing
width
A
Flange
thickness
B
Hole
spacing
C
Number of
holes
N
16
50
2"
43
18
125
16
65
2 "
46
18
16
80
3"
46
16
100
4"
16
125
16
Studs
Nuts
Screws
OutLength Thread Numside- L

M
ber
D
N
Thread NumM
ber
N
Length Thread NumL

M
ber
N
165
160
M16
M16
55
M16
145
185
165
M16
M16
60
M16
20
160
200
170
M16
M16
16
60
M16
52
20
180
220
175
M16
M16
16
65
M16
5"
56
22
210
250
200
M16
M16
16
80
M16
150
6"
56
22
240
285
210
M20
M20
16
80
M20
16
200
8"
60
24
295
12
340
230
M20
M20
16
90
M20
16
250
10"
68
26
355
12
405
250
M20
M20
16
100
M20
16
300
12"
78
28
410
12
460
270
M20
12
M20
16
110
M20
12
10
350
14"
78
30
470
16
520
340
M20
16
M20
32
10
400
16"
102
32
525
16
580
380
M24
16
M24
32
10
500
20"
126
34
650
20
715
470
M24
20
M24
40
10
600
24"
146
36
770
20
840
420
M27
20
M27
40
469
Tightening torque for installing the butterfly

valve
DN
inch
(Nm)
lb-ft
50
2"
30
22
65
2 "
35
26
80
3"
40
30
100
4"
45
33
125
5"
50
37
150
6"
60
44
200
8"
75
55
250
10"
75
55
300
12"
80
59
Technical features
Shaft sealing
is warranted due to the special profile of the collar in the
area of the shaft seal. . .
Longitudinal section of the collar
. . . and fixation of the collar with the valve housing
Cross-section of the valve housing with collar
The outer grooves of the collar seal the flange connection, so that no additional flange seals are required.

Maintenance
In normal operation, butterfly valves do not require

maintenance. It is enough to control periodically, if there
is no leakage. If the medium escapes at the flange connections, refasten these acc. to the table. In case of
470
leakages or other defects, the safety instructions in the

instruction manual and in the planning fundamentals
must be observed.
We recommend operating the butterfly valves which
are kept permanently in the same position 1 2 x a
year to check their functionality.
Depending on the working conditions, the profile
sealings should be lubricated periodically with a (silicon-based) lubricant.
Fundamentals for butterfly valves electric actuated
Butterfly valves type 140/141/142 DN50 - DN200

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Accessories
Butterfly valve type 037E / 038E / 039E DN50 - DN1200

-- Overview
-- Graph
Page
472
473
474
477
477
478
479
479
471

valves electric actuated
Butterfly valves type 140/141/142
DN50 - DN200
Overview
Product description
The electrically actuated butterfly valve of type 140/141/

142 from GF Piping Systems consists of valve body,
butterfly valve type 567/568 with the electric actuator
EA31/EA42. It is adaptable to a variety of conditions
and enables a broad range of applications. It is available in PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS, Polypropylene, and PVDF
materials.
With the optional positioner, it goes from being a simple
open/close valve to a precise flow control device integrated into systems controlled by PLCs and other computerized instrumentation.
Pressure loss
kv values
can be found under butterfly valve type 567/568, manual override.
mounting, installation and commissioning of the electric
actuators EA31 and EA42.
Versions
Product features
Type 140
Size range 2 to 24 wafer style
110-230V AC auto-detecting or 24V AD/DC
Manual override on actuator
Available in PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS, PP-H and PVDF
Rated for 150 PSI / 10 bar (bidirectional) EPDM or
FPM seals
UL certified
Double eccentric, off-center shaft for reduced wear
and a lower actuation torque
Special O-ring design eliminates the need for flange
gaskets
Type 141 - 142
Electrical position feedback 4-20mA with
Size range 2 to 8" lug style ISO (Type141); ANSI
(Type142)
110-230V AC auto-detecting or 24V AD/DC Manual
override on actuator
Available in PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS, PP-H and PVDF
Rated for 150 PSI (bidirectional)/ 10 bar EPDM or
FPM seals
UL certified
Double eccentric, off-center shaft for reduced wear
and a lower actuation torque
Special O-ring design eliminates the need for flange
gaskets
Type
140
Type
141
Type
142
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
Type 140 with electrical actuator EA31 and EA42
Type 141/142 with electrical actuator EA31 and EA42
472
Overview
General
Type
140
141 / 142
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Base type
567
568
Actuator type
EA31/EA42
EA31/EA42
Dimension DN
50 - 600
50 - 200
Pressure range PN
10 / 4*
10
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Flanges
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
FPM/PTFE
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
Actuator EA11/EA21/EA31 100-230 V~ DN50 - 300
Actuator Valpes DN350 - 600 (VS 300, VT 600 and VT

1000)
* Depending on dimension
Safety information
DANGER
or death.
electric actuators.
CAUTION
actuator is to:
valve and
473
Actuator
L1
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
19
45
122
75
EA 31
19
46
122
90
EA 31
19
49
122
110
EA 31
19
56
122
140
EA 31
23
64
122
More dimensions
More dimensions are available in the product range of butterfly valve type 567/568.
160
EA 31
24
72
122
225
EA42
23
73
122
280
EA42
25
113
122
315
EA42
25
113
122
Actuator
L2
Q1
Q2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
180
40
75
EA 31
180
54
35
90
EA 31
180
67
50
110
EA 31
180
88
74
140
EA 31
180
113
97
160
EA 31
180
139
123
225
EA42
180
178
169
280
EA42
180
210
207
315
EA42
180
256
253
Graph
Dimensions
Weight actuator
Butterfly valve type 140 without manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-value
mm
mm
(p=1bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
2.5
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
280
250
10
55200
315
300
12
80000
474
Actuator
D1min
D1max
D2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
19
120.0
125.0
104
75
EA 31
19
139.7
145.0
115
90
EA 31
19
150.0
160.0
131
110
EA 31
19
175.0
190.5
161
140
EA 31
23
210.0
215.9
187
160
EA 31
24
241.3
241.3
215
225
EA42
23
290.0
295.0
267
280
EA42
25
353
362
329
315
EA42
25
400
432
379
Actuator
H1
H2
H3
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
400
77
134
188
75
EA 31
413
83
140
188
90
EA 31
428
89
146
188
110
EA 31
460
104
167
188
140
EA 31
487
117
181
188
160
EA 31
508
130
189
188
225
EA42
575
158
210
208
280
EA42
677
205
264
208
315
EA42
721
228
285
208
Butterfly valve type 140 with manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-valuekv-value
mm
mm
(p=1bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
2.5
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
L1
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
19
45
122
75
EA 31
19
46
122
90
EA 31
19
49
122
110
EA 31
19
56
122
140
EA 31
23
64
122
160
EA 31
24
72
122
225
EA42
23
73
122
Actuator
L2
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
180
200
40
75
EA 31
180
200
54
35
90
EA 31
180
200
67
50
110
EA 31
180
250
88
74
140
EA 31
180
250
113
97
160
EA 31
180
250
139
123
225
EA42
180
250
178
169
Actuator
D1min
D1max
D2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
19
120.0
125.0
104
75
EA 31
19
139.7
145.0
115
90
EA 31
19
150.0
160.0
131
110
EA 31
19
175.0
190.5
161
140
EA 31
23
210.0
215.9
187
160
EA 31
24
241.3
241.3
215
225
EA42
23
290.0
295.0
267
Actuator
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
EA 31
460
77
134
188
60
75
EA 31
473
83
140
188
60
90
EA 31
488
89
146
188
60
110
EA 31
520
104
167
188
60
140
EA 31
547
117
181
188
60
160
EA 31
568
130
189
188
60
225
EA42
635
158
210
208
60
475
Butterfly valve type 141/142 without manual

override
DN
inch
PN
kv-valuekv-value
mm
mm
(p=1bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
2.5
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
D metric
D1 metric D ANSI
mm
Type
mm
63
EA 31
M16
125
UNC 5/8
75
EA 31
M16
145
UNC 5/8
90
EA 31
M16
160
UNC 5/8
110
EA 31
M16
180
UNC 5/8
140
EA 31
M16
210
UNC 3/4
160
EA 31
M20
240
UNC 3/4
225
EA42
M20
295
UNC 3/4
476
D1 ANSI
d2
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
121
104
36
75
138
115
51
31
90
152
131
64
46
110
191
161
84
70
140
216
187
111
95
160
241
215
136
122
225
298
267
176
166
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
400
77
134
190
75
413
83
140
190
90
428
89
146
190
110
460
104
167
190
140
487
117
181
190
160
508
130
189
190
225
575
157
210
208
L1
L2
L3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
122
180
150
75
46
122
180
160
90
49
122
180
205
110
56
122
180
244
140
64
122
180
272
160
72
122
180
297
225
73
122
180
360
Butterfly valve type 141/142 with manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-valuekv-value
mm
mm
(p=1bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
2.5
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
D metric
D1 metric
D ANSI
mm
Type
mm
63
EA 31
M16
125
UNC 5/8
75
EA 31
M16
145
UNC 5/8
90
EA 31
M16
160
UNC 5/8
110
EA 31
M16
180
UNC 5/8
140
EA 31
M16
210
UNC 3/4
160
EA 31
M20
240
UNC 3/4
225
EA42
M20
295
UNC 3/4
D1 ANSI
d2
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
121
104
36
75
138
115
51
31
90
152
131
64
46
110
191
161
84
70
140
216
187
111
95
160
241
215
136
122
225
298
267
176
166
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
400
77
134
190
60
75
413
83
140
190
60
90
428
89
146
190
60
110
460
104
167
190
60
140
487
117
181
190
60
160
508
130
189
190
60
225
575
157
210
208
60
L1
L2
L3
L4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
122
180
150
200
75
46
122
180
160
200
90
49
122
180
205
200
110
56
122
180
244
250
140
64
122
180
272
250
160
72
122
180
297
250
225
73
122
180
360
250
Technical features
X
Y
Open angle (%)

kv, CV value (%)
Accessories
More informationabout accessoriesare
available in the chapter actuators.
477
Butterfly valve type 037E / 038E /

039E DN50 - DN1200
Overview
Product description
The butterfly valve type 037E / 038E/ 039E consists of

the basic valve body with the electric drive EA31/41/50.
Pressure loss
kv values
can be found under butterfly valve type 037 / 038 / 039,
manual valves.
The metal butterfly valves of type 037E/038E/039E can
be used as open/close or control valve. The easy installation of the valve between pipe flanges warrants reliable operation and sealing. The lightweight aluminium
valve body has special advantages in transport and installation. The Rilsan-coating of the valve body and the
ductile iron valve disc provide a high resistance against
corrosion. The butterfly valves are also available in a
standard version with stainless steel valve disc.Butterfly
valves Type 037E are available from DN50/2"-DN300/
12", Type 038E from DN50 up to DN300. Type 039E
from DN50/2" -- DN1200/48".
actuators EA31/41/50. For DN350 - DN1200 acuators
from "Auma" are installed.
Versions
Type 037E / 039E with electrical actuator EA31/40/50
Type 038E with electrical actuator EA31/40/50
478
Product features
Type 037E / 038E / 039E
Rilsan/Epoxy-coating: good chemical resistance
Easy installation
Reliable automatic open/close and control valves
Overview
General
Type
037E
038E
039E
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Waferstyle
Base type
037
038
039
Actuator type
EA31/42
EA31/42
EA31/42, Auma
Dimension DN
50 - 300
50 - 300
50 - 1200
Pressure range PN
10
16
Materials for valve

body
Metal
Connection types
Flange
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Safety information
CAUTION


actuator is to:
valve and
DANGER
or death.
electric actuators.
Graph
Dimensions
Weight actuator
More dimensions
More dimensions are available in the product range of butterfly valve type 037.
479
Butterfly valve type 037E with manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv value

bar)
(p=1 psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
32
75
65
10
4570
320
51
90
80
10
7140
500
69
110
100
10
11710
820
89
140
125
10
18570
1300
115
160
150
10
27130
1900
143
225
200
10
47130
3330
194
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
243
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
293
DN
inch
Actuator
D3
D4
L1
L2
mm
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
96
165
43
64
181
75
65
EA 31
114
185
46
28
181
90
80
EA 31
131
190
46
28
181
110
100
EA42
152
229
52
28
181
140
125
EA42
182
254
56
60
220
160
150
EA42
209
285
56
60
220
225
200
EA42
262
343
60
60
220
280
250
10
EA 50
323
333
68
70
220
315
300
12
EA 50
373
353
78
70
220
480
DN
inch Actuator
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
352
53
140
159
60
75
65
EA 31
374
63
152
159
60
90
80
EA 31
389
71
159
159
60
110
100
EA42
415
87
178
149
60
140
125
EA42
443
102
191
149
60
160
150
EA42
475
122
203
149
60
225
200
EA42
540
149
241
149
60
280*
250
10
EA 50
671
201
273
197
---
315
300
12
EA 50
739
231
311
197
---
* DN250 -300 H3 = H3+H4
Butterfly valve type 037E without manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv value

bar)
(p=1 psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
32
75
65
10
4570
320
51
90
80
10
7140
500
69
110
100
10
11710
820
89
140
125
10
18570
1300
115
160
150
10
27130
1900
143
225
200
10
47130
3330
194
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
243
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
293
DN
inch
Actuator
D3
D4
L1
mm
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
96
165
43
64
75
65
EA 31
114
185
46
64
90
80
EA 31
131
190
46
64
110
100
EA42
152
229
52
64
140
125
EA42
182
254
56
60
160
150
EA42
209
285
56
60
225
200
EA42
262
343
60
60
280
250
10
EA 50
323
333
68
70
315
300
12
EA 50
373
353
78
70
481
DN
inch
Actuator
L2
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
181
352
53
140
159
75
65
EA 31
181
374
63
152
159
90
80
EA 31
181
389
71
159
159
110
100
EA42
181
415
87
178
149
140
125
EA42
220
443
102
191
149
160
150
EA42
220
475
122
203
149
225
200
EA42
220
540
149
241
149
280
250
10
EA 50
220
671
201
273
197
315
300
12
EA 50
220
739
231
311
197
Butterfly valve type 037E DN50 - DN300 without

manual override
DN
inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv value (p=1

bar)
psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
75
65
10
4570
320
90
80
10
7140
500
110
100
10
11710
820
140
125
10
18570
1300
160
150
10
27130
1900
225
200
10
47130
3330
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
DN
Actuator
D3
D4
L1
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
96.0
165.0
43
64
75
65
EA 31
114.0
185.0
46
64
90
80
EA 31
131.0
190.0
46
64
110
100
EA42
152.0
229.0
52
64
140
125
EA42
182.0
254.0
56
60
160
150
EA42
209.0
285.0
56
60
225
200
EA42
262.0
343.0
60
60
280
250
EA 50
323.0
333.0
68
70
315
300
EA 50
373.0
353.0
78
70
482
DN
Actuator
L2
H1
H2
H3
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
181
352
53
140
159
75
65
EA 31
181
374
63
152
159
90
80
EA 31
181
389
71
159
159
110
100
EA42
181
415
87
178
149
140
125
EA42
220
443
102
191
149
160
150
EA42
220
475
122
203
149
225
200
EA42
220
540
149
241
149
280
250
EA 50
220
671
201
273
197
315
300
EA 50
220
739
231
311
197
Butterfly valve type 038E
DN
inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv
bar)
value(p=1
psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
75
65
10
4570
320
90
80
10
7140
500
110
100
10
11710
820
140
125
10
18570
1300
160
150
10
27130
1900
225
200
10
47130
3330
280
250
10
77110
5400
315
300
12
114240
8000
DN
inch
Actuator
mm
mm
63
50
75
L1
L2
unit type mm
mm
mm
mm
EA 31
65
43
28
122
65
EA 31
114
46
28
122
90
80
EA 31
131
46
28
122
110
100
EA 31
152
52
60
220
140
125
EA 31
182
56
60
220
160
150
EA42
209
56
60
220
225
200
EA42
262
60
60
220
280
250
10
EA42
331
68
70
220
315
300
12
EA42
380
78
70
220
DN
inch Actuator
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
unit type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA 31
393
63
140
190
75
65
EA 31
415
73
152
190
90
80
EA 31
430
81
159
190
110
100
EA 31
333
97
178
58
140
125
EA 31
361
112
191
58
160
150
EA42
383
122
203
58
225
200
EA42
452
149
245
58
280
250
10
EA42
545
203
275
67
315
300
12
EA42
623
241
315
67
D3
483
Butterfly valve type 039E with manual override
DN
Inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv value(p=1 Q

bar)
psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
32
75
65
10
4570
320
51
90
80
10
7140
500
69
110
100
10
11710
820
89
140
125
10
18570
1300
115
160
150
10
27130
1900
143
225
200
10
47130
3330
194
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
243
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
293
355
350
14
10
143360
---
332
400
400
16
10
186700
---
382
450
450
18
10
258390
---
432
500
500
20
10
316730
---
478
630
600
24
10
431750
---
585
700
700
28
10
618333
---
683
800
800
32
10
675000
---
755
900
900
36
10
1005200
---
852
1000
1000
40
10
1306930
---
958
1200
1200
48
10
1907050
---
958
484
DN
Inch
Actuator
unit
D3
D4
L1
L2
mm
mm
type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
96
165
43
64
181
75
65
EA31
114
185
46
28
181
90
80
EA31
131
190
46
28
181
110
100
EA42
152
229
52
28
181
140
125
EA42
182
254
56
60
220
160
150
EA42
209
285
56
60
220
225
200
EA42
262
343
60
60
220
280
250
10
EA50
323
333
68
70
220
315
300
12
EA50
373
353
78
70
220
355
350
14
GS80
442
460
78
130
400
400
16
GS80
493
515
102
154
450
450
18
GS100
544
565
113
182
500
500
20
GS125
601
620
126
182
630
600
24
GS125
695
725
146
286
700
700
28
GS125
798
840
175
286
800
800
32
GS160
908
950
215
286
900
900
36
GS160
1004
1050
246
370
1000
1000
40
GS160
1114
1160
280
370
1200
1200
48
GS200
1330
1380
360
1133
DN
Inch Actuator
unit
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
352
53
140
159
60
75
65
EA31
374
63
152
159
60
90
80
EA31
389
71
159
159
60
110
100
EA42
415
87
178
149
60
140
125
EA42
443
102
191
149
60
160
150
EA42
475
122
203
149
60
225
200
EA42
540
149
241
149
60
280*
250
10
EA50
671
201
273
197
--
315
300
12
EA50
739
231
311
197
--
355
350
14
GS80
905
291
307
307
--
400
400
16
GS80
974
325
342
307
--
450
450
18
GS100
1065
357
387
321
---
500
500
20
GS125
1127
381
425
321
---
630
600
24
GS125
1350
488
532
330
--
700
700
28
GS125
1409
506
573
330
---
800
800
32
GS160
1541
578
650
313
---
900
900
36
GS160
1673
643
707
323
---
1000
1000
40
GS160
1807
729
755
323
---
1200
1200
48
GS200
2103
855
900
348
- - 485
* DN250 - 1200 H3 = H3+H4
Butterfly valve type 039E without manual override
DN
Inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv
bar)
value(p=1
psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
32
75
65
10
4570
320
51
90
80
10
7140
500
69
110
100
10
11710
820
89
140
125
10
18570
1300
115
160
150
10
27130
1900
143
225
200
10
47130
3330
194
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
243
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
293
355
350
14
10
143360
---
332
400
400
16
10
186700
---
382
450
450
18
10
258390
---
432
500
500
20
10
316730
---
478
630
600
24
10
431750
---
585
700
700
28
10
618333
---
683
800
800
32
10
675000
---
755
900
900
36
10
1005200
---
852
1000
1000
40
10
1306930
---
958
1200
1200
48
10
1907050
- - -
958
486
DN Inch
Actuator
D3
D4
L1
mm
mm
unit type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
96
165
43
64
75
65
EA31
114
185
46
64
90
80
EA31
131
190
46
64
110
100
EA42
152
229
52
64
140
125
EA42
182
254
56
60
160
150
EA42
209
285
56
60
225
200
EA42
262
343
60
60
280
250
10
EA50
323
333
68
70
315
300
12
EA50
373
353
78
70
355
350
14
GS80
442
460
78
400
400
16
GS80
493
515
102
450
450
18
GS100
544
565
113
500
500
20
GS125
601
620
126
630
600
24
GS125
695
725
146
700
700
28
GS125
798
840
175
800
800
32
GS160
908
950
215
900
900
36
GS160
1004
1050
246
1000
1000
40
GS160
1114
1160
280
1200
1200
48
GS200
1330
1380
360
DN
Inch Actuator
L2
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
unit type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
181
352
53
140
159
75
65
EA31
181
374
63
152
159
90
80
EA31
181
389
71
159
159
110
100
EA42
181
415
87
178
149
140
125
EA42
220
443
102
191
149
160
150
EA42
220
475
122
203
149
225
200
EA42
220
540
149
241
149
280
250
10
EA50
220
671
201
273
197
315
300
12
EA50
220
739
231
311
197
355
350
14
GS80
130
905
291
307
307
400
400
16
GS80
154
974
325
342
307
450
450
18
GS100
182
1065
357
387
321
500
500
20
GS125
182
1127
381
425
321
630
600
24
GS125
286
1350
488
532
330
700
700
28
GS125
286
1409
506
573
330
800
800
32
GS160
286
1541
578
650
313
900
900
36
GS160
370
1673
643
707
323
1000
1000
40
GS160
370
1807
729
755
323
1200
1200
48
GS200
1133
2103
855
900
348
487
Butterfly valve type 039E DN50 - DN300 without

manual override
DN
Inch
PN
kv-value (p=1 Cv value(p=1

bar)
psi)
mm
mm
l/min
gal (US)/min
63
50
10
3140
220
75
65
10
4570
320
90
80
10
7140
500
110
100
10
11710
820
140
125
10
18570
1300
160
150
10
27130
1900
225
200
10
47130
3330
280
250
10
10
77110
5400
315
300
12
10
114240
8000
DN
Actuator unit
D3
D4
L1
mm
type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
96.0
165.0
43
64
75
65
EA31
114.0
185.0
46
64
90
80
EA31
131.0
190.0
46
64
110
100
EA42
152.0
229.0
52
64
140
125
EA42
182.0
254.0
56
60
160
150
EA42
209.0
285.0
56
60
225
200
EA42
262.0
343.0
60
60
280
250
EA50
323.0
333.0
68
70
315
300
EA50
373.0
353.0
78
70
488
DN
Actuator
L2
H1
H2
H3
mm
unit type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
EA31
181
352
53
140
159
75
65
EA31
181
374
63
152
159
90
80
EA31
181
389
71
159
159
110
100
EA42
181
415
87
178
149
140
125
EA42
220
443
102
191
149
160
150
EA42
220
475
122
203
149
225
200
EA42
220
540
149
241
149
280
250
EA50
220
671
201
273
197
315
300
EA50
220
739
231
311
197
Fundamentals for butterfly valves pneumatically actuated

-- Overview
-- Graph
Butterfly valve type 037P / 038P / 039P

-- Overview
-- Graph
Page
490
491
492
499
500
501
508
489

valves pneumatically actuated
Type 241/242 with pneumatic actuator PA30 - PA90

Overview
Product description
The type 240/241/242 series pneumatically actuated

wafer style butterfly valve from GF Piping Systems is
the ultimate choice for the high demands of the industrial world. The unique double eccentric design means the
disc is not in contact with the seal in the open position.
The result is less wear and operating torques that are
half that of our previous model. Better chemical compatibility is achieved because the inner body is the same
material as the pipe. The unique O-ring design insures
a superior seal with virtually any type of flange without
the need for additional gaskets. Additionally, the electro-pneumatic positioner, stroke limiter, and feed back
switches give flexibility for integration into a wide variety
of applications.
Pressure loss
kv values
can be found under butterfly valve type 567/568, manual override.
actuators PA30 -PA90.
Versions
Type 240 with pneumatic actuator PA30 - PA90
490
Product features
Type 240/241/242
Detachable manual override
Limit switches
Electric-pneumatic positioner (4-20mA) or 3-15 PSI
ASI-control
Differences Type 240/241/242
Type
240
Type
241
Type
242
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP
PVDF
ISO
ASTM
BS
JIS
Overview
General
Type
240
241 / 242
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Base type
567
568
Actuator type
PA30 - PA90
PA30 - PA90
Dimension DN
2" - 24"
2" - 8"
Pressure range PN
10
10 / 6*
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Connection types
Flanges
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
FPM/PTFE
Standards
ISO
+ Type 241
BS
ASTM
+ Type 242
JIS
* Depending on dimensions
Safety information
WARNING

or death.
safety expert.
NOTICE
Pneumatic actuators
of pressure.
Intended use
Type PA21
DA/FC/FO
TypePA30-45
DA/FC/FO
491
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p = 1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
More dimensions More Dimensions are

available in the product range of butterfly
valve type 567.
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
280
250
10
55200
315
300
12
80000
355
350
14
90000
400
400
16
115000
450
450
18
155000
500
500
20
204000
630
600
24
265000
Actuator
D1min.
D1max. d2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
PA-30 FC/FO
19
120.0
125.0
104
75
PA-30 FC/FO
19
139.7
145.0
115
90
PA-35 FC/FO
19
150.0
160.0
131
110
PA-40 FC/FO
19
175.0
190.5
161
140
PA-45 FC/FO
23
210.0
215.9
187
160
PA-50 FC/FO
24
241.3
241.3
215
225
PA-55 FC/FO
23
290.0
295.0
267
280
PA-65 FC
25
353.0
362.0
329
315
PA-70 FC/FO
25
400.0
432.0
379
355
29
445.0
477.0
535
400
29
510.0
540.0
595
450
32
565.0
578.0
635
500
32
620.0
635.0
700
630
35
725.0
750.0
813
Graph
Dimensions
Weight actuator
Dimensions type 240 FC/FO

FC (Fail-safe-to-close)/
Version:
Connecting dimension: ISO 7005 PN 10, EN1092
PN10, DIN 2501 PN10, ANSI B 16.5 Class 150, BS
1560:1989, JIS B 2220
Overall length according to EN558-1, ISO 5752
Control range 90
492
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
327
77
134
117
70
15
75
340
83
140
117
70
15
90
361
89
146
126
78
15
110
400
104
167
129
86
140
436
117
181
139
96
160
468
130
189
149
106
225
529
158
210
161
118
280
808
205
264
191
148
315
866
288
285
196
157
355
863
268
410
185
155
27
400
941
300
435
206
176
27
450
1046
320
520
206
176
36
500
1130
350
550
230
200
36
630
1330
420
610
300
250
36
L1
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
276
36
75
46
276
51
31
90
49
326
64
46
110
56
370
84
70
140
64
411
111
95
160
72
423
136
122
225
73
452
176
166
280
113
648
210
207
315
113
663
256
253
355
129
360
325
305
400
169
380
353
350
450
179
380
393
390
500
190
462
444
440
630
209
530
530
527
Dimensions type 240 DA

DA (Double Acting)
Version:
Connecting dimensions according to: ISO 7005 PN
10, EN1092 PN10, DIN 2501 PN10, ANSI B 16.5
Class 150, BS 1560:1958, JIS B 2220
Control range 90
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p=1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
280
250
10
55200
315
300
12
80000
355
350
14
90000
400
400
16
115000
450
450
18
155000
500
500
20
204000
630
600
24
265000
493
Actuator
D1min.
D1max.
d2
L1
Q1
Q2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
PA-35 DA
19
120.0
125.0
104
63
45
177
36
75
PA-35 DA
19
139.7
145.0
115
75
46
177
51
31
90
PA-40 DA
19
150.0
160.0
131
90
49
190
64
46
110
PA-45 DA
19
175.0
190.5
161
110
56
198
84
70
140
PA-45 DA
23
210.0
215.9
187
140
64
235
111
95
160
PA-55 DA
24
241.3
241.3
215
160
72
250
136
122
225
PA-55 DA
23
290.0
295.0
267
225
73
279
176
166
280
PA-65 DA
25
353.0
362.0
329
280
113
350
210
207
315
PA-70 DA
25
400.0
432.0
379
315
113
381
256
253
355
AP 5
29
445.0
477.0
535
355
129
360
325
305
400
AP 5.5
29
510.0
540.0
595
400
169
380
353
350
450
AP 5.5
32
565.0
578.0
635
450
179
380
393
390
500
AP 6
32
620.0
635.0
700
500
190
462
444
440
630
AP 8
35
725.0
750.0
813
630
209
530
530
527
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
317
77
134
107
60
15
75
330
83
140
107
60
15
90
348
89
146
113
66
15
110
372
104
167
102
71
140
408
117
181
111
78
160
448
130
189
129
86
225
507
158
210
139
96
280
748
205
264
161
118
315
816
228
285
173
130
355
863
268
410
185
155
27
400
941
300
435
206
176
27
450
1046
320
520
206
176
36
500
1130
350
550
230
200
36
630
1330
420
610
300
250
36
494

Version:
10, EN1092 PN10, DIN 2501 PN10
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p=1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
D1
d2
mm
Type
mm
mm
63
PA-30 FC
M16
125
104
75
PA-30 FC
M16
145
115
90
PA-35 FC
M16
160
131
110
PA-40 FC
M16
180
161
140
PA-45 FC
M16
210
187
160
PA-50 FC
M20
240
215
225
PA-55 FC
M20
295
267
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
327
77
134
117
70
15
75
340
83
140
117
70
15
90
361
89
146
126
78
15
110
400
104
167
129
86
140
436
117
181
139
96
160
468
130
189
149
106
225
529
157
210
161
118
L1
L2
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
276
65
150
36
75
46
276
65
160
51
31
90
49
326
72
205
64
46
110
56
370
80
244
84
70
140
64
411
90
272
111
95
160
72
423
100
297
136
122
225
73
452
112
360
176
166

DA (Double Acting)
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p=1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
D1
d2
mm
Type
mm
mm
mm
63
PA-35 DA
19
125
104
75
PA-35 DA
19
145
115
90
PA-40 DA
19
160
131
110
PA-45 DA
19
180
161
140
PA-45 DA
23
210
187
160
PA-55 DA
24
240
215
225
PA-55 DA
23
295
267
Version:
10, EN1092 PN10, DIN 2501 PN10
495
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
317
77
134
107
60
15
75
330
83
140
107
60
15
90
348
89
146
113
66
15
110
372
104
167
102
71
140
408
117
181
111
78
160
448
130
189
129
86
225
507
157
210
139
96
L1
L2
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
177
55
150
36
75
46
177
55
160
51
31
90
49
190
60
205
64
46
110
56
198
65
224
84
70
140
64
235
72
272
111
95
160
72
250
80
297
136
122
225
73
279
90
360
176
166

Version:
Connecting dimensions according to: ANSI B 16.5
Class 150
Control range 90
496
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p=1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
b
D1
d2
mm
Type
mm
mm
63
PA-30 FC
UNC 5/8
121
104
75
PA-30 FC
UNC 5/8
138
115
90
PA-35 FC
UNC 5/8
152
131
110
PA-40 FC
UNC 5/8
191
161
140
PA-45 FC
UNC 3/4
216
187
160
PA-50 FC
UNC 3/4
241
215
225
PA-55 FC
UNC 3/4
298
267
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
327
77
134
117
70
15
75
340
83
140
117
70
15
90
361
89
146
126
78
15
110
400
104
167
129
86
140
436
117
181
139
96
160
468
130
189
149
106
225
529
157
210
161
118
L1
L2
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
276
65
150
36
75
46
276
65
160
51
31
90
49
326
72
205
64
46
110
56
370
80
244
84
70
140
64
411
90
272
111
95
160
72
423
100
297
136
122
225
73
452
112
360
176
166

DA (Double Acting)
Version:
Connecting dimensions according to: ANSI B 16.5
Class 150
Control range 90
DN
inch
PN
kv value
mm
mm
(p=1 bar)
63
50
10
1470
75
65
10
2200
90
80
10
3000
110
100
10
6500
140
125
10
11500
160
150
10
16600
225
200
10
39600
Actuator
D1
d2
mm
Type
mm
mm
63
PA-35 DA
UNC 5/8
121
104
75
PA-35 DA
UNC 5/8
138
115
90
PA-40 DA
UNC 5/8
152
131
110
PA-45 DA
UNC 5/8
191
161
140
PA-45 DA
UNC 3/4
216
187
160
PA-55 DA
UNC 3/4
241
215
225
PA-55 DA
UNC 3/4
298
267
497
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
317
77
134
107
60
15
75
330
83
140
107
60
15
90
348
89
146
113
66
15
110
372
104
167
102
71
140
408
117
181
111
78
160
448
130
189
129
86
225
507
157
210
139
96
L1
L2
L3
Q1
Q2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
45
177
55
150
36
75
46
177
55
160
51
31
90
49
190
60
205
64
46
110
56
198
65
224
84
70
140
64
235
72
272
111
95
160
72
250
80
297
136
122
225
73
279
90
360
176
166
498
Butterfly valve type 037P / 038P /

039P
Type 039P with pneumatic actuators
Overview
Product description
The metall butterfly valves type 037P / 038P / 039P can

be used as open/close or control valve. The easy installation of the valve between pipe flanges warrants reliable operation and sealing. The lightweight aluminium
valve body has special advantages in transport and installation. The Rilsan-coating of the valve body and the
ductile iron valve disc provide a high resistance against
corrosion. The butterfly valves are also available in a
standard version with stainless steel valve disc. Butterfly valves Type 037P are available from DN50/2"DN300/12", Type 038P from DN50 up to DN300/12",
Type 039P from DN50-DN1200/48".
Pressure loss
kv values
can be found under butterfly valve type 037 / 038 / 039,
manual override.
Product features
Type 037P / 038P / 039P
Rilsan/Epoxy-coating: good chemical resistance
Easy installation
Reliable automatic open/close and control valve
Versions
Type 037P with pneumatic actuators
Type 038P with pneumatic actuators PA30 - PA90
499
Overview
General
Type
037P
038P
039P
Waferstyle
Lugstyle
Waferstyle
Base type
037
038
039
Actuator type
PA30 - PA90
PA30 - PA90
PA30 - PA90, Diteico
Dimension DN
50 - 300
50 - 300
50 - 1200
Pressure range PN
10
16
16
Materials for valve

body
Matal
Connection types
Flanges
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Standards
ISO
BS
ASTM
JIS
Accessories
Pilot valves
Pilot valves
Pilot valves
Safety information
NOTICE
Pneumatic actuators
of pressure.
WARNING
or death.
safety expert.
500
Intended use
This actuator is intended, after being mounted on the
valve, after mounting of a solenoid valve and after the
connection of this solenoid valve to a system control,
under the condition that a control pressure of at least
5.6 bar, but not more than 7.7 bar at the solenoid
valve is present permanently,
to actuate valves withwith 90 pivoting (ball valves
and butterfly valves).
Manual pneumatic actuator PA30 - PA90
Actuators without spring accumulator remain in the
current position in case of a loss of the control pressure.
Actuators with spring accumulator go into safety position, in case of failure or after switching off the control
pressure, depending on the version of the actuator.
stated here. Non-observance of the instructions contained in this manual will void the manufacturer's liability for the products mentioned above.
Graph
Exploded view butterfly valve type 037P
1.Actuator PA 30 PA 90
2.Intermediate part
3.Butterfly valve
Dimensions
Weight actuator
More dimensions
More dimensions are available in the product range of butterfly valve type 037P /
038P / 039P.
Dimensions type 037P
501
DN
inch
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
43
53
140
32
75
65
46
63
152
51
90
80
46
71
159
69
110
100
52
87
178
89
140
125
56
102
191
115
160
150
56
122
203
143
225
200
60
149
241
194
280
250
10
68
201
273
243
315
300
12
78
231
311
293
DN
inch
D3
D4
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
96
165
75
65
114
185
90
80
131
190
110
100
152
229
140
125
182
254
160
150
209
285
225
200
262
333
280
250
10
---
---
315
300
12
373
353
Single actingFC/FO
DN
inch
Type
L2
L3
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA30
276
65
321
128
75
65
PA30
276
65
343
128
90
80
PA35
341
72
363
133
110
100
PA40
370
80
409
144
140
125
PA45
408
90
444
151
160
150
PA50
423
100
489
164
225
200
PA60
503
125
575
185
280
250
10
PA60
503
125
672
198
315
300
12
PA70
663
145
761
219
502
Single actingFC/FO
DN
inch
Type
H4
H5
H6
D2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA30
38
70
15
1/8"
75
65
PA3
42
78
12
1/8"
90
80
PA35
46
86
15
1/8"
110
100
PA40
46
86
15
1/8"
140
125
PA45
51
96
12
1/8"
160
150
PA50
56
106
15
1/8"
225
200
PA60
68
130
12
1/8"
280
250
10
PA60
68
130
25
1/8"
315
300
12
PA70
83
153
23
"
Double acting DA
DN
inch
Type
L1
L3
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA35
176
55
311
118
75
65
PA35
176
55
333
118
90
80
PA35
176
55
348
118
110
100
PA45
235
72
391
126
140
125
PA45
235
72
419
126
160
150
PA50
250
80
469
144
225
200
PA60
328
104
554
164
280
250
10
PA65
350
112
660
186
315
300
12
PA70
379
125
740
198
Double acting DA
DN
inch
Type
H4
H5
H6
D2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
75
65
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
90
80
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
110
100
PA45
32
68
15
1/8"
140
125
PA45
32
68
15
1/8"
160
150
PA50
46
86
15
1/8"
225
200
PA60
62
118
25
1/8"
280
250
10
PA65
62
118
25
1/8"
315
300
12
PA70
68
130
25
"
503
DN
Inch
PN
kv-value
mm
mm
(p=1bar) (p=1psi)
65
50
16
3140
220
75
65
16
4570
320
90
80
16
7140
500
110
100
16
11710
820
140
125
16
18570
1300
160
150
16
27130
1900
225
200
16
47130
3330
280
250
10
16
77110
5400
315
300
12
16
114240
8000
Actua- D3
tor unit
mm
Type
65
Cv-value
L1
L2
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA-30
95
65
240
321
63
140
15
103
75
PA-30
114
65
240
343
73
152
15
103
90
PA-35
131
72
294
365
81
159
12
113
110
PA-40
152
80
320
420
97
178
15
130
140
PA-45
182
90
357
455
112
191
12
140
160
PA-50
209
100
395
487
122
203
12
150
225
PA-60
262
124
487
580
149
245
12
174
280
PA-60
331
124
487
672
203
275
20
174
315
PA-70
380
145
551
774
241
315
20
198
504
DN
Inch
H1
H2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
43
53
140
32
75
65
46
63
152
51
90
80
46
71
159
69
110
100
52
87
178
89
140
125
56
102
191
115
160
150
56
122
203
143
225
200
60
149
241
194
280
250
10
68
201
273
243
315
300
12
78
231
311
293
355
350
14
78
291
307
332
400
400
16
102
325
342
382
450
450
18
113
357
387
432
500
500
20
126
381
425
478
630
600
24
146
488
532
585
700
700
28
175
506
573
683
800
800
32
215
578
650
755
900
900
36
246
643
707
852
1000
1000
40
280
729
755
958
1200
1200
48
360
855
900
1098
505
DN
Inch
D3
D4
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
96
165
75
65
114
185
90
80
131
190
110
100
152
229
140
125
182
254
160
150
209
285
225
200
262
333
280
250
10
- - -
---
315
300
12
373
353
355
350
14
460
442
400
400
16
515
493
450
450
18
565
544
500
500
20
620
601
630
600
24
725
695
700
700
28
840
798
800
800
32
950
908
900
900
36
1050
1004
1000
1000
40
1160
1114
1200
1200
48
1380
1330
Single acting FC/FO
DN
Inch
Type
L2
L3
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA30
276
65
321
128
75
65
PA30
276
65
343
128
90
80
PA35
341
72
363
133
110
100
PA40
370
80
409
144
140
125
PA45
408
90
444
151
160
150
PA50
423
100
489
164
225
200
PA60
503
125
575
185
280
250
10
PA60
503
125
672
198
315
300
12
PA70
663
145
761
219
355
350
14
CH-B240
590
200
980
382
400
400
16
CH-B270
684
350
1047
380
450
450
18
CH-B270
722
281
1094
350
500
500
20
CH-B350
860
349
1238
432
630
600
24
CH-B400
918
450
1530
540
700
700
28
CH-B500
1550
640
1779
700
800
800
32
CH-B500
1550
640
1928
700
900
900
36
CH-B500
1550
640
2050
700
1000 1000
40
CH-B500
1550
640
2184
700
1200 1200
48
CH-B600
2070
850
2630
875
506
Single acting FC/FO
DN
Inch
Type
H4
H5
H6
D2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA30
38
70
15
1/8"
75
65
PA3
42
78
12
1/8"
90
80
PA35
46
86
15
1/8"
110
100
PA40
46
86
15
1/8"
140
125
PA45
51
96
12
1/8"
160
150
PA50
56
106
15
1/8"
225
200
PA60
68
130
12
1/8"
280
250
10
PA60
68
130
25
1/8"
315
300
12
PA70
83
153
23
"
355
350
14
CH-B240
---
---
---
---
400
400
16
CH-B270
---
---
---
---
450
450
18
CH-B270
---
---
---
---
500
500
20
CH-B350
---
---
---
---
630
630
24
CH-B400
---
---
--
---
700
700
28
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
800
800
32
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
900
900
36
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
1000 1000
40
CH-B500
---
---
- - -
---
1200 1200
48
CH-B600
---
---
---
---
Double acting DA
DN
Inch
Type
L1
L3
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA35
176
55
311
118
75
65
PA35
176
55
333
118
90
80
PA35
176
55
348
118
110
100
PA45
235
72
391
126
140
125
PA45
235
72
419
126
160
150
PA50
250
80
469
144
225
200
PA60
328
104
554
164
280
250
10
PA65
350
112
660
186
315
300
12
PA70
379
125
740
198
355
350
14
CH-B200
575
220
888
290
400
400
16
CH-B240
575
220
957
290
450
450
18
CH-B240
684
350
1124
380
500
500
20
CH-B270
684
350
1186
380
630
600
24
CH-B350
860
349
1452
432
700
700
28
CH-B350
860
349
1511
432
800
800
32
CH-B400
918
450
1738
510
900
900
36
CH-B500
1550
640
2050
700
1000 1000
40
CH-B500
1550
640
2184
700
1200 1200
48
CH-B500
1550
640
2455
700
507
Double acting DA
DN
Inch
Type
H4
H5
H6
D2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
65
50
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
75
65
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
90
80
PA35
33
60
15
1/8"
110
100
PA45
32
68
15
1/8"
140
125
PA45
32
68
15
1/8"
160
150
PA50
46
86
15
1/8"
225
200
PA60
62
118
25
1/8"
280
250
10
PA65
62
118
25
1/8"
315
300
12
PA70
68
130
25
"
355
350
14
CH-B200
---
---
---
---
400
400
16
CH-B240
---
---
---
---
450
450
18
CH-B240
- - - - - -
---
- - -
500
500
20
CH-B270
---
---
---
---
630
630
24
CH-B350
---
---
---
---
700
700
28
CH-B350
---
---
---
---
800
800
32
CH-B400
---
---
---
---
900
900
36
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
1000 1000
40
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
1200 1200
48
CH-B500
---
---
---
---
Technical features
Setting the "Closed" position for actuators for
DN50 - 300
When the butterfly valve is in the CLOSED position, the

valve disc is not perfectly at right-angles to the axis of
the valve. The table below shows the deflection.
DN
Type 037P/
038P/039P "
b"
mm
mm
mm
50
63
16
65
75
16
80
90
16
100
110
18
125
140
17
150
160
17
200
225
17
250
280
15
300
315
15
508
Fundamentals for angle seat valve
Angle seat valve

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Page
510
510
511
511
509
Fundamentals for angle seat

valve
Angle seat valve
Overview
Product description
GF Piping Systems Angle Seat Valves Type 300/301

show their strength by remarkable reliability and their
compact design. The design has evolved its strengths
over many years. GF Piping Systems angle seat valves
of type 300/301 do not cause pressure surges when
they are opened slowly.
Versions
CAUTION
Angle seat valve as end valve
If the angle seat valve which functions as an
end valve in a piping system under pressure
is opened, the medium can exit uncontrollably! Consequences can be serious injuries.
The end valve in a pressure-bearing system may only be opened when the medium can be caught or carried off safely and
splashing is prevented by taking the appropriate measures.
Angle seat valve type 300/301
CAUTION
Product description
Low sensitivity to pressure surges

Easy maintenance without dismantling the valve
Overview
General
Type
300 / 301
Dimension DN
DN10 - DN80
Pressure range
PN
10
Materials used
Material
PVC-U
Sealing
PE and PTFE
Connection
types
Cement spigot
Accessories
Angle seat valve

bracket
Safety information
angle seat valve. They should identify the hazards and
advice that should be considered for the different uses
and installation/commissioning.
510
Dismounting the angle seat valve

The following hazardous situations
may occur when the angle seat valve is
dismounted:the medium may exit uncontrollably from the pipe or the valve, whether under pressure or not, the medium may flow
out of the open pipe and the valve may contain residue or remnants of an aggressive,
Consequences can be serious injuries. Prior to opening the pipe and dismounting the
valve, it is necessary to:
release all pressure from the piping system,
empty the piping system completely and
rinse the system, if aggressive, hazardous,
flammable or explosive media are involved.
CAUTION
Pressure Test and Commissioning
Angle seat valve pressure testing is subject
to the same regulations as the piping system. Detailed information can be found in the
Georg Fischer Planning Fundamentals. Alsoapplicable:
The test pressure on a valve must not exceed the value 1.5 x PN, maximum (PN +
5 bar). The component with the lowest PN
determines the maximum allowable test
pressure in the piping section.
test.
Dimensions
DANGER
can be serious injuries.
Never use mineral oilbased greases or
Vaseline!
For angle seat valves used in varnishing
applications, please consult the special
manufacturers instructions.
Graph
Exploded view
DN
closest
L1
L2
Hmax.
mm
mm
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
50
114
12
24
105
20
15
63
124
130
28
126
25
20
63
144
150
37
140
32
25
80
154
160
37
166
40
32
80
174
180
44
194
50
40
100
194
200
48
233
63
50
100
224
230
60
264
75
65
160
284
290
74
335
90
80
200
300
310
85
390
Housing
Union bush
Connecting part
Technical data
Union nut
Spindle
Threaded bush
Union
Handwheel
Wheel nut
The pressure-temperature diagram is based on a lifetime of 25 years and the medium water or similar media.
PVC-U
Temperature in C, F
511
Pressure loss
Operating torque
Lift (%)
kv, Cv value (%)
kv 100 values
dmm
DNinch
kv 100l/min (p = 1 bar)
16
10
41
20
15
95
25
20
180
32
25
327
40
32
484
50
40
725
63
50
1130
75
65
1700
90
80
2500
512
Size DN(mm, inch)
Torque (Nm, lb-ft)
Solenoid valves
Solenoid valves
-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Coil design
-- Technical data
Page
514
516
517
518
521
513
Solenoid valves
Type 165
Solenoid valves
Overview
Product description
A solenoid valve is a valve which is actuated by an electromagnet. Their tasks are to release, shut off, dose,
distribute or mix gases and fluids.The solenoid valves
can switch very fast, they guarantee high reliability and
a long lifetime at a low drive power. Solenoid valves
with position measuring can be operated as a servo
valve.
The range of solenoid valves is suited for a great variety
of industrial applications. Combined with other valves or
flow meters, solenoid valves from GF Piping Systems
offer a complete system solution, for your benefit and
profit.
Versions
Type 157
Type157 is a high quality, direct-acting 2/2-way pivoted armature solenoid valve, deliverable in many circuit
functions for opening, closing, dosing, mixing and distribution. The magnetic system and the media chamber are separated from one another by a separating diaphragm system.
Type 160/161
The pilot-controlled gate valve of type 165 with servo diaphragm, is closed when currentless. A minimum differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to fully open the
valve. Actuator and media chamber are separated by a
diaphragm.
Type 166
The solenoid valves of type 166 are direct-acting 2/2 or

3/2-way valves with a clapper armature. They are used
for diverse functions, e.g. opening, shutting, dosing, dispensing and mixing. The solenoid system and medium
chamber are separated from one another by means of
an isolating membrane system.
The valve therefore has a long service life, even with
dry runs. Due to the use of PP and PVDF as housing
materials, type 166 is especially suitable for aggressive
media. The valve is mounted via a G 14 union. The
valve is available as in the nominal diameters of DN3,
DN4 and DN5.
Of course, all valves are available as 24 V=, 24 V 50
Hz, 110 V 60 Hz and 230 V 50 Hz version.
Product description
Type160/161 is a direct-acting 2/2- or 3/2-way solenoid

valve. It can be used for diverse functions, e.g. opening,
shutting, dosing, dispensing and mixing. A separating
diaphragm isolates the actuator from the fluid.
The valve has a simple and robust design. The inside of
the valve is free of metals. It is especially suited for aggressive, abrasive and slightly soiled media.
514
Advantages
Fast and safe switching
Safety position
Highly reliable
Goof media compatibility of the used materials
Low control power
Compact construction
No need for compressed air (compressor)
Easy to maintain
Limitations
A maximum of 10 bar operating pressure
Permanent electricity demand in the actuated position
Sensitive to solids at piloted valves
p mandatory for pre-controlled valves
In direct-acting valves, the maximum fluid pressure is
inversely proportional to the diameter
Overview
Types
Type 157
Type 160/161
Type 165
Type 166
Applications
Small dimensions
are required
No compressed air
available
Safety position required
No compressed air
available
Small medium
pressure at high kv
Clean liquids are

used (neutral or
aggressive)
No compressed air
available
Aggressive media
Dosing systems
No compressed air
available
Small flow rate
Safety position desired
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Material
Seal material
EPDM / FPM
EPDM / FPM
EPDM / FPM
EPDM / FPM
Dimensions
DN2 - DN8
DN10 - DN20
DN15 - DN50
DN3 - DN5
Medium temperature
-10 to 50C (PVC/FPM)
-10 to 50C (PVC/FPM)
-10 to 50C (PVC/FPM) 0 to 80 C PP with

EPDM
0 to 80 C PP with FPM
-20 to 80 C PVDF with

FPM
Ambient temperature
0..50C
0..50C
0..40C
0..55C
Viscosity
max. 37 mm/S
max. 37 mm/S
max. 37 mm/S
Supply voltage
24 V DC/ 230V, 50 Hz
24 V DC/ 230V, 50 Hz
24 V DC7 230V, 50
Hz/ 110V, 60 Hz
24 V DC/24 V, 50 Hz/
230 V, 50 Hz
Voltage tolerance
+/- 10 %
+/- 10 %
+/- 10 %
10 %
Switching frequency
approx. 100/min for AC
approx. 100-150/min for

AC
approx. 1000/min
approx. 10/min for UC
approx. 6/min for UC
Rated duty
Intermittent operation:
10% (10min)
100%
100%
Intermittent operation
40 %, 30 min
Electr. connection
Connection
Connector for cable

plug 6-7 mm
Connector for cable

plug 7 mm
Connector for cable

plug 7 mm
Connector for cable

plug 7 mm
Protection class
IP 65 with cable plug
Mode of operation
A, B
A, B, E, F
A, E, F
Direct-acting 3/2-way
solenoid valvefor pipe
connections, Circuit
functionA and B
Type 160 is a direct-acting 2/2-waysolenoid

valvefor pipe connection, Circuit functionA
or B
Direct-acting 3/2waysolenoid valve for

pipe connection, Circuit
functionA
Direct-acting 3/2waysolenoidvalvefor
pipe connection, Circuit
functionA, E and F
Type 161 is direct-acting 3/2-waysolenoid

valvefor pipeconnections, Circuit functionE
or F
515
The manual operation is lockable after pressing, by turning clockwise
Connections
Female pipe thread
Mounting orientation
Safety information
DANGER
Safety instructions
When ignoring the safety instructions, consequences can be death or serious injuries.
Solenoid valve to be operated only according to the performance data.
WARNING
Use solenoid valves only as intended.
Can cause severe injury and damage to the
product.
Use solenoid valve exclusively within the
permissible limits. Another use is regarded
as not complying.
The solenoid valve is not approved for use
in hazardous areas.
NOTICE
Damage to the valve body
Solenoid valve must be installed in aligned
pipes to prevent tension in the valve body.
NOTICE
Damage to the valve body
Use only adhesive that is suited for the
valve body.
CAUTION
Damage to solenoid or magnetic sleeve
When using the magnetic coil as a lever,
magnetic coil and magnet sleeve can be destroyed.
To refit the solenoid valve on the pipe surfaces, use only provided key.
516
Solvent cement
sockets(PVC-U), Fusion sockets(PVDF)
Threaded socketsG1/
4"
Preferably with actuator upright
WARNING
Risk through escaping medium
Serious injury from escaping medium.
Before operating, ensure the tightness of
the media connections.
NOTICE
Non-opening valve
At high operating pressures, the valve will
not open electromagnetically.
NOTICE
Risk due to foreign substances
For new installations and after repairs,
flush the piping system with valves fully
opened.
CAUTION
Malfunction of the solenoid valve caused
by dirty media
Solenoid valve opens or closes no longer
with control holes clogged by dirt or with
blocked anchor.
Clean the piping system before installing
the solenoid valve.
Switch the solenoid valve at least once a
month.
CAUTION
Risk of flow against the flow direction
Damage to the solenoid valve
Solenoid valve to be operated only in flow
direction
Take appropriate precautions for the back
flows to be expected.
Dimensions type 165
Graph
Dimensions type 157
Housing material
mm
mm
mm
Stainless steel
G 1/4
89
32
76
PVC
G 3/8
91
35
65
Possible port configurations

Mode of operation
P1
P2
Dimensions type 160/161
All versions
PVChousing
PVDFhousing
L
DIN Pipe
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm mm
mm
15
20
148
62.5 40
148
16
147
16
20
25
148
62.5 40
154
19
151
18
25
32
147.5
85
44.5
190
22
185
20
32
40
174.5
85
44.5
198
26
189
22
40
50
212
115
44.5
254
31
245
25
50
63
212
115
44.5
268
38
253
29
Dimensions type 166
The ports are marked with 1, 2 and 3 as indicated in the

configuration table, depending on the circuit function.
DN
D (Solvent ce- D (Threaded

ment sockets) sockets)
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
30
16.2
G 3/8 and G 1/2
130
15
33
20.2
G 1/2 and G3/4
136
20
37
25.2
G 3/4
144
517
Possible port configurations

Mode of opera- Port 1
tion
Port 2
Port 3
P1
P2
Coil design
Coil comparison
Coil comparison
Direct current
Quieter
Less wear of solenoid core
High solenoid holding force
Same pick-up and holding power
No shading ring required
Alternating current
Tendency to hum
Risk of burn-out of solenoid coil if solenoid core is
jammed
Faster switching speed (dependent on phase angle)
That means in the de-energized state, the valve has no

connection between port P and A, therefore the valve
is closed. You could also say the valve is "normally
closed" (NC).
Once the valve is energized the connection goes from
port P to A, therefore the valve is open.
2/2-way valve; normally closed (NC)
Function A
Gate valve; closed when deenergised (NC, Normally
Closed)
Function B
Gate valve; open when deenergised (NO, Normally
Open)
In addition to the self-heating of the coil, applicationspecific factors or operating data also have a major influence on the achievable overall temperature of the
coil:
Ambient temperature
Medium temperature
Medium type (fluid or gaseous)
Heat radiation capacity (encapsulation)
Continuous operation or reduced duty
With continuous operation and normal ambient temperature (20 C) of a solenoid valve, temperatures on the
surface of 80-90 C or even higher may be achieved.
The maximum operating data (ambient temperature
and medium temperature, etc.) is thus specified under Technical Data in the relevant data sheets for the
valve types.
Working principles and their symbols
Commonly, the symbols for solenoid valves are shown

for the de-energized status.
For example a valve with the function A has the symbol:
518
Function A
Pilot-operated 2/2-way valve
(Type 165); closed when deenergised
Coil heating
The electrical power of a coil is converted virtually 100%

to thermal energy. Thus, a coil might heat up a lot in
continuous operation. This means that the maximum
power rating of a coil will essentially depend on the
maximum tolerable temperature of a coil which may not
be exceeded on a sustained basis, depending on the
mode of operation (continuous operation or only short
time duty), without damaging the coil. The encapsulation materials and the largest possible coil surface area
ensure good heat dissipation and radiation from the surface.
A, B: Connection to the consumer

P: Connection compressed air
3/2-way solenoid valve

Function C
Gate valve; closed when deenergised, Port A relieved
Function D
Gate valve; open when deenergised, Port A pressurised
Function E
Mixing valve; pressurised
whende-energised, P2
connected with Port A, P1
closed.
Function F
Distribution valve; pressurised when de-energised,
Connection P is connected to
Port B, A closed.
A, B: Connection to the consumer

P: Connection compressed air
R: Return compressed air
519
Direct-acting solenoid valves - characteristics and applications of the solenoid actuators
Plunger
Pivoted-armature
Media separation in actuator
No
Standard with media separation.
Wear behaviour/ service life
Medium to high susceptibility to wear Low wear since there is no sliding

of the solenoid core, due to friction in friction in the armature.
the core guiding tube, depending on
application area.
Universality and possible applications
Very robust solenoid coils available

in various sizes and with various
power ratings. Can be uses for AC/
DC/ UC.
Very tried and tested actuation principle, only one coils size available, usable for AC/DC/UC.
Typical media
Neutral gaseous and fluid, non-abrasive media, e.g.
Neutral gaseous and fluid, media,

conditionally also aggressive and
abrasive, depending on use/usability and resistance of the isolating diaphragm material, e.g.
Water (demineralized water,

only conditional)
Air
Oils
Industrial gases
Characteristics
Robust design
Good price-performance ratio
Universal application area
AC, DC and UC versions available
Without lubrication leads to friction and to limited lifetime
Separation of media leads to
limited pressure range
With overstretched coil
Servo-assisted solenoid valves
At high system pressures and with large nominal diameters, it would also be necessary to have higher magnetic
forces and electrical control power values in direct-acting solenoid valves. The larger solenoid coils required
for this would increase the overall weight and overall
size. Consequently, servoassisted valves are used.
In the case of servo-assisted solenoid valves, a main
valve is controlled by a solenoid-operated pilot valve
with smaller flow cross-sections and lower electrical
control power. This control can comprise either a 2/2way pilot valve or a 3/2-way pilot valve. The main valve
uses a diaphragm or a piston as a moving closure element for opening and closing the fluid path.
Depending on the design, a low pressure differential is
required to open the full cross-section. This principle is
used primarily with 2/2-way valves, both normally closed
and normally open. The valve can be operated in only
one flow direction. The back-pressure tightness is very
low.
Advantages
Cost efficient design
Low energy consumption
Good damped closing
Low pressure differential required
Larger dimensions available
520
Water (including demineralized

water)
Oils, Acid and lyes
Ultrapure media
Very high reliability
Suited for aggressive media
All three fluid connections on
one level
Media separation in standard
version
Long life time
AC, DC and UC versions available
Limitations
Sensitive against dirt
Limited lifetime when used with gaseous media
Differential pressure required
Technical data
Type 157
Nominal di- Mode of operaameter
tion
Kvkvvalue*
Water
Pressure range**
Power consumption
Pick-up(electrical)
Power consumption
Operation (electrical)
Weight
(mm)
(l/min)
AC (bar) DC (bar) AC (VA)
DC (W)
AC (VA/W)
DC (W)
(kg)
0.3
0-2
0-4
30
40
15/8
8-12
0.5
0.6
0-1
0-2
30
40
15/8
8-12
0.5
1.0
0-1
0-1
30
40
15/8
8-12
0.5
Type 160/161
Nominal di- Kv value*
ameter
Water
Pressure range**
Power consumption
Pick-up(electrical)
Power consumption
Weight
Operation(electrical)
(mm)
(m/h)
A (bar) B (bar) E (bar) F(bar)
AC (VA)
DC (W)
AC (VA/W)
DC (W)
(kg)
10
2.0
0-3
0-2
0-0.6
0-1
100
1.2
15
4.5
0-1
0-1
0-0.3
0-0.5
up to
100
32/16
1.2
20
6.0
0-0.5
0-0.5
0-0.15
0-0.25
120
1.2
Type 165
Nominal diameter
Mode of operation
Kvkv-value* Water Pressure range** Power consumption
Pick-up(electrical)
Power consumptionOperation(electrical)
(mm)
(l/min)
(bar)
AC (VA)
DC (W)
AC (VA/W)
DC (W)
15
5.0
20
6.0
25
14.0
0.5-6
20
11/5
32
16.0
40
30.0
50
36.0
Nominal di- Mode of operaameter

tion
Kvkvvalue*
Water
Pressure range**
(mm)
(l/min)
AC (bar) DC (bar) AC (VA)
DC (W)
AC (VA/W)
DC (W)
(kg)
0-10
0-8
4.20
0-10
0-8
0-6
0-4
0-5
0-4
30
15/8
0.4
5.00
0-5
0-4
0-3
0-2
6.70
0-4.5
Type 166
Power consumption
Pick-up(electrical)
Power consumption
Weight
Operation(electrical)
* Kvvalue (l/min) at +20C, 1 bar Pressure at valve inlet and free outlet
** Pressure values (bar) Excess pressure to atmospheric pressure
521
Switching time
Type 157
Switching time*** Open
Close
Mode of operation
(ms)
(ms)
A, B
15 - 20
15 - 20
Close
Mode of operation
(ms)
(ms)
A, B, E, F
10 - 20
40 - 60
Close
Mode of operation
(ms)
(ms)
100 - 800
1000 - 4000
Type 160/161
Type 165
Type 166
Close
Mode of operation
AC
(ms)
DC
(ms)
AC
(ms)
DC (ms)
A, E, F
approx.
8
10 - 17
approx.
15
15 - 20
*** Switching time(ms) Measured at valve outlet at 6 bar and

+ 20C
Open: Pressure build-up 0....90%, Close: Pressure build-up
100...10%
Electrical connection
Observe the voltage and type of current as given on the

type plate. Voltage tolerance 10%. Connection via cable plug, protection class IP 65. Cable 3 x 0.75 mm.
Flat pin terminal = Earth connection. Cable plug insert
can be rotated by 4 x 90 . Tightening torque for cable
plug attachment 1 Nm.
522
Check valves type 561 and type 562

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Angle seat check valves type 303/304

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Wafer Check valves type 369

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Page
524
525
526
529
531
532
533
534
534
535
536
537
537
539
541
523

Check valves type 561 and type 562
Overview
Product description
With the new check valve from GF Piping Systems everything is under control. The new design combines increased safety and efficiency with easy handling. The
check valves of type 561 and 562 pave the way for a
new generation of valves, which impress with safety,
simplicity and efficiency. They mark a milestone in vale
technology. The two check valves of type 561 and type
562 easily fit in all piping systems thanks to our comprehensive product range. Whether in water treatment,
chemical process industry or for cooling applications,
check valves from Georg Fischer can be found almost
everywhere, where reliable performance is required.
With their versatile choice of materials and die the high
pressure level, the check valves of type 561 and type
562 fulfil numerous requirements of many common applications. The self-closing function and the silent operation of the valve underline safety and comfort.
Versions
All types are available in the dimensions from DN10 up

to DN100.
Type 561 (without spring)
Safety
The spring within the valve (type 562) guarantees
100% leakproofness when the valve is in idle mode,
even without medium pressure and mounted horizontally.
Type 561 (no spring) is already 100% leakproof at a
water column of 2m
The double bearing prevents a jamming of the check
cone.
The gasket always remains in the same position, fixed
by a support ring. This prevents slipping, bending or
erosion of the gasket.
Corrosion resistance
Simplicity
The check valves 561 and 562 are self-closing. There
is no need for an energy source other than the existing medium pressure for opening or closing the valve
at any given time.
Same installation length as ball valve type 546, 546
Efficiency
Thanks to the aerodynamic design of the check cone,
the valve permits a far higher flow rate than standard
check valves with a ball.
With the extensive range of options you can be sure to
find the check valve that perfectly suits your requirements:
All jointing methods are available and leave nothing to
be desired
Depending on your field of application, you may
choose among various types of materials for the valve
body, the cone and the spring
The new generation of check valves are available with
ISO, BS, ASTM, ANSI and JIS connection standards
The GF Piping Systems check valve enables safe, efficient and easy transport of media.
Type 562 (with spring)
Product features
With the GF Piping Systems Check Valve everything

is under control. The new design combines increased
safety and efficiency with easy handling.
524
Overview
General
Type
561
562
radially removable
radially removable
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
16/10
Spring-assisted(V2A)
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Standard
ISO
ANSI
BS
JIS
Options
Spring Nimonic 90/Hastelloy-C
Spring Halar/ ECTFE coated
Safety information
Check valves type 561 and 562 from Georg Fischer are
intended exclusively for shutting off and conducting media in the allowable pressure and temperature range in
piping systems into which they have been installed. The
maximum operating time is 25 years.
CAUTION
Check valves are not suitable for use with
media containing solids. When selecting

a check valve, make surethat the density (specific weight) of the cone isgreater
than that of the medium. (exception: bleed
valve)
When used as a ventilating valve, the density of the cone must be less than the density of the medium.
The flow of the fluid must be even across
the entire cross-section of the check valve
in order for it to work properly. If necessary
(after pumps, changes in direction) a turbulence-free section should be allowed for.
Cavitation should be avoided.
GF Piping Systems recommends that you
use the type check valves 561, 562 as ventilation valves. Use the ventilation valves
type 595 and 591 specially developed for
this application.
525
WARNING
Graph
Exploded view
Arrows
The arrow on the valve housing indicates the
direction of the flow. For application with vertical flow, only an upward flow is permitted,
i.e. the arrow must point upward. If installed
in the opposite direction, the shut off function
is not warranted, and serious injuries might
be a consequence.
Observe the arrow information and explanation
WARNING
Connection methods
Only identical materials may be joined together via welded or adhesive joints. Noncompliance can lead to serious injuries.
Sections of pipework with adhesive joints
should be rinsed with non-pressurized water as soon as possible after completion of
the joints.
The union nuts on the valve should be
tightened hand tight.
Union nut
Connecting part
O-ring
Screw-in ring
Sealing ring
Back-up ring
Cone
Spring (type 562)
Housing
Dimensions check valve type 561

Check valve type 561 with solvent cement socketsmetric
NOTICE
Opening and closing conditions
The information in the table apply to water or water-like media with a density of approximately 1g/cm. If media with a higher
density are used, make sure that the cone
can float depending on the material used
and that the closing function of the cone is
no longer granted. This is dependent on
the material used.
The values for the opening conditions apply to vertical installation (->recommended
installation location). For horizontal installation, the valve opens at much lower differential pressures.
526
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
92
56
64
20
15
50
95
56
64
25
20
58
110
65
72
32
25
68
123
71
79
40
32
84
146
85
94
50
40
97
157
89
95
63
50
124
183
101
107
75
65
166
233
136
144
90
80
200
254
141
151
110
100
238
301
164
174
Check valve type 561 with solvent cement spigotsmetric
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
114
56
20
15
50
124
25
20
58
32
25
40
Check valve type 561 with fixed flange metric
DN
D1
D3
L2
L3
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
56
20
15
95
65
14
124
56
130
144
65
25
20
105
75
14
144
65
150
68
154
71
32
25
115
85
14
154
71
160
32
84
174
85
40
32
140
100
18
174
85
180
50
40
97
194
89
50
40
150
110
18
194
89
200
63
50
124
224
101
63
50
165
125
18
224
101
230
75
65
166
284
136
90
80
200
300
141
110
100
238
340
164
Check valve type 561 with butt fusion spigots long

metric
Check valve type 561 with threaded sockets Rp
Rp
DN
L2
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
95
56
69
15
50
100
56
67
20
58
114
65
78
25
68
127
71
85
32
84
146
85
100
40
97
152
89
106
50
124
177
101
121
65
166
233
136
144
80
200
254
141
151
100
238
301
164
174
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
50
193
56
2.3
25
20
58
216
65
2.3
32
25
68
223
71
3.0
40
32
84
249
85
3.7
50
40
97
271
89
4.6
63
50
124
321
101
5.8
527
Dimensions check valve type 562
Check valve type 562 with threaded sockets Rp
Check valve type 562 with solvent cement socketsmetric
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
92
56
64
20
15
50
95
56
64
25
20
58
110
65
72
32
25
68
123
71
79
40
32
84
146
85
94
50
40
97
157
89
95
63
50
124
183
101
107
75
65
166
233
136
144
90
80
200
254
141
151
110
100
238
301
164
174
Rp
DN
L2
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
95
56
69
15
50
100
56
67
20
58
114
65
78
25
68
127
71
85
32
84
146
85
100
40
97
152
89
106
50
124
177
101
121
65
166
233
136
144
80
200
254
141
151
100
238
301
164
174
Check valve type 562 with fixed flange metric
Check valve type 562 with solvent cement spigotsmetric
DN
D1
D3
L2
L3
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
95
65
14
124
56
130
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
25
20
105
75
14
144
65
150
16
10
50
114
56
32
25
115
85
14
154
71
160
20
15
50
124
56
40
32
140
100
18
174
85
180
25
20
58
144
65
50
40
150
110
18
194
89
200
32
25
68
154
71
63
50
165
125
18
224
101
230
40
32
84
174
85
50
40
97
194
89
63
50
124
224
101
75
65
166
284
136
90
80
200
300
141
110
100
238
340
164
528
Check valve type 562 with butt fusion spigots long

metric
P Permissible pressure in bar, psi

T Temperature in C, F
DN
L2
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
20
15
50
193
56
2.3
25
20
58
216
65
2.3
32
25
68
223
71
3.0
40
32
84
249
85
3.7
50
40
97
271
89
4.6
63
50
124
321
101
5.8

1) e.g. check valves with PP or PE100 SDR17 spigot end
In case of applications with the temperatures in the
rangeof the dotted lines, please contact your
GF representative.
Technical data


Pressure loss


529
Opening and closing conditions

DN
Open (vertical installation)
Closing*
Differential pressure
for take-off of cone
(bar)
Differential pressure Min. flow for full

for full stroke of cone stroke of cone
(bar)
(l/min)
Min. flow rate for full

stroke
(m/sec)
Tight at
(bar)
Type 561
Tight from
(bar) Type
562
10
0.003
0.01
0.7
0.2
0.1
15
0.003
0.01
0.7
0.2
0.1
20
0.003
0.01
13
0.7
0.2
0.1
25
0.005
0.01
18
0.8
0.2
0.1
32
0.005
0.01
35
0.8
0.2
0.1
40
0.010
0.01
70
0.8
0.2
0.1
50
0.020
0.01
100
0.8
0.2
0.1
65
0.025
0.01
120
0.9
0.2
0.1
80
0.030
0.01
170
0.9
0.2
0.1
100 0.030
0.08
250
1.0
0.2
0.1

screws
*vertical and horizontal installation

Material
Density
ABS
1.03 g/cm
PP-TV 20(Cone: PP-talc-filled)
1.05 g/cm
PP-H
0.91 g/cm
PVC-U
1.38 g/cm
PVC-C
1.50 g/cm
PVDF
1.78 g/cm
kv 100 values
DN
inch
(mm)
DN
inch Total number of

screws
Torque
flat gasket
mm
mm
(Nm) (lb- (Nm) (lb

ft.)
ft.)
20
15
4x M12 x 50
10
7.4
10
7.4
25
20
4x M12 x 55
10
7.4
10
7.4
32
25
4x M12 x 60
15
11
10
7.4
40
32
4x M16 x 65
20
15
15
11
Torque
profile
gasket *
d
kv 100 l/
(mm) min (p =
1 bar)
Cv 100
US gal/
min (p =
1 psi)
kv 100 m/
h (p = 1
bar)
50
40
4x M16 x 70
25
18
15
11
63
50
4x M16 x 75
35
26
20
15
75
65
4x M16 x 90
50
37
25
18
90
80
8x M16 x
100
30
22
15
11
110
100
8x M16 x
130
35
26
20
15
10
16
190
13
11
15
20
190
13
11
20
25
380
26
23
25
32
460
32
28
32
40
850
59
51
40
50
1080
75
65
50
63
1670
115
100
65
75
2950
204
177
80
90
3600
248
216
100
110
4150
286
249
530
* preferable type of gasket (suited for plastics)
Chemical resistance of springs

Chemical resistance at 20 C (Applications can be very dependent on the concentration)
Springs
Chemicals
Steel 1.4301 V2A
Steel / Halar
coated 1.4301
V2A
Nimonic 90 2.4632
Acids
Oxidating (HNO3, H2CrO4, etc.)
Inorganic (HCl, H2SO4, etc.)
Organic (formic acid, acetic acid, citric acid,

etc.)
Bases
Inorganic (NaOH, KOH, etc.)
Salts
NaCl, FeCl2, FeCl3, CaCl2, etc.
Halogens
Chlorine, bromine, iodine, (no fluorine)
Fuels / Oils
Aliphatic hydrocarbons
Aromatic hydrocarbons
Solvents
Chlorinated hydrocarbons
Ketones
Alcohols
Esters
Aldehydes
Phenols
Oxidizing agents
NaOCl, ozone, etc.
Glycol
+ good
o conditionally resistant, please consult us
- not resistant
The above list is only intended as a guideline and does not replace an indepth review of material suitability for the particular application.
The information is based on our experience and is state of the art. These data are general indicators only.
In practice, however, other factors such as concentration, pressure and jointing technology must also be taken into consideration. The technical data are binding and are not expressly warranted characteristics of the goods.
We would be glad to assist you with your selection of materials.
Minimum pressure for valve opening Type 562

DN
Differential pressure up to lifting of

the cone
(mm)
(bar)
10
0.028
15
0.028
20
0.03
25
0.03
32
0.035
40
0.04
50
0.05
65
0.06
80
0.06
100
0.06

Maintenance
Check valves require no maintenance under normal operating conditions. It is enough to control periodically, if
there is no leakage. Should leakage or other malfunctions occur, follow the instructions under Safety information.
We recommend a function test for check valves which
are kept permanently in the same position 12 x a year
to check serviceability.
531
Angle seat check valves type 303/304

Overview
Product description
GF Piping Systems Angle Seat Check Valves Type 303/

304 show their strength with remarkable reliability and
their position-independent function. The design of the
angle seat check valves has evolved its strengths over
many years.Because of its position-independent function and the simple maintenance process, the valve
grants a high degree of process reliability.
Versions
Angle seat check valves type 303 with solvent cement spigots metric
Angle seat check valve type 303 with solvent cement sockets JIS
Angle seat check valves type 303 with fixed flangeJIS
Product features
Self closing check valve (gravity)

Works both horizontally and vertically
Easy maintenance of check element without dismantling the valve
532
Overview
General
Type
303/304
Dimension DN
10 - 80
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
ABS
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Connection types
Cement spigot
Flange
Standard
ISO
JIS
Safety information
These Georg Fischer angle seat check valves of type
303/304 are intended exclusively for shutting off and
conducting media in the allowable pressure and temperature range in piping systems into which they have been
installed. The maximum operating time is 25 years.
CAUTION
media containing solids.
For the angle seat check valve to function
properly, the flow must be evenly distributed over the pipe cross-section. If necessary (after pumps, changes in direction) a
turbulence-free section should be allowed
for. Cavitation should be avoided.
WARNING
Arrows
The arrow on the valve housing indicates the
direction of the flow. For application with vertical flow, only an upward flow is permitted,
i.e. the arrow must point upward. If installed
in the opposite direction, the shut off function
is not warranted, and serious injuries might
be a consequence.
Observe the arrow information and explanation
DANGER
Removal of the angle seat check valve
The medium may exit uncontrollably from
the pipe or the valve, whether under pressure or not,the medium may flow out of
the open pipe, and the valve may contain
residues or remnants of aggressive, hazardous, flammable or explosive media. Consequences can be death or serious injuries.
Remove all pressure from the piping system
Empty the piping system completely
Rinse the piping system, if aggressive,
hazardous, flammable or explosive media
are inside the system,
DANGER
Lubricants
False lubricants can corrode the material of
the angle seat check valve or the seal. Consequences can be death or serious injuries.
533
Angle seat check valve type 303 with solvent cement sockets JIS
Graph
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Housing
Flat gasket
Piston
O-ring
Valve top
Union
Circlip
inch DN
D1
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
15
162
43
53
194
65
20
170
47
53
208
75
25
180
56
53
224
90
32
204
64
74
256
102
40
228
82
83
290
123
50
266
95
103
342
144
Angle seat check valve type 303 with fixed flangeJIS
Dimensions
Angle seat check valve type 303 with solvent cement spigots metric
inch DN
D1
D2
D3
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
15
95
70
48
15
130
65
20
100
75
54
15
150
75
DN
L1
L2
closest
25
125
90
62
19
160
90
32
135
100
71
19
180
102
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
40
140
105
88
19
200
123
16
10
39
114
120
24
58
50
155
120
103
19
230
144
20
15
43
124
130
28
65
65
185
140
106
19
290
186
25
20
47
144
150
37
75
80
200
150
120
19
310
204
32
25
56
154
160
37
90
40
32
64
174
180
44
102
Technical data
50
40
82
194
200
48
123
63
50
95
224
230
60
144
75
65
92
284
290
74
186
90
80
104
300
310
85
204
534

kv 100 values
ABS
DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
10
16
45
3.2
2.7
15
20
95
6.7
5.7
20
25
170
11.9
10.2
25
32
300
21.0
18.0
32
40
440
30.8
26.4
Temperature in C, F
40
50
700
49.0
42
50
63
1100
77.0
66
65
75
1700
119.0
102
80
90
2400
168.0
144
PVC-U
Technical features, pressure, ...

DN Open
Temperature in C, F
Pressure loss
Closed
Differential
pressure for
full stroke
(bar)
Min. flow for

full stroke
(l/min)
Min. flow
rate for full
stroke
(m/sec)
Tight
at
(bar)
10
0.02
1.1
0.2
15
0.02
10
1.1
0.2
20
0.02
18
1.1
0.2
25
0.02
28
1.1
0.2
32
0.02
50
1.2
0.2
40
0.03
95
1.4
0.2
50
0.03
200
1.5
0.2
65
0.03
280
1.8
0.2
80
0.03
420
1.8
0.2

Maintenance
X
Y

Angle seat check valves require no maintenance under

normal operating conditions. It is enough to control periodically, if there is no leakage. Should leakage or other
malfunctions occur, follow the instructions under Safety information.
We recommend a function test for angle seat check
valves which are kept permanently in the same position
12 x a year to check serviceability.
535
Wafer Check valves type 369
Type 369 in PVDF
Overview
Product description
GF Piping Systems Gate Check Valves Type 369 are

designed especially for large installations, demand low
service and effort and are absolutely compact. The Design is optimized for installations between ISO/DIN as
well as ASTM connections. The gate check valves can
be installed both in either horizontal or vertical direction.
If a medium flows in the flow direction, it opens up the
plate of the wafercheck valve and thus the flow is possible. If the medium pressure falls below a certain limit,
the flap closes again.
Versions
The wafer check valves type 369 complement the vast

range of GF valves. They preventthe medium from flowing back, they are available in PVC-U, PP and PVDF
(DN32 DN300)and also with reset springs in V4A and
Hastelloy. The wafer check valves are suitablefor vertical and horizontal mounting. They are robust and maintenance free and admittedfor a nominal pressure (PN)
of 6 bar.
Type 369 in PVC-U
Type 369 in PP-H
536
Product features
Self closing check valve (water column/gravity/spring

optional)
Only highly resistant materials
Simple installation between standard flanges (see
product range)
Optimized face seal (flange seal)
Robust and maintenance-free design
Easy installation. The screws centre the check valve
via the outer diameter for ISO/DIN and ANSI flange
adaptors. The integrated supporting eye let for easy
fitting.
Suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting.
All parts with media contact are made in high resistant
plastics and seals material.
Available in the dimensions from DN32 up to DN300
in PVC-U, PP-H and PVDF.
Special EPDM or FPM gaskets are suitable for flange
adaptors with grooves.
Disc seals are available in EPDM or FPM.
Wafer check valves in PVC-U are suitable for ISO/
DIN and also ANSI flange adaptors due to their special outer shape.
For pulsating flow, wafer check valves with reset
spring (out of stainless steel V4A or Hastelloy C) are
available. Noises are thus reduced.
No auxiliary energy/actuator is required to operate the
valve.
Overview
General
Type
369
Dimension DN
DN32 - DN300
Pressure range PN
PVC-U
PP-H
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Flanges
Threaded socket
Standard
ISO
ANSI
Safety information
DANGER
Wafer check valves type 369 by Georg Fischer are exclusively intended for installation in a piping system media within the allowable pressure and temperature limits to shut off or pass through. The maximum operating
time is 25 years.
Lubricants
The use of inadequate lubricants can affect
the material of the wafer check valve or of
the sealings.Consequences can be serious
injuries or death.
Lubricate all gaskets with grease based on
silicone or polycol.
CAUTION
media containing solids. During control operation, cavitation has to be avoided.

The wafer check valve is approved only for
PN6.
No direct installation on pump flange or
bend allowed.
Graph
Exploded view
DANGER
Removal of the wafer check valve
The medium may exit uncontrollably from
the pipe or the valve, whether under pressure or not,the medium may flow out of
the open pipe, and the valve may contain
residues or remnants of aggressive, hazardous, flammable or explosive media. Consequences can be death or serious injuries.
Remove all pressure from the piping system
Empty the piping system completely
Rinse the piping system, if aggressive,
hazardous, flammable or explosive media
are inside the system,
1
2
3
4
5
6
Screw and washer

Flange
Flange adaptor/stub
Flange gasket
Wafer Check valve type 369
Nut and washer
537
Dimensions
Wafer check valve type 369 PP-H without spring
Wafer check valve type 369 PVC-U without spring
DN
D1
D2
L1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
DN inch D
D1 D2 D3 L
L1
40
32
85
59
18
25
15
22
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
40
95
72
22
28
16
27
40
32
85
59
18
85
15
22
25
63
50
109
86
32
29
18
40
50
40
105
74
22
95
16
27
27
75
65
129
105
40
31
20
55
63
50
124
90
32
109
18
40
29
90
80
144
119
54
32
20
67
75
65
137
110
40
129
20
55
31
110
100
164
146
70
31
23
67
90
80
175
125
54
144
20
67
32
140
125
195
173
92
35
23
94
110
100
175
150
70
164
23
67
31
160
150
220
197
105
42
26
100
140
125
195
178
92
195
23
94
35
225
200
275
255
154
38
35
152
160
150
222
192
105
220
26
100
41
280
250
330
312
192
41
40
180
225
200
279
256
154
275
35
152
38
315
300
380
363
227
41
45
215
280
250
340
306
192
330
40
180
41
315
300
10
410
342
227
380
45
215
41
538
Wafer check valve type 369 PVDF without spring
Opening pressure, tightness type 369

Diameter
Opening pressure in mbar
Minimum water column for

sealing in m
DN
Vertical
without
spring
Vertical
with
spring
Horizontal
without
spring
Horizontal
with
spring
PVCPP
U
PVDF
32
10
30
20
40
10
30
20
50
10
30
20
65
10
30
20
DN
D1
D2
L1
80
10
30
20
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
100
10
30
20
40
32
85
59
18
15
22
25
125
10
30
20
50
40
95
74
22
16
27
27
150
10
30
20
63
50
109
90
32
18
40
29
200
18
38
20
75
65
129
110
40
20
55
31
250
18
38
20
90
80
144
125
54
20
67
32
300
18
38
20
110
100
164
150
70
23
67
31
140
125
195
178
92
23
94
35
160
150
220
192
105
26
100
41
225
200
275
256
154
35
152
38
280
250
330
306
192
40
180
41
310
300
380
342
227
45
215
41
Pressure loss
PVC-U, pipe PN10
Technical data
Pressure-temperature diagram of type 369
PVC-U, PP, PVDF
The following pressure temperature diagram is based

Temperature in C, F
Medium: water 20 C
539
PP with outlet flange adapter PP/PE, SDR11 (PN10)
kv 100 values PP with outlet flange adapter PP/

PE, SDR11 (PN10)
DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
32
40
280
19.6
16.8
40
50
340
23.8
20.4
50
63
610
42.7
36.6
65
75
1230
86.1
74
80
90
2610
182.7
157
100
110
3930
275.1
236
Medium: water 20 C
125
140
7120
498.4
427
150
160
9180
642.6
551
200
225
17600
1232
1056
250
10
280
24400
1708
1464
300
12
315
31900
2233
1914
PVDF, Pipe PN10
kv 100 values PVDF, pipe PN10
Medium: water 20 C
kv 100 values PVC-U, pipe PN10

DN DN d
kv 100
mm inch mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal./
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
32
40
270
18.9
16.2
40
50
370
25.9
22.2
50
63
900
63.0
54
65
75
1140
79.8
68
80
90
1870
130.9
112
100
110
2870
200.9
172
125
140
5700
399.0
342
150
160
6900
483.0
414
200
225
18800
1316
1128
250
10
280
25000
1750
1500
300
12
315
27600
1932
1656
540
DN inch d
kv 100
mm
mm l/min
(p = 1
bar)
Cv 100
US gal/
min
(p = 1
psi)
kv 100
m/h
(p = 1
bar)
32
40
280
19.6
16.8
40
50
340
23.8
20.4
50
63
610
42.7
36.6
65
75
1230
86.1
74
80
90
2610
182.7
157
100
110
3930
275.1
236
125
140
7120
498.4
427
150
160
9180
642.6
551
200
225
17600
1232
1056
250
10
280
24400
1708
1464
300
12
315
31900
2233
1914

screws
Metric flange adaptor
d
DN
inch
Total number of
screws
Torque Torque
Nm
lb-ft
40
32
4x M16 x 85
15
11
50
40
4x M16 x 85
15
11
63
50
4x M16 x 95
20
15
75
65
4x M16 x 100
25
18
90
80
8x M16 x 110
25
18
110
100
8x M16 x 130
30
22
140
125
8x M16 x 130
35
26
160
150
8x M20 x 180
40
30
225
200
8x M20 x 180
50
37
280
250
10
12x M20 x 180
55
41
315
300
12
12x M20 x 180
60
44
ANSI flange adaptors

d
DN
inch
Total number of
screws
Torque Torque
Nm
lb-ft
50
40
4 xUNC5/8" x 3"
20
15
63
50
4 xUNC5/8" x 4"
25
18
75
65
4 xUNC5/8" x 4"
25
18
90
80
8 xUNC5/8" x 4"
30
22
110
100
8 xUNC5/8" x 4"
30
22
160
150
8 x UNC3/4" x 5"
40
30
225
200
8 x UNC3/4" x 6"
50
37
280
250
10
12 xUNC7/8" x 6"
55
41
315
300
12
12 xUNC7/8" x 7"
60
44

Maintenance
Normally wafer check valves do not need maintenance.

It is enough to control periodically, if there is no leakage. If you have a leakage in the flange connections, refasten these acc. to the table "standard values for the
Screw fixing" or if it is necessary replace the flange gaskets.
541
542
Pressure reducing valve types V782, V82 and V182

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Pressure retaining valve type V786 and V186 / V86

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Pressure relief valve type V185/V85

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Diaphragm gauge guard type Z700 / Z701

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Water jet suction pump type P20

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Ventilating valve type 595 and Ventilating- and bleed valve type 591
-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Float valves type V140

-- Overview
-- Graph
Throttle valves type V251

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
Page
544
545
545
548
554
555
556
558
561
562
563
563
566
568
569
569
570
571
572
572
574
584
585
586
587
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
543
Pressure reducing valve V782
Pressure reducing valve types V782,

V82 and V182
Overview
Product description
The V82, V182 and V782pressure reducing valves reduce the pressure within the system to a pre-set value.
By using the differential pressure, the pressure reducing
valve adjusts itself to the set working pressure.
The outlet pressure (working pressure) is not directly related to the inlet pressure. If the outlet pressure increases or decreases above/below the desired value, the diaphragm is lifted against the spring force or pressed
down by the spring force, as the case may be, by the
outlet pressure. The pressure reducing valve begins to
close/open until a state of equilibrium is re-established;
in other words, the outlet pressure remains constant
irrespective of an increasing or decreasing inlet pressure.
The wide range of materials available for the housings (PVC-U, PP, PVDF) and the diaphragms (EPDM,
EPDM-PTFE-coated) cover many areas of application for technically pure, neutral and aggressive fluids
as well as ultrapure water applications. For more information, please refer to the GF Piping Systems List
of Chemical Resistance. We recommend installing a
strainer upstream to avoid any breakdowns.
Versions
Pressure reducing valve V82
Pressure rducing valve V182
544
Product description
All parts which come into contact with the medium are
made of highly resistant plastics.
The actuator is separated and hermetically sealed off
from the flow section by the control diaphragm.
The working pressure is set with an adjusting screw
and locked with a locknut.
The streamlined design of the housing makes for
good flow rates.
The large control surface and the spiral spring keep
standard tolerances small.
No auxiliary energy is required to operate the valve.
The valve is largely maintenance-free and can be installed in any position.
Valve can also be adjusted under working pressure.
V82 standard version with manometer
V182 standard version with diaphragm protected
manometer
Overview
General
Type
V82
V182
V782
Dimension DN
10 - 100
10 - 40
10 - 40
Pressure range PN
DN 10 - DN50: 0.5 - 10
0.5 - 10
0.5 - 10
DN65 - DN 80: 0.5 - 6
DN100: 0.5 - 4
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM
EPDM-PTFE-coated
FPM
Connection types
Spigot
Standard
DIN/ISO
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
0 to + 60 C
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
0 to + 80 C
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
-20 to + 100 C
-20 to + 100 C
Remark
Belleville spring
Compression
spring
Compression
spring
Manometer
Manometer
Nomanometer
High accuracy
Graphical representation of the functioning of the pressure reducing valve
Installation note V82, V182 and V782:

We recommend installing the valves between two removable pipe connections.
Safety information
Pressure reducing valves typesV82, V182 and V782 of
Georg Fischer are exclusively intended for installation in
a piping system to shut off or pass through media within the allowable pressure and temperature limits. The
maximum operating time is 25 years.
Graph
Exploded view V82
NOTICE
Secondary pressure
If the secondary pressure is further increased
by counter pressure, the pressure reducing
valveacts asa check valve. This back pressure can eventually lead to the destruction of
the valve piston.
Do not increase the secondary pressure
drawn without manometer / drawn offset

545
1
2
3*
4*
7
8
9*
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18*
*
Valve body
Upper valve body
Diaphragm
Piston
V82: Pressure plate (top)
V82: Pressure plate (bottom)
Spring assembly/compression spring
Locknut
Adjusting screw
Allen screw
Washer
Cap
Allen screws
Valve bottom with O-ring
O-ring
Parts subject to wear or recommended spare parts
Exploded view V182
drawn without manometer
1
2
4*
6
9*
10
11
14
15
16
18*
20
*
Valve body
Upper valve body
Piston
Spring plate
Compression spring
Locknut
Adjusting screw
Cap
Allen screws
O-ring
piston base
Exploded view V782
546
1
2
3*
4*
5
6
9*
10
11
12
14
15
16
17*
Valve body
Upper valve body
Diaphragm
Piston
V782: compressor
V782: spring plate
Spring assembly / compression spring
Locknut
Adjusting screw
Allen screw
Cap
Allen screw with nut and cover
Lip ring
Dimensions V82
* special versions on request
da
DN
L:
PVC-U cement spigots PP/
PVDF fusion spigots
L:
L1: PVC-U,
PVDF-HP/ PP/ PVDF
PP Butt fusion spigots BCF/
IR
L2: PVC-U,
PP/ PVDF
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
70
100
130
134
154
140
20
15
70
100
130
134
150
154
140
25
20
100
134
180
174
190
185
180
32
25
100
134
180
174
190
185
180
40
32
130
175
230
224
240
248
230
50
40
130
175
230
224
240
252
230
63
50
150
210
285
244
260
280
250
75
65
200
250
350
300
300
306
90
80
250
305
425
360
360
370
110
100
300
345
495
420
420
430
Dimensions V182
547
da
DN
L: PVCU cement
spigots PP/
PVDF fusion
spigots
L: PVDF-HP/
PP Butt fusion spigots
BCF/ IR
L1: PVC-U,
PP/ PVDF
L2: PVC-U,
PP/ PVDF
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
70
100
130
134
154
140
20
15
70
100
130
134
150
154
140
25
20
100
134
180
174
190
185
180
32
25
100
134
180
174
190
185
180
40
32
130
175
230
224
240
248
230
50
40
130
175
230
224
240
252
230
Dimensions V782
Technical data
Working pressure
V82, V182 and V782
Temperature in C, F
Hysteresis V82
approx. 0.1 to 0.4 bar
Hysteresis V182
Hysteresis V782
da
L: PVDFHP/
L:
PVDFHP/
PP Butt
fusion
spigots
BCF/IR
mm mm mm
mm
mm
mm
mm mm
16
10
134
102
138
48
83
20
15
134
172
102
138
48
83
25
20
154
190
110
205
65
112
32
25
154
190
110
205
65
112
40
32
224
262
162
248
95
165
50
40
224
262
162
248
95
165
548
DN L: PVCU cement
spigots
PP/ L:
PVC-U cement spigots PP/
PVDF fusion spigots
Pressure difference between inlet and outlet

min. 1 bar
Adjustment range on outlet with an inlet pressure of
10 barV82
0.5 to 9.0 bar
10 barV182
0.5 to 9.0 bar
10 barV782
0.5 to 9.0 bar
Operational characteristics for a pressure reducing valve (representation not full scale)
V782
Flow rate Q (l/hr)
Working pressure (bar)
pA
set outlet pressure
pO
Opening pressure
pS
Closing pressure
pA -pO
Hysteresis
pS -pA
flow-related pressure drop in valve
pS-pmin max. pressure reduction in relation to flow rate
Example
Example 1: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (see dotted line in diagram)
For a flow rate of approx. 3500 l/hr, an outlet pressure
(working pressure) of 4 bar is required. Inlet pressure
min. 5 bar or greater.
Look for the given flow rate on the x axis of the respective nominal diameter curve. When the appropriate
curve has been found, check if the valve is in the desired pressure range (here 4 bar).
In this example, the hysteresis would be 0.5 bar and the
pressure drop 1 bar.
Example 2: .....................(see dotted line in diagram)
The valve is adjusted at a desired pressure of 3 bar at 0
conveyance. If we assume a flow rate of 2500 l/hr, the
pressure drop in the valve would be approx. 0.8 bar.
Hysteresis
**
pressure drop in valve
549
Characteristics V82
550
l/h, l/min
Flow volume H2O
Outlet pressure (bar)
Characteristics are valid for a flow rate of 2 m/s.
551
Characteristics V182
l/h, l/min
flow volume water
outlet pressure
Characteristics valid for a flow rate of 2 m/s.
552
l/h, l/min
Flow volume H2O
Outlet temperature (bar)
553
Pressure retaining valve type V786

and V186 / V86
V186
Overview
Product description
The V786 and V186 / V86pressure retaining valves

serve to keep the working or system-related pressures
constant, to balance out pressure pulsation and to reduce pressure peaks in chemical process systems. If
the inlet pressure rises above the set value, the pressurised valve piston is lifted against the spring force.
Consequently, the valve opens and there is a reduction
of pressure in the outlet pipe. The valve closes as soon
as the inlet pressure sinks below the preset spring tension.
The wide range of materials available for the housings (PVC-U, PP, PVDF) and the diaphragms (EPDM,
EPDM-PTFE-coated) cover many areas of application for technically pure, neutral and aggressive fluids
as well as ultrapure water applications. For more information, please refer to the GF Piping Systems List
of Chemical Resistance. We recommend installing a
strainer upstream to avoid any breakdowns.
V86
When used as a bypass, the pressure retention valve

V186/86 can also be used as a bleed-off valve for reducing pressure peaks. Due to the dead space free design of the lower body, the valve can also be used in ultrapure water as well as for technically pure, neutral and
aggressive liquids. For more information, please refer to
the GF Piping Systems List of Chemical Resistance.
Versions
V786
Product description
V786
All parts which come intocontact with the medium are
made of highly resistant plastics.
The actuator is separated and hermetically sealed off
from the flow section by the control diaphragm.
The working pressure is set with an adjusting screw
and locked with a locknut.
The streamlined design of the housing makes for
good flow rates.
The large control surface and the spiral spring keep
standard tolerances small.
No auxiliary energy is required to operate the valve.
The valve is largely maintenance-free and can be installed in any position.
Valve can also be adjusted under working pressure.
V186/V82
Good control characteristics
Low maintenance due to uncomplicated design
554
Control unit is hermetically separated from flow

medium by serial EPDM or EPDM-PTFE-coated diaphragm
Zero static lower body (V186)
Note the direction of flow Valve mounting with threaded insert on lower body
Adjustment range: 0.5 - 9 bar
Valve can also be adjusted under working pressure
Overview
General
Type
V786
V186/V86
Dimension DN
10 - 40
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
DN 10 - DN25: 0.5 - 10
DN 10 - DN50: 0.5 - 10
type V186
DN32 - DN 40: 0.5 - 4
DN65 - DN 80: 1.0 - 6 type

V86
DN100: 1.0 - 4 type V86
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM
EPDM-PTFE-coated
Connection types
Spigot
Sockets
Flange
On request
Standard
DIN/ISO
ANSI
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
-20 to + 100 C
Graphical representation of the operation of the pressure retaining valve
Safety information
Installation note:
555
Graph
Exploded view V786
1
2
3*
4*
5
6*
7
8
9
10
11
12
*
Lower valve body

Upper valve body
Diaphragm
Piston
Compressor
Spring assembly
Locknut
Adjusting screw
Cylinder screw
Cap
Allen screws with nut and caps
Spring plate
Exploded view V86 DN 65-100
1
2
3*
4*
5
6*
7
8
9
10
11
12
*
Lower valve body

Upper valve body
Diaphragm
Piston
Compressor
Spring assembly
Locknut
Adjusting screw
Cylinder screw
Cap
Allen screws with nut and caps
Spring plate
Exploded view V186 DN 10-50
shown offset
556
Dimensions V786
da
DN
L: PVCU cement
spigots
PP/
PVDF
fusion
spigots
L: PVDF- I
HP/
Butt
fusion
spigots
BC F/IR
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
134
102
138
38
83
20
15
134
172
102
138
38
83
25
20
154
190
110
205
55
112
32
25
154
190
110
205
55
112
40
32
224
262
162
248
85
165
50
40
224
262
162
248
85
165
Metric cement and fusion spigots
Dimensions V186/V86
DN
L:
PVC-U
cement
spigots
PP/
PVDF fusion spigots
L: PVDF- L1
HP/PP
Butt fusion spigots BC F/
IR
L2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
134
140
154
83
137
20
15/20
134
158
140
154
83
137
20
25
174
198
180
185
112
199
27
32
174
202
230
248
165
199
43
40
224
256
230
248
165
290
43
50
244
256
250
252
165
290
43
65
284
284
290
280
180
275
230
80
360
360
310
250
410
320
100
380
380
390
250
485
415
557
L1 = with flange
L2 = union
Technical data
l/h, l/min
Flow volume H2O
558
Valve characteristics diagram V786
pA
Air pressure
Opening pressure
pS
Closing pressure
The valve characteristics diagram shows the primary or

working pressure pA in bar in relation to the flow rate Q
in l/h. The parameter is the set pressure pE at Q = 0 l/h.
The curve indicates the opening pressure progression.
The characteristics apply to water at +20 C.
Example:
A valve XY is adjusted to 3 bar. If the flow is increased
to 900 l/hr, the input pressure increases to 4.5 bar. According to the characteristics, the following values apply:
Working pressure approx. 4.5 bar
Opening pressure approx. 3.1 bar
Closing pressure approx. 2.8 bar
Characteristics V86
559
l/h, l/min
Flow volume water
Outlet pressure
Characteristics are valid for a flow rate of 2 m/s
l/h, l/min
Flow volume water
560

Installation examples for pressure retaining
valves
PA
Air pressure
PP
Pump pressure
PO
Closing pressure
561

Overview
Product description
The V185/V85 pressure relief valves serve to keep the

working or system-related pressures constant, to balance out pressure pulsation and to reduce pressure
peaks in chemical process systems. The third pipe spigot fitted on the valve body means the valve can be installed directly in the main pipeline. If the inlet pressure
rises above the set value, the pressurised valve piston is lifted against the spring force. Consequently, the
valve opens and there is a reduction of pressure in the
outlet pipe. The valve closes as soon as the inlet pressure sinks below the preset spring tension.
Versions
Product description
Good control characteristics
Low maintenance due to uncomplicated design
Control unit is hermetically separated from flow medium by standard EPDM or EPDM-PTFE-coated diaphragm
Zero static lower body (V185)
562
Note the direction of flow!

Valve mounting with threaded insert on lower body
(V185)
Adjustment range: 0.5 - 9 bar (1- 4 bar)
Overview
General
Type
V185/V85
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
DN10 - DN50: 0.5 - 10 bar type V185
DN65 - 80: 1.0 - 6 bar type V85
DN100: 1.0 - 4 bar type V85
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM
EPDM-PTFE-coated
Connections
Spigot
Flanges
On request
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
Graphical representation of the operation of the pressure relief valve
Safety information
Installation note:
Graph
Exploded view V185 DN15 - DN50
shown offset
563
1
2
3*
4
5*
6
7*
8
9
10*
*
Lower part
Upper part
Diaphragm
Compressor
Compression spring/spring assembly
Spring plate
Adjusting screw with 1 locknut
Cap
Connecting screws (4 pieces)
Piston
recommended spare parts
Exploded view V85 DN 65 - DN100
shown offset
1
2
3*
4
5*
7*
8
10*
*
564
Lower part
Upper part
Diaphragm
Compressor
Compression spring/spring assembly
Adjusting screw with 1 locknut
Cap
Piston
recommended spare parts
Dimensions
DN
L:
PVCU cement
spigots
PP/
PVDF
fusion
spigots
L:
L1
PVDFHP/PP
Butt
fusion
spigots
BCF/IR
L2
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
134
140
154
83
137
20
15/20
134
158
140
154
83
137
20
25
174
198
180
185
112
199
27
32
174
202
230
248
165
199
43
40
224
256
230
248
165
290
43
50
244
256
250
252
165
290
43
65
284
284
290
280
180
275
45
80
360
300
310
200
400
60
100
380
380
390
250
475
70
L1 = with flange
L2 = union
565
Technical data
Outlet pressure
l/h, l/min
Flow volume water
Characteristics are valid for a flow rate of 2 m/s
566
Characteristics V85
567
Diaphragm gauge guard type Z700 /

Z701
Overview
Product description
The diaphragm-protected gauge guard is used when

measuring the pressure of neutral and corrosive media. The manometer is separated from the medium by
a PTFE-coated diaphragm and protects the pressure
gauge against corrosive influences. The pressure is
transmitted using a buffer fluid, usually Glysantin. The
large area of the diaphragm and the low compressibility
of the buffer fluid ensure an accurate display. The large
number of possible materials make for a wide range of
areas of application.
Versions
Diaphragm gauge guard type Z700/Z701
Product features
All parts which come into the medium are made of

highly resistant plastics.
The manometer does not come into contact with the
medium.
The diaphragm gauge guard is low-maintenance and
can be installed in any position.
The large area of the diaphragm ensures good accuracy.
568
Overview
General
Type
Z700/Z701
Dimension d
25 - 32
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Connections
Spigot
Seal materials
EPDM
EPDM-PTFE-coated
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
Standards
ISO
Safety information
Installation note:
We recommend installing the gauge guard
with a screw fastening and a shut-off device. This ensures that the manometer can
be moved into the required position for
reading at a later stage and can be easily
replaced in the event of a fault.
Graph
Exploded view
CAUTION
Leaking valve due to incorrect screw tension
Before activating you must check the screw
tension.
Retighten screws "crosswise" to the corresponding tightening torques of 2 - 2.5 Nm.
NOTICE
Sealing
The sealing with PTFE tape or hemp can
lead to tearing off the final nozzle.
Weld orcement the spigot.
Flange (1 unit)
Upper part (1 unit)
Diaphragm (1 unit)
(Parts subject to wear or recommended spare parts)
Manometer seal (1 unit)
Manometer (1 unit)
Hexagonal socket-head cap (12/16units)
Hexagonal socket-head screw with washer and nut (6/8 units)
required fill level
**
Buffer fluid
569
Dimensions
Connection spigots
da 25 with manometer connectionR
da 32 with manometer connection R
selectable withNPT thread
Manometer ranges
Standard 0 - 10 bar, with R Dm 63 mm, bei R Dm
100 mm, others on request
Accurancy
Standard class 2.5
Measuring range
0 - 10 bar
0 - 6 bar
Connection
da
mm
mm
mm
mm
R "
25
63
129
15
R "
32
100
210
22
Connection
DD Weight
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
mm
mm
kg
kg
kg
R "
71
72
0.30
0.25
0.32
R "
90
100
0.60
0.54
0.68
Technical data
Working pressure
Temperature in C, F
Allowable working pressure for connection

PN 10 bei 20C
Manometer connections
R "
R "
570
Water jet suction pump type P20

Overview
Product description
Water jet fluid pumps can be used where pressurised

fluid is available as a propellant. They are used for
pumping out pits, moving and mixing chemical waste,
adding acids or leaches in water treatment, etc. They
are self-priming and have no mechanically moving
parts. Because the P20 water jet suction pumps come
in various materials, they can be used wherever the materials meet the given requirements. The basic principle
of the water jet suction pump is that the propellant liquid passes through a nozzle and draws in with it the liquid or gaseous medium from the suction line, increasing its velocity. The result of this is that the propellant
and the medium which is sucked in are mixed together. The amount of fluid propelled is a function of the propellant pressure and the size of the nozzle. The amount
of liquid drawn in can be seen from the diagrams. The
results shown are only guidelines and depend on the
method of operation.
Versions
Designs
DN 10-20 with external thread
DN 25-50 with socket union
DN 65-80 with spigot
Product features
Ideal for mixing, dosing and handling liquids

No mechanically moving parts
Self-priming
571
Overview
General
Type
P20
Dimension DN
10 - 80
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Connection types
Spigot
Thread
Union
Standard
DIN/ISO
ANSI
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
Safety information
CAUTION
Installation note
We recommend installing the water

jet pump between two detachable
pipe sections. With a view to subsequent dismantling, it is useful to provide shut-off devices.
Relaxation zone of pipe at least 5 x
DN are to be provided upstream and
downstream of the pump.
It is recommended that a flowmeter
is installed in the suction line to provide information on the suction power of the pump.
It is useful to install manometers upstream and downstream of the jet
pump for reading the inlet pressure
and the back pressure.
The suction time can be significantly
reduced by installing a check valve
in the suction line. Inlet and outlet
lines must have at least the nominal
bore of the pump.
The propellant and suction flow can
be accurately controlled by installing
throttle valves.
Advice on faults
Faults can occur if, for example, the operating water pressure fluctuates or is too
low, if the back pressure is too high or if
the nozzles are dirty or blocked.
572
Adjusting the suction volume

Do not use a diaphragm valve for adjusting
the suction volume, since the diaphragm can
adhere to the seat, due to the negative pressure. Consequences can be serious injuries.
Use throttle valve V251
Characteristics apply to suction media with
the density of water. Please send a request, for suction media with a different
density.
Graph
Exploded view
DN 20
DN 25-50
1
2
3
4
5
6
Water jet pump (1 pc.)

Nozzle (1 pc.)
Insert (3 pcs.)
Union nut
O-ring (3 pcs.)
O-ring (3 pcs.)
Dimensions
up to DN20
from DN25 to DN50
from DN65
Type
da
DN
G1
L1
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
P 20.10 - 1.5
P 20.10 - 2.0
16
10
R "
R "
110
40
35
P 20.15 - 2.0
P 20.15 - 3.0
P 20.15 - 4.0
20
15
R 1"
R "
125
40
35
P 20.20 - 3.0
P 20.20 - 4.5
P 20.20 - 6.0
25
20
R "
R "
145
45
45
P 20.25 - 2.5
P 20.25 - 4.0
P 20.25 - 5.0
32
25
R 1"
R 1"
245
195
96
71
P 20.32 - 3.0
P 20.32 - 4.5
P 20.32 - 6.0
40
32
R 2"
R 2"
297
239
116
87
P 20.40 - 3.5
P 20.40 - 5.5
P 20.40 - 7.5
50
40
R 2"
R 2"
369
301
139
105
P 20.50 - 5.0
P 20.50 - 7.0
P 20.50 - 9.0
63
50
R 2"
R 2"
433
351
169
128
P 20.65 - 6.5
P 20.65 - 9.0
P 20.65 - 11.5
75
65
388
115
P 20.80 - 8.0
P 20.80 - 11.0
P 20.80 - 14.0
90
80
465
149
573
Technical data
Working pressure
Temperature in C, F
Output diagram for water jet suction pump P 20.10

Suction medium: water
Suction medium: air
Type P 20.10-1.5
Type P 20.10-1.5
Type P 20.10-2.5
Type P 20.10-2.5
574

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.15-2.0
Type P 20.15-2.0
Type P 20.15-3.0
Type P 20.15-3.0
Type P 20.15-4.0
Type P 20.15-4.0
575

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.20-3.0
Type P 20.20-3.0
Type P 20.20-4.5
Type P 20.20-4.5
Type P 20.20-6.0
Type P 20.20-6.0
576

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.25-2.5
Type P 20.25-2.5
Type P 20.25-4.0
Type P 20.25-4.0
Type P 20.25-5.0
Type P 20.25-5.0
577

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.32-3.0
Type P 20.32-3.0
Type P 20.32-4.5
Type P 20.32-4.5
Type P 20.32-6.0
Type P 20.32-6.0
578

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.40-3.5
Type P 20.40-3.5
Type P 20.40-5.5
Type P 20.40-5.5
Type P 20.40-7.5
Type P 20.40-7.5
579

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.50-5.0
Type P 20.50-5.0
Type P 20.50-7.0
Type P 20.50-7.0
Type P 20.50-9.0
Type P 20.50-9.0
580

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.65-6.5
Type P 20.65-6.5
Type P 20.65-9.0
Type P 20.65-9.0
Type P 20.65-11.5
Type P 20.65-11.5
581

Suction medium: air
Type P 20.80-8.0
Type P 20.80-8.0
Type P 20.80-11.0
Type P 20.80-11.0
Type P 20.80-14.0
Type P 20.80-14.0
Maximum possible vacuum for water jet pumps P20 DN 10-50

P 20.10
582
P 20.15
P 20.20
P 20.25
P 20.32
P 20.40
P 20.50
x vacuum (%)
y propellant pressure (bar)
The figures on the curves (e.g.

3.0) are the diameters of the nozzles in each case.
583
Maximum possible vacuum for water jet pumps P20 DN 65-80

P 20.65
Vacuum (%)
Propellant pressure (bar)
P 20.80

Design of water jet suction pump
Required specifications:
Example:
Data acc. to diagram:
Prop. water pressure:
bar
bar
bar
Prop. water volume:
l/h
1200
l/h
1180
l/h
Suction volume:
l/h
550
l/h
1150
l/h
Suction medium:
Water
Water
Back pressure:
bar
bar
bar
The suction volume must be throttled to the desired amount.
Selected type:
584
Ventilating valve type 595 and Ventilating- and bleed valve type 591
Ventilating and Bleed valve type 591 without spring
Overview
Product description
The new Ventilating- and Bleed valves from GF Piping

Systems are now even more reliable; every detail has
been exceptionally well thought out. An innovative PPH float on the Ventilating- and Bleed valve type 591 has
a very low density of 0.91 g/cm and ensures complete
and reliable venting of the piping system. At the same
time, the valve prevents a media overflow. The Ventilating valve type 595 is used wherever safe and controlled
air inlet is a must, for example when emptying tanks.
Thanks to a comprehensive product range, the valve
type 591 and type 595 easily fit in all major plastic piping systems, worldwide.
The new valves from GF Piping Systems are a perfect example of this. They are easily integrated in your
normal work flow. At the same time, they ensure even
more efficiency and precision thanks to the completely
new design of the valve inner workings: the float has a
spherical surface in the sealing zone and lies absolutely
flush with the seal ring. The double bearing of the float
additionally prevent it from jamming, even in very rapid
closing movements.
Versions
Ventilating valve type 595 with spring
Product features
Reasons for air in the piping system
During operation, dissolved air can be released into
the system through pumps, valves, fittings and other
pipe components.
When filling tanks and pipelines, air inclusions may
occur.
Pressure drops or temperature increases can release
dissolved air.
Positioning of the valves

Absolute and temporary high points
After pumps
At turning points
Safety
The new valve types 591 and 595 control the aerating
and deaerating of piping systems and tanks with high
precision and absolute dependability. They contribute
significantly to the safety and protection of your system,
for example by avoiding the unwanted buildup of a vacuum when emptying piping systems and tanks.
Simplicity
The valves are easy to install and practically maintenance-free, thanks to the compact construction and innovative design details geared to maximum safety, ergonomics and cost efficiency.
Flexibility
The many different dimensions and optimal sizes allow
using the valves under nearly all space conditions and
in any system design. The valves are positioned at the
absolute or temporary high points in the system, after
pumps and at turning points.
585
Overview
General
Type
595
591
Ventilating
valve
Ventilatingand Bleed
valve
Dimension DN
10 - 100
Pressure range PN
16
Spring-assisted (V2A/V4A)
PVC-U
PVC-C
ABS
PP-H
PVDF
Float material
PP-H (specific density 0.91 g/cm)
PVDF (empty)
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM
Connection types
Sockets
Spigot
Threaded sockets
Standard
ISO
ASTM/ANSI
BS
Options
Spring Nimonic 90 Halar coated
Safety information
Ventilating valve type 595 and ventilating- and bleed
valve type 591 from Georg Fischer are exclusively intended for installation in a piping system to shut off or
pass through media within the allowable pressure and
temperature limits. The maximum operating time is 25
years.
WARNING
Installation of the valve
Incorrect installation of the valves can cause
serious injury
The ventilating valve Type 595 and the
ventilating and bleed valve Type 591 must
be installed so that the arrow on the valve
housing points upwards.
586
WARNING
Connections
Only identical materials may be joined together via welded or adhesive joints. Noncompliance can lead to serious injuries.
Sections of pipework with adhesive joints
should be rinsed with non-pressurized water as soon as possible after completion of
the joints.
The union nuts on the valve should be
tightened hand tight.
Ventilating valve type 595 with solvent cement spigots metric
Graph
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Union nut
Connecting part
O-ring
Screw-in ring
Sealing ring
Back-up ring
Float
Spring (type 595)
Housing
Cap
Spigot
Dimensions ventilating valve type 595

Ventilating valve type 595 with solvent cement sockets metric
DN
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
129
14
20
15
50
139
16
25
20
58
160
19
32
25
68
172
22
40
32
84
193
26
50
40
97
215
31
63
50
124
249
38
75
65
166
284
44
90
80
200
300
52
110
100
238
340
61
Ventilating valve type 595 with solvent cement sockets Inch BS

d
DN
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
118
14
20
15
50
124
16
25
20
58
142
19
32
25
68
157
22
40
32
84
179
26
inch
DN
50
40
97
197
31
mm
mm
mm
mm
63
50
124
229
38
10
50
118
16
75
65
166
258
45
15
50
124
18
90
80
200
277
52
20
58
142
21
110
100
238
320
64
25
68
157
24
32
84
179
29
40
97
197
30
50
124
229
36
65
166
258
45
80
200
277
51
100
238
320
64
587
Ventilating valve type 595 with solvent cement

sockets, inch ASTM incl. 2 threaded sockets NPT
Ventilating- and bleed valve type 591 with solvent

cement spigots metric
NPT
DN
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
DN
closest
10
50
111
19
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
15
50
119
23
16
10
50
129
14
20
58
137
25
20
15
50
139
16
25
68
152
28
25
20
58
160
19
32
84
176
31
32
25
68
172
22
40
97
193
35
40
32
84
193
26
50
124
229
38
50
40
97
215
31
65
166
258
45
63
50
124
249
38
80
200
277
48
75
65
166
284
44
100
238
320
58
90
80
200
300
52
110
100
238
340
61
Dimensions ventilating- and bleed valve type

591
cement sockets metric
DN
closest
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
16
10
50
118
14
20
15
50
124
16
25
20
58
142
19
32
25
68
157
22
40
32
84
179
26
50
40
97
197
31
63
50
124
229
38
75
65
166
258
45
90
80
200
277
52
110
100
238
320
64
588

cement sockets Inch BS
inch
DN
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
118
16
15
50
124
18
20
58
142
21
25
68
157
24
32
84
179
29
40
97
197
30
50
124
229
36
65
166
258
45
80
200
277
51
100
238
320
64

cement sockets Inch ASTM incl. 2 threaded sockets NPT

NPT
DN
inch
mm
mm
mm
mm
10
50
111
19
15
50
119
23
20
58
137
25
25
68
152
28
32
84
176
31
40
97
193
35
50
124
229
38
65
166
258
45
80
200
277
48
100
238
320
58

Technical data
Pressure-temperature diagram of type 595, 591
Air volume diagram

v velocity (m/s)
Vvolumetric flow rate (m/h)

589
Opening conditions of type 595

DN
Differential pressurefor
take-off ofcone
(mm)
(bar)
10
0.028
15
0.028
20
0.03
25
0.03
32
0.035
40
0.04
50
0.05
65
0.06
80
0.06
100
0.06

Maintenance
The automatic operation of the valve needs maintenance to ensure problem-free functioning.
Maintenance intervall Maintenance activity
Periodical
Check function
Periodical
Check that valve is leak-proof
At least 1 x per year
Visual inspection of functional components, float Check for mechanical

damage and freedom of movement
590
Float valves type V140

Overview
Product description
The V140 float valves are used to automatically control

the supply to tanks and vessels. In this way, a constant
level can be maintained. The V140 float valve is fastened to the vessel wall at thedesired level and connected to the supply line. Whenthe fluid level rises, the float
is lifted and closes thevalve via the lever arm. When the
fluid level sinks, thesupply line is opened and the medium can enter untilthe respective level is reached again.
Versions
Float valve V140 DN10 - 80
Product features
Optimal level control without auxiliary energy

Robust and low-maintenance design
Operational safety thanks to integrated seat seal
Lever ratio
standard1:10
on request 1:7 for tight installation space
Overview
General
Type
V140
Dimension DN
10 - 80
Pressure range PN
PVC
PP
Connections
Spigot
Flange
On request
Seal materials
EPDM
FPM (Viton)
Standards
DIN/ISO
vertical
591
Graph
Dimensions
da
DN
SD
SH
Lever
1:10
Lever
1:7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
45
120
80
36
380
305
14
270
125
130
20
15
45
120
80
36
380
305
16
270
125
130
25
20
65
160
110
50
530
430
19
340
200
170
32
25
65
165
110
50
530
430
22
345
200
170
40
32
90
210
130
65
720
575
26
440
225
210
50
40
90
215
130
65
720
575
31
445
225
210
63
50
130
255
160
86
975
775
38
595
315
290
75
65
130
260
160
86
975
775
44
600
315
290
90
80
150
290
180
101
1140
905
51
640
355
340
592
Throttle valves type V251

Overview
Product description
Throttle valves are used wherever fluids or gases need

to be throttled in pipelines. The compact design, simple
and robust construction and good control characteristics
ensure high operational safety. A spindle with cone narrows down the cross section of the opening in the housing, thereby restricting the volume flow to the desired
value. The setting must be done with a tool (screwdriver or flat material) which has the advantage that the set
value cannot be changed unintentionally.
Versions
Throttle valve V251
Product features
Good chemical resistance due to highly resistant plastics (PVC, PP, PVDF)
Requires practically no maintenance and can be installed in any position
High operational safety thanks to compact and robust
construction
Good control characteristics from 0 to max. volume
Overview
General
Type
V251
Dimension DN
10 - 50
Pressure range PN
10
PVC-U
PP
PVDF
Seal materials
EPDM / FPM
Working temperature
PVC-U
0 to + 60 C
PP
0 to + 80 C
PVDF
-20 to + 100 C
593
Graph
Exploded view
1
2
3
4
5
6
Housing
Spindle
Cap
Seal
Stop ring
O-ring
Dimensions
da
DN
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
16
10
47
57
45
29
20
15
55
66
51
35
25
20
66
80
62.5
40
32
25
80
96
74.5
47
40
32
100
111
86
56
50
40
120
133
101
70
63
50
146
158
118
88
594
Technical data
Performance diagram for throttle valve V251
595
To dimension the nominal diameter, we recommend

using the given values with a half opened throttle
sleeve.
Example:
Pressure upstream: 3 bar
Desired flow: 2000 l/hr
According to the diagram for DN25, the flow is 2000 l/h
when the adjusting screw is opened 2 revolutions. The
nominal diameter of DN25 is a good choice.
l/h
flow volume Water
revolutions
Flow volumes in pipelines
Nom. diam.
Area of
2.0 m/s
nom. diam.
2.5 m/s
mm
inch
mm
l/hr
l/min
l/hr flow volume at a velocity of v =

Nominal diameter
Area of
3.0 m/s
nom. diam.
10
1/8"
78.5
565
9.4
mm
inch
mm
15
"
176.6
1267
21.1
10
1/8"
78.5
848
706
20
"
314.0
2261
37.7
15
"
176.6
1901
1584
25
1"
490.6
3528
58.8
20
"
314.0
3391
2826
32
1 "
803.8
5782
96.4
25
1"
490.6
5292
4410
40
1 "
1256.0
9043
150.7
32
1 "
803.8
8672
7227
50
2"
1962.5
14126
235.4
40
1 "
1256.0
13565
11304
65
2 "
3316.6
23875
397.9
50
2"
1962.5
21190
17658
80
3"
5024.0
36173
602.9
65
2 "
3316.6
35813
29844
100
4"
7850.0
56520
942.0
80
3"
5024.0
54259
45216
125
5"
12265.6
88308
1471.8
100
4"
7850.0
84780
70650
150
6"
17662.5
127166
2119.4
125
5"
12265.6
132462
110385
150
6"
17662.5
190750
158958
596
Nom. diam.
1.8 m/s
1.6 m/s
1.4 m/s
509
452
396
"
1140
1014
887
20
"
2035
1809
1583
25
1"
3175
2822
2470
32
1 "
5203
4626
4047
40
1 "
8139
7235
6330
50
2"
12714
11301
9888
65
2 "
21488
19100
16713
80
3"
32556
28938
25321
100
4"
50868
45216
39564
125
5"
79477
70646
61816
150
6"
114450
107733
89017
Nominal diameter
1.2 m/s
1.0 m/s
0.5 m/s
mm
inch
10
1/8"
339
283
141
15
"
760
634
317
20
"
1357
1130
565
25
1"
2117
1764
882
32
1 "
3469
2891
1445
40
1 "
5426
4522
2261
50
2"
8476
7063
3532
65
2 "
14325
11938
5969
80
3"
21704
18086
9043
100
4"
33912
28260
14130
125
5"
52985
44154
22077
150
6"
76300
63583
31792
mm
inch
10
1/8"
15
Q = flow volume (m/h)

F = area (of nominal diameter m)
v = velocity (m/s)
Q = F x 3600 x v = m/h
F = Q / (v x 3600) = m
v = Q / (F x 3600) = m/s
The nominal diameter of our valves can be
determined on the basis of this table. We
recommend not to exceed a velocity of 2.0
m/s.
597
598
Special fittings

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
Page
600
601
602
605
605
609
609
599
Special fittings
Variable area flow meter short version

Overview
Product description
Variable area flow meters from GF Piping Systems are

radially installed dismountable meters for flow measuring in industrial piping applications. A variable area flow
meter consists of a conical tube that is passed by the
medium from bottom to top. In this cone, there is a vertically moving float. With the flow meters of type 355
and type 350 as well as the series SK short version and
the special versions out of PVDF, Georg Fischer offers
you radially detachable measuring devices for flow measurement in industrial pipeline construction. Without any
energy source, these instruments provide you with reliable and accurate measuring values. Different installation lengths and various materials as well as the special versions offer optimum solutions for a broad range
of applications in different types of media.
Variable area flow meter special version
Versions
Variable area flow meter type 350
Product features
The on-site display requires no auxiliary power

Cost effective to measure the flow rate
Break-proof and corrosion-resistant
Accessories like sensor 4-20 mA and limit contacts
Guiding rod from DN50 for stabilisation of float within
volume flow
Low pressure loss
Can be used for liquids and gases
Volume and % scale as standard
Variable area flow meter type 335
600
Overview
General
Type
335/350
Short version
Special version
Dimension DN
25-65
10-25
25-65
Pressure range PN
10
10
10
Nominal pressure
10
10
10
Materials
Measuring tube
Polyamid, Polysulfone, Polysulfone, PVC-U

PVDF and PVCU trans- transparent
parent
Polysulfone, PVDF
Float
PTFE, PVDF
PVDF
PTFE, PVDF
End stops
PVDF
PVDF
PVDF
Union
PVC-U (PP,
PVDF,ABS), otheron
request
PVC-U
PVDF
O-ring
EPDM (FPM)
EPDM
FPM
Guiding rod
V4A (316), Peek, V4A

(316) PVDF coated
Accessories
Limit contactsGK10/
GK11
4-20 mA Sensor Type

GK 15
Safety information
CAUTION
Disregarding the application area
Minor injuries and material damage by violating the permitted uses of the VAFM
Use VAFM only in prescribed areas of operation.
VAFM are not recommended for media containing solids.
The allowable pressure range for

all allowable temperatures for every
housing material is illustrated in diagrams in the Georg Fischer Planning Fundamentals (Chapter: Special valves). This documentation also
contains the "Chemical Resistance
List" for the different types of valve
materials.
WARNING
Disregarding the intended use
Serious injury by ignoring the intended use
Compliance with the stated limits for pressure and temperature and chemical resistance.
NOTICE
Flow conditions
To avoid unstable flow conditions, a damping zone is to be considered before and after the float type flow meter.
To convert the units of flow for the variable
area flow meter, please refer to the conversion table "Delivery volume" in the Appendix of the planning fundamentals.
DANGER
Pressure surges
Death or serious injury due to the occurrence
of pressure surges.
Avoid pressure surges
Only use appropriate media.
601
Graph
Exploded view
Pos.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9*
10**
Measuring tube
Float
Bottom insert
Top insert
Union nut
Valve end
O-ring
Flow value indicator
Limit contact
Guiding rod
* optional
** only for DN50 (1500-15000 l/h) and DN65
(all metering ranges)
602
Dimensions
Type 355
Measuring
range
L1
L2
l/h
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
50 - 500
58
385
341
335
100 - 1000
58
385
341
335
150 - 1500
72
393
341
335
250 - 2500
72
393
341
335
200 - 2000
83
403
341
335
300 - 3000
83
403
341
335
600 - 6000
83
403
341
335
600 - 6000
101
417
341
335
1000 - 10000
101
417
341
335
1500 - 15000
101
417
341
335
2000 - 20000
135
429
341
335
3000 - 30000
135
429
341
335
8000 - 60000
135
429
341
335
Measuring
range
L1
L2
l/h
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
50 - 500
58
400
356
350
100 - 1000
58
400
356
350
150 - 1500
72
408
356
350
250 - 2500
72
408
356
350
200 - 2000
83
418
356
350
300 - 3000
83
418
356
350
600 - 6000
83
418
356
350
600 - 6000
101
432
356
350
1000 - 10000
101
432
356
350
1500 - 15000
101
432
356
350
2000 - 20000
135
444
356
350
3000 - 30000
135
444
356
350
8000 - 60000
135
444
356
350
Type 350
603
Short version float in PVDF without magnet

Type
L1
L2
Rp
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
SK 50
35
199
171
165
SK 51
35
199
171
165
SK 52
35
199
171
165
SK 60
43
223
191
185
SK 61
43
223
191
185
SK 62
43
223
191
185
SK 70
60
250
206
200
SK 71
60
250
206
200
SK 72
60
250
206
200
SK 73
60
250
206
200
Type
L1
L2
Rp
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
SK 500
35
199
171
165
SK 510
35
199
171
165
SK 520
35
199
171
165
SK 600
43
223
191
185
SK 610
43
223
191
185
SK 620
43
223
191
185
SK 700
60
250
206
200
SK 710
60
250
206
200
SK 720
60
250
206
200
SK 730
60
250
206
200
Short version float in PVDF with magnet
Special version PVDF-HP float in PTFE without magnet
604
Type
L2
Rp
mm
mm
mm
inch
SK 70
60
318
200
SK 71
60
318
200
SK 73
60
318
200
SK 20
83
466
335
SK 21
83
466
335
SK 30
103
472
335
SK 31
103
472
335
SK 40
122
495
335
SK 41
122
495
335
Special version PVDF float in PVDF (red) without magnet

Type
L (IR-SS)
L1
L2
Rp
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
inch
SK 10
60
385
443
341
335
SK 11
60
385
443
341
335
SK 20
83
403
459
341
335
SK 21
83
403
459
341
335
SK 30
103
417
461
339
335
SK 31
103
417
461
339
335
SK 40
122
429
453
341
335
SK 41
122
429
453
341
335
Technical features
Technical data
Mode of operation
Pressure loss of type 335 / 350
If a medium flows at a sufficient flow rate upwards

through the vertically mounted taper tube, the float is
raised to the point at which a state of equilibrium sets in
between the lifting force of the medium and the weight
of the float. Since the mean flow rate is proportional to
the quantity flowing through per unit of time, this state of
equilibrium corresponds to the measurement of the current flow rate.
Measuring range [l/h]
Pressure loss [mbar]
50 - 500
22.84
100 - 1000
22.84
150 - 1500
22.84
250 - 2500
22.84
200 - 2000
24.99
300 - 3000
24.99
600 - 6000
24.99
1000 - 10000
24.99
1500 - 15000
28.23
2000 - 20000
45.67
3000 - 30000
45.67
8000 - 60000
47.24
Accuracy of measurement
Measuring accuracy VDE/VDI 3513 accuracy class 4, 1 %
of final value 3 % of measured value
Calibrated scales
The standard version comes witha printed on double

scale: a percentage scale and a scale giving flow rate
(H2O l/h). The special scales come as a sticker and
need to befitted to a blank taper tube. The scales are
printed with a special hard wearing paint.
Standard scale: l/h
Special scales: m/h, GPM
Special scales for: HCl 30-33%, NaOH 30%, NaOH
50% and air
Flow rate %
Total measurement error in %
Total measurement error from final value in%
10
13.00
1.3
20
8.00
1.6
30
6.33
1.9
40
5.50
2.2
50
5.00
2.5
60
4.67
2.9
70
4.43
3.1
80
4.25
3.4
90
4.11
3.7
100
4.00
4.0
Temperature range
To determinethe maximum internal pressure at high

temperatures, we refer you to our material-related pressure-temperature diagrams for reference values.
605
Measuring tube
Union
Max. temperature
at 1 bar
PVC-U
PVC-U
0 to 60 C
PA
PVC-U
0 to 60 C
PSU
PVC-U
0 to 60 C
PSU
PVDF
0 to 90 C
PVDF
PVDF
0 to 100 C
Chemical resistance
Chemical
PVC-U
PA
PSU PVDF Peek
V4A (316)
Acid
Phosphoric acid
H3PO4
75%
Sulfuric acid
H2SO4
<90%
Nitric acid
HNO3
<55%
Nitric acid
HNO3
67%
Hydrofluoric acid
HF
<70%
Hydrochloric acid
HCl
36%
Base
Ammonia
NH4OH
25%
Caustic potash
KOH
>50%
Caustic soda
NaOH
<50%
Anorganica
Ferric chloride
FeCl3
Sodium hydrochloride
NaOCl
15%
Sodium bisulfite
NaHSO
3
<40%
Hydrogen peroxide
H2O2
35%
aqueous inorganic sline solutions (not oxidizing)
till saturation
Organica
Formic acid
HCOOH
85%
Acetic acid
CH3
COOH
85%
Formaldehyde
H2CO
<40%
Glycol
<50%
Acetone
undiluted
Ethanol, methanol
undiluted
Aliphatic hydrocarbons
undiluted
Valid for 40C and 2bar
X: recommended O: with limitations
-: not recommended
For higher or lower concentrations than mentioned in the list or entry "O", please contact gss@georgfischer.com
606
Temperature correction table for gases
Calibrating temperature (C)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Operating
1.018
1.035
1.052
1.07
1.088
1.103
1.12
1.135
temperature
10
0.983
1.018
1.035
1.051
1.068
1.084
1.1
1.116
(C)
20
0.965
0.983
1.015
1.032
1.05
1.065
1.08
1.096
30
0.948
0.966
0.983
1.015
1.031
1.047
1.062
1.08
40
0.933
0.95
0.967
0.984
1.015
1.031
1.046
1.061
50
0.92
0.936
0.953
0.968
0.984
1.015
1.03
1.045
60
0.905
0.922
0.938
0.953
0.968
0.985
1.015
1.03
70
0.892
0.907
0.924
0.94
0.955
0.97
0.985
1.014
80
0.88
0.895
0.912
0.927
0.943
0.965
0.971
0.987
Please use this chart to adjust the displayed values for

gaseous media of your flow meter, if the operating temperature differs from the underlying temperature of 20C
at calibrating time.
Example:
Calibrating temperature is 20C and operating temperature is 70C. Take the factor 0.924 from the calibrating temperature column for 20C and the operating temperature line 70C. The values shown by the flow meter have to be multiplied by this factor, so the actual flow
volume at an operating temperature of 70C can be calculated. You get the factor with the following formula:
Tc= calibrating temperature

To= operating temperature
Note:
Operating temperature >calibrating temperature:
Factor<1
Operating temperature<calibrating temperature:
Factor >1
Density correction table for gases
Gases for calibration
Operating
gases
[kg/Nm3]
Air
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Ammonia
Acetylene
Chlorine
Air
1.293
1.000
1.050
0.983
0.772
0.953
1.580
Oxygen
1.429
0.953
1.000
0.935
0.735
0.906
1.500
Nitrogen
1.251
1.017
1.069
1.000
0.786
0.968
1.604
Ammonia
0.771
1.295
1.360
1.272
1.000
1.232
2.040
Acetylene
1.171
1.050
1.105
1.033
0.812
1.000
1.660
Chlorine
3.220
0.633
0.665
0.623
0.490
0.603
1.000
Hydrogen
0.089
3.810
4.010
3.750
2.940
3.630
6.020
Carbon dioxide
1.977
0.808
0.850
0.796
0.625
0.770
1.275
Sulphur dioxide
2.926
0.668
0.698
0.654
0.514
0.633
1.050
Coal gas
0.550
1.532
1.610
1.506
1.185
1.460
2.420
Propane
2.020
0.800
0.841
0.786
0.618
0.762
1.262
607
Operating
gases
Gases for calibration
Carbon
Sulphur
[kg/Nm ]
Hydrogen
dioxide
dioxide
Coal gas
Propane
Air
1.293
0.262
1.238
1.495
0.652
1.250
Oxygen
1.429
0.250
1.175
1.430
0.621
1.189
Nitrogen
1.251
0.267
1.255
1.530
0.664
1.272
Ammonia
0.771
0.340
1.600
1.946
0.845
1.620
Acetylene
1.171
0.276
1.300
1.580
0.685
1.314
Chlorine
3.220
0.166
0.785
0.953
0.413
0.792
Hydrogen
0.089
1.000
4.715
5.725
2.480
4.760
Carbon dioxide
1.977
0.212
1.000
1.216
0.528
1.010
Sulphur dioxide
2.926
0.174
0.823
1.000
0.433
0.830
Coal gas
0.550
0.403
1.895
2.306
1.000
1.915
Propane
2.020
0.210
0.990
1.205
0.522
1.000
Please use this table to adjust the displayed values for gaseous media of your flow meter, if the specific media gravity differs from the underlying specific gravity of 1.293 kg/Nm3 (air)) at calibrating time.
Example:
Specific gravity at calibrating time is 1.293 kg/Nm (air).
The media hydrogen with its specific gravity of 0.089
kg/Nm has to be measured. From the column calibrating gases/air, in line seven for operating gases/hydrogen, you obtain the factor 3.81. The values shown by
the flow meter have to be multiplied by this factor, so
the actual flow volume at a specific gravity of 0.089 kg/
Nm can be calculated.
3
Note:
Operating gas density>calibrating gas density:
Factor <1
Operating gas density <calibrating gas density:
Factor >1
Density correction table for liquids
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
Density
0.5
1.105
1.2
1.29
1.38
1.464
1.545
1.63
Operating
0.6
0.903
1.084
1.168
1.248
1.32
1.397
1.475
liquid
0.7
0.834
0.923
1.078
1.15
1.22
1.29
1.36
0.8
0.775
0.856
0.928
1.066
1.133
1.196
1.262
0.9
0.724
0.802
0.87
0.937
1.06
1.12
1.18
1.0
0.683
0.755
0.818
0.883
0.94
1.055
1.114
1.1
0.645
0.715
0.771
0.836
0.892
0.946
1.055
1.2
0.613
0.678
0.735
0.793
0.845
0.896
0.947
1.3
0.585
0.648
0.7
0.755
0.807
0.857
0.903
0.955
1.4
0.56
0.62
0.671
0.723
0.773
0.82
0.865
0.913
1.5
0.537
0.595
0.645
0.695
0.743
0.787
0.832
0.877
1.6
0.515
0.57
0.618
0.665
0.712
0.755
0.798
0.84
1.7
0.496
0.548
0.595
0.641
0.685
0.726
0.767
0.81
1.8
0.478
0.538
0.574
0.617
0.66
0.7
0.74
0.78
1.9
0.462
0.511
0.555
0.597
0.638
0.676
0.715
0.755
2.0
0.446
0.495
0.536
0.578
0.617
0.654
0.691
0.73
608
Density of calibrating solution (kg/l)

Float material PVDF
Density of calibrating solution (kg/l)

Float material PVDF
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Density
0.5
1.71
1.785
1.86
0.94
2.02
2.09
2.16
2.24
Operating
0.6
1.545
1.615
1.68
0.754
1.82
1.89
1.95
2.02
liquid
0.7
1.425
1.49
1.55
1.615
1.68
1.745
18
1.865
0.8
1.325
1.38
1.43
1.5
1.56
1.62
1.67
1.73
0.9
1.24
1.295
1.35
1.405
1.46
1.515
1.57
1.62
1.0
1.17
1.22
1.27
1.325
1.375
1.43
1.48
1.53
1.1
1.106
1.155
1.2
1.255
1.3
1.35
1.4
1.45
1.2
1.05
1.095
1.14
1.19
1.235
1.28
1.33
1.37
1.3
1.044
1.088
1.134
1.176
1.22
1.264
1.305
1.4
0.958
1.042
1.085
1.13
1.17
1.21
1.25
1.5
0.92
0.96
1.042
1.084
1.125
1.16
1.205
1.6
0.882
0.92
0.958
1.04
1.08
1.11
1.15
1.7
0.848
0.886
0.923
0.961
1.038
1.072
1.11
1.8
0.817
0.853
0.888
0.926
0.962
1.032
1.07
1.9
0.79
0.826
0.858
0.897
0.93
0.968
1.034
2.0
0.798
0.798
0.83
0.867
0.9
0.935
0.965
Please use this chart to adjust the displayed values for liquid media of your flow meter, if the specific media gravity
differs from the underlying specific gravity of 1.0 kg/l (water) at calibrating time.
Example:
Specific gravity at calibration 1.0 kg/l (water). The liquid media with a specific gravity of 0.9 kg/l is to be measured. If you have a calibrating solution of 1.0 kg/l, you
can find the factor 1.06 in column 5 under operating liquid density 0.9kg/l. The values shown by the flow meter have to be multiplied by this factor so the actual flow
volume at a specific gravity of 0.9 can be calculated.
Note:
New density is higher: factor<1
Newdensity is lower : factor >1

Accurate reading
The top edge of the float with
the largest diameter indicates the flow volume. If special scales are applied subsequently, it must be ascertained that the scale marking
><is affixed congruently with
the one on the taper tube.
Accessories
Limit contacts
Variable area flow meters from GF Piping Systems are

equipped with two dovetail shafts. For external electrical monitoring, these can be used for fitting magnetically
actuated limit contacts.
609
Function of the limit contact (GK)
The limit contacts serve for monitoring externally the limited flow values and
can be adjusted to any flow value on the corresponding scale. The magnet
built into the float closes or opens a reed contact in the limit contact.
When subsequently mounting limit contacts, mind that you have to replace the
standard float with a magnetic float.
The limit contacts GK10/ GK11 are only suitable for the VAFM type 335/ 350
as well as the short version of the existing range. The same contact type
cannot be used for monitoring both the min. and max. levels. (GK 10min /
GK11max)
Technical data of limit contacts
Sensor GK15 was developed from the measurement sensor

GK05. Other than the old model, no reed-sensors are used
for the production of the GK15, but a special and new developed electronic system with microprocessor and sensors.
The sensor provides an output signal of 4 - 20 mA, according to the level setting of the magnetic float in the flow meter.
This signal could be used by a PLC to control processes or
to show the precise flow-rate on an external display.
Since the resolution of the scales differs in
the settings, the sensor is programmed individually for each measurement range exworks. Therefore, you need to identify
your required measurement range when
you place the order.
Connection: Standard plug DIN 40050

Contact fitted: Reed contact
Protection class: IP 65
Max. voltage: 230 V
Max. continuous current: 0.2 A
Peak switch-on current: 0.5 A
Technical data to sensor GK 15
For use with inductive loads, use a relay to

protect the contacts
Technical data
Supply voltage:
12-24 VDC (+ - 10%)
Current consumption:
<50 mA
Load resistor:
Min. 0 max. 500
Position of float in relation to limit contacts:
Current output:
4-20 mA (3 wire)
Top
Bottom
Safety class:
IP65
max. contact(GK11)
closed
open
Ambient temperature:
0 C to +50 C
min. contact(GK10)
open
closed
Connection:
Plug DIN 43650
Measurement accuracy:
<1%
Contact function
The contacts remain in these positions, even if the float

leaves the corresponding contact. When the float moves
back to the desired position, the corresponding contact
is deactivated.
4-20 mA Sensor Type GK 15

Description
610
Pin1:
Supply voltage 12-24 V
Pin2:
Output signal 4-20 mA
Pin3:
0V
Dimensions
Function elements GK 15
A:
GF Flow meter M335 / M350 with

magnetic float
B:
Sensor GK15
C:
Cable plug
D:
Guide rail
E:
Clamping screws, for fastening and

sensor adjustment
611
612
Fundamentals for actuators of hand valves
Specific data of actuators
-- Electric actuators
-- Pneumatic Actuators
-- Electromagnetic Actuators
-- Actuator - valve combinations
-- Operating diagram FC, FO, DA
-- Stroke limiter
-- Actuator interface per EN ISO 5211
-- General safety information for actuators
-- Troubleshooting
Electric Actuator EA11

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Setting up the actuator
Electric Actuators EA21/31/42

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Setting up the actuator
-- Accessories
Pneumatic Actuators PA11/21

-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
Pneumatic Actuators PA30 to PA90
Page
615
617
618
618
620
620
620
621
622
623
623
623
624
625
626
627
627
627
629
631
631
632
633
634
634
634
636
636
637
-- Overview
-- Graph
-- Technical data
-- Accessories
638
638
638
641
643
644
Pneumatic Actuator for DIASTAR
646
Accessories for electric actuators
-- Heating element
-- Reset unit
-- Additional limit switches (Ag-Ni, Au, NPN,PNP)
-- Limit switch kit middle position
-- Monitoring print with cycle time module, running time monitoring, current monitoring, cycle counter
-- Position signalisation
-- Positioner PE25
-- Testing adapter for RS232 interface
-- AS interface
647
647
649
651
652
656
657
660
663
613

Accessories for pneumatic actuators
-- 3/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV 94/95

-- 3/2 - 5/2-way pilot solenoid valve MNL532
-- 4/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV5470
-- Namur connector plate
-- Pilot valve cluster PV2000
-- Electropneumatic positioner DSR500
-- Stroke limiter/Emergency manual override for DIASTAR
-- Electrical position indicator ER52/53
-- Electrical position indicator type ER 55
-- AS interface
PID controller type PE70
-- Basics
-- PE70-1/ -2
-- PE70-3/ -4
614
Page
664
668
669
669
669
674
682
683
688
689
690
693
697
Fundamentals for actuators of

hand valves
Specific data of actuators
Electric actuators
Advantages
Ease of installation
Well defined performance
No energy consumption in switching pauses
Intermediate position possible
Easy to maintain

Relatively high cost
Characteristics
Low maintenance costs
Long cycle time
Additional equipment necessary for defined end positions
EA 11
EA 21
EA 31
EA42
General
Nominal torque[Mdn]
10
10
60
100
Peak torque
20
20
120
250
Duty cycleED @ 25
C/15 min
40%
100%
50%
35%
Tested cycles(at 20 C
and Mdn)
150000
250000
100000
75000
Cycle times/90 at Mdn 5
15
25
L/W/H [mm]
129/455/138
150/122/167
150/122/190
150/122/208
ISO 5211:
F05
F05
F07
F07
WS
14/11
14/11
17
22
Protection class
IP 65/67
IP 65/67
Combination
Ball valve546 (DN10DN50)
Type 107
Type 130ff.
optional on request
Type 130ff.
Ball valve 543
Type 185/188
Butterfly valve567/568
optional on request
Type 140/141
DN50-DN150
Type 140/141
DN200 @ 10bar;
DN250 @ 6bar;
DN300 @ 4bar
Butterfly valve 037
DN50-DN80
DN100-DN200
Conditions
Necessary electrical connections available (electricity,...), appropriate ambient

temperature, maximum humidity, pollution degree
Accessories
Fail-safe return with

battery
Crank (for emergency

manual override)
Cover screw (from

emergency manual
override)
Heating element
Heating element + failsafe return with battery
Adapter set for F05

(WS14/11)
Adapter WS14 for F05
615
Reduction sleeve
WS11 for F05
Battery (spare part)
Plug set
Monitoring print
Cycle time
extension(Vario)
Cycle time monitoring
Cycle counter
Motor current monitoring
Position signalisation
Positioner PE25
Positioner galvanically
isolated
Test adapter kit for

RS232 interface
Adapter set for F05

WS14/11
Adapter WS14 for F05
Reduction sleeve
WS11 for F05
Battery set
Plug set
Limit switch kit Ag-Ni
Limit switch kit Au
Limit switch kit PNP
Limit switch kit NPN
Installation set for 4 lim-

it switches
Limit switch kit middle

position
Fail-safe return with

battery
616
Pneumatic Actuators
Advantages
Low cost
Performance on variable pressure control
Easy to maintain
Stroke limiter (to change manually)
Flow control is possible with additional elements
Characteristics
Control valve necessary
Compressed air required
Position feedback for additional elements necessary
Intermediate positions require more effort
PA 11
PA 21
PA30-90
General
Nominal torque[Mdn]
10
4 - 1920
Peak torque
10
20
8 - 3840
Tested cycles (at 20 C 250000

and Mdn)
250000
Cycle times/90 at Mdn 5
0.5 - 4
L/W/H [mm]
194/54/74
224/58/94
177/55.5/87 - 918/180/
241
ISO 5211
F04
F05
F03 - F16
WS
11
14/11
Operating pressure
max.
7 bar (101 psi)
7 bar (101 psi)
Working principle
Rack and pinion
Scotch-yoke
Combination
Type 230
Type 230
Type 230
Ball valve 543
Type 285
Type 285
Butterfly valve567/568
Type 240/241-242
Conditions
Compressed air available, appropriate ambient temperature, specified humidity, control medium (neutral, non-aggressive gases), max. actuation
pressure
Accessories
Emergency manual
override DN10 - 25
Emergency manual
override DN32 - 50
Namur connector plate
Pilot solenoid valve

type PV94/95 (3/2way)

+
type MNL532 (3/2 - 5/2way)

type MNL5470 (4/2way)

type PV2000 (for valve
clusters)
Digital positioner type

DSR201
617
Namur mounting console
2 additional limit switch- +

es Ag-Ni 250V/10V

es NPN 10 - 30V/0.1A

es PNP 10 - 30V/0.1A

es Namur 5 - 24V

es EExd 250V/5A

es 30V = max. 1 - 100
mA
Adapter set for F04

WS11 (PA11)
Adapter set for F04

WS14/11 (PA21)
Electromagnetic Actuators
Advantages
High switching frequency
Easy to maintain
Characteristics
Maximum operating pressure 6 bar
Maximum operating pressure / differential pressure of

pending DN
Permanent demand for electricity in the open position
Sensitive against solids when servo-controlled
Flow control requires high effort
General
Duty cycleED @ 25C/15min
100%
Voltage tolerance
+/- 10%
Supply voltage
24 V DC, 24 V / 50 Hz, 110 / 230 V / 50 Hz
Combination
Diaphragm valveDIASTAR Sixteen
Diaphragm valveDIASTAR Ten
Diaphragm valveDIASTAR Six
Diaphragm valveDIASTAR Ten +
Actuator - valve combinations

The EA family of actuatorsis designed to fit GF valves
as well as standard valves.
The electric rotary actuator EA11/21/31/42 can be
mounted e. g. on ballvalves and butterfly valves. In
case emergency manual override is needed, you have
to use a suitable adapter.
618
Actuator
Type / Standards
Ball valve/Butterfly valve
Material
EA 11
Type 107 metric
Ball valve 546 DN10 - 50
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS, PP-H,

PVDF
EA 21
Type 130 metric
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS
Type 131 metric
PP-H
Type 132 metric
PVDF
Type 133 ANSI

PVDF
Type 134 BS

PVDF
Type 135 JIS

PVDF
EA 31
Type 130, 131, 133 - 135
Ball valve 546 DN 65-100
EA 21
Type 175 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS
Type 176 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PP-H
Type 177 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PVDF
Type 178 vertical
Ball valve 343
PVC-C
EA31/42
for DN200
Type 140 wafer
Butterfly valve 567

PVDF
Type 141 lug
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
Type 142 lug ANSI
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
Type 143 lug JIS
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
The actuators are supplied ex works in the open position. Both end positions in the actuator have been
preset in the factory. It might benecessary to readjust
these after installation at the customer (see section
Setting Up the Actuator).
Actuator
Type / Standards
Ball valve/Butterfly valve
Material
PA11 up to DN25
Type 230 metric
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS
PA21 from DN32
Type 231 metric
PP-H
Type 232 metric
PVDF
Type 233 ANSI

PVDF
Type 234 BS

PVDF
Type 235 JIS

PVDF
PA11 up to DN25
Type 275 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PVC-U, PVC-C, ABS
PA21 from DN32
Type 276 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PP-H
Type 277 horizontal
Ball valve 343
PVDF
PA30 - 90
Type 230, 231, 233 - 235
Ball valve 546 DN 65-100
Type 240 wafer
Butterfly valve 567

PVDF
Type 241 lug
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
Type 242 lug ANSI
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
Type 243 JIS
Butterfly valve 568

PVDF
619
Operating diagram FC, FO, DA

For the proper function of the actuator
assembly, it is important that the position of the actuator and valve position
matches. Actuator open - >valve open,
actuator closed ->valve closed.
Fail-safe to
close (FC)1
solenoid valve3/2way de-energized
closed
Actuator interface per EN ISO 5211

In case you would have to fit one of our new actuators
(EA11-21 as well as PA11/21) to a third party valve - we
have the perfect solution. Our electric actuators EA31
and EA42 already fulfil the interface F07 (WS17/22) per
EN ISO 5211. That means it is possible without any extra adapters to fit these actuators to any other valve that
follows the standard EN ISO 5211. A reduction from
WS22 to WS17 is also available if needed. For our actuators EA11 and PA11/21 we have adapters available
that allow a F04 and F05 interface per EN ISO 5211.
Adapter F04 (WS11)
Fail-safe to
open (FO) 1
solenoid valve3/2way de-energized
closed
Double Acting
(DA) 1 solenoid
valve5/2-way (alternative 4/2-way)
Stroke limiter
The stroke limiter is mounted ex works and enables limiting the actuating angle up to 45 alternatively in the
closed or open direction for the FC and FO functions.
For the DA function, limitation is only possible in the
open direction.
620
Adapter F05 (WS14) Reduction sleeve (WS11)
Due to an octagonal in the adapter options are parallel

or diagonal square. For an overview please refer to the
table below.
Interface overview per EN ISO 5211
Actuator
Type
Peak torque(Nm)
Interface
WS
PA 11
10
F04
11
PA 21
20
F05
14/11
PA30PA90
8 - 3840
F03- F16
1116
EA 11
20
F05
14/11
EA 21
20
F05
14/11
EA 31
120
F07
17
EA42
250
F07
22
General safety information for actuators

CAUTION
Intended use
When mounted on a valve and connected to
a system control and provided that the actuator data correspond to the electrical control
and the valve, the purpose of these actuators
is: When not used as prescribed, it can lead
to serious injury or death. Therefore, these
actuators are intended to:
actuate valves withwith 90 pivoting (e.g.
ball valves and butterfly valves),
system control (accessory),
the current position (without accessories).
Please use the emergency manual override or install the fail-safe return unit.
These actuators are not intended for uses other than
those listed above. Non-observance of the instructions
contained in this manual will void the manufacturer's liability for the products mentioned above.
Operator responsibilities
The actuator described herein was designed and manufactured with consideration to the respective harmonised European standards.
It corresponds to the state of art.
WARNING
NOTICE
24 V devices
24 V devices may only be connected to
voltages which fulfill the requirements of a
safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV).
Special hazards
DANGER
Working at the actuator
Under normal conditions, the actuator may
only be operated with the cover closed. If
work is performed on the actuator with the
cover removed, the supply and control voltage must first be disconnected.
Adjustments, which need to be done in the
energized state, should be carried out with
special insulated tools.
DANGER
Instruction manual
Non-observance of the instruction manual
may lead to severe injuries or death.
Furthermore, the operating instructions of
the manual valve must also be observed.
They are an integral component of this
manual.

Duty of care
Failure to heed the duty of care and safety
can lead to serious injury or death. Safety on
the job can, however, only be realised if the
operator warrants that
the actuator is only used as indicated under section "Intended Use",
he is familiar with this instruction manual
and the manual of the corresponding valve
and adheres to the instructions contained
therein and
he has taken the necessary measures
against electrostatic influence.
CAUTION
The actuators must be handled, transported and stored with care. Non-observance
might lead to injuries.Please note the following points:
The actuators must be transported and/or
stored in their unopened original packaging.
The actuators must be protected from
harmful physical influences such as dust,
heat (humidity).
It is important that the connections are neither damaged by mechanical nor thermal
influences.
Prior to installation, the actuators should be
inspected for transport damages. Damaged
actuators must not be installed.
621
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible causes
Remedy
Motor does not

run
No mains voltage
(T 1, 2, 3)
Error on customer's
side
Internal wiring error Check wiring of actuator
Switching cams S1
and S2 incorrectly
set
See section "Setting Up the Actuator" for the corresponding actuator
Motor blocked
Use emergency
manual override,
check valve
Motor only runs in Limit switch defecone direction

tive
Replace replace
limit switches
Overload protection reacts (selfresetting)
Friction torque of
valve too high
Clean and lubricate

valve
Duty cycle too high
Increase cycle time
Reduce ambient
temperature
Valve does not

Switching cams S1
close or open cor- and/or S2 not adrectly
justed
See section "Setting Up the Actuator" of the corresponding actuator
For service please contact the specialist at your GF

sales company.
622

Overview
Product description
The EA 11 is our basic version for the open-close operation in the low torque range.Nominal torque is 10 Nm,
peak torque 20 Nm. Two additional limit switches can
be installed for feedback. The EA 11 can be extended
by a heating element and a reset unit.
Versions
Graph
Exploded view
The standard version of the EA 11 electrical actuator

consists of the following elements:
Gear unit, direct current motor, electrical board, and
components for end position limiting.
For special applications, the actuator can be equipped
additionally with various supplementary kits (see section
"Mounting and Connecting Supplementary Kits").
Type EA 11
Product features
Robust PP-GF housing with very good chemical resistance

Flexible configuration of the actuator thanks to the
modular concept easy handling
Easy handling
Additional safety due to fail-safe unit and battery pack
(optional)
Long life time due to robust design and best electronics
Suitable for universal use due to wide range power
supply and standard interfaces
1 Limit switches S1 and S2

2 Direct current motor
3 Optical position indicator
4 Plug for accessories
5 Terminal strip for external connections max. 1.5 mm
6 Electrical supply unit, without protection against accidental contact
7Shaft for emergency manual override
8 Connections for DIN plug or cable gland
9 Assembly bolt for accessories
Dimensions EA11
Safety information
NOTICE
Installation note
If the actuator is connected directly to the
power supply, it is necessary to install a
switch-disconnector between the actuator
and the power supply (do not disconnect
the earth cable). Cross section of the feed
lines max. 1.5 mm. To avoid water permeation into the actuator, make sure that the
cable entry is not directed upward
Due to the loading of the power supply capacitor, when first time switching on the actuator current peaks can occur for a few
micro seconds. Therefore we recommend
to connect the catuator in accordance with
accompanying wiring diagram.
623
Weight
EA 11
1.857 kg
Technical data
Rated voltage
100 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz

24 V = /24 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated voltage tolerance

Rated output
22 VA at 24 V AC/DC
40 VA at 100 - 230 V AC
Electric impedance
230V , 100 k
24 V, 4.7 k
Altitude (UL/CSA)
<2000m
Protection class
IP 65 per EN 60529 3) UL/

CSA: Indoor use
Power-on time ED
40 % at 25 C/ 15 min
Overload protection
Current/time dependent (resetting) 1)
Connector plug 3 P+ E
According to DIN EN 175301803
additional cable entry point
for PG 11
Nominal torque Mdn
10 Nm
Peak torque
20 Nm
Cycle time
5s/ 90 at Mdn
Actuating angle
Max. 270 , set to 90
Ambient temperature
-10 to + +45 C 2)
Permissible humidity
Max. 80 % up to 31 C 4)
Pollution degree 5)
Overload category
II
Housing material
PP fiberglass reinforced,
flame retardant,external
stainless steel screws
Position indicator
Optical, integrated
Emergency manual override
Integrated
5)
1 Adapter SW14 for F05 198.204.057

2 Reducing sleeve SW11 for F05 198.803.145
624
10 %
Overload protection of the motor is dimensioned so

that the motor and the power supply board are protected. As soon as the load is in the torque range, the actuator runs again.
1)
For temperatures below 10 C as well as condensation, the heating element no. 198 190 086 should be
built in (see section --> Accessories "Heating element)
2)
Protection class IP67, when used with cable glands

and vertical installation.
3)
4)
Linear decreasing to 50 % relative humidity with 40 C.
5)
According to EN 61010-1
Technical features
Connection diagram for standard version
Position indicator
3/2-way
horizontal
vertical
2/2-way
B-C
closed
A-C
open
625
Setting up the actuator
After usage, please screw back on the

screw cover (2) to avoid liquids, humidity or
dust entering the actuator!
NOTICE
Check the following before connecting the
actuator to the mains:
Does the mains voltage correspond to the
specifications given on the typeplate?
Has the actuator been connected correctly? (see section "Wiring Diagram for Standard Version")
Function
Push the crank down to the stop.
With nine revolutions, the ball is rotated by 90 .
Direction of rotation:
Clockwise = CW = close
Counterclockwise = CCW = open
Note the open and closed position on

the optical indicator.
Adjustment
If a complete valve is supplied by GF, no further adjustments are required.
After installation by the customer or after repair work,
the end positions should be checked and if necessary
adjusted.
Limit switch allocation
Switch S1 (bottom) opens at open position
Switch S2 (top) opens at closed position
Procedure
Set both switching cams (1) corresponding to S1
(open, bottom) and S2 (closed, top) so that the rotating angle is less than 90 . Let the actuator turn until a limit switch is activated. By fine adjustment ofthe
respective switching cam, the end position can be set
since the actuator follows the cam.

Assembly and function
Assembly
Pull the crank lever (1) out of the retainer.
Remove screw cover (2) with the crank (1).
Insert the crank in the hexagon shaft under the opening.
626
Disconnect the connector plug.

If that is not possible, pull the crank rapidly
out of the opening.
Electric Actuators EA21/31/42

Overview
Safety information
Product description
NOTICE
The electric actuators EA21, EA31 and EA42 are not

only well equipped with a lot of extras, they also feature very high torques. This enables automating a wide
range of valves.
Installation note
If the actuator is connected directly to the
power supply, it is necessary to install a
switch-disconnector between the actuator
and the power supply (do not disconnect
the earth cable). Cross section of the feed
lines max. 1.5 mm. To avoid water permeation into the actuator, make sure that
the cable entry is not directed upward The
EA21/31/42 has a temperature control
(ready-to-operate monitoring).
Due to the loading of the power supply capacitor, when first time switching on the actuator current peaks can occur for a few
micro seconds. Therefore we recommend
to connect the catuator in accordance with
accompanying wiring diagram.
Interesting accessories: EA21

From the EA21 model and upwards, we offer you a variety of supplementary kits to choose from. Compared to
the basic EA11 model, this actuator indicates operation
readiness and has a duty cycle of 100 %. Also included
in the EA21 range of accessories are cycle time extension, cycle time monitoring, cycle counter, motor current
monitoring, position signalisation and a positioner.
High torques: EA31 and EA42
The EA31 and the EA42 are not only well equipped with
a lot of extras, they also feature very high torques. This
enables automating a wide range of valves. While the
EA31 features a peak torque of up to 120 Nm, the EA42
even goes up to 250 Nm. Both actuators are ideal for all
kinds of control tasks.
Versions
Type EA21 / EA31 / EA42
Graph
Exploded view
The standard version of the EA21/31/42 electric actuator consists of the following elements:
Gear unit, direct current motor, electrical board, and
components for end position limiting.
For special applications, the actuator can be equipped
additionally with various supplementary kits (see section
"Mounting and Connecting Supplementary Kits").
Product features
Robust PP-GF housing with great chemical resistance

Flexible configuration of the actuator thanks to the
modular concept
Easy handling
Numerous options for controlling and monitoring with
intelligent, self-learning accessory
Additional safety due to fail-safe unit and battery pack
(optional)
Long life time due to roust concept and the choice of
best electronic
Suitable for universal use due to wide range power
supply and standard interfaces
Limit switches S1 and S2
Direct current motor
Visual position indicator
Plug for accessories
Terminal strip for external connections max. 1.5 mm
Electrical supply unit, without protection against accidental

contact
Shaft for emergency manual override
Connections for DIN plug or cable gland
Assembly bolt for accessories
627
Dimensions EA21/31/42
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
EA 21
150
82.5
108
64.3
122
16
EA 31
150
82.5
108
64.3
122
16
EA42
150
82.5
108
64.3
122
16
L7
L8
L9
H1
H2
H3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
EA 21
49
33
33
167
20
188.5
EA 31
49
33
33
190
25
211.5
EA42
49
33
33
208
25
229.5
EA21/ F05
EA31/ F07
628
EA42/ F07
Weight
EA 21
2.193 kg
EA 31
3.536 kg
EA42
4.995 kg
Technical data
EA 21
EA 31
EA42
Rated voltage
100 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz
100 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz
100 - 230 V, 50/60 Hz
24V = 24 V, 50/60 Hz
24V = 24 V, 50/60 Hz
24V = 24 V, 50/60 Hz
Rated voltage tolerance
+/-10 %
+/-10 %
+/-10 %
Rated output
22 VA at 24 V AC/DC
40 VA at 100 - 230V AC
32 VA at 24 V AC/DC
40 VA at 100 - 230V AC
40 VA at 24 V AC/DC
60 VA at 100 - 230 V AC
Electric impedance
230V , 100 k
24 V, 4k7
230V , 100 k
24 V, 4k7
230V , 100 k
24 V, 4k7
Altitude (UL/CSA)
<2000m
<2000m
<2000m
Protection class
IP 65 per EN 60529
UL /CSA: Indoor use
IP 65 per EN 60529
UL /CSA: Indoor use
IP 65 3)per EN 60529
UL /CSA: Indoor use
Duty cycle
100 %
50 %
35 %
Overload protection
Current/time dependent (resetting) 1),
Temperature-dependent
Current/time dependent (resetting) 1), Temperature-dependent
Current/time dependent (resetting) 1), Temperature-dependent
Electrical connection Connector plug 3 P+ E

per DIN EN 175301-803,
Cable gland
M20x1.5 per ISO 724
Connector plug 3 P+ E per

DIN EN 175301-803, Cable
gland
M20x1.5 per ISO 724
Connector plug 3 P+ E per

DIN EN 175301-803, Cable
gland
M20x1.5 per ISO 724
Nominal torque Mdn 10 Nm
60 Nm
100 Nm
Peak torque
20 Nm
120 Nm
250 Nm
Actuating angle
Cycle time
5 s/ 90 at Mdn
15 s/ 90 at Mdn
20 s/ 90 at Mdn
Ambient temperature
-10 to + 50 C
-10 to + 50 C
-10 to + 50 C 2)
3)
5)
2)
3)
2)
629
Allowable humidity
Max. 90 % relative humidi- Max. 90 % relative humidity,

non condensing
ty, non condensing
Max. 90 % relative humidity,

non condensing
Pollution degree
Overload - category
II
II
II
Housing material
flame retardant, external
stainless steel screws,
captive
stainless steel screws, captive
stainless steel screws, captive
Position indicator
Optically integrated
Emergency manual
override
Integrated
Integrated
Integrated
4)
4)
Overload protection of the motor is dimensioned so

that the motor and the power supply board are protected. As soon as the load is in the torque range, the actuator runs again.
1)
For temperatures below -10 C as well as condensation, the heating element no. 198 190 086 should be installed (see section "Assembly and Wiring Supplementary Kits" andHeating element)
2)
Protection class IP67, when used with cable glands

and vertical installation.
3)
4)
According to EN 61010-1
5)
Reduced duty cycle for UL certification
630
Technical features
Connection diagram for standard version
Position indicator
3/2-way
horizontal
vertical
2/2-way
B-C
closed
A-C
open

NOTICE
Check the following before connecting the
actuator to the mains:
Does the mains voltage correspond to the
specifications given on the typeplate?
Has the actuator been connected correctly? (see section "Wiring Diagram for Standard Version")
Fuse 6A
Adjustment
If a complete valve is supplied by GF, no further adjustments are required.
After installation by the customer or after repair work,
the end positions should be checked and if necessary
adjusted.
Limit switch allocation
Switch S1 opens at open position
Switch S2 opens at closed position
631
Note the open and closed position on

the optical indicator.
Disconnect the connector plug.

If that is not possible, pull the crank rapidly
out of the opening.

Error message
If an error occurs, the red LED (8) on the base board

will light up. If the monitoring print is installed, the corresponding LED on the BCD switch (10), of which the set
value has been exceeded, will also light up red.
Procedure
Set both switching cams (1) to S1 and S2 so that the rotating angle is less than 90. Let the actuator turn until a limit switch is activated. By fine adjustment ofthe
respective switching cam, the end position can be set
since the actuator follows the cam.

Assembly and function
Assembly
Pull the crank lever (1) out of the retainer.
Remove screw cover (2) with the crank (1).
Insert the crank in the hexagon shaft under the opening.
After usage, please screw back on the
screw cover (2) to avoid liquids, humidity or
dust entering the actuator!
Function
Push the crank down to the stop.
With nine revolutions, the ball is rotated by 90 .
Direction of rotation:
Clockwise = CW = close
Counterclockwise = CCW = open
632
With all occurring error messages the ready-to-operate

signal will be off (terminals 5.6 no passage).
Eliminating the malfunction report
Check the error cause, if necessary carry out the appropriate maintenance.
To eliminate the message, activate the reset switch
(9) on the base board while the supply voltage is
still connected or briefly disconnect the actuator
from the mains voltage.
The two LEDs will go out and the actuator is ready to
operate again.
In case of malfunction the actuator remains in its position (delivery

state).
In case of malfunction the actuator moves to the OPEN position.
In case of malfunction the actuator moves to the CLOSED position.
Accessories
available in the chapter accessories for
electric actuators.
DIP switch in case of error

In case of an error the actuator can be set to the
CLOSED or the OPEN position with the help of the DIP
switch. For this, the DIP switches need to be adjusted
as follows:
DIP1
DIP2
ON
Position of DIP2 effective
Actuator turns to the

OPEN position
OFF Actuator remains in the

Actuator turns to the
current position. (DIP2 not CLOSED position
effective)
633
Pneumatic Actuators PA11/21

Overview
Product description
Our pneumatic full plastic actuators PA11/21 can serve

you in many ways. They are available with or without
stroke limiter as well as in the different modes of operation. Range: PA11 from d16DN10 up to d32DN25
and PA21 from d40DN32 up to d63DN50. Thanks to the
new position indication with integrated NAMUR interface
accessory assembly to our PA11/21 is as easy as it
gets.Naturally, the flange interface also corresponds to
the NAMUR standard. Therefore, third party valves are
no problem.
enable control of these positions through manual operation in case of failure in the compressed air supply,
if the actuator is equipped for this with the respective
subassembly.
control pressures above 7.5 bar,
according to DIN EN12570 (maximum retention forces
under water.
Versions
NOTICE
PA11 / PA21

The actuator can only function properly if
it has been connected professionally as
per the connection diagram for double acting operation and for fail-safe OPEN or failsafe CLOSE operation , respectively.
Special hazards
Single acting, fail-safe OPEN and
CLOSE (type description FO and FC )
pneumatic actuators have pre-loaded springs that bring the valve into the
predefined position in case of compressed air loss.
Product features
Robust PP-GF housing

Full plastic actuator
Position indicator with integrated NAMUR interface
Fast cycle times
Multi functional module available with different limit
switch versions
Safety information
Intended use

Type PA11
Pneumatic part-turn valve actuator DA/FC/FO
Type PA21
Pneumatic part-turn valve actuator DA/FC/FO
When built into GF valves and connected to a system

control, the purpose of these actuators is
to actuate ball valves with a control pressure of 2.8 to
7 bar and up to a driving torque of 20 Nm, and
depending on the type of pneumatic actuator, double acting (type designation DA) or single acting with
spring for fail-safe to CLOSE (type designation FC) or
single acting for fail-safe to OPEN (type designation
FO),
control these valves to the OPEN and CLOSED positions via a built-in solenoid valve. The solenoid
valve must be either supplied ex GF works or already
mounted by the customer,
indicate these positions OPEN and CLOSED via an
electric signal to the system control, if the actuator is
equipped for this with the respective subassembly,
634
Dismantling these actuators is dangerous and may only be done by following special repair instructions (available from +GF+) and under the guidance of a safety expert.
Dismounting from the valve may only be done in the
safety position after cutting off the compressed air supply. Prior to any work on the electric subassemblies of
the pneumatic actuator, the electrical connections of the
control voltage have to be disconnected. Any necessary
live-line adjustments may only be done with specially insulated tools.
Furthermore, the operating instructions of the manual
valve must also be observed. They are an integral component of this manual.
Graph
Exploded view
The pneumatic actuator PA11/PA21 features the following components:

Housing with screwed on spring cover, position indicator and Namur air connection
Spring cover with mounted, preloaded spring assembly
Namur air connection with internal reversing bore for
the DA function
Piston with rack
Pinion shaft
For special applications, actuators can be equipped with

various supplementary kits/accessories. (see "Accessories").
PA11/21 connecting dimensions
Spring cover
Housing of PP-GF
Piston with rack
Pinion shaft
Preloaded spring assembly
Connection for control air G1/8
Dimensions
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA11
194
44
80
24
48
54
275
PA21
224
54.5
80
24
58.5
58
305
PA11/21 without stroke limiter
L: Length
H: Height
D: Diameter
H1
H2
H3
H4
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA11
97
20
40
PA21
119
20
51
L: Length
H: Height
D: Diameter
PA11/21 with stroke limiter
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA11
28.5
M5
61
74
G1/8"
35
PA21
28.5
M5
82
94
G1/8"
35
Weight
PA11 / PA21
0.75 kg - 1.445 kg
L: Length
H: Height
D: Diameter
635
Technical data
Actuator
Nominal torque
10 Nm (7.4 lb. ft.)
Peak torque
20 Nm (15 lb. ft.)
Cycle time
1 - 2 s, with throttle valve to 5

s
Actuating angle
90 C
Allowable ambient temperature
-10 to + +50 C
0 - 100 %
Housing material
PP fiberglass-reinforced
Position indicator
Optical
Control medium
Neutral, non aggressive gases

(Control with fluids on request)
Compressed air class per

ISO 8573-1
2or 3 for -10 C
3 or 4for T >0 C
Temperature control medium
Max. 40 C
Control pressures (reference

values)
Actuator connection
G1/8"
Mode of operation
- Fail-safe close (FC)

- Fail-safe open (FO) - Double acting (DA)
PA21 torque characteristics
Technical features
Max. allowable control pressure
7 bar
Control volume in dm
DN
mm
Single actDouble acting (FC/FO) ing (DA)

dm
dm
PA11
10
15
20
25
0.15
0.18 (open)
0.15 (closed)
PA21
32
40
50
0.28
0.35 (open)
0.28
(closed)
Options
Stroke limiter
The stroke limiter is mounted ex works and enables limiting the actuating angle up to 45 alternatively in the
closed or open direction for the FC and FO functions.
For the DA function, limitation is only possible in the
open direction.
Setting the end position limits

Stroke limiter close direction FC Version
a) Make sure the springs are in the position of rest (no
compressed air)
b) Unscrew the transparent cap
c) Drive the actuator with compressed air into the open
position
d) Turn the adjusting screw in a counterclockwise direction until the desired position is reached
e) Set the actuator in the closed position, check the setting and if necessary repeat from step c)
f) Tighten the safety nut
g) Assemble the transparent cap
Stroke limiter open direction FC Version (DA)
a) as above
b) as above
c) Actuator in CLOSED position
d) Turn the adjusting screw in clockwise direction until
the desired position is reached
e) Drive the actuator with compressed air in the open
position, check the setting and if necessary repeat from
step c)
f) as above
g) as above
Operating diagram FC, FO, DA
PA11 torque characteristics
636
Note
Please observe the following:
For the correct functioning of the actuator, the position
of the actuator must correspond with the position of the
valve.
Actuator open >Valve open
Actuator closed >Valve closed
When installing an actuator with a GF ball valve, it is important to note the position of the ball valve spigot.
Fail-safe to
close (FC)
1 Solenoid valve
3/2-way
de-energized
closed
Fail-safe to
open (FO)
1 Solenoid valve
3/2-way
de-energized
closed
Double Acting
(DA)
1 Solenoid valve
5/2-way
(alternative 4/2way)
5/2-way valve
4/2-way valves
Accessories
available in the Chapter Accessories for
pneumaticactuators.
637
Pneumatic Actuators PA30 to PA90

Overview
Product description
The pneumatic actuator series PA30- PA90 serves to

operate valves with a 90 positioning angle. Georg Fischer actuators already comply with both the EN standards, as well as divers ISO standards: Actuator mounting flange according to ISO 5211; Actuator connection with square according to DIN 3337; Connection for
solenoid valve, positioner and limit switch according to
VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR); Optical position feedback.
All GF Piping Systems actuators can be used as open/
close or control actuators. The double acting design
means that the valve is opened or closed by the actuator applying compressed air. Depending on the requirement, the springs can open or close. The single-acting
actuators only apply compressed air on one side, while
adjustment on the other side is by spring force. This
means that if there is air failure they return automatically to a safety position. Standard interfaces enable easy
configuration of: solenoid valve, limit switch and positioner.
Dismounting from the valve may only be done in the

safety position after cutting off the compressed air supply. Prior to any work on the electric subassemblies of
the pneumatic actuator, the electrical connections of the
control voltage have to be disconnected. Any necessary
live-line adjustments may only be done with specially insulated tools.
Furthermore, the operating instructions of the manual
valve must also be observed. They are an integral component of this manual.
Graph
Exploded view
Versions
PA30 - PA90
Product features
Integrated NAMUR interface

Fast cycle times
Wide torque range, from 8 Nm up to 3840 Nm
Easy assembly with various limit switch options
Low installation height
Safety information
Special hazards
Single acting, fail-safe OPEN and
CLOSE (type description FO and FC )
pneumatic actuators have pre-loaded springs that bring the valve into the
predefined position in case of compressed air loss.
Dismantling these actuators is dangerous and may only be done by following special repair instructions (available from +GF+) and under the guidance of a safety expert.
638
Special lift design leads to high end torques
Special seals and piston guide rings guarantee a long service

life
Automatic bolt lubrication for long service life
ISO/Namur connecting shaft of stainless steel
End position damping
The cylinder bore is lapped and hard anodized
Outer surface is hard anodized
Dimensions
Single acting (FC/FO)

Type
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
L2
L3
L4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA30
F03/05
36/50
30
M5/6
1/8
10
276
11
35
70
PA35
F05/07
50/70
35
M6/8
1/8
12
326
14
35
70
PA40
F05/07
50/70
35
M6/8
1/8
12
370
14
35
70
PA45
F05/07
50/70
55
M6/8
1/8
15
411
17
35
70
PA50
F05/07
50/70
55
M6/8
1/8
15
423
17
35
70
PA55
F07/10
70/102
70
M8/10
1/8
19
452
22
35
70
PA60
F07/10
70/102
70
M8/10
1/8
19
503
22
35
70
PA65
F10/12
102/125
85
M10/12
1/4"
648
27
PA70
F12
125
85
M12
1/4"
663
27
PA75
F14
140
100
M16
1/4"
824
36
PA80
F14
140
100
M16
1/4"
918
36
Type
L5
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA30
97
70
20.5
17.9
65.5
13
20
36
PA35
104.5
77.5
20.5
17.9
72
13
20
36
PA40
129
86
25
21
80.5
13
30
36
PA45
139
96
25
21
90
16
30
36
PA50
149
106
25
26
100.5
17
30
36
PA55
161
118
25
25
112
19
30
36
639
PA60
173
130
25
32
125
19
30
36
PA65
32
191
148
24
34
136.5
22
PA70
32
196
153
24
38
145
24
PA75
32
229
186
24
43
166
27
PA80
32
241
198
24
44
180
32
Double Acting (DA)

Type
D1
D2
D3
D4(G)
D5
L2
L3
L4
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA30
F03/05
36
25
M5/6
1/8
177
35
70
PA35
F03/05
42
30
M5/6
1/8
10
190
11
35
70
PA40
F03/05
42
30
M5/6
1/8
198
11
35
70
PA45
F05/07
50
35
M6/8
1/8
12
235
14
35
70
PA50
F05/07
50
35
M6/8
1/8
12
250
14
35
70
PA55
F05/07
70
55
M6/8
1/8
15
279
17
35
70
PA60
F05/07
70
55
M6/8
1/8
15
341
17
35
70
PA65
F07/10
102
70
M8/10
1/8
19
350
22
35
70
PA70
F07/10
102
70
M8/10
1/8
19
381
22
35
70
PA75
F10/12
125
85
M10/12
1/4
416
27
PA80
F12
125
85
M12
1/4
466
27
PA85
F14
140
100
M16
1/4
555
36
PA90
F14
140
100
M16
1/4
581
36
Type
L5
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
PA30
87
60
25
12
55.5
10
20
36
PA35
92.7
65.7
25
12.5
60
13
20
36
PA40
97
70
20.5
17.9
65.5
13
20
36
PA45
104.5
77.5
20.5
17.9
72
13
20
36
PA50
129
86
25
21
80.5
13
30
36
PA55
139
96
25
21
90
16
30
36
PA60
149
106
25
26
100.5
17
30
36
PA65
161
118
25
25
112
19
30
36
PA70
173
130
25
32
125
19
30
36
PA75
32
191
148
24
34
137
22
PA80
32
197
153
24
38
145
24
PA85
32
229
186
24
43
166
27
PA90
32
241
198
24
44
180
32
Weight
PA30 - PA 90
2.022 kg - 34.40 kg
640
Technical data
Actuator
Nominal torque
from 4 Nm (2.9 lb. ft.) to 1920

Nm (1416 lb. ft.)
Peak torque
from 8 Nm (5.9 lb. ft.) to 3840

Nm (2832 lb. ft.)
Control medium
Neutral, non-aggressive gases, preferably slightly oily

compressed air
Control pressures in bar
Single acting
Double acting
min.
2.8
max.
Actuator connection
R 1/8 with Namur plate R 1/

4"
Cycle time
0.5 - 1 s
Actuating angle
90
Mode of operation
- Fail-safe close (FC)

- Fail-safe open (FO)
- Double acting (DA)
Permissible operating temp.
-10 to + +80 C
0 - 95 %
Position indicator
optical
Housing material
Aluminium hard anodized
Torque in relation to control pressure

Torque in Nm
Double acting
Type
3 bar
4 bar
5 bar
5.6 bar*
6 bar
7 bar
PA30 DA
16.1
21.4
26.8
30.0
32.1
37.5
45
8.0
10.7
13.4
15.0
16.1
18.8
90
12.0
16.1
20.1
22.5
24.1
28.1
PA35 DA
24.0
32.1
40.2
45.0
48.3
56.4
45
12.0
16.2
20.1
22.5
24.0
28.2
90
18.0
24.3
30.3
34.0
36.3
42.3
PA40 DA
32.1
42.9
53.6
60.0
64.3
75.0
45
16.1
21.4
26.8
30.0
32.1
37.5
90
24.1
32.1
40.2
45.0
48.2
56.3
PA45 DA
48.0
64.2
80.4
90.0
96.6
112.8
45
24.0
32.4
40.2
45.0
48.0
56.4
90
36.0
48.6
60.6
68.0
72.6
84.6
PA50 DA
64.3
85.7
107.1
120.0
128.6
150.0
45
32.1
42.9
53.6
60.0
64.3
75.0
90
48.1
64.3
80.4
90.0
96.4
112.5
PA55 DA
96.0
128.4
160.8
180.0
193.2
225.6
45
48.0
64.8
80.4
90.0
96.0
112.8
90
72.0
97.2
121.2
135.0
145.2
169.2
PA60 DA
128.1
171.4
214.3
240.0
257.1
300.0
45
64.3
85.7
107.1
120.0
128.6
150.0
90
96.4
128.6
160.7
180.0
192.9
225.0
PA65 DA
192.0
256.8
321.6
360.0
386.4
451.2
641
45
96.0
129.6
160.8
180.0
192.0
225.6
90
144.0
194.4
242.4
270.0
290.4
338.4
PA70 DA
257.1
342.9
428.6
480.0
514.3
600.0
45
128.6
171.4
214.3
240.0
257.1
300.0
90
192.9
257.1
321.4
360.0
385.7
450.0
PA75 DA
384.0
513.6
643.2
720.0
772.8
902.4
45
192.0
259.2
321.6
360.0
384.0
451.2
90
288.0
388.8
484.8
540.0
580.8
676.8
PA80 DA
514.3
685.7
857.1
960.0
1028.6
1200.0
45
257.1
342.9
428.6
480.0
514.3
600.0
90
385.7
514.3
642.9
720.0
771.4
900.0
PA85 DA
768.0
1027.2
1286.4
1440.0
1545.6
1804.8
45
384.0
518.4
643.2
720.0
768.0
902.4
90
576.0
777.6
969.9
1080.0
1161.6
1353.6
PA90 DA
1028.6
1371.4
1714.3
1920.0
2057.1
2400.0
45
514.3
685.8
857.1
960.0
1028.6
1200.0
90
771.4
1028.6
1285.7
1440.0
1542.9
1800.0
Torque in Nm
Type
Single acting
2.8 bar
4.2 bar
5.6 bar*
air
spring
air
spring
air
spring
PA30 FC/FO
15.0
10.0
22.5
15.0
30.0
20.0
45
7.5
7.5
11.3
11.3
15.0
15.0
90
10.0
15.0
15.0
22.5
20.0
30.0
PA35 FC/FO
22.5
15.0
33.9
22.5
45.0
30.0
45
11.1
11.1
16.8
16.8
22.5
22.5
90
15.0
22.5
22.5
33.9
30.0
45.0
PA40 FC/FO
30.0
20.0
45.0
30.0
60.0
40.0
45
15.0
15.0
22.5
22.5
30.0
30.0
90
20.0
30.0
30.0
45.0
40.0
60.0
PA45 FC/FO
45.0
30.0
67.5
45.0
90.0
60.0
45
22.5
22.5
33.9
33.9
45.0
45.0
90
30.0
45.0
45.0
67.5
60.0
90.0
PA50 FC/FO
60.0
40.0
90.0
60.0
120.0
80.0
45
30.0
30.0
45.0
45.0
60.0
60.0
90
40.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
80.0
120.0
PA55 FC/FO
90.0
60.0
135.0
90.0
180.0
120.0
45
45.0
45.0
67.5
67.5
90.0
90.0
90
60.0
90.0
90.0
135.0
120.0
180.0
PA60 FC/FO
120.0
80.0
180.0
120.0
240.0
160.0
45
60.0
60.0
90.0
90.0
120.0
120.0
90
80.0
120.0
120.0
180.0
160.0
240.0
PA65 FC/FO
180.0
120.0
270.0
180.0
360.0
240.0
45
90.0
90.0
135.0
135.0
180.0
180.0
90
120.0
180.0
180.0
270.0
240.0
360.0
PA70 FC/FO
240.0
160.0
360.0
240.0
480.0
320.0
45
120.0
120.0
180.0
180.0
240.0
240.0
642
90
160.0
240.0
240.0
360.0
320.0
480.0
PA75 FC/FO
360.0
240.0
540.0
360.0
720.0
480.0
45
180.0
180.0
270.0
270.0
360.0
360.0
90
240.0
360.0
360.0
540.0
480.0
720.0
PA80 FC/FO
480.0
320.0
720.0
480.0
960.0
640.0
45
240.0
240.0
360.0
360.0
480.0
480.0
90
320.0
480.0
480.0
720.0
640.0
960.0
* Standard series; for reduced torques, special springs are available.
Note:
Single acting with Namur 5/2-way valve

The torque given for FO actuators to butterfly valves type 240 are reduced by 15 %.
Torque Characteristics
Double acting
Single acting
Single acting with Namur 3/2-way valve
Technical features
Operating diagram
Double acting with Namur 5/2-way valve
Setting the end stops
Stroke limiter closing

(max. 10 opening angle, 0 - 10 opening angle)
a) Make sure the springs are in the position of rest; the
groove in the shaft (part 1) should be in the same position as in the diagram. Also check thatthe bore D is
decompressed.
b) Unscrew the special nut (part 2).
643
c) Put compressed air in the bore D.

d) With a screwdriver, turn the screws (part 3) in a
counterclockwise direction until the desired setting is
reached.
e) Release the compressed air from the bore D.
f) Check the setting and, if necessary, repeat the procedure from step c).
g) Replace the special nut (part 2) and press the O-ring
seals in the corresponding grooves (part 4).
Stroke limiter opening
(max. 10 opening angle, 90 - 80 opening angle)
a) Make sure the springs are in the position of rest; the
groove in the shaft (part 1) should be in the same position as in the diagram. Also check thatthe bore D is
decompressed.
b) Unscrew the special nut (part 2).
c) With a screwdriver, turn the screws (part 3) in a
clockwise direction until the desired setting is reached.
d) Put compressed air in the bore D and check that
the pistons (part 5) hit against the screws (part 3).
e) Replace the special nut (part 2) and press the O-ring
seals in the corresponding grooves (part 4).
Regulating the stroke limiter for the two
pistons can only be done in one direction
(close or open)!
Accessories
available in the Chapter Accessories for
pneumatic actuators.
644
Designation
Actuator PA30
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA35
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA40
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA45
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA50
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA55
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA60
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA65
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA70
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA75
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA80
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA85
FC
FO
DA
Actuator PA90
FC
FO
DA
Pilot solenoid valve type PV94/95

(3/2-way)
Pilot solenoid valve type MNL532

(3/2 - 5/2-way)
Pilot solenoid valve type MNL5470

(4/2-way)
Pilot solenoid valve type PV2000

(for valve clusters)
Digital positioner type DSR201
Namur mounting console
2 additional limit switches Ag-Ni
250 V/10 A
2 additional limit switches NPN
10 - 30 V/0.1 A
2 additional limit switches PNP
10 - 30 V/ 0.1 A
2 additional limit switches Namur
5 - 24 V
2 additional limit switches EExd
250 V/5 A
2 additional limit switches
30 V =
max. 1 - 100
mA
645
Pneumatic Actuator for DIASTAR
For further information on the DIASTAR, please refer to

the section of the planning fundamentals:
Planning Fundamentals for diaphragm valves,
646
Accessories for electric actuators

Heating element
Assembly
Mounting the heating element (board)
Disconnect the actuator from the supply
voltage.
General
Designation
Technical data
Heating element
24 V =
The heating element works with the EA11, EA21,

EA31 and EA42.
The heating element is mounted on the base board and
is connected electrically via a flat cable (X1). The temperature is measured with a temperature sensor, which
is mounted on this element, at approx. 0 - 5 C the heating element is switched on.
Connection diagram
EA11, EA21, EA31, EA42
Remove actuator cover.

Take the board out of its packaging and check for
damages.
Do not touch the board itself. Electrostatic
discharge can damage the components.
Screw the three spacer bolts (1) into the assembly

bolts.
Hand-tighten.
Fasten the board (3) to the spacer bolts with the screws
(2).
Plug the flat cable into the X1 (4) connector.
Close the housing cover.
Reconnect to the power supply.
The heating element may not heat at temperatures over
+5 C. When switched on, it heats up to 10 - 15C.
Heating element kit
Reset unit
General
Description
Technical data
Reset unit
24 V =
The reset unit works with the EA11, EA21, EA31 and
EA42.
647
The reset unit is mounted on the base board and is connected electrically via a flat cable. The reset unit is connected to the battery via terminals and a two-core line.
In case of a failure of the supply voltage, the battery is
electronically switched on automatically after 5 s. With
DIP switches (5), the function Move to the CLOSED or
OPEN position can be selected.
Connection diagram
EA11, EA21, EA31, EA42
The storage battery is charged continuously. Full recharging takes approximately 15 hours.
Expected life time approx. 7 years

Possible cycles per day:
EA11/21:
10
EA31:
04
EA42:
02
Both switches ON: Actuator moves to OPEN

Both switches OFF: Actuator moves to CLOSE
Assembly
Mounting the reset unit (board)
voltage.
Take the board out of its packaging and check for damages.
Screw the three spacer bolts (1) into the assembly bolts.
Hand-tighten.
Fasten the board (3) to the spacer bolts with the screws
(2).
Rechargeable battery
Connect the battery via the second plug or cable gland
to the terminals 16 and 17 (4) (we recommend 2 x 1.5
mm).
648
Attention must be given to the polarity.

Charge the battery for at least 15 hours.
Connection diagram
Mechanical limit switches: Ag-Ni, Au
In case the fail-safe return and the monitoring print are installed both together, make
sure that the adjustments will not interfere
one another.
Additional limit switches (Ag-Ni, Au,

NPN,PNP)
General
Designation
Technical data
Kit with 2 additional limit switches Ag-Ni

*
250 V ~, 6 A
Kit with 2 additional limit switches Au *
30 V = , 100 mA
Kit with 2 additional limit switches NPN
10 - 30 V =, 100
mA
Kit with 2 additional limit switches PNP
10 - 30 V =, 100
mA
Mounting set 4 limit switches
The additional limit switches work with the EA21,

EA31 and EA4.
The EA11 works only with the kit for the additional
limit switch Ag-Ni
* If the limit switch kit is mounted in the factory, the
switches are wired to open according to the diagram.
It is possible for the customer to convert to close by
rewiring.
Terminal (8 7 and terminal 10 9).
649
Inductive limit switches: NPN/ PNP Inductive limit

switches: NPN/ PNP
Move the actuator to the two end positions and set the
respective switching points.
The switching cams can be adjusted with a screwdriver
size 2.
Disconnect the device from the supply voltage.
Connect limit switches.
Close the housing cover and connect to the supply voltage.
Additional four limit switches

Following the mounting instructions for the two additional limit switches, the EA 21/31 can be expanded to include four limit switches.
The mounting sequence for the individual parts is the
same as for the two additional limit switches.
For stability purposes, the mounting set
for four limit switches must also be used.
The fully assembled unit can be seen in
the photo below.
Assembly
Mounting the limit switches
voltage.
Remove the screws from the limit switch S2 and S1.

Mount the limit switch kit (1) on S1 and S2 as shown.
Tighten with the new, longer screws.
Mount the additional switching cams (2) as well as the
spacer rings (3).
Setting the limit switch position.
Connect the device to the supply voltage.
The switch position may only be set with
an extra-low voltage below 50 V.
650
Limit switch kit middle position

General
Designation
Technical data
Middle position
The middle position works with EA21, EA31, EA42

The kit is mounted on the limit switches S1, S2 and
serves to move the actuator to a third position (e.g. a 3way ball valve into the middle position).
Connection diagram
EA11, EA21, EA31, EA42
1.Disconnect the actuator from the supply voltage.

2.Remove the screws of the limit switches S1 and S2.
3.Connect the plug of the kit to the four-pole slot (1).
Make sure that the multipoint socket connector of the
plug fits into the socket board of the four-pole plug.
4.Attach the two switches S3 and S4 of the kit to S1 and
S2. When doing this, the S3 switch (assigned to PIN
1, 2) must be down and the S4 switch (PIN 3, 4) up.
(see connection diagram).
5.Fasten the two switches S3 and S4 with the longer
screws supplied.
Overview on activation
Actuator
moves in position
Terminal under current
Activated
switch(es)
Direction of
rotation of the
actuator
OPEN
S1
CCW*
CLOSED
S2
CW**
Middle
S3
CCW
S4
CW
* CCW - counterclockwise
** CW - clockwise
Move actuator to position OPEN (CCW):
Put terminal 1 under current -->Switch S1 is activated.
Move actuator to position CLOSED (CW):
Put terminal 2 under current -->Switch S2 is activated.
Move actuator to middle position (CCW / CW):
Put terminal 3 under current -->Switch S3/S4 is activated.
Assembly
Mounting the limit middle positioning kit
Setting the end positions

Turn switching cam 2 of switch S2 by 90 anti-clockwise (seen from above).
Reconnect the actuator to the supply voltage.
Move the actuator into position CLOSED (terminal 2
under current)
Turn cam 2 until the desired position is reached (see
position of the ball)
Replace the standard position indicator with the new
3-way position indicator
Standard position indicator
3-way position indicator
651
Setting the middle position

Move the actuator to the OPEN position (terminal 1
under current)
Place the additional switching cams on the shaft. For
this, first remove the position indicator again and put it
back on again in the same position afterwards
Place cam 3 on cam 2 (cam 4 still stays on top of the
switches)
Put cam 3 into the same position as cam 2 and turn it
clockwise by 90.
Move actuator to the middle position (terminal 3 under current).
Readjust cam 3 until the desired middle position is
reached (see position of the ball).
Now place switching cam 4 on cam 3 in the same position. Adjust cam 4 afterwards. This should activate
switch S4 (S3 and S4 are activated, the two cams
point in opposite directions).
Close the actuator with the housing cover. The middle
position is now set.
OPEN
MIDDLE
CLOSED
Monitoring print with cycle time module,

running time monitoring, current monitoring, cycle counter
General
Description
Technical data
Monitoring print
The monitoring print works with EA21, EA31, EA42
652
The monitoring print is mounted on the base board and

is connected electrically with a flat cable. The monitoring print enables five functions:
1.Cycle time extension
2.Cycle time monitoring
3.Monitoring a selected maximum number of cycles
4.Monitoring a selected maximum motor current
5.Position feedback signal 4-20 mA
These monitor settings are made via the BCD switches
1 to 4. They are described on the following pages. The
switches must be connected for the function to be active. The functions work independently of one another. 1
to 4 BCD switches can be individually connected.
Connection diagram
EA11, EA21, EA31, EA42
The board has been connected correctly when:

LED (9) above the BCD switches flashes green, and
the green LED (6) lights up.
Assembly
Mounting the monitoring unit
voltage.
Take the board out of the packaging and check for damages.
Screw the three spacer bolts (1) into the assembly

bolts.
Hand-tighten.
1 Cycle time extension

2 Cycle time counter
3 Cycle counter
4 Motor current monitoring
5 Position feedback
Fasten the board (3) to the spacer bolts (1) with the
screws (2).
Set the BCD switch (4) for the desired function. Secure
with the help of the nipple supplied.
Select the desired switch setting with a screwdriver.
653
Error message
DIP switch in case of error

With the help of the DIP switch, the actuator can be
moved to the CLOSED or OPEN position in case of an
error. For this, the DIP switches need to be adjusted as
follows:
DIP 1
DIP 2
ON
Position of DIP 2 effective Actuator moves to the

OPEN position
OFF
Actuator remains in its

position (DIP 2 not effective)
Actuator moves to the

CLOSED position
(Please refer to the example below.)
In case of malfunction the actuator remains in its position (delivery

state).
In case of malfunction the actuator moves to the OPEN position.
If an error occurs, the red LED (8) on the base board

will light up. If the monitoring unit is installed, the corresponding LED (10) on the BCD switch, of which the selected value has been exceeded will also light up red.
With all occurring error messages the ready-to-operate
signal will be off (terminals 5, 6 no passage).
Eliminating the malfunction report
Check the error cause, if necessary carry out the appropriate maintenance.
To delete the message, activate the reset switch (9) on
the base board while the supply voltage is still connected or briefly disconnect the actuator from the mains voltage. (Not effective with cycle counter).
The two LEDs will go out and the actuator is ready to
operate again.
The ready-to-operate module can react in
the fail-safe mode as well. Resetting the
error message does not reset the cycle
counter.
Reset Number of cycles

Turn the BCD switchto the position 0 (this position correspondsto one cycle). Move the actuator into CLOSED
position and back to OPEN position.
The monitoring LED lights up. Press the reset button on
the base board and the cycle counter will be cleared to
0. Turn the BCD switch into delivery position.
654
In case of malfunction the actuator moves to the CLOSED position.
Settings
1. Cycle time extension (Vario)
Designation
Cycle time extension
This function allows setting the desired number of cycles. To do this, the actuator is clocked in the end positions (open or closed).
For the corresponding value please refer to the table
below (values are valid for 90 actuation). Cycle time
without BCD: 5 s for 90 (EA21); 15 s for 90 (EA31);
26 s for 90 (EA42)
Switch position
Cycle
time / s
EA21
EA31
EA42
0 Delivery position
20
30
12
25
35
15
30
40
19
35
45
25
40
50
30
50
55
35
60
65
35
60
75
The switch positions 8 9 have the function of position

7.
The extension of the cycle time is also active in case of
failure or reset operation.
2. Cycle time monitoring
Designation
Cycle time monitoring monitors the duration of a preset

cycle time of the electric actuator.
If the cycle exceeds the preset time, a failure is reported (see "error message"). For the corresponding value
please refer to the table below (values are valid for 90
actuation).
Switch
position
Cycle time monitoring / s
EA21
EA31
EA42
10
15
10 Delivery position
15
20
15
20
25
20
30
25
30
35
30
35
35
40
50
40
45
60
45
55
70
50
70
85
Switch position
Number of cycles
10 000
20 000
30 000 ***
40 000 **
50 000 *
60 000
70 000
80 000
90 000
Delivery position : *EA21 **EA31 ***EA42

4. Current monitoring
Designation
Current monitoring
3. Cycle monitoring
Designation
Cycle monitoring
This function allows setting a desired number of cycles.

As soon as the number of cycles exceeds the set value, an error is reported (see error message). With the
help of the DIP switch (8) on the monitoring print you
can preset if you wish for the actuator to keep moving in
case of an error, or if it should move to its security position and remain there. (Refer error message.)
This function monitors the motor current. If the motor

current is greater than the preset value, a malfunction is
reported.
Switch position
Max. motor current/mA
200
400
600 *
800
1 000 **
1 200
1 400 ***
1 600
1 800
2 000
Delivery position : *EA21 **EA31 ***EA42

When setting the BCD switch, make sure
that the set functions do not block one another.
BCD1
Cycle time
level 3 = 19 s
BCD2
level 0 = 7 s
655
General
Assembly
Mounting the position signal
Designation
The position signalisation works with the EA21,

EA31 and EA42.
The position signalisation enables the exact capturing
of the mechanical position of the output shaft. Output
signal is a current of 4 - 20mA. (4 mA CLOSED, 20 mA
OPEN)
Position signal can be combined with the controller
print or the monitoring print.
The position signalisation board is mounted on the limit
switches S1, S2 and is connected electrically to the controller print or the monitoring print via a system cable.
Connection diagram
EA11, EA21, EA31, EA42
voltage.
Remove the screws of the limit switches S1 and S2.

Remove the position indicator (1).
Place the position signal board in the position shown on
S1 and S2 and fasten with the longer screws.
Insert the circular magnet (3) so that the notches are on
top.
Again place the position indicator (1) on the axis in one
of the end positions..
Connect the position signal board to the controller or
monitoring print via the system cable (2).
The board has been connected correctly when the
LED (4) lights up green.
If the position signal is used together with
additional limit switches, the position signalisation has to be installed above the limit switches.
Setting the position signalisation/learning run

For the position sensor (4) to recognise the OPEN and
CLOSED positions, a single learning run with 360
must be done. After the learning run, the OPEN and
CLOSED positions are set.
656
Further learning runs can be done between the end positions (depending on the switching cams S1 and S2).
The way in whichthe jumper is placed on the position
signalling determines if the learning run happens with
360 or if it happens between the end positions.
Jumper connects both PINs:
Learning run 360
PINs not connected:
Learning run between the end positions
When position signal is mounted at the factory, a learning run with 360 has been
already done. In this case the jumper is
placed on only one pin. When the position
signal is mounted by the customer, a 360
learning run has to be done. Therefore
the two pins need to be connected by the
jumper.
Subsequent modifications on the
switching cams require a new learning
run.
Learning run 360 (Position signalisation kit subsequently installed)

It is necessary to separate the actuator
from the valve, to avoid damage to the
valve.
Before doing the learning run, set the jumper so it connects the two pins. Complete thelearning run. Then reset the jumper to its original position and remount the
actuator.
Performing a learning run
Press the button (5) on the board for approx. 2 s. The
LED (6) will go out briefly. As soon as the LED lights up
again, release the button. The actuator will then do a
learning run.
Positioner PE25
General
The positioner PE25 works with the EA21, EA31, EA42.

The positioner type PE25 controls a user-defined valve
position proportional to a given set value. This can be 0
- 10 V or 4 - 20 mA.
The return of the valve position (actual value) is realised
with the position signalisation.
Power supply needs to be decoupled or
galvanically isolated.
Signal configuration (not galvanically isolated)

Description
Technical data
Positioner type PE25
Not galvanically isolated set

value inputs
The four DIP switches on the controller print serve for

the configuration of the signals. Signal configuration:
During this run, the LED (6) will blink. While the LED
(6) is blinking, the actuator is in the learning mode. The
learning run is finished correctly when the LED lights
continuously.
Switch assignment
If the position signalisation is combined with the

monitoring print, the output signal 4 20 mA can be
processed on the terminals 18, 19 (7) on the board
of the monitoring print. (4 mA > "CLOSED" / 20 mA >
"OPEN").
If the position signalisation is connected to the positioner, the latter will process the signal.
Signal type
S1
S2
0 - 10 V
OFF
OFF
4 - 20 mA
ON
ON
S3:
ON: input inverted

OFF: input not inverted
S4:
ON: use S3L Master

OFF: use S3L Slave
Example:
657
Signal configuration (galvanically isolated)
Connection diagram
Description
Technical data
EA21, EA31, EA42
Positioner type PE25
Galvanically isolated set value inputs
Positioner 199 190 100
The four DIP switches on each of the three switch

blocks on the controller print serve for the configuration
of the signals. Switch combination
All switches
must be set to
OFF.
DIP Switch
Block 1
DIP Switch
Block 2
DIP Switch
Block 3
Signal type
S1
S2
0 - 10 V
OFF
OFF
4 - 20 mA
ON
ON
S3:
ON: input inverted

OFF: input not inverted
S4:
ON: use S3L Master

OFF: use S3L Slave
S1 must be
set to ON
S2 - S3 must
be set to OFF
Example:
Set signal value 4 - 20 mA, not inverted, use S3L Slave
658
Positioner galvanically isolated 199 190 101
For detailed terminal assignment refer to Chapter "Assembly " "Connecting the positioner"
Assembly
Mounting the positioner
voltage.
Connecting the positioner

For the positioner to receive the set value signal, connect the terminals of the set value inputs 20 to 23 for the
corresponding value.
Cable cross-section max. 1.5 mm (see following Table).
Terminal assignment
Take the controller board out of the packaging and

check for damages.
Place the board vertically on the back side of the base

board on plug X1.
Make sure that the board is inserted exactly in theguides.
For setting of the position signal, see the corresponding

section of the Planning Fundamentals.
20
SET value input current
21
SET value input voltage
22
23
SET value input ground
30
Position signalisation signal
31
Position signalisation ground

27
SET value input current/ voltage
28
Output 12 V DC
29
SET value input ground
30
Position signalisation signal
31
Position signalisation ground

Attention: The configuration of the set value is important (see switch assignment).
Impedance at the4...20mA input for both

positioner versions is 150.
A 4 - 20 mA current signal is available at the output of

terminals 30, 31. If necessary, this signal can be evaluated (4 mA: "CLOSED";
20 mA: "OPEN").
When the set value and the position indicator have been
connected, reconnect the actuator to the supply voltage
(see connection diagram).
659
The positioner has been connected correctly, when the

green LEDs (1, 2 and 4) light up green.
If the LED (3) lights red, the controller is not working.
(see LED arrangement)
Check the connections if necessary and make sure the
polarity of the set input is correct.
Colour
Green
Green
Red
Green
LED
Performing a learning run

Press the button (5) on the board for approx. 2 s. The
LED (6) will go out briefly. As soon as the LED lights up
again, release the button. The actuator will then do a
learning run.
During this run, the LED (6) will blink. While the LED
(6) is blinking, the actuator is in the learning mode. The
learning run is finished correctly when the LED lights
continuously.
After the positioner is correctly connected, do a learning

run.
Setting the position signalisation/learning run
For the position sensor (4) to recognise the OPEN and
CLOSED positions, a single learning run with 360
must be done. After the learning run, the OPEN and
CLOSED positions are set.
Testing adapter for RS232 interface

General
Description
Testing adapter kit for RS232 interface
Further learning runs can be done between the end positions (depending on the switching cams S1 and S2).
The way in whichthe jumper is placed on the position
signalling determines if the learning run happens with
360 or if it happens between the end positions.
Jumper connects both PINs:
Learning run 360
PINs not connected:
Learning run between the end positions
When position signal is mounted at the factory, a learning run with 360 has been
already done. In this case the jumper is
placed on only one pin. When the position
signal is mounted by the customer, a 360
learning run has to be done. Therefore
the two pins need to be connected by the
jumper.
The testing adapter works with the EA 21/31/42. It

can also be used with the EA11 for motor current
measurement.
The testing adapter simplifies the testing and error detection for installed accessories.
The provided software detects automatically which accessory is installed. The user interface is windows-oriented and therefore easy to use.
The testing adapter kit consists of the testing adapter for
the RS232 interface itself, the software to install on the
computer and the user's manual.
Subsequent modifications on the

switching cams require a new learning
run.
Learning run 360 (Position signalisation kit subsequently installed)

It is necessary to separate the actuator
from the valve, to avoid damage to the
valve.
Before doing the learning run, set the jumper so it connects the two pins. Perform thelearning run. Then reset
the jumper to its original position and remount the actuator.
660
Installing the software
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive.

Install the software by clicking on Setup.exe on the
CD-ROM.
Connect the test adapter to the serial port (COM port)
of the computer.
Connect the flat cable of the adapter to the electrical
actuator via the system-bus-connector.
Start the software by double clicking on EValve.exe. The windowConnection Setup will be
displayed.
Which limit switches are activated

ready-to-operate state (ready/fail)
Setting if an error occurs (Open/Close)
Hardware and software version
Which additional accessory is installed
The scope functionenables the graphic display of the

motor current. WithStart Log you can store the data
in a file.
Choose the required COM port by either clicking on

Connect To COM1 or Connect To COM2.
If the connection works properly, the window Basic
Print will be displayed and additionally as many windows as accessories are recognised.
Fail-safe/ Heater
The window Fail-safe/ Heater shows:
Functions
Basic Print
Temperature of sensor 1 and 2 in C

Setting of the DIL switches on the fail-safe unit
if the heating element is active
if the battery pack is connected
Voltage of the supply and battery pack
Monitoring print
The window Basic Print shows:

Motor current in ampere (A)
Internal temperature of the actuator in C
Which signal is applied to the actuator (Open/ Close/
Middle)
The window Monitoring print shows:
661
BCD switch setting for cycle time extension

BCD switch setting for cycle time monitoring
BCD switch setting for cycle counter
BCD switch setting for motor current monitoring
the number of cycles since the monitoring print is in
operation
the number of actual cycles (can be set by operator)
the actuator position in % if the position detection is
connected to the monitoring print
(100 % matches the limit switch position OPEN and 0
% matches the limit switch position CLOSED)
Positioner/ Controller
199.190.101 Positioner with galvanic isolation
The window Positioner/ Controller shows:

Setting for the set value (0 - 10 V/ 4 - 20 mA)
Setting for the actual value (4 - 20 mA)
Set value
Actual value
the actuator position in % if the position detection is
connected to the monitoring print
(100 % matches the limit switch position OPEN and 0
% matches the limit switch position CLOSED)
199.190.100 Positioner without galvanic isolation
With aswitch you can select which version of thepositioner is being used. Corresponding to the selection, the
settings are displayed.
Motor current measurement for EA11
With the testing adapter alsoyou havethe opportunity
to measure the motor current of the EA11.
The two outlets on the adapter give a 0 - 10 V output

signal. To convert the voltage into the corresponding
current, refer to the chart below.
662
Voltage
Current
Volt (V)
Ampere (A)
10
0.2
0.5
0.1
0.3
0.07
Error message
In case the window Basic Print shows No Busmembers Found Click for new retry,
please check
the connection from the testing adapter to the system
bus of the actuator or
easy installation
effective error detection and immunity
ASi products
Description
AS Interface connection with ASEV 2400 for EA11/ 21/ 31/
42
check the supply voltage of the actuator.
AS interface
Introduction
AS Interface (short ASi) stands for actuator/sensor interface andbelongs to the standard field buses. It was designed to connect actuators and sensors and therefore
is used only on the bottom levelof the control system.
The goal was to replace the parallel wiring. Since 1999,
it is standardized according to the international standards: EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.
Typical for the ASi is the yellow cable.
With AS-i, there is no restriction in the wiring structure.
The ASi is a single master system which means there is
only one master in a system. This master polls its configured slaves cyclically and exchanges input and output
data.
ASi specifications
There are some AS-i specifications. Themost recentis

specification 3.0 (since September 2004). The predecessorswere 2.0 which can only handle 31 slaves and
2.1 which could already handle 62 slaves.
General system data:
Master-slave principle
free choice of network structure
Energy and data via a two-wire cable
fail-safe
Medium unshielded wire 2 x 1.5 mm
up to 8A
four inputs/four output for each slave
suited for IP67 control cabinet and rough industrial environment
Penetration technology
Cable length 100 m,with repeater up to 300 m
electronic slave addressing
To connect our electric actuators to an ASi network we

offer this modulewhich fits exactly to our actuator interface.
The ASEV 2400 module offers a compact solution with
the feedback already integrated.
For further information do not hesitate to contact your
GF specialist.
663
Accessories for pneumatic actuators

3/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV 94/95
Type PV94
3/2-way pilot solenoid valve for activating a single acting
pneumatic actuator with the dimensions DN15 -DN50.
Assembly takes place with a banjo bolt directly on the
actuator. As air connections G1/8" and 6 mm push-in
connectors are available. The PV94 can be ordered for
the following voltages:
230 V, 50 - 60 Hz
115 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 VDC
Type PV95
3/2-way pilot solenoid valve for activating a single acting
pneumatic actuator with the dimensions DN65-DN150.
Assembly takes place with a banjo bolt directly on the
actuator. As air connection a G1/8" connection is available . The solenoid valve comes in diameter DN2. Optional voltages are:
230 V, 50 - 60 Hz
115 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 VDC
664
Technical data
PV 94 DN1.2
PV95 DN2
Housing material
Polyamide
Brass (flange housing) Aluminium anodized

(Connector housing)
Banjo bolt
Nickel-plated brass
Brass
Sealing material
NBR
FPM
Media
neutral gases and fluids
Medium temperature
-10...100 C
Ambient temperature
-10...55 C
Viscosity
Air connection
max. 21 mm 2/S
G 1/8
push-in connector 6 mm
G 1/8
Supply voltage
24 V DC
24 V/50 Hz
110 V/50 Hz
230 V/50 Hz
Voltage tolerance
+/-10 %
Rated duty
Electrical connections
Continuous duty 100 % ED

per DIN EN 175301-803* Form C
Manual override
standard
Weight
per DIN 43650 Form A
user-defined, preferably actuator on top

135 g
Protection class
420 g
IP 65 with socket connector
Nominal diameter [mm]
DN1.2
DN2
QNn value air [l/min]*
48
120
Pressure range [bar]**
0 - 10
0 - 10
Coil output [W]
4W (AC, DC)
8 W (AC, DC)
Electrical power startup
9 VA (AC), 4W (DC)
24 VA (AC), 8W (DC)
Electrical power operation
6 VA (AC), 4W (DC)
17 VA (AC), 8W (DC)
Response time open [ms]***
7 - 12
18
Response time close [ms]***
7 - 12
22
* QNn value for air [l/min] at +20 C, 6 bar valve inlet,

pressure difference 1 bar
** Pressure data [bar] gauge pressure
*** Response time [ms]: Measured at the valve outlet
at 6 bar and +20 C open: pressure buildup 0...90 %,
close: pressure release 100...0 %
665
Dimensional drawings
Type PV94 with hose coupling
Type PV94 with G1/8 union
666
Type PV95
Valve selection guide (metric)
>DN65
DN65
Valve dimension
Valve dimension
PV95
PV94
Actuator connection:
G1/8" with reduction to G1/4"
6 mm hose coupling
Air connection G1/4"

DN2.0 10 bar max.
24 V DC
24 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
24 V DC
24 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
Air connection
G1/8"
24 V DC
24 V AC
110 V AC
230 V AC
667
Valve selection guide (NPT)
>DN65
> DN65
Valve dimension
Valve dimension
PV95
PV94
Air connection
Air connection NPT1/8"
NPT1/8"
DN2.0 10 bar max.
- 24 V DC
- 110 V AC
- 24 V DC
- 110 V AC
3/2 - 5/2-way pilot solenoid valve MNL532

MNL 532
3/2 and 5/2-way solenoid valve for activating a double
acting pneumatic actuator. The mounting takes place
via a NAMUR connection. For the dimensions of the
DIASTAR series DN15 - DN50 and our pneumatic actuators PA11/21 a NAMUR connector plate must be used
between the actuator and the pilot solenoid valve. Available in the following voltages:
230 V, 50 - 60 Hz
115 V, 50 - 60 Hz
48 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 V, 50 - 60 Hz
24 V DC
668
Namur connector plate for DIASTAR and PA11/21
Technical properties
Air connection
G1/4"
Dimension
5.5 mm
Air pressure
2 - 10 bar
Temperature
-10 C ... +50 C
Protection class
IP65 per DIN40050
Voltage (VAC)/ Power consumption
230 V/ 5 VA 115 V/ 5 VA 48
V / 5 VA 24 V/ 5 VA
Voltage (VDC)/ Power consumption
24 V/ 3 W
Air flow
950 l/min
DIASTAR with NAMUR connector plate
4/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV5470

Type PV5470
The 4/2-way solenoid valve is for the control of double
acting pneumatic actuators. Installation is done via a
Namur plate. For the dimension series DIASTAR DN15
- 50 a NAMUR connector plate must be mounted between the actuator and the pilot valve.
Mode of operation
4/2-way, when de-energized, pressure connection P
connected to output B, output A is vented.
Actuator
DIASTAR size 1-3 or PA11/21
DIASTAR size 4 - 5
NAMUR connector plate for PA30 - 90
Version type PV5470 (with NAMUR connector)
Actuator
PA30 - 90
230 V, AC / DC
115 V, AC/DC
24 V, AC / DC

If you want to use a NAMUR pilot solenoid valve we
have connector plates available. The connector plate
is mounted between the actuator and the pilot solenoid
valve.
Pilot valve cluster PV2000

The valve cluster PV 2000 is used for activating several actuators at the same time. It consists of a connecting module, several pilot solenoid valves and an end
module. Depending on the application you can choose
a connecting module for D-sub connection, AS interface
or Profibus. The modular system allows a flexible combination of3/2 and 5/2-way valves, as required.
669
Environmental conditions
Mounting
Do not use valves inenvironments

withcorrosive gases, chemicals, salt
water, water, steam, or where there is
direct contact with any of these.
Products with protection class IP65 and IP67 (according
to IEC529) are protected against dust and water. However, these products cannot be used in the water.
When using the manifold block assembly with integrated
sound absorber and protection class IP67, it has to be
ensured that the vent connection does not get in direct
contact with water or other liquids.
Any liquid entering through the vent connection of the
sound absorber can damage the valve.
Do not use the valve in an explosive environment.
Do not use in locations subject to vibration or impact.
Confirm the specifications in the technical datasheet.
Use a protective cover, etc.to shield valves from direct
sunlight.
Shield valves from radiated heat generated by nearby
heat sources.
Employ suitable protective measures in locations where
there is contact with oil or welding, spatter, etc.
If solenoid valves are mounted into a switch panel or
if they are energized over a longer period, measures
for diverting the excess heat must be taken, in order to
comply with the admissible operating temperature.
Valves are installed onto a 35-mm DIN rail.

1. Loosen DIN rail holding screws1) on both ends.
2. Hook valve assembly on the side of pneumatic connection to the DIN rail.
3. Press valve assembly to DIN rail until it snaps in the
rail.
4. Tighten DIN rail holding screws(1) .
Adding solenoid valves
1) Loosen the screws(1) (2 pcs. on one side) that hold
the manifold base onto the DIN rail. (When removing
the manifold base from the DIN rail, loosen the holding screws at four locations.)
Assembly
2) Using e. g. a flat head screwdriver, pull the lever

(b) forward on the manifold block assembly where a
station is to be added, and disconnect the manifold
block assemblies.
3) Attach the manifold block assembly to be added to
the DIN rail as shown in the figure.
4) Connect the block assemblies by pressing them together, and push the lever in firmly until it stops.
Then secure them to the DIN rail by tightening the
screws (1).
1 Mounting base
2 End module
3 Connection module with D-sub connector
4 Valve seal
5 Connector seal
6 Solenoid pilot valve
7 DIN rail (customer supply)
Mounting screw tightening torques

M2:
0.15 Nm
M3:
0.6 Nm
M4:
1.4 Nm
670
(Tightening torque: 1.4 Nm)
Technical data
Manifold type
Stacking type cassette base manifold
1 (P: supply)/3, 5 (R: exhaust)
Common supply, exhaust
Valve stations (max.)
18 stations
Max. number of solenoids
18
Port size
1(P)/3, 5 (R) port
C8 1)
4(A)/2(B) port
C6 1)
Medium
Compressed air, filter 5m or smaller recommended
Internal pilot air
5/2-way monostable
1.5 to 7
Operating pressure range bar
2 x 3/2-way valve
Ambient and fluid temperature C
-10 to 50 (with no freezing)
Maximum operating frequency (Hz)
5/2-way monostable, bistable
2 x 3/2-way valve
Manual override
non-locking type
Pilot exhaust method
Main valve/Pilot valve common exhaust
Lubrication
not required
unrestricted
Impact/Vibration resistance (m/s)
150/30 (8.3 to 2000 Hz)
Protection class valves/D-sub connector
IP67/IP40 (acc. IEC529)
Supply voltage
Power-on time
24 VDC/100 %
Allowable voltage fluctuation
10 % of rated voltage
Power consumption (W)
0.65
Spark suppression
Zener diode
Indicator light
LED
C6: One-touch fitting for O.D. 6 mm

C8: One-touch fitting for O.D. 8 mm
1)
Note
Impact resistance: No malfunction when tested with a
drop tester in the axial direction and at a right angle to
the main valve and armature, one time each in energized and de-energized states (at initial value).
Vibration resistance: No malfunction when tested with
one sweep of 8.3 to 2000 Hz in the axial direction and at
a right angle to the main valve and armature, in both energized and de-energized states (at initial value).
Response time
Type of actuation
Response time (ms) at 5

bar
5/2-way monostable
max. 11
2 x 3/2-way valve
max. 15
Note: Based on JISB8375-1981 dynamic performance test

(with coil temperature of 20 C, at rated voltage).
Weight
Components
Weight g
5/2-way valve incl. base
105
2 x 3/2-way valve incl. base
110
Connection module with Dsub connector
156
End module
102
Type
Port size
Flow values (Qn)
1, 5, 3
4, 2
1 -->4.2 (P - 4.2 -->5.3

->A, B)
(A, B -->EA,
EB)
(P/EA/EB)
(A/ B)
Flow rate (l/

min)
Flow rate (l/

min)
C6 1)
216
226
SS5V1-16 C8 1)
C6: One-touch fitting for O.D. 6

mm
C8: One-touch fitting for O.D. 8
mm
1)
671
Circuit function
2 x 3/2-way valve
2 x 3/2-way valve
5/2-way valve
Pin assignment on D-sub connector

2 x 3/2-way valve
Applied voltage
When electric power is connected to the
solenoid valve, be careful to apply the
proper voltage. Improper voltage may
cause malfunction or coil damage.
Check the connections
After completing the wiring, confirm that
the connections are correct.
Operating display/spark suppression
Solenoid valves of type PV 2000 are bipolar.
5/2-way valve
672
5/2-way valve
Valve 1A
Valve 1
Valve 2A
Valve 3
Valve 3A
Valve 5
Valve 4A
Valve 7
Valve 5A
Valve 9
Valve 6A
Valve 11
Valve 7A
Valve 13
Valve 8A
Valve 15
Valve 9A
Valve 17
13
Common
13
Common
14
Valve 1B
14
Valve 2
15
Valve 2B
15
Valve 4
16
Valve 3B
16
Valve 6
17
Valve 4B
17
Valve 8
18
Valve 5B
18
Valve 10
19
Valve 6B
19
Valve 12
20
Valve 7B
20
Valve 14
21
Valve 8B
21
Valve 16
22
Valve 9B
22
Valve 18
25
Common
25
Common
Cable length
Connector entry direction

The connector entry direction for D-sub connectors can
be changed. To change the connectors entry direction,
press the levers on both sides of the connector, take it
off, and change the direction as shown in the drawing.
Since lead wire assemblies are attached to the connector, excessive pulling or twisting can cause broken wires
or other problems. Also, take precautions so that lead
wires are not caught and pinched when installing the
connector.
D-sub connector with connection cable PVC-U,

21x0.34 mm
When a commercially available connector is required,
use a 25-pin version conforming to MIL-C24308.
Code
Length
199 190 432
1.5 m
199 190 433
3.0 m
199 190 434
5.0 m
Assignment of wire colors as per DIN 47100

Connection Wire color
Marking
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Grey
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
10
Violet
11
Grey
Pink
12
Red
Blue
13
White
Green
14
Brown
Green
15
White
Yellow
16
Yellow
Brown
17
White
Grey
18
Grey
Brown
19
White
Pink
20
Pink
Brown
21
White
Blue
673
Pneumatic connections
Use clean compressed air
Do not use compressed air which contains
chemicals, synthetic oils containing organic
solvents, salts or corrosive gases, etc., as
this can cause damage or malfunction.
Electropneumatic positioner DSR500
Install air filters

Install air filters close to valves at their upstream side. A filtration degree of 5 m or
less should be selected.
Install an air dryer, after-cooler or water
separator, etc.
Air that contains excessive drainage may
cause malfunction of valves and other
pneumatic equipment. Take measures by
installing an air dryer, after-cooler or water
separator, etc.
Prevent any excessive carbon powder
concentration, by installing water separators on the valve inlet side.
If excessive carbon powder is generated
by the compressor, it may adhere to the inside of valves and cause malfunction.
Introduction
Pneumatically operated valves are used increasingly

not only as OPEN/ CLOSED valves, but are controlled
by external analogue command variables.
The positioner of type DSR500 can be used for pneumatic stroke actuators like the DIASTAR and also for
pneumatic rotary actuators like PA11/PA21 or type
PA30 - PA70 as positioner for 0 - 90.
1 Common exhaust
2 Air supply pressure
3 Valve outlet A
4 Valve outlet B
Manual override
Handle carefully, as connected equipment
can be actuated through manual override
operation.
Non-locking
674
The positioner can be mounted on order in the plant or

retrofitted later in the field.
Electrostatic discharge caused by touching can damage certain components. Use antistatic workplace or
use appropriate connection to e.g a metal water pipe.
Protect external cable with according insulation
against contact.
This manual is not to be applied

alone, but should be used in conjunction with the instruction manual
for the valve onto which the actuator
is mounted or shall be mounted.
Work on the actuator may only be
done by an authorised technician.
According to the machine guideline 2006/42/EC (former 98/37/EC),
these actuators/valves are not considered machines, but may be built
into an installation which is considered a machine.
In such cases, please note the following.
We explicitly specify that operation is
prohibited until it has been made certain that the machine (equipment), into
which this product has been built, corresponds to the regulations of the EC
Machine Guideline 2006/42/EC (former
98/37/EC)
Technical data
Control signal
4 - 20 mA,
2 - 10 V
Auxiliary energy, electric
24 VDC +/-10 %
Dimensions and weight

Lift actuators with add-on kits without inspection
glass DSR100/101
Type
Unit
DSR100
mm
86
139
DSR101
mm
86
167
Lift actuators with add-on kits inspection glass

DSR100/101
Auxiliary energy, pneu- 3 - 6 bar

matic
Stroke range type
100
Type 101
Type 201
3 - 25 mm, (DN15 - DN
50)
9 -50 mm, (DN65 - DN 150)
Rotary actuator up to 90
Mounting on control
device
Via standardised mounting kit, if required also with optical indicator
Adjustment of stroke
and zero point
self-learning
Output (at 6 bar supply 30 Nl/min.

air)
100 Nl/ min. (option)
Air consumption
none
Allowable ambient
temperature
-10 to 75 C
Protection class according to DIN 40050
IP65
Function
For single acting lift actuators (FC)

and rotary actuators (FC)
Type
Unit
H1
DSR100
mm
86
180
130
DSR101
mm
86
227
160
Rotary actuator with add-on kit ISO DSR201
Material
Housing
PA 6.6 polyamide, fibreglass

reinforced
Base plate
Aluminium, black anodized
675
Type
Unit
H1
DSR201
mm
86
139
130
Mounting the positioner on the DIASTAR pneumatic actuator and PA30 - PA90
Installation and mechanical check

Mounting kit without inspection glass for DV
DIASTAR DN15 - DN150
Removing the position indicator

Attention: Position indicator has left-hand thread.
Mounting kit without inspection glass for DIASTAR

DN15 - DN150
Instead of the position indicator, an adapter (see below)

is used.
D
Mounting kit with inspection glass for DIASTAR DN15 DN150
D = outside
Mounting kit for PA30 - PA90
676
Outer diameter
Adapter
96 mm
120 mm
150 mm
180mm
276 - 331 mm
1
2
3
4
5
Turn the adapter belonging to the DV DIASTAR counterclockwise (1- 5 with an Allen wrench size SW5 /
SW10), until it touches the pressure spindle.
6 = pressure spindle
Attention: Left-hand thread
Yu = distance required for correct installation of

adapters
Direct version
DIASTAR and positioner Mechanical check
Area Yu bottom
DN15 Gr.
46.8 - 47.3
DN20 Gr.
50.4 - 51.2
DN25 Gr. 2
50.8 - 52.1
DN25 Gr. 3
54.3 - 56.3
DN32 Gr. 3
55.5 - 57.2
DN32 Gr. 4
47.5 - 48.6
DN40 Gr. 4
52.8 - 54.0
DN40 Gr. 5
52.2 - 55.1
DN50 Gr. 4
56.8 - 57.4
DN50 Gr. 5
55.8 - 58.1
DN65
71.4 - 73.4
DN80
75.8 - 76.9
DN100
75.6 - 77.4
DN150
77.0 - 77.4
All dimensions in mm
Mounting kit with inspection glass for DV DIASTAR
DN15 - DN150
1.The needle (12) is centred in the adapter (1- 5) with

the corresponding parts (remove indicator disk). (For
DN100 - 150 also place the needle protector on the
needle and then insert in adapter).
2.Place O-ring (6) on adapter (7) and screw onto DV
DIASTAR (Check the distance Yu, see below)
3.Insert DSR positioner (8) in adapter (7) and fasten
with threaded studs (9).
4.Remove the lower protective plug (FC). Connect rapid
connector (10) on actuator and positioner.
5.Connect the hose (11) between DV DIASTAR and
DSR positioner (connection A).
6.Connect air supply to Connector P.
7.Connection A (13)
8.Connection P (14)
677
1.Place the O-Ring (1) in the slot provided in the mounting kit (2).
2.Screw the mounting kit onto the DV- DIASTAR (Check
the distance H, see below)
3.Mount the needle (3) on DV DIASTAR (For DN100 150 place the needle protector on the needle and then
insert in adapter).
4.Mount the DSR positioner (4) on the adapter of the
mounting kit (2) and fasten with threaded studs (5).
Attention: Make sure that the connector A is vertically
in line with the connections on the DV DIASTAR.
5.Remove the lower protective plug (FC) (6). Connect
rapid connector (7) on actuator and positioner.
6.Connect hose (8) between DV DIASTAR and DSR
positioner (connector A).
8.Connection A (9)
9.Connection P (10)
H = distance required for correct installation of adapters

Area H bottom
DN15 Gr.
50.7 - 52.7
DN20 Gr.
55.4 - 56.3
DN25 Gr. 2
54.2 - 57.6
DN25 Gr. 3
54.7 - 56.8
DN32 Gr. 3
56.3 - 57.7
DN32 Gr. 4
48.7 - 58.3
DN40 Gr. 4
51.9 - 54.5
DN40 Gr. 5
51.7 - 54.0
DN50 Gr. 4
56.1 - 57.9
DN50 Gr. 5
53.3 - 56.8
DN65
70.2 - 73.4
DN80
75.3 - 76.9
DN100
74.6 - 87.4
DN150
76.5 - 87.4
DSR-201 positioner incl. mounting bracket for PA30
- PA90
678
1.The indicator (4) is fixed to the needle (5) with threaded stud (3) and cannot be removed. The threaded
stud (3) must be aligned parallel to the position indicator (2). Remove the adapter (6) from the DSR positioner (1) by loosening the threaded studs (7).
1.Attach the adapter (6) on the mounting bracket

(10) with Allen screws (14) and washer. Fasten the
mounting bracket (10) to the pneumatic actuator (11)
through the spring washers (15), cylindrical Allen
screws (16) and the distance bushes (12) (not required for all PAs).
2.Centre the cam (8) in the actuator axis (17). Connector A must be in line with the connection of the pneumatic actuator (11). Mount the DSR positioner (1) on
the adapter via the screws with the threaded studs
(7). Fasten the cam (8) on the needle (5) by tightening
the threaded stud (9).
3.Connection A (20)
1.Connect the rapid connection (18) on the actuator and

positioner.
2.Connect the hose (19) between the actuator and DSR
positioner (Connector A).
4.Connection A (20)
5.Connection P (21)
(Copy)
Yu = distance required for correct installation of

adapters
Direct version
Area Yu bottom
DN15 Gr.
46.8 - 47.3
DN20 Gr.
50.4 - 51.2
DN25 Gr. 2
50.8 - 52.1
DN25 Gr. 3
54.3 - 56.3
DN32 Gr. 3
55.5 - 57.2
DN32 Gr. 4
47.5 - 48.6
DN40 Gr. 4
52.8 - 54.0
DN40 Gr. 5
52.2 - 55.1
DN50 Gr. 4
56.8 - 57.4
DN50 Gr. 5
55.8 - 58.1
DN65
71.4 - 73.4
DN80
75.8 - 76.9
DN100
75.6 - 77.4
DN150
77.0 - 77.4
1.Place the O-Ring (1) in the slot provided in the mounting kit (2).
2.Screw the mounting kit onto the DV- DIASTAR (Check
the distance H, see below)
3.Mount the needle (3) on DV DIASTAR (For DN100 150 place the needle protector on the needle and then
insert in adapter).
4.Mount the DSR positioner (4) on the adapter of the
mounting kit (2) and fasten with threaded studs (5).
Attention: Make sure that the connector A is vertically
in line with the connections on the DV DIASTAR.
5.Remove the lower protective plug (FC) (6). Connect
rapid connector (7) on actuator and positioner.
6.Connect hose (8) between DV DIASTAR and DSR
positioner (connector A).
8.Connection A (9)
9.Connection P (10)
Mounting kit with inspection glass for DV DIASTAR
DN15 - DN150
H = distance required for correct installation of adapters
679

Area H bottom
DN15 Gr.
50.7 - 52.7
DN20 Gr.
55.4 - 56.3
DN25 Gr. 2
54.2 - 57.6
DN25 Gr. 3
54.7 - 56.8
DN32 Gr. 3
56.3 - 57.7
DN32 Gr. 4
48.7 - 58.3
DN40 Gr. 4
51.9 - 54.5
DN40 Gr. 5
51.7 - 54.0
DN50 Gr. 4
56.1 - 57.9
DN50 Gr. 5
53.3 - 56.8
DN65
70.2 - 73.4
DN80
75.3 - 76.9
DN100
74.6 - 87.4
DN150
76.5 - 87.4
through the spring washers (15), cylindrical Allen

screws (16) and the distance bushes (12) (not required for all PAs).
2.Centre the cam (8) in the actuator axis (17). Connector A must be in line with the connection of the pneumatic actuator (11). Mount the DSR positioner (1) on
the adapter via the screws with the threaded studs
(7). Fasten the cam (8) on the needle (5) by tightening
the threaded stud (9).
3.Connection A (20)
DSR-201 positioner incl. mounting bracket for PA30
- PA90
1.Connect the rapid connection (18) on the actuator and

positioner.
2.Connect the hose (19) between the actuator and DSR
positioner (Connector A).
4.Connection A (20)
5.Connection P (21)
Connections
1.The indicator (4) is fixed to the needle (5) with threaded stud (3) and cannot be removed. The threaded
stud (3) must be aligned parallel to the position indicator (2). Remove the adapter (6) from the DSR positioner (1) by loosening the threaded studs (7).
Pneumatic
Supply air pressure
1.Attach the adapter (6) on the mounting bracket
(10) with Allen screws (14) and washer. Fasten the
mounting bracket (10) to the pneumatic actuator (11)
680
Connect the supply air with connection P (G1/8").

The supply air pressure has to correspond at least to
the value that is stated on the type plate, and must not
exceed 6bar. The supply air requires a filtration of at
least 5-10m.
Electrical
For the electrical connection of the control signal line
(set-point), a twisted cable is recommended. The connection of the supply voltage should be carried out via
a second, separate cable, also, the system should be
grounded (earth connection on the board). After removing the cover on the positioner, the screw terminals for
the individual connections can be accessed (see also
wiring diagram).
Connector board
Manual adjustment: (generally not required)

Press both IN and OUT simultaneously until the
LED blinks (after about 23 seconds) and then let go.
The valve does several stroke movements (open/
close), the end of which is indicated by the steady
burning of the LED. If the LED blinks, there is an error
(e. g. not enough supply air pressure).
With the IN button (air is pumped into the actuator)
and OUT (actuator is exhausted), the valve can be
moved into the opened or closed positions. If either of
the buttons is not pressed withina minute, the valve
will return to its original position.
By alternately pressing IN and OUT, the point is
reached at which the valve just begins to open (a slit
of light appears between the diaphragms). To confirm,
both IN and OUT are pressed simultaneously
within 3 seconds. (LED blinks and goes out).
Adjustment is thus completed.
Error message output
Connections
+I: Control signal current \ selectively
I: Control signal current
+U: Control signal voltage \ selectively
U: Control signal voltage
+24 V: Supply voltage
0 V: Supply voltage (0 V)
K1.1: Failure signal connector
K1.2: Failure signal connector
If necessary, the failure signal (terminals K1.1 and K1.2)

can be used to analyse the valve function. The failure
signal is activated if the positioner is not able to comply
the actual value (stroke) with the set value (control signal); for example if there is no or too low supply air pressure. In this case, the LED on the connector board lights
up.
Direct circuit:
Us = signal voltage
No failure function: low signal
Failure function: 0.5 Hz impulse
Other
PC: Interface cable to PC (configuration)
IN: Supply air valve for actuator is opened (installation)
OUT: Outgoing air valve for actuator is opened (installation)
LED: Light emitting diode for adjustment (installation)
and failure signal (failure signal if malfunction)
Max. supply voltage: UB, max

= 24 V DC
external load R: e.g. 470
Max. signal current: Is, max =
50 mA
Adjusting the positioner
Relay (provide recovery diode for inductive loads)
Adjusting the DSR type positioner

The positioner was calibrated before leaving the plant.
Generally, adjustments are only necessary if a replacement was done, in which case you proceed as follows:
Automatic adjustment:
Press both IN and OUT simultaneously until the
LED blinks (after about 23 seconds) and then let go.
The valve does several stroke movements (open/
close), the end of which is indicated by the steady
burning of the LED. Confirm the adjustment by pressing the IN/OUT buttons simultaneously within 3 seconds. The LED goes out. If the LED blinks, there is an
error.
Troubleshooting list
Problem
Possible causes
Controller
fails/ does
not work
- Connected incorrectly (electr. and pneum.)

- Operating error
- Control pressure too high
- Electronics defective
- Sensor defective
- Transport damage
681
Feedbackmodul
Design and function
Technical data feedback modul
Installation and setup feedback modul
Failure signal feedback modul
Troubleshooting feedback modul
Spare parts/assembly
Order numbers type DSR100/101/201
Please note: For installation of DSR type positioners,
both the positioner and the corresponding mounting kit
must always be ordered.
Stroke limiter/Emergency manual override

for DIASTAR
The stroke limiter can be used for limiting the minimum
and maximum stroke as well as for the emergency manual override. With the usage of adapters, the stroke limiter can also be combined with our electrical position indicator (ER52/53).
DN15 - DN50
Digital electro-pneumatic positioner

Type DSR 100/101/201
Further versions and accessories on request
No. DIASTAR
DN15 - 50 FC
DSR100
Code
DIASTAR
DN65 -150 FC
DSR101
Code
Rotary actuators
pneumatic FC
DSR 201
Code
199 190 411
199 190 412
199 190 410
Mounting kit Type DSR100 without optical position

indicator for DIASTAR DN15 - 50
Mounting kit Type DSR100 with optical position indicator for DIASTAR DN15 - 50
Assembly and adjustment of the stroke limiter

Put valve in the open position using control pressure (FC, DA).
Remove indicator cap (1) and indicator pin (2) (left
thread).
Screw threaded bush (3) with wrench into the actuator
(4) until stop.
Screw locknut (5) on the threaded bush (3) and secure with a wrench.
Guide indicator pin (6) through the threaded bush (3),
screw into spindle (7) (left thread) and secure with an
Allen wrench.
Screw indicator cap (8) onto locknut (5).
No. DN
Attention: Indicator pin 2, 6 has left thread.
No. DN
Type 028-FC
Type 025-FC
Code
Code
15
199 190 414
20
199 190 414
199 190 414
25
199 190 414
199 190 415
32
199 190 415
199 190 415
40
199 190 415
199 190 415
50
199 190415
199 190 415
Type 028-FC
Type 025-FC
Code
Code
15
199 190 417
20
199 190 417
199 190 417
25
199 190 417
199 190 418
32
199 190 418
199 190 418
40
199 190 418
199 190 418
50
199 190 418
199 190 418
Mounting kit Type DSR101 for DIASTAR DN65 - 150

No. With optical position indicator
Code
2/3 199 190 419
Without optical position

indicator
Code
199 190 416
Mounting kit Namur for rotary actuators pneumatic

No. Code
4
682
199 190 281
DN65 - DN150
Minimum flow adjustment

Put valve in open position using the control medium
(FC, DA).
Remove locknut (5) with a wrench and turn the
threaded bush (3) with a wrench in a counterclockwise direction until the desired position is reached.
The stroke limit setting can be seen by comparing the
position of the threaded bush (3) to the basic setting.
Tighten locknut (5).
Maximum flow adjustment
Put valve in closed position.
Remove the locknut (5) with a wrench and turn the
threaded bush (3) with a wrench in a clockwise direction until the desired position is reached. The stroke
limit setting can be seen by comparing the position of
the threaded bush (3) to the basic setting.
Tighten locknut (5).
The adjustment is similar to that for the stroke limiter.
By turning the threaded bush (3) in a clockwise direction, the valve is closed (FO, DA), by turning it in a
counterclockwise direction, the valve is opened (FC,
DA).
For automatic operation, the valve must be readjusted
according to the instructions.
Threaded bush
Locknut
Indicator pin
Spindle nut
Electrical position indicator ER52/53

Introduction
This document contains a description and instructions

for the installation and adjustment of the electrical position indicator type ER52 and ER53.
The position indicator must always be disconnected
from the mains before any work is done on it.
Only trained, authorised personnel may carry out any
work on the position indicator.
According to the Machine Directive 98/37/EC (formerly 89/392/EEC), these valves / actuators are not regarded as machines; they can, however, be built into
installations which are considered machines.
Machine Guideline 98/37/EC (former 89/
392/EEC)
Description
The electrical position indicator is used to indicate the
valve position of GF diaphragm valves type DIASTAR.
The position indicator can be screwed directly onto the
diaphragm valve type DIASTAR.
Type ER 52: 20 63 DN15 50
Type ER 53: 75 160 DN65 150
683
Design of the position indicator

Type ER 52 (DN15 - 50)
09 Connecting piece of stainless steel

10 Unit plug 3P + E / EN 43650
Protection class IP 65 Protection class IP 65
Installation / Adjustment
Type ER 53 (DN65 - 150)
01 Cover SAN
02 Microswitch CLOSED
03 Microswitch OPEN
04 Cams PA
05 O-rings NBR
06 Housing PP
07 Brass base
08 Spindle of stainless steel
684
Basic version of the diaphragm valve

Remove indicator cap (11) and indicator pin.(Attention: indicator pin has left thread).
Loosen the screw (1) on the electrical position indicator and unscrew the transparent, protective cover.
Pull upper cam (2) off.
Loosen the threaded bolt (3) and pull the base with
the spindle (4) out of the housing (5).
ER52: Complete spindle with respective connecting
piece and position.
Screw the base (4) with a wrench in the actuator.
Screw the spindle (6) with an Allen wrench into the
spindle nut of the actuator. (Attention: left thread)
Place housing (5) on base (4) and see that the electrical connection is in the desired position; secure
threaded bolt (3).
Put upper cam (2) on the spindle (gripper up).
Do electrical connections according to diagrams.
Diaphragm valve with stroke limiter

Remove indicator cap (11) and indicator pin and
screw the adapter (9) onto the locknut of the actuator.
ER 53: Dismounting of indicator pin.(Attention: lefthand thread)
ER 53: Screw the intermediate piece (10) into the
connecting piece.
Loosen the screw (1) on the electrical position indicator and unscrew the transparent, protective cover.
Pull upper cam (2) off.
Loosen the threaded bolt (3) and pull the base with
the spindle (4) out of the housing (5).
Screw the base (4) with a wrench into the adapter (9).
Screw the spindle (6) with an Allen wrench into the
spindle nut of the actuator. (Attention: left thread)
Place housing (5) on base (4) and see that the electrical connection is in the desired position; secure
threaded bolt (3).
Put upper cam (2) on the spindle (gripper up).
Do electrical connections according to diagrams.
Adjustment
Slide the upper cam (2) and the lower cam (7) flush
against the adjustment plate (8).
Put the valve once in the open position and once in
the closed position. The cams are thereby correctly
adjusted.
Screw the transparent cover back on the housing and
tighten with the screw (1).
The position indicator is connected in standard version

with unit plug.
Electrical position indicator type ER 52
Type of switch
Switching capacity
ER52-1
Microswitch AgNi
250 V~/6 A
ER52-2
Microswitch with goldplated Au
4-30 V=/1 - 100 mA
ER52-3
5 - 30 V=/0.1 A
ER 52-4
5-30 V=/0.1A
ER52-5
Inductive switch Namur
8V=
ER 52-6
Microswitch Eexd
250 V~/5 A
ER52-7
Analog position sensor
15-30 V=/4 - 20 mA
Type
Electrical position indicator type ER53

Type of switch
Switching capacity
ER53-1
Microswitch AgNi
250 V~/6 A
ER53-2
Microswitch with goldplated Au
4-30 V=/1-100 mA
ER53-3
10-30 V=/0.1 A
ER 53-4
10-30 V=/0.1 A
ER53-5
Inductive switch Namur
8V=
ER 53-6
Microswitch EExd
250 V~/5 A
ER53-7
Analog position sensor
15-30 V=/4 - 20 mA
Type
Connection diagrams
ER 52-1, ER 52-2, ER 53-1, ER 53-2
Type
ER52-1
ER52-2
ER53-1
ER53-2
685
01
closed
02
open
03
black
01
closed
04
white
02
open
05
red
03
white
04
red
05
green
06
black
ER 52-3, ER 52-4
Type
ER52-3
ER 52-4
ER52-5
Type
ER52-5
01
closed
02
open
03
blue
04
black
05
black
06
brown
ER 53-3, ER 53-4
Type
ER53-3
ER 53-4
closed
open
blue
brown
ER53-5
Type
ER53-5
686
closed
open
black
white
Type
025 - FC
025 - FO/DA
DN
mm
Actuator size
Actuator size
15
20
25
32
40
50
ER 52-6, ER 53-6
Type
ER 52-6
ER 53-6
Actuator size
D (PP-GF)
mm
D (PA-GF ST 195-BW)
mm
68
65
96
92
120
115
01
closed
02
open
03
green
150
142
04
brown
180
168
05
white
Spare parts list
ER 52-7, ER 53-7
Type
ER52-7
ER53-7
For detailed information, see special data sheet.
Actuator sizes Diastar DN 15 - 50

Type
Eco - FC
028 - FC
DN
mm
Actuator size
Actuator size
15
20
25
32
40
50
Pos. Item
Pcs. Material
ER52-1/2
1
2
3
Cover set,
consisting of:
Cover
O-ring
Screw
1
1
1
SAN
NBR
198000217
Unit plug, consisting of:

Cable socket
Profile sealing
1
1
NBR
198000214 198000216
Adapter complete *
Size 1,2
199190387
Size 3
199190388
Size 4 - 5
199190389
ER52-3/4/
5
*For combination ER52 / ER53 / lift limiter / manual

override
687
Pos. Item
Pcs. Material
ER53-1/2/
7
ER53-3/4/
5
1
2
3
Cover set,
consisting of:
Cover
O-ring
Screw
1
1
1
SAN
NBR
198000213
Unit plug, consisting of:

Cable socket
Profile sealing
1
1
NBR
198000214 198000216
Adapter complete *
199190310
type 028/ 025 and can indicate a valve position, open

or closed. The switching point can be easily set with the
adjustable Reed contact.
Design
*For combination ER52 / ER53 / lift limiter / manual

override

Introduction
This document contains a description of and instruction

for the installation and adjustment of the electrical position indicator type ER55.
The position indicator must always be disconnected
from the mains before any work is done on it.
Only trained, authorised personnel may carry out any
work on the position indicator.
According to the machine guideline 98/37/EC (former
89/392/EEC), these actuators/valves are not considered machines, but may be built into an installation
which is considered a machine.
Unscrew indicator cap on actuator
Screw adapter (1) into insert (2)
Snap magnet holder (3) onto indicator pin (4)
Screw cap (5) onto adapter (1)
Slide Reed contact (6) onto guide of cap and adjust
Fix screw (7)
Adjustment
Set Reed contact to the desired switching point, add another 2 mm as safety. Fix Reed contact with screw (7).
Valve "OPEN": Contact closed
Valve "CLOSED": Contact open
Drawing: Valve in open position "OPEN"

Machine Guideline 98/37/EC (former 89/
392/EEC)
Description
Electric position indicators are used to signal the valve
positions. The GF position indicator type ER 55 can be
screwed directly into the diaphragm valve series Diastar
Valve "OPEN": Contact open

Valve "CLOSED": Contact closed
Drawing: Valve in position "CLOSED"
688
Ordering data
ER55-1:
DN15 50:199 190 462
ER55-2:
DN65 150:199 190 464
Spare parts:
Reed contact
198 804 875
AS interface
Connection wiring diagram
For our pneumatic activator we offer the following products to connect them to an Asi network:
Description
Technical data
AS interface type topmatic for DN15 - DN100

DIASTAR
Technical data
Nominal voltage:
250 V, 50 60 Hz max.
Max. continuous
current:
200 mA
Peak switch-on cur-

rent:
500 mA (use contact protection relay in case of inductive load)
Contact fitted:
monostable Reed contact
Electrical connection:
Standard plug DIN EN 175301-803
Protection class:
IP65 as per IEC EN 60529
Dimensions (mm)
The Topmatic:
The Asi accessory enables a modern and easy connection to an Asi network. The controller contains all the
necessary electric and pneumatic components. All you
need to install is a serial cable and the air connections
to actuate up to 62 valves independently.
Description
AS interface type ASVC 2300-11 for PA11/21 and PA30 - 90
For further information about AS interfaces please refer

to Chapter Accessories for electrical actuators, AS
interface
X: 199 190 462: 75 mm

199 190 464: 48 mm
689

Basics
Abbreviation Meaning
Heating example
Controlled variable
Actual temperature
Set point
Target temperature
(20C)
System deviation
Target minus actual temperature
Actuating variable
Valve output from the

controller, valve position
of the heating valve
Disturbance variable
e.g. opened window
Control process
Space heating and room
Controller
User or thermostat valve
Usually closed loops are pictured as block diagrams. In

the following a simplified block diagram of a standard
closed loop is shown.
Introduction to control engineering
Closed loop controlling is a procedure where the controlled variable is recorded continuously, compared with
another variable (set point) andadapted to that value.
Control engineering is usually used, if the following variables have to be controlled:
Flow
Pressure
Temperature
Fill level
Ratio control (e.g. mixing of media)
The most suitable way to explain the basics of automatic control technique is an example:
Heating example
A user of a room heating opens the heating valve until,
according to experience, 20C ambient temperature are
achieved. Due to the valve position, the heating output
and flow rate are defined. But the actually achieved ambient temperature is affected by general conditions like
opened or closed windows. However, the changing temperature does not influence the heating valve position.
This target and actual temperature deviation does not
influence the heating valve and so in control technique it
is called an open loop (open action flow).
If the user wants to achieve the exactly room temperature, the open loop of the room heating must be completed with a controller. The controller function can
be adopted by the user. If the ambient temperature
is above or below thedesired 20C, the valve can be
opened or closed by the user. However, the controller,
the user, knows the temperature difference and attempts to override it. Through theaction of the user,
a closed process (closed loop, closed action flow) is
generated,which is characteristic for automatic control technique. New heating systems are of course controlled by thermostats.
Feedback (degenerative feedback) compare target

and actual values
Control process
The dynamic behavior of a control process is primary

described byits time response. With a step response,
the behaviour of the controlled variable towards the
change of the actuating variable can be described.
Therefore the input signal changes abruptly by a test
signal. Depending on the attributes, control processes
are classified in the following groups:
P control process (proportional behavior)
P processes have a proportional behaviour;this means
the controlled variable changes proportional to the
actuating variable. P processes have a proportional
behaviour;this means the controlled variable changes
proportional to the actuating variable. These control processes are again classified in the following:
P0-behaviour
PT1-behaviour
PT2-behaviour
P
0
-behaviour
The time factor is irrelevant in this process.
Terminology
Basic terms in control engineering according to DIN

19226 are:
690
T control process (control process with dead time)

T
-behaviour
In the control engineering, the span of time, which
passed by till a change on the input receives the output of a control process, is called dead time. This is the
time, in the heating example, which the user needs to
readjust the heating valve to get the desired temperature (set point).
P controllers are used in control processes which are

easy to set. With only little complexity, a stable and dynamic control behaviour can be achieved.
Advantages
I control process (integral behaviour)

I
o
-behaviour
The actuating variable in the I control process is never zero. Thereforean equilibrium condition can not be
achieved. Consequently, the controlled variable constantly rises or falls. This is the behaviour of a control
process without equilibrium.
Simple design
Easy adjustment
Very stable controlling if the right dimension is chosen
Disadvantages
Enduring control deviation due to disturbancescan
not be compensated completely
Unsuitable for control process with dead time only
I controller
If the control deviation has to the adjusted completely,
an I controller is recommendable.The actuating variable
y rises slowly, while the actuating variable on a P controller achieves its final value immediately.Thus,the I
controller responses todisturbance slowly.
Controller
Controllers affect a control process with a control signal so that controlled variable and set point values are
equal. Thus, a controller consists of a comparing and
controlling element. Generating the actuating variable
y from the system deviation e is done by the controlling
element.
Controllers differ from each other, depending on their
function to adopt actuating variables. Typically, controllers are classified in continuous and non-continuous
controllers.
Continuous controller
P controller
I controller
D controller
PI controller
PD controller
Advantage
No enduring control deviation
D controller
Non-continuous controller
On/Off controller
Two-Step controller
Three-Step Controller
Multi-Step Controller
...
Continuous controller
P controller
The system deviation eon P controllers is always proportional to the actuating variable y. Therefore a P controller can react to changes without time loss and generates an actuating variable only if a system deviation exists.
The D controller is only usedin combination with the Pand/or I controller. It isnot responding to the control deviation, but to its rate of change.
Advantage
Disadvantages
Disadvantage
Does not recognise enduring control deviation
691
PI controller
The PI controller combines the advantages of the Pand I controller. It is often used in practice, since most
of the control tasks can be solved. In case short actuating times are required, despite control path delays,a
PID controller should be chosen.

Even faster design
High quality of control, if dead time is not predominantly in the process
Disadvantage
Complex design and adjustment compared to a P
controller
Non-continuous controller
Advantages
Useable for almost all control processes
On/Off controller
To actuate a control process, On/Off Controllers with relays or solenoid valves are often used. This closed-loop
control operates without setting up control parameters
and is cost-saving. However, it should only be used with
low requirements regarding the quality of control.
Disadvantage
Complex design and adjustment compared to a P
controller
PD controller
A PD controller is used, if a P controller is not sufficient due to its enduring control deviation, e.g. in control paths with long delay. This can be the case in control processes with large delays, for instance. Because
of its D part the actuating speed is higher compared to a
P controller and generates a bigger control dynamic.
Two-Step controller
This controller represents an enhancement of the On/
Off Controller.As indicated by the name, the controller
can adopt only two initial states (actuating variables).
The difference is within the frequency of the cycle of operation. A common example for Two-Step controlling is
space heating. Here, an expanding element controls the
flow in the valve.
Advantage
PD controllers are very fast
Disadvantage
Enduring control deviation limits the field of application.
PID controller
The PID controller is suitable for control processes with
large energy storages and thus for control processes of
higher order. The positive attributes of PD and PI controller are combined within this controller.
Advantages
692
Three-Step Controller
The Three-Step Controller can adopt three different initial states. For example in a heating system the states
On and Off can be enhanced with the state Cooling. According to that, the controller inherits the function of two coupled Two-Step Controllers which switch
in different states.
Valve applications often use Three-Step Controllers in
junction with electric actuators. With the three possible
actuating variables an actuator can run the valve in any
desired position, like the states counter-clockwise for
e.g. opening, clockwise for e.g. closing and off.
Design and application of a control
The controllers of +GF+ Piping Systems are mostly

used in combination with Signet products and actuated valves. These kind of valvesare diaphragm valves,
butterfly valves and ball valves. In doing so, the valves
have to be equippedwith additional control units. These
control units, also known as positioners, are offered by
+GF+ in following versions:
+GF+ actuators
+GF+ Positioners
Electric actuator (EA)
PE25
Butterfly valves and ball

valves
Pneumatic actuator(PA)
Butterfly valves and ball

valves
Pneumatic actuator
DIASTAR
DSR 201 (for rotary actuators)

DSR 100 and 101 (for lift actuators)
Diaphragm valves
Continuous level control within a filtration process:

In this process the level meter transfers the measured
pressure value to the transmitter. The transmitter converts this input signal to a standardized output signal.
Following, this signal will be passed on to the PID controller. It compares set point and actual value and adjusts it. Afterwards, the signal will be transferred to the
positioner, which initiates the actuation of the ball valve.
In control engineering, PID controllers and positioners

have different tasks:
The positioner receives a standardized signal from the
superior PID controller, e.g. 4-20mA and implements
the signal on site by initiating the actuator. Thus, the superior PID controlleris free of typical disturbance variables and therefore the quality of control is better.
It is the task of the PID controller to continuously capture the control variable, to compare it with another variable (set point), and to adjust it.
PE70-1/ -2
S - Sensor; T - Transmitter, C - Controller, P - Positioner, A - Actuator, V - Valve, F - Pipes, Fittings

Fields of applications are among other things:
Ratio control:
In this example the paddlewheel flow sensor passes an
electrical impulse on to the transmitter. This transmitter
changes the electrical impulse to a standardized signal,
e.g. 4-20 mA. Afterwards this signal will be forwarded
to the PID controller. Here, the comparison between set
point and actual value, as well as the adjustment, takes
place. Following, this signal, which is standardized as
well(e.g. 4-20 mA), will be transferred to the positioner. Now the positioner initiates the actuation of the ball
valve.
Description
The PID controller PE70-1/ -2 is a process-controller

that is suitable for standard control functions like a single loop control, as well as for the more sophisticated
ratio control function.
693
For this, the unit provides simple 2-point (on/off) control,

continuous PID control, or 3-point stepping control.The
process value signal is connected via a universal
input.A supplementary analog input can be used for position feedback mesaurement of motorized stepping
controllers or as an external set-point input.
Features
Self-tuning function
Universal version (continous and switching) for reduced stock
100ms cycle time
20ms as shortest pulse length
Splash water proof front (IP65)
Two individual configurable analog output
Logical combination of digital output, e.g. alarms
Process value input INP1

Resolution:
>14 bit
Decimal point:
0 to 3 decimal places
Scanning cycle:
100ms
Measured value correction:
2-point or offset correction
Current and voltage signals

Voltage:
0-10 Volt
2.5...115mV
25...1150mV
Current:
0-20mA
4-20mA
Start and end of span:
anywhere withing the range
Scaling:
-1999...9999
Decimal point:
adjustable
Input circuit monitor:
12.5% below span start
Supplementary input INP2

Resolution:
>14 bit
Scanning cycle:
100ms
Current measurement range

Voltage:
0-10 Volt
2.5...115mV
25...1150mV
Input resistance:
approx. 120
Span:
configurable within 0...20mA
Scaling:
-1999...9999
Control Inputs di1, di2

Configurable as direct or inverse switch or push-button! Connection of a potential-free contact suitable for switching dry
circuits.
Switched voltage:
5V
Current:
100A
Outputs
Inputs
Input
Used for
INP1
As INP2 (x1default standard process value)
INP2
Heating current, ext. set-point or ext. correction,

position feedback Yp, process value x1, 2nd
process value x2, ext.correcting variable Y.E,
input for additional limit signalling and indication
di1
di2
Operation disabled, controller off, disabled auto/

manual function, reset of stored alarms, switchover to ... second set-point SP.2, external setpoint SP.E, fixed correcting variable Y2, ext.
correcting variable Y.E, manual operation, parameter set 2, 2nd process valueX2
694
Output
Used for
OUT1 and
OUT2 (relay)
Control output heating/cooling or Open/Close,

limit contacts, alarms *
OUT3, 4
(relays or
logic)
as OUT1 and OUT2
OUT3, 4
Control output, process value, measured values
(continous) INP1/2/3, set-point, control deviation, position
feedback Yp, transmitter supply 13 V / 22 mA

* All logic signals can be OR-linked!
Relay Outputs OUT1...OUT4

Contact type:
Potential-free changeover
contact
Max. contact rating:
500 VA, 250 VAC, 2A at 48

...62 Hz, resistive load
Min. contact rating:
6 V, 1 mA AC/DC
Duty cycles electric:
for I = 1A/2A: 800,000 /

500,000 (at 250V / (resistive
load))
Note:
If the relays operate external contactors, these must be fitted with RC snubber circuits to manufacturer specifications
to prevent excessive switch-off voltage peaks.
OUT3, OUT4 as universal output

Galvanically isolated from the inputs.
Freely scalable DA-converter limiting frequency T90:
50ms
Limiting frequency of the complete contin- >2 Hz

uous controller:
Resolution:
11 bit
Current output
0/4...20 mA, configurable.
Signal range:
0...approx.22mA
Load max.:
500
Load effect:
none
Resolution:
22 A (0.1%)
Accuracy:
40 A (0.2%)
Voltage output
0/2...10 V, configurable.
Signal range:
0...11V
Load min.:
2 k
Load effect:
none
Resolution:
11mV (0.1%)
Accuracy:
20 mV (0.2%)
OUT3, OUT4 used as transmitter supply

Output:
22mA/ 13V
OUT3 used as logic output

Load 500
0/ 20 mA
Load >500
0/ >13 V
Functions
Control behaviour
Signaler with asymmetric adjustable switching differential (ON/OFF controller)
PID controller (2-point and continuous)
Delta / Star / Off or 2-point controller with switch over
from partial to full load
2 x PID (heating/cooling)
3-point stepping controller with or without position

feedback
Continuous controller with internal positioner (stepping controller)
Two parameter sets for manual gain scheduling Selftuning control parameters or adjustable manually via
front keys or BlueControl software.
Behaviour with 2- and 3-point controllers
Standard behaviour:
For precise matching of the required output value at
the output signal limits, the controller changes the cycle times for heating and cooling automatically and
continuously.
With constant cycle times:
The length of the shortest heating and cooling pulse is
adjustable >20ms.
Water cooling linear (heating=standard):
To ensure a sufficient cooling effect, the cooling function starts only after reaching an adjustable temperature value. The pulse length is adjustable, >20ms too
and remains constant for all output values.
Water cooling nonlinear (heating=standard):
The general function is described above. However, the controller additionally takes in consideration
that the water cooling is usually much stronger than
the heating (thus preventing unfavourable behaviour
when changing from heating to cooling).
Set-point functions
Adjustable set-point gradient (degree) 0.01...9999 C/
min
Set-point control
Set-point/cascade control
Set-point/cascade control with external correction
Process value correction
Standard (xeff = INP1)
Ratio (INP1/X2)
Difference (INP1-X2)
Max (INP1, X2)*
Min (INP1, X2)*
Mean value (INP1, X2)*
Switch-over between INP1 and X2
*applicable, if redundant sensors are necessary. If one
sensor fails the rest can go on.
Behaviour with sensor break or short circuit:
Control outputs switched off
Switch-over to a safe output value
Switch-over to a mean output value
With process value functions min,max and mean value, control iscontinued with the remaining processvalue.
Alarms and limit signalling functions

Control loop alarm
Automatic detection if there is no response of the process to a change of output value.
695
Sensor break or short circuit

Depending on selected input type, the input signal is
monitored for break and short circuit.
Limit signalling
Max., Min. or Max./Min. monitoring with adjustable hysteresis.
Signals which can be monitored:
Process value
Control deviation
Control deviation with suppression during start-up or
set-point changes
Effective set-point
Actuating variable Y
Input values of INP1, INP2, INP3
Difference INP1 - X2. This function allows to detect
aged thermocouples.
Functions
Input signal monitoring
Input signal monitoring with alarm storage (reset via
front keys or digital input)
Rate of change monitoring (/min)
Adjustable discriminator time of 0...9999 seconds
Several limit signals or alarms can be OR-linked before
being output. Applications: Release of a brake with motor actuators, general alarms, etc.
Maintenance manager
Display of error signals, warnings, and stored limit messages in the error list. Signals are stored, and can be reset manually. Possible signals in the error list:
Sensor break, short circuit, reversed polarity
Heating current alarm
Control loop alarm
Fault during self-tuning
stored limit messages
Re-calibration warning
Maintenance interval of actuator
Internal fault (RAM, EEPROM, ...)
Technical information
Housing material
Makrolon 9415, flame retardant,
Flammability class: UL94VO, self-extinguishing
Screw terminals for conductorcross-section from 0.5 to
2.5 mm
Auxiliary energy
Depending on version:
AC voltage
Voltage
90...260 VAC
Frequency
48...62 Hz
Power consumption
approx. 8VA
696
Universal supply 24 V UC
AC voltage
20.4...26.4 VAC
Frequency
48...62 Hz
DC voltage
18...31 VDC
Power consumption
approx. 8VA (W)
Behaviour in case of power failure

Configuration, parameters, and adjusted set-points, control
mode: Permanent storage in EEPROM
Protection class
Front panel:
IP 65
Housing:
IP 20
Terminals:
IP 00
Permissible temperatures
Operation:
0..60C
Temperature effect:
<100ppm/K
Operation limit:
-20..65C
Storage:
-40..70C
Humidity
75% yearly average, no condensation
Self-tuning
For determination of optimum process parameters, selftuning is possible.

After starting the controller makes an adaption attempt.
Whereby the process characteristics are used to calculate the parameters for fast line-out to the set-point without overshoot.
Preparation
Adjust controller measuring range as control range
limits.[rnG-L] and [rnG.H] to the limits of subsequent
control.
Determine which parameter set shall be optimized.
(The instantaneously effective parameter set is optimized). Activate the relevant one(1 or 2).
Select the self-tuning method.
Selectable self-tuning methods:
Step attempt after start-up
Pulse attempt after start-up
Optimization at the set point
Start conditions
A stable condition is required for the evaluation of the
control process.. Therefore, the controller waits until the process has reached a stable condition after
self-tuning start.The rest condition is considered being

reached, when the actual value oscillation is smaller
than 0.5% of ([rnG.H] - [rnG.L]).
For self-tuning after start-up, a 10% difference from
([SP.LO] ... [SP.Hi]) is required.
Start
Self-tuning start can be blocked via BlueControl software.
[Strt]=0
Only manual start by pressing keys [Enter] and

[Up] simultaneously or via interface is possible.
[Strt]=1
Manual start by pressing keys [Enter] and [Up

] simultaneously via interface and automatic
start after power-on and detection of process
oscillations.
Manual self-tuning
The optimization aid can be used with units on which

control parameters shall be without self-tuning.
Adjustment aids
Parameter
Control process
[Pb1] higher increased damping
smaller reduced damping
[td1] higher reduced damping
smaller increased damping
[ti1] higher increased damping
Fault
Start-up behaviour
slower line-out
slower reduction of duty-cycle
faster line-out
faster reduction of duty cycle
faster response to disturbances
slower response to disturbances
slower reduction of duty cycle
slower line-out
faster line-out
PE70-3/ -4
For this, the unit provides simple 2-point (on/off) control,

continuous PID control, or 3-point stepping control.The
process value signal is connected via a universal input. A supplementary analog input can be used for position feedback mesaurement of motorized stepping controllers or as an external set-point input.
Features
Self-tuning function
Universal version (continous and switching) for reduced stock
100ms cycle time
Splash water proof front (IP65)
Two individual configurable analog output
Freely configurable analog output
Logical combination of digital output, e.g. alarms
Description
The PID controller PE70-3/ -4 is a process-controller

that is suitable for standard control functions like a single loop control.
697
Supplementary input INP2

Resolution:
>14 bit
Scanning cycle:
100ms
Current measurement range

Voltage:
0-10 Volt
2.5...115mV
25...1150mV
Input resistance:
approx. 120
Span:
configurable within 0...20mA
Scaling:
-1999...9999
Control Input di1

Configurable as direct or inverse switch or push-button! Connection of a potential-free contact suitable for switching dry
circuits.
Switched voltage:
2.5V
Current:
50A
Outputs
Inputs
Output
Used for
OUT1 and
OUT2 (relay)
Control output heating/cooling or Open/Close,

limit contacts, alarms *
OUT3 (re- as OUT1 and OUT2

lays or logic)
Input
Used for
INP1
x (process value)
INP2
Heating current, ext. set-point
di1
di2 (option) di3
(option)
Operation disabled, switch-over to ... second

set-point SP.2, external set-point SP.E, fixed
output signal Y2,manual operation, controller
off, disabled auto/manual key, reset stored
alarms, timer start
Process value input INP1

Resolution:
>14 bit
Decimal point:
0 to 3 decimal places
Scanning cycle:
100ms
Measured value correction:
2-point or offset correction
OUT3
Control output, process value,set-point, control
(continous) deviation,transmitter supply 13 V / 22 mA
* All logic signals can be OR-linked!
Relay Outputs OUT1, OUT2

Contact type:
2 NO contacts with common

connection
500 VA, 250 VAC, 2A at 48

...62 Hz, resistive load
6 V, 1 mA AC/DC
for I = 1A/2A: 800,000 /

500,000 (at 250V / (resistive
load))
Current and voltage signals

Voltage:
0-10 Volt
2.5...115mV
25...1150mV
Current:
0-20mA
4-20mA
Start and end of span:
anywhere withing the range
Scaling:
-1999...9999
Decimal point:
adjustable
698
Note:
If the relays operate external contactors, these must be fitted with RC snubber circuits to manufacturer specifications
to prevent excessive switch-off voltage peaks.
OUT3 as universal output
Galvanically isolated from the inputs.

Freely scalable DA-converter 50ms
limiting frequency T90:
Limiting frequency of the
complete continuous controller:
>2 Hz
Resolution:
11 bit
Current output
0/4...20 mA, configurable.
Set-point functions
Adjustable set-point gradient0.01...9999 C/min
Set-point control
Set-point/cascade control
Program controller with 4 segments (set-point/section
time)
Behaviour in case of sensor break or short circuit:
Control outputs switched off
Switch-over to a safe output value
Switch-over to a mean output value
Signal range:
0...approx. 21.5mA
Load max.:
500
Load effect:
0.02% / 100
Resolution:
22 A (0.1%)
Accuracy:
40 A (0.2%)
Sensor break or short circuit

Depending on selected input type, the input signal is
monitored for break and short circuit.
Signal range:
0...11V
Load min.:
2 k
Limit signalling
Max., Min. or Max./Min. monitoring with adjustable hysteresis.
Load effect:
none
Resolution:
11mV (0.1%)
Accuracy:
20 mV (0.2%)
Voltage output
0/2...10 V, configurable.
OUT3 used as transmitter supply

Output:
22mA/ 13V
OUT3 used as logic output

Load 500
0/ 20 mA
Load >500
0/ >13 V
OUT3 as relay output

Contact type:
Potential-free changeover
contact
500VA, 250VAC, 2A at 48
...62HZ, resistive load
5V, 10mA AC/DC
for I=1A/2A:1,000,000/
600,000, resistive load
Functions
Control behaviour
Signaler withadjustable switching differential (ON/
OFF controller)
PID controller (2-point and continuous)
Delta / Star / Off or 2-point controller with switch over
from partial to full load
2 x PID (heating/cooling, 3-point and continuous)
3-point stepping controller
Self-tuning control parameters or adjustable manually
via front keys or BlueControl software.
Alarms and limit signalling functions

Control loop alarm
Automatic detection if there is no response of the process to a change of output value.
Signals which can be monitored:

Process value
Control deviation
Control deviation with suppression during start-up or
set-point changes
Effective set-point
Actuating variable Y
Functions
Input signal monitoring
Input signal monitoring with latch (reset via front key
or digital input)
Several limit signals or alarms can be OR-linked before
being output. Applications: Release of a brake with motor actuators, general alarms, etc.
Maintenance manager
Display of error signals, warnings, and stored limit messages in the error list. Signals are stored, and can be reset manually. Possible signals in the error list:
Sensor break, short circuit, reversed polarity
Heating current alarm
Control loop alarm
Fault during self-tuning
stored limit messages
Re-calibration warning
Maintenance interval of actuator
Internal fault (RAM, EEPROM, ...)
Technical information
Housing material
Makrolon 9415, flame retardant,
Flammability class: UL94VO, self-extinguishing
Screw terminals for conductor cross-section from 0.5 to
2.5 mm
699
Auxiliary energy
Depending on version:
AC voltage
Voltage
90...260 VAC
Frequency
48...62 Hz
Power consumption
approx. 7VA
Universal supply 24 V UC
AC voltage
20.4...26.4 VAC
Frequency
48...62 Hz
DC voltage
18...31 VDC
Power consumption
approx. 7VA (W)
Behaviour in case of power failure

Configuration, parameters, and adjusted set-points, control
mode: Non-volatile storage in EEPROM
Protection class
Front panel:
IP 65
Housing:
IP 20
Terminals:
IP 00
Permissible temperatures
Operation:
0..60C
Temperature effect:
<100ppm/K
For operation:
-20..65C
For storage:
-40..70C
Humidity
75% yearly average, no condensation
Self-tuning
For determination of optimum process parameters, selftuning is possible.

After starting the controller makes an adaption attempt.
After starting the controller makes an adaption attempt,
whereby the process characteristics are used to calculate the parameters for fast line-out to the set-point without overshoot.
Preparation
Adjust controller measuring range as control range
limits. [rnG-L] and [rnG.H ] to the limits of subsequent
control.
700
Start conditions
A stable condition is required for the evaluation of the
control process.. Therefore, the controller waits until
the process has reached a stable condition after selftuning start. The rest condition is considered being
reached, when the process value oscillation is smaller
than 0.5% of ([rnG.H]- [rnG.L]).
Start
Self-tuning start can be blocked via BlueControl Software.
The operator can start self-tuning at any time. For this,
keys [Enter] and [Up] must be pressed simultaneously
until the AdA LED starts blinking.
Manual self-tuning
The optimization aid can be used with units on which

control parameters shall be without self-tuning.
Adjustment aids
Parameter
Control process
[Pb1] higher increased damping
[td1] higher reduced damping
smaller increased damping
[ti1] higher increased damping
Fault
Start-up behaviour
slower line-out
faster line-out
faster response to disturbances
slower response to disturbances
slower reduction of duty cycle
slower line-out
faster line-out
701
702
Fundamentals for Measurement and Control
Georg Fischer Signet offers on-line information and assistance

Choosing Products
-- System Selection Guide

-- Features and Benefits
Systems
-- 4630 Chlorine Analyser System

-- 2630 Amperometric Chlorine Electrode
-- 2650 DryLoc Amperometric Electronics
-- 8630 Chlorine Transmitter
-- 2750-7 pH Electronics
-- 4150 Turbidimeter
Dissolved Oxygen
-- 2610 Process Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor
Multi Parameter Instruments

-- 9900 SmartPro Transmitter
-- 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller
Flow
-- 515 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors

-- 525 Metalex Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
-- 2536 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors
-- 2537 Paddlewheel Flowmeter
-- 2540 Stainless Steel High Performance Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
-- 3519 Flow Wet-Tap Valve
-- 2551 Magmeter Flow Sensor
-- 2552 Metal Magmeter Flow Sensor
-- 2100 Turbine Flow Sensor
-- 2000 Micro Flow Rotor Sensor
-- 2507 Mini Flow Rotor Sensor
-- 5075 Totalising Flow Monitor
-- 5090 Sensor-Powered Flow Monitor
-- 5500 Flow Monitor
-- 5600 Batch Controller
-- 8150 Battery Powered Flow Totaliser
-- 8550 Flow Transmitters
pH/ORP
-- 2724-2726 DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes

-- 2774-2777 DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes
-- 2764-2767 Differential DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes
-- 3719 pH/ORP Wet-Tap Assembly
-- 2750 DryLoc pH/ORP Sensor Electronics
-- 2760 DryLoc pH/ORP Preamplifiers and Connectors
-- 5700 pH/ORP Monitor
-- 8750 pH/ORP Transmitters
Conductivity/Resistivity
-- 2819-2823 Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes

-- 2839-2842 Conductivity Electrodes
-- 2850 Conductivity/Resistivity Sensor Electronics and Integral Systems
-- 5800CR Conductivity/Resistivity Monitor
-- 5900 Salinity Monitor
-- 8850 Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters
-- 8860 Two-Channel Conductivity/Resistivity Controllers
Page
705
706
706
711
711
711
711
712
712
713
714
714
715
715
715
715
716
716
716
717
717
717
717
718
718
718
718
719
719
720
720
720
721
721
721
721
722
723
723
723
723
724
724
724
703

Temperature/Pressure/Level
-- 2250 Submersible Hydrostatic Pressure Sensor

-- 2350 Temperature Sensor
-- 2450 Pressure Sensor
-- 8250 Level Transmitters
-- 8350 Temperature Transmitters
-- 8450 Pressure Transmitters
Other Products
-- 0251 PC COMM Configuration Tool

-- 0250 USB to Digital (S3L) Configuration/Diagnostic Tool
-- 6400 Intrinsic Safety Barriers
-- 7300 Switching Power Supplies
-- i-Go 8058 Signal Converter
-- 8059 External Relay Modules
Calibration Accessories
-- pH/ORP Buffer Solutions

-- Calibration Kits for 4150 Turbidimeter
-- Formazin Stock Kit for 4150 Turbidimeter
-- 2759 pH/ORP System Tester
-- Conductivity/Resistivity Tools
Installation
-- Installation of Turbidity
-- Installation of Flow Sensors
-- Installation of pH/ORP Electrodes
-- Installation of Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes
-- Installation of Pressure/Level Sensors
-- Installation of Temperature Sensors
Wiring
-- Wiring Information: Turbidity

-- Wiring Information: Sensors & Electrodes
-- Wiring Information: Instruments
Technical Reference
-- Section: Flow
-- Section: pH/ORP
-- Section: Conductivity/Resistivity
-- Relay Information
-- Open collector output
-- Control Output Comparisons
-- RC Filter
-- Conversion Factors
-- Application Assistance Form
Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs
Page
725
725
725
725
726
726
727
727
727
727
727
727
729
729
729
729
729
730
730
736
738
739
740
742
742
744
750
753
756
758
758
760
760
761
763
-- Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs: Flow Sensors

-- Pressure Drop Graphs: Flow Sensors
-- Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs: pH/ORP Electrodes
-- Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs: Conductivity Electrodes
-- Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs: Temperature/Pressure Graphs
-- Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs: Fittings
-- Backpressure Drop Graphs: Flow Sensors
765
766
767
767
768
768
769
Glossary
771
704
Fundamentals for Measurement

and Control
Georg Fischer Signet offers on-line information and assistance
Please visit our website at www.gfsignet.com for:

Product information the Products link guides you
to the latest product details including data sheets and
manuals to assist in product selection, product installation, calibration and operations. Manuals are provided in
multiple languages.
The Signet Application Library a collection of typical industry applications and processes with detailed
schematics, common measurement requirements and
Signet products to meet those needs.
Technical articles A library of case studies, technical
product write-ups and application solutions, sorted by
technology and application
705
Choosing Products
System Selection Guide
This section provides tips and suggestions on how to
choose just the right measurement system for your specific liquid application needs. For specific product information, refer to the individual catalog sheets.
Step 1: Determine Application Requirements
Defining the following variables before building your
system will ensure peak performance from your Signet
sensors and instruments.
Measurement range
Installation requirements
Pipe size and material
Chemical compatibility of all wetted parts to process
chemicals
Systems specifications (such as temperature and
pressure)
Performance requirements of sensor
Fluid particulates
Viscosity of Fluids
Hazardous location requirements
Features and Benefits

Multi-Parameter Instruments
9900 SmartPro Transmitter
Multi-Parameter input selection
Large auto-sensing backlit display with at a glance
visibility Dial-type digital bar graph
Intuitive and user-friendly interface consistent with
legacy Signet ProPoint and ProcessPro devices
Optional field upgradable relays
Selectable error mode for current outputs, 3.6 mA or
22 mA
4 to 20 mA input (with optional 8058 Signal Converter)
Warning LED indicator
Custom 13-character label capabilities for the channel
type Factory reset capability
Optional PC COMM configuration tool
Optional H COMM module for two-way communication
Step 2: Select Sensor Technology

Based on the application requirements determined in
Step 1, choose a sensor. For pH/ORP and Conductivity/Resistivity electrodes, select your preferred connection style. Keep in mind various connection types such
as cable or DryLoc systems. In addition, users may be
required to choose a preamplifier or sensor electronics.
Then, determine your signal output requirement to allow you to match just the right instrument (see Step 3).
If youre not purchasing an instrument, select the sensor
electronics package that best suits your needs.
Step 3: Choose instrument

Choose an instrument. All units are available in 1/4 DIN
panel or field configuration and are available with either
digital, analog, or analog/digital display. Various retrofit
adapters and mounting accessories are also available
(see Accessories section). In cases where the sensor
feeds directly to a PLC or PC system, Signet offers a
wide range of instruments and sensors with 4 to 20 mA
outputs.
Note: Please contact your local Georg Fischer sales
and support office if you need assistance in choosing
any one of these products.
Step 4: Determine Installation Requirements
Signet offers a wide selection of installation fittings for
in-line pH/ORP electrodes. These fittings are specifically designed to ensure the proper placement of the electrode in the system to achieve optimum performance.
Other pH electrodes as well as all temperature, pressure and conductivity/resistivity electrodes use standard
fittings. All submersion electrodes require conduit piping
and fixtures not supplied by Signet.
706
Chlorine
Chlorine Analyser System
Reagent free measuring
Complete panel system allows for quick and easy installation.
Built-in flow regulator maintains constant flow and
pressure to the sensors.
Panel includes a 100-240 VAC power supply, two 4 to
20 mA outputs and two mechanical relays.
Optional automatic pH and temperature compensation.
Simple desiccant pouch keeps the measuring chamber dry.

Easy access for replacing desiccant.
Standard EPA 180.1 for USA and Asia. ISO 7027 for
Europe.
Quick and easy installation, calibration and maintenance.
4150 Turbidimeter
Flow Sensors
4630 Chlorine Analyser System
Dissolved Oxygen
Process Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor
Optical DO measurement no flow requirements
Rugged construction
Calibration built into the measurement cap 2% of
range 0 to 20 mg/l
One year measurement cap life
No membranes or filling solutions
Flexibel communications, 4 to 20 mA or Modbus
(RS485)
Measurement Range: 0 to 20 mg/l
Insertion Paddlewheel Sensors

Four-bladed paddle design ensures optimal performance and lower flow rates than five or six-bladed rotors that have a higher weight/bearing inertia.
The open-cell design and the controlled insertion
depth work together to deliver a linear and repeatable
output over a wide dynamic range, with virtually no
pressure drop in the process pipe.
Choice of corrosive resistant plastics and rugged metals enable use in many aggressive fluids.
The widest choice of installation fitting materials, sizes
and connections on the market that meet endless application needs.
Insertion design lowers installation and maintenance
costs.
Self-powered sensors are well suited for remote locations and are FM approved which enable installation
in hazardous locations.
Paddlewheel design has no pressure drop, making it
ideal for gravity flows.
NIST traceable test certification with all plastic sensors provides superior price-to-performance ratio.
Hot-Tap designs are available to allow service and
maintenance without shutting-down the process;
saves costly downtime.
2610 Process Optical Dissolved Oxygen Sensor
Turbidity
Turbidimeter
Simple to install with mounting holes pre-drilled on a
common pattern.
Easy and fast to calibrate.
Programmable analogue output signal.
Two adjustable alarm relays.
Easy access for wiring and maintenance.
Ultrasonic cleaning options ensures long and steady
on-line measurement.
525
Metalex
Flow Sensor
2536
Paddlewheel
Flow Sensor
707
Flow-Through Rotor Sensors

Operating flow ranges from 110 mL/min to 12110 mL/
min (0.03 US gpm to 3.2 US gpm) in clean opaque
or clear liquids ideal for precise low flow applications
such as dosing.
Hall-effect devices provide excellent noise immunity
output signals.
Sensor body design allows easy access for cleaning,
inspection and rotor replacement without the need for
powering down.
Flexibility with end connections allow flexible tubing or
rigid pipe installations.
Four fully encapsulated magnets provide high resolution signal output.
Rugged design with good chemi-cal resistance suitable for tough applications.
Analog 4 to 20 mA and frequency outputs provide signals to remote flowmeters and data acquisition. Also
available with digital (S L) output for compatibility with
multi-parameter transmitters and controllers.
High input impedance provides low sensitivity to coating which makes it ideal for dirty liquids.
Isolated outputs provide barrier to ground loops.
3
2552
Metal Magmeter
2551
Display Magmeter
Analytical Sensors and Electrodes

2507
Mini Flow Sensor
In-line Turbine Sensors

Small compact design for tightly-spaced installations.
Superior ceramic bearing provides long life without
the need for maintenance.
Radio Frequency (RF) pick-up provides added advantage without rotor drag or contamination from ferrous
particles.
Detachable electronics means sensor maintenance is
possible without the need to cut power to unit.
Composed of highly chemical resistant materials.
Mounting at any angle offers total installation flexibility.
Wide choice of end connections in hose barb, flare or
union ends.
Three flow ranges available for optimum measurement resolution.
2100
Turbine Flow Sensor
Insertion Magnetic Sensors

No moving parts means no fouling or reduced wear.
Insertion design provides easier installation and removal than full line magmeters.
Model 2551 available to fit all pipe sizes ranging from
DN15 to DN900 (0.5 to 36 in.).
Model 2552 Metal Magmeter available for pipe sizes
up to DN2550 (102 in.). Hot-Tap versions also available.
Fluid diagnostics via LED indicators.
Bi-directional flow and empty pipe detection.
708
Standard pH and ORP Electrodes:

The amplified output ensures the process signal is resistant to electrical noise and allows up to 120 m (400
ft) before connection to the instrument.
Longer reference path and larger reference volume
means extended service life.
Flat glass surface sensor design. Resistant to fouling
and abrasion in dirty applications, and prevents accidental damage to extend electrode life span.
Unique DryLoc design enables pH and ORP connections instantly.
Designed to mount in standard Signet fittings or connect to 3/4 in. standard fittings.
Option for blind 4 to 20 mA output or digital
(S L)output for long cable runs.
Preamplifier does not need replacing with electrode
which significantly reduces service costs.
2724-2726
pH/ORP Electrodes
2764-2767
pH/ORP Electrode
2774-2777
pH/ORP Electrode
2750
pH/ORP Sensor Electronics
Differential pH/ORP Electrodes:

pH and reference signals are measured against third
electrode, a solution ground, to ensure a stable reading even when the smallest of unknown stray currents
are in the process liquids.
The differential reference is designed to protect the
reference element from Br , I , CN , S and other harsh
compounds that react with Ag . Also protects the reference electrolyte from Hg , Cu , Pb , ClO4 , or other
compounds that dilute KCl.
Unique DryLoc design is robust and watertight, ensuring rugged installation.
Designed to mount in 1 in. standard pipe fittings for
easy installation.
The preamplified output ensures the process signal
is resistant to electrical noise and allows up to 120 m
(400 ft) before connection to the instrument.
Option for blind 4 to 20 mA or digital (S L) signals for
long cable runs.
Flat glass surface sensor design that is resistant to
fouling and abrasion in dirty applications.
Large reference volume and replaceable salt bridge
allows the user to rebuild the reference and extend
the service life of the electrode.
-
2760
Sensor Electronics
Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes:
Flow-through design ensures continuous measurement without air entrapment.
Reversible threaded connections for in-line integral
mount or tank submersion.
Standard parts offer application flexibility for the user.
Short length electrodes available to prevent deadlegs.
Blind 4 to 20 mA output or digital output for long cable
runs beyond 30 m (100 ft), via 2850 sensor electronics.
Every sensor uses standard electrical cable. No need
to incur additional costs for patch type cable connections.
NIST calibration certificate available upon request.
++
2839-2842 Conductivity Electrodes

2800
Series Electrodes
2850
Sensor and Electronics
Temperature, Pressure and Level Sensors

Temperature Sensors:
Unibody PVDF construction for use in either high purity or aggressive fluid conditions.
4 to 20 mA or digital (S L) signal for long cable runs
and choice of output.
Dual threaded 3/4 in. NPT for easy installation.
3
709
Options for integral mounting of instrument directly

onto sensor.
Cable and thread permits conduit for full tank submersion.
2250 Level Sensor
2350
Temperature Sensor
Pressure/Level Sensors:
1/2 in. male union process connection to suit installation needs.
Three pressure ranges to meet specific requirements
and provide optimal resolution.
4 to 20 mA or digital (S L) signal for long cable runs
and choice of output.
Unibody PVDF construction for aggressive fluid conditions.
Option for integral mounting of instrument directly onto sensor.
Configure with 8350 transmitter or multi-parameter
transmitters or controllers to provide full level measuring system (hydrostatic pressure).
Cable end threads permit conduit for full tank submersion.
3
2450 Pressure Sensor
710
Systems
4630 Chlorine Analyser System
Description
The Signet 4630 Chlorine Analyser System is an integrated all-in-one system designed to measure free chlorine. The 3-4630-21 chlorine panel with the optional
pH sensor is used to accurately calculate free chlorine
in applications that have varying pH values (0.20 pH
units).
In applications where the pH is stable, the pH sensor is
not required and the pH value is manually entered into
the transmitter to calculate the chlorine levels. (-20 version).
The unique integrated clear flow cell combines sensors,
flow regulator, filter and variable area flow indicator in
one compact unit. An integrated flow regulator with removable filter accepts inlet pressures of 1 to 8 bar (15
to 120 psi), while maintaining constant flow and minimal
pressure to the sensors.
Water flows vertically into sensor tip eliminates bubble entrapment. The flow cell is designed to maintain a
minimum amount of water to ensure sensors stay submerged, even when the system and flow is turned off.
The Signet 4630 Chlorine Analyser System allows quick
setup and easy installation and is supplied with a 100240 VAC power supply, two 4 to 20 mA outputs and
two dry contact mechanical relays. The flow cell accommodates two sensors; one chlorine and an optional pH
sensor.
Features
EPA 334.0 compliant

Reagent free measuring
Complete panel system allows for quick and easy installation
Built-in flow regulator maintains contant flow and pressure to the sensors regardless of inlet pressure
Pre-wired panel includes a 100-240 VAC power supply, two 4 to 20 mA outputs and two mechanical relays.
Optional automatic pH and temperature compensation
2630 Amperometric Chlorine Electrode

Description
The Signet 2630 Amperometric Chlorine electrode is

designed to measure free chlorine in drinking water and
wastewater treatment applications. The electrodes are
available with a measurement range of 0 to 5 ppm. This
electrode requires the Signet 2650 Amperometric Electronics module to communicate with the Signet 8630-3
Chlorine Transmitter.
Utilizing smart-sensor technology, this electrode has a
unique embedded memory chip and can communicate a
wide variety of information to the Signet 2650 electronics and Signet 8630-3 Transmitter.
Displayed information includes electrode type, factory
calibration data, service time, chlorine range, high and
low pH (with optional Signet pH electrode), temperature
values and more.
Signets patented DryLoc connector provides quick assembly and a secure connection. Gold-plated contacts
and an O-ring seal ensure a waterproof and reliable interconnect to the Signet 2650 Amperometric Electronics. The Signet 2630 Amperometric Chlorine Electrode
has an integrated temperature element for automatic
temperature compensation.
Features
Embedded memory chip accessible via the Signet

8630 transmitter
Quick assembly with Signets patented DryLoc connector
Integrated temperature element for automatic temperature compensation
Separate drive electronics (Signet 2650), for easy
electrode replacement without running new cable
2650 DryLoc Amperometric Electronics

Description
The Signet 2650 Amperometric Electronics provide the

polarization voltage and signal conditioning required by
all Signet Amperometric Sensors. The 2760 Amperometric Electronics also relays important sensor information that is stored on a memory chip inside the sensor
and displayed on the 3-8630-3P transmitter. Information
includes factory calibration data, service life, calibration
information and more.
Signets patented DryLoc connector provides a quick
and secure connection to the sensor. Gold-plated contacts and an O-ring seal ensure a waterproof and reliable interconnect to the sensor.
Sensor maintenance, replacement and troubleshooting

has never been easier. The DryLoc electronics can be
separated from the sensor, which allows the user to detect a faulty sensor, electronics or cable assembly.
Features
Passes the data stored in sensor to the Chlorine

transmitter
Patented DryLoc connector provides a quick and secure connection to the sensor
Waterproof and reliable interconnect to the sensor
Easy sensorreplacement without running new cable
Easy sensor removal for servicing
8630 Chlorine Transmitter

Description
The Signet 3-8630-3P ProcessPro Chlorine Transmitter

simultaneously displays free chlorine and pH levels on a
bright LCD backlight display.
The 8630 transmitter has two 4 to 20 mA outputs that
can be programed to transmit chlorine, pH or temperature information to a data collection device.
Two dry-contact mechanical relays can be used to deliver an alarm signal or activate a chlorine dosing system.
Programming is simple and easy with Signets standard
4 button keypad. The menu option allows the use ofan
optional pH sensor to accurately calculate free chlorine
level or select Manual pH input and enterthe applications stable pH level to determine free chlorine levels.
711
Features
Displays free chlorine 0 to 5 ppm (mg/l)

Two programmable 4 to 20 mA outputs
Two mechanical relays
Temperature and pH Compensation
Displays diagnostic information from sensor memory
Simple setup and easy customization
Backlit LCD display
2750-7 pH Electronics
Description
The Signet 2750-7 pH Electronics amplify the output

from the Signet 2724 pH Electrode and output a Digital
(S L) signal to the Signet 8630 Chlorine Transmitter.
3
Signets patented DryLoc connector provides a quick

and secure connection to the sensor. Gold-plated contacts and an O-ring seal ensure a waterproof and reliable interconnect to the sensor.
Sensor maintenance, replacement and troubleshooting

has never been easier. The DryLoc electronics can be
separated from the sensor, which allows the user to detect a faulty sensor, electronics or cable assembly.
Features
Amplifies the output from the pH electrode to the

Chlorine transmitter
Patented DryLoc connector provides a quick and secure connection to the sensor
Waterproof and reliable interconnect to the sensor
Easy sensor replacement without running new cable
Easy sensor removal for servicing
4150 Turbidimeter
Description
The Signet 4150 Turbidimeter system provides accurate

and reliable compliant water quality monitoring for municipal and industrial applications.
The 4150 measures turbidity via a 90 degree light which
reflects particles as they flow through a small volume,
low flow glass cuvette. Air bubbles are eliminated from
the cuvette by adjusting the backpressure valve on the
outlet tube. The cuvette islocated in a watertight dark
chamber for continuously accurate on-line measurement. A replaceable desiccantpack provides a dry-stable environment to ensure reliable measurements.
Simple and fast calibration can be accomplished in under five minutes by placing the In-line glass cuvettefrom
the measuring chamber into the cuvette holder while
still in service and the inlet and outlet tubing remains
connected. The inexpensive calibrationstandard allows
for dry and multiple system calibrations without mixing
chemicals. After calibration, the unit isup and running
with simple re-insertion of the glass cuvette back into
the measuring chamber.
Additional features include a message indicator when
the desiccant needs replacing and as an option, auto/
ultrasonic cleaning of the glass Inline cuvette for longer
runs between maintenance.
712
The 4150 is available in two measuring ranges. The 0 to

100 NTU/FNU version is for low range applications such
as drinking water. The 0 to 1000 NTU/FNU range can
be used for various applications including raw water and
wastewater reclamation.
Features
Simple and easy single unit installation with built-in

pressure regulator
Versions compliant with either U.S. EPA 180.1 for
North and South America and Asia or ISO 7027 for
Europe
Time saving and efficiencies of cuvette technology
simplifies calibration
Spannable 4 to 20 mA output
Two adjustable alarm relays Bright backlit display
Convenient holder for In-line cuvette
Easy access for wiring and maintenance
Ultrasonic cleaning option ensures long and steady
on-line measurement
Inexpensive standards allow for multiple system calibrations
Dissolved Oxygen
2610 Process Optical Dissolved Oxygen
Sensor
Description
The Signet 2610 RDO Pro is a rugged, reliable sensor

designed to deliver accurate dissolved oxygen (DO) data across a wide measuring range while reducing maintenance costs. It features the latest optical technology
for DO measurement and eliminates the replacement of
membrane and reference solutions.
The Signet 2610 optical sensor cap is calibrated at the
factory and requires no field calibration. The optical
measurement technology resists abrasion and bleaching allowing for a long life in many harsh applications.
The DO sensor has a built in Modbus RS485 and 4 to
20 mA current loop outputs for ease of interface to existing control systems. Additional features include a 10 m
(32.8 ft) cable with stripped and tinned ends as well as a
titanium thermistor for improved compatibility in salt water applications.
Features
Optical DO measurement no flow requirements

Rugged construction
Calibration built into the measurement cap 2% of
range 0 to 20 mg/l
One year measurement cap life
No membranes of filling solutions
Flexible communications, 4 to 20 mA or Modbus
(RS485)
Measurement Range: 0 to 20 mg/l
713
Multi Parameter Instruments

Description
The Signet 9900 Transmitter provides a single channel

interface for many different parameters including Flow,
pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity, Salinity, Pressure,
Temperature, Level and other sensors that output a 4 to
20 mA signal. The extra large (3.90 x 3.90) auto-sensing backlit display features at-a-glance visibility that
can be viewed at 4-5 times the distance over traditional transmitters. The highly illuminated display and large
characters reduce the risk of misreading or misinterpreting the displayed values. The display shows separate
lines for units, main and secondary measurements as
well as a "dial-type" digital bar graph.
The 9900 is offered in both panel or field mount versions. Both configurations can run on 12 to 32 VDC
power (24 VDC nominal). The 9900 can also be loop
powered with compatible sensors.
Designed for complete flexibility, plug-in modulesallow the unit to easily adapt to meet changingcustomer
needs. Optional modules include Relay,Direct Conductivity/Resistivity, H COMM and a PCCOMM configuration tool. The unit can be used withdefault values for
quick and easy programming or canbe customised with
labelling, adjustable minimumand maximum dial settings, and unit and decimalmeasurement choices.
Features
Multi-Parameter input selection

Large auto-sensing backlit display with at a glance
visibility
Dial-type digital bar graph
Intuitive and user-friendly interface consistent with
legacy Signet ProPoint and ProcessPro devices
Optional field upgradable relays
Selectable error mode for current outputs,3.6 mA or
22 mA
4 to 20 mA input (with optional 8058 SignalConverter)
Warning LED indicator
Custom 13-character label capabilities for the channel
type
Factory reset capability
Optional PC COMM configuration tool
Optional H COMM module for two-waycommunication
8900 Multi-Parameter Controller

Description
The Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller takes the

concept of modularity to the extreme. Each 8900 is field
commissioned with the users specified combination of
inputs, outputs, and relays using simple-to-install modular boards into the base unit.
Configure the system selecting either two, four or six input channels which accepts any of the Signet sensors
and/or other manufacturer's sensors via a 4 to 20 mA
signal converter (Signet Model 8058). To complete your
unit, choose a power module with universal AC line voltage or 12 to 24 VDC 10%, regulated.
714
If more features are needed, analogue output and relay modules are available and easily installed. Plus, the
8900 will support up to four additional relays via an external relay module.
There are other notable features that the 8900 offers.
For instance, digital input to the 8900 enables longer
cable runs and simplified wiring with minimal noise interference. Advanced relay logic allows users to select
up to 3 measurement sources to trigger 1 relay. Derived measurements include difference, sum, ratio, percent recovery, percent rejection, percent passage and
BTU. The menu system can be programmed to display
in multi-languages including English, German, French,
Spanish, Italian and Portuguese.
Features
Measures Flow, pH, ORP, Conductivity, Pressure,

Level and Temperature
Multi-language display
DIN enclosure
Up to 4 analogue outputs
Up to 8 relays
12 to 24 VDC or 100 to 240 VAC 10%, regulated
power
Digital communication allows for extended cable
lengths and easy wiring
Accepts 3rd party 4 to 20 mA output devices when
used with 8058 signal converter
Available with 1 to 6 channels
Two BTU calculations
Flow
515 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors
Description
Simple to install with time-honored reliable performance,

Signet 515 rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors are highly repeatable, rugged sensors that offer exceptional value with little or no maintenance. The output signal of the
Model 515 is a sinusoidal frequency capable of driving
a self-powered flowmeter (Model 3-5090). The wide dynamic flow range of 0.3 to 6 m/s (1 to 20 ft/s) allows the
sensor to measure liquid flow rates in full pipes and can
be used in low pressure systems.
The Model 515 sensors are offered in a variety of materials for a wide range of pipe sizes and insertion configurations. The many material choices including PP
and PVDF make this model highly versatile and chemically compatible to many liquid process solutions. Sensors can be installed in up to DN900 (36 in.) pipes using
Signet's comprehensive line of custom fittings. These
custom fittings, which include tees, saddles, and weldolets, seat the sensor to the proper insertion depth into
the process flow. The sensors are also offered in configurations for wet-tap and intrinsically safe installation requirements.
Features
Operating range 0.3 to 6 m/s (1 to 20 ft/s)

Wide turndown ratio of 20:1
Highly repeatable output
Simple, economical design
Installs into pipe sizes DN15 to DN900 ( to 36 in.)
Self-powered/no external power required
Test certificate included for -X0, -X1
Chemically resistant materials
525 Metalex Paddlewheel Flow Sensor

Description
The Signet 525 Metalex Paddlewheel Flow Sensor combines stainless steel construction with insertion paddlewheel technology. The result is a highly reliable sensor
suitable for operation at extreme pressures and temperatures. The Tungsten Carbide shaft and rulon B (Fluoroloy B/PTFE) bearing provide excellent wear resistance for extended service.
A comprehensive fitting program allows installation in
stell lines with the mini-block for small diameters, and
either the mini-tap or saddle for pipes up to DN300 (12
in.). The self-generating output signal allows use with
the battery operated flow totaliser 8150.
Features
For up to 103 bar (1500 psi @ safety factor 1.5) pressure

For up to 149 C (300 F) temperatures
DN15 to DN300 ( to 12 in.) pipe range
Simple installation
Self-powered/no external power required
316 SS body (1.4401)
Tungsten Carbide or SS shaft
7.6 m (25 ft) cable include
FM approved
Operating range 0.5 to 6 m/s (1.6 to 20 ft/s)
2536 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors

Description
Simple to install with time-honored reliable performance,

Signet 2536 Rotor-X Paddlewheel Flow Sensors are
highly repeatable, rugged sensors that offer exceptional value with little or no maintenance. The Model 2536
has a process-ready open collector signal with a wide
dynamic flow range of 0.1 to 6 m/s (0.3 to 20 ft/s). The
sensor measures liquid flow rates in full pipes and can
be used in low pressure systems.
The Signet 2536 sensors are offered in a variety of materials for a wide range of pipe sizes and insertion configurations. The many material choices including PP and
PVDF make this model highly versatile and chemically compatible to many liquid process solutions. Sensors
can be installed in DN15 to DN900 ( to 36 in.) pipes
using Signets comprehensive line of custom fittings.
These custom fittings, which include tees, saddles, and
weldolets, seat the sensor to the proper insertion depth
into the process flow. The sensors are also offered in
configurations for wet-tap installation requirements.
Features

Wide turndown ratio of 66:1
Open-collector output
Simple, economical design
Highly repeatable output
High resolution and noise immunity
Chemically resistant materials
2537 Paddlewheel Flowmeter

Description
The Signet 2537 Flowmeter is the next generation in

fluid measurement technology from the inventor of the
original paddlewheel flowmeter. This sensor is an improvement on whats already an industry standard. It
has the added functionality of various output options including flow switch, multi-functional pulse, digital (S L)
or 4 to 20 mA. Additionally, it offers low flow, low power and high resolution and can be configured on-site directly through the built-in user interface.
3
Installation is simple because the Signet 2537 utilizes

the same fittings as the popular Signet 515 and 2536
Paddlewheel Sensors and fits into pipe sizes ranging from DN15 to DN200 ( to 8 inches). Available in
Polypropylene and PVDF, it is ideal for a variety of applications including chemical processing, water and
wastewater monitoring and scrubber control.
Features
Digital (S L), or 4 to 20 mA outputs or Flow Switch or

Pulse output (multi-function)
Allows for up to six sensors to Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller
Low flow capabilities down to 0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s)
3
715
Polypropylene or PVDF sensor bodies

Low power and high resolution
2540 Stainless Steel High Performance

Paddlewheel Flow Sensor
Description
The Signet 2540 Paddlewheel Flow Sensor offers the

strength and corrosion resistance of stainless steel for
liquid applications with low velocity measurements.
Unique internal circuitry eliminates the need for magnets in the process fluid, enabling flow measurement of
0.1 to 6 m/s (0.3 to 20ft/s) while maintaining the advantages of insertion sensor design. Rulon B (Fluoroloy
B/PTFE) bearings and Tungsten Carbide pin provide
exceptional wear resistance.
The Signet 2540 offers field replaceable electronics and
transient voltage suppression (TVS) to providegreater
immunity to large voltage disturbances (i.e. lightning)
sometimes encountered in field wiring. Sensors can be
installed in DN40 to DN600 (1 to 24inch) pipes using
the 1 inch or ISO 7/1-R 1.5 threaded process connection. The sensors are also offered in a hot-tap configuration with a bleed valve service without process shutdown in pipes up toDN900 (36 in.). Both styles of sensors must be used in full pipes and can be used in low
pressure systems.
Features

Field replaceable electronics
Non-magnetic RF detection
Standard NPT or ISO process connections
Hot-tap versions for installation/service without system shutdown
For pipe sizes up to DN900 (36 in.)
Adjustable sensor-one size for entire pipe range
7.6 m (25 ft) cable
Rugged corrosion resistant PVC construction and

stainless steel hardware
Compatible with Signet 515 or 2536 Rotor-X Wet-Tap
Flow Sensors
Eliminates process downtime
2551 Magmeter Flow Sensor

Description
The Signet 2551 Magmeter is an insertion style magnetic flow sensor that features no moving parts. The
patented* sensor design is available in corrosion-resistant materials to provide long-term reliabilitywith minimal maintenance costs. Material options include PP
with stainless steel, PVDF with stainless steel, PVDF
with Hastelloy-C, or PVDF with Titanium.Utilizing the
comprehensive line of Signet installation fittings, sensor alignment and insertion depth is automatic. These
versatile, simple-to-install sensorsdeliver accurate flow
measurement over a wide dynamic range in pipe sizes
ranging from DN15 to DN900 ( to 36 inches), satisfying the requirements of many diverse applications.
Signet 2551 Magmeters offer many output options of
frequency/digital (S L) or 4 to 20 mA which are available
on both the blind and display versions. The frequency
or digital (S L) sensor output can be used with Signets
extensive line of flow instruments while the 4 to 20 mA
output can be used for a direct input to PLCs,chart
recorders, etc. Both the 4 to 20 mA output and digital
(S L) sensor interface is available for long distance signal transmission. An additional benefit is the empty pipe
detection which features a zero flow output when the
sensors are not completely wetted. Also, the frequency
output is bi-directional while the 4 to 20 mA output can
be set for uni- or bidirectional flow using the display or
the3-0250 USB to Digital (S L) Configuration/Diagnostic
setup tool which connects to PCs for programming capabilities.
3
3519 Flow Wet-Tap Valve
In addition the display version of the 2551 Magmeter is

available with relays and features permanent and resettable totalizer values which can be stored andseen on
the display. Also, the display contains multi-languages
with English, Spanish, German, French, Italian and Portuguese menu options.
Description
Features
The Signet 3519 Flow Wet-Tap Valve serves as a

unique interface between the installation fitting and the
wet-tap style Signet 515 or 2536 Rotor-X flow sensor. It
provides a fast method of removing the sensor from the
pipe under specified operating pressures. The PVC and
stainless steel design of the Wet-Tap makes it resistant
to corrosion and chemical attack by acids, alkalies, salt,
and a number of other harsh chemicals.
The Signet 3519 Wet-Tap Valve mounts directly onto
standard Signet installation fittings. The 3519 Wet-Tap
consists of a flange and support plate that threadsonto the pipe fitting insert, and a PVC ball valve through
which an extended length sensor is inserted into the
pipe.
Features
Allows sensor removal without process shutdown

Pressure release valve for safe sensor removal
Dual safety lanyards
716
Test certificate included for -X0, -X1, -X2

Patented Magmeter technology
No moving parts
Bi-directional flow
Empty pipe detection
Installs into pipe sizes DN15 to DN900 (0.5 to 36 in.)
Accurate measurement even in dirty liquids
Blind 4 to 20 mA, digital/frequency, relay output
No pressure drop corrosion resistant materials; PP or
PVDF with SS, Hasteloy-C or Titanium
Multi-language display menu available
2552 Metal Magmeter Flow Sensor

Description
The Signet 2552 Metal Magmeter from Georg Fischer features all-stainless steel construction. The PVDF
nosepiece and FPM O-rings are the only other wetted
materials. The 2552 installs quickly into standard 1 in.
or 1 in. pipe outlets, and is adjustable to fit pipes from
DN50 to DN2550 (2 to 102 inches). Two sensor lengths
allow maximum flexibility to accommodate a variety of
hardware configurations, including ball valves for hottap installations.
When equipped with the frequency output, the 2552
is compatible with any externally powered Signet flow
instrument, while the digital (S L) output enables multi-channel compatibility with the Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller. Select the blind 4 to 20 mA current
output to interface directly with dataloggers, PLCs or
telemetry systems. Key features include Empty Pipe
Detection, LED-assisted troubleshooting, and bi-directional span capability (in 4 to 20 mA models).
3
The Signet 3-0250 USB to Digital (S L)Configuration/

Diagnostic Tool is available to customize every performance feature in the 2552 so it can be adapted to the
users application requirements.
3
Features
Test certificate included

Award winning hot-tap magnetic flow sensor up to
DN2550 (102 in.)
Patented Magmeter technology
reliable operation in harsh environments
Repeatable: 0.5% of reading @ 25 C
Three output options: 4 to 20 mA, Frequency, Digial
(S L)
ISO or NPT threads
3
2100 Turbine Flow Sensor

Description
Engineered specifically for small pipe diameter applications, the Signet 2100 Turbine Flow Sensor provides accurate readings in two flow ranges: 0.3 to 3.8 lpm and 3
to 38 lpm (0.1 to 1 gpm and 0.8 to 10 gpm).
The injection-molded PVDF body and ceramic bearings
provide excellent chemical compatibility and long service in dosing and batching applications. Union piping
and tubing connections along with removable NEMA 4X
electronics allow for easy assembly and field replaceability. The 2100 can be used with DN8 ( in.), DN10
(3/8 in.), DN15 ( in.) tubing, or DN15 ( in.) piping
for simple installation. End connections are available in
PVDF for hose barbs, fusion socket or IR/butt fusion,
and in PVC for socket or NPT thread.
Features
PVDF & ceramic wetted parts provide superior

chemical compatibility
For use with both clear and opaque fluids
Small and compact design
4.6 m (15 ft) cable
Features removable electronics that installs fron either
side of the sensor
Sensor mounts at any angle
2000 Micro Flow Rotor Sensor

Description
The Signet 2000 Micro Flow Rotor Sensor is constructed of Polyphenylene Sulfide (PPS) which provides high
material strength. The 2000 offers twoflow ranges starting at 0.11 or 1.13 lpm (0.03 or 0.3 gpm), for clean process liquids, regardless of fluid color or opacity.
This sensor can be connected to flexible tubing or rigid
pipe, and uses standard hardware for mounting. Onlyone moving part and a low pressure drop across the
sensor reduces operating costs and maintenancerequirements.
Features
Operating range 0.11 to 12.11 lpm (0.03 to 3.2 U.S.

gpm)
Simple mounting
in. NPT or ISO threads for simple pipe or tubing
connection
Measures opaque and transparent liquids
Low pressure drop
Standard cable 7.6 m (25 ft)
2507 Mini Flow Rotor Sensor

Description
The Signet 2507 Mini Flow Rotor Sensor contains a

free-running rotor that is driven by the fluid flow.Within
the given measurement range, the rotational speed of
the rotor is proportional to the fluid flow rate.
Magnets built into the rotor trigger an electronic switch
in the top of the sensor creating a square-wave output.
Both opaque and transparent fluids can be measured
with kinematic viscosities between 0.2 to 20.0 centistokes.
Features
Operating range 400 to 12,000 ml/m (0.1 to 3.2

U.S.gpm)
Detachable signal connector for easy servicing
Simple installation with a G in. ( in. NPT) threaded
connection
Standard 7.6 m (25 ft) cable
PVDF construction
Compact assembly
Operating range of 0.38 to 38 lpm (0.10 to 10 U.S.

gpm)
Non-magnetic turbine
Union ends for various connector types
End connector kits for rigid or flexible tubing or DN15
( in.) pipe
717
5075 Totalising Flow Monitor

Description
The Signet 5075 Totalizing Flow Monitor features a traditional analog dial for flow rate at a glance while the
backlit LCD provides precision flow rate, total volume
and programming information.
Significant features of this 5075 include user selectable
analog dials, permanent and resettable totalizers and
pulse outputs at sensor frequency and at totalizer scale,
The 5075 is powered by virtually any 12 to 24 VDC or
VAC 10%, regulated power source.
Connect any one of Signets wide array of flow sensors,

then consider which output features are best for your
application.
Two dry-contact relays can be configured for High or
Low alarm operation, or they can be set to pulse operation for chemical dosing applications.
Use the internally powered 4 to 20 mA output, programmable from the front keypad, to send the flow information to any PLC or data logger.
Features
If you use all of these output features, you still have two
more output pulse terminals, one at sensor frequency,
the other triggered by the totalizer. And just for added
convenience, the resettable totalizer can be reset by a
remote hardwired switch, up to 30 m (100 ft), or fromthe
front keypad.
5090 Sensor-Powered Flow Monitor
Permanent and resettable totalizers

Two programmable relays
Fully scaleable active (internally powered) 4 to 20 mA
output
Tamper proof security code
Non-volatile memory
Intuitive software design
Programmable pulse outputs
Connect to any of Signets flow sensors for a classic

flow meter system.

Tamper proof security code
Non-volatile memory
Simple push-button operation
Pulse outputs at sensor frequency and at total volume
1/4 DIN, NEMA 4X/IP65
Remote totalizer reset
Description
The Signet 5090 Sensor Powered Flow Monitor is the

simplest and most economical instrument in the Signet
offering. It features a balanced-spring meter movement
that is powered by the AC output of the Signet 515 Paddlewheel Flow Sensor. No additional power sourceis required.
This unique system is suitable for a wide range of flow
rates, and is Factory Mutual (FM) approved for intrinsic safety without the need for barriers. Packaged in a
DIN housing with a NEMA 4X/IP65 front panel, the 5090
is the first choice for simple flow monitoring, even in the
most demanding industrial environments.
Features
High visibility analog display

Sensor-powered flow rate indication up to 60 m (200
ft) from sensor installation
Wide flow range: 1 to 20 ft/s in pipe sizes DN15 to
D900 ( to 36 in.)
Single-point calibration from front panel
Factory Mutual (FM) approved for intrinsic safety in
Classes I, II and III, Division I
5500 Flow Monitor

Description
The Signet 5500 Flow Monitor is an instrument that

comes fully equipped with all of the basic tools needed
for monitoring and controlling a flow system. The analog
dial enables the user to easily read instantaneous flow
rate, while the backlit LCD is useful for calibration, setup, and displaying totalized flow volume. The 5500 features a standard DIN package and removable wiring
terminals. Power the instrument with virtually any standard 24-volt power supply (AC or DC).
718
Features
5600 Batch Controller

Description
The Signet 5600 Batch Controller provides control capability and process fine-tuning in a familiar package. The
programming interface uses a four-button keypad and
an intuitive procedure for adjusting a batching system to
the best performance possible.
The standard DIN package houses an analog display panel that features a batch status indicator with
count-up or countdown dials. The backlit LCD displays
flowrate and volume information and batch status, as
well as calibration and setup instructions. The front of
the unit is NEMA 4X/IP65 and is hard-coated, high-impactand UV resistant polycarbonate.
The 5600 operates on 12 to 24 volts 10%, regulated,
either AC or DC. Removable terminal connections make
wiring the 5600 easy. Connect any Signet flow sensor
with a frequency output, then add connections to two relays for two-stage shutdown or overrun alarm functions,
connect a remote start-stop switch anduse the end-ofbatch pulse to trigger the next step in the process. A 4
to 20 mA output is also available. Advanced features include a user-set security code,an automatic calibration
option, and overrun compensation.
Features

Non-volatile memory
Easy batch volume entry
Remote start, stop & resume
Two-stage shutdown control
Manual or automatic overrun compensation
Estimates time to batch completion
Overrun alarm and missing signal alarm
Advanced valve control

End-of-batch trigger
Count-up or count-down to batch completion
NEMA 4X enclosure with self-healing window

Output simulation for complete system testing
8150 Battery Powered Flow Totaliser

Descripton
The Signet 8150 Battery Operated Flow Totaliser is

compatible with the Signet 515 and 525 flow sensors,
and will provide years of dependable operation. The
large digital display indicates flow rate and totalised flow
volume simultaneously. One of the three totalisers is resettable from the front panel or a remote location, while
the second resettable totaliser can only be reset by entering a user-selectable security code. The third is a
permanent non-resettable totaliser.
Our intuitive software design and four-button keypad
provide for simple operation while setting screen displays and programming the system. Calibrationcan be
easily performed by entering the Auto-Cal feature and
entering a value to match an external reference. Screen
displays can be modified to suit theusers needs; along
with the flow rate, any of the three totalisers can be selected as the displayed totaliser. Customers can quickly scroll through the totaliserssimply by pressing any key
on the keypad. A display averaging feature is included
for applications where the flow in the pipe fluctuates.
For applications where flowstops and starts due to production needs, a no-flow indicator will display the hours
of non-flow.
Features
Three totalizers:2 resettable and 1 permanent, user

selectable
Long-lasting lithium batteries
Mounting versatility
No-flow indicator
Large digital display with averaging
User selectable access code prevents unwanted
changes
Auto-calibration
8550 Flow Transmitters

Description
Signet 8550 Flow Transmitters are advanced instruments that convert the signal from frequency and digital (S L) flow sensors into a 4 to 20 mA signal for long
distance transmission. Configuration flexibility is maximized with single or dual input/output, two optional relays for process control, two packaging options for integral/pipe mount or panel installation, and scalability for
virtually any flow range or engineering unit. State-of-theart electronic design ensures long-term reliability, signal
stability, and simple user setup and operation.
3
Features
2 or 4 wire power
Available with single or dual input/output
4 to 20 mA scaleable outputs
Permanent & resettable totalizers
Relay options available
719
pH/ORP
2724-2726 DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes
Description
The Signet 2724-2726 pH and ORP Electrodes features

a patented reference electrode design and uses the
unique foul-proof patented DryLoc connector. The large
area PE reference junction and pathway is constructed to increase the total reference effectiveness and ensures long service life.
The DryLoc connector with corrosion resistant gold

plated contacts readily connects the sensor to the mating 2760 preamplifier or the 2750 sensor electronics.
The robust Ryton threaded sensor body and choice of
flat pH, bulb pH, or flat ORP sensing elements provides
broad range of chemical compatibility for a wide variety
of applications.
There are two optional pH sensing versions available,
HF and LC. The HF version is for applications where
traces of hydrofluoric acid (2% or less) will attack standard pH glass in levels of pH 6 and below. The LC version can be used for low conductivity fluids 20 - 100 S/
cm nominal and below 20 S when mounted under controlled conditions.
The quick temperature response is available in either a
PT1000 or 3 K temperature sensor and allows compatibility with all Signet pH/ORP instruments. The 27242726 electrodes are general-purpose sensors ideal for
a wide range of applications. The sensors incorporate
inch NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 threads for installing into
standard pipetees. They can also be mounted directly
into Signet standard fittings, DN15 to System Overview
DN100 ( to 4 inch).
Features
Patented DryLoc connector with gold plated contacts

Mounts in Signet standard fittings from DN15 to
DN100 ( to 4 in.)
NPT or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 threaded sensors for use
with reducing tees DN15 to DN100 ( to 4 in.)
Special design allows for installation at any angle,
even inverted or horizontal
Ryton (PPS) body for broad range of chemical compatibility
Patented reference design for exceptional performance
Quick temperature response
HF resistant glass available for trace HF of <2%
Optional Low conductivity sensor for liquids down to
20 S/cm
2774-2777 DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes

Description
The Signet 2774 - 2777 pH and ORP Electrodes feature a unique foulproof DryLoc connector with goldplated contacts designed specifically for use with the Signet
2750 and 2760 preamplifiers, sensor electronics, and
connectors. These dependable and highly responsive
electrodes feature a PTFE double reference junction
with KNO3 in the front chamber to block various poison
720
ing ions such as Copper (CU++), Lead (Pb++), Mercury

(Hg++), and a large reference chamber that combine to
extend the service-life.
Embedded positioning of the temperature element in
the pH sensing tip allows, the temperature response to
be quick and accurate. The electrodes are offered witheither flat or bulb style sensing elements. The flat versions allow sediment and particles to sweep past the
measurement surface, minimizing risks of abrasion,
breakage and coating. The bulb versions can be used
for general-purpose applications. Due to the specially
designed chambers which keep electrolyte in place,all
versions can be installed at any angle, even inverted.
Features
Durable DryLoc connector with gold plated contacts

Special design allows for installation at any angle,
even inverted
Easy sensor replacement using DryLoc electrode
connector
High temperature versions available
Mounts into standard inch threads
Compatible with all pH/ORP and other suppliers instruments
2764-2767 Differential DryLoc pH/ORP Electrodes

Description
The Signet 2764-2767 Differential pH & ORP electrodes

are built with the DryLoc connector, a Ryton body, and
PTFE reference junction to handle the most extreme
and harshest of chemical applications.
These differential electrodes use a fieldproven 3-electrode differential technique: the pH and reference electrodes are measured against a ground electrode, insuring a steady and stable signal. A key feature is the reference electrode, which is housed in a glass half-cell
embedded in the reference chamber and is protected
from compounds that may contain sulfides (S2-) and
metals. To ensure long service life, the reference features a refillable electrolyte chamber and a replaceable
equitransferant salt bridge, both easily serviced in the
field. The patented porous PTFE reference junction resists fouling, clogging and chemical attack.
Other elements of the design are the solution ground,
the pH/ORP electrodes, and the temperature element.
The solution ground eliminates noisy measurements by
draining electrical current away from the reference electrode. The pH/ORP electrodes are designed with a flat
or bulb measurement surface, and a temperature device that is positioned at the tip of the measurement surface, making the temperature response of T95% less than
1 minute. Various temperature devices offered include 3
K, 300 , or PT1000 RTD.
The electrodes are used with the Signet 2750 Sensor
Electronics, which provide a blind 4 to 20 mA output or
use the digital (S L) output to connect the Signet 8900
Multi-Parameter Controller. The electrodes can also be
used with the Model 2760 preamplifier to connect to the
Signet 5700 or 8750.
3
Features
The DryLoc electrode connector quickly forms a robust assembly for submersible and in-line installations.
NEMA 4X junction enclosures are integralparts of the
2750 in-line version and are also available as accessories for the submersible 2750.
Differential design for stable measurements in the

most aggressive applications
Long service life even in severe or difficult chemical
applications
Water-tight DryLoc connector with foulproof gold contacts
Porous PTFE reference junction
Rebuildable reference electrode
Solution ground
Temperature sensor (pH)
Easy sensor replacement using DryLoc electrode
connector
Compatible with all Signet instruments and other suppliers pH/ORP instruments
3719 pH/ORP Wet-Tap Assembly

Description
The 2750 submersible preamplifier can also be used

as an In-line preamplifier when used with the 3/4 or 1
threaded sensors including the 2724, 2774 and 2764
series electrodes. The 2750 In-line preamplifier can be
used with Signet fittings up to DN100 (4 in.) and wet-tap
assemblies.
Features
In-line integral mount and submersible installation versions

Automatic temperature compensation
Auto configuration for pH or ORP operation
Optional EasyCal calibration aid with automatic buffer
recognition
Junction boxes for convenient wiring
The Signet 3719 pH/ORP Wet-Tap allows installation

and removal of pH or ORP electrodes, even under process pressure, without the need for process shutdown
during routine electrode maintenance and calibration.
Automatic process isolation is achieved during electrode retraction with a double O-ring seal on a unique
and compact retraction assembly; no separate valve
is required. A patented cam-activated automatic locking mechanism, SafeLoc, and the short stroke design
help to assure operator safety. The wet-tap unit can be
mounted at any angle and can be used with the Signet
DryLoc Wet-Tap electrodes.
2760 DryLoc pH/ORP Preamplifiers and

Connectors
Features
The DryLoc electrode connector system quickly forms

a robust assembly for submersible and in-line installations. NEMA 4X junction enclosures are to extend the
preamplifier cable to long distances.
Description
The Signet 2760 pH/ORP Preamplifiers features the

DryLoc connector, providing a robust connection to
Signet DryLoc electrodes.
The 2760 preamplifier allows any DryLoc pH/ORP electrode to work with Signet ProcessPro and ProPoint pH/
ORP instruments. It is also sold as a simple connector
for use with other manufacturers instruments that do
not require a preamplified signal.
Electrode removal without process shutdown

Space saving 45 mm (1.75 in.) short-stroke design
Sealed pneumatic dampening for smooth and safe
operation
SafeLoc: Cam- activated automatic locking mechanism
Protects electrode sensing surface from breakage
Suitable for mounting in any orientation
Process threaded connection NPT or ISO
Low profile clampon saddle fittings for convenient installation in ASTM pipe sizes 2 to 12 in.
2750 DryLoc pH/ORP Sensor Electronics

Description
The Signet 2750 pH/ORP Sensor Electronics featuring

the DryLoc connector, provides a variety of functions to
suit various requirements.
The 2750 has a preamplified signal and features two

different outputs: a two-wire 4 to 20 mA loop output
with EasyCal function or a digital (S L) output which allows for longer cable lengths and is compatible with the
Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller.
3
The 2750 self-configures for pH or ORP operation via

automatic recognition of the electrode type. The optional EasyCal feature allows simple push-buttoncalibration
and includes an LED indicator for visual feedback.
The 2760 submersible preamplifier can also be used as

an In-line preamplifier when used with the in. or 1 in.
threaded sensors including the 2724, 2774 and 2764
series electrodes. The 2760 In-line preamplifier can be
used with Signet fittings up to DN100 (4 in.) and wet-tap
assemblies.
Features
In-line integral mount and submersible installation versions

Auto configuration for pH or ORP operation
Junction boxes for convenient wiring
5700 pH/ORP Monitor

Description
The Signet 5700 pH/ORP Monitor is a versatile and intelligent instrument that recognizes the type of sensor
connected, either pH or ORP, then automatically sets
itself for the corresponding display and functionality.
Also, during EasyCal operation, the monitor automatically recognizes standard buffers/test solutions, thereby shortening and simplifying routine calibration procedures. Two programmable relays and one scaleable
4 to 20 mA output are included, and the four-button
721
keypad arrangement with intuitive software design is

very user-friendly. The monitors require 12 to 24 volts
10%, regulated, AC or DC, and can be used with many
Signet pH/ORP electrodes and preamplifiers, or with
electrodes from other manufacturers by using the 2721
Preamplifier. Several useful accessories are available,
including the optional splashproof rear cover kit.
Features
Displays pH/temp/mV or ORP/mV

EasyCal simplifies routine calibration
Intuitive software design
Scaleable 4 to 20 mA output internally powered (active)
Dual proportional control capability
Non-volatile memory
Versatile low voltage power requirement
8750 pH/ORP Transmitters

Description
The Signet 8750 pH/ORP Transmitter is designed for

broad application and ease of setup and use. The unit
autoconfigures for either pH or ORP use when connected to Signet pH or ORP electrodes. Multiple mounting
options allow for installation best suited to your particular application. The EasyCal menu features automatic buffer recognition for mistake-proof pH or ORP electrode calibrations. Intuitive software and the four button
keypad arrangement make it easy to access important
information such as pH or ORP, mV input, temperature,
calibration, relay setup menus and more.
Features

Temperature display in C or F
Hold and simulate functions
Relay options available
Output scaleability
Optional Dual output
NEMA 4X/IP65 enclosure with self-healing window
EasyCal option available
722
2819-2823 Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes
Description
Signet 2819-2823 Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes

are designed to provide versatile installation and accurate sensing across a very broad dynamic range. These
electrodes are built with a controlled surface finish to
ensure accuracy and repeatability. The standard electrode is constructed 316 SS or Titanium, but there are
other materials available for maximum chemical compatibility. Reversible threads or sanitary flanges allow
for maximum installation versatility. Sanitary flange versions are available with an optional NIST Traceability Certificate to meet USP requirements. Coupled with
Signet patented measuring circuitry, a three decade
measurement range is achieved without the need for
troublesome electrode platinization. A platinum RTD
(PT1000) located within the electrodeallows optimal
temperature sensing.
Features
Standard process connections

- in. NPT Polypro
- Tri-clamp 1
-1 in., 2
- Opt. in. NPT 316 SS
316 SS or Titanium standard electrode
Alternative electrode materials available
- Hastelloy-C
- Monel
In-line or submersible mounting
NIST traceable certified cells 1% meet USP requirements
2839-2842 Conductivity Electrodes

Description
The Signet 2839-2842 Conductivity/Resistivity Electrodes are available in four cell constants from 0.01 to
10.0 cm-1, and are suitable for a wide variety of applications from high purity water quality monitoring to
weak acids and bases. 316 SS electrode surfacefinishes are controlled in a precision bead blasting operation
to ensure measurement accuracy and repeatability. The
PEEK insulator and processconnections are injection over-molded to minimize variance between electrodes. Double threaded connections in either in. NPT
or ISO 7/1-R 3/4 enable quick and easy installation in
submersible or in-line configurations. Transmitter integral mounting kit and junction boxes are available as accessories.
Features
Dual-threaded
Compact electrode length for easy in-line installation
in small pipe sizes
Triple orifice flow through design reduces clogging
and bubble entrapment
316 SS electrodes with injection molded PEEK processconnections and insulators
Cell constants may be traceable to NIST and certified
to within 1% of value - meets USP requirements
2850 Conductivity/Resistivity Sensor Electronics and Integral Systems

Description
The Signet 2850 Conductivity/Resistivity Sensor Electronics are available in various configurations for maximum installation flexibility. The universal mount version is for pipe, wall, or tank mounting and enables single or dual (digital versions only) inputs using any standard Signet conductivity/resistivity sensor. The threaded
j-box version can be used with these same Signet sensors for submersible sensor mounting. It is also available as a combined integral system configuration for inline mounting and includes a conductivity electrode in a
choice of 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, or 10.0 cm cell constants. The
2850 is ideal for applications with a conductivity range
of 0.055 to 400,000 S or a resistivity range of 18.2 M
to 10 k.
-1
All 2850 units are available with a choice of two outputs,

digital (S L) or 4 to 20 mA. The digital (S L) output version allows for up to six sensor inputs directly into the
Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller. The two-wire 4
to 20 mA output version is available with eight 4 to 20
mA output ranges for each electrode cell constant. Each
range can be inverted and are field selectable.
3
All 2850 units are built with NEMA 4X/IP 65 enclosures

which allow output wiring connections with long cable
runs of up to 1,000 feet (305 m). EasyCal is a standard
feature that automatically recognizes conductivity test
solution values for simple field calibration. A certification
tool is available for validation of the sensor electronicsaccording to USP requirements.
Features
Integral mount systems for quick and easy installation

Compact design for maximum installation flexibility
Digital (S L) interface or two-wire 4 to 20 mA output
EasyCal with automatic test solution recognition
Dual channel unit available for low cost installation
with Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller
For use with ALL Signet conductivity electrodes
5800CR Conductivity/Resistivity Monitor

Description
The Signet 5800CR ProPoint Conductivity/Resistivity

Monitor features a unique analog/digital display, making
it the preferred measurement instrument for applications
requiring routine monitoring.The digital display guides
the user through the simple menu system and provides
precision information, while the analog dial serves as a
quick, at-a-glanceindicator of the measurement process.
The 5800CR offerstwo fully programmable dry contact
relays and a 4 to 20 mA current. The monitor requires
12 to 24 VAC or VDC 10%, regulated and is packaged in a convenient DIN, NEMA 4X/IP65 front panel.
The enclosure is hard-coated, high-impact, UV resistant
polycarbonate.
In addition to programmable outputs and relays, the
unit can also be set up to measure raw conductivity
values,meeting USP requirements.
723
Features
Display units: S, mS, k, M, PPM (TDS)

Temperature compensation
Scaleable 4 to 20 mA output
Intuitive software
Non-volatile memory
Compatible with ALL Signet conductivity electrodes
12 to 24 VAC or VDC power
NEMA 4X/IP65
5900 Salinity Monitor

Description
The Signet 5900 Salinity Monitor utilizes conductivity

sensors to provide direct reading, including calibration,
of salinity in parts per thousand (PPT). Equippedwith a
scaleable 4 to 20 mA output and two programmable relays, the monitor requires 12 to 24 volts, 10%, regulated, AC or DC, and is compatible with Signet 10 cm-1 or
20 cm-1 conductivity cells.Temperature is selectable for
display in either C or F, and compensation is automatic.
Calibration is simplified with single-point salinity and
temperature entry via the wet-cal menu sequence. The
four-button keypad arrangement with intuitive software
design is user-friendly, and is offered with a hard-coated, high impact, and UV resistant polycarbonate front
face. The front panel is rated NEMA 4X/IP65 and an optional splashproof cover is available to protect the back
of the instrument.
Features
Direct reading and calibration in PPT

Scaleable 4 to 20 mA output (active) internally powered
Tamper-proof security code
Analog and digital display
Non-volatile memory
Versatile low voltage power requirement
NEMA 4X/IP65
8850 Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitters

Description
The Signet 8850 Conductivity/Resistivity Transmitter is

designed for multiple installation capabilities, simple setup and easy operation, thus satisfying a broad range of
application requirements.
Full microprocessor based electronics allow for a wide
operating range and long term signal stability in three
different instrument versions: the 8850-1 for a traditional
two-wire current loop, the 8850-2 features current loop
plus two dry contact relays, or the 8850-3 with two-wire
current loop, one sensor input signal and two current
loop outputs. The 8850 is offered with a NEMA 4X/IP65
724
front panel with a self-healing window in a convenient

DIN package for easy mounting. The 8850 can be configured via a simple menu system.
In addition to programmable outputs and relays, the unit
can also be set up to measure raw conductivity values.
Features
Display choices of S, mS, K, M, PPM (TDS)

Simulate function
Programmable temperature compensation
Relay and open collector options
Dual output option allows temperature and process
signal transmission
NEMA 4X/IP65 enclosure with self-healing window
8860 Two-Channel Conductivity/Resistivity

Controllers
Description
The Signet 8860 Two-Channel Conductivity/Resistivity

Controller is packed with a set of features and capabilities ideal for the real needs of water treatment applications. It accommodates two separate and independent
input sources and can be powered with AC/DC voltage.
The 8860 programs via a simple and intuitive menu system. The unit can also be programmed to measure a
raw conductivity value by turning off the temperature
compensation mode.
To control the process, the 8860 is equipped with four
dry contact relays and three 4 to 20 mA output loops.
Calculated measurement include Difference, Ratio or
% Rejection. Two of the relays may be converted into
open collector outputs with the flip of a switch. Operating modes for the relays and open collector outputs are
high, or low alarm, pulse, or special USP alarm mode.
The 8860 is offered with a NEMA 4X/IP65 front panel
with a self-healing window in a DIN package for easy
panel installation.
Features
Meets USP requirements for measuring raw conductivity, USP alarm mode
Dual sensor input
AC or DC powered
Display and/or control: S, mS, PPM or PPB (TDS),
k, M, % rejection, difference, ratio,C or F
Three fully scaleable 4 to 20 mA outputs
Two open collector outputs
Four programmable relays
Time delay relay function
Proportional pulse control capability
Programmable temperature compensation
NEMA 4X/IP65
Temperature/Pressure/Level
2250 Submersible Hydrostatic Pressure
Sensor
Description
Built-in temperature compensation provides outstanding

accuracy over wide temperature ranges. These sensors
are available with a proprietary digital output (S L), or 4
to 20 mA output. The extended cable and capillary tubing with the union connection and a customer supplied
conduit, allow submersion in process vessels.
3
Features
Level and depth measurement

4 to 20 mA or digital (S L) output
Flush ceramic diaphragm
Easy submersible installation
Choice of two pressure ranges
Standard union connection and extended cable and
capillary tubing (10 m)
3
2350 Temperature Sensor

Description
The Signet 2350 Temperature Sensor has a one piece

injection molded PVDF body that is ideal for use in high
purity applications. It also outlasts metal sensors in aggressive liquids and eliminates the need for costly custom thermowells. These sensors are available with a
proprietary digital output (S L) or field-scaleable 4 to 20
mA output.
3
Dual threaded ends ( in. NPT) allow submersion in

process vessels, or in-line installation with conduit connection. An integral adapter kit (sold separately) may
be used to create a compact assembly with field mount
versions of the Signet 8350 Temperature Transmitter.
Features
Standard in. NPT process connection
One-piece injection molded PVDF body
PT1000 platinum RTD in extended tip for quick response
Easy installation
Threaded for in-line or submersible installation
These sensors are available with a proprietary digital

output (S L), or fieldscaleable 4 to 20 mA output. Dual-threaded ends allow submersion in process vessels, or in-line installation with conduit connection. Integral adapters (sold separately) may be used to create
a compact assembly with a field mount version of the
Signet 8250 Level or 8450 Pressure Transmitter.
3
The Signet 2250 Hydrostatic Level Sensor for level and

depth control has a one-piece injection molded PVDF
body and ceramic diaphragm for superior compatibility
in corrosive liquids. Utilizing hydrostatic pressure, the
2250 disregards false level signals from steam vapors,
foam or any other debris on the liquid surface. Two
pressure ranges allow for optimal resolution matched to
your sensing needs. Solid state circuitry eliminates drift
(no internal potentiometers).
nal potentiometers). Built-in temperature compensation

provides outstanding accuracy over widetemperature
ranges.
Features
Test certificate included

Standard in. NPT or in. male union process connection
One-piece injection molded PVDF body
Flush ceramic diaphragm
Easy installation
Choice of three pressure ranges
Pressure or level measurement
3
8250 Level Transmitters

Description
Signet 8250 Level Transmitters are compatible with

the Signet 2250 Level sensor and 2450 Pressure
Sensor. The instrument is available in field and panel
mount configurations, single or dual-channel input and
equipped with one 4 to 20 mA output, fully scaleableand
reversible for each input channel. The unit also features
two relays, plus the ability to support two additional externally mounted relays (for a total offour). Relay operation is selectable for High, Low, Window or Off, and includes fully adjustable hysteresis and trigger time delay.
The unit also has the abilityto accept other level sensors with 4 to 20 mA output via the Signet 8058 Signal
Converter. Automatic level-to-volume conversion allows
display and control of tank volume and/or level in units
such as gallons, kilograms, feet or meters. Simply enter the dimensions of yourtank or vessel, and the instrument will calculate volume from the level measurement.
Features
2450 Pressure Sensor
Description
The 2450 Pressure Sensor has a one-piece injection

molded PVDF body and ceramic diaphragm for superiorcompatibility in corrosive liquids. Three pressure versions allow for optimal resolution matched to your sensing needs. Solid state circuitry eliminates drift (no inter-
Level units for: ft, in., m, cm, %

Volume units for: gal., in , lbs., l, m , kg, %
Available with single or dual input
Advanced relay control supports up to 4 relays
Output simulation
Manual (up to 10 pts.) and automatic level to- volume
conversion
Display level, volume or both
Specific gravity entry for use with pressure sensors
and mass unit conversion
User-selectable averaging for display and output
Accepts other level sensors with 4 to 20 mA output
(via 8058 signal converter)
NEMA 4X/IP65
3
725
8350 Temperature Transmitters

Description
The Signet 8350 Temperature Transmitter offers local

or remote display with current and relay outputs. This
model offers exceptional repeatability and accuracyover
a wide operating temperature range.Configurations include open collector outputs or mechanical relays with
status indicators for process control or alarming. The
unit also has the ability to accept other temperature sensors which have 4 to 20 mA output via the Signet 8058
Signal Converter. The chemical resistant NEMA 4X/
IP65 front face is found on both the highly visible field
mount or black panelmount instruments with a self-healing window and a standard 1/4 DIN cutout. Dual input
version allows difference calculation (T) and offers
cost savingswith independent dual outputs. All models
offer an output simulation function for complete system
testing.
Features
Digital (S L) input for stable & reliable reading

Available with single or dual input
Field scaleable 4 to 20 mA output
Displays temperature and mA output
Temperature display in degrees Celsius (C) or
Fahrenheit (F)
Choice of relay or open collector output
NEMA 4X/IP65
8450 Pressure Transmitters

Description
The Signet 8450 Pressure Transmitter is a unique instrument that offers local or remote display with current and relay outputs. This model offersexceptional repeatability and accuracy over a wide operating pressure
range. The instrument is available in field and panel
mount configurations, single ordual channel input and is
equipped with a 4 to 20 mA output, fully scaleable and
reversible for each input channel. Configurations include
open collectoroutputs or relays with status indicators for
process control or alarming.
The unit also has the ability to accept other sensors with
4 to 20 mA output, via the Signet 8058 Signal Converter. The chemical resistant NEMA 4X/IP65 frontface is
found in both the highly visible field mount or black panel mount instrument, both featuring a self healing window, a standard DIN cutout and large push buttons
for easy navigation. Programming capabilities are available for single point calibration, setting of relays and
outputs, and output simulationfunction for complete system testing. The dual input version allows difference calculation (P) and offers significant cost savings with independent dualoutputs.
Features
Digital (S L) input for stable and reliable reading

Available with single or dual sensor input
Pressure can be displayed in psi, bar or kPa
Field scaleable 4 to 20 mA output
Choice of relay or open collector output
NEMA 4X/IP65
726
Chemical resistant enclosure and self-healing window
Other Products
0251 PC COMM Configuration Tool
0250 USB to Digital (S3L) Configuration/Diagnostic Tool
Description
The new 3-0250 USB to (S L) configuration/diagnostic

tool interfaces with Signets various digital sensors to allow users to select all parameters available for modification, monitor the sensors data on the PC/Laptop, or
log the sensors data to a file. Multilanguage Software in
English, German, French, Italian, Portuguese and Spanish.
3
7300 Switching Power Supplies

Description
Signet 7300 Switching Power Supplies provide regulated output voltage in compact and lightweight plastic
housings that can be DIN Rail or surface mounted. The
series includes five different outputcapacities from 300
mA to 4.2 A (7.5W to 100W), all of which accept universal AC line voltage input and meet worldwide standards
for performance and safety. These units meet the power
requirements for a single system, multiple Signet instruments or other devices requiring 24 VDC operation.
Features
User-friendly interface
Configure blind sensors
Configure all modifiable parameters in the sensor
Monitor sensor data or log sensors data to a file
Monitor mV and Temperature reading in pH/ORP sensors
Graph sensor data
Red and Blue LED indicators for power and data
transmission
6 ft USB extension cable
Regulated 24 VDC output voltage

Five output capacities: 300 mA, 600 mA, 1.3 A, 2.1 A
and 4.2 A
DIN rail or surface mount
Universal AC input (85 to 264 VAC)
DC compatible input (105 to 370 VDC)
Fused input
Auto resetting output overcurrent protection
Unique spring-up, finger-safe terminals
Short-circuit protection
Output voltage adjust (+/- 10%)
Light-weight plastic housing
6400 Intrinsic Safety Barriers
i-Go 8058 Signal Converter
Description
Description
Features
Georg Fischer Signet offers singlechannel intrinsic safety barriers foruse with the 515 and 525 paddlewheelflow
sensors.
Both versions use a inch wide housing which snaps
directly to a 35 mm DIN rail. Once mounted, an electrical connection is formed between the barrier and the
rail. The rail serves as the intrinsic safety ground bus
when connected to the designated grounding point. Two
additional ground lugs are provided andmay be used
as a redundant grounding method or for terminating
shields.
Each barrier also contains a replaceable 160 mA fuse
cartridge for each channel. Safety barriers are polarity
sensitive devices and are available in +DC and ACvoltage ratings.
Features
One step, snap-on 35 mm DIN rail mounting and

grounding
Replaceable 160 mA fuse
Lowest internal resistance
Common in. wide housing for single channel versions
Short-circuit proof connections
FM, UL, CSA approved
Compatible with Signet 515 and 525 flow sensors
The Signet i-Go 8058 Signal Converter accepts any

4 to 20 mA signal and converts it into the Signet digital
(S L) format, the serial data format used by the Signet
8250, 8350, 8450 and 8900 instruments. When used
with the 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller, the measurement type and operating range are defined in the 8900
setup menu. When used with level, temperature and
pressure transmitters, the 8058 is configured at the factory to the users specifications.
3
The wire-mount single-channel version is easily mounted anywhere in the interconnecting wiring between the
sensor and the instrument.The DIN rail mounted dualchannel version can convert one or two separate 4 to 20
mA inputs into a digital (S L)output.
3
Features
Connects with level, temperature, pressure and multi-parameter Signet instruments and other manufacturers transmitters
Up to two 4 to 20 mA sensor inputs
Connects additional measurement parameters to
Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter instrument
Wire or DIN rail mountable
8059 External Relay Modules

Description
Signet 8059 External Relay Modules supplement the

output capabilities of certain host instruments such as
the Signet 8900 Multi-Parameter Controller. AC-powered versions accept universal line voltage, and also
provide 24 VDC output that can be used to power the
host instrument or other device(s).
727
The host instrument controls relay operation by way of

a single digital (S L) connection. The compact plastic
housing is DIN rail mountable and includes LED annunciators for each relay, plus one each for power-on and
data transfer or test mode.
3
Features
External relays controlled by host instrument

AC and DC powered versions
DC power output (AC versions)
DC power passthrough (DC versions) to simplify
wiring
Digital (S L) passthrough to simplify sensor wiring
Red LED annunciators for each relay
Green LED indicators for power and digital (S L) data
transfer
Relays may be tested locally, and also via the host instrument
728
Calibration Accessories
pH/ORP Buffer Solutions
Description
The Signet pH buffers are ideal for many calibration requirements. The liquid solutions are conveniently packaged in one pint bottles; the powder pillows are packaged in low weight, single-use containers which can
be mixed with water. All pH buffers are color coded for
easy identification; 4.01 pH is red, 7.00 pH isyellow, and
10.00 pH is blue.
The pH buffers are traceable to NIST standards and
certificates are available upon request. They are accurate to within 0.01 pH units @ 25 C and have long
term stability.
These solutions are temperature sensitive and are provided with temperature correction values for the most
accurate calibration. For applications that requireORP
calibration, the pH 4 and pH 7 buffers can be mixed with
quinhydrone powder for the correct measurement values of +87 mV and +264 mV respectively.
Features
NIST Traceable
Easily identifiable color coded buffer solutions
Liquid or powder versions
Temperature compensated values
Kits for easy use
Calibration Kits for 4150 Turbidimeter

Description
The Calibration Standard kits contain fluids in special

cuvette bottles that are used to compare the clarity of
the process water against the standard to calibrate the
turbidity instrument. The standard kits come in two premixed, calibrated ranges.
The 0-100 version is generally used for measuring the
turbidity of clean, potable water applications. The 01,000 version is used to measure water that has aturbidity which may exceed 100, such as water in a reclamation plant.
Features
Stable pre-mixed standards that are certified accurate

Sealed calibration cuvettes
Shelf life - 1 year
Easy to follow instructions
Kits for easy use
Formazin Stock Kit for 4150 Turbidimeter

Description
The Formazin Stock kit contains all chemicals and instructions to dilute/ mix calibration standards between
1.0 and 1980 NTU/FNU. The Formazin Stock kit can be
used to calibrate third party turbidity instruments as well
as the Signet 4150 Turbidimeter.
Features
Turbidity standard for most any value

Three different graduated pipettes included
Four glass cuvettes with light shield caps
Easy to follow instructions
2759 pH/ORP System Tester

Description
The Signet 2759 pH/ORP Simulator is a battery-powered millivolt generator that simulates pH values of 4,
7 and 10, plus ORP values of 700 mV. This device is
useful as a troubleshooting aid and for general verification of system operation. It is not a substitute for periodic system calibration with pH buffers or testsolutions.
Accessory adapter cables (sold separately) enable the
2759 to connect directly to Signet 2760 preamplifiers,or
2750 pH/ORP Sensor Electronics. The adapters include
a selector switch for pH (3K or PT1000 Temperature
Compensation) or ORP simulation. The switch triggers
automatic sensorrecognition software in Signet pH/ORP
instrumentation.
Features
Battery powered millivolt generator

Simulates pH and ORP values
High impedance input simulates preamplified signal
Verifies system functionality
Compatible with 2750 and 2760 preamplifiers
Connects to any Signet pH/ORP instrument
Verifies preamplifier or instrument electronics
Conductivity/Resistivity Tools
Description
The Signet conductivity/resistivity tools are available for

certification or validation of electronics that are independent of the electrode. Because there are no available
liquid standards for calibration in lowconductivity and resistivity applications, these tools are ideal for various installations. All tools are built to conform to the ASTM D
1125-95 Standard (StandardTest Methods for Electrical Conductivity and Resistivity of Water), which is also
commonly used for USP 24 applications.
Signet tools simulate, within 0.1% precision (accuracy), various values: 1.0 S, 2.5 S, 10.0 S, 10.0 M,
18.2 M. These tools also temperature compensated to
25 C and enable the user to accurately validate or certify the electronics.
Model 2830 can be used with Signet Models 5800CR,
8850, and 8860 instruments. The 2850-101-X simulators are used with the Model 2850 electronicsand simply
plugs into the same terminals as the sensor cables.
Features
Simulates five different values

Compatible with all Signet Conductivity/ Resistivity instruments
Verifies electronics independent of electrode
NIST traceable units
Temperature compensated to 25 C
All units ship with NIST traceable certificates
729
Installation
Installation of Turbidity
4150 Turbidimeter
Turbidity Installation
An owner's manual is included with every instrument
that ships. Please refer to this manual for detailed instructions regarding installation and operation. The instrument includes a mounting braket designed for the
instrument to mount on a vertical surface.
This was made simpler by having pre-drilled mounting
holes on a pattern common with instruments used for
this measurement. A pattern hole template is also included with the instrument when new mounting holes
are required.
Plumbing
Use 8 mm (5/16 in.) OD, 5 mm (3/16 in.) IDflexible
tubing for the water supply connections.
Opaque tubing (not supplied) should be used to prevent algae growth if the tubing will be exposed to sunlight.
The 4150 requires only 1 psi head pressure to operate.
The flow through cuvette is rated for a flow of 100 mL/
m to 1 L/m (0.026 - 0.26 GPM).
The integral pressure regulator is rated for a maximum pressure of 200 psi. It is factory adjusted. Do
not tamper with the regulator.
Inlet water pressure should not exceed 50 psi to avoid
damage to the tubing connection to the regulator.
Fluid temperature must not exceed 50 C (122 F).
The shutoff clamp is used to interrupt the flow during
cuvette maintenance.
route the sensor drain tubing to a suitable drain.
Do not reintroduce the drain sample to the process
stream.
Calibration and Operation

Please refer to the owner's manual for details.
Installation of Flow Sensors

Paddlewheel
I. Piping Location
The correct location of the sensor in the piping system
helps to ensure a proper flow profile in the pipe. It is
important to have sufficient straight pipe immediately
upstream of the sensor to create fully developed turbulent flow. Such a flow profile provides the stability
required for the paddlewheel to measure accurately.
The diagrams below illustrate the minimum distances
that are recommended to mount plastic and metal
paddlewheel sensors.
In all scenarios, it is recommended to choose a location with as much straight, uninterrupted pipe length
upstream of the sensor as possible
Flow Installation Tips:
Use Signet fittings for proper insertion into the process flow.
Recommended up-stream distances are stated as
a multiplier of the I.D. (inner diameter) dimension of
the pipe. Note that these multipliers are different for
each example and depend upon the upstream obstruction.
Paddlewheel sensors can be used for all water-like
fluids with little or no particulates (100 micron in diameter/length), and non-ferrous, non-fouling in nature.
Always use these sensors in full pipes.
Always maximize the distance between sensors and
pump sources.
II. Mounting Angle
Paddlewheel sensors are affected by the mounting angle due to the effect of gravity increasing the friction
between rotor and bearing surfaces. Air entrapment
and sediment within the pipe may also adversely affect
sensing accuracy and/or impede operation.
Paddlewheels in Vertical pipes:
Power
The power required is 100 - 240 volts AC at 47 - 63 Hz.
The output is a single programmable 4 to 20 mA DC instrument signal that is in direct proportion to the turbidity. Also provided are two programmable alarm relay
outputs, one for high process alarm and the other for
low process alarm sense. Note, both alarms are used in
common to indicate an instrument malfunction, i.e. High
Humidity.
730
Mount the sensor in a pipe with an upward flow. This

position is recommended for all scenarios, as it ensures a full pipe.
Vertical installations with down-ward flow are generally not recommended.
III. Installation Fittings

Fixed Depth
Paddlewheels in Horizontal pipes:
The insertion depth of a paddlewheel in a flow stream

is critical and must be achieved and maintained to ensure accurate flow measurements. Signet installation fittings for Rotor-X and Metalex paddlewheel flow sensors
set this depth automatically and facilitate the use of convenient K-Factors (calibration values) published in the
sensor instruction manuals.
45 from vertical is the recommended sensor mounting angle to avoid air bubbles (pipe must be full). With
the sensor at greater angles, the drag created by the
rotor resting against the sensor body may compromise performance at the lower end of the operating
range.
Straight up installations may experience interference
from entrained air at the top of the pipe.
Inverted installations are often subject to blockage
due to sediments in the pipe. Mounting sensors in the
bottom of the pipe is NOT recommended if sediments
are likely to be in the pipe.
The H-dimension controls the insertion depth and they

are critical for proper seating of the flow sensor into the
pipe. These dimensions can be found listed in the flow
sensor instruction manuals.
515, 2536 and 2537 Rotor-X
K-Factors
K-Factors are calibration values (pulses per unit of volume) used to convert flow sensor output frequencies to
flow rates. Signet publishes K-Factors for water only in
gallons (pulses per gallon) and liters (pulses per liter) for
all sensors, in all applicable pipe sizes and materials,
and/or all applicable installation fitting sizes and materials. K-Factors for fluids other than water must be determined empirically, typically on-site using a secondary
standard.
This section outlines the installation fittings available

from Signet for the 515, 2536 and 2537 Rotor-X family
of flow sensors. The fitting controls the location of the
paddlewheel inside the pipe, which in turn determines
the calibration constant (K-Factor).
Refer to the Fittings section of this catalog for a complete listing of part numbers.
Note that K-Factors are published for pipe sizes od

DN15 to DN300 (0.5 in. to 12 in.). For other pipe sizes,
statistical K-Factors may be available. Contact Technical Support for more information.
Flow Installation Tips:
Ensure that all wetted materials are chemically compatible with the process liquid.
Pressure and temperature ratings are reduced when
plastic flow sensors are mounted in metal piping systems.
The flow sensor is designed to fit tightly into the fittings. Lightly lubricate o-rings with a non-petroleum
based lubricant to ease the installation.
Cut the cable to the desired length if too long. Do not
coil extra cable.
731
525 Metalex
This section outlines the installation fittings available
from Signet for the 525 Metalex family of flow sensors. The fitting controls the location of the paddlewheel inside the pipe, which in turn determines the
calibration constant (K-Factor).
Refer to the Fittings section of this catalog for a complete listing of part numbers.
525-1 Metalex Flow Sensor
The smallest Metalex Flow Sensor (525-1) must be installed into a specially constructed tee fitting with socket-weld piping connections.
Consult a qualified welder to install metalex fittings.

Use of saddle fittings reduces the pressure rating for the
525 sensor.
IV. Rotor placement
Procedure for plastic paddlewheel sensors:
1.Hold the sensor upside down and hold the rotor still.
2.Place the tip of a medium blade screwdriver between
the rotor and the sensor body.
3.Turn the screwdriver blade 90 to flex the ear back
just enough to angle the rotor pin out of one side.
Procedure for metal paddlewheel sensors:

Use the 525-2 and one of these weld-on fittings for
stainless steel pipes from DN32 (1.25 inches) up to
DN300 (12 inches) in diameter.
1. With a small pair of needle-nose pliers, firmly grip the

center of the rotor pin (shaft) and with a twisting motion,
bend the rotor pin into an S shape. This should pull the
ends of the pin out of the retainers and free the rotor assembly.

The 525-3 is the longest metalex flow sensor. It requires
one of the strap-on saddles for pipes from DN50 (2
inches) up to DN300 (12 inches) in diameter.
732
2. Remove retainer from each side by gently tapping it

inwards using a punch. Install a new retainer with its rotor pin clearance hole inward. Only install one retainer
at this time.
3.For liquid-tight glands, tighten the compression fitting

onto the fitting sufficiently to achieve a seal around
the cable.
4.For conduit adapters, thread the cable through the
adapter and tighten the adapter into the sensor fitting.
3. Insert the new rotor assembly and bearings into the

rotor housing of the sensor and place the new rotor
pin (shaft) through the open end of the rotor housing,
through the rotor and bearings, and into the previously
installed retainer.
4. Tap the second retainer (rotor pin clearance hole inwards) into the hole while lining up the rotor pin with the
center of the retainer hole. This completes the rotor replacement procedure.
Cable Gland (Liquid Tight Connector):
V. Cable glands and conduit adapter kits

Cable Glands and Conduit adapter kits are available to
install on Models 515, 2536, 525 when used in wet environments. These items protect against moisture entering the back end of the sensor. Follow these simple
instructions to prolong the life of the sensor. Conduit
adapters are included with the 2540 sensors.
1.Remove the black Nylon bushing to expose the female threads at the back end of the flow sensor. Use
a standard medium size screwdriver to pry the bushing up and out of the port. Slide it up and off the entire
length of the cable, or cut it away carefully so as not
to knick the cable jacket.
2.Thread the gland or conduit adapter over the cable
and screw the 1/2 in. NPT male threads into the top of
the sensor in place of the bushing.
Conduit Adapters (suitable for all plastic and metal paddlewheel sensors):
Wet-Tap and Hot-Tap

VI. Wet-Tap and Hot-Tap installation
3519 Wet-Tap Valve
733
The 3519 Wet-Tap consists of a flange and support

plate that threads onto the pipe fitting insert, and a
PVC ball valve through which an extended length,
wet-tap style sensor is inserted into the pipe.
No special tools are required to install the 3519.
The Signet 3519 Wet-Tap Valve mounts directly onto standard Signet installation fittings for the 515 and
2536 flow sensors. The wet-tap sensors are identified
in their part number as -P3, -P4 and -P5, depending
on the pipe size.
The 3519 Wet-Tap valve can only be installed in an
empty pipe. Once installed, the sensor can be removed and re-inserted while the process is active.
Pressure must be reduced prior to insertion and removal of sensor (please see individual product page
for more information).
2540 and 2552 Hot-Tap

The valve for Hot-Tap sensors can be installed while
the pipe is full if a hot-tap drill is used. Consult with
your piping supplier for information regarding drills.
To install a Hot-tap sensor, you will need a hot-tap
drilling machine, a ball valve, a metal pipe nipple.
Signet Hot-Tap installation tool available (2540 only).
Hot-Tap sensors can be installed and removed without process shutdown. Care must be taken while removing sensor under process conditions. The installation tool serves to hold the sensor against the line
pressure as it is retracted or inserted into the pipe
(2540 only).
The Hot-Tap installation fitting has a bleed valve to relieve the pressure when retracting the sensor (2540
only).
In-Line Rotors and Turbines

I. Piping Location
The location of the sensor in the piping system determines the flow profile that the sensor is monitoring.
The ideal location is to have sufficient straight pipe immediately upstream of the sensor to create fully developed turbulent flow. Such a flow profile provides
the stability required for the paddlewheel to measure
accurately.
The diagrams below illustrate the minimum distances
recommended from various obstructions.
In all scenarios, it is recommended to choose a location with the maximum length of straight, uninterrupted pipe.
Six common installation configurations are shown
below as guidelines to help you select the best location in your piping system for the flow sensor. Always maximize distance between sensors and pump
sources.
Never install immediately down-stream of valves, fittings, etc.
Observe minimum Reynolds Number (see Technical
Reference section).
The flow sensors are not for bi-di-rectional operation.
For optimal performance of the 2507, a straight flow

run of at least 100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 in.) should be allowed before and after the sensor.
II. Mounting Angle

The mounting angle of the sensor may affect the performance of the system.
In-line Rotors:
Signet Models 2507 and 2000 flow sensors are designed to be mounted on a flat surface, although the
sensors may be tilted up to 30 if necessary.
Installation in excess of 30 will affect the accuracy of
the sensor.
For Model 2507, two pipe fitting adapters (included)
convert the straight threads G-1/4 in. to 1/4 in. NPT.
These sensors should be installed securely to their
supporting surface to prevent vibrations from affecting
the performance.
Turbine Flow Sensors:
734
All mounting angles are accept-able for these sensors

if the basic parameters are met: the pipe must be full
with no entrapped air.
Install the sensor with the arrow pointing in the direction of the flow of liquid.
Vortex
I. Piping Location
Install the sensor with the arrow pointing in the direction of the flow. These flow sensors are not for bi-directional operation.
Recommended upstream distanc-es are stated as a
multiplier of the I.D. (inner diameter) of the pipe. Note
that these multipliers vary and depend upon the type
of obstruction.
Follow these recommended distances to ensure a
good flow indication.
Magnetic
Magnetic Flow Sensors
All mounting angles are acceptable for these sensors
if the basic parameters are met: the pipe must be full
with no entrained air.
On horizontal pipe runs sensor may be mounted in
any position around the pipe. If air bubbles or sediments are expected; mount at a slight angle.
On vertical pipe runs sensor may be mounted in any
orientation with UPWARD flow preferred to ensure a
full pipe.
Vortex Installation Tips:
Sensors must be used in full pipes.

Sensors may be mounted at any angle.
Observe minimum Reynolds Number and Back
Pressure requirements.
Never install immediately downstream of valves, fittings, etc.
For optimal performance, choose a piping location
with the maximum length of straight un-interrupted
pipe lengths upstream of the sensor.
II. Mounting Angle
Signet Vortex Flow Sensors may be mounted at any angle, and either horizontal or vertical piperuns, with upward flow prefered in the case of vertical runs.
Backpressure Calculation
Minimum downstream pipe backpressure levels are required to prevent cavitation within the sensor. The minimum back pressure is calculated by the following formula:
(2.7 x P) + (1.3 x Pv)
P: Pressure drop across sensor
Pv: Liquid vapor pressure at operating temperature.
735
III. End Connector Options

Solvent socket version:
Available in PVC. Follow the PVC cement
manufacturers recommendations for preparation and
installation.
D) Quick release pipe clamp

E) Tank flange
Installation Tips:
Mount the electrode near tank outlet away from

reagent addition areas.
Place the electrode tip in pH 4 buffer during system
maintenance or storage to avoid dehydration.
II. In-Line Installation
Installation of pH/ORP Electrodes

I. Submersible Installation
2724-2726
/ 2764-2767 / 2774-2777 with 27750/2760 preamplifier
1.TheO-ringat the top of the electrode fits very tightly
into the preamplifier. Use a small amount of lubricant
(non-petroleum based) to assist the assembly.
2.To prevent moisture from migrating into the preamplifier, backfill the conduit with 3 to 4 inches of sealant.
3.Mount electrodes in a location with ample clearance
to remove them for periodic cleaning and recalibration.
4.Choose a location that keeps the electrode glass
completely submerged at all times.
2724-2726
/ 2764-2767 / 2774-2777 pH/ORP Electrodes with
2750 or 2760 Preamplifier
Models 2724-2726, 2764-2767 and 2774-2777 feature a thread close to the sensor end which allows the
sensor to thread directly into a standard NPT pipe tee.
Electrodes must be immersed in liquid. Keep pipe full
at all times to avoid dehydration.
Observe mounting angle requirements for models
2764-2767.
Any mounting angle is acceptable for Models
2724-2726, 2774-2777.
Models 2724-2726 are compatible with Signet installation fittingsfor pipes from DN15 to DN100 (1/2 in. to 4
in.).
III. Installation Fittings compatible with Models

2724-2726 pH/ORP Electrodes
See Fittings section for more information
Customer supplied:
A) 3/4 in. NPT threaded pipe
B) Signet threaded J-box
C) Flex conduit
736
Installation Tips
Use pipe adapters to install electrodes into pipe

sizes larger than DN100 (4 inches)
Adapters are designed to either glue into a plain
socket tee (specify socket) or thread into a 1.25 inch
threaded tee (specify threaded).
IV. Mounting Angle

Sensor Mounting - Models 2764-2767
pH electrodes must be mounted at least 15 from the

horizontal to ensure proper sensing. Sensors mounted at less than 15 will impede performance.
ORP electrodes may be mounted at any angle without
affecting the performance.
Sensor Mounting - Models 2724-2726, 2774-2777
Models 2724-2726 and 2774-2777 may be mounted

at any angle without affecting the performance.
Avoid the 12 oclock position.
In the presence of sediment, avoid the 6 oclock position.
3719 Wet-tap Overview
All of these components are sold separately:
a) 3719 pH/ORP Wet-Tap
b) Low Profile PP Clamp-on Saddle Fitting (ASTM sizes
2.5 to12 in.)
c) 275X-WTand 275X-WTP DryLoc pH or ORP Electrode ("DryLoc" refers to the electrode connector style)
Installation Tips:
Provide 0.6 m (20 in.) minimum clearance from the

top of the pipe for electrode removal.
The 3719 can be mounted in any orientation, including horizontal and inverted.
Use caution when removing inverted sensors. Residual fluid may be present in the retraction housing.
Keep electrode connector clean and dry at all times.
For reliable in-line measurements of pH and ORP,
it is imperative to position the electrode tip into the
process stream.
Because of its compact short stroke design, the
3719 requires low-profile fittings to assure proper
positioning in pipe sizes DN65 to DN300 (2.5 to 12
inches).
It is strongly recommended to use the low profile PP
clamp-on saddle fittings.
3719 pH/ORP Wet-tap Installation
Initial installation must be performed under non-pressurized conditions.
The 3719-11 has a 1.5 in. NPT process connection for
use with accessory saddle fittings from 2.5 to 4 inch.
The 3719-21 has a 2 in. NPT process connection for
use with accessory saddle fittings from 6 to 12 inch.
It is possible to install the 3719 into pipe sizes below
2.5 inches by creating a flow cell with standard piping components.
One simple solution, using a GF SCH 80 PVC tee and
reducer bushings, is illustrated below.
Avoid the entrapment of air inside the flow cell.
Model 3719-12 has an ISO 7/1-R1.5 process connection to fit pipe sizes DN65 to DN100. Installation fittings are customer supplied.
Model 3719-22 has an ISO 7/1-R2 process connection to fit pipe sizes DN150 to DN300. Installation fittings are customer supplied.
d) 2750/2760 DryLocpH/ORP Sensor with J-Box

e) Output signal options: digital (SL) and 4 to 20 mA
737
4.Install the2750 DryLoc pH/ORP Sensor onto the

electrode connector (see individual operation manuals
for more detail).
VII. 3719 Wet-tap mounting angle
VI. 3719 pH Wet-tap Electrode Installation

The 3719 can be mounted in any orientation, including horizontal and inverted (shown here with both 2720
preamplifier and 2750 Sensor).
The 3719 can be mounted in any orientation, including horizontal and inverted.
Avoid the 12 oclock position.
In the presence of sediment, avoid the 6 oclock position.
Installation of Conductivity/Resistivity
Electrodes
2819 to 2823/2839-1 to 2842-1 with 2850 Sensor
Electronics
Electrode with 2850 Sensor Electronics shown below.
All mounting brackets, electrical conduits, and pipe
extensions are customer supplied.
Sensor Models 2819-2823 are mounted similarly,
except use a 3/4 MNPT Thread to mount to a 3/4
FNPT pipe thread (customer supplied).
1.Slide electrode (DryLoc ) straight down into electrode

piston. Thread electrode into place until connector
shoulder is flush with top of electrode piston. Hand
tighten only.
2.Place the Locking Shroud over electrode; turn 1/4-turn
clockwise to unlock the piston, then press down firmly
on the locking shroud to lower the electrode piston into the pipe.
3.Turn the Locking Shroud 1/4-turn counterclockwise to
lock the piston.
738
Installation Tips:
Signet 2450 Pressure Sensor
Use standard installation hardware to connect the

submersible 2850-3 or -4 directly to external equipment.
In aerated vessels install the electrode in a stilling
well to prevent air from being trapped inside the
electrode.

Conductivity/Resistivity electrodes can be installed
into standard 3/4 inch NPT fittings or ISO 7-R3/4
threaded fittings.
The preferred installation for in-line applications directs flow straight into the electrode. This configuration reduces the probability of entrapped air bubbles,
and provides the best continuous sampling of the fluid
content.
If the electrode is mounted vertically in a tee, do not
recess the orifices inside the tee. Mounting upside
down may help prevent air entrapment.
An oversized tee or flow cell may be helpful for inline
installations.
At least 4 threads (ANSI B1.20.1) must be engaged to
meet pressure rating per published specifications.
Signet 2250 Hydrostatic Level Sensor
Installation Tips:
8050-1 and 8050-2 junction boxes can be useful for

this instal-lation option.
Tri-clamp Connections
Models 2819-2821 are offered with 1 to 1.5 inch and 2
inch sanitary fittings.

The 2450 can be mounted in a pipe-tee using the
threads closest to the sensing end.
The sensor can be mounted with or without an integral mount kit. This kit mounts a junction box or an instrument.
See below for more information on instrument integral
mount and junction box/remote mount examples.
Installation Tips:
Sensors can be mounted into any DN20 (3/4 in)

FNPT pipe tee (customer supplied)
Integral Assembly
Installation of Pressure/Level Sensors

Use the 2450 and 2250 sensors with 4.6 m (15 ft) cable and 10 m (32.8 ft), respectively.
Mount the sensor to an extension pipe or watertight
conduit using thread sealant.
Use a cable gland at the top of the extension to prevent moisture intrusion/accumulation inside the pipe.
DO NOT hermetically seal (i.e. applying silicone
sealant or epoxy) the back of the sensor. To do so
may introduce measurement errors resulting from
changes in atmospheric pressure and/or temperature.
The 3-8052 Integral Kit connects the 8450 Pressure

Transmitter and 8250 Level Transmitter directly onto the
2450 sensors.
Use the 2450 sensor with 15.2 cm(6 in.) cable and
digital (S L) output.
Apply sealant or PTFE tape to the process connection
threads, after inspecting threads to ensure integrity.
Do not install a sensor with damaged threads.
Tighten the sensor 1.5 turns past finger tight into the
process connection.
3
739

The 2350 can be mounted in a pipe-tee using the
threads closest to the sensing end.
The sensor can be mounted with or without an integral kit. This kit mounts a junction box to an instrument.
See below for more information on instrument integral
mount and junction box/remote mount examples.
Installation Tips
Sensors can be mounted into any DN20 (3/4 in.)

FNPT pipe tee (customer supplied).
Remote Assembly
3/4 in. NPT sensor connection
Conduit base and cap with junction terminals
3-9000.392-1 liquid tight connector, 0.5 in. NPT
Integral Assembly
The 3-8052 Integral Kit connects the 8350 Temperature Transmitter directly onto the 2350 sensor.
process connection.
Installation of Temperature Sensors

Use the 2350 sensor with 4.6 m (15 ft) cable.
Mount the sensor to an extension pipe or watertight
conduit using thread sealant.
Use a cable gland at the top of the extension to prevent moisture intrusion/accumulation inside the pipe.
For additional defense against possible accumulation
of condensation at the back seal area of the sensor,
fill the lower 75-100 mm (3-4 inches) of conduit or extension pipe with a flexible sealant such as silicone.
Installation Tips
8050-1 and 8052-1 junction boxes can be useful for

this installation option.
740
Remote Assembly
The optional 3-8052-1 Integral Junction box with 3/4
in. process connection offers a convenient ter-minal
point to extend the 2350 cable over a distance.
The kit includes:
3/4 in. NPT process connection.
Conduit base and cap with junction terminals.
3-9000.392-1 liquid tight connector, 0.5 in. NPT.
process connection.
741
Wiring
Wiring Information: Turbidity
I. 4150 Turbidimeter
Power
Install a circuit breaker in the AC line before the 4150
power connection to allow for service.
The 4150 is not supplied with a power cord.
The power cable bulkhead will accept cable diameters
from 5.8 mm (0.230 in.) up to 10 mm (0.395 in.)
All terminals are designed to accept wires in the range
of 14-28 AWG.
All wires should be stripped to a length of 6 mm (1
in.).
A strain relief strap is provided to reduce tension on
the AC power terminal.
RS485
The RS485 half-duplex (2 wire) digital interface operates with differential levels that are not susceptible to
electrical interferences.
The last device on each bus may require terminating
with a 120-ohm resistor to eliminate signal reflection
on the line.
Do not run RS485 cables in the same conduit as power.
Wiring Information: Sensors & Electrodes

I. Flow sensor cable details and connection to instrumentation
Most Signet Flow sensors are supplied with a standard 7.6 m (25 ft) length of cable except the 2100 Turbine, which has 4.6 m (15 ft)
2551 Magmeters are not supplied with cable.
2552 Magmeters supplied with 7.6 m (25 ft) or submersible version with optional 3.9 m (13 ft) or 5.9 m
(19.5 ft).
Sensors with AC sine wave outputs (515, 525) may
extend cable to a maximum 60 m (200 ft)
Sensors with open collector outputs (2000, 2100,
2507, 2536, 2537, 2540, 2551, 2552) may extend cable to a maximum 300 m (1000 ft)
Maintain all cable shielding through splices or terminal
connections.
Cable should be 2 conductor twisted pair with shield,
18 to 22 AWG.
Signet Flow sensors use cable with Black, Red and
Shield conductors. To facilitate wiring, most Signet instruments have wiring terminals that are labeled with
these same colours.
4 to 20 mA
The active 4 to 20 mA outut is driven by a 15 VDC
power source and can drive external loads up to 600
ohms.
Do not run 4 to 20 mA cables in the same conduit as
power.
I. Flow sensor wiring details for 2537 Flowmeter

Digital (SL) Wiring:
The digital (SL) output is compatible withSignetMultiParameter Transmitters and Controllers.
742
Loop Wiring:
The 4 to 20 mA output can be connected to Chart
Recorders, PLCs or any device that requires a 4 to 20
mA signal.
The 2552 is a traditional 2-wire passive 4 to 20mA loop

transmitter. Eternal loop power (24 VDC 10%) is required. Please refer to the Model 7300 Power Supplies.
II. Wiring Connections for pH/ORP and Conductivity/Resistivity
(SL) pH/ORP Wiring continued
2750 In-Line version with J-Box
4 to 20mA Loop pH/ORP Wiring

On-Off/Pulse:
2750 with J-Box
Provide a single dry-contact relay output that can be

programmed as a HIGH alarm or a LOW alarm.
2750 without J-Box

Pulse/On-Off:
Provide a single solid-state relay output that represents
a volumetric pulse or pulse divided output.
2760 Preamplifier to Other Manufacturers Equipment

I. Flow sensor wiring details for the 2552 Magmeter
Frequency Wiring:
The 2552 offers an open collector frequency signal that
can be connected to any powered Signet flow instrument. If connecting to a non-Signet instrument, 5 to 24
VDC power must be provided to the 2552.
Digital (SL) Wiring:
The 2552 receives 5 VDC power from the 8900. No additional power is required.
Loop Wiring:
2760 Connector to Other Manufacturers Equipment
743
Wiring Information: Instruments

III. Rear Terminal Views Signet Flow Instruments
Terminal 8550-1
2850 Conductivity/Resistivity Sensor Electronics

4 to 20 mA Conductivity/Resistivity Wiring
Terminal 8550-2
Terminal 8550-3
Digital (SL) Output Conductivity/Resistivity Wiring
5075
Dual Digital (SL) Output Conductivity/Resistivity Wiring
5090
5500
744
III. Rear Terminal Views Signet pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity Instruments

pH/ORP
Terminal 8750-1
5600
Terminal 8750-2
Terminal 8750-3
8150 Battery Powered Flow Totalizer
5700
Wiring Information
The terminal blocks for the 8550 are not labeled on

the back of the unit. An adhesive label is supplied
with the instruments with terminal descriptions to
serve as a remote terminal display to aid electrical
installations.
The 8150 Battery Powered Flow Totalizer is compatible only with the AC output sensors, 515, 525.
The wiring is shown here. See Operation Manual for
more information.
Conductivity
745
Terminal 8850-1
Terminal 8850-2
Terminal 8850-3
III. Rear Terminal Views Signet Temperature, Level

and Pressure Instruments
Temperature
Terminal 8350-1
5800CR
Terminal 8350-2
Terminal 8350-3
5900
Level
Terminal 8250-2
Pressure
Terminal 8450-1
8860
746
Terminal 8450-2
Maximum Cable Lengths for all sensors used with
the 8900
Terminal 8450-3
The I/O Module (3-8900.401-x) supports frequency and

(SL) signal types. These signal types are fundamentally different from one another, and the rules governing maximum cable lengths also differ, so the two types
must be treated separately. Refer to the following two
sections as necessary to determine the cable length limitations of any system.
Signal Type: Frequency
The maximum allowable cable length for flow sensors
with frequency output is dependent upon the output signal strength of the sensors themselves, and the degree
to which the signals are susceptible to EMI or noise.
This is largely a function of whether the sensors are
self-powered, or powered by an external source.
III. Rear Terminal Views Signet Instruments

8900 Multi-Parameter
All of the sensors in the table below are compatible with

the 8900. The three models limited to 60 m (200 ft) are
self-powered sensors. The 8900 automatically provides
power to the others via the I/O Module (normal sensor
wiring).
These maximum recommended cable lengths apply to
individual sensors and are completely independent of
one another. Additionally, these cable lengths have no
relevance to any digital (SL) devices that may also be
connected to the I/O Module.
Flow sensor models with Frequency output
60 m
(200 ft)
Max. Cable Length
305 m
(1000ft)
515
525
2000
2100
2507
2536
2537
2540
2551
2552
V. Rear Terminal Views Signet Instruments

9900 Transmitter
747
V. Rear Terminal Views Signet Instruments

9900 Transmitter
Note: Loop Power can be used to power Signet models
515, 525, 2250, 2350, 2450, 2536 and 2540 sensors
748
749
Technical Reference
Section: Flow
Velocity-based Flow Measurement Technologies
All of the flow sensors featured in theSignet catalogue

belong to the broad category of velocity-based flow
measurement devices. This vast offering includes paddlewheel, electromagnetic,in-line rotor, and turbine flow
sensors. Principles of operation vary considerably for
each type, but some very important installation considerations are common throughout. The following discussion plus the general selection guidelines at the front of
the catalogue should help the user choose the appropriate sensor type and obtain optimal flow measurement
results. All manuals, data sheets, and additional helpful
information are available at www.gfsignet.com.
Fully Developed Turbulent Flow
Velocity-based flow sensors depend on fully developed
turbulent flow for accurate and repeatable measurements. Fully developed turbulent flow occurs in Newtonian fluids with a Reynolds Number (Re) greater than
4,500. Low flow rates, viscous liquids, and large pipe
sizes make fully developed turbulent flow more difficult to achieve. The opposite is also true. That is, for a
given set of conditions, simply reducing the pipe size
to increase the local flow velocity will produce a higher
Reynolds Number.
Re
: Reynolds Number
Re
= 3,162.76 x Q x Sg/( x ID)
where:
Q
= Flow rate in US GPM
Sg
= Specific gravity
= Dynamic viscosity in Centipoise (cP)
ID
= Pipe inside diameter in inches
2551
Paddlewheel flow sensors are insertion devices,

mounted perpendicular to the piping system, and rely
upon the energy in the flow stream to spin a rotor (paddlewheel) around a stationary shaft. Most paddlewheel
flow sensors utilise rotors with magnets embedded in
each blade. The magnets are typically used either in
conjunction with a coil internal to the sensor housing to
produce a sinusoidal output (self-generating, non-powered sensors), or to trigger an internal electronic switch
to produce a square-wave output (transistor-type, powered sensors). Either way, the resulting frequency is directly proportional to the fluid velocity.
1) Sinusoidal sensors output a signal typical of self-generating, nonpowered paddlewheel sensors such as the
model 515, 525. The frequency and amplitude (voltage)
both vary directly with flow rate.
OR
Re
= DN x V/
where:
DN
= Pipe inside diameter (m)
= Flow velocity (m/s)
= Kinematic viscosity (m/s)
( of water = 1 x 10 - 6 m/s)
Principles of Operation
Electromagnetic
flow sensors, like Signet models 2551 and 2552 operate

on Faradays principle of electromagnetic induction, and
have no moving parts. As fluid (must be conductive >20
S) moves through the magnetic field produced at the
sensor tip, a voltage occurs that is directly proportion-
750
al to the fluid velocity. Internal electronics then convert

this voltage into a frequency and/or a 4 to 20 mA output.
Signet electromagnetic flow sensors are insertion-style,
suitable for use in a wide range of pipe sizes.
515
525
2) Transistor-type sensors output a signal typical ofpoweredsensors such as the model 2536, 2540, and
all other Signet poweredflow sensors withfrequencyoutput.
2536
2540
2100
Flow Range Charts (GPM)

2537
2551
In-Line rotor flow sensors like the Signet models 2000

and 2507 are similar to paddlewheel sensors, except
the rotor is positioned in a flow cell. These types of sensors have a transistor-type output signal and are able to
measure lower flow rates.
Paddlewheel and Electromagnetic Sensors

Signet models 515, 525,2536, 2537, 2540, 2551, 2552
GPM flow rates for DN15 to DN450 (1/2 in. to 18 in.)
pipe sizes
2000
2507
Turbine flow sensors are full-bore devices designed for

low-flow measurements.Signet model 2100 is offered
in 6.4 mm and 12.7 mm (1/4 in. and 1/2 in.) line sizes.
Many self-aligning end connector options are available
for installation simplicity and application versatility. Similar to paddlewheels, they rely upon the energy in the
flow stream to spin a rotor (turbine). The difference is
that the shaft is in the centre of, and parallel to, the flow
stream. The velocity of the fluid spins the turbine for detection by external electronic circuitry, producing a transistor-type square wave output with a frequency directly
proportional to the flow rate.
751
Nominal Pipe Size

Inch
2551/2552
2536/8512/2537/2540
515 and 8510
525
Metric
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
(mm)
0.15 ft/s
33 ft/s
0.3 ft/s
20 ft/s
1 ft/s
20 ft/s
1.6 ft/s
20 ft/s
0.5
15
0.14
31.25
0.28
18.94
0.95
18.94
1.52
18.94
0.75
20
0.25
54.85
0.50
33.24
1.66
33.24
2.66
33.24
25
0.40
88.89
0.81
53.88
2.69
53.88
4.31
53.88
1.25
32
0.70
153.84
1.40
93.24
4.66
93.24
7.46
93.24
1.5
40
0.95
209.40
1.90
126.91
6.35
126.91
10.15
126.91
50
1.57
345.15
3.14
209.18
10.46
209.18
16.73
209.18
2.5
65
2.24
492.45
4.48
298.46
14.92
298.46
23.88
298.46
80
3.46
760.39
6.91
460.84
23.04
460.84
36.87
460.84
100
5.95
1309.40
11.90
793.57
39.68
793.57
63.49
793.57
125
9.35
2057.74
18.71
1247.12
62.36
1247.12
99.77
1247.12
150
13.51
2971.57
27.01
1800.95
90.05
1800.95
144.08
1800.95
200
23.39
5145.63
46.78
3118.57
155.93
3118.57
249.49
3118.57
10
250
36.87
8110.73
73.73
4915.59
245.78
4915.59
393.25
4915.59
12
300
52.33
11512.97
104.66
6977.56
348.88
6977.56
558.20
6977.56
14
350
126.49
8432.82
421.64
8432.82
16
400
165.24
11015.97
550.80
11015.97
18
450
209.16
13943.74
697.19
13943.74
Flow Range Charts (LPM)
Paddlewheel and electromagnetic sensors

Signet models 515, 525,2536, 2537, 2540, 2551, 2552
LPM flow rates for DN15 to DN450 (1/2 in. to 18 in.)
pipe sizes
Nominal Pipe Size
Inch
2536/8512/2537/2540
515 and 8510
525
Metric
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
(mm)
0.05 ft/s
33 ft/s
0.1 ft/s
6 ft/s
1 ft/s
20 ft/s
1.6 ft/s
20 ft/s
0.5
15
0.6
117.6
1.2
70.6
3.5
70.6
5.9
70.6
0.75
20
1.0
206.4
2.1
123.9
6.2
123.6
10.3
123.9
25
1.7
334.5
3.3
200.7
10.0
200.7
16.7
200.7
1.25
32
2.9
579.0
5.8
347.4
17.4
347.4
28.9
347.4
1.5
40
3.9
788.1
7.9
472.8
23.6
472.8
39.4
472.8
50
6.5
1298.9
13.0
779.4
39.0
779.4
64.9
779.4
2.5
65
9.3
1853.3
18.5
1112.0
55.6
1112.0
92.7
1112.0
80
14.3
2861.7
28.6
1717.0
85.9
1717.0
143.1
1717.0
100
24.6
4927.8
49.3
2956.7
147.8
2956.7
246.4
2956.7
125
38.7
7744.2
77.4
4646.5
232.3
4646.5
387.2
4646.5
150
55.9
11183.3
111.8
6710.0
335.5
6710.0
559.2
6710.0
200
96.8
19365.3
193.7
11619.2
581.0
11619.2
968.3
11619.2
10
250
152.6
30524.2
305.2
18314.5
915.7
18314.5
1526.2
18314.5
12
300
216.6
43328.4
433.3
25997.0
1299.9
25997.0
2166.4
25997.0
14
350
523.7
31419.1
1571.0
31419.1
16
400
684.1
41043.4
2052.2
41043.4
18
450
865.9
51951.7
2597.6
51951.7
752
2551/2552
Flow Range Charts (GPM and LPM)

In-line rotor and turbine sensors
Signet models 2000, 2100, and 2507 GPM and LPM

Flow Rates
GPM
Model and Size
Description
Min
Max
Min
Max
3-2000-1X
Micro flow - low
0.030
0.700
0.110
2.600
3-2000-2X
Micro flow - high
0.300
3.200
1.130
12.110
3-2100-XL and -31 kits
Turbine low - 1/2" tubing
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
3-2100-XL and -34 thru -38 kits
Turbine low - 1/2" pipe
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
Turbine low - 1/2" flare
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
0.100
1.000
0.380
3.800
3-2100-XH and -31 kits
Turbine high - 1/2" tubing
0.800
10.000
3.000
38.000
3-2100-XH and -34 thru -38 kits
Turbine high - 1/2" pipe
0.800
10.000
3.000
38.000
3-2100-X and -40 kit
Turbine high - 1/2" flare
0.800
7.000
3.000
27.000
3-2507-100-2V
Mini-flow - 2mm insert
0.106
0.740
0.500
2.800
3-2507-100-3V
0.198
1.123
0.750
4.250
3-2507-100-4V
0.330
1.585
1.250
6.000
3-2507-100-6V
0.792
3.170
3.000
12.000
Section: pH/ORP
Information in this section addresses frequently asked
questions regarding pH & ORP and is provided as REFERENCE ONLY to supplement procedures and recommendations specifically outlined in individual product instruction manuals. All manuals, data sheets,
and additional helpful information are available at
www.gfsignet.com
Definition of pH
pH is defined as the negative logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration in aqueous solutions. The common pH scale ranges from 0 to 14, with 7 being neutral
water (H2O). At pH 7, hydrogen ions (H ) exist in equal
concentration to hydroxyl ions (OH ). A solution is considered to be acidic if the concentration of H exceeds
that of OH , and is indicated by pH values below 7. Conversely, a solution is considered to be basic if the concentration of H is less than that of OH , and is indicated
by pH values above 7.
+
pH Scale
LPM
Common Bases
Egg whites: 7.5 pH
Seawater: 8.0 pH
Sodium bicarbonate: 8.4 pH
Ammonia: 11 .6 pH
Photo developer: 12.0 pH
0.1M NaOH: 13.0 pH
Lye: 14.0 pH
Definition of ORP
ORP is an abbreviation for Oxidation-Reduction Potential. Oxidation is a term used to denote the occurrence
of a molecule losing an electron. Reduction occurs as a
molecule gains an electron. The potential is simply an
indication of a solutions propensity to contribute or accept electrons. ORP reactions (sometimes referred to
as REDOX) always take place simultaneously. There is
never oxidation without reduction, and ORP electrodes
are used to detect electrons exchanged by molecules
as these reactions occur.
Both pH and ORP electrodes produce voltages that depend on the solutions in contact with their sensing ends.
Most pH electrodes, including theGF Signet brand,
are designed to produce 0 mV at pH 7, positive mV below pH 7 (associated with the charge of the hydrogen
ion, H ) and negative mV above pH 7 (associated with
the charge of the hydroxyl ion, OH ). According to the
Nernst equation, the interval between each pH unit is
approximately 59.16 mV at 25 C. This raw output is
converted to a pH value by the display instrument. The
ORP scale is typically - 1000 mV to +1000 mV, and the
electrodes produce these values directly.
+
(Theoretical: 59.16 mV/pH @ 25C)
Common Acids
1M HCl: 0.0 pH
Sulfuric acid: 0.3 pH
Lemon juice: 2.0 pH
Vinegar: 3.0 pH
Wine: 3.5 pH
Beer: 4.5 pH
Milk: 6.0 pH
Whereas pH is a specific measure of the hydrogen ion

concentration in solution, ORP only provides relative
measures of chemicals and cannot discriminate one
753
from another. Although non-specific, it is a very useful and inexpensive method of monitoring and controlling the activity of such compounds as chlorine, ozone,
bromine, cyanide, chromate, and many other chemical
reactions.
ver chloride element. The reference electrolyte can be

refreshed if it is diluted or depleted. The temperature element is embedded in the pH/ORP electrode for an extremely quick response.
It is worth noting that temperature compensation, very

important for accurate pH measurement, is NOT used
in ORP measurements. Temperature does indeed affect the reactionary potential of all chemicals, some to
a greater extent than others. But even if the affects of
temperature could be precisely known in all of the many
different REDOX reactions, it would not be desirable to
remove them from the measurement. True ORP is the
direct measurement of electrons in transit during oxidation-reduction reactions, regardless of temperature.
Principle of Operation
Standard pH/ORP electrodes are also commonly called

combination electrodes; a pH/ORP measuring electrode and a reference measuring electrode are combined in a single body. The pH/ORP sensor measures
the amount of hydrogen ions in the liquid. The pH signal
is measured against the steady reference signal. Various chemical elements leaching through the porous reference junction can react with the reference electrolyte,
dilute the electrolyte solution, or attack the silver chloride element; in either case, it will disturb the steady reference signal. Stray electrical currents will also affect
the steady reference signal. A temperature element is
also built into the pH/ORP combination electrode. Instruments interpret and temperature compensate the
pH/ORP and reference signals into pH/ORP readings at
25 C (77 F).
Standard pH/ORP electrode: GF Signet offers three different groups of standard pH/ORP electrode models,
2724 - 2726, and 2774 - 2777
Differential pH/ORP electrodes function similar to the
standard (combination) electrodes, but the reference
design is modified and there is a third electrode, the
solution ground. The pH and reference electrodes are
measured against the solution ground. The solution
ground drains stray currents away from the reference element, hence maintaining a steady signal at all times.
The reference salt bridge slows or stops various chemical elements from leaching into the reference chamber. Chemicals that leach in may dilute the electrolyte
but will not react with the glass-encased reference sil-
754
Differential pH/ORP electrode: Signet offers one group

of differential pH/ ORP electrodes, models 2764 - 2767
Standard versus Differential pH/ORP Electrodes
GF Signet offers what is called combination pH/ORP

electrodes; that is, there is a combination of three or
four electrodes built into one common body that measures the pH or ORP of the solutions. These electrodes
are the pH/ORP sensing element, temperature sensing
element (pH only), the reference, and sometimes a solution ground. An electrical path between the process
solution, reference electrode, and the pH/ORP sensing
electrode must always be present to complete the measuring circuit. When the circuit is broken or interrupted,
the result is a faulty reading. There are only a few things
in a chemical process that would affect the glass-sensing element. These include concentrations of HF, constant high temperatures, and particles that can break
the glass.
On the other hand, there are many problems that can
occur with the reference electrode. The reference silver
chloride sensing element (wire) is exposed to the process liquid via the primary porous reference junction,
which is in constant contact with the process and allows
liquid to pass through to the reference electrolyte. Because of the direct contact with the process liquid, the
reference electrolyte and reference silver chloride sensing element can react with chemicals in the process.
Many application liquids do not chemically react with the
reference and therefore a standard electrode will perform well in this scenario. However, there are other pro-
cess chemicals that will easily attack the reference and

therefore, a differential style electrode should be used.
There are three advantages of the differential electrode:
1.If the process chemicals attack the KCl electrolyte, the
reference electrolyte chamber is refillable.
2.If the reference junction becomes clogged by chemical reactions between the KCl and the process chemicals, the reference salt bridge is replaceable.
3.If there are stray currents or if there are process
chemicals that attack the silver chloride wire in the
standard electrodes, it will not attack it in the differential electrode because the wire is encased in a glass
electrode.
A general rule of thumb is to use a differential electrode
if you have mercury, copper, lead, chlorate, bromine, iodine, cyanide, or sulfide compounds in the process liquid. Differential electrodes may also be useful in processes that have oil, grease, or dirt that builds up on the
reference junction because it is easily replaced.
See Model 2764-2767 Differential pH/ORP catalog
pages for more information on standard versus differential electrodes.
Important Application Tips
It is important that the sensing end of pH and ORP

electrodes remain wet, for they may be permanently
damaged if allowed to dehydrate. This is true for both
in-line and submersible installation configurations.
However, be careful to keep the electrical interconnection between electrode and preamplifier dry and
clean at all times. Moisture in this area can also cause
permanent damage.
Some pH and ORP electrode models should be installed greater than 30 above the horizontal plane,
so the internal solutions remain in contact with the
sensing ends. Other electrodes allow horizontal or inverted installation. See individual sensor models for
more information.
pH control is best when performed in a tank. This is
especially true in neutralisation applications since it
is very important for reagents to mix thoroughly with
waste fluids, and to be allowed adequate time for the
reactions to occur. Limiting adjustments to fewer than
3 pH units per stage, and sizing tanks to provide at
least 10 minutes retention time, will increase the probability of producing safe effluents.
For bulb-style pH and ORP electrodes, significant natural self-cleaning by turbulent eddies is achieved at
velocities of 1.5 m/s or more (5 ft/s). Flat surface electrodes get adequate self-cleaning at velocities of 0.3
to 0.6 m/s (1 to 2 ft/s). In all cases, exposure to velocities greater than 3 m/s (10 ft/s) can cause excessive
measurement noise and electrode wear and should
be avoided.
Simply stated, the aging of pH and ORP electrodes
(i.e., reference depletion and decreased glass sensitivity) results from a series of chemical reactions. And
as a general rule, the rates of chemical reactions double with every increase of 10 C (50 F). This means
shorter life expectancy for all pH and ORP electrodes
as application temperatures increase.
HF acid and strong caustics etch pH glass. High concentrations, especially at high temperatures, destroy
electrodes quickly. For applications containing trace
quantities of HF (<2 %), use theSignet 3-2726-HFelectrode. This electrode has a polymeric constituent
in the pH glass that resists attack by HF and extends
the service life considerably over normal electrodes.
In applications where process temperatures will drop
below 10 C (50 F), use the bulb-style electrodes in
place of the flat-style electrode. This is a function of
the electrical impedance of the glass that increases
dramatically as temperature decreases.
Proper electrode placement within a tank is also very
important. Electrodes should be mounted in wellmixed areas, away from reagent and waste introduction. It is usually advisable to position the electrode
near the discharge outlet of the tank.
In-line pH control is not recommended because it is
very difficult to determine the amounts of reagent necessary to achieve a desired reaction if both pH and
flow are variables. However, in-line pH monitoring is
very common and useful.
Maintenance Tips
Cleaning pH and ORP electrodes and calibrating the

systems should be done regularly. The required frequency is application-dependent, but once/week for
cleaning, and twice/month for calibration is recommended.
Isopropyl alcohol may be used for removing mild
grease and oils from the pH sensitive glass or from
the metallic tips of ORP electrodes. Use 5 % HCl on
porous reference junctions clogged with hard water
deposits, or other solvents/detergents as necessary.
Always consider the electrodes materials of construction when selecting a cleanser.
The purpose of calibration is to compensate the system for the continual changes occurring within the
electrodes. Like batteries, all pH and ORP electrodes
eventually deplete and must be replaced. A good
time to determine the condition of an electrode is after
cleaning and during calibration. Note the mV readings
in pH buffers and replace the electrode if its actual mV
output differs more than 50 mV from these theoretical
values: pH 7 = 0 mV, pH 4 = +177 mV, pH 10 = -177
mV. Replace an ORP electrode if its actual mV output
differs more than 50 mV from the theoretical values in
the table below:
ORP values of standard pH buffers saturated with
quinhydrone
pH4
pH7
Temperature (C)
20
25
30
20
25
30
ORP value (mV)
268
264
258
92
87
79
The typical shelf-life recommendation for GFSignet

pH and ORP electrodes is 12 months at 25 C (77 F).
Refrigeration will extend this period, but do not allow
them to freeze! Expansion of internal solutions during
freezing can cause permanent damage to the electrodes.
The risk of putting older electrodes into service is
the possible disappointment of shorter than expected service life. AllSignet pH and ORP electrodes are
marked with date codes to identify the date of manufacture.
755
Section: Conductivity/Resistivity
Information in this section addresses frequently asked
questions regarding conductivity (resistivity) and is provided as REFERENCE ONLY to supplement procedures and recommendations specifically outlined in individual product instruction manuals. All manuals, data
sheets, and additional helpful information are available
at www.gfsignet.com.
Definition of Conductivity and Resistivity
Conductivity is a measure of the ability of a material to

convey an electric current. The proper term for this ability of a solution is electrolytic conductivity since only
ions conduct electric current in solution. When dissolved
in solution, many substances such as salts, acids and
bases dissociate into ions. Electrolytic conductivity (or
simply conductivity) is therefore an indirect measure of
the ionic concentration of a solution. Generally, conductivity increases and decreases with the concentration of
ions.
Unlike pH, which is a specific measure of hydrogen ion
concentration, conductivity is a non-selective measurement of all the dissolved ionic species in a solution. As
such, it is a highly utilised parameter in water, waste
water and industrial process analyses. For example,
conductivity is used to monitor the salt load of waters
entering treatment facilities, to monitor and control the
quality of drinking water and ultra pure water, and to
otherwise detect contaminants in industrial processes.
Principle of Operation
Most conductivity electrodes consist of two measuring

half-cells. The geometry of the half-cells can be tailored
to provide highly accurate measurements over a specific conductivity range. Cell constants help to describe
electrode geometry for the purpose of selecting the appropriate electrode for a given application. A cell constant is defined as the length between the two half-cells
divided by the area of the cells.
Conductivity cell constant = Length/CSA = z/xy
As an example, When x = y = z = 1cm the cell constant
becomes 1cm/1cm = 1cm-1
*CSA is cross-sectional area.
According to the International Standards Organization

(ISO) the unit of conductance is the Siemens (S), after
Werner von Siemens (1816-1892). However, the following three separate units of measure are commonly used
to express conductivity: Siemens/cm (S/cm), mhos/ cm,
and S/cm. For any given measurement Siemens/cm
and mhos/cm are exactly equal; they are merely different labels for the same value. The denominator in
these units (cm) is sometimes truncated but is always
assumed to be present.
Ohmcm is a unit of resistivity (the inverse of conductivity) and is frequently replaced by the symbol for electrical resistance. Units of resistivity are most commonly associated with ultra pure water measurements in the
millions of ohmcm, or M (megohms).
Some users will also find it desirable to express conductivity in terms of parts per million (PPM) or parts per billion (PPB) of total dissolved solids (TDS). GF Signet instruments accommodate this by allowing the entry of
a TDS factor to convert from standard units of conductivity. (See the instruction manual of any current GF
Signet conductivity instrument for details.)
Conductivity is a measurement parameter with a very
wide range. For example, ultra pure water has a theoretical maximum resistivity of approximately 18.3 M,
approximately 0.055 S (microsiemens), whereas concentrated acids and bases can exceed 400,000 S. Despite the wide-ranging possibilities most applications
for conductivity measurement are much narrower. Tap
water, for instance, typically measures between 50 and
1,000 S.
Solutions of very low conductivity (high resistivity) such

as ultra pure water are best measured with half-cells
that are very close together (i. e., cell constant = 0.01
cm ). Highly conductive solutions should be measured
with half-cells that are farther apart and that have relatively little cross-sectional area between them (i. e., cell
constant = 20.0 cm ).
-1
-1
Temperature Compensation
The conductivity of a solution is highly dependent upon
temperature. Therefore, conductivity measurements are
almost always converted to an equivalent conductivity
at the common reference temperature of 25 C (77 F).
This is accomplished by means of temperature compensation algorithms in the instruments, which require
temperature as well as conductivity measurement input.
To simplify and facilitate this requirement allGF Signet
conductivity electrodes contain high-quality temperature
sensing elements intelligently positioned for quick and
accurate response.
Temperature effects on conductivity are more or less
linear for normal water-based solutions, hovering
around 2 % per C. However, the actual linear relation-
756
ship varies considerably with the ionic composition of

the solution and can range from less than 1 % to more
than 3 % per C. This is true of regional ground water
sources as well as for other solutions such as brackish water, acids and bases. Signet instruments allow
the entry of custom linear compensation coefficients
for these applications. See the instruction manual of
anyGF Signet conductivity instrument for details. The
conductivity or resistivity of pure water is not a linear
function with respect to temperature. In fact, the latestGF Signet conductivity instruments utilise a sophisticated polynomial to compensate for the peculiar effects.
For seamless measurement accuracy all currentGF
Signet conductivity instruments switch automatically between linear and pure water compensation as certain
measurement thresholds are crossed.
conditions for reliable continuous conductivity measurements. If the application is such that sediment is likely to
accumulate on the bottom of the tank, then position the
electrode to avoid it being smothered by debris.
Temperature Compensation Exception

One exception to the requirement for temperature compensation has been established by USP (United States
Pharmacopeia), which prescribes limits of acceptability for ultrapure water quality based upon non-compensated measurements. This methodology is used to eliminate measurement variances that may result from differences in the pure water temperature compensation
algorithms used by different manufacturers of conductivity measurement equipment. A more thorough treatment of the USP standard and instrument functionality
can be found in the instruction manuals of the followingGF Signet conductivity instruments: Model 8900MultiParameter Controller, Model 8860 Dual Channel Conductivity/Resistivity Controller.
Important Application Tips
The two basic installation configurations for conductivity electrodes are in-line and submersible. In-line configuration refers to installation into a piping system as opposed to submersion in a tank. In either case the primary considerations are to minimise the propensity for air
entrapment inside and/or around the electrode and to
position the electrode for representative exposure to the
process.
In-Line Installation
For in-line configurations it is best to install the electrode
in the dead leg of a tee fitting. That is, use a tee fitting
in place of an elbow and install the electrode in the horizontal plane. Best results will be obtained if fluid flows
into and around, then up and away from the electrode.
Be sure that at least one of the holes in a flow-through
electrode is facing upward to allow air bubbles to escape.
Upward flow is the preferred installation when mounting

the sensor in a tee.
For submersible installation when conductivity electrodes are submerged in tanks beware of mechanical
mixers, sparges and inlets as potential sources of air
bubbles. Baffles may be used to create more favourable
Mounting a submersed sensor on the side of the baffle

that is free of air bubbles is preferred.
MostGF Signet conductivity electrodes are supplied
with a standard 4.6 m (15 ft) of cable. Generally, this
can be extended up to a maximum of 30 m (100 ft). If
splicing in the field, then use good quality 3-conductor shielded 22 AWG cable and be sure to maintain the
shield through the splice. Electrode cable should be
routed separately from power wiring. The maximum allowable cable length for resistivity measurements above
10 M (below 0.1 S) is 7.6 m (25 ft), except for the
model 2850 conductivity sensor which allows cable
lengths of almost 915 m (3,000 ft) for all measurements.
The primary purpose of calibration is to compensate the
system for possible changes occurring to the electrodes
cell constant. Since the cell constant accuracy of allGF
Signet conductivity electrodes is tightly controlled, and
since brand new electrodes should be allowed to soak
overnight prior to calibration, out-of-the-box calibration
of conductivity systems is not recommended.
Maintenance Tips
Conductivity electrodes are not inherently perishable

as pH and ORP electrodes. This means system calibrations and electrode replacements are typically not required as frequently. However, depending upon the application, conductivity electrodes may require periodic
cleaning to remove coatings, algae growth, scale buildup, etc. Use isopropyl alcohol for removing mild grease
and oils, and/or other cleansing agents as necessary.
Always consider the electrodes materials of construction when selecting a cleanser.
The shelf-life ofGF Signet conductivity electrodes is limitless. However, oxidation can cause cell constants to
drift over time. If there is any doubt about an electrodes
condition, then clean it thoroughly before placing it into
service.
757
When installing new electrodes, it is recommended to

soak the electrode into the process solution for several
days before the first use. This will condition the surfaces
of the electrode.
Relay Information
The two most common methods of controlling a process
are on/off and proportional control. In on/off control,
relay setpoints are defined as either high or low limits
on the process variable. When the measurement value reaches a limit the relay is energized, typically for
the purpose of opening a valve or starting a pump to introduce a chemical reagent to the process. This should
cause the measurement value to change in the direction of the setpoint as shown in these on/off control diagrams:
High limit on/off relay control
and improve precision. Establishing a proportional control scenario requires the selection of setpoint(s), deviation range(s) and maximum pulse rates. The example
shown here illustrates how two relays in pulse mode
can be used to proportionally control pH within a desired
range, or to a single setpoint. This is called Dual Proportional Control. Of course, a single relay in proportional pulse mode can be used to establish a high or low
limit and will also reduce overshoot.
Metering pumps are idle at and between setpoints.
When a setpoint is exceeded, the pump begins delivering reagent at a rate proportional to the difference between the measurement value and the setpoint. The
larger the difference, the faster the delivery. The programmed deviation value defines how quickly the maximum pulse rate is reached. Depending on the input requirements of the metering pump, proportional control
can also be accomplished with scaleable 4 to 20 mA
outputs instead of pulsing relays or open collectors.
Dual proportional pulse relay control
Low limit on/off control
Open collector output
Notice the relay will not de-energize until the setpoint

is exceeded by the hysteresis value. This is a programmable value and is primarily used to prevent relay
chatter, which occurs if a relay is set to energize and
de-energize at the same value. Because of hysteresis,
and because reagent delivery is fairly constant while the
relay is energized, a condition known as overshoot is
inherent to the on/off control method. Overshoot refers
to the introduction of more chemical reagent than is absolutely necessary for achieving a desired adjustment to
the process value, and can be expensive over time.
Proportional control is a popular alternative to the on/
off control method. This method typically makes use
of variable rate metering pumps to reduce overshoot
758
ManyGF Signet instruments and sensors feature Open

Collector Outputs for purposes of signal transmission,
alarming, control signal output, etc. Although such outputs allow for a lot of wiring flexibility, care must be
taken not to destroy the circuits via incorrect polarity,
over-voltage, transients or current overload. Below is
an explanation of proper wiring and dimensioning of related circuit components. Please note that the following recommendations may or may not apply to other
manufacturers equipment.
1. Function
Open Collector (OC) outputs are low-powered, solid state switches. Although the term Open Collector
stipulates the use of bipolar transistors (NPN-type or
PNP-type) as a switch, nowadays Field Effect Transistors (FET or MOSFET) are used. Unlike electromechanical switches (e. g. pushbuttons or dry contact relays)
these OC switches are very fast, use little power, are
inexpensive, do not bounce and do not wear. However, OCs are also more limited in terms of voltage and
current rating as well as being polarized (i. e. they have
a plus and minus terminal and thus DC only switching capability). They are less tolerant to overload abuse
than electromechanical devices. Usually these switches
have higher resistance and voltage drop.
2. Sensor Wiring
A typical example of the need for high speed switching

capability is the OC frequency output of GF Signet flow
sensors like 3-2536 or 3-2540. Signal frequencies can
reach several hundred pulses per second while voltage
and current requirements are small enough, allowing
the use of a transistor switch. For each output pulse this
switch connects the signal output to the negative supply or ground terminal of the sensor and is therefore an
NPN style output.GF Signet does not produce sensors with PNP style outputs (which connect the signal
output internally to the positive supply terminal). Most
indicating instruments or control system inputs require
a signal voltage of 0 to 5 V (TTL or CMOS logic levels) or 0 to 24 V. Therefore, Open Collector output circuits must be complemented with a Pull-Up-Resistor
to function properly. Please see the following example
diagram for wiring with a PLC input:
Do not exceed the absolute maximum voltage rating of

the OC output as listed in the sensor specifications, normally 27 or 30 Volt, DC only. This includes changes to
power line fluctuations, transients or power supply instability, otherwise damage to the OC will occur.
Please note that the voltage connected to the positive
sensor supply (V+) must correspond to the required
high-level PLC input voltage (i.e. if the high-input voltage of the PLC is 24 V, then the pull-up must be supplied with 24 V). If the input is TTL-Level or CMOSLevel, that means 5V for high level, then the pull-up
should not be connected with a supply higher than 5 V.
3. Instrument Output Wiring
Open collector control and alarm outputs onSignet instruments (i. e. ProcessPro or ProPoint series) are electrically isolated from the instruments power supply.
That means these can be used in the above mentioned
NPN configuration as well as in PNP configuration, if required. Below are a few sample circuits:
PLC wiring NPN style
Alarm circuit or alarm lamp wiring to a single Signet

instrument
Alarm circuit or alarm lamp wiring to serve multiple

Signet instruments
(Triggers the alarm if any one of the instruments open
collector outputs are on)
4. Voltage and Current Limitation
As mentioned before, the supply voltage in the OC output circuit MUST be limited to the specified maximum
OC voltage (see operating manual for specific instrument). The use of a quality regulated 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
(depending on the application) power supply is recommended.
Depending on the stability of the main power line and
the location, it may be necessary to use additional overvoltage protection components or lightning arrestors.
Similarly, the current through the open collector switch
must be limited. Typical OC outputs allow only for 10 to
50 mA switch current (please consult manual). Exceeding this current limit can burn out the OC output components immediately. Please see the following section on
how to dimension the loads.
5. Load and Pull-Up/Down Resistor Considerations
By utilising basic arithmetic and Ohms law, one can determine the safe limits of load resistance. When the OC
switch is closed, almost the entire supply voltage is applied to the load, (i. e. the pull-up or pull-down resistor,
the alarm horn input, a potential power relay coil or annunciator lamp). The resulting current through the load
and through the OC switch, as well, can be calculated
as:
(Current) = (Supply Voltage)/(Load Resistance)
Example 1:
759
The supply voltage is 24 V and a pull-up resistor of

10k is used. Current is 24/10,000 = 2.4 mA (If the
OC current rating is 10 mA, then in this example, it
would be considered safe).
Example 2:
The supply voltage is 12 V and a horn with a resistance of 100 is used. Current is 12/100 = 120 mA
(Even if the OC current rating is 50 mA, this load will
damage the instrument).
6. Transient Protection
There are several difficult load cases that must be

considered:
Inductive loads: These can be power relay or other solenoids, motors, alarm horn coils, etc. Such
loads generate very high voltage spikes when the OC
switch is turned off. If such a load is unavoidable, the
use of transient suppression components or RC filters
(or snubbers) wired parallel to the load is required.
This is critical, as a single transient pulse may destroy
the output.
Capacitive loads: This type of load should be rare
but can occur if the load contains an internal power
supply/regulator that is fed from the OC output circuit.
In such a case, it must be assured that the in-rush
current does not exceed the OC current rating.
Incandescent lamps: Such lamps have a very high
start-up current until the filament glows and the current settles to the specified value. The use of incandescent lamps on an OC output is not recommended.
An LED type annunciator should be used instead.
7. "Active High" and "Active Low" Setting
Depending on the desired function of the circuit attached to the OC output, it may be necessary to have
the OC output switch turned on or off when the criteria for the activation of this output are met.
By default, GF Signet instruments are set to operate in
active low mode. This means when the user-defined
condition for the activation is met (e. g. exceeding of
an alarm limit) the OC switch is turned on. If wired as
standard NPN-style output (see previous page) the
logic level of the attached control system or PLC input
consequently becomes low logic level.
If a high input logic level is required for activation, it can
be accomplished in two ways:
wire the OC output PNP style as described on the
previous page
change the OC output function to active high in the
menu system of the instrument. Most Signet instruments allow for this option.
8. Fail-Safe Behaviour
No matter what the setting, all OC outputs ofGF Signet

instruments turn off when the instrument loses power. This must be taken into account when evaluating
system failure consequences. If the system layout requires a closed or on condition for the output in case
of power loss, a mechanical dry contact relay (NC contacts) must be used instead of the OC output.
Control Output Comparisons

Control Outputs
760
Many Signet products offer control outputs that can be

categorized into three categories: Mechanical Relay,
Solid-State Relay and Open Collector. Each control output offers benefits and limitations based on the application requirements. See below for comparisons.
Open Collector
Benefits:
Longer life than a Mechanical Relay
No moving parts
Can switch DC voltage only (typically 30VDC)
Faster ON/OFF switching capabilities than Mechanical Relays
Considerations:
Can only be used with DC voltage
Polarity very important when wiring
Not recommended for use with inductive loads
Lower voltage and current ratings than Mechanical
Relays
Typically should not apply current>25mA
Solid-State Relays
Benefits:
Has isolated outputs (optically)
Can switch DC voltage (typically 40VDC)
Can switch AC voltage (typically 33VAC)
Longer life than a Mechanical Relay
No moving parts
Faster ON/OFF switching capabilities (Equal rise/fall
times)
Considerations:
Not recommended for use with:
Inductive loads (ex. Solenoid, Pumps)
If using inductive loads, snubbers (RC Filter) can prevent IC damage
Lower voltage and current ratings than Mechanical
Relays
Mechanical Relays
Benefits:
Can switch line voltage (typically 120 to 240 VAC)
Can switch DC voltage (typically 30VDC @ 5A)
Has a large current rating (typically 5A to 10A)
Larger voltage and current ratings than Solid-State
Relay and Open Collector Outputs
Considerations:
Slower ON/OFF switching capabilities than Solid-State Relay and Open Collector Outputs
Mechanical contacts can burn/wear over time
Snubbers (RC Filter), Signet 3-8050.396, can prolong
contact life
RC Filter
RC Filter kits are recommended when using a Signet
transmitter or controller with mechanical relays, and/or
the external relay module 3-8059 to switch on and off
inductive loads. Signet RC filter kits provide protection
and extend the life of the relay by preventing premature
wearing of of the relay contacts, usually caused by voltage/current arching and line noises generated by the
activation and deactivation of mechanical relays.
RC filter kit (3-8050.396) comes with two RC filter assemblies.
Conversion Factors
Volume
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
Gallons (U.S.)
fl. oz. (U.S.)
128
Gallons (U.S.)
cubic in. (in3)
231
Gallons (U.S.)
cubic ft. (ft3)
0.1336
Gallons (U.S.)
liters
3.785
Gallons (U.S.)
cubic meters (m3)
0.00379
Gallons (U.S.)
pounds
8.33
Gallons (U.S.)
cubic centimeter (cm3 3785.41

or cc)
Gallons (U.S.)
Gallon (UK)
0.833
Gallons (U.S.)
milliliter (mL)
3785.41
During the activation and deactivation of a relay, a spark

can be generated on the surface of the relay contacts.
This spark, over a period of time, melts the surface of
the contacts which will prevent the contacts from making a physical connection.
Cubic ft. (ft3)
liters
28.32
Cubic ft. (ft3)
cubic meter (m3)
0.028317
Liters
ft. oz. (U.S.)
33.81
Liters
cubic in. (in3)
61.02
Figure A is suitable for AC and DC applications
Liters
cubic ft. (ft3)
0.0353
Liters
Gallons (U.S.)
3785.41
Figure B is also suitable for AC and DC applications.

However, if this configuration is used with an AC power source, verify that the impedance of the load is less
than the impedance of the RC filter; current leak through
the filter may occur and cause the device to be constantly on.
R = 47
C = 0.01 F
Cubic meter (m3) cubic ft. (ft3)
35.31
Cubic meter (m3) Gallon (UK)
219.97
Cubic meter (m3) Gallons (U.S.)
264.17
1 Acre foot
Gallons (U.S.)
325.853
Cubic ft. (ft3)
Gallons (UK)
6.23
Cubic ft. (ft3)
Gallons (U.S.)
7.48
Pressure
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
psi
bar
0.069
psi
kPa
6.89
psi
atmosphere
0.068
psi
mm of Hg
51.71
atmosphere
bar
1.013
atmosphere
psi
14.696
atmosphere
kPa
101.325
atmosphere
mm of Hg
760
bar
psi
14.5
bar
kPa
100
bar
atmosphere
0.987
bar
mm of Hg
750.06
kPa
bar
0.01
kPa
psi
0.145
kPa
atmosphere
0.00987
kPa
mm of Hg
7.5
761
Temperature
To Convert
Area
Into
Multiply by
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
Deg F
Deg C
(F-32)*0.5555
Acre
Hectare
0.4047
Deg C
Deg F
C*1.8+32
Acre
square ft. (ft2)
43559.66
Acre
square meter (m2)
4046.82
Acre
square kilometer
(km2)
0.004047
square meter
(m2)
Hectare
0.0001
square meter
(m2)
square ft. (ft2)
10.764
Length
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
inch
meter (m)
0.0254
inch
millimeter (mm)
25.4
inch
centimeter (cm)
2.54
foot
meter (m)
0.3048
foot
millimeter (mm)
304.8
square centimeter (cm2)
square ft. (ft2)
0.00108
foot
centimeter (cm)
30.48
square inch (in2)
0.155
cm
foot (ft.)
0.0328
square centimeter
(cm2)
cm
inch (in.)
0.3938
Equations:
foot (ft.)
3.28
inch (in.)
39.37
Flow:
To convert fluid velocity into a volumetric flow rate.
GPM = (ID2 x Feet/sec)/0.4084967
LPM = 0.0471189 x ID2 x m/s
To conver volumetric flow rate into fluid velocity.
Feet/sec = (GPM x 0.4084967)/ID2
m/s = (LPM x 21.22291)/ID2
Flow rate
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
gallon (US)/min
m3/h
0.227
gallon (US)/min
l/s
0.063
gallon (US)/min
ft3/min
0.134
ft3/min
m3/h
1.699
ft3/min
l/s
0.472
ft3/min
gallon (US)/min
7.48
m3/h
l/s
0.2278
m3/h
ft3/min
0.589
m3/h
gallon (US)/min
4.4
l/s
m3/h
3.6
l/s
ft3/min
2.12
l/s
gallon (US)/min
15.85
Weight
To Convert
Into
Multiply by
ounce (Av.)
grams (g)
28.35
pound (Av.)
grams (g)
453.59
pound (Av.)
ounce (Av.)
16
grams (g)
ounce (Av.)
0.035274
grams (g)
pound (Av.)
0.0022046
762
Conductivity
Conductivity
= 1/Resistivity
1/Ohm
= 1 Siemen = 1 mho
Measured conductivity
= ((solution conductivity)
x (electrode sectional
area)) / electrode separation
Measured conductivity
= Siemen/cm
Nominal Pipe Sizes

Below are the NPS (Nominal Pipe Sizes) inch names
and their metric equivalents called DN or diamtre
nominel. The metric designations conform to International Standards Organization (ISO).
NPS (inch)
Metric
DN (mm)
Metric
DN (mm)
NPS (inch)
1/8
450
18
500
20
10
550
22
15
600
24
20
650
26
25
700
28
32
1.25
750
30
40
1.5
800
32
50
900
36
65
2.5
1000
40
80
1100
42
100
1200
48
125
1400
54
150
1500
60
200
1600
64
250
10
1800
72
300
12
2000
80
350
14
2200
88
400
16
Application Assistance Form

Please provide as much detail as possible for prompt assistance. Fax the completed form to Technical Support at your local FG
sales office.
Date:
Company:
Contact:
Address:
City:
Country:
Phone:
Name of project:
GF Distributor:
Zip/Postal Code:
State/Province:
Ext:
Fax:
Tel:
Contact:
Description of application(use seperate sheet if necessary):
Piping system: (if flow sensor, on separate sheet sketch piping system - see Installation section for upstream and downstream
requirements)
Piping material:
Size:
Schedule:
Angle:
Vertical or Horizontal
Fluid temp. range:
min:
max:
nominal:
Control range:
Line press. range:
min:
max:
nominal:
Control range:
Process pH range:
min:
max:
nominal:
Control range:
Cond/Resist range:
min:
max:
nominal:
Control range:
Turbidity range:
min:
max:
nominal:
Control range:
763
Sensor mounted:
Indoor or Outdoor
Indicator mounted:
Indoor or Outdoor
Sensor mounted:
In-line or Submersible
If submersible, tank size and shape:

Fluid to be measured:
Chemistry:
Fluid viscosity:
Specific gravity:
Percent solids:
Flow rate:
min:
Back pressure after sensor:

Required accuracy:
Cable run from sensor to indicator:
Available power:
Required outputs &

Qty:
764
psig/bar
Size of solids:
max:
nominal:
Unit of measurement:
Amperage:
ft./m
Description:
Operating Temperature & Pressure

Graphs
Operating Temperature & Pressure Graphs:
Flow Sensors
Model 515
Model 525
Model 2536 and 2537*
Model 2540
*2537 only:
Graph applies to wetted materials (sensor) only. Maximum ambient temperature is 65C.
Model 2551
Model 3519 WetTap
765
Pressure Drop Graphs: Flow Sensors

Model 2000
Model 2552
Model 2100
Model 2100
Model 2507
Model 2507
766
Model 3719

pH/ORP Electrodes
Models 2724-2726

Conductivity Electrodes
Model 2819, 2820, 2821
Models 2764-2767
Models 2774-2777
Model 2822
767
Model 2823
Model 2450
Models 2839-2842

Fittings

Temperature/Pressure Graphs
Model 2250
Note: The pressure/temperature graphs are specifically for the Signet sensor. During system design the specifications of all components must be considered. In the
case of a metal piping system, a plastic sensor will reduce the system specification. When using a PVDF sensor in a PVC piping system, the fitting will reduce the
system specification.
PVC-U and PVC-C Tees
Model 2350
Fiberglass Tees
768
Metal Tees
PP and PDVF Tees
Backpressure Drop Graphs: Flow Sensors

Backpressure Calculation:
Minimum downstream pipe backpressure levels (full pipes)
are required to prevent cavitation within the sensor. The minimum back pressure is calculated by the following formula:
2.7 x P + 1.3 x Pv
P = Pressure drop across sensor

Pv = Liquid vapor pressure at operating temperature
Model 7000-7001
Metal Weldolets and Saddle Fittings
769
770
Glossary
4 to 20 mA: A standard analogue (also analog)signal

used for the proportional representation of a measurement variable or process condition.
Absorb: To take up or receive by chemical or molecular
action.
AC(Alternating Current): An electric current in which the
flow reverses periodically. Compare direct current (DC).
Accumulator: See Totalizer
Accuracy: The ability of a measurement to match the
actual value of the quantity being measured.
Acid: A corrosive liquid (usually in a solution) that dissolves metals and other materials. Technically, acidic
material produces positive ions in solution. An acid is
the opposite of a base and has a pH between 0 to 7.
A given amount of an acid added to the same amount
of a base neutralises the base, producing water and a
salt. Common vinegar, for example, is a weak solution
of acetic acid.
Active Outputs: These outputs throttle current in loops
powered by the 8900; no external power source is required.
Adsorption:The clinging of molecules to the surface
of particles; the process by which activated carbon removes contaminants from water.
Alkali: A bitter,caustic mineral often found in large beds
in the desert. Alkalis are bases; two common examples
are lye and ammonia.
Analogue (also analog):A type of signal in which data is represented by continuously variable, measurable,
physical quantities, such as current or voltage. 4 to 20
mA is a common analogue signal. As opposedto Digital.
Base: A bitter,caustic liquid. Technically, a basic material produces negative ions in solution. A base is the
opposite of an acid and has a pH of 7 to 14. A given
amount of a base added to the same amount of an acid
neutralises the acid; water and a salt are produced. Alkalis are bases; ammonia is a common base.
Batch Control: The process of dispensing a precise
volume of fluid repetitively or in conjunction with another
process.
BCF: Bead and Crevice Free; a welding technique for
plastic pipes that yields a weld surface suitable for high
purity application requirements.
Bi-Directional Flow: (1) All Signet flow sensors with a
frequency output are bi-directional; the sensor will allways have an output of "positive" flow no matter which
direction the fluid is flowing in the pipe. (2) Flow sensors
with 4 to 20 mA output can be set for uni- or bi-directional flow. Uni-directional flow indicates one direction
of flow only, typically set as 4 mA equal to zeroflow and
20 mA equal to the maximum flow rate required. Bi-directional flow can be set-up by making the 20 mA output
equal to a positive number (for instance, +5 m/s).
Blind Transmitter: Any device having 4 to 20 mA output without also having a local/permanent display.
Boolean: A logic system treating variables through the

operators AND, OR, NOT, and XOR, where each operator can have one of two values, true or false.
Buffer: Typically a solution used as a calibration standard due to its ability to maintain a stable pH value.
Calibration: Systematic adjustment of the display and/
or output of a measuring instrument for the purpose of
conforming to a standard or actual value.
Caustic: Any strongly corrosive chemical substance,
especially one that attacks organic matter. A caustic alkali is a metal hydroxide, especially that of an alkali metal; caustic soda is sodium hydroxide, and caustic potash
is potassium hydroxide. Most inorganic acids, e. g., sulphuric acid, are caustic, especially when concentrated.
Cavitation: The formation and collapse of a gas pocket
or bubble due to mechanical shearing of a fluid.
CE: Conformit Europene. A mark that is affixed to a
product to designate that it is in full compliance with all
applicable European Union legal requirements.
Cell Constant: 1) The distance between the two electrodes of a conductivity cell divided by their cross-sectional area. 2) A value associated with an effective measurement range used in the proper selection of conductivity cells for specific applications.
Chlorine: A halogen element, a heavy, greenish-yellow, incombustible, water-soluble, poisonous gas, obtained chiefly by electrolysis of sodium chloride brine:
used for water purification in the making of bleaching
powder, and in the manufacture both of chemicals that
do no contain chlorine and those that do.
Condensation: The transformation of water vapour to
liquid. Also, a chemical reaction in which two or more
molecules combine, usually with the expulsion of water
or some other substance.
Conductivity: The measure of the ability of a fluid to
conduct an electrical current. In water, this ability is due
to the presence of ionized substances in solution. Conductivity measurements usually include temperature
compensation.
Corrosion: Material deterioration due to chemical attack.
Current (loop) Output: See 4 to 20 mA
DC (Direct Current): Electric current in which electrons
flow in one direction only. Compare alternating current
(AC).
Dead Band: The limits between which the input to an
instrument can vary without causing a change to the instrument output.
In relay operation: the difference between the increasing and decreasing readings when the switch is operated between setpoint and reset point.
See also Hysteresis.
DIN: Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V. DIN is a nongovernmental organisation established to promote the
development of standardisation and related activities in
Germany and related markets with the goal of facilitating the international exchange of goods and services,
and to developing co-operation in the spheres of intellectual, scientific, technological and economic activity.
Through the European standards organisations CEN
771
and CENELEC, DIN also presents the German view in

the development of the European standards that are
critical to completion of the single European market.
DN: Diametre Nominal; Term used by DIN standards for
the inside diameter of pipes.
Deionization: A purification process by which ionized
particles are removed from water.
Desalination: Processes that remove salt from water,
such as reverse osmosis, ion exchange, distillation and
evaporation.
Desiccant: A granular, porous, silica based material that has the ability to absorb moisture. Desiccant is
used to control humidity in a closed environment.
Desiccant Silica Gel: Is a granular, porous form of silica made synthetically from sodium silicate. Despite the
name, silica gel is a solid. Silica gel is most commonly
encountered in everyday life as beads packed in a semi-permeable. In this form, it is used as a desiccant to
control local hunidity and is used in industry for many
purposes.
Diffusion: An intermingling of the molecules of liquids
or gases.
Digital: A type of signal in which data is represented in
numerical form. Opposite of analog.
Dry Contact Closure: Relay. The contacts of a mechanical switch.
Dry Contact Relay: (DCR): An electromechanical device used to switch external power.
DryLoc: Georg FischerSignet LLC trade name and
patented designfor a versatile and robust connector
scheme between sensor electronics and electrodes.
Dual Proportional Control: See relay control discussion on page ___ (also applies to transistor-type outputs).
EasyCal: The calibration routine inSignet pH andORP
systems in which standard buffers or test solutions are
automatically recognised by the instrument.
Efficiency: For pH and ORP electrodes, the percent of
theoretical slope.
Effluent: Liquid flowing out of a system, such as a discharge of liquid waste from a factory or water leaving a
sewage treatment plant.
Electrode: 1) Primary detection device, typically analytical, requiring or benefiting from some secondary conditioning circuitry (e.g., pH and ORP electrodes). 2) Sensor.
Emissions: The potentially disruptive electromagnetic frequencies generated by an electronic device. Various standards defining allowable limits have been established.
Empty Pipe Detection: The empty pipe detection in
Signet products features a zero flow output when the
sensors are not compltetely wetted. This does not indicate an empty pipe, butrather a pipe that is not completely full.
772
EP, EPDM, EPM, EPR: Copolymer of Ethylene and

Propolene or terpolymer with butadiene. Typically features good weather and chemical resistance Typically
used with diluted acids and alkalis, detergents, alcohols,
steam and silicone oils.
FFPM: Also know as FFKM, trade names include or
Kalrez (trademark) or Chemraz (registered trademark).
Typical applications for this material include highly aggressive chemical processing, semiconductor wafer
processing, pharmaceutical, oil and gas recovery, aeorspace and petroleum.
FM: Factory Mutual; An organisation that sets various
productstandards, especially related to intrinsic safety
and explosion proof. Insurance companies look to see if
items such as cooling towers have earned Factory Mutual Approval and typically offer reduced rates for equipment that has been demonstrated as unlikely to burn in
a fire.
Formazin: A very stable suspended solid that remain
suspended in solution with water indefinitely. The supended solid in Formazin can be hydrazine sulphate,
(NH2)2(H2SO4) or hexa-methylene-tetramine in wateror
FPM: FPM is an elastomer, better known as Viton. See
Viton entry.
Frequency: The number of repetitions that occur in one
second. Frequency can be used to describe electrical
quantities, sound waves, mechanical vibrations, etc.
Frequency is measured in units of Hertz (Hz). In GF
Signet flow sensors, the output is defined in terms of
frequency and used to calculate flow rate.
Formazin Nephelometric Unit (FNU): A unit of turbidity based upon a comparison of scattered light intensity
by a sample under defined conditions with the intensity
of light scattered by a standard reference Formazin suspension. The higher the intensity of scattered light, the
greater is the turbidity. The design of the nephelometer is specified in the method. A standard suspension of
Formazin is used for calibration.
Hot-Tap: A mechanical assembly that allows the insertion and removal of a sensor or electrode without the
need for system shutdown, and initial installation may
be performed under pressurised conditions. Similar to
Wet-Tap.
Hysteresis: In relay Setpoint programming, the difference between the activation point and the release point.
See also Deadband.
Impedance: A measure of the apparent resistance
posed by an electrical circuit to an alternating current
(AC).
Immunity: Ability of a device to function without disruption in the presence of electromagnetic interference.
Insertion Flow Sensor: A type of flow sensor that installs through a hole in the wall of a pipe and converts
a local velocity measurement into a calculation of the
flow rate in the pipe. Usually used in comparison to full
bore or full line flow sensor.
Intrinsically Safe: Term used to identify any device, instrument or component that will not produce any spark
or thermal effects under any conditions that are normal or abnormal that will ignite a specified gas mixture.
Electrical and thermal energy limits are at levels incapable of causing ignition. It is common practice to use
external barriers with intrinsically safe installations.
marily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed
water.
Ion: An electrically charged atom or group of atoms.
NEMA 4X: Same as NEMA 4, with added protection

from corrosion.
IP65: A European standard for the degree of protection

provided by enclosures for splash proof and dust-proof
rating.
IP68: The European standard for degree of protection
provided by enclosures for submersible and dust-proof
rating.
IR: Infrared, refers to a welding technique offered within
the range of SYGEF HP products.
IR - Infrared Light: Light whose wave length is just below the light sensitivity of the human eye.
ISO: International Organisation for Standardisation: A
voluntary organisation that creates international standards, including the standards for computers and communications. The American National Standards Institute, ANSI is a member of ISO.
ISO 14001: International Organisation for Standardisation environmental standard.
ISO 9001: International Organisation for Standardisation
quality standard.
Isolated/Isolation: Electrical separation between two or
more circuits used to prevent measuring errors, ground
loops, or a shock hazard.
K-Factor: InSignet Flow sensors, the number of pulses generated by the sensor for each unit of volume that
passes by the sensor. Usually published in pulses per
gallon and pulses per litre.
Linearity: The extent to which an output (response) is
strictly proportional to an input (stimulus).
Loop: In electricity, a complete circuit. Usually used in
reference to a 4 to 20 mA loop, an output signal used to
control valves, actuators etc.
Loop Impedance: The maximum allowable total electrical resistance of all devices, including wiring, connected
to any electrical loop; expressed in ohms at a specified
voltage level, i. e.; 600at 12 VDC.
Loop Output: An analog output signal, usually 4 to 20
mA.
Loop Powered: In Signet products, any instrument that
derives operating power from a 4 to 20 mA loop.
Magmeter: Electromagnetic flow meter.
Metalex: Product name of fixed insertion metal paddlewheel flow sensors manufactured by Georg Fischer
Signet LLC
Mho: The unit of conductance such that a constant voltage of one volt between its ends produces a current of
one ampere in the conductor.
Mini-Tap: Stainless steel installation fittings for use with
Metalex flow sensors.
NEMA 4: A standard for enclosures maintained by the
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; NEMA 4
enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use pri-
NEMA 6: A standard for enclosures maintained by the

National Electrical Manufacturers Association; NEMA 6
enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection in submersible
applications.
NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology.
Non-isolated: Two or more electrical circuits sharing a
common ground. When separated by distance or connected to additional circuitry there is increased probability for measurement errors due to ground loops.
Nephelometric Turbidity Unit (NTU): A unit of meaure
used when comparing the light scattered by a liquid media to the light scattered by a known concentration Formazin Polymer. This unit of measure is recognised as
a measure of the optical clarity of an aqueous sample.
NTU is the accepted unit of measurement of turbidity.
Ohm: The unit of measure for electrical resistance. A
resistance of 1 ohm will pass 1 ampere of current when
a voltage of 1 volt is applied.
OHSAS 18001: Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series - Published by BSI, the National Standards Body of the UK, this is an international group of
standards and guidelines dedicated to occupational
health and safety.
Open Collector Output: An NPN transistor or FET output generally used to pull a signal from high to low. Device used for frequency, pulse, and alarm outputs.
Operating Pressure: Maximum vapor pressure from
process.
Operating Temperature: The temperature at which a
product is capable of operating; usually a minimum and
maximum value.
ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential): A method of
measuring the degree of completion of a chemical reaction by detecting the ratio of ions in the reduced form to
those in the oxidised form as a variation in electrical potential measured by an ORP electrode.
Paddlewheel: A type of insertion flow sensor (pioneered by Georg FischerSignet LLC) that utilises a
bladed rotor to engage the fluid flowing in a pipe. The
spinning rotor produces a frequency output directly proportional to the fluid velocity.
Passive Outputs: These outputs throttle current in
loops powered by a supply external to the 8900.
PBT: PolyButylene Terephthalate: A semi-crystalline
polymer, combining good strength and stiffness with low
moisture absorption, exceptional thermal stability, excellent electrical insulation properties, outstanding dimensional stability and resistance to the effects of a wide
range of chemicals, solvents, and oils.
PEEK: PolyEtherEtherKetone; an engineering thermoplastic with excellent chemical and water resistance.
In Signet products, the yellow housing in ProcessPro
field-mount instruments.
773
Percent Rejection: An indicator of RO system efficiency and membrane condition. Defined as one minus the
ratio of the conductivity of RO product water to feed water, expressed as a percentage, and representing the
extent to which incoming contaminants were rejected by
the system.
pH: A measure of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution,
numerically equal to 7 for neutral solutions, increasing
with increasing alkalinity and decreasing with increasing
acidity. The pH scale commonly in use ranges from 0 to
14.
Polypropylene (PP): PP is a polymer of ethylene with
an isotactic arrangement of methyl groups.
Preamplifier: A device used typically to protect the relatively weak output signals of pH and ORP electrodes
from the wide variety of electromagnetic interference
common in most industrial environments.
ProcessPro:Signet product name for a group of
instruments characterised by a basic 4 to 20 mA
loop output, for the measurement of Flow, pH/ORP,
Conductivity,Pressure and Temperature.
Proof Pressure: Maximum water or hydraulic pressure.
ProPoint:Signet product name for a group of panel
mount instruments for the measurement of Flow, Batch,
pH/ORP, Conductivity/Resistivity, Salinity and others.
Characterised by a unique analogue and digital display.
Proportional Pulse: In Signet products, an operating
mode for relays and open-collector outputs that varies
the frequency of the pulse in direct proportion to input
variations.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene, also known as TFE.
Trade names include Teflon, Halon, Floun (all registered trademarks).
Pull-up resistor: A resistor needed to obtain the highlevel voltage signal in a transistor- type output circuit.
PWM: Pulse Width Modulation; InSignet products, an
operating mode for relays and open-collector outputs
characterised by varying the time that a pulse is on
versus the time it is off. Also, a method of digitally encoding analogue signal levels.
Quinhydrone: A crystalline powder typically added to
pH 4 and 7 buffers for the purpose of producing standard solutions used in the calibration of ORP measuring
systems.
RC Filter: A resistive-capacitive device, often referred
to as a snubber, designed to protect instrumentation
and relay contacts by capturing the voltage spikes resulting from the switching of large inductive loads such
as solenoids and motor starters, etc.
REDOX: Reduction/Oxidation; Same as ORP.
Relative Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air
as compared with the maximum amount that the air
could contain at the same temperature, expressed as a
percentage.
Relay: An electromechanical switch.
Repeatability: The extent to which an output (response) repeatedly corresponds to identical input (stimulus) during dynamic conditions.
774
Resistivity: The inverse of conductivity (1/conductivity).

Reverse Osmosis: a process that allows the removal
of particles as small as ions from a solution. The most
common use for reverse osmosis is in purifying water. It
is used to produce water that meets the most demanding specifications that are currently in place.
Reynolds number: A dimensionless quantity associated with the smoothness of flow of a fluid. At low velocities fluid flow is smooth, or laminar, and the fluid can be
pictured as a series of parallel layers, or lamina, moving
at different velocities. The fluid friction between these
layers gives rise to viscosity. As the fluid flows more
rapidly, it reaches a velocity, known as the critical velocity, at which the motion changes from laminar to turbulent, with the formation of eddy currents and vortices
that disturb the flow. The formula can be stated as: R =
dv/ where d is inside diameter, v is velocity and is
viscosity. In general
R 2000 = Laminar flow
R 2000 4500 = Transitional (indeterminate)
R 4500 = Fully developed and turbulent (most flow
sensors operate best in turbulent flow)
Rotor-X: Family trade name of the originalSignet plastic paddlewheel flow sensors.
Ryton : Trade name for Polyphenylene Sulfide or PPS.
Other trade names include Forton, Tedar, Supec,
and Tedur (all registered trademarks).
SL: Acronym for Signet Sensor Serial Link; a digital
communication method betweenSignet sensors and
host instruments.
SafeLoc: Name coined by Georg FischerSignet LLC to
define the unique locking mechanism used in theSignet
3719 pH Wet-Tap assembly.
Salinity: A measurement of dissolved salt concentration, as in seawater, typically expressed in parts per
thousand (ppt).
Sensor: 1) A primary detection device typically providing direct input to a measurement instrument (i.e., paddlewheel flow sensor). 2) The combination of an electrode and some secondary conditioning circuitry (i.e.,
pH electrode and preamplifier). 3) Electrode.
Signet: Model name of fluid measurement sensors and
instruments marketed under the Georg Fischer Piping
Systems brand.
Sleeved Rotor: An accessory rotor featuring a self-lubricating mechanical sleeve that replaces the standard
liquid bearing of Rotor-X paddlewheel flow sensors.
Sleeved rotors will extend the maintenance interval in
applications known to produce premature rotor wear,
such as those involving abrasive liquids.
Specific gravity: Ratio of the mass of a body to the
mass of an equal body of volume of water at 4 C, or
some other specified temperature.
Suspended Solids: Particulate suspended (as opposed
to being dissolved) and typically creating turbid, cloudy
conditions in liquid.
SSR: Solid-state relay
TDS: Total dissolved solids.
Totalizer: In flow instrumentation, a permanent or resettable counter for volume such as gallons or tens of gallons, etc.
Transmitter (two-wire): A device that converts an electrode or sensor input to a 4 to 20 mA output using the
same two wires for signal transmission as for system
power.
Turbidity: The reduction of transparency of a liquid
caused by the presence of undissolved matter (ISO
7027 Definition of Turbidity)
Turndown Ratio: Dynamic response characteristic. The
ratio of a sensors maximum measurement range to its
minimum measurement range.
UHMW Polyethylene: Ultra High Molecular Weight
polyehtylene. Very good chemical resistance of corrosives; very good stress cracking resistance (with the exeption of strong oxidizing acids at elevated temperatures).
Viscosity: The internal friction of a fluid, caused by
molecular interaction, which makes it resist a tendency
to flow.
Viton: Viton fluoroelastomer is well known for its excellent heat resistance. It offers excellent resistance to
aggressive chemicals.
Voltage (output): A standard analogue signal (0 to 5 or
0 to 10 VDC for Signet products) used for the proportional representation of a measurement variable or process condition.
Weldolet: A weld-on branch connection for metal pipe
typically used as an installation fitting for insertion-style
sensors or electrodes.
Wet-Tap: A mechanical assembly that, after initial installation into a non-pressurised system, allows the insertion and removal of a sensor or electrode without the
need for system shutdown. Similar to Hot-Tap.
White Light: The combined light whose wave lengths
are all within the range of sensitivity of the human eye.
Window (Relay Module): An out-of-range alarm scenario that allows a single relay to be triggered by either
a high or a low process condition. For example, a relay in window mode can be programmed to trigger if a
pH value in a final effluent tank drops below 6.0 or rises
above 8.5.
775
776
Double containment system - CONTAIN-IT Plus
Introduction
Double containment
-- CONTAIN-IT Plus pressure-tight outer pipe

-- CONTAIN-IT Plus splash guard
-- Authorisation of installation personnel
-- CONTAIN-IT Plus product range
Planning criteria
-- Material selection for the medium-conveying inner pipes

-- Material selection for the outer pipes
-- Questionnaire for static evidence
-- Layout
-- Leak detection
-- Isometric drawing
-- Sizing
Installation instructions
-- Jointing double containment pipes

-- Jointing the outer pipe
-- Jointing the outer pipe using the EPDM rubber sleeve with stainless steel coupler
Fittings for solvent cementing / fusion and installation

-- Introduction
-- Various connection examples
-- Dimensions for calculating the cutting lengths
-- Connection sizes for double containment fittings
Fittings for butt and IR fusion and installation

-- Various connection examples
-- Dimensions for calculating the cutting lengths
Leak detection and leak locating systems
Page
779
782
782
782
783
785
785
785
785
785
785
785
786
786
788
790
792
797
801
803
806
-- Differential pressure
-- Optical monitoring
-- Optoelectronic monitoring
-- Sensor cable
-- Tools for locating leaks in all systems: Termination fittings
811
811
811
812
812
Operating and maintenance instructions
813
Pressure testing the inner and outer pipes

-- Inner pipe
-- Outer pipe
Static evidence
814
816
-- CONTAIN-IT Plus loadings

-- CONTAIN-IT Plus system
-- Questionnaire for static evidence
-- Static evidence - Calculation by GF Piping Systems
818
818
819
820
Welding machines for butt and socket fusion
821
Safety measures - extensions and repairs

-- Separating for retrofit installation of a T-90
-- CONTAIN-IT Plus - mechanical joint
-- Double containment - flanged connection to a tank
Double containment valves

-- Versions
823
823
823
824
777
-- CONTAIN-IT Plus ball valve

-- Installation example of double containment valves
Customized parts
-- T-piece with 45 tapping point for socket fusion and cementing or butt fusion
-- 90 elbow including termination fitting
-- Double containment reducing 90 T-piece with elbow
778
Page
824
829
830
830
831
Double containment system CONTAIN-IT Plus

Introduction
Application range
Recommended for gaseous or liquid media, where

any leakage of the piping system would endanger the
personnel, the operations or the environment.
For strong diffusing media (HF, HCL, HNO3)
Recommended for application conveying critical liquids.
For piping systems which must be maintained in operation under all circumstances, in order to guarantee
process reliability, even in the case of a leak.
Drainage systemfr HCl, HF and hydrocarbons in the semiconductor industry
Sulphuric acid pipe system forwater conditioning for pigment production

Hydrochloric acid and caustic soda solutionfor water treatment
Market segments
Water treatment (waste water treatment)

Chemical process industry (distribution pipe systems,
galvanization plant for metal treatment)
Micro electronics industry (chemical waste, photovoltaics)
Life science (breweries and food industry)
Nitric acid pipe systemunder construction for metal finishing in

the automotive industry
Personnel protectionin solar cell production
779
standard thermoplastic piping connections. Therefore

the double containment piping system from +GF+ allows a pressure testing of the inner pipe before the outside pipe is welded. This unique and patented technique
gives the operational safety that the inner pipe really is
leak-tight.
The design benefit
To ensure operational safety, reliability and long life, the
choice of the material and welding technology is of key
importance.
GF helps you to find the ideal material for your application from a large product range in six different thermoplastics materials.
The planning benefit
Electroplating plant in the chemical-process industry
Life science systemin a brewery
A large number of well known international companies

choose a complete system from a single source supplier. Reliable calculation can be made only with a dedicated system. An optimal piping design can only be
achieved with perfectly harmonised piping components
under defined process conditions. We offer the possibility to calculate the longitudinal expansion stresses and
temperature differences between the inside and outside pipe. This will confirm the mechanical stability of
the whole piping system.
The environmental benefit
Environmental risks are systematically analysed in the
scope ofISO 14001, and appropriate measures are
then taken to minimise these risks. Double containment
systems help you to minimise the risks of incidents, giving you the opportunity to reduce insurance premiumsand maintain your company image.
Enviroment
Precipitant, ferric chloride in asewage works
Characteristics
The connection benefit
Environmental awareness and increased safety standards are becoming evermoreimportant in today's society.
Personal injury, property damage and environmental
pollution, caused by leakages, are key concerns that
have led us, as a piping system supplier, to design
asuitable system to reduce potentialhazards.
To ensure plant safety in the conveyance of hazardous
liquids jeopardizing personnel, process and environment, piping systems are needed which offer the optimal chemical resistance and which signal and collect
any leakage which may occur.
The patented double containment jointing technique allows fitting of the double containment pipe to the single
pipe according to the same directives and guidelines
from the DVS (German association for jointing) as for
780
Customer-friendly installation and approved connection

techniques are important requirements for the design of
such double containment system.
Legal provisions Switzerland
The regulation concerning the protection of disturbances ( 3, General Safety Measures) stating that
companies are subject to take all measures in order to
minimize risks. By definition, these measures are the
decrease of the risk potential, the avoidance of disturbances and limitation of interferences in the nature.
The federal law about the prevention of water pollution
( 22, General Requirements) states that owners of installations conveying liquids hazardous to waters have
to make sure that all measures are taken to protect waters. These Measures define that installations must be
designed, installed, maintained and operated to guarantee that no natural water supplies can be polluted. Furthermore, for storage facilities and reloading points, any
kind of loss of liquids must be avoided and any leakage
of liquids must be prevented.
Legal provisions Germany
The German Water Management Act ( 19 g WHG) applies the "duty of care" principle for the storage, filling,
manufacturing and treatment of substances which are
hazardous to water and to internal piping systems in the
industry. This defines that installations which handle liquids that endanger the water quality must be designed,
installed, maintained and operated to guarantee that no
natural water supplies can be polluted.
In accordance with a ruling of the German Federal Administrative Court, the "duty of care" principle requires
the elimination of even the likelihood of water pollution
occurring.
Requirement of German regulations on installations
handling substances which are hazardous to water
(3 VAwS)
Installations must be designed and operated in such a
way that no substances which are hazardous to water
can leak. They must be leak-proof, stable and sufficiently resistant against the expected thermal, mechanical
and chemical influences.
Leakage of any part of an installation conveying media
which endanger the water quality, needs to be recognised in a fast and reliable way.
The above mentioned requirements for piping systems can be fulfilled through the existing retention
space between the inner and outside pipe in our
double containment system.
781
Double containment
CONTAIN-IT Plus pressure-tight outer pipe
The CONTAIN-IT Plus pressure-tight double containment systemcomprises an outerprotective pipe, made
from PE100, which is welded pressure-tight,
usingELGEF Plus electrofusion coupler.
The protective pipe serves as a leak monitoring space,

where spills which, under certain circumstances could
leak from the inner pipe, are contained until the leak has
been discovered and repaired. Also it is toconvey fluids for the purpose of stabilising the temperature of the
medium in the inner pipe.
Both the inner and the outer protective pipes are reliable, quality-controlled pressure piping systems, which
are implemented unmodified. The jointing techniques
correspond without exception to therelevant guidelines
for pressure piping system construction. There are no
limits to the choice of pipe materials, ensuringthat the
material can be ideally matched to the chemical resistance required by the particular application.
CONTAIN-IT Plus splash guard

The CONTAIN-IT Plus spray protection system differs from the pressure-tight system in that the measure
makes use of an EPDM rubber sleeve with a stainless
steel coupler for connection of the outer pipe.
The EPDM rubber sleeve is pressure-tight up to 1 bar

. The rubber sleeve allows different outer pipe materials to be quickly connected together, without the use of
tools or any machining of the pipe. The connection of thefittings (elbow, T-piece and termination fitting) is the
same as on the pressure-tight system. The preferred
material forthe outer pipe is transparent PVC-U.
The following criteria are significant for safe operation:

1.For safety reasons, the components of the media-conveying inner pipe should not be altered from their
standard version. This, inorder toguarantee the consistent, tested quality of our DIBt-approved (German
Institute for Building Technology) individualcomponents of the fittings for the following materials:
PVC-U Z-40.23-2;
PE80 / PE100 Z-40.23-282 ;
PP-H Z-40.23-264; PVDF Z-40.23-262.
Please ensure that the pipes are also DIBt-approved!
2.The DVS (German Association for Fusion Technology) fusion guidelines and KRV (Plastic Pipe Association) solvent cementing instructions are applicable
without exception, especially to double containment
piping systems. Particularly important quality factors
are the monitoring and the visual inspection during the
building-upof the weld bead on the internal pipeduring the welding process.
3.The pressure test on the inner pipe must be carried
out before the outer pipe is sealed. Particularly in the
case of double containment systems, where the emphasis is on safety, no "dry joints" can be tolerated.
4.Fixed-point installation with structural certificate: the
minimum dimensional difference between the inner
and outer pipes prevents any possible longitudinal
expansion. The entire system must be finished as a
fixed-point installation. A structural certificate is recommended for the pipe system(cf. Questionnaire
forthe structural certificate,Section: Structural certificate).
5.The product range includes radial dismountable mechanical couplings for maintenance or repair of the
piping system, or to carry out subsequent extensions.
6.Connections for commercial leak detection devices
must be provided.
Authorisation of installation personnel

Easy-to-learn technology, strict adherence to norms and
regulations as well as many years of experience in plastic piping system construction are the marks of distinction of the GF double containment piping system.
Added to these essential prerequisites is the careful
training of the installation personnel, in the interest of
safety.
782
For this reason:

Double containment systems must be installed only
by persons who have been specifically trained and
authorised by GF.
CONTAIN-IT Plus product range

Inner pipe
The choice of different types of plastic for theinner

pipe allows the pipe material to be optimally matched
to thephysical and chemical requirements: PVCU(unplasticized polyvinyl chloride), PVC-C (post-chlorinated PVC-U), PP-H (polypropylene), PE (polyethylene), PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride).
"Click system" spacers are clamped to the inner pipe,
which isthen pushed into the outer pipe pipes are not
supplied ex-works as double pipes. The pipes can also
be used as single pipes.
Seals
When laying the inner pipe, sealing material should be

selected that is suitable for the prevailing operating conditions. Available choices are EPDM, FPM and, for ball
valves, alsoFFPM. The sealing material used for the
protective pipe is EPDM.
Fittings for inner and outer pipes
The individual fittings for the inner and outer pipes are
injection moulded using the latest quality assured procedures. The inner fittings are available in all GF plastic
materials. Fittings are factory made and supplied ready
to install.
In the CONTAIN-IT Plus double containment system,
the outer fitting always made fromPE-100 polyethylene is already attached to the inner fitting. The inner and outer fittings are connected together using sturdy support rings, which act as fixed points for the inner pipe. This prevents expansion of the inner pipe in
the outer pipe. The entire system must be finished as a
fixed-point installation with astructural certificate.
On solvent cementable plastics (PVC-U, PVC-C), a cemented socket joint is used to connect the inner pipes.
A number of different fusion processes are available for
connectingweldable plastics (PE, PP-H, PVDF). Socket
fusion can be used for PP-H / PE (d 20/50 to d 110/160)
and PVDF (d 20/50 to d 63/110). For the size range d
20/50 to d 225/315,butt fusion techniques can be used.
Infrared fusion techniques can also be used in certain
cases(refer toOverview of product range).Wherever
possible, factory-finishedjoints are made by infrared fusion.
The PE outer fittingshave integrated joint spigots
which also act as the support rings for the inner pipes
for connection by means of push-on ELGEF Pluselectrofusion coupler or EPDM rubber sleeves.
The push-on ELGEF Plus electrofusion coupler or rubber sleeve can be pushed over the end of the pipe being connected, or the long end of the fitting, before the
inner pipe is connected. The electrofusion coupler will fit
along only half the length of the shortend of the fitting.
PE 100 outer pipe
The outer protective pipe, which surrounds the mediumconveying inner pipe, is made of PE100 polyethylene.
The key features of this material are itsgood chemical resistance to acids, alkalis and salts as well as a
number of organic and inorganic solvents. The high
resistance of this black (stabilised with carbon black)
polyethylene to UV effects, its insusceptibility to notching, flexibility and impact resistance, even at low temperatures down to -50 C,make thisprotective pipe material ideal for pipes laid indoors, outdoorsand in the
ground.
Transparent PVC-U splash outer pipe
The pressure level of the outer pipe is restricted to 1 bar
by the use of an EPDM rubber sleeve.
The code numbers and wall thicknesses of the protective pipes (PE100 or PVC-U) are listed in the double
containment product catalogue.
Termination fittings
Specially designed and patented termination fittings,

with anRp " connection to the monitoring space, are
installed at the start and end of the double containment
783
system. These fittings are also suitablefor subdividing

the outer pipe, i. e.to divide the pipe system into leak
detection zones, thereby enabling easier location of
leaks.
Branch saddles
Branch saddles, for fitting to the protective pipe after

connection, are used for the installation of a leakage
locating system, for flushing the space between the
pipes or as unions for carrying out a pressure test in the
space between the pipes.
Valves
Specially designed manual and actuated double containment valves can be integrated in the system. In the
same way as the fittings they are easy to install in the
pipe system. Double containment valves are factory
made and supplied as a system unit. They can be externally operated and opened for maintenance purposes
and to carry out a pressure test on the inner pipe.
Overview of product range

Outer Pipe PE-100
Dimension Inner Pipe
d*D
Socket Cementing
Butt Fusion
Socket Fusion
inner x out- PVC-U

er
Tangit
PVC-U
Dytex
PVC-C PVC-C PP-H PE-80

Tangit Dytex
PVDF PP-H
PE-100
SDR11 SDR11
PVDF
PN16
PVDF
PN10
20*50
25*50
32*63
40*75
50*90
63*110
75*125
90*140
110*160
125*180
140*200
160*225
200*280
225*315
= Butt-welding and infrared-compatible (IR-Plus)

Other combinations e. g. PVDF BCF (beat and crevice
free welded) on request.
784
Planning criteria
Material selection for the medium-conveying inner pipes
To ensure operational safety and achieve the minimum
designed service life, the selection of the material and
the pressure classification of the pipe system components are extremely important. The key influential factors are: operating pressure, operating temperature, the
medium being transported and the duration of stressing.
The chemical resistance list and the material-related
pressure andtemperature charts can be used to preselect the material. These aids can be found in our
technical manual, on theCD and on our website at
www.piping.georgfischer.com, Support, Planning Fundamentals.
We will naturally provide any assistance you need in selecting the right material.
General chemical resistance of thermoplastics
PVC-U /
PVC-C
PP / PE
Resistant
to
Acids and alkalis
Acids, alka- Acids, oxilis and weak dizing mesolvents

dia, solvents, halogens
Not resistant to
Aromatic solvents, tensides
Oxidizing
acids, halogens
PVDF
Amines, alkalis
Material selection for the outer pipes

The pressure rating of the outer pipe must correspond
tothe service pressureof the inner pipe until the damage isrepaired. In case of leakage, the pressure-resistant and chemical-resistant PE100 outer pipe must be
able to contain the spill. In the event of a leak, exposure
to the medium normally does not require an immediate
shutdown of the operation. It may be possible to complete ongoing production runs before shutting down.
When using thesplash guard outer pipe systemwith a
transparent PVC-U outer pipe, the restricted pressure
loading of 1 bar must be taken into account.There must
be no possibility ofhigher pressuredeveloping in the
protective pipe in the event of a leak.
The calculation also indicates the distances between

spacers for the inner pipe and the distances between
pipe brackets for the outer pipe, as well as the forces on
fixed points.
Expansion in the pipeline need not be taken into consideration; no additional expansion loops or compensators
are required.
Layout
The pipe layout should be planned so that the pipes are
protected from mechanical and thermal effects.
The necessary minimum distance from walls and ceilings as well as the required axis dimensions can be
found in the tables for calculation of cutting lengths.
For great fixed-point forces, the anchoring method on
the building material should be checked. If building material cannot absorb any fixed-point forces (e.g. trapezoidal corrugated roofs), the forces must be absorbed
via sturdy travelling rails.
Leak detection
Leak detection is an important element of the double
containment piping system and must be taken into consideration. Please see the section on leak detection and
location.
Isometric drawing
The 30 isometric diagram (see example of cutting
length calculation) provides an accurate view of the piping layout. When the axis dimensions are entered, the
cutting lengths can be calculated and the installation direction of the fittings determined.
This can be used to represent the ventilation, rinsing
and shut-off requirements, as well as the installation position of the end and sectional fittings.
Sizing
The pipe diameter is determined by calculating the pressure loss within the pipe. This depends not only on the
diameter, length, and pipe material but also on the flow
medium and the flow volume.
For project planning, construction and installation of
double containment systems, please refer to DVS 22102.
Questionnaire for static evidence

The questionnaire for static evidence (Section: Static Evidence)is used by GF to determine if the selected pipeline is resistant under the given operating conditions.
For fixed-point installation (restricted longitudinal expansion), it is necessary to calculate the stresses and
forces on the outer pipe fittings, which the fixed-point
pipe brackets are required toabsorb.
The fixed point for the inner pipe is already built into
each fitting by means ofa support ring. If the calculated
stress on the pipe is too great, the operating conditions
or the material must be changed.
785
Jointing double containment pipes
Butt fusion heater element (PP, PE and SYGEF

PVDF)
Patented double containment jointing technology

The principle of the GF double containment jointing
technology is based on the fact that the inner pipe is
joined first using the techniques described below. This
means that a double containment pipeline is joined in
the same manner as a single pipeline. The so-called
"last joints", which occur with every change of direction in other systems and which are then usually done
"blind", are therefore not applicable. When the clampsare removed, there is a gap of 30 mm between the
ends of the outer pipe. This serves to check the joint of
the inner pipe according to the DVS guidelines. When
the pressure test on the inner pipe has been completed,
this gap is closed with a snap ring.
Inner pipe
The inner pipes are connected using standard, tried

and tested jointing methods. Depending on thematerial and sizes, the available options are: solvent cementing, socket fusion, butt fusion and infraredfusion. The
choice of method is also determined by suitability for
the operating conditions. PVDF BCF (beat and crevice
freewelded) on request.
In pressurised pipe systems, all butt fusion joints must

be produced in a butt fusion machine, and not by hand!
IR infrared fusion (PP, SYGEF PVDF)
Solvent cement joints (PVC-U, PVC-C)

A quick jointing method, carried out without extensive
use of tools or machinery.
Socket fusion heater element (PP, PE and SYGEF
PVDF)
In IR fusion, the parts to be connected (pipe and fitting)

are heated to fusion temperature in the fusion zoneand
fused in a contact-free process. This low-stress fusion
method allows smaller fusionbeads tobe created.
Jointing the outer pipe

Socket fusion in a fusion machine
Socket fusion is particularly suited for use with smaller

sizes. Up to and including 50 mmdiameter inner pipes,
these joints can be easily made in the pipeline route, using hand fusion equipment.
After the inner pipe has been pressure-tested, the outer pipe is sealed. A pressure-resistant version with an
electrofusion coupler and the splash guard version (PN
1) with anEPDM rubber sleeves are available for this
purpose. The activities described next,to prepare for
making the joint, must be carried out at the same time
as the installation of the inner pipe.
Jointing the outer pipe with ELGEF Plus electrofusion coupler

Cut the pipe to size, square, in accordance with the
calculation sheet (it is advisable to number the cut
lengths of pipe)
Clean any coarse dirt from the pipe
Machine the pipe ends with a rotary scraper
786
Depending on the recess type of the electrofusion

coupler, the length of the pipe to be scraped is either
or full length of the coupler
New double containment fittings, removed from the
packaging shortly before processing, do not need to
be scraped!
Please refer to theseparate installation instructions
for electrofusion fittings and the dimensional tolerances when scraping the PE pipes
Clean/degrease pipe end with TangitKS cleaner and
clean absorbent paper.
Permissible minimum pipe outside diameter:

Pipe diameter
(mm)
Min.
chip thickness (mm)
Permissible minimum
pipe outside diameter

(mm)
50
0.20
49.5
63
0.20
62.5
75
0.20
74.4
90
0.20
89.4
110
0.20
109.4
125
0.20
124.4
140
0.20
139.4
160
0.20
159.4
180
0.20
179.4
200
0.20
199.4
225
0.20
224.4
250
0.20
249.3
280
0.20
279.3
315
0.20
314.3
Push on electrofusion coupler

Insertion depth: mark coupler lengthminus 15 mm
(snap ringwidth30 mm divided by 2 = 15 mm)
Immediately prior to use, remove
ELGEF Plus electrofusioncoupler from the bag, withoutdirtying it,remove the middle stop and push completely over the stripped end of the pipe. Seal/secure
with the PE stretch film to protect from contamination
and moisture. Check for proper functioning.
Important:
TheELGEF Plus coupler must be on the pipe before
the inner pipes are jointed.
Remove the stretch film immediately before fusing the
outer pipe
Apply the snap ring: if the electrofusion coupler is
pushed on without a snap ring, the outer pipe can
shift, so that a reliable weld can no longer be guaranteed.
The snap ring must sitcentrally on the
ELGEF Plus electrofusioncoupler (cold zone). The
ends of the outer pipes must butt up to the snap ring
withno gap.
787
Clean the fusion zone

Refer to instructions, wherever possible, use clampsfor electrofusion of couplers and branch saddles.
Fuse
MSA 400
fusion machine for
ELGEF Plus coupler
SDR
1/2 L - 15
50
11
88
29
63
11
96
33
75
11
110
40
90
11
125
47.5
110
11
145
57.5
125
11
158
64
140
11
168
69
160
11
180
75
180
11
194
82
200
11
208
89
225
11
224
97
280
11
252
111
315
17
268
119
L = Length of ELGEF Plus coupler
Jointing the outer pipe using the EPDM

rubber sleeve with stainless steel coupler
Snap ring 30 mm
788
When carrying out installation using the rubber sleeve,

it is essential to ensure that the outer pipe is securely clamped to prevent axial movement (clamping force
details in structural certificate) and that nopipe expansion occurs. The rubber sleeve has no tensile strength.
Clean the square-cut pipe with a clean cloth, push the
rubber sleeve onto theouter pipe. The snap ring must
sit centrally on the rubber sleeve. The ends of the outer pipes must butt up to the snap ring without gap. On
long lengths of pipe, the snap ring can be dispensed
with transparent PVC-Upipes / pipe joints. Advantage:
Achieving greater tensile strength by jointing Pipe /
Pipe.
Insertion depth: mark

socket length minus 15 mm
(snap ring width 30 mm divided by 2 = 15 mm)
Important:The rubber
sleeve must be on the pipe
before the inner pipes are
jointed.
L = Length ofthe rubber
sleeve
D
Number of pipe clips
L - 15
50
85
27.5
63
85
27.5
75
85
27.5
90
85
27.5
110
125
47.5
125
125
47.5
140
125
47.5
160
125
47.5
180
125
47.5
200
125
47.5
225
125
47.5
280
150
60
315
150
60
V2A metal pipe clip
Snap ring
789
Fittings for solvent cementing / fusion and installation

Introduction
As the axis sizes of 90 and 45 elbows and the Tpiece are the same, only the 90 elbow is shown.
Thecoupler is always on the long side of the fitting.
Possible connections:
fitting to fitting direct
fitting to intermediate pipe section
fitting to termination fitting
From the central axis to the front edge, all types of fittings have the same Z dimension (i. e. same axis size).
Note: This applies only to fittings made from the same
material and for use with the same jointing method!
The lengths of the outer pipe(black, scraped and

cleaned fusion surfaces) and inner pipe (grey with
clipped-on spacers) aredifferent .
1
Spigot for coupler cementing / fusion
Space for ELGEF Pluscoupler
Socket on double containment fitting forcoupler cementing /

fusion
Space for complete ELGEF Plus coupler or EPDM sleeve
790
2.
Standard heating element forcoupler fusion.
The pipe and fitting are heated simultaneously.
3.
Heating element forcoupler fusion.
4.
Visual inspection.
Check the joint, then pressure test the inner pipe.
The inner pipe is pushed into the outer pipe and the fusion coupler are positioned on the outer pipe.
The fitting is first of all jointed (fused or cemented) to the

inner pipe with the prepared double containment pipe
piece. The inner pipe is now pressure tested. Following
the successful pressure test, a pressure-tight joint of the
outer pipe with inserted snap ring is produced, using an
electrofusion coupler.
1.
Special clampshold the inner pipe and the inner fitting.
791
Legend:
The following symbols are used to demonstrate the various
connection examples.
Abbreviation:
S = Short end of
fitting with internal
spigot
5.
Place the snap ring between the ends of the outer pipe.
L = Long end of fitting with internal

socket
E = Endfitting
6.
A pressure-tight seal of the outer pipe is produced by the

ELGEF Plus electrofusion coupler, or the EPDM sleeve is
used assplash guard.
Various connection examples

CONTAIN-IT Plus: socket cementing / fusion
Short end of fitting with internal spigot (S)

(90 elbow, 45 elbow, equal-sided 90 T-piece)
Long end of fitting with internal socket (L)
(90 elbow, 45 elbow, equal-sided90 T-piece)
Termination fitting (E) - long end of fitting with internal
socket
Pipe (P)
792
Example 90 elbow:
Example
Symbol
Combination
a) S -P -S
Fitting end with spigotPipe with 2 equal sockets Fitting end with spigot
b)
S -L
Fitting end with spigot

-
direct Fitting end with socket
c)
S -P -L
Fitting end with spigot Pipe with 1 socket Fitting end with socket
d)
L -P -L
Fitting end with socket

Pipe Fitting end with socket
e)
S-E

-
direct Termination fitting with
socket
f)
S -P - E

Pipe with 1 socket Termination fitting with
socket
g)
L -P - E
Fitting endwith socket

-
Pipe Termination fitting with
socket
Example calculation to find cutting lengths for

inner and outer pipes
In the double containment system, the inner and outer

pipes are always cut to different lengths.
The deduction sizes./. M min and allowance
sizes + Yi min for the inner pipe and + YO min for the outer
pipe are dependent on a combination of the installation
length of the fittings, and can be found in the following
tables.
Since the axis sizes for the 90 elbow, 45 elbow
and T-piece are the same, only the 90 elbows are
shown and discussed here.
793
Pipeline section: 1
1250
Pipeline section: 5
3654
Case S - P - E
./. M min
510
Case: S - P - L
./. M min
475
= Difference
740
= Difference
740
= Difference
3179
= Difference
3179
+ Y i min
145
+ Y O min
75
+ Y i min
128
+ Y O min
105
= Y i inner pipe
885
= Y O outer pipe
815
= Y i inner pipe
3307
= Y O outer pipe
3284
Pipeline section: 2
340
Pipeline section: 6
4270
Case: b) S - L direct
./. M min
Case: a) S - P - S
./. M min
505
= Difference
= Difference
= Difference
3765
= Difference
3765
+ Y i min
+ Y O min
+ Y i min
185
+ Y O min
230
= Y i inner pipe
no pipe re- = Y O outer pipe

quired
no pipe required
= Y i inner pipe
3950
= Y O outer pipe
3995
Pipeline section: 7
2154
Case: L - P - E
./. M min
510
Pipeline section: 3
988
Case: a) S - P - S
./. M min
505
= Difference
483
= Difference
483
+ Y i min
185
+ Y O min
230
= Y i inner pipe
668
= Y O outer pipe
713
Pipeline section: 4
2400
Case: L - P - L
./. M min
515
= Difference
1885
= Difference
1885
+ Y i min
141
+ Y O min
75
= Y i inner pipe
2026
= Y O outer pipe
1960
794
= Difference
1644
= Difference
1644
+ Y i min
145
+ Y O min
75
= Y i inner pipe
1789
= Y O outer pipe
1719
Calculation of examples on previous pages

The shortest connection between 2 double containment
fittings is the direct connection. The M dimension between axes is preset.
Pipeline section*: 2
340
Case: b) S - L direct
./. M min
= Difference
= Difference
+ Y i min
+ Y O min
= Y i inner pipe
no pipe
required
= Y O outer pipe
no pipe
required
*given axes distance
If a pipe is required between the fittings, the minimum

dimension M min between axes must be observed.
Pipeline section: 3
988
Case: a) S- P- S
./. M min
505*1
= Difference
483
= Difference
483
+ Y i min
185
+ Y O min
230 *2
= Y i inner pipe
668
= Y O outer pipe
713
* minimum distance between axes

1
*2minimum length of inner or outer pipe
All longer dimensions are calculated as follows:

Pipeline section: 6
4270*
Case: a) S - P - S
./. M min
505
= Difference
3765
= Difference
3765
+ Y i min
185
+ Y O min
230
= Y i inner pipe
3950
= Y O outer pipe
3995
distance between axes
Material checklist
Required
quantity per
Socket
equal
Snap
ring
ELGEF
Plus
electrofusion
coupler
EPDM
rubber
sleeve
90 elbow
45 elbow
T-90 equal
1 (2**)
1 (2**)
1 (2**)
Termination fit- 0 (1**)

ting
Butt fusion
90 elbow
45 elbow
T-90 equal
Termination fit- 0
ting
Inner pipeline
Outer pipeline
* 1 x per pipe length

** For segmentation of the pipeline into leak detection sections
795
796
Dimensions for calculating the cutting lengths

CONTAIN-IT Plus: socket cementing / fusion
Attention: The last joint should always be made on the double containment fitting. Loose sockets should first be
connected with the intermediate pipe.
Example a)S -P - S
Pipeline 3 + 6
Spigots (S)
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
Inner pipe: Yi min/ Material
S - P - S
PVC-U
PVC-C
PP-H, PE80 PVDF
20*50
460
182
182
178
178
190
25*50
460
176
176
174
174
190
32*63
505
185
185
185
185
230
40*75
580
202
202
204
204
230
50*90
660
222
222
228
228
260
63*110
780
248
248
264
260
300
75*125
840
264
264
286
330
90*140
905
263
263
284
345
110*160
950
266
261
290
370
125*180
1020
278
400
140*200
1060
294
430
160*225
1190
302
460
200*280
1315
313
515
225*315
1310
322
550
Outer pipe
YA min
797
Example b) S - L
Example c-) S - P - L
Pipeline 2
1 Spigot (S)
2 Coupler (L)
1 Spigot (S)
2 Coupler (L)
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
S - L
S - P - L
PVC-U
PVC-C
PP-H, PE80 PVDF
20*50
310
435
122
122
118
118
95
25*50
310
435
122
122
118
118
95
32*63
340
475
132
132
128
128
105
40*75
400
545
142
142
137
137
115
50*90
460
620
157
157
152
152
130
63*110
550
730
177
177
176
172
150
75*125
585
780
191
191
191
165
90*140
640
845
200
200
194.5
175
110*160
665
880
209
209
201
185
125*180
710
940
223
200
140*200
720
965
238
215
160*225
825
1085
252
230
200*280
900
1190
280
260
225*315
880
1185
295
275
Exampled) L -P - L
798
Inner pipe: Yi min/Material
Outer pipe
YA min
Coupler (L)
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
L - P - L
PVC-U
PVC-C
PP-H, PE80 PVDF
20*50
475
127
127
123
123
65
25*50
475
133
133
127
127
65
32*63
515
149
149
141
141
75
40*75
595
167
167
155
155
85
50*90
680
192
192
176
176
100
63*110
800
226
226
208
204
120
75*125
855
253
253
231
135
90*140
925
277
277
245
145
110*160
965
307
312
267
155
125*180
1030
338
170
140*200
1055
367
185
160*225
1180
402
200
200*280
1290
472
230
225*315
1305
513
245
Outer pipe
YA min
799
Example e) S - E
Example f) S - P - E
1 Spigots (S)
2 Socket (E)
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
S - E
S - P - E
PVC-U
PVC-C
PP-H, PE80 PVDF
20*50
310
428
115
115
113
113
88
25*50
310
428
115
115
114
114
88
32*63
340
466
128
128
128
128
101
40*75
400
540
157
157
158
158
130
50*90
460
615
162
162
165
165
135
63*110
550
725
212
212
220
218
185
75*125
585
773
224
224
235
198
90*140
640
838
243
243
253.5
218
110*160
665
875
249
246.5
261
225
125*180
710
934
272
249
140*200
720
958
276
253
160*225
825
1079
316
294
200*280
900
1182
397
377
225*315
880
1178
358
338
800
Outer pipe
YA min
Example g) L -P - E
Coupler (L)
Coupler (E)
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
L - P - E
PVC-U
PVC-C
PP-H, PE80 PVDF
20*50
475
127
127
125
125
65
25*50
475
133
133
130
130
65
32*63
510
149
149
145
145
75
40*75
575
167
167
161
161
85
50*90
670
192
192
184
184
100
63*110
760
226
226
217
215
120
75*125
815
253
253
242
135
90*140
875
277
277
261
145
110*160
920
307
309.5
287
155
125*180
975
338
170
140*200
1010
367
185
160*225
1110
402
200
200*280
1165
472
230
225*315
1235
513
245
Outer pipe
YA min
Connection sizes for double containment

fittings
If the cutting sizes on long pipes are not calculated from
tables, the inner and outer pipes can be finished to dimension f for connection to fitting end S, and to dimension g for connection to fitting end L.
Note:
Last connection always on the double containment fitting!
First, fit equal socket to the pipe section to be connected.
f
insertion depth of socket: "L" + z-dimension of equal socket

"z" - 15 mm
insertion depth of socket: "L" + 15 mm
30
width of snap ring
insertion depth of pipe in socket
z-dimension of socket
type 0
type 1
801
Diameter
d
Connection to DC
fitting, spigot end.
Shorter length compared with outer pipe:
"f"
Connection to DC
fitting, coupler end.
Longer length compared with outer
pipe: "g"
Inner
pipes
PVC-U,
PVC-C
PP, PE,
PVDF
PVC-U
PP, PE,
PVDF
20
4.0
6.0
31.0
29.0
25
7.0
8.0
34.0
31.0
32
10.0
10.0
37.0
33.0
40
14.0
13.0
41.0
35.0
50
19.0
16.0
46.0
38.0
63
26.0
20.0
53.0
42.0
75
33.0
24.0
59.0
46.0
90
41.0
30.5
66.0
50.0
110
52.0
40.0
76.0
56.0
125
61.0
84.0
140
68.0
91.0
160
79.0
101.0
200
100.0
121.0
225
114.0
134.0
802
Fittings for butt and IR fusion and installation
Patented GF double containment pipe jointing

method for butt fusion in 6 steps

Butt fusion
Possible connections:
fitting to fitting direct
fitting to intermediate pipe section
fitting to termination fitting
Spigot for butt fusion
Space for full ELGEF Plus electrofusioncoupler or EPDM

rubber sleeve
Space for ELGEF Plus electrofusion coupler or EPDM

rubber sleeve
1.
Clamps hold the inner pipe and/or fitting.
2.
Standard heating element for butt fusion. The pipe and fitting
are heated simultaneously.
3.
Heating element for butt fusion.
803
Legend:
The following symbols are used to demonstrate the various
connection examples.
Abbreviation, Symbol:
S = Short end of
fitting with internal
spigot.
4.
Carry out a visual inspection of the joint, then pressure test

the inner pipe.
L = Long end of fitting with internal

spigot.
E = Endfitting
5.
A snap ring is fitted between the ends of the outer pipes to

close the inspection gap.
6.
An ELGEF Plus coupler or EPDM rubber sleeve is used to

seal the outer pipe.

CONTAIN-IT Plus: butt fusion
Short end of fitting (S) with space for ( - 15 mm)
ELGEF Plus coupler
Long end of fitting (L) for full ELGEF Plus coupler
Termination fitting (E)
Pipe (P)
804
Example 90 elbow:
Example
Symbol
Combination
m)
S - P - S
Short end of fitting Pipe Short end of fitting
n)S - L
Short end of fitting Direct Long end of fitting
o)S -P - L
Short end of fitting Pipe Long end of fitting
p) L -P - L
Long end of fitting Pipe Long end of fitting
q)S - E
Short end of fitting Direct Termination fitting (long)
r)S -P - E
Short end of fitting Pipe Termination fitting (long)
s) L -P - E
Long end of fittingPipe Termination fitting

(long)
805
Dimensions for calculating the cutting lengths

CONTAIN-IT Plus: butt fusion
Attention: Dimensional allowances, for planning (preparation for welding) and the weld bead (fusion process), need to be
added when calculating the cut size!
Example m) S - P - S
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
S - P - S
PP
PE
PVDF
20*50
455
215
215
215
185
25*50
455
215
215
215
185
32*63
500
230
230
230
200
40*75
575
255
255
255
225
50*90
655
285
285
285
255
63*110
775
325
325
325
295
75*125
835
355
355
355
325
90*140
905
375
375
375
345
110*160
945
395
395
395
365
125*180
1015
425
425
425
395
140*200
1055
455
455
455
425
160*225
1185
485
485
485
455
200*280
1310
540
540
540
510
225*315
1305
575
575
575
545
806
Inner pipe: Y i min/ Material
Outer pipe YA min
Example n) S - L
Example o) S - P - L
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
Outer pipe YA min
S - L
S - P - L
PP
PE
PVDF
20*50
310
435
125
125
125
95
25*50
310
435
125
125
125
95
32*63
340
475
135
135
135
105
40*75
400
545
145
145
145
115
50*90
460
620
160
160
160
130
63*110
550
730
180
180
180
150
75*125
585
780
195
195
195
165
90*140
640
845
205
205
205
175
110*160
665
880
215
215
215
185
125*180
710
940
230
230
230
200
140*200
720
965
245
245
245
215
160*225
825
1085
260
260
260
230
200*280
900
1190
290
290
290
260
225*315
880
1185
305
305
305
275
807
Example p) L - P - L
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
L - P - L
PP
PE
PVDF
20*50
380
480
100
100
100
70
25*50
380
480
100
100
100
70
32*63
410
515
105
105
105
75
40*75
480
595
115
115
115
85
50*90
550
680
130
130
130
100
63*110
650
800
150
150
150
120
75*125
690
855
165
165
165
135
90*140
750
925
175
175
175
145
110*160
780
965
185
185
185
155
125*180
830
1030
200
200
200
170
140*200
840
1055
215
215
215
185
160*225
950
1180
230
230
230
200
200*280
1030
1290
260
260
260
230
225*315
1030
1305
275
275
275
245
808
Outer pipe YA min
Example r) S - P - E
Example q) S - E
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
Aussenrohr YA min
S - E
S - P - E
PP
PE
PVDF
20*50
310
435
125
125
125
95
25*50
313
435
125
125
125
95
32*63
335
475
140
140
140
110
40*75
380
545
165
165
165
135
50*90
450
620
170
170
170
140
63*110
510
730
220
220
220
190
75*125
545
780
235
235
235
205
90*140
590
845
255
255
255
225
110*160
620
880
260
260
260
230
125*180
655
940
285
285
285
255
140*200
675
965
290
290
290
260
160*225
755
1085
330
330
330
300
200*280
775
1190
415
415
415
385
225*315
810
1185
375
375
375
345
809
Example s) L - P - E
d*D
Direct M
Mmin.
L - P - E
PP
PE
PVDF
20*50
380
480
100
100
100
70
25*50
380
480
100
100
100
70
32*63
405
510
105
105
105
75
40*75
460
575
115
115
115
85
50*90
540
670
130
130
130
100
63*110
610
760
150
150
150
120
75*125
650
815
165
165
165
135
90*140
700
875
175
175
175
145
110*160
735
920
185
185
185
155
125*180
775
975
200
200
200
170
140*200
795
1010
215
215
215
185
160*225
880
1110
230
230
230
200
200*280
905
1165
260
260
260
230
225*315
960
1235
275
275
275
245
810
Inner pipe: Yi min/ Material
Outer pipe YA min
Leak detection and leak locating systems

To make certain that a leak in the inner pipe of a double
containment system does not go unnoticed (rendering
the system no better than a regular single pipe), it is essential that leaks arebeing detected. There are several different systems available on the market for the purpose of monitoring pipes.
Differential pressure
We distinguish between over and underpressuremonitoring:
Overpressure monitoring
In differential pressure monitoring with overpressure, nitrogen is pumped at a specific pressure into the space
between the inner and outer pipes. If there is a pressure
loss in this space, an alarm will indicate the leak.
Advantages:
The inner and outer pipes are monitored for leak-tightness
Retrofit installation is possible
TV test certificate
Automatic alarm
Disadvantage:
The nitrogen, which is pumped in, must be ata higher pressure than the medium-conveying inner pipe. It
is therefore essential to check that the inner pipe will
not collapse, taking account of the operating conditions (please refer tothe questionnaire for the structural certificate).
vided into leakage sections, each with its own vacuum

pump (Divisions with termination fittings, refer to Section: Tools for locating leaks in all systems).
Leak location:
Outer pipe direct
Inner pipe through special holes in the outer pipe
Suppliers of differential pressure monitoring systems:
SGB Sicherungsgertebau GmbH
Hofstrasse 10
57076 Siegen, Germany
Tel: +49 271 48964 0
Fax: + 49 271 48964 6
sgb@sgb.de
www.sgb.de
Optical monitoring
For optical leak detection, a 20-mm diameter ball valve
with a transparent PVC-U monitoring pipe is mounted
on the Rp" branch of the termination fitting or on the
branch saddle.
Advantages:
Cost-efficient
Retrofit on the branch saddle is possible
Disadvantages:
No automatic alarm
Outer pipe is not monitored
Can be installed only at the lowest point
Locating leaks:
Outer pipe direct
Inner pipethrough special holes in the outer pipe
Vacuum monitoring (underpressure monitoring)
In differential pressure monitoring in avacuum, a pump
is used to create a vacuum in the range of 600 700
mbar in the space between the inner and outer pipes.
If there is a pressure loss in this space, a vacuum
switch(VS) switches on a vacuum pump.At the same
time, a warning light and buzzer provide visual andacoustic warnings.
Advantages:
No pressure loading on the inner pipe
The inner and outer pipes are monitored for leak-tightness
Retrofit installation is possible
Automatic alarm
TV test certificate
Disadvantages:
Pumping volume of the vacuum pump must be at
least750 mbar with clear intake.
Where there is a large volume of space between the
inner and outer pipes, the vacuum pump will need to
be powerful enough, or the pipeline will need to be di-
Branch saddle with leak monitoring
Optoelectronic monitoring
For optoelectronic leak detection, a fluid sensor and a
20-mm diameter ball valve with a transparent PVC-U
monitoring pipe is mounted on the " branch of the termination fitting or on the branch saddle.
Advantages:
Relatively cost-efficient
Retrofit on the branch saddle is possible
Automatic alarm
811
Disadvantages:
Can be installed only at the lowest point
Note:
Due to the minimal difference in dimensions between
the inner and outer pipes in the CONTAIN-IT Plus double containment system, sensor cables are not feasible.
If this option is required, please contact our local sales
representative.
Tools for locating leaks in all systems: Termination fittings

By separating the outer pipe into leak detection sections
with termination fittings, the spill and the leak can be
easily localised in the section between the built-in termination fittings.
Suppliers of optoelectronic leak detection systems:

Fa. CARLO CAVAZZI AG
Verkauf Schweiz/Vente
Sumpfstrasse 32
CH-6312 Steinhausen
Tel. +41 41 747 45 25
Fax +41 41 740 45 60
verkauf_vente@carlovagazzi.ch
www.carlogavazzi.ch,
www.gavazzi-automation.com
Fa. BAMO-IER GmbH
Innstrasse 2
D-68199 Mannheim
Tel: +49 621 842240
Fax +49 621-8422490
info@ier
www.ier.de
Fa. VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
D-77761 Schiltach
Tel: +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
info@de.vega.com
www.vega.com
Sensor cable
In the space between the inner and outer pipes a cable
is laid which reacts either to conductive fluids or chemicals and emits an alarm.
Advantages:
Leak point is indicated precisely to within 1 m
Automatic alarm
Disadvantages:
Relatively expensive
Retrofit is not possible
Depending on the system, larger outer diameter of
outer pipe will be required
Susceptibility to condensates
812
Advantages:
Fast and safe leak detection
Only the respective section of the outer pipe needs to
be rinsed and cleaned
Length of leakage sections freely selectable
Operating and maintenance instructions
Important:
Installation or repair of double containment systems
must be made only by personnel trained for the purpose
and authorised by GF.
Maintenance
If the leakage warning system signals an incident, the
safety procedures defined in advance by the operator of the double containment system, must be followed.
If the installation includes more than one double containment line or section, a leak detection system must
be installed in each individual sector. If this is not
done, and the space between the pipes becomes
filled with the medium being carried, the double containment system effectively becomes a single pipe
system. The leak detection system must be capable
of detecting and indicating a leak within 72 hours.
Double containment systems must be protected from
uncontrolled thermal and mechanical influences.
Pressure test
Refer to section: "Pressure testing the inner und outer
pipes".
Carrying out repairs
Prior to beginning witha repair, it is essential to take
appropriate precautions, including completely emptying and flushing the inner and outer pipes, preventing
any dripping, etc.
If a leak cannot be precisely located, it is useful to
proceed section by section.
Caution: Only use water to search for the leak.
Our mechanically fastened drill-in saddle, with a "
tapping point, allows test drillings to be carefully made
on the underside of the protective pipe to section off
the leak. The saddle is later resealed with a PVC plug.
We recommend the use oftermination fittings when
the pipe system is being installed, to divide it up into
leakage detection zones.
The pipe must be replaced in accordance with our
pipe installation instructions.
Extension of the installation and retrofit installation
of a T-piece
Before starting work, it is essential to take appropriate
precautions, including completely emptying and flushing
the inner and outer pipes, preventing any dripping, etc.
Safety and fire prevention measures
We refer to the relevant safety datasheets of the plastic
materials used.
Laying pipes in the ground
When laying pipes in the ground, care must be taken to
ensure compliance with the relevant regulations and directives of professional organisations and public authorities and agencies, relating to trenching, embedding the
double containment system and backfilling.
813
Pressure testing the inner and outer

pipes
Inner pipe
General
The internal pressure test is done when installation work

has been completed and necessitates an operational
pipeline or operational test sections. The test pressure
load should furnish experimental proof of operational
safety. The test pressure is not based on the working
pressure, but rather on the internal pressure load capacity, derived from the pipe wall thickness.
Supplement 2 of DVS 2210-1 forms the basis for the following information. This replaces the data in DVS 22101 entirely. The modifications became necessary because
the reference value nominal pressure (PN) is being
used less and less to determine the test pressure (1.5
x PN, or 1.3 x PN) and is being replaced by SDR,
a short-term overload or even a reduction in the service life can occur if in the course of the internal pressure test based on the nominal pressure the pipe wall
temperature TR = 20 C is exceeded by more than 5
C.
Material
Pressure drop
PVC-U
0.5 bar/h
PVC-C
0.5 bar/h
ABS
0.6 bar/h
PP
0.8 bar/h
PE
1.2 bar/h
PB
1.4 bar/h
PVDF
0.8 bar/h
Main test
In the context of the main test, a much smaller drop in
pressure can be expected at constant pipe wall temperatures so that it is not necessary to pump again.
The checks can focus primarily on leak detection at the
flange joints and any position changes of the pipe.
become higher. This has to be taken into account when
designing the fixed points.
Test pressures are therefore determined in relation to

SDR and the pipe wall temperature. The 100-h value
from the long-term behaviour diagram is used for the
test clamping.

When using a valve at the end of a pipeline (end or final valve), the valve andthe pipe end should be closed
valve.
Test Parameters
Filling the pipeline
The following table indicates recommended methods of

testing the internal pressure.
Object
Pre-test
Main test
Test pressure pp
(depends on the pipe
wall temperature or
the permissible test
pressure of the builtin components, see
clause "Determining
the test pressure")
pp(perm)
0.85 pp(perm)
Test duration (deL 100 m: 3 h

pends on the length of 100 m<L 500
the pipeline, respecm: 6 h
tively the sections)
L 100 m: 3 h
100 m<L 500
m: 6 h
Checks during the

testing (test pressure
and temperature progression should be
recorded)
At least 2
duration without
restoring the test
pressure
At least 3
duration with
restoring the test
pressure
Pre-test
The pre-test serves to prepare the piping system for the
actual test (main test). In the course of pre-testing, a
tension-expansion equilibrium in relation to an increase
in volume will develop in the piping system. A material-related drop in pressure will occur which will require
repeated pumping to restore the test pressure and also frequently a re-tightening of the flange connection
screws.
The guidelines for an expansion-related pressure decrease in pipes are:
814
Before starting with the internal pressure test, the following points must be checked:
Was installation done according to the available
plans?
All pressure relief devices and flap traps mounted in
the flow direction?
All end valves shut?
Valves in front of other devices are shut to protect
against pressure.
Visual inspection of all joints, pumps, measurement
devices and tanks.
Has the waiting period after the last fusion / cementing been observed?
Now the pipeline can be filled from the geodetic lowest
point. Special attention should be given to the air vent. If
possible, vents should be provided at all the high points
of the pipeline and these should be open when filling the
system. Flushing velocity should be at least 1 m/sec.
Reference values for the filling volume are given in the
table below.
DN
V (l/sec)
DN
V (l/sec)
80
0.15
250
2.0
100
0.3
300
3.0
150
0.7
400
6.0
200
1.5
500
>9.0
Adequate time should be allowed between filling and

testing the pipeline, so that the air contained in the piping system can escape via the vents: ca. 6 - 12 h, depending on the nominal diameter.
Applying the test pressure
The test pressure is applied according to the diagram.

Here it is important that the pressure increase rate does
not cause any water hammer !
Definitions
Y = test pressure in %
X = time for pressure increase in min
1) = pressure increase rate up to DN 100
2) = range of pressure increase rates >DN 100 - 400
3) = reference values for pressure increase rate DN 500
and greater is: 500 / DN [bar/10 min]
Determining the test pressure
The allowable test pressure is calculated according to

with
v(T, 100h) Long-term creep strength for the pipe wall temperature TR (at t = 100 h)
Sp Minimum safety factor for long-term creep strength
AG Processing or geometrical specific factor that reduces the allowable test pressure
TR Pipe wall temperature: average value of test medium
temperature and pipe surface temperature
Attention: If the piping system contains diaphragm valves the maximum allowable test
pressure is limited to the nominal pressure.
To make things easier, the permissible test pressures
can be taken directly from the following diagrams.
Definitions:
P = permissible test pressure in bar
T = pipe wall temperature in C
815
After the installation of the double containment system

has been completed, the pressure connection (pressure
union) for the leakage indicator, or a test union to monitor the proper operation of the leakage indicator, is installed as near as possible to (no further than 1 m from)
or directly inside the termination fitting and at the end
of each length of piping. The leak-tightness test of the
space between the pipes is carried out at room temperature (20 C).
Caution:
Thin-walled inner pipes in particular can collapse under excess pressure in the space between the pipes.
The maximum permissible test and / or overpressure in
the space between the pipes depends on the load capacity of the medium-conveying inner pipe. Care should
be taken here to ensure that the internal pressure load
on the pipe (PN stage) is not the same as the external
pressure load.
Checks during testing
The following measurement values must be recorded

consistently during testing:
Internal pressure at the absolute low point of the
pipeline
Medium and ambient temperature
Water volume input
Water volume output
Pressure drop rates
Leak-tightness test
If it is not possible to use water to carry out an internal

pressure test (e.g. piping systems need to be kept dry),
a leak-tightness test can be carried out at low pressure.
For safety reasons, the test pressure must be restricted
to 0.5 bar (overpressure).
During the leak-tightness test, all joints are sprayed with
a foaming agent and checked. Since the efficiency of
the leak-tightness test is considerably restricted, due to
the low loading, this should preferably be used only on
systems with operating pressures below 0.5 bar.
Outer pipe
General
Once the test of the inner pipe is complete, the outer

pipe is tested with a fully filled inner pipe under internal
pressure (the internal pressure of the inner pipe must be
at least equal to or greater than the internal pressure of
the outer pipe) to avoid loading the inner pipe as a result of external pressure. To carry out the pressure test,
suitable filling and ventilation facilities must be provided
on the outer pipe.
816
Water is the preferred test medium. However, complete

drainage must be ensured. In many cases, air or inert
gas are also suitable test media. The following points
should be noted:
Compressor oils can contain damaging elements for
the pipe.
Depending on the temperature, some materials tend
to chip and break under mechanical influence and inner pressure of compressed media.
The appropriate safety precautions should be taken in
the event of a crack in the outer pipe, especially transparent PVC-U.
The maximum gas pressure depends on the material
and should not exceed the following values:
Test Parameter CONTAIN-IT Plus

Pipelines
PE100 outer pipe,

pressure-resistant fused with
ELGEF Plus
coupler
PVC-U outer pipe,

spray protection
with EPDM rubber
sleeve
SDR11
SDR17 or
SDR17.6
Pre-test
Main
test
Pre-test
Main
test
Water
pp (zul)
0.85 *
pp (zul)
1 bar
1 bar
Inert gas
0.5 bar
0.5 bar
0.3 bar
0.3 bar
Testing time
Holding the pipeline under the test pressure all connection parts of the pipeline like flanges, unions, valves,
etc. are inspected on tightness using a foam building
agent. A soap solution, which can be removed simply
with water after the test, is best.
Attention: Commercial leak detection sprays
can cause stress cracks in plastics. Using these
sprays remove any residues after testing.
No overloading of the components

Please consider that the test pressure has to be adapted to the installed components: for example where fittings or valves are installeda maximum testpressure
of6 bar is admissible for the protective pipe!
PE100 outer pipe,

pressure-resistant fused with
ELGEF Plus
coupler
PVC-U outer pipe,

spray protection
with EPDM rubber
sleeve
SDR11
SDR17 or
SDR17.6
Pre-test
Main
test
Pre-test
Main
test
Water
6 bar
6 bar
1 bar
1 bar
Inert gas
0.5 bar
0.5 bar
0.3 bar
0.3 bar
817
Static evidence
The questionnaire for static evidence is used by GF to

determine if the selected pipeline is resistant under the
given operating conditions. For fixed-point installation
(inhibited longitudinal expansion), it is necessary to calculate the stresses and forces on the outer pipe fittings,
which the fixed-point pipe brackets are required to absorb.
The fixed point for the inner pipe is already built into
each fitting by means of a support ring. If the calculated stress on the pipe is too great, the operating conditions or the material must be changed. The calculation
also indicates the distances between spacers for the inner pipe and the distances between pipe brackets for
the outer pipe as well as the forces on fixed points. Expansion in the pipeline need not be taken into consideration; no additional expansion loops or compensators
are required. To prevent the pipe sagging because of
bending or not exactly aligned installation, it is advisable to install guide supports between the fixed points,
designed for lateral forces of around15 % of the axialforces, acting on the fixed points.
Double containment system fixed point
CONTAIN-IT Plus loadings
Medium, pressure, temperature, time

Stresses resulting from impeded thermal expansion
Kink resistance
External pressure stability
Intermittent stressing
Special case of EPDM sleeve
818
CONTAIN-IT Plus system
Monitoring space
Outer pipe
Inner pipe
Pipe bracket
Spacer
Fixed point
Guide supports
Questionnaire for static evidence
819
Static evidence - Calculation by GF Piping

Systems
On the basis of the customer data entered in the questionnaire (cf. Questionnaire for static evidence, Section:
Static evidence) the calculation programme produces a
static evidence, as shown in the following illustrations.
The static evidenceis sent to the customer.
820
Welding machines for butt and socket fusion
SG 160 welding machine

for butt fusion joints from d20/50 to d110/160
for larger sizes, use SG 315 welding machine
Welding machine IR110:
SG160
for socket fusion joints from d20/50 to d110/160
Welding machine for IR-fusion

Welding machineIR63:
For IR-fusion joints up to Dimension d50/90

No special half shells
Welding machineIR225:

Please use the special half shell for the double containment system.
821

Please use the special half shell for the double containment system.
822
Safety measures - extensions and repairs

Completely drainthe inner and outer pipes
If necessary, wash out
Take precautions to ensure no dripping of medium
Caution when separating the pipes protect personnel and equipment from leaking medium
Use water to search for leak (must be compatible with
product)
Separating for retrofit installation of a T-90
Separation inner and outer
2, 3, 4
Separation outer
5, 6
Separation inner
Branch axis for 90 T-piece
Further information available on request.
Double containment - flanged connection

to a tank
X = 30 mm snap ring width
Z-dimensions can be taken from the double containment product catalogue.

Branch axis for 90 T-piece The piping must be capable
of being moved axially.
CONTAIN-IT Plus - mechanical joint

Radially removable stainless steel collar for the outer pipe
For retrofit extension or repair
Inner pipe with screwed union
Flanged inner pipe
823

Versions
Pneumatic actuator
Electric actuator
Hand operated
PVC-U PN 6 protective case
Internal ball valve: can be radially installed and removed
CONTAIN-IT Plus ball valve

Operating instructions
1 Introduction
Double containment valves from GF Piping Systems are
supplied as a ready-to-install system unit and the jointing technology used is similar to that for a double containment fitting. The concept is that the inner pipe is first
joined according to the jointing technology which you
have selected. The following jointing methods and materials can be chosen from:
Jointing methods for inner pipe
Material
Butt fusion
PE100, PP-H, PVDF
IR fusion
PE100, PP-H, PVDF
Socket fusion
PE80, PP-H, PVDF
Socket cementing
PVC-C, PVC-U
installation and pressure testing of a double containment ball valve

removing and reinstalling, e.g. in case of a leak
retrofitting the valve for actuation
Please note that the installation conditions and
safety instructions contained in the enclosed
installation and operation instruction manual
for the 2-way ball valve type 546, manual operation, must be complied with each time the
double containment valve is built in or dismantled!
2 Design of a double containment valve
Protective housing
Stem
Union end
Union bush
Union nut of protective housing
Hand lever
Nuts and screws to fix the hand lever
Support pieces PE
Ball valve type 546 (central part)
10
Union nut ball valve type 546
11
Connection for 1/2 inch leak detection or PVC-U 1/2 inch

plug
12
Spacer
13
Borehole for leak detection of inner pipe
14
O-ring for PE connection adaptor
15
O-rings for stem
16
O-rings for union bush / union end
3. Installation
Before putting the double containment valve into operation, the following 4 steps are required to install the
CONTAIN-IT Plus ball valve:
824
Step 1: Valve mounting
NOTICE
Installation of the valve
Incorrect installation may cause problems
with tolerances.
Make sure to join up the pipe ends with the
other pipe sections only after the valve has
been assembled
Loosen the union nuts of the protective housing and move

them aside.
Unscrew the union bush (left-hand thread!) and move it aside.

Note: The use of a pin wrench is recommended (00 23 90).
Remove the stem from the protective housing. A groove on

the stem allows the use of a screw driver.
Move the protective housing aside. The ball valve is now accessible.
NOTICE
Fixing of the valve
Tension within the assembly reduced the life
expectancy and functionality of the valve.
Fix the valve at both ends with fixing points
in order to minimise any tension within the
assembly
Step 2: Preparing for pressure testing
CAUTION
Removing the hand lever
A build-up of internal pressure may cause the
valve pinion to pop out, leading to injury and /
or damage.
Before removing the hand lever, any internal operating or test pressures must be released
Procedure:
Make sure that the red hand lever is in parallel position to the
pipe system.
Loosen the nuts and remove the hand lever.

825
Step 3: Pressure testing the inner pipe
WARNING
Pressure Testing
Using hazardous media for pressure testing may put the installation at risk and cause
physical damage or bodily harm in case of
leakage.
The pressure test must be performed using
non-hazardous media (e.g. water) and with
due care and attention in handling.
Please pay attention to the instructions in
the user manual included for ball valve type
546 (valves only)
Procedure:
1. Check to make sure the protective housing is open
(cover removed) to determine if there is leakage during
the pressure testing.
2. The pressure test must be performed with water or
another non-hazardous medium. See DVS 2210-2 with
reference to DVS 2210-1, Suppl. 2, as well as the instructions contained in the above mentioned Installation and Operating Instructions for Ball Valve Type
546.
When the pressure test has been successfully completed, proceed to Step 4.
Plug the stem through the hole in the protective housing onto the ball valve. Note: Please make sure that the stem is in
the right position. Therefore please consider the outline of the
stem and of the ball valve.
Check if the stem is flush with the bottom of the connecting element.
Screw the union bush (left-hand thread!) into the protective

housing and tighten it. Note: The use of a pin wrench is recommended (00 23 90).
Reposition the union end and tighten the union nuts on both
sides with an adequate wrench.
Step 4: Assembling the CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball Valve

Type 546
Move the protective housing over the ball valve.
826
5 Upgrade the CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball Valve Type 546

with an actuator
The CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball Valve can be upgraded with
the EA11, EA21 and PA21 actuators according to the
following description.
To upgrade the CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball Valve you will
need the Adaptor Set 700 238 796. This Adaptor Set includes the following items:
1 x Adaptor Code 198 204 007
1 x Interface adaptor Code 198 803 156
2 x Reducing bush Code 198 803 145
Mount the hand lever onto the connecting element.
4 Installing and removing the double containment

Ball Valve Type 546
WARNING
Upgrades with other actuators on request.
5.1: Procedure:
The upgrade of the actuators EA11, EA21 and PA21 follows the same steps.
Opening of protective housing and ball

valve
Uncontrolled leakage of medium may occur from the pipeline or the valve both with
and without pressure. Contact with any remaining quantities of hazardous, aggressive, flammable or explosive media within the
pipeline or the valve may cause death or serious injury.
Release the control and operating pressures
Completely drain the medium from protective housing (the medium-conducting inner
pipe as well as the outer pipe)
Rinse the inner and outer pipes
Protect against dripping
CAUTION
Removing the hand lever
A build-up of internal pressure may cause the
valve pinion to pop out, leading to injury and /
or damage.
Before removing the hand lever, any internal operating or test pressures must be released
4.1: Opening the protective housing

Procedure see chapter 3 - step 2
4.2: Removing the ball valve type 546
Procedure:
1.Loosen the union nuts of the ball valve
2.Take the ball valve out of the inner pipe
3.Perform revision work according to the instruction
manual of the ball valve type 546
4.3: Re-installing the ball valve type 546
Procedure:
1.Check O-rings on ball valve and grease with a tenside-free, silicone or polyglycol-based lubricant (we
recommend using new gaskets when re-installing the
ball valve).
2.Fit the ball valve 546 in the inner pipe, making sure
the ball valve is in the "open" position.
3.Re-tighten the adjustment bush and union nut in the
counter-clockwise direction (Fig. 4)
4.Perform pressure test and assembly according to
steps 3 and 4 described in paragraph 3.
Make sure that the red hand lever is in parallel position to the
pipe system.
Loosen the nuts and remove the hand lever.
827
Plug the adaptor into the actuator.
Mount the adaptor interface with four allen screws onto the actuator.
Put the reducing bush onto the stem.
828
Mount the actuator with the adaptor interface on the connecting element.
The CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball Valve and the actuator are now
ready to use.
6 Spare part seals for the CONTAIN-IT Plus Ball

Valve Type 546
6.1 Stem
Dimension
Ball Valve
Code
Qty.
d20/50-d32/50
748410103
3.54 x 29.75 EPDM
749410103
3.54 x 29.75 FPM
d40/75-d63/110 748410027
3.54 x 37.69 EPDM
3.54 x 37.69 FPM
749410027
Dimension
mm
Installation example of double containment

valves
O-ring
6.2 PE-connecting adaptor

d20/50d25/50
748410119
5.34 x 71.39 EPDM
749410119
5.34 x 71.39 FPM
d32/63
748410023
5.34 x 91.44 EPDM
749410023
5.34 x 91.44 FPM
d40/75-d63/110 748410254
7.0 x 108.0
EPDM
7.0 x 108.0
FPM
749410254 2
Installation example
6.3 Union end / union bush

d20/50d25/50
748410111
5.34 x104.37 EPDM
749410111
5.34 x104.37 FPM
d32/63
748410249
5.34 x123.19 EPDM
749410249
5.34 x123.19 FPM
d40/75d63/110 748410258
5.34 x146.1
749410258 (d63=4) 5.34 x146.1
EPDM
FPM
6.4 Ball Valve Type 546 (Central Part)

Seal sets consist of:
2 backing seals, 1 body seal, 2 face seals, 2 stern seals
EPDM sealing set:
Dimension
Code
d20/50
161486400
d25/50
161486401
d32/63
161486402
d40/75
161486403
d50/90
161486404
d63/110
161486405
FPM sealing set:

Dimension
Code
d20/50
161486410
d25/50
161486411
d32/63
161486412
d40/75
161486413
d50/90
161486414
d63/110
161486415
829
Customized parts
A large number of components in the double containment range are manufactured to customer requirements. Prefabricated tapping pieces, reducing T-pieces,
termination fittings integrated into the preform or the
prefabrication of entire sub-assemblies offer simplified
installation on the construction site.
T-piece with 45 tapping point for socket

fusion and cementing or butt fusion
90 elbow including termination fitting
830
Double containment reducing 90 T-piece with elbow
831
832
System COOL-FIT
General information
Page
834
COOL-FIT Top quality
835
System advantages: Your benefit
837
System Specification
-- COOL-FIT ABS
-- COOL-FIT ABS Plus
COOL-FIT ABS Plus technical details

-- COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipes
-- COOL-FIT ABS Plus Fittings
-- Reducing diameters
-- Accessory Equipment
Technical Data
-- General comments to plastics orientated pipeline design and installation

-- COOL-FIT ABS Plus pressure-temperature diagram
-- COOL-FIT On-Line calculation tool
Installation
-- COOL-FIT ABS Plus fixed point

-- Plastic to Metal Connections
-- Measuring Equipment in an COOL-FIT ABS Plus System
-- Other installation topics
-- Determining of COOL-FIT ABS Plus changes in length
-- Flexible length for COOL-FIT ABS Plus
-- Comparision pipe diameter
COOL-FIT Product Range
-- Background Information to the COOL-FIT Product Range from GF Piping Systems
838
838
839
839
840
840
844
844
845
847
847
848
849
852
852
854
855
833
System COOL-FIT
General information
COOL-FIT is a complete plastic pipe system for secondary cooling and refrigeration systems operated with
brine or water diluted glycols. The system is based on
proven and cold-shock resistant ABS pipes and fittings.
COOL-FIT is ideal for use in cold storage, in food and
beverage production (e.g. breweries, dairies, slaughterhouses), in supermarkets as well as for process cooling
in industrial cooling water systems or in data centers.
Note:
COOL-FIT is not for use with primary gases such as:
Ammonia, Propane, R407, R22 and also not for use
for compressed air systems
Application Areas:
Dairies
Slaughter houses
Meat processing
Industrial cooling water
Breweries
Food production
Fish industry
Air conditioning
COOL-FIT technical information and installation details
are available separately on request.
GF offers technical support during the planning phase
and on-site training for jointing and handling. Please
contact GF for details.
The COOL-FIT system is available in three different versions:

COOL-FIT ABS: standard ABS (not insulated), postinsulation on-site possible
COOL-FIT ABS Lite: pre-insulated ABS with Armacell
insulation: fire classification: BL-s3,d0
COOL-FIT ABS Plus: pre-insulated ABS with UV resistant and vapor tight jacket
Both pipes and fittings are delivered ready to install.
Typical working conditions
Working temperature range from:
-50 C (-58F) to +60C (140F) COOL-FIT ABS
-50 C (-58F) to +60C (140F) COOL-FIT ABS Lite
-50 C (-58F) to +40C (104F) COOL-FIT ABS Plus
Typical mediums
COOL-FITcan be used for example with the following
mediums:
chilled water and general water
Salt solutions
Antifrogen KF
Hycool
Temper
Freezium
Zitrec
Glycol solutions
Antifrogen L
Antifrogen N
Dowfrost
Tyfocor
Alcohol solutions
For compatibility of COOL-FIT to non-water mediums
please consult GF Piping Systems.
834
COOL-FIT Top quality

Minimum on site time
835
836
System advantages: Your benefit
Speed
Fittings and pipes are delivered direct to the site ready
to install. Simple installation technique using speedy
solvent cementing with no need to remove the PUR using internal diameter jointing fittings. Time and cost saving handling due to the low weight of plastics.
Zero corrosion
No maintenance, reduced downtime, constant long-term
efficiency.
Reduce costs for your hanging system
Simplified pipe supports on outer jacket, no need for
special refrigeration pipe hangers. Preinsulated pipe requires about 30 % less hangers than standard plastic
pipe. Lower weight compared to metals means lower
structural costs.
Top efficiency
Save energy, thermal conductivity 0.026 W/m K. PUR
density 55 kg/m with standard thickness of35 mm
for excellent insulating properties. Smooth pipes: no encrustation, low pressure drops, no energy bridges due
to support on outer jacket.
Hygienic and aesthetic

Top quality in performance and looks. Smooth outer
surfaces for hygienic environments. No detrimental effects under high pressure cleaning.
Full technical design support
www.cool-fit.georgfischer.com for online calculations of
energy losses, temperature differences and more. CAD
libraries for accurate and quicker drawing. Specialist
guidelines for design and installation and design of venting equipment, measuring equipment, transitions.
Full technical support during installation
On-site advice and jointing technique training. Training
video for ABS jointing technique.
Sustainability
Reduce the carbon footprint of your plant and factory
with recyclable plastics. Lower ODP and GWP values
compared to traditional metal systems.
Reliability
Quality: GF Piping Systems products is the number 1
Plastics Industrial Piping system manufacturer in the
world. Tried and Tested jointing technique with gap filling solvent cement TANGIT ABS.
Innovative and clever
Developed for your needs. Internal pipe connections
means no need to remove the PUR insulation from the
pipe or fitting.
Outdoor and indoor systems:
Vapour sealed black shrink sleeve for 100 % vapour
sealing, 100 % water tight system.
837
System Specification
COOL-FIT ABS
1.1 Carrier Pipe

Pipes and Fittings from GF Piping Systems are manufactures from acrylonitrile butadiene styrene. The material is designed for use with pressure bearing piping systems with long term properties in accordance with EN
ISO 15493.
1.2 Insulation
The insulation material is a hard polyurethane foam
(PUR) with a thermal conductivity of <0.023 W/mK and
a density of 55kg/m3. The greenhouse warming potential (GWP) and the ozone depletion potential is zero.
1.3 Outer jacket
The outer jacket is a high density polyethylene in black.
The jacket is UV resistant according to EN ISO 16871.
It offers extremely good impact resistance and a good
resistance to oil splashes and grease or other external
contamination.
1 Material
1.1 Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene Material
GF Piping Systems COOL-FIT ABS pipes and fittings
shall be manufactured from acrylonitrile butadiene
styrene, ABS. The raw material used shall be material
designed for use with pressure bearing piping systems
with long term hydrostatic properties in accordance with
EN ISO 15493, as supplied by GF Piping Systems.
All COOL-FIT ABS pipes are metric sizes manufactured
in accordance with the requirements of EN ISO 15493,
supplied by GF Piping Systems.
All COOL-FIT ABS fittings are metric sizes manufactured by GF Piping Systems or equal, with dimensions
and tolerances in accordance with ISO 727 and EN ISO
15493. All threaded connections shall have pipe threads
in accordance with the requirements of ISO 7.
All COOL-FIT ABS valves are metric sizes manufactured by GF Piping Systems or equal in accordance with
EN ISO 16135 to 16138.
Should be in accordance with GF Piping Systems Guide
to the Installation and Use of Plastic Pipelines.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus
1 Material
COOL-FIT ABS Plus consists of the following materials:
838
All the components are bonded together and guarantee

one thermal coefficient .
2 Jointing
All components will be jointed with solvent cement according the GF Piping Systems Guideline
Technical Data
Thermal conductivity at 20C:
0.026 W/m K
Axial shear strength:
0.12 N/mm
Tensile strength:
0.2 N/mm
Compressive strength:
0.3 N/mm
Foam density:
55 kg/m
Average cell sizes:
max. 0.5 mm
Expansion coefficient:
indoor: 0.04 mm/mK
outdoor: 0.09 mm/mK
COOL-FIT ABS Plus technical details

COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipes
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe is produced with high grade ABS pressure piping
raw material, in use for over 20 years together with a high grade low temperature PUR produced in high density to offer optimal insulating properties.
The high density PE jacket pipe guarantees a vapor tight an UV resistant solution.
Connection
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe to pipe connections are achieved using the di-di COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple. di is the
designation for a joint which takes place in the internal diameter of the pipe. di25 for instance refers to the internal diameter of a d25 pipe.
1 COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe
2 COOL-FIT ABS Plus nippel di-di
Note: Dimensions from d200 (incl.) must be calibrated using the COOL-FIT
ABS Plus calibration tool.
Carrier pipe
COOL-FIT
ABS
d x e
Carrier pipe
COOL-FIT
ABS
di
Jacket pipe
PE
D x e1
Weight (PE +
ABS + PUR)
kg/m (lb/ft)
Volume
l/m
Pipe support
Distance
m (ft)
Heat transfer coefficient[U]

W/m K
25 x 2.3
20.4
90 x 3.0
1.3 (0.83)
0.36
1.55 (5.09)
0.13
32 x 1.9
28.2
90 x 3.0
1.5 (0.87)
0.61
1.55 (5.09)
0.16
40 x 2.4
35.2
110 x 3.0
1.9 (1.18)
0.95
1.65 (5.41)
0.17
50 x 3.0
44.0
110 x 3.0
2.1 (1.27)
1.49
1.65 (5.41)
0.21
63 x 3.8
55.4
125 x 3.0
2.7 (1.67)
2.34
1.75 (5.74)
0.25
75 x 4.5
66.0
140 x 3.0
3.5 (2.13)
3.36
1.90 (6.23)
0.27
90 x 5.4
79.2
160 x 3.0
4.4 (2.76)
4.80
2.05 (6.73)
0.29
110 x 6.6
96.8
180 x 3.0
5.5 (3.51)
7.21
2.20 (7.22)
0.34
140 x 8.3
123.4
225 x 3.4
8.5 (5.48)
11.69
2.55 (8.37)
0.35
160 x 9.5
141.0
250 x 3.6
10.5 (6.34)
15.22
2.75 (9.02)
0.37
200 x 12.3
175.4
280 x 3.9
13.5 (9.02)
24.50
3.05 (10.01)
0.50
225 x 13.9
197.2
315 x 4.1
18.5 (9.16)
30.05
3.30 (10.83)
0.50
250 x 9.6
230.8
355 x 5.6
14.9 (9.99)
41.84
3.3 (10.83)
0.49
280 x 10.7
258.6
400 x 4.8
18.7 (12.54)
52.50
3.6 (11.80)
0.48
315 x 12.1
290.8
450 x 5.2
23.7 (15.90)
66.42
3.8 (11.80)
0.48
COOL-FIT ABS Plus support distances are the same

from 50C to +40 C (-58F to +104F)
d: nominal outside diameter of COOL-FIT ABS carrier
pipe
di: nominal inside diameter of COOL-FIT ABS carrier
pipe
D: nominal outside of PE jacket pipe
e and e1: nominal wall thicknesses
COOL-FIT ABS Plus Fittings

COOL-FIT ABS Plus Fittings are manufactured using
the same raw materials as the pipe and are thus completely compatible with COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipes in
terms of insulating properties and also jointing technique.
839
Connections
Pipe to Fitting
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe to fitting connections are
achieved using the d-di COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple. d
is the designation for a normal socket solvent cemented joint as per the standard GF Piping Systems ABS
range. di is the designation for a joint which takes place
in the internal diameter of the pipe.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple di-d red.; di90-d75
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe d90/D160
COOL-FIT ABS short reducer d75-d50
COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple d-di; d50-di50
Reducing with a COOL-FIT ABS Plus Fitting to

The d type of fittings have a standard COOL-FIT ABS d
joint as the fitting connection and therefore the standard
COOL-FIT ABS short reducers can be used to reduce
the diameter and then the d-di COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipples for the connection to the COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe.
1 COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe

2 COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple d-di
3 COOL-FIT ABS Plus fitting
Fitting to Fitting
COOL-FIT ABS plus fitting to fitting connections are
achieved using a d-d+10 COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple.
1
COOL-FIT ABS Plus tee 90 equal, d75
COOL-FIT ABS short reducer d75-d50
COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple d-di, d50-di50
Accessory Equipment
The jointing material and technique for all variants are
always the same, with the same cement and the same
tooling.
Reducing diameters
Reducing with a COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipe
The example below shows how the carrier pipe dimension is reduced from COOL-FIT ABS Plus d90/D160 (3/
6) to d50/D110 (1 1/2/4)
Note: the configurator below results in a gap twice as
wide usual app. 20mm (0.8) and therefore twice the
amount of gap filler is required.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus Nipples

These nipples are necessary to connect the COOL-FIT
ABS Plus System
di-di
di-di for pipe to pipe and pipe to fitting connections, using the internal diameter of the pipes.
d-di
d-di for pipe to fitting connections
840
Accessory for gap closing

d-d
COOL-FIT Plus Gap Insulator
d-d +10 for fitting to fitting connections
d red-di
d red di to reduce diameter of the carrier pipe

(Note: for dimensions d200 and above the COOL-FIT
ABS Plus calibration is required before joining the internal diameters of the pipe)
COOL-FIT ABS Plus calibration tool
Width 13 mm and a lamda / heat conductivity of 0.04 W/

m K, use of this insulation ensures nearly the same insulating properties in the gap as the pipe.
COOL-FIT Plus sealing tape
A roll of 40mm wide, butylene rubberbased band. For a water- and steam-tight
sealing of inspection gaps in combination
with shrink sleeves or shrink sockets.
It is necessary to calibrate pipe in dimension d200 +

d225 to allow joining using the COOL-FIT ABS Plusnipple. This tool calibrates the inside diameter of the pipe
to an exact dimension to allow internal joining.
COOL-FIT Plus shrink sleeve, short
Accessory equipment for solvent cement jointing
The solvent cementing equipment is exactly the same

for internal di jointing as for standard d jointing..
Used to vapour seal the control gap on the outer jacket between pipe and pipe or pipe and fitting. The sleeve
is 100mm wide and can only seal equal dimensioned
jackets. To ensure the proper functionality of the system, the shrink sleeve must be used in conjunction
with the gap insulator and the butylene-rubber sealing
tape. It can be shrunk with an open burner (soft, yellow
flame) or alternatively with a powerful hot-air gun. For a
long lasting quality seal GF recommends the use of the
shrink sleeve.
COOL-FIT Plus shrink socket
Used to vapour seal the control gap on the outer jacket between pipe and pipe or pipe and fitting. The socket is 100mm wide and can therefore only seal equal dimensioned jackets. To ensure the proper functionality
of the system, the shrink socket must be used in conjunction with the gap insulator and the butylene-rubber
sealing tape. This heavy duty version provides addition-
841
al mechanical strength with regards to bending forces.

It shrinks uniformly, resulting in a good visual appearance. It can be shrunk with an open burner (soft, yellow flame). For a long lasting quality seal combined with
high mechanical strength and good appearance, GF
recommends the use of the shrink socket.
COOL-FIT Plus cold and hot shrink sleeve
Used to vapor seal the control gap on the outer PE jacket. For indoor use only. The cold shrink sleeve shrinks
without the application of heat and the hot shrink sleeve
with the application of an open burner. The tape is 100
mm wide and can therefore only seal equal dimensioned PE jackets. It is applied firmly with an overlap of
app. 10cm (4). To ensure the proper functionality of the
system, the tape must be used in conjunction with the
gap insulator.
90 110 125 140 160 180 225 250 280 315

738.011.167
738.
011.170
738.011.173
COOL-FIT Plus shrink cap
The shrink cap is only to be used to seal PE to PE, not

to be used on ABS pipe. The flame used to shrink the
sleeve may damage the ABS pipe. Ideal for use with
T90 reducers. For dimensions please refer to the product range. No separate sealing tape is required, the
sealant is integrated into the cap. If the length of the cap
is longer than the surface to be sealed then the cap can
be cut back but without removing any sealant.
End cap
End caps are to be used for sealing the
PUR against water ingress at the transition to COOL-FIT ABS.
COOL-FIT Plus shrink tape for underground applications
This tape is specially made for underground applications. The integrated butyl surface guarantees a vaporand watertight sealing.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus nipple
Sealing mass
COOL-FIT Plus shrink sleeve, long
End caps
Sealing the PUR should be achieved using a chemically

compatible sealing mass to COOL-FIT ABS. GF Piping
Systems offers a sealing mass. If silicon products are
prohibited then nonsolvent based glues can be used.
Chemical compatability can also be checked by GF Piping Systems.
This shrink sleeve is 285mm long and can be used to
seal connections with different diameter on the outer
jacket. The table below shows which dimension can be
sealed using which long shrink sleeve. NOTE: the sealing tape should be applied to both outer diameters of
the PE jacket pipe.
842
Valve insulation
GF Piping System offers tailor made insulation sets for

the ball valves type 546. The sets consist of UV resistant PE foam with a shrink tape jacket and are available
from d25 up to d110mm.
843
Technical Data
General comments to plastics orientated
pipeline design and installation
Pressure-temperature diagram for COOL-FIT ABS

Plus pipes and fittings 25-years-values incorporating the safety factor (with water as medium).
The design and installation of thermoplastic pipe systems requires designers and installers alike to take into account the fact that plastics have different physical characteristics to metal. Although CF is a very robust systems, nevertheless, care should be taken during handling and transport to avoid damage. Also thermoplastics have certain physical characteristics, such
as a high expansion coefficient, which need to be taken
into account in the design phase.
GF Piping Systems has been successfully developing
and selling plastic pipe systems into a spectrum of high
performance installations, such as highly concentrated chemicals, for over 50 years, and experience has
shown that when engineers and installers take into account the advice given in our technical literature plastics
are an economical and reliable alternative to metals.
As a general rule for designing and installing plastics
one of the major differences is that plastics can and
should be allowed to move after commissioning i.e.
move under the influence of temperature fluctuation and
pressure changes. For instance using pipe brackets that
allow horizontal movement and not clamping the system
in place is a must for plastic piping installations.
The following technical information covers the fundamental information required to ensure an economical and trouble free installation: Not all details however are published in this document, for more detailed information or if you have a specific question
please ask your local GF Piping Systems company,
consult www.coolfit.georgfischer.com or email us at
info@coolfit.georgfischer.com for advice if you have any
questions.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pressure-temperature

diagram
Pressure ratings for thermoplastic pipe are always quoted for water at 20 C/68F. It can be used at higher temperatures but it is a fundamental principle in thermoplastic pipework that if the working temperature is increased
then the working pressure must be reduced.
The diagram shows for COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipes and
fittings the maximum permissible pressures at various
temperatures up to the maximum allowable working
temperature of +40 C/104F. The diagram is based on
an ambient temperature of 20 C/68F with water as the
medium. A safety factor of 1.8 is incorporated into all
calculations with a minimum life time of 25 years.
Temperature in C, F
Chemical resistance
COOL-FIT is generally resistant to most diluted inorganic acids, bases and salts and to most animal oils and
fats. It is not resistant to organic solvents, pure alcohol,
petrol, acetic acid and vegetable oils.
For working temperature below 0C/32F, an antifreeze
has to be used in the water to prevent freezing. The
above pressure temperature curve applies only when
the medium is water, therefore for non-pure water mediums a derating factor has to be applied to the above
curve. This is standard procedure for all plastic piping
systems.
Derating factors
Inorganic salt solutions: F=1
Organic salt solutions: F=1.25
Diluted Glycols (max 50%):F=1.7
diluted alcohol (max 50%): F=1.7
For more details regarding these derating values for
chemical solutions please consult GF Piping Systems.
Ice Slurry
Ice slurry is a mixture of ice particles (0.01-0.03 mm
width), water and antifreeze agent, usually an alcohol,
salt or glycol. GF Piping Systems has undertaken extensive testing of ice slurry with CF and give recommendations regarding for example pipeline layout, flow rates
and pressure drops. Please ask your local GF Piping
Systems representative for details.
Glycol Solutions
COOL-FIT can be used with diluted glycol solutions
(max. 50%), however a derating factor of 1.7applies to
the standard water based pressure-temperature curve.
The following coolants can be used with the COOL-FIT
system regarding chemical resistance: ANTIFROGEN
L,N, TYFOCOR, DOWFROST.
Example: water diluted glycol
For example if the medium is a waterdiluted glycol solutions 50% (max. concentration allowable for COOL-FIT
ABS) then a derating factor of 0.6 applies to the standard pressure temperature curve. So at -10 C/150F
for a minimum lifespan of 25 years the maximum allowable working pressure is 0.6 x 11.8bar = 7.1bar
844
Pressure-temperature diagram for pre-insulated

ABS pipes and fittings 25-years-values incorporating the safety factor (with waterdiluted glycol as
medium).
to metal pipe (copper, stainless steel or steel). The surface roughness of the metal system can be entered individually, for example if the user would like to compensate for future encrustation and corrosion of the metal
pipe.
Many other calculation options exist, including for example energy gain comparison calculation along a piping system, pipe dimensioning, temperature loss along
a given piece of pipe etc. All available via the internet
page.
PPermissible pressurein bar, psi

Organic Salt Solutions

These mediums are usually potassium formate or acetate water based solutions, with low viscosities at low
temperatures. Trade name examples: HYCOOL, TEMPER, ANTIFROGEN KF, FREEZIUM, ZITREC. COOLFIT can be used with these types of mediums; however,
a derating factor of 1.25 applies to the standard water
based pressure/temperature curve. Please consult GF
Piping Systems for details. It is important that the complete pipe, irrespective of pipe system material is properly devented both during filling and commissioning. It is
very important to follow the manufacturers instructions
for pipeline design and handling of these mediums.
COOL-FIT On-Line calculation tool

For further more detailed technical information as well
as references and product range documentation please
consult the COOL-FIT homepage or the GF Piping Systems homepage:
www.cool-fit.georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.com
The COOL-FIT homepage offers a free of charge, realtime on-line calculation tool to calculate all the important
characteristics of a piping system. Available in 9 different languages all the standard fluids and concentrations
thereof on the market are available as options.
The planning engineer or consultant can thus calculate
his core system parameters using this tool for COOLFIT ensuring optimal dimensioning and design of the
system.
Core functions which can be calculated are shown at
the top of the menu, once chosen then the various subfunctions appear below in a drop-down menu. The core
functions are: pressure drop, condensation, heat loss,
pipe dimensioning, pipe support distances, contraction
and temperature.
For example under the Pressure Drop function the user has 5 options. He can calculate individual products in
all dimensions, for example pipe, fittings or valves. The
network option allows the user to calculate the pressure
drop in complete pipeline consisting of different dimensions and products. The last option, comparison, allows
the pressure drop along COOL-FIT pipe to be compared
845
846
Installation
COOL-FIT ABS Plus fixed point
Fixed points are created using the special COOL-FIT
ABS Plusfix point.The product consists of two components namely a welding band and a pipe bracket.
Electro-fusion welded band as permanent connection
to transmit the forces that occur in the pipe to the fixed
point. The delivered pipe brackets are needed to deliver welding pressure during installation and give stability during operation. For welding, use an MSA 250, 300,
350, 400 or commercially availabe 220 V fusion machines. If you use an MSA fusion machine from GF Piping Systems, use the 799 350 339 adapter. Please take
note of the maximum allowed forces for this version in
the table below.
Outside diameter
D (mm)
Maximum force
F (kN)
90
1.5
110
2.0
125
3.5
140
5.5
160
9.0
180
10.0
225
10.0
250
10.0
280
10.0
315
10.0
355
10.0
Remark: Fixed point brackets and cross braces have to

be calculated and obtained by the installer. They are not
included in the fixed point set from GF.
No need for pipe brackets for cold insulation

Due to the excellent characteristics of the COOL-FIT
ABS Pluspipes no special pipe brackets for cold insulation are needed.
Plastic to Metal Connections

Fundamentally three options are available for plastic to
metal connections, namely; threads, flanged connection
and unions.
GF Piping Systems recommends that wherever possible
mechanical connections are used (unions and flanges)
together with a located gasket such as O-Ring.
Adaptor fittings
The adaptor fittings for connecting plastic piping systems and metal threading offer greatest possible flexibility for installation with the combined socket/spigot on the plastic end. The metal thread can be sealed
either with hemp or PTFE-tape. The adaptor fitting is
sealed with an EPDM O-ring. It serves also as protection against distrotion to avoid damaging the plastic during installation. Compared to the usual adaptor unions
the special connecting technology with snap ring guarantees increased leaktightness also while temperature
change and during vibration. In addition to the classic
transition to metal pipes this fittings can also be used for
connecting pressure gauges.
Note: To avoid electrochemical corrosion in transitions
to non-ferrous metals, brass connections must be used.
847
Union Connections
This is the most reliable and cost effective method to
connect metal to plastic.
GF Piping Systems has a whole range of transition
unions with O-Rings specially designed to compensate
for the changes in length which can occur due to temperature fluctuations. See COOL-FITproduct range for
details of the copper, brass, stainless steel and malleable iron transition unions available.
ABS
Located
O-ring
Copper
Flange connections
Flange connections up to DN300 are also possible. For
bolt torques, tightening sequences etc please refer to
standard the GF Piping Systems Plastics Technical
Handbook.
GF Piping Systemss new revolutionary PN16 PP- V
flange is light weight, with location stubs to aid installation and is designed to avoid high stresses during tightening. GF Piping Systems recommends this type of
flange for use with plastic flange connections.
All mechanical connections including flanges should be
retightened after commissioning if the working temperature is lower than the temperature during installation.
Threaded Connections
GF Piping Systems recommends avoiding threaded connections for plastic wherever possible, solvent cementing is a very reliable and speedy method
of jointing and should be preferred to threaded
connections.Mechanical wrenches should not be used
to tighten the joint. Namely strap type wrenches prevent
damage to the plastic components.
For sealing threaded joints the mating parts should always be parallel to tapered. In the COOL-FIT range only the plastic female thread with reinforced ring should
be used for connection to metal threads. For sealing
we recommend PTFE tape. 2 layers of tape applied in
a clockwise direction, the components should then be
joined carefully to avoid damage to the plastic thread.
Alternatively also thread sealing cord Henkel Tangit UniLock or Loctite 55 and/or thread sealing paste Loctite
5331 can be used. Please consider the appropriate installation guidelines of the manufacturer. If other sealing
materials are used, compatibility with the plastics to be
used must be checked first.
848
Measuring Equipment in an COOL-FIT ABS

Plus System
Measuring Equipment in an COOL-FIT ABS Plus
Piping Systems
Special installation fittings are developed to connect different types of sensores. The branch with a " Rp female thread can be used for pressure and temperature
sensors.
De-Venting or De-aeration
It is always important to remove air from any piping system, for salt solutions this is particularly important due to
their corrosive nature. Summary of Deaeration process,
always fill the system slowly from the bottom up
induce a vacuum in the system before filling
install manual and/or automatic deaerators at the
highest points in the system
long horizontal runs should be installed at a slight gradient
avoid low points i.e. Uconfigurations where air can be
trapped
install deaerators with a buffer zone of fluid below
them, see sketch below
always observe the medium manufacturers specific
recommendation for filling, mixing etc as secondary
fluids differ in their composition
Air release valve
ABS reduced
ABS tee 90
SIGNET Flow Measuring Equipment
GF Piping Systems Signet offer paddle wheel flow measuring equipment which can be used to very cost effectively measure the flow of your medium, with digital and
analogue display devices including cabinet housings for
installation in display units.
These SIGNET flow sensors can be installed using specially designed installation fittings, ask GF Piping Systems for installation fittings details.
Insulation to avoid Dew on COOL-FIT

To calculate the necessary thickness of insulation required on COOL-FIT ABS to avoid Dew or Condensation can be done via GF Piping Systemss online cooling
calculation program, see www.coolfit.georgfischer.com
Under the button condensation you will be asked to
input the system parameters and type of insulation. The
results are guideline values based on tradename published data and general physical data regarding types of
insulation. We recommend the user consults the insulation manufacturer for detailed specific advice regarding
the insulation when not using COOLFIT ABS Plus.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus: Condensation, Yes or No?
COOLFIT ABS Plushas set thicknesses of insulation,
once again via www.COOL-FIT.georgfischer.com the
user can input his system parameters and the program
will identify whether using COOLFIT ABS Plus dew will
appear on the outside of the pipe or not.
Other installation topics

Foaming ABS with PUR On-Site
There are various types of PUR on the market using

different types of activators to initiate the foaming process. All are however an exothermic reaction, i.e. generate heat, usually reaching temperatures of about 120
C/248F, which can be dangerous for thermoplastics.
COOL-FIT ABS has a vicat point, softening point of 98
C/208F, this means that any temperatures reached
above this have a detrimental effect on the COOL-FIT
ABS. Also usually the foaming onsite takes place in an
enclosed volume which then causes external pressures
on the component.
For these reasons we recommend that COOLFIT ABS fittings and pipe are not insulated using PUR foaming onsite.
COOLFIT ABS Plusis foamed under controlled conditions ensuring that the quality of the ABS is not affected
by the PUR foaming process.
PUR has a thermal conductivity of 0.026 W/m.K and the

thickness is +/35mm/1.38" for all dimensions so the
system parameters need to be extreme for dew to appear on the outside of COOLFIT ABS Plus.
For example:
Medium temperature:
50 C/-58F
Temperature of the surrounding
+20 C/68F
Relative atmospheric humidity
75%
Wind velocity:
1 m/s
Under the above circumstance there will be no condensation on the pipes.

De-Frosting
Many secondary refrigeration loops are not only used
for normal and low temperature cooling but are also
used for defrosting. GF Piping Systems has many years
of good experience with the use ofCOOL-FIT in such
dual defrost / cooling systems without any detrimental
effects to the system.
Insulating ABS
ABS is not chemically resistant to solvents. Solvents

are used in the jointing process to soften and swell the
COOL-FIT ABS to create a weld. This use of solvent
takes place under controlled conditions and uses double
wall thickness by inserting pipe in fitting.
Any other contact of solvents with COOL-FIT ABS
should be avoided. Some insulation materials on the
market use solvent based glues to position the insulation, as per manufacturers instructions only the insulation itself should be glued together.
Any excess glue which may come into contact directly with the COOL-FIT ABS should be removed with a
cloth.
If insulation has been glued directly to the pipe this does
not mean that the system is now dangerous. It can however only be determined on a case to case basis if the
situation will have a detrimental effect on the performance of the pipe. Contact GF Piping Systems if you
require more information on this subject.
849
Heat transfer coefficient of pipes: COOL-FIT ABS

Plus
Pipe diameter U-Value
mm
COOL-FIT ABS
Plus
W/m K
R-Value
COOL-FIT ABS
Plus
m K/W
25
0.13
7.7
32
0.16
6.3
40
0.17
5.9
50
0.21
4.8
63
0.25
4.0
75
0.27
3.7
90
0.29
3.4
110
0.34
2.9
140
0.35
2.9
160
0.37
2.7
200
0.50
2.0
225
0.50
2.0
250
0.49
2.1
280
0.48
2.1
315
0.48
2.1
to avoid damage to the outside surface of the pipe, for

instance no dragging along the ground. Avoid pipe overhangs when stored as this will cause the pipe to bend.
UV Resistance
Most plastics suffer some loss of physical properties
when exposed to UV light, only PE Black, used also for
the outer jacket of the COOL-FIT ABS Plusblack, is UV
resistant.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus underground installation.
COOL-FIT ABS Plus can be used underground. We recommend for closing the gap our shrink tape for underground applications. Standard guidelines for installation of plastic pipe systems should be followed. Please
pay attention to local regulations. In general, trenches
should not be less than 1 meter deeper.
The pipe should be laid in a sand bed, all large pieces
of rock and sharp objects must be removed. Compressed sand should be used to pack the pipe.
Handling
How to carry pipes after connection with COOL-FIT
ABS Plus nipples:
Pipes must be kept straight!
The pipe zone has to be designed according to planning fundamentals and static calculation. The area between trench sole and side fill is referred to as bedding.
By exchanging ground a load carrying bedding has to
be created. Usually, the minimum bedding is according
to EN1610 a = 100mm, in case of bedrock or compacted underground a= 150mm. Further, there are demands
concerning the filling material. Materials with elements
bigger than:
22 mm at DN 200
40 mm at DN >200 until DN 600
should not be used
The upper bedding layer b is assessed from static calculations. It is important to assure no cavities below the
pipe. The bedding dissipates all loads from the pipe
evenly into the ground. For this reason theCOOL-FIT
ABS Pluspipe has to lay evenly on the bedding over its
complete length. The upper end of the pipe zone is defined according to EN 1610 as 150mm above the pipe
apex respectively 100mm above the pipe connection.
When filling and compacting the cover depth and the
main backfill one has to make sure not to damage the
pipe.
Storage
All plastic pipes including preinsulated plastic pipes, i.e.
COOL-FIT ABS Plusshould be stacked on a flat surface
free from sharp edges, such as stones or building debris for instance. During handling care should be taken
850
COOL-FIT ABS Plus pipes have a higher stiffness and

weight than COOL-FI ABS. It is therefore recommended
to perform joining in the trench itself wherever possible
to avoid unnecessary stressing of the joints. It should
not be necessary to use any mechanical expansion elbows in the system design underground. Please consult
GF for technical advice.
The Environment
COOL-FITis halogen free. The materials used in
COOL-FIT ABS Plusnamely ABS, PE and PUR are
all recyclable materials. GF Piping Systems as a company aims to understand and meet customer requirements regarding the environment. We design products
and develop our processes taking into account the environment and its needs. TEWI, ODP and GWP values
and reports exist for COOL-FIT ABS Plus, please see
www.coolfit.georgfischer.com
flammable rating). The self ignition temperature is 350

C/662F. Suitable firefighting agents are water, foam,
carbon dioxide or powder.
PUR Flammability
Rigid polyurethanebased foams are effective insulation
materials commonly used in the construction industry.
Polyurethane foam will burn if exposed to flames. The
combustibility characteristics vary with chemical composition. Unlike expanded polystyrene (eps), polyurethane
does not melt. It flashes into flames between 427C/
800 F and 454C/850 F, and only chars rather than
melts at temperatures below that range. The charring
may in fact help protect the adjacent foam. Some studies have indicated that Douglas Fir was more toxic than
polyurethane foam. In a paper presented at the 1985
Society of the Plastics Industry, annual meeting on
polyurethane foam. Please consult GF Piping Systems
for further details.
Fire Wall Penetrations
Flammability
According to UL94, ABS has an HB (Horizontal Burning) flammability coefficient and falls into building material class B2 (conventional inflammable, nondripping)
according to DIN 41021. Fundamently, toxic substance
are released by all burning process. Carbon monoxide
is generally the most important. When ABS burns, primarily carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and water are
formed. Tests have shown that the relative toxicity of
the products of combustion are similar or even lower
than those of natural products such as wood, wool and
cotton. ABS combustion gases are not corrosive. That
the burning nevertheless forms soot, smoke develops
during combustion. Suitable firefighting agents are water, foam and carbon dioxide.
To seal a combustible pipe penetrating a fire wall it is

necessary to use locally approved sealing systems to
preserve the integrity of the fire wall. There are various
international and local companies offering solutions for
plain combustible pipe (e.g. plastic pipe). The company
Kuhn have tested their product series ROKU R AWM
II to the EN1366-3 (European Standard for Fire resistance tests for service installations Part 3 Penetration
seals). Test data is available from the company Kuhn
which can be extrapolated by local test authorities to
show the integrity of the solution.
For product information see www.kuhnbrandschutz.com KUHN Brandschutz Systems Solutions for building services
PE Flammability
The following classifications in accordance with differing combustion standards: According to UL94, PE is
classified as HB (Horizontal Burning) and according
to DIN 534381 as K2. According to DIN 4102 part 1
and NORM B3800 part 1, PE is listed as B2 (normally flammable). In the French classification of building
materials, polyethylene corresponds to M3 (of average
851
Determining of COOL-FIT ABS Plus changes in length

Table outside applications
=
L = 25m
0.09mm/mK
L = 50m
L = 100m
L = 150m
L = 200m
T [K]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
11
23
45
68
90
10
23
45
90
135
180
15
34
68
135
203
270
20
45
90
180
270
360
25
56
113
225
338
450
30
68
135
270
405
540
35
79
158
315
473
630
40
90
180
360
540
720
45
101
203
405
608
810
50
113
225
450
675
900
It is a recommended value. Exact values can be calculated using GFs online tool (www.coolfit.georgfischer.com) or ask your local GF representative.
Table inside applications

=
L = 25m
0.07mm/mK
L = 50m
L = 100m
L = 150m
L = 200m
T [K]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
L [mm]
18
35
53
70
10
18
35
70
105
140
15
26
53
105
158
210
20
35
70
140
210
280
25
44
88
175
263
350
30
53
105
210
315
420
35
61
123
245
368
490
40
70
140
280
420
560
45
79
158
315
473
630
50
88
175
350
525
700
It is a recommended value. Exact values can be calculated using GFs online tool (www.coolfit.georgfischer.com) or ask your local GF representative.
Flexible length for COOL-FIT ABS Plus

For calculation the change in lengthL ofCOOL-FIT
ABS Plus pipes the following temperatures are needed:
Installation temperature
Minimum media temperature
Maximum media temperature
Minimum ambient temperature
Maximum ambient temperature
Please use ouronline-tool to calculate the applicable
change in length out of these temperatures:
www.cool-fit.georgfischer.com
852
The LB value for a given L and dimension can be read

from the table below,L and LB values are in mm.
COOL-FIT L
ABS Plus
COOL-FIT L
ABS Plus
d/D
10
20
30
40
50
d/D
100
150
200
300
25/90
800
1100
1350
1550
1750
25/90
2450
3000
3500
4250
32/90
800
1100
1350
1550
1750
32/90
2450
3000
3500
4250
40/110
850
1200
1500
1700
1950
40/110
2750
3350
3850
4700
50/110
850
1200
1500
1700
1950
50/110
2750
3350
3850
4700
63/125
900
1300
1600
1850
2050
63/125
2900
3550
4100
5050
75/140
950
1400
1700
1950
2200
75/140
3100
3750
4350
5350
90/160
1050
1450
1800
2100
2350
90/160
3300
4050
4650
5700
110/180
1100
1550
1900
2200
2450
110/180
3500
4250
4950
6050
140/225
1250
1750
2150
2450
2750
140/225
3900
4800
5500
6750
160/250
1300
1850
2250
2600
2900
160/250
4150
5050
5850
7150
200/280
1450
2050
2550
2900
3250
200/280
4600
5650
6550
8000
225/315
1550
2200
2700
3100
3450
225/315
4900
6000
6950
8500
250/355
1650
2300
2850
3250
3650
250/355
5150
6350
7300
8950
280/400
1750
2450
3000
3450
3850
280/400
5450
6700
7750
9500
315/450
1850
2600
3200
3650
4100
315/450
5800
7100
8200
10050
COOL-FIT L
ABS Plus
d/D
60
70
80
90
25/90
1900
2050
2200
2340
32/90
1900
2050
2200
2340
40/110
2100
2300
2450
2600
50/110
2100
2300
2450
2600
63/125
2250
2450
2600
2750
75/140
2400
2500
2750
2900
90/160
2550
2750
2950
3100
110/180
2700
2900
3100
3300
140/225
3000
3250
3500
3700
160/250
3200
3450
3700
3900
200/280
3600
3850
4150
4400
225/315
3800
4100
4400
4650
250/355
4000
4300
4600
4900
280/400
4250
4600
4900
5200
315/450
4500
4850
5200
5500
853
Comparision pipe diameter

DN, plastics/metal, mm/inch
Plastics
Metal
Chrome
steel CN
da mm
di COOL-FIT
mm
di PE100,
SDR11 mm
di PB mm
DN
Inch
da mm
da mm
10
1/8"
10.2
12
1/4"
13.5
16
12.4
11.6
10
3/8"
17.2
15
20
15.4
16.0
14.4
15
1/2"
21.3
18
25
20.4
20.4
20.4
20
3/4"
26.9
22
32
28.2
26.2
26.2
25
1"
33.7
28
40
35.2
32.6
32.6
32
1 1/4"
42.4
35
50
44.0
40.8
40.8
40
1 1/2"
48.3
42
63
55.4
51.4
51.4
50
2"
60.3
54
75
65.8
61.4
61.4
65
2 1/2"
75.3
76.1
90
79.2
73.6
73.6
80
3"
88.9
88.9
110
96.8
90.0
90.0
100
4"
114.3
108
125
102.2
100
140
121.6
114.6
125
5"
140.3
160
139.0
130.8
150
6"
168.3
180
147.2
150
200
173.8
163.6
200
7"
193.7
225
195.4
184.0
200
8"
219.1
250
230.8
204.6
250
9"
244.5
280
258.6
229.2
250
10"
273.0
315
290.8
257.8
300
12"
323.9
854
COOL-FIT Product Range

Background Information to the COOL-FIT Product Range from GF Piping Systems
COOL-FIT has been developed closely with the market

to fulfil all the essential requirements of a secondary refrigeration piping system, namely:
complete reliability
lowest possible energy gains
low maintenance long life-span
simple cost effective installation
COOL-FIT ABS Plus combines pre-insulated pipe and
fittings with normal standard plastic piping with a complete range of the necessary valves for manual or automatic actuation. The complete system is designed to
optimise the efficiency, installation costs and life-span of
the secondary piping system.
Examples of application areas are in commercial as well
as industrial refrigeration, air-conditioning and industrial
cooling water.
Examples of end-user markets are: supermarkets,
breweries, cold stores and numerous types of food
manufacturing plants, as well as hospitals and pharmaceutical plants.
855
856
System iJOINT
General Information
-- Benefits of compression fittings

-- Application
-- Features
System specification
-- Range, materials, standards
Technical data
-- General comments to plastics oriented pipeline design

-- Pressure-temperature diagram
-- Flange connections
-- Adaptors and threaded fittings
Hydraulic calculation and pressure loss

-- Hydraulic calculation
-- Pressure loss in straight pipes
-- Pressure loss in fittings
-- General
-- Coupling d 20 - 63 mm
-- Coupling d 75 - 110 mm
-- Repair coupling d 20 - 110 mm
Page
858
858
858
860
861
861
861
861
863
863
863
864
864
865
865
857
System iJOINT
General Information
Benefits of compression fittings
iJOINT polypropylene compression fittings combinethe
two main advantages of the mechanical connection systems, push-fit and compression: easy installationas
a push-fitand safe as a traditional compression fitting
(mechanical compensation). iJOINT is used inwater applications.
The iJOINT range contains straight and reducing joiners, tees, elbows, threaded connectors and end caps,
ranging from d20 to d110 mm and threads from 1/2" to
4".
Fast and easy installation
The clamp ring made of polyacetal does not come into contact with the pipe during insertion of the pipe and
there is no need to disassemble the iJOINT fitting before installation. This combined with a defined stop position for the nut and that the nut can be fixed with less
than one turn makes installationeasy.
High resistance and no corrosion
The special coated NBR gasket which is approved
for potable water in combination with the unique body
design ensure high performance in terms of pressure
and pull-out resistance, vacuum as well as suction. The
body made of polypropylene is completely corrosionfree and guarantees top performance as well as high resistance to stress in long lifetimes. The fittings are suitable for applications under and above ground thanks to
very high resistance to UV rays.
Safe design
The special design allows perfect resistance to water
hammer and pull-out forces without having a negative
impact on the connection lifetime. The stop ring for the
nut works as a helpful indicator of a proper nut closing
position and the nut does not loosen by itself due to an
anti-rotation nut locking system. The clamp ring and
all other components are contained in the body so that
they cannot be lost even when disassembling the fitting
or during transportation.
858
Application
The iJOINT system is designed for new installations as
well as renovations or extensions of existing water lines.
iJOINT is also suited for useas house connections and
service lines. In addition, iJOINT is used for bypass systems, where temporarily laid lines need to be disassembled in a quick and easy way, leaving the coupler intact
by simply unscrewing and sliding the joint back from the
pipe.
1
Water Distribution Lines
House Connections and Service Lines
Pressure Sewage
2
Industrial Applications
Mining Industry
3
Leisure Parks
Golf Courses
Camping Grounds
4
Farming
Greenhouses
High-end Irrigation
Features
iJOINT compression fittings have been developed for
use in water and drinking water systems, assuring a
quicker and easier installation compared to a traditional
compression fitting.
The coated sealing system makes this product both
unique and long-lasting. iJOINT comprises the benefits
of plastics: no rust and no incrustation, lightweight construction, high pressure resistance, excellent cost-benefit ratio with a life cycle of at least 50 years.
1 Nut
Ready for pipe insertion, tightened with approx. one turn
2 Gasket
Coated sealing system for more safety
3 Clamp ring
No interference during pipe insertion and removal
4 Stop ring
Defines sealing-locking position for the nut
5 Nut locking
When tightened, two protrusions prevent accidental unscrewing of the nut over time
6 Transport fixation
Avoids accidental disassembling of the fitting during
transportation.
859
System specification
Range, materials, standards
iJOINT compression fittings are suitable with the followingtypes of polyethylene pipes:
PE HD, PE 80, PE 100 and PEX-a in SDR 11 and 17.
The fitting is ready to be installed out of the box without
any preparation. The pipe can be inserted directly without loosening the nut or disassembling the fitting.
Pressure range
16 bar resistance for the complete range of iJOINT fittingsd20 to d110 mm (3" and 4" female threads = 10
bar).
Temperature range
-10 C to +45 C
Materials
Body (and thrust ring from d75 to d110 mm):
UV stabilized polypropylene (PP)
Nut:
UV stabilized blue polypropylene (PP)
Clamp ring:
Acetalic resin (POM)
Gasket:
Black food-safe rubber NBR suitable for potable water;
70 sh. PTFE coated
Reinforcement ring (for female threads):
Stainless steel AISI 430
Regulations for drinking water
W270 and KTW (Germany)
ATA (Netherlands)
DM 174-06/04/2004 (Italy)
Global Mark (Australia)
ACS (France)
Approvals
DVGW (Germany)
IIP (Italy)
SVGW (Switzerland)
KIWA (Netherlands)
ACS (France)
Global Mark (Australia)
SITAC (Sweden)
STF (Finland)
ETA (Denmark)
BIGGFORSK (Norway)
Standards
For PE pipes:
EN 12201; ISO 11922-1; DIN 8074; AS/NZS 4130;ISO
4427; UNI 7990; ISO 12162
Threads
EN 10226 (ISO 7-1); BS 21; AS 1722.1
Flanges
EN1092-1
Test standards
ISO 14236; DIN 8076-3; AS/NZS 4129; BRL K534/03
UNI; ISO 3501; ISO 3503; ISO 3458; ISO 3459; VP609
860
Technical data
General comments to plastics oriented
pipeline design
The design and installation of thermoplastic pipe systems requires designers and installers alike to take into account the fact that plastics have different physical
characteristics to metal. Although GF Piping Systemsoffers very robust systems, nevertheless, care should
be taken during handling and transport to avoid damage. Also thermoplastics have certain physical characteristics, such as a high expansion coefficient, which
need to be taken into account in the design phase.
GF Piping Systems has been successfully developing
and providing plastic pipe systems into a spectrum of
high performance installations for over 50 years, and
experience has shown that when engineers and installers take into account the advice given in our technical literature plastics are an economical and reliable alternative to metals. As a general rule for designing and
installing plastics one of the major differences is that
plastics can and should be allowed to move after commissioning i.e. move under the influence of temperature
fluctuation and pressure changes. For instance using
pipe brackets that allow horizontal movement and not
clamping the system in place is a must for plastic piping
installations.
The following technical information covers the fundamental information required to ensure an economical and trouble free installation: Not all details
however are published in this document, for more
detailed information or if you have a specific question please ask your local GF Piping Systems company, consult www.georgfischer.com or email us at
info@georgfischer.com.
Pressure ratings for thermoplastic pipe are always quoted for water at 20 C. It can be used at higher temperatures but it is a fundamental principle in thermoplastic
pipework that if the working temperature is increased
then the working pressure must be reduced.
The diagram shows for PE pipes and PP fittings the
maximum permissible pressures at various temperatures up to the maximum allowable working temperature
of +45 C. The diagram is based on an ambient temperature of 20 C with water as the medium. A safety factor
is incorporated into all calculations with a minimum life
time of 50 years.
Pressure-temperature diagram for system

iJOINT (with water as medium).
Temperature in C, F
For working temperatures below 0 C an antifreeze

has to be used in the water to prevent freezing. The
above pressure temperature curve applies only when
the medium is water, therefore for non pure water mediums a derating factor has to be applied to the above
curve. This is standard procedure for all plastic piping
systems.
Flange connections
Flanged joint with metal flange
Material:steelST37-2
(1.0038 or S235JR)
The flange can be connected to thePE or PEX-a pipe
without disassembling.The gasket is PTFE coated
NBR, and has drinking water quality.
Dimensions
[inch]
internal
external
hole circle
1 1/2
80
150
110
99.6
160
125
2 1/2
119
186.5
145.5
134.8
204.5
160
156.3
220
180
For more detailed information, please refer to our Technical Handbook for Industrial applications.
Adaptors and threaded fittings

verlinken auf IS
bergangsfittings mit rostfreiem Verstrkungsring
A2 und zylindrischem Rohr-Innengewinde Rp
bergangsfittings mit rostfreiem Verstrkungsring A2
und zylindrischem Rohr-Innengewinde Rp ermglichen
sowohl die Herstellung von Verbindungen zwischen
Kunststoff- und Metallrohrleitungen als auch zwischen
Kunststoffrohrleitungen untereinander. Im Folgenden sind einige Beispiele fr solche bergangsfittings
aufgezeigt:
861
Hinweise zur Montage von bergangs- und Gewindefittings

Bei der Montage ist auf eine besonders spannungsarme
Verlegung der Rohrleitung zu achten. An biegebeanspruchten Stellen der Rohrleitung ist die Verwendung von bergangsfittings zu vermeiden. UnterliegenRohrleitungen grossen Temperaturwechseln, sind
bergangsverschraubungen zu bevorzugen.
Achtung: Ein evtl. vorhandener Grat imGewindebereich von Metallfittings muss vorher entfernt werden, damit die Kunststofffittings nicht
beschdigt werden.
Merke: Metallrohrleitungen drfen nur in

bergangsfittings mit Verstrkungsring
eingeschraubt werden!
bergangsfittings mit konischem Aussengewinde R

(Nippel)
Die bergangsverbindungen mit konischem Rohr-Aussengewinde R (Nippel) sind mit Ausnahme des Doppelnippels sowohl fr die Verbindung Kunststoff-Kunststoff
als auch Kunststoff-Metall geeignet.
bergangs- und Gewindefittings aus Kunststoffwerden zunchst von Hand eingeschraubt. Gewalt darf
dabeikeinesfalls angewendet werden. Unter Verwendung eines geeigneten Werkzeuges werden die Fittings anschliessend weiter eingeschraubt, bis ca. 1 - 2
Gewindegnge noch sichtbar sind.
Bei bergangs- und Gewindefittings aus Kunststoff
empfehlen wir, zum Dichten PTFE-Band (z. B. Teflon)
zu verwenden. Alternativ knnen auch Gewindedichtfaden Henkel Tangit Uni-Lockoder Loctite 55 bzw.
Gewindedichtpaste Loctite 5331 eingesetzt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie dazudie entsprechenden Verarbeitungsrichtlinien des Herstellers.
Bei Verwendung anderer Dichtmittel ist unbedingt
die Vertrglichkeit mit dem vorgesehenen Kunststoff
abzuklren.
Achtung: Keinen Hanf verwenden! Mit Hanf
besteht die Gefahr, dass die Kunststofffittings
beim Montieren berlastet werden bzw. das
Kunststoffgewinde beschdigt wird. Ausserdem
ist Hanf je nach verwendetem Medium nicht
chemikalienbestndig.
Bitte beachten Sie die detaillierten Angaben zu den

einzelnen Produkten im jeweiligen Lieferprogramm.
Gewindefittings (ohne Verstrkungsring) mit zylindrischem Rohr-Innengewinde Rp
Gewindefittings (ohne Verstrkungsring) aus den Werkstoffen ABS, PVC-U und PVDF mit zylindrischem RohrInnengewinde Rp ermglichen die Herstellung von
Verbindungen zwischen Kunststoffrohrleitungen untereinander. Im Folgenden sind einige Beispiele fr solche
bergangsfittings aufgezeigt:
862
Hydraulic calculation and pressure

loss
Formstck Typ
90 Bogen
Widerstandsbeiwert
Biegeradius R
-Wert
1.0 * d
0.51
Pressure loss in straight pipes
1.5 * d
0.41
2.0 * d
0.34
4.0 * d
0.23
Biegeradius R
-Wert
1.0 * d
0.34
1.5 * d
0.27
2.0 * d
0.20
4.0 * d
0.15
verlinken auf IS
Bei der Ermittlung der Druckverluste in geraden

Rohrstrecken unterscheidet man zwischen laminaren
und turbulenten Strmungen. Massgebend ist dabei die
sogenannte Reynoldszahl (Re). Der Wechsel von laminar zu turbulent erfolgt bei der kritischen Reynoldszahl
Rekrit = 2320.
Laminare Strmung tritt in der Praxis insbesondere
beim Transport von viskosen Medien auf, wie z. B.
Schmierle. In den meisten Anwendungsfllen, so
auch bei wsserigen Durchflussstoffen, handelt es
sich um turbulente Strmungen mit einer wesentlich
gleichmssigeren Geschwindigkeitsverteilung ber dem
Rohrquerschnitt als bei der laminaren Strmung.
Der Druckverlust in einer geraden Rohrstrecke ist
umgekehrt proportional zum Rohrdurchmesser und ermittelt sich wie folgt:
Hinweis: Fr praxisbezogene berschlagsrechnungen

(d. h. glatte Kunststoffrohre und turbulente Strmung)
gengt es, die hydraulischen Verluste von geraden
Rohrleitungsstrecken mit = 0.02 zu ermitteln.
wobei:
pR
Druckverlust in der geraden Rohrstrecke in bar
Rohrreibungszahl
Lnge der geraden Rohrstrecke in m
di
Innendurchmesser der Rohrleitung in mm
Dichte des Durchflussstoffes in kg/m

(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
Durchflussgeschwindigkeit in m/s
45 Bogen
90 Winkel
1.2
45 Winkel
0.3
T-Stck
1.3
Reduktion (Kontraktion)
0.5
Reduktion (Erweiterung)
1.0
Verbindungen (Flansche,
Verschraubungen, Schweissung zwischen zwei Rohren
d >90 mm: 0.1

20 d 90 mm: 1.0bis 0.1:
*)
d20: 1.0
d25: 0.9
d32: 0.8
d40: 0.7
d50: 0.6
d63: 0.4
d75: 0.3
d90: 0.1
*) Fr eine detailliertere Betrachtung muss bei einem

T-Stck zwischen Stromvereinigung und Stromtrennung unterschieden werden. Die Literatur nennt dazu
Wertefr bis zu einem Maximalwert von 1.3. Da in der
Regel der Anteil des T-Stckes am gesamten Druckverlust einer Rohrleitung sehr klein ist, gengt es in den
meisten Fllen mit = 1.3 zu rechnen.
Berechnung des Druckverlustes
Fr die Berechnung des Druckverlustes aller Fittinge
einer Rohrleitung ist die Summe aller Einzelverluste,
d. h., die Summe aller -Werte zu ermitteln. Der Druckverlust kann dann unmittelbar mit der folgenden Formel
berechnet werden:
Pressure loss in fittings

verlinken auf IS
Widerstandsbeiwerte
Die Druckverluste sind vom Fittingstyp sowie
vom Strmungsverlauf im Fitting abhngig. Als
Berechnungsgrsse dient der sogenannte -Wert.
Hierbei bedeuten:
pFi
Druckverlust aller Fittings in bar
Summe aller Einzelverluste
Fliessgeschwindigkeit in m/s
Dichte des Frdermediums in kg/m

(1 g/cm = 1000 kg/m)
863
General
The installation manual is part of the product and an important module of the safety concept. Non-observance
could result in serious injury or death.
Read and observe the installation manual. The installation manual must be availablewith the product. Pass installation manual to further users of the product .
The iJOINT fittings should be transported and stored
inthe original packaging. The iJOINT fittings must be
protected from harmful influences such as dirt and especially heat and UV radiation. The technical data are
not binding. They neither constitute expressly warranted characteristics, nor guaranteed properties norguaranteed durability. They are subject to modification.
Cut the pipe square and deburr it. Mark the insertion
depth on the pipe (see below table: insert depth).
Attention! Do not disassemble the fitting!
NOTICE
Requirements for user and operator responsibility
For safety use and to guarantee the operation please note:
The iJOINT fittings must only be used according to the specifications.
Assembly and installation must be carried
out by qualified personnel.
Piping system must be installed by professionals, its functionality checked regularly.
Users and operators must be instructed on
a regular basis in all aspects of work safety and environmental protection especially
those pertaining to pressure-bearing piping
systems.
Users and operators must be familiar with
the operating instructions and must adhere
to the information contained therein.
Push the pipe into the fitting through the clamp ring until the first stop, meaning you have reached the gasket.
Lubrication and chamferingof pipe ends makes pipe insertion easier.
4
Intended use
The iJOINT fittings are intended exclusively for conveying media in the allowable pressure and temperature
range or for controlling flow in piping systems into which
they have been installed. Application: Water
Before proceeding with the assembly, check the presence of all components (clamp ring, gasket).
Coupling d 20 - 63 mm
Push the pipe through the gasket until you reach the
pipe stop of the fitting. Check the mark of the insertion
depth on the pipe for correct assembly.
5
1-2
Tighten the nut up tothe stop ring using the Georg Fischer tool or a wrench for fittings.
864
Insert depth
Tighten the nut until the stop ring using the Georg Fischer tool or a wrench for fittings.
Fittings
mm
20
51
25
56
32
63
40
73
50
84
63
99
Flanged fittings
Repair coupling d 20 - 110 mm

1
mm
Cut the pipe close to the damage.
50
102
63
118
Coupling d 75 - 110 mm
1
The maximum pipe gap (Z) is marked on the fitting body

and corresponds to the fitting diameter (see also table
A for minimum gap).Chamfer the pipes and grease the
seal if necessary.
3
Cut the pipe square and deburr it. Do not chamfer.

2
Mark the pipe as indicated above.

4
Push the pipe into the fitting until you have reached the
pipe stop.
Attention: for re-installations consider a minimum
gap of 10 mm between pipe end and pipe stop.
3
Insert the fitting on one side of the pipe.

5
Align the two pipes and slide the fitting till the marks on
the pipes.
865
Tighten the nuts until the stop ring using the Georg Fischer tool or a wrench for fittings.
Table A
Z [mm]
[mm]
min.
max.
20
20
25
25
32
32
40
40
50
50
63
63
75
20
75
90
20
90
110
20
110
866
Index
Page
Page
3/2 - 5/2-way pilot solenoid valve

MNL532
669
Air volume diagram ventilating and ventilating- and bleed valve
3/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV 94/95
664
Amorphous
3D CAD-Engineering
195
Amount of solvent cement
4-20 mA Sensor Type GK 15 variable

area flow meter
610
Amperometric Chlorine Electrode
711
4/2-way pilot solenoid valve PV5470
669
Amperometric Electronics
711
90 stop
354
Analytical Sensors and Electrodes
708
Angle seat check valve type 303/304
532
Angle seat valve type 300/301
510
306
Abbreviations
74
ABS cementing
259
ABS flexible section
200
ABS long-term behaviour
149
ABS material properties
32
ABS pipe bracket spacing
218
ABS pressure test
230
ABS pressure/temperature diagram
165
ABS standards
100
Accessories ball valve type 546
326
Accessories butterfly valve type

140/141/142
477
Accessories diaphragm valve
444
Accessories DIASTAR
444,664,674,682,
689
Application limits
589
23
248,253,257,260
418,436
34,36,39,40,43
93,94,95,96
92
AS interface
663,689
ASi
663,689
Ball valve Coloro
371
Ball valve for double containment systems
824
Ball valve type 107
378
Ball valve type 130-135
378
386
Accessories EA11
647
392
Accessories EA21/ EA31/ EA42
647
404
Accessories EA21/31/42
633
Ball valve type 322
368
Accessories of diaphragm valve hand

operated
421
Ball valve type 375
363
Ball valve type 523
356
Ball valve type 543
337
Ball valve type 546
318
Accessories PA11/ PA21

Accessories PA11/21
Accessories PA30 - PA90
Accessories variable area flow meter
Accredited testing laboratory
664,674,689
637
645,664,674,689
609,610
18
Accuracy of measurement of variable

area flow meter
605
Accurate reading of variable area flow

meter
609
Actuator interface per EN ISO 5211
620
Actuators
619
Basics
Batch Controllers
BCF Plus fusion jointing
46
718
282,292
Benefits GF valves
302
Blanking flanges
237
Bolts
238
Bracket spacing
218,219,220,221,
222,223,224
Adapter unions
243,244
Brandverhalten
33
Adaptor fittings
245
Buffer Solutions
729
Advice
17
867
Index
Page
Building Services
Bus communication
Butt fusion jointing
89
446
272,284,294
Page
Commissioning
232
Compensator
213
Compressed air
175
461
Compressed air pipelines: Pressure test
231
Butterfly valve type 037E/038E
478
Concrete
214
Butterfly valve type 037P/038P
499
472
Conductivity/Resistivity Tools
729
490
Configuration/Diagnostic Tools
727
Butterfly valve type 567/568
448
Connection diagram EA11
625
CAD
195
Connection diagram EA21/31/42
631
Calculation
170
435
Calibrated scales for variable area flow

meter
605
Control pressure diagram diaphragm

valve pneumatically actuated
444
Calibration
264
Control pressure diagrams DIASTAR

025
Calibration Kits
729
Carriers: Pipe bracket spacing
225
Cementing ABS
259
Cementing COOL-FIT
266
Cementing different pipe materials
270
Cementing PVC-C
252
Cementing PVC-U
247
Change in length
196
Characteristics pressure reducing valve

Characteristics pressure relief valve
Characteristics pressure retaining valve
550,552,553
566,567
558,559,560
Check valve type 561/562
524
83
Chemical resistance
110,307
Chemical resistance of springs of check

valve type 561/562
531
Chemical resistance of variable area flow

meter
606
Chlorine
706,711,712
Controllers
723,724,739,756
714,724
Conversion factor
315
Conversion tables
78
COOL-FIT
834
COOL-FIT ABS pipe bracket spacing
218
COOL-FIT Calibration
264
COOL-FIT cementing
266
COOL-FIT fixed point
847
COOL-FIT Insulation gap
267
Cooling
Correction tables for variable area flow
meter
82
607,608
current monitoring
652
Cutting length butt fusion systems
806
Cutting length socket systems
797
Cv-kv
315
cycle counter
652
d outside diameter
73
Delivery volumes
78
Choice of material
110
Design factor
171
Clamp
246
Design water jet suction pump
584
Coil design
518
Diaphragm gauge guard
568
Coil heating
518
Diaphragm valve
410
Combustible location
174
diaphragm valve
418
424
Combustion Behaviour
868
35,37,39,41,43
Index
Page
Page
Diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
424
Dimensions diaphragm valve type 515
414
diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
436,437
414
DIASTAR 025
444
414
DIASTAR Six
424
Dimensions DIASTAR 025
443
DIASTAR Sixteen
424
Dimensions DIASTAR Six
428
DIASTAR Ten
424
Dimensions DIASTAR Sixteen
428
DIASTAR TenPlus
424
Dimensions DIASTAR Ten
428
Differential pH/ORP Electrodes
720
Dimensions DIASTAR TenPlus
428
Digital positioner DSR500
674
Dimensions EA11
623
Dimensions angle seat check valve type

303/304
534
Dimensions EA21/31/42
628
Dimensions angle seat valve type

300/301
511
Dimensions float valve
592
479
Dimensions ball valve Coloro
373
Dimensions of butterfly valve type

037E/038E
Dimensions of diaphragm valve hand operated
414
Dimensions of variable area flow meter
603
Dimensions ball valve type 107
381,382,383
Dimensions ball valve type 130-135
381
388,389
Dimensions PA11/21
635
396
Dimensions PA30-90
639,640
406
Dimensions pressure reducing valve
547,548
369
Dimensions pressure relief valve
365
Dimensions pressure retaining valve
358
Dimensions solenoid valve
517
340,344,347
Dimensions throttle valve
594
320
Dimensions butterfly valve type

037/038/039
464

037E/038E
480,481,482,483

037P/038P
501,504
Dimensions butterfly valve type 039E
484,486,488
Dimensions butterfly valve type 039P
505

140/141/142
474,475,476,477

240/241/242
492,493,494,495,
496,497
Dimensions ventilating and ventilatingand bleed valve
565
556,557
587,588
Dimensions wafer check valve type 369
538
Dimensions water jet suction pump
573
Dimesions ball valve type 130-135
383,384,385
396,397,398,399
407
Direct-acting solenoid valves
520
DN
73
Double containment
779
Double containment jointing
786
256
Dimensions butterfly valve type 567/568
451,453
Dytex cementing PVC-U/PVC-C
Dimensions check valve type 561/562
526,528
Einsatzgrenzen
32
25
Dimensions diaphragm gauge guard
570
Elastomers
Dimensions diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
428
Electric actuator
616
414
623
869
Index
Page
Page
Electric Actuator EA21/31/42
627
Exploded view EA21/31/42
627
Electrical feedback
421
Exploded view hand lever
451
Electrical position indicator ER52/53
683
Exploded view of ball valve type 546
320
688
Exploded view PA11/21
634
Exploded view PA30 - PA90
638
Electrical Properties
33,35,37,39,41,43
Electrodes
723
Exploded view pressure reducing valve
545,546
Electrofusion
279
Exploded view pressure relief valve
563,564
Electromagnetic actuators
618
Exploded view pressure retaining valve
556
Exploded view throttle valve
594
Exploded view variable area flow meter
602
Exploded view ventilating valve and ventilating- and bleed valve
587
50,196
Exploded view wafer check valve type

369
537
Exploded view angle seat check valve

type 303/304
534
Exploded view water jet suction pump
572
Exploded view angle seat valve type

300/301
511
Explosive media
174
External Relay Modules
727
Exploded view ball valve Coloro
373
Facing
190
Exploded view ball valve type 107
380
Feedback
445
fieldbus
663
Fieldbus
689

Environment
Error message
Error message EA21/31/42
Expansion coefficient
Exploded view ball valve type 130-135

Exploded view ball valve type 185 - 188
626,632
16
654,663,681
632
380,381
388
395,396
406
Flammability
369
Flange standards
365
Flanges
358
Flat gasket
240
Exploded view ball valve type 543 horizontal
339
Flexible air connection diaphragm valve

442
Exploded view ball valve type 543 vertical
340
Flexible section
Exploded view butterfly valve type

037/038/039
464

037P/038P
501
Flow

567/568
450
flow characteristics
315
Exploded view check valve type 561/562
526
Flow characteristics angle seat valve

type 300/301
512
Exploded view diaphragm gauge guard
569
Flow characteristics ball valve Coloro
374
Exploded view diaphragm valve
413
456
Exploded view diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
428
Flow characteristics butterfly valve type

567/568
Flow characteristics diaphragm valve
417
Exploded view EA11
623
Flow characteristics diaphragm valve

434
870
Fixed point
Float valve
215,847
851
99
235,237
196,197,200,202,
204,206,208,210,
212
591
707,715,716,717,
718,719,730
Index
Page
Page
Flow characteristics DIASTAR 025
444
In-Line Rotors
Flow characteristics for linear ball valve

type 546
325
Inch system
Flow characteristics of ball valve type

375
366

523
361

543
350,351

546
325
Flow Monitors
718
Flow Sensors
735
Flow volumes in pipelines throttle valve
596
Flowmeter
715
Foaming ABS with PUR On-Site
849
Formazin Stock Kit
729
Function DA
438
Function FC
438
Function FO
438
310
Functions ball valve type 543
352,353
Gaskets
240
Geodetical pressure difference
186
Georg Fischer
13
GF Piping Systems
14
Glossary Measurement and Instrumentation
775
GRP standards
108
333
hand operated
410,413,416,417,
418

Inside diameter
Installation angle of diaphragm valve
717,734
73
410,425
180
418,439
Installation examples pressure retaining

valve
561
Installation recommendations for ball

valve type 322
370
Installation recommendations pipelines
213
Installationshinweise iJOINT
864
Insulating ABS
849
Insulation gap
267
459
Integrated fastening
418
Integrated fastening of diaphragm valve
440
Intrinsic Safety Barriers
727
IR Plus fusion jointing
271,281,291
ISO 14001
16
ISO 9001
15
Isometric paper
190,193
KLIP-IT pipe brackets
215
Klip-IT Pipe Clips
335
Klip-IT Spacer
336
kv 100 values angle seat check valve

type 303/304
535
kv 100 values ball valve Coloro
375
kv 100 values ball valve type 375
366
361
351,352
Handling
194
325
Heating element
647
kv 100 values butterfly valve type

037/038/039
468
kv 100 values butterfly valve type

567/568
456
Hemp
High Purity
243,244,245,861
43
Hose connections
246
kv 100 values check valve type 561/562
530
Hot-Tap
733
kv 100 values diaphragm valve
417
180
435
Hydrostatic Level Sensor
740
kv 100 values diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
Hydrostatic Pressure Sensor
725
kv 100 values DIASTAR 025
444
iJOINT
858
kv 100 values of angle seat valve type

300/301
512
871
Index
Page
Page
kv 100 values technical data of valves
315
Micro Electronics
kv 100 values wafer check valve type

369
540
Micro Flow Rotor Sensor
717
kv-Cv
315
Miners Rule
169
Mini Flow Rotor Sensor
717
Leak detection
785,811
85
Leak locating
811
Minimum pressure for valve opening

check valve type 562
531
Leak Test with gas
231
605
Length of bolts
238
Mode of operation variable area flow meter

Modification
232
Monitoring print with cycle time module
652
Level
Life Science
Limit contacts of variable area flow meter
Limit switches
lockable
Long-term behaviour
Loose Brackets
Magmeters
709,725
86
609
649,651,683,688
331
149,151,154,158,
160,163
215
716,717,735
Monitors
Mounting plate
MRS-values
Multi-Parameter
721,723,724
334,355
149
706,714
354
Multifunctional hand lever with ratchet

settings
331
326,329
669
375
309
Maintenance butterfly valve type 567/568
459
Nomogram
Maintenance check valve type 561/562
531
O-ring
240
Maintenance interval of diaphragm valve
442
Open collector output
758
Maintenance of ball valve type 322
370
530
367
Opening and closing conditions check

valve type 561/562
362
Opening conditions of ventilating valve
590
353
Opening pressure wafer check valve

type 369
539
326
Operating diagram DA
620,636
Maintenance of butterfly valve type

037/038/039
470
Operating diagram FC
620,636
Maintenance ventilating valve and ventilating- and bleed valve
590
Operating diagram FO
620,636
Maintenance wafer check valve type 369
541
Maintenance angle seat check valve

type 303/304
535
Maintenance ball valve Coloro
Market segments
83
Material selection
110
Maximum possible vacuum water jet

pump
582,584
182,183,184
Operating diagram PA30-90
643
Operating pressure
170
Operating torque
315
Operating torque angle seat valve type

300/301
512
Operating torque ball valve Coloro
375
Mechanical joints
234
Operating torque ball valve type 375
367
Metal Magmeters
717
361
Metalex
715
352
73
325
Metric system
872
Index
Page
Operating torque butterfly valve type
037/038/039
468
Operating torque butterfly valve type

567/568
456
Operating torque diaphragm valve
Page
Overview DIASTAR Six
426
Overview DIASTAR Sixteen
426
Overview DIASTAR Ten
426
417
Overview DIASTAR TenPlus
426
Operational characteristics pressure reducing valve
549
Overview float valve
591
Other criteria for the selection of materials
307
Output diagram water jet suction pump
574,575,576,577,
578,579,580,581,
582
Overview planning fundamentals
12
Overview pressure reducing valve
545
Overview pressure relief valve
563
Overview pressure retaining valve
555
Outside diameter
180
Overview solenoid valve
515
Overlap distance
190
Overview throttle valve
593
Overview actuators
314
Overview type 514
411
Overview angle seat check valve type

303/304
533
Overview type 515
411
Overview angle seat valve type 300/301
510
Overview type 517
411
Overview ball valve Coloro
371
Overview type 519
411
Overview ball valve type 107
379
Overview variable area flow meter
601
Overview ball valve type 130-135
379
Overview ventilating valve and ventilating- and bleed valve
586
387
Overview wafer check valve type 369
537
393
Overview water jet suction pump
572
405
Paddlewheel
715,730
368
Paddlewheel Flow Sensors
715,716
364
PE flexible section
202
357
PE long-term behaviour
151
338
PE material properties
319
PE pipe bracket spacing
219
Overview butterfly valve type

037/038/039
462
PE pressure/temperature diagram
165
Overview butterfly valve type 037E/038E
479
PE standards
102
Overview butterfly valve type 037P/038P
500

140/141/142
473

240/241/242
491
pH/ORP
Overview butterfly valve type 567/568
449
pH/ORP Electrodes
720
Overview check valve type 561/562
525
pH/ORP Preamplifiers and Connectors
721
Overview diaphragm gauge guard
569
pH/ORP Sensor Electronics
721
Overview diaphragm valve hand operated
411
pH/ORP System Tester
729
Overview diaphragm valve pneumatically

actuated
426
690
PE Welding
34
271,272,275,279
Performance diagram throttle valve
595
pH Electronics
712
720,721,722,729,
738,753
664,669
873
Index
Page
Pilot valve cluster PV 2000
Pipe bracket spacing
669
218,219,220,221,
222,223,224
Page
Pressure loss angle seat valve type
300/301
512
Pressure loss ball valve Coloro
374
Pipe brackets for cold isolating
216
Pressure loss ball valve type 375
366
Pipe preparation
264
361
Pipe support
215
349,350
Plaster
214
324
Plastic screw connections
243
455
Pneumatic Actuator
618
Pressure loss butterfly valve type

567/568
Pneumatic Actuator DIASTAR
646
Pneumatic Actuator PA11/ PA21
634
Pneumatic Actuators PA30 - PA90
638
442,444
Pressure loss calculation
185,186,863
Pressure loss check valve type 561/562
529
Pressure loss diaphragm valve
416
Pressure loss diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
434
Polyaddition
23
Pressure loss DIASTAR 025
443
Polycondensation
23
Pressure loss example
187
Polymerisation
23
Pressure loss of variable area flow meter
605
Pressure loss wafer check valve type

369
539
Pressure reducing valve
544
Pressure relief valve
562
Pressure retaining valve
554
656
Positioner
446
Positioner PE25
657
PP flexible section
PP long-term behaviour
PP material properties
PP pipe bracket spacing
204,206
154
36
220,221
PP pressure/temperature diagram
167
PP Schweissen
284
PP standards
102
PP Welding
281,282,287
PP-mounting plate diaphragm valve
418
PP-mounting plate of diaphragm valve
440
PP-steel-flange
237
PP-V flange
237
Pre-stress
213
Prefixes
75
Pressure
709,726
Pressure increase rate
227,815
Pressure levels
437
pressure loss
315
Pressure loss angle seat check valve

type 303/304
535
874
Pressure Sensor
725,740
Pressure test ABS
230
Pressure testing
226
Pressure testing Double containment
814
307
Pressure-temperature diagram COOLFIT ABS
845
Pressure-temperature diagram diaphragm valve
416
Pressure-temperature diagram diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
433
Pressure-temperature diagram DIASTAR

025
443
Pressure-temperature diagram for valves
315
Pressure-temperature diagram iJOINT
861
Pressure-temperature diagram of angle

seat check valve type 303/304
534
Pressure-temperature diagram of angle

seat valve type 300/301
511
Pressure-temperature diagram of ball

valve Coloro
374
Index
Page
valve type 322
369

valve type 375
366

valve type 523
Page
Product features of ball valve type 375
363
356
337
361
318

valve type 543
348
Product features of butterfly valve type

037/038/039
462

valve type 546
323

140/141/142
472
Pressure-temperature diagram of butterfly valve type 567/568
454

240/241/242
490
Pressure-temperature diagram of check

valve type 561/562
529
Product features of check valve type

561/562
524
Pressure-temperature diagram of variable area flow meter
605
Product features of diaphragm valve
410
Product features of float valve
591
Pressure-temperature diagram of ventilating and ventilating- and bleed valve
589
Product features of pressure retaining

valve
554
Pressure-temperature diagram of wafer

check valve type 369
539
Product features of solenoid valve
514
Product features of throttle valve
593
Product Features of variable area flow

meter
600
Pressure/temperature diagrams pipes

and fittings
165,167,168
Product features ball valve Coloro
371
Product Features ball valve type 230-235
392
Product features of ventilating valve and

ventilating- and bleed valve
585
Product Features butterfly valve type

037E/038E
478
Product features PA11/21
634

037P/038P
499
Product Features PA30-90
638
544

567/568
448
Product Features pressure reducing

valve
Product Features pressure relief valve
562
Product Features diaphragm gauge

guard
568
Product Features wafer check valve type

369
536
Product features diaphragm valve pneumatically actuated
425
Product Features water jet suction pump
571
Product features DIASTAR
425
Product library
195
Product Features EA11
623
Products and applications of valves
303
Product Features EA21/31/42
627
Profiled gasket
240
Product features of angle seat check

valve type 303/304
532
Product features of angle seat valve type

300/301
510
378
Product features of ball valve type

130-135
378

185-188
386

285-288
404
368
PROGEF
PTFE tape
167,282
243,244,245,861
PVC flanges
237
PVC-C cementing
252
PVC-C flexible section
210
PVC-C long-term behaviour
160
PVC-C material properties
40
PVC-C pipe bracket spacing
223
PVC-C pressure/temperature diagram
168
PVC-C standards
103
875
Index
Page
PVC-U cementing
247
PVC-U flexible section
208
PVC-U long-term behaviour
158
PVC-U material properties
38
PVC-U pipe bracket spacing
222
PVC-U pressure/temperature diagram
168
PVC-U standards
105
PVC-U/PVC-C Dytex cementing
256
PVDF flexible section
212
PVDF long-term behaviour
163
PVDF material properties
42
PVDF pipe bracket spacing
224
PVDF pressure/temperature diagram
168
PVDF standards
106
PVDF Welding
Quality
291,292,294,297
15
Page
Safety information ball valve type
285-288
406
Safety information butterfly valve type

037/038/039
464

037E/038E
479

037P/038P
500

140/141/142
473

240/241/242
491

567/568
450
Safety information diaphragm gauge

guard
569
Safety information diaphragm valve

427
Safety information EA11
623
Safety information EA21/31/42
627
Safety information for ball valve type 322
369
365
358
339
320

ball valve type 375
367

ball valve type 523
361

ball valve type 546
325
Relay
758
Safety information for diaphragm valve
413
Repair
232
601
Reset unit
647
Safety information for variable area flow

meter
running time monitoring
652
Safety information PA11/21
634
170
Safety information PA30-90
638
Safety factor
171
Safety information pressure reducing

valve
545
Safety information actuators
621
Safety information pressure relief valve
563
Safety information angle seat check

valve type 303/304
533
Safety information pressure retaining

valve
555
Safety information angle seat check

valve type 561/562
526
Safety information solenoid valve
516
Safety information angle seat valve type

300/301
511
Safety information valves
305
586
Safety information ball valve Coloro
372
Safety information ventilating valve and

ventilating- and bleed valve
Safety information ball valve type 107
379
Safety information wafer check valve

type 369
537

130-135
379
Safety information water jet pump
572

185-188
387
Salinity
724
Sanitary adapter
246

230-235
394
Screw connections plastic
243
876
Index
Page
SDR
170,180
SDR17 - SDR17.6
166
Seals
240
Selecting material
110
Semi-crystalline
23
Page
Technical characteristics ball valve type
130-135
385

230-235
400
Technical characteristics butterfly valve

type 037P/038P
508
Sensor Electronics
723
Technical characteristics butterfly valve

type 140/141/142
477
Servo-assisted solenoid valves
520
Technical characteristics solenoid valve
518,519,520
Setting the end stops PA30-90
643
Technical data EA11
625
Setting up the actuator EA11
626
Technical data EA21/31/42
630
Setting up the actuator EA21/31/42
632
Technical data iJOINT
861
636
Ship Building
87
Technical data PA11/21
SI
75
Technical data solenoid valve
521,522
Signal Converter
727
Technical facts PA30-90
641
Signet
705
459
Silicone-free
177
Technical features butterfly valve type

567/568
Snap ring
786
Technical features of angle seat check

valve type 303/304
535
Technical features of butterfly valve type

037/038/039
470
Social policies
Socket fusion jointing
16
275,287,297
Technical Reference
Solenoid pilot valve
445
Solenoid valve
514
Spacer
783
Temperature range of variable area flow

meter
Specification
109
Temperature Sensor
331
Tender invitation
Standards
Static evidence
Storage
Stroke limiter
98,108,306
785,818
194
620,636
Temperature
Test pressure
Testing adapter for RS232 interface
Testing laboratory
Thermal expansion coefficient
750,751,752,753
709,726
605
725,741
109
226,814
660
18
50,196
Thermoplastics
23
Thermosets
24
Stroke limiter / Emergency manual override
445
Stroke limiter/Emergency manual override for DIASTAR
682
Suited valves bodies diaphragm valve
424
Threads standards
100
Surface finishing
177
Threads: Types
235
Switching Power Supplies
727
Throttle valve
593
Tightening torque ball valve Coloro
375
Tightening torque butterfly valve type

037/038/039
469
Tightening torque butterfly valve type

567/568
456
Tightening torque flanges
235
SYGEF
Tangit Express
Tangit solvent cementing
107
43,293
249
247,252,259,266
385
Threaded fittings
245,861
877
Index
Page
Tightening torque for installing the butterfly valve type 037/038/039
470
Tightening torque wafer check valve type

369
541
Tightening torques
Tightening torques values check valve
type 561/562
Tools Cementing
Page
Type 2100
717
Type 2250
725
Type 230-235
392
315
Type 2350
725
530
Type 240
490
Type 241
490
Type 242
490
Type 2450
725
Type 2507
717
247,252,259
Torque Characteristics PA30-90
643
Torque in relation to control pressure

PA30-90
641
Totaliser
719
Type 2536
715
Training
17
Type 2537
715
245,861
Type 2540
716
714,719,722,724,
725,726
Type 2551
716
Type 2552
717
Type 2630
711
Type 2650
711
Type 2724-2726
720
Type 2750
721
Type 2750-7
712
Transition fittings
Transmitters
Transportation
194
TriClamp
246
Troubleshooting
622,632,654,681
Turbidity
707,712,729,730,
742
Turbines
717,734
Type 0250
727
Type 2759
729
Type 037
461
Type 2760
721
Type 037E
478
Type 2764-2767
720
Type 037P
499
Type 2774-2777
720
Type 038
461
Type 2819-2823
723
Type 038E
478
Type 2839-2842
723
Type 038P
499
Type 285-288
404
Type 039
461
Type 2850
723
Type 107
378
Type 300
510
Type 130-135
378
Type 301
510
Type 140
472
Type 303
532
Type 141
472
Type 304
532
Type 142
472
Type 322
368
Type 157
514
Type 335
600
Type 160/161
514
Type 350
600
Type 165
514
Type 3519
716
Type 166
514
Type 353
371
Type 185-188
386
Type 354
371
Type 2000
717
Type 355
371
878
Index
Page
Page
Type 369
536
Type 8860
724
Type 3719
721
Type 8900
714
Type 375
363
Type 9900
706,714
Type 4150
707,712,730,742
type DSR500
674
Type 4630
706,711
Type EA11
619,623
Type 5075
718
Type EA21
627
Type 5090
718
Type EA21/ EA31/ EA42
619
Type 514
410
Type EA31
627
Type 515
410,715
Type EA42
627
Type 517
410
Type ER52
683
Type 519
410
Type ER53
683
Type 523
356
Type ER55
688
Type 525
715
Type MNL532
669
Type 543
337
Type P20
571
Type 546
318
Type PA11
634
Type 5500
718
Type PA11/ PA21
619
Type 5600
718
Type PA21
634
Type 561
524
Type PA30 - PA90
Type 562
524
Type PE70
690
Type 567
448
type PV2000
669
Type 568
448
Type PV5470
669
Type 5700
721
Type PV94
664
Type 5800CR
723
Type PV95
664
Type 5900
724
Type Short version
600
type 591
585
Type Special version
600
type 595
585
type V140
591
Type 6400
727
Type V182
544
Type 7300
727
Type V185
562
Type 8058
727
Type V186
554
Type 8059
727
Type V251
593
Type 8150
719
type V251
593
Type 8250
725
Type V782
544
Type 8350
726
Type V786
554
Type 8450
726
Type V82
544
Type 8550
719
Type V85
562
Type 8630
711
Type V86
554
Type 8750
722
Type Z700
568
Type 8850
724
Type Z701
568
619,638
879
Index
Page
Unions
Units
Universal actuator interface according to
EN ISO 5211
UV resistance
310,312
243
75
401
36
Vacuum
176
Valve designs
309
Valves
302
Valves standards
98
600
Varnishing technology
177
Ventilating Valve and Ventilating- and

bleed valve
585
Vessel formula
170
Video Cementing
270
Viscosities
78
Wafer check valve type 369
536
Wall thickness
170
Water & Gas Utilities
88
Water hammer
173
Water jet suction pump
571
Water Treatment
84
Weight EA11
381,624
Weight EA21
388
Weight EA21/31/42
381,474
weight EA21/31/42
479
Weight EA21/31/42
629
Weight PA11/21
396,406,635
Weight PA30-90
396,492,501,640
Wet-Tap
733
Wet-Tap Assembly
721
Wet-Tap Valve
716
Wiring
Wiring diagrams
742,744,749
647,648,649,651,
653,656,658,685,
689
Working Pressure diaphragm gauge

guard
570
Working pressure of pressure reducing

valve
548
880
Page
Working Pressure water jet suction pump
Working principles and their symbols
z-dimension method
574
518,519
190
lll#e^e^c\#\Zdg\hX]Zg#Xdb

EaVcc^c\;jcYVbZciVah
NdjggZ[ZgZcXZ[dg/

8]Zb^XVaGZh^hiVcXZ
?d^ci^c\IZX]cdad\^Zh
EgZhhjgZ$IZbeZgVijgZ9^V\gVbh
GF Piping Systems worldwide at home

Our sales companies and representatives
ensure local customer support in over 100 countries.
The technical data are not binding. They neither constitute expressly
warranted characteristics nor guaranteed properties nor a guaranteed durability.
They are subject to modification. Our General Terms of Sale apply.
Argentina/Southern South America

Georg Fischer Central Plastics
Sudamrica S.R.L.
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Phone +54 (0) 11 4512 02 90
gfcentral.ps.ar@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/ar
Australia
George Fischer Pty Ltd.
Riverwood NSW 2210 Australia
Phone +61 (0) 2 9502 8000
australia.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.com.au
Austria
Georg Fischer
Rohrleitungssysteme GmbH
3130 Herzogenburg
Phone +43 (0) 2782 856 43 0
austria.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.at
Belgium/Luxembourg
Georg Fischer NV/SA
1070 Bruxelles/Brssel
Phone +32 (0) 2 556 40 20
be.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.be
Brazil
Georg Fischer Sist. de Tub. Ltda.
04795-100 So Paulo
Phone +55 (0) 11 5525 13 11
br.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/br
Canada
Georg Fischer Piping Systems Ltd.
Mississauga, ON L5T 2B2
Phone +1 (905) 670 8005
Fax +1 (905) 670 8513
ca.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.ca
GMST 5989/4 (9.06)

Made with MediaCockpit
CH-8201 Schaffhausen/Switzerland, 2013
Printed in Germany
www.gfps.com
Adding Quality to Peoples Lives
China
Georg Fischer P iping Systems Ltd.
Shanghai 201319
Phone +86 (0) 21 3899 3899
china.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.cn
Japan
Georg Fischer Ltd.
556-0011 Osaka,
Phone +81 (0) 6 6635 2691
jp.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.jp
Norway
Georg Fischer AS
1351 Rud
Phone +47 (0) 67 18 29 00
no.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.no
Denmark/Iceland
Georg Fischer A/S
2630 Taastrup
Phone +45 (0) 7022 1975
info.dk.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.dk
Korea
271-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-gu
Seongnam-si, Gyeonggi-do
Seoul 463-824
Phone +82 (0) 31 8017 1450
Fax
+82 (0) 31 8017 1454
kor.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.kr
Poland
Georg Fischer Sp. z o.o.
05-090 Sekocin Nowy
Phone +48 (0) 22 3131 050
poland.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.pl
Finland
Georg Fischer AB
01510 VANTAA
Phone +358 (0)9 586 58 25
Fax +358 (0)9 586 58 29
info.fi.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.fi
France
Georg Fischer SAS
95932 Roissy Charles de Gaulle Cedex
Phone +33 (0) 1 41 84 68 84
fr.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.fr
Germany
Georg Fischer GmbH
73095 Albershausen
Phone +49 (0) 7161 302 0
info.de.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.de
India
Georg Fischer Piping Systems Ltd.
400 076 Mumbai
Phone +91 (0) 22 4007 2001
branchoffice@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/in
Italy
Georg Fischer S.p.A.
20063 Cernusco S/N (MI)
Phone +39 02 921 86 1
it.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.it
Malaysia
George Fischer (M) Sdn. Bhd.
40460 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan
Phone +60 (0) 3 5122 5585
my.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/sg
Mexico/Northern Latin America
Georg Fischer S.A. de C.V.
Apodaca, Nuevo Leon
CP66636 Mexico
Phone +52 (81) 1340 8586
Fax +52 (81) 1522 8906
mx.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/mx
Middle East
Georg Fischer
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Phone +971 (0) 4 289 49 60
gcc.ps@georgfischer.com
www.export.georgfischer.com
Netherlands
Georg Fischer N.V.
8161 PA Epe
Phone +31 (0) 578 678 222
nl.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.nl
Romania
Georg Fischer
020257 Bucharest - Sector 2
Phone +40 (0) 21 230 53 80
ro.ps@georgfischer.com
Switzerland
Georg Fischer
Rohrleitungssysteme (Schweiz) AG
8201 Schaffhausen
Phone +41 (0) 52 631 3026
ch.ps@georgfischer.com
Taiwan
Georg Fischer Co., Ltd.
San Chung Dist., New Taipei City
Phone +886 (0) 2 8512 2822
Fax
+886 (0) 2 8512 2823
www.georgfischer.tw
United Kingdom/Ireland
George Fischer Sales Limited
Coventry, CV2 2ST
Phone +44 (0) 2476 535 535
uk.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.co.uk
Russia
Georg Fischer
Moscow 125047
Tel. +7 (0) 495 258 60 80
ru.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.ru
USA/Caribbean
Georg Fischer LLC
Tustin, CA 92780-7258
Phone +1 (714) 731 88 00
Toll Free 800 854 40 90
us.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfpiping.com
Singapore
George Fischer Pte Ltd.
11 Tampines Street 92, #04-01/07
528 872 Singapore
Phone +65 (0) 6747 06 11
sgp.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/sg
Vietnam
George Fischer Pte Ltd
136E Tran Vu, Ba Dinh District, Hanoi
Phone +84 (0) 4 3715 3290
Fax
+84 (0) 4 3715 3285
www.gfps.com/sg
Spain/Portugal
Georg Fischer S.A.
28046 Madrid
Phone +34 (0) 91 781 98 90
es.ps@georgfischer.com
www.gfps.com/es
Sweden
Georg Fischer AB
117 43 Stockholm
Phone +46 (0) 8 506 77 50 0
info.se.ps@georgfischer.com
www.georgfischer.se
International
Georg Fischer
8201 Schaffhausen/Switzerland
Phone +41 (0) 52 631 30 03
Fax +41 (0) 52 631 28 93
info.export@georgfischer.com

Planning Fundamentals For Industrial Piping Systems PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Planning Fundamentals For Industrial Piping Systems PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

www.piping.georgfischer.

GMST 5989/4 (9.06) 50.00

Planning Fundamentals Industry

Chemical Process Industry

Chemical processes that modify or

A chemical and/or physical

Water & Gas Utilities

We have what you need

wherever you are

Measurement and Control

Materials used for industrial pipe work

Basics, terms, explanations

Market segments in industrial systems

Approvals and standards for industrial applications

Specification of GF Piping Systems products

Selecting your pipe material - Chemical resistance

Design of industrial piping systems

Hydraulic calculation and pressure losses

Processing and installations

Introduction to fundamentals for valves

Fundamentals for ball valves, hand operated

Fundamentals for ball valves, electric actuated

Fundamentals for ball valves, pneumatic actuated

Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, hand operated

Fundamentals for diaphragm valves, pneumatic actuated

Fundamentals for butterfly valves, hand operated

Fundamentals for butterfly valves, electric actuated

Fundamentals for butterfly valves, pneumatic actuated

Fundamentals for angle seat valve, hand operated

Fundamentals for angle seat valves, pneumatic actuated

Fundamentals for solenoid valves

Fundamentals for check valves

One-stop shopping at GF Piping

Tailor-made solutions for any ap

Competent customer support

Fast delivery with our electronic

Fundamentals for special valves

Systems with over 40 000 prod

plication in which fluids or gases

worldwide with our own sales

inventory management system

ucts for diverse applications and

are conveyed, whether in building

and flexible production facilities.

Fundamentals for actuators

specialised markets: from pipes

technology, for water and gas

companies and representatives. We

Our logistics services are con

Fundamentals for measurement and control

and fittings to valves and measure

utilities or for industrial sectors.

tors in every country. They are our

sistently improved to satisfy our

key partners when it comes to the

customers high demands.

ment instruments and the respec

always work with the best distribu

fast availability of our products.

We have what you need

wherever you are

Measurement and Control